Gek 106310ah

GE
Grid Solutions
F650 Digital Bay Controller
Instruction Manual
Firmware version: 7.7x
EnerVista F650 Setup version: 8.1x
GE publication code: GEK-106310-AH
LISTED
*GEK-106310AH*
© 2018 GE Multilin Inc. All rights reserved.
GE Multilin F650 Feeder Protection System instruction manual for revision AH.
F650 Feeder Protection System, EnerVista, and EnerVista 650 family

Setup are registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc.
This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in
whole or in part without the permission of GE Multilin. The content of
this manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice.
Part number: GEK-106310-AH (March 2018)

GE
Grid Solutions
Table of Contents
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 Important procedures ..................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Cautions and warnings ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1.1 General cautions and warnings.................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1.2 Communication board withdrawal/insertion......................................................................1-3
1.1.1.3 Magnetic module terminals.........................................................................................................1-4
1.1.2 Inspection checklist............................................................................................................... 1-5
1.1.3 Safety instructions................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.1.3.1 General safety instructions..........................................................................................................1-8
1.1.3.2 Warning symbols..............................................................................................................................1-9
1.2 Overview .......................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.1 Introduction to the 650 family of relays....................................................................1-10
1.2.2 Hardware architecture ......................................................................................................1-10
1.2.2.1 F650 basic design.......................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.2.2 F650 signal type............................................................................................................................. 1-11
1.2.3 Communications architecture .......................................................................................1-11
1.3 EnerVista 650 Setup software ...................................................................... 1-14
1.3.1 System requirements.........................................................................................................1-14
1.3.2 Installation...............................................................................................................................1-14
1.3.3 Connecting EnerVista 650 Setup to the F650 .........................................................1-18
1.3.3.1 Configuring an Ethernet connection .................................................................................... 1-18
1.3.3.2 Configuring the RS232 connection....................................................................................... 1-18
1.4 650 hardware .................................................................................................. 1-19
1.4.1 Mounting & wiring................................................................................................................1-19
1.4.2 650 communications..........................................................................................................1-19
1.4.3 Faceplate display .................................................................................................................1-20
1.4.4 Maintenance...........................................................................................................................1-21
1.4.4.1 General maintenance .................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.4.4.2 In-service maintenance.............................................................................................................. 1-21
1.4.4.3 Out-of-service maintenance .................................................................................................... 1-21
1.4.4.4 Unscheduled maintenance....................................................................................................... 1-21
1.4.5 Storage......................................................................................................................................1-21
1.4.6 Repairs.......................................................................................................................................1-22
1.4.7 Disposal.....................................................................................................................................1-22
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-1

CHAPTER 1:
2 PRODUCT 2.1 F650 Overview................................................................................................... 2-1

DESCRIPTION 2.2 ANSI device numbers and functions ............................................................. 2-3
2.3 Other device functions .................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Order codes ....................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.1 CIO Modules ..............................................................................................................................2-7
2.5 Technical specifications .................................................................................. 2-8
2.5.1 Protection ...................................................................................................................................2-8
2.5.2 Control....................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.5.3 Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.5.4 User-programmable .......................................................................................................... 2-21
2.5.5 Metering ................................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.5.6 Inputs......................................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.5.7 Real time clock ...................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.5.8 Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.5.9 Control power supply ........................................................................................................ 2-24
2.5.10 Communications.................................................................................................................. 2-25
2.5.11 Optical ....................................................................................................................................... 2-27
2.5.12 Environmental ....................................................................................................................... 2-28
2.5.13 Packaging and weight....................................................................................................... 2-28
2.5.14 Type tests ................................................................................................................................ 2-28
2.5.15 Approvals.................................................................................................................................2-29
2.6 External connections .....................................................................................2-30
3 HARDWARE 3.1 Module description........................................................................................... 3-1

3.2 Power supply ..................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Mechanical description ................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.1 Mounting.....................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3.2 Rear description ......................................................................................................................3-7
3.4 Wiring ...............................................................................................................3-10
3.4.1 External connections.......................................................................................................... 3-10
3.4.2 Digital inputs with trip circuit supervision ................................................................ 3-10
3.4.3 Cable/fiber Ethernet board ............................................................................................. 3-11
3.5 Transceiver optical power budget vs. link length ....................................3-12
4 INTERFACES, 4.1 EnerVista 650 Setup software ........................................................................ 4-1

SETTINGS & ACTUAL 4.1.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................4-1
VALUES 4.1.1.1 Using settings files ........................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1.2 Viewing actual values..................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1.3 Viewing triggered events .............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.1.4 Firmware upgrades ......................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1.5 One line diagrams ............................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.2 Main screen ...............................................................................................................................4-3
4.1.3 Connect to the relay..............................................................................................................4-4
4.1.3.1 Computer Settings: .......................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.3.2 Communication Control: ............................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.3.3 Communication Optimization:.................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 File management menu ......................................................................................................4-6
4.1.4.1 File Management menu for firmware below v7.70 .......................................................... 4-6
4.1.4.1.1 Offline mode (firmware below v7.70).......................................................................... 4-6
4.1.4.1.2 Online mode (firmware below v7.70).......................................................................... 4-8
4.1.4.2 File Management menu for firmware v7.70 and above ..............................................4-10
4.1.4.2.1 Offline mode (firmware v7.70 and above)..............................................................4-10
4.1.4.2.2 Online mode (firmware v7.70 and above)..............................................................4-12
4.1.5 EnerVista 650 Setup menu.............................................................................................. 4-14
1-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

CHAPTER 1:
4.1.6 File menu..................................................................................................................................4-15

4.1.6.1 New ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.1.6.2 Open..................................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.1.6.3 Save/Save as.................................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.1.6.4 Close..................................................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.1.6.5 Configuration file converter...................................................................................................... 4-22
4.1.6.6 Properties .......................................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.1.6.7 Print options ..................................................................................................................................... 4-26
4.1.6.8 Compare to settings file.............................................................................................................. 4-27
4.1.6.9 PLC checksum calculation......................................................................................................... 4-27
4.1.6.10 Setting checksum calculation.................................................................................................. 4-28
4.1.7 Setpoint menu .......................................................................................................................4-28
4.1.7.1 Product setup menu..................................................................................................................... 4-29
4.1.7.2 Communication settings menu............................................................................................... 4-29
4.1.7.3 System setup menu...................................................................................................................... 4-30
4.1.7.4 Breaker menu .................................................................................................................................. 4-30
4.1.7.5 Protection elements menu ........................................................................................................ 4-30
4.1.7.6 Control elements menu .............................................................................................................. 4-33
4.1.7.7 Inputs/Outputs menu................................................................................................................... 4-34
4.1.7.8 Quick settings menu..................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.1.7.9 Relay configuration menu......................................................................................................... 4-35
4.1.7.10 Logic Configuration menu ......................................................................................................... 4-37
4.1.7.11 IEC 103 Configuration menu ................................................................................................... 4-38
4.1.7.12 Clock menu ....................................................................................................................................... 4-38
4.1.8 Actual values menu.............................................................................................................4-39
4.1.8.1 Front panel........................................................................................................................................ 4-39
4.1.8.2 Status................................................................................................................................................... 4-39
4.1.8.3 Metering ............................................................................................................................................. 4-41
4.1.8.4 Inputs/Outputs menu................................................................................................................... 4-42
4.1.8.5 Records menu ................................................................................................................................. 4-42
4.1.9 Operations menu..................................................................................................................4-43
4.1.10 Communications menu.....................................................................................................4-43
4.1.11 Security menu........................................................................................................................4-45
4.1.12 View menu...............................................................................................................................4-46
4.1.13 Help menu ...............................................................................................................................4-46
4.2 Human-machine interface (HMI) ................................................................ 4-47
4.2.1 Display.......................................................................................................................................4-48
4.2.2 LED indicators ........................................................................................................................4-49
4.2.3 Pushbuttons............................................................................................................................4-49
4.2.3.1 Keypad and shuttle key.............................................................................................................. 4-49
4.2.3.2 Command push button............................................................................................................... 4-51
4.2.4 Front port and cover sealing system..........................................................................4-51
4.2.5 Screen contrast.....................................................................................................................4-52
4.2.6 Text menus..............................................................................................................................4-52
4.2.6.1 Navigation......................................................................................................................................... 4-52
4.2.6.2 Text menu hierarchy .................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.2.6.3 Actual Values ................................................................................................................................... 4-53
4.2.6.4 Snapshot events............................................................................................................................. 4-55
4.2.6.5 Fault report ....................................................................................................................................... 4-56
4.2.6.6 View settings menu....................................................................................................................... 4-58
4.2.6.7 Change Settings ............................................................................................................................. 4-62
4.2.6.8 Date & time....................................................................................................................................... 4-63
4.2.6.9 Commands........................................................................................................................................ 4-64
4.2.6.10 Passwords ......................................................................................................................................... 4-65
4.2.6.11 Select main screen........................................................................................................................ 4-67
4.2.6.12 Select language.............................................................................................................................. 4-67
4.2.7 Graphic display .....................................................................................................................4-68
4.2.7.1 One-line diagram........................................................................................................................... 4-68
4.2.7.2 Metering screen.............................................................................................................................. 4-69
4.2.7.3 All events screen ............................................................................................................................ 4-70

CHAPTER 1:
4.2.7.4 New events screen ........................................................................................................................4-72

4.2.7.5 Alarms panel.....................................................................................................................................4-73
4.2.7.6 Input/output monitoring screen..............................................................................................4-74
4.3 Web server......................................................................................................4-77
4.3.1 Home ......................................................................................................................................... 4-77
4.3.2 Snapshot events................................................................................................................... 4-78
4.3.3 Control events ....................................................................................................................... 4-79
4.3.4 Alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 4-80
4.3.5 Oscillography......................................................................................................................... 4-81
4.3.6 Fault report ............................................................................................................................. 4-82
4.3.7 Data logger............................................................................................................................. 4-83
5 SETPOINTS 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1.1 Setpoint main menu ..............................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Product setup .................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Communication settings .....................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1.1 Serial ports........................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1.2 Network (Ethernet) ........................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1.3 MODBUS protocol............................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.2.1.4 DNP3 slave........................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.1.5 IEC 60870-5-104 ............................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.1.6 SNTP......................................................................................................................................................5-10
5.2.1.7 Procome protocol settings.........................................................................................................5-11
5.2.1.8 IEC 870-5-103 protocol settings..............................................................................................5-11
5.2.1.9 PTP IEEE 1588 protocol settings ..............................................................................................5-12
5.2.1.10 Routing ................................................................................................................................................5-14
5.2.2 MODBUS user map settings............................................................................................ 5-16
5.2.3 Fault report settings ........................................................................................................... 5-17
5.2.3.1 Fault report settings......................................................................................................................5-17
5.2.3.2 Fault report retrieval .....................................................................................................................5-19
5.2.4 Oscillography settings....................................................................................................... 5-20
5.2.4.1 Oscillography settings .................................................................................................................5-20
5.2.4.2 Oscillography states .....................................................................................................................5-21
5.2.4.3 Oscillography file retrieval .........................................................................................................5-22
5.2.5 Data logger settings ........................................................................................................... 5-22
5.2.5.1 Data logger SETTINGS ..................................................................................................................5-22
5.2.5.2 Data logger associated states .................................................................................................5-23
5.2.5.3 Data logger file format and retrieval.....................................................................................5-23
5.2.6 Demand settings.................................................................................................................. 5-24
5.2.6.1 Metering values and settings....................................................................................................5-24
5.2.6.2 Demand calculation methods..................................................................................................5-25
5.2.6.3 Demand function measurements and states...................................................................5-28
5.2.7 Time Settings.......................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.3 System setup ...................................................................................................5-32
5.3.1 General settings ................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.3.2 Miscellaneous settings ...................................................................................................... 5-32
5.3.2.1 Out of service setting...................................................................................................................5-32
5.3.2.2 Local - remote block setting......................................................................................................5-35
5.3.3 FlexCurve settings ............................................................................................................... 5-35
5.3.4 Breaker settings.................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.3.4.1 Breaker maintenance...................................................................................................................5-38
5.3.5 Switchgear settings ............................................................................................................ 5-39
5.4 Protection elements.......................................................................................5-40
5.4.1 Available settings and setting groups........................................................................ 5-40
5.4.1.1 Firmware 7.2x and below ...........................................................................................................5-40
5.4.1.1.1 Single setting groups .......................................................................................................5-41
5.4.1.1.2 Three setting groups ........................................................................................................5-41

CHAPTER 1:
5.4.1.2 Firmware 7.50 or above.............................................................................................................. 5-44

5.4.1.2.1 Single setting group ........................................................................................................ 5-45
5.4.1.2.2 Multiple setting groups................................................................................................... 5-46
5.4.2 Inverse time curve characteristics...............................................................................5-48
5.4.2.1 IEEE curves....................................................................................................................................... 5-49
5.4.2.2 IEC curves......................................................................................................................................... 5-50
5.4.2.3 IAC curves......................................................................................................................................... 5-52
5.4.2.4 ANSI curves....................................................................................................................................... 5-53
5.4.2.5 I2t curves .......................................................................................................................................... 5-55
5.4.2.6 Definite time curves...................................................................................................................... 5-55
5.4.2.7 Rectifier time curves..................................................................................................................... 5-55
5.4.2.8 User curves - FlexCurves A/B/C/D ......................................................................................... 5-56
5.4.3 Phase current.........................................................................................................................5-57
5.4.3.1 Phase time delayed overcurrent elements – phase high/low (51Ph/51pl)......... 5-57
5.4.3.2 Phase instantaneous overcurrent element- phase high/low (50PH/ 50PL) ....... 5-60
5.4.3.3 Phase directional element (67P).............................................................................................. 5-62
5.4.3.4 Thermal model element (49)..................................................................................................... 5-67
5.4.4 Neutral current......................................................................................................................5-68
5.4.4.1 Neutral time-delayed overcurrent element (51N).......................................................... 5-68
5.4.4.2 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element (50N) ........................................................ 5-68
5.4.4.3 Neutral directional element (67N) .......................................................................................... 5-70
5.4.4.4 Voltage polarization operation principles .......................................................................... 5-71
5.4.4.5 Current polarization operation principles: ......................................................................... 5-72
5.4.5 Ground current......................................................................................................................5-74
5.4.5.1 Ground time-delayed overcurrent element (51G).......................................................... 5-74
5.4.5.2 Ground instantaneous overcurrent element (50G)........................................................ 5-75
5.4.5.3 Ground directional element (67G) .......................................................................................... 5-75
5.4.6 Sensitive ground current .................................................................................................5-77
5.4.6.1 Sensitive ground time-delayed overcurrent element (51SG).................................... 5-77
5.4.6.2 Senstitive ground instantaneous overcurrent element (50SG) ................................ 5-78
5.4.6.3 Instantaneous overcurrent element for ungrounded systems (50IG) .................. 5-78
5.4.6.4 Sensitive ground directional element (67SG) .................................................................... 5-80
5.4.7 Negative sequence current.............................................................................................5-82
5.4.7.1 Negative sequence overcurrent element (46P) ............................................................... 5-82
5.4.8 Voltage elements..................................................................................................................5-83
5.4.8.1 Phase undervoltage element (27P)........................................................................................ 5-84
5.4.8.2 Phase overvoltage element (59P)........................................................................................... 5-85
5.4.8.3 Neutral overvoltage element high/low (59NH/59nl) ..................................................... 5-85
5.4.8.4 Negative sequence overvoltage element (47).................................................................. 5-86
5.4.8.5 Auxiliary overvoltage element (59X) ..................................................................................... 5-86
5.4.8.6 Auxiliary undervoltage element (27X) .................................................................................. 5-87
5.4.9 Power elements ....................................................................................................................5-87
5.4.9.1 Forward power element (32FP) ............................................................................................... 5-87
5.4.9.2 Directional power element (32) ............................................................................................... 5-88
5.4.9.3 Wattmetric ground fault (32N)................................................................................................. 5-93
5.4.10 Frequency elements ...........................................................................................................5-97
5.4.10.1 Underfrequency element (81U)............................................................................................... 5-97
5.4.10.2 Overfrequency element (81O).................................................................................................. 5-98
5.4.10.3 Frequency rate of change......................................................................................................... 5-98
5.4.11 Miscellaneous elements.................................................................................................5-100
5.4.11.1 Broken conductor ........................................................................................................................5-100
5.4.11.2 Locker rotor ....................................................................................................................................5-100
5.4.12 Load encroachment ........................................................................................................5-102
5.5 Control elements ..........................................................................................5-104
5.5.1 Setting group.......................................................................................................................5-104
5.5.2 Synchronism check element - synchrocheck (25).............................................5-105
5.5.2.1 Voltage inputs................................................................................................................................5-106
5.5.2.2 Application ......................................................................................................................................5-106
5.5.2.3 Settings.............................................................................................................................................5-107
5.5.2.4 Synchrocheck states..................................................................................................................5-108

CHAPTER 1:
5.5.2.5 Algorithm .........................................................................................................................................5-109

5.5.3 Autoreclose (79) ................................................................................................................. 5-113
5.5.3.1 Main autoreclose settings .......................................................................................................5-113
5.5.3.2 Autoreclose inputs ......................................................................................................................5-114
5.5.3.3 Autoreclose internal status.....................................................................................................5-115
5.5.3.4 General autoreclose staus diagram...................................................................................5-116
5.5.3.5 Logic for blocking protection functions during reclose cycle ................................5-117
5.5.4 Breaker failure element (50BF) .................................................................................. 5-119
5.5.5 VT fuse failure element (VTFF) .................................................................................... 5-122
5.5.5.1 Fuse failure algorithm ...............................................................................................................5-122
5.5.6 Pulse counters.................................................................................................................... 5-123
5.5.7 Analog comparators ....................................................................................................... 5-125
5.5.8 Maximum number of starts (66)................................................................................. 5-126
5.5.9 Digital counters.................................................................................................................. 5-128
5.5.10 Cold load pickup................................................................................................................ 5-130
5.5.11 60 CTS failure ...................................................................................................................... 5-131
5.5.12 Second harmonic inhibit................................................................................................ 5-133
5.6 Inputs/outputs ..............................................................................................5-136
5.6.1 Input/output placement ................................................................................................ 5-136
5.6.2 Control settings for input/output............................................................................... 5-137
5.6.3 Inputs...................................................................................................................................... 5-139
5.6.4 Outputs .................................................................................................................................. 5-141
5.6.4.1 Output status signals.................................................................................................................5-141
5.6.5 Circuit supervision and contact seal-in circuits ................................................. 5-143
5.6.5.1 Digital inputs..................................................................................................................................5-143
5.6.5.2 With trip circuit supervision ....................................................................................................5-143
5.6.5.3 Without supervision ...................................................................................................................5-145
5.6.5.4 With current supervision (with SEAL-IN) ...........................................................................5-145
5.6.5.5 With simple voltage supervision ..........................................................................................5-147
5.6.5.6 With double voltage supervision..........................................................................................5-150
5.6.5.7 With double voltage supervision and serial resistor in voltage monitors.........5-151
5.6.6 Analog board specific settings ................................................................................... 5-153
5.6.7 Virtual inputs ....................................................................................................................... 5-153
5.6.7.1 Virtual inputs writing..................................................................................................................5-153
5.6.7.2 Virtual inputs status monitoring:..........................................................................................5-153
5.6.8 Virtual outputs.................................................................................................................... 5-154
5.6.9 Virtual outputs latched................................................................................................... 5-154
5.7 Remote comms .............................................................................................5-155
5.8 Testing ............................................................................................................5-156
5.8.1 Force IO–input testing .................................................................................................... 5-156
5.8.2 Force IO–output testing ................................................................................................. 5-156
5.9 Relay configuration......................................................................................5-157
5.9.1 Outputs .................................................................................................................................. 5-157
5.9.2 LEDs......................................................................................................................................... 5-158
5.9.3 Operations............................................................................................................................ 5-159
5.9.3.1 Programming an operation....................................................................................................5-161
5.9.4 Protection elements......................................................................................................... 5-163
5.9.5 Control elements tab....................................................................................................... 5-164
5.9.6 Oscillography...................................................................................................................... 5-165
5.9.7 Control events .................................................................................................................... 5-166
5.9.8 Switchgear ........................................................................................................................... 5-168
5.9.9 HMI (human-machine interface)................................................................................ 5-170
5.9.10 Device display selection ................................................................................................ 5-175
5.9.10.1 Type of graphical display ........................................................................................................5-175

CHAPTER 1:
5.10 Logic configuration (PLC editor) ................................................................5-176

5.10.1 Theory of operation .........................................................................................................5-177
5.10.1.1 Description......................................................................................................................................5-177
5.10.1.2 Logic compilation ........................................................................................................................5-180
5.10.2 Main menu............................................................................................................................5-181
5.10.3 Configuration generation ..............................................................................................5-182
5.10.3.1 Create new project......................................................................................................................5-182
5.10.3.2 Create equation............................................................................................................................5-183
5.10.3.3 Add input to automation ..........................................................................................................5-183
5.10.3.4 Add output to automation.......................................................................................................5-183
5.10.3.5 Add digital operation..................................................................................................................5-183
5.10.3.6 Link inputs, outputs, and operations ..................................................................................5-183
5.10.3.7 Add library.......................................................................................................................................5-183
5.10.4 Library generation............................................................................................................5-183
5.10.4.1 Library example ...........................................................................................................................5-184
5.10.5 Application example ........................................................................................................5-185
5.11 IEC 61850 configuration..............................................................................5-186
5.12 Procome configuration................................................................................5-189
5.13 IEC 60870-5-103 configuration ..................................................................5-194
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 Front panel ........................................................................................................ 6-1

6.1.1 LEDs .............................................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Status.................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1 Operation bits status ............................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.2 Breaker status.......................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.3 Protection status .................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.3.1 Protection blocks...............................................................................................................................6-3
6.2.3.2 Phase current .....................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.3.3 Neutral current...................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.3.4 Ground current ..................................................................................................................................6-5
6.2.3.5 Sensitive ground current...............................................................................................................6-5
6.2.3.6 Negative sequence current..........................................................................................................6-6
6.2.3.7 Thermal model ...................................................................................................................................6-6
6.2.3.8 Voltage...................................................................................................................................................6-7
6.2.3.9 Power ....................................................................................................................................................6-8
6.2.4 Control element status ........................................................................................................ 6-9
6.2.4.1 Frequency ............................................................................................................................................6-9
6.2.4.2 Synchrocheck.................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.2.4.3 Autoreclose....................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.4.4 Breaker failure................................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.4.5 VT fuse failure .................................................................................................................................. 6-13
6.2.4.6 Broken conductor .......................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.2.4.7 Setting groups ................................................................................................................................. 6-13
6.2.4.8 Locked rotor ..................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.4.9 Pulse counters................................................................................................................................. 6-14
6.2.4.10 Analog comparators .................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.4.11 Load encroachment ..................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.2.4.12 Maximum number of starts ...................................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.4.13 Digital counters............................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.4.14 Cold load pickup............................................................................................................................. 6-17
6.2.4.15 60CTS failure .................................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.2.4.16 2nd HRMC Inhibit ........................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.2.5 Protection & control status summary ........................................................................6-18
6.2.6 Snapshot event summary................................................................................................6-18
6.2.7 MODBUS user map ..............................................................................................................6-18
6.2.8 Switchgear status ................................................................................................................6-19
6.2.9 Calibration status .................................................................................................................6-20
6.2.10 FlexCurves ...............................................................................................................................6-21

CHAPTER 1:
6.2.11 System info............................................................................................................................. 6-21

6.2.12 Record status......................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.2.12.1 Fault reports......................................................................................................................................6-24
6.2.12.2 Control events ..................................................................................................................................6-26
6.2.12.3 Oscillography ...................................................................................................................................6-26
6.2.12.4 Data logger........................................................................................................................................6-27
6.2.12.5 Demand ..............................................................................................................................................6-27
6.2.12.6 Energy..................................................................................................................................................6-27
6.2.12.7 Breaker maintenance...................................................................................................................6-28
6.2.13 IEEE 1588 precision time protocol (PTP) .................................................................... 6-29
6.2.14 Versions .................................................................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.15 Redundancy ........................................................................................................................... 6-31
6.3 Metering ...........................................................................................................6-32
6.3.1 Primary values ...................................................................................................................... 6-32
6.3.1.1 Current.................................................................................................................................................6-32
6.3.1.2 Voltage ................................................................................................................................................6-32
6.3.1.3 Power ...................................................................................................................................................6-33
6.3.1.4 Energy..................................................................................................................................................6-34
6.3.1.5 Demand ..............................................................................................................................................6-34
6.3.2 Secondary values ................................................................................................................ 6-35
6.3.2.1 Current.................................................................................................................................................6-35
6.3.2.2 Voltage ................................................................................................................................................6-35
6.3.2.3 Power ...................................................................................................................................................6-36
6.3.3 Phasor diagram .................................................................................................................... 6-37
6.3.4 Frequency ............................................................................................................................... 6-38
6.4 Inputs / outputs ..............................................................................................6-39
6.4.1 Contact inputs ....................................................................................................................... 6-39
6.4.2 Contact output status........................................................................................................ 6-39
6.4.3 Contact output operates.................................................................................................. 6-40
6.4.4 Contact output resets........................................................................................................ 6-41
6.4.5 I/O board status.................................................................................................................... 6-41
6.4.6 Virtual inputs .......................................................................................................................... 6-42
6.4.7 Virtual outputs....................................................................................................................... 6-42
6.4.8 Remote outputs .................................................................................................................... 6-42
6.4.9 Remote inputs ....................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.4.10 Analog inputs......................................................................................................................... 6-45
6.4.11 Virtual output latched........................................................................................................ 6-45
6.4.12 RIOs ............................................................................................................................................ 6-45
6.5 Records.............................................................................................................6-46
6.5.1 Event recorder....................................................................................................................... 6-46
6.5.1.1 All snapshot events........................................................................................................................6-46
6.5.1.2 New snapshot events...................................................................................................................6-47
6.5.1.3 Control events ..................................................................................................................................6-47
6.5.1.4 Alarm panel .......................................................................................................................................6-48
6.5.2 Waveform capture.............................................................................................................. 6-49
6.5.3 Fault report ............................................................................................................................. 6-50
6.5.4 Data logger............................................................................................................................. 6-51
7 IEC 61850 7.1 IEC 61850 Overview.......................................................................................... 7-1

PROTOCOL 7.2 IEC 61850 generic substation state event (GSSE) ....................................... 7-2
7.2.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.2 Remote communication......................................................................................................7-2
7.2.3 GSSE configuration ................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.4 Remote inputs ..........................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.5 Remote outputs .......................................................................................................................7-5
7.2.5.1 DNA bit pairs ....................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.5.2 UserSt bit pairs................................................................................................................................... 7-6

CHAPTER 1:
7.3 IEC 61850 profile for F650 ............................................................................... 7-7

7.3.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.3.1.1 Scope and outline of IEC 61850 .................................................................................................7-8
7.3.2 Communication profiles...................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.3 TCP connection timing......................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.4 MMS protocol ........................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.5 Peer-to-peer communication........................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.6 File services............................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.7 IEC 61850 conformance statements ..........................................................................7-10
7.3.7.1 Abbreviations and acronyms................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.7.2 Definitions of the ISO/OSI reference model....................................................................... 7-10
7.3.7.3 Conformance statements for F650 devices...................................................................... 7-11
7.3.7.3.1 PICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Commu-
nication Board 2 "B", "C", "D", "E" ............................................................................................. 7-12
nication Board 2 "H", "G", "K", "J","L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 2 .......................... 7-24
nication Board 2 option "H", "G", "K", "J", "L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 .......... 7-36
7.3.7.3.4 MICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Commu-
nication Board 2 option "B", "C", "D", "E" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 ........................... 7-41
nication Board 2 option "H", "G", "K", "J", "L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 2 .......... 7-65
nication Board 2 option "H", "G", "K", "J", "L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 ........7-125
7.3.7.3.7 TICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Commu-
nication Board 2 option "B", "C", "D", "E" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 .........................7-176
7.3.7.3.10 PIXIT for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Commu-
nication Board 2 option "B", "C", "D", "E" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 .........................7-185
7.4 IEC 61850 FUNCTIONALITY .........................................................................7-211
7.4.1 Client Connections............................................................................................................7-211
7.4.2 GOOSES..................................................................................................................................7-211
7.4.2.1 TRANSMISSION GOOSES ...........................................................................................................7-211
7.4.2.2 RECEPTION GOOSES ...................................................................................................................7-211
7.4.3 IEC 61850 Server................................................................................................................7-211
7.4.3.1 LOGICAL DEVICES AND REPORTS..........................................................................................7-211
7.5 IEC 61850 Status...........................................................................................7-212
7.5.1 GOOSES Status ...................................................................................................................7-212
7.5.2 IEC 61850 CID Status .......................................................................................................7-213
7.6 IEC 61850 Configurator ...............................................................................7-215
7.6.1 Overview................................................................................................................................7-215
7.6.2 Online/Offline operation modes.................................................................................7-215
7.6.3 IEC 61850 configurator details ...................................................................................7-216
7.6.3.1 IEC 61850 configurator interface. ........................................................................................7-217
7.6.3.1.1 Menu toolbar.....................................................................................................................7-217
7.6.3.1.2 Quick Menu Toolbar.......................................................................................................7-221
7.6.3.1.3 IEC 61850 IED Explorer Window...............................................................................7-226
7.6.3.2 Configuration of setting groups............................................................................................7-247

CHAPTER 1:
8 SECURITY 8.1 Adding users...................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 User rights ..................................................................................................................................8-1
8.2 Changing passwords ....................................................................................... 8-2
8.3 Enabling security .............................................................................................. 8-3
8.4 Logging into EnerVista 650 Setup ................................................................. 8-4
9 BOOTCODE AND 9.1 Firmware upgrade versions below 7.00. ...................................................... 9-1
FIRMWARE 9.1.1 Communication parameters .............................................................................................9-3
UPGRADE 9.1.2 Bootware version upgrade.................................................................................................9-4
9.1.2.1 Bootware upgrade........................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.3 Firmware version upgrade .............................................................................................. 9-12
9.1.3.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................9-12
9.1.3.2 Firmware upgrade .........................................................................................................................9-12
9.1.4 Summary of main steps ................................................................................................... 9-20
9.1.4.1 Boot code upgrade (*) ..................................................................................................................9-20
9.1.4.2 Firmware upgrade(*).....................................................................................................................9-21
9.2 Firmware upgrade version 7.00 or above..................................................9-22
9.2.1 Communication parameters .......................................................................................... 9-22
9.2.2 Firmware version upgrade .............................................................................................. 9-23
9.2.2.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................................9-23
9.2.2.2 Firmware upgrade .........................................................................................................................9-23
9.2.2.3 Order code upgrade process ....................................................................................................9-26
9.2.3 Summary of main firmware upgrade steps............................................................ 9-28
10 COMMISSIONING 10.1 Visual inspection.............................................................................................10-1

10.2 Out of service setting.....................................................................................10-2
10.3 General considerations, power supply network.......................................10-3
10.4 Isolation tests..................................................................................................10-4
10.5 Indicators .........................................................................................................10-5
10.6 Power supply testing .....................................................................................10-5
10.7 Communications.............................................................................................10-5
10.8 Verification of measurement .......................................................................10-6
10.8.1 Voltages.................................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.8.2 Phase currents ...................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.8.3 Active, reactive power, and COSJ metering ............................................................ 10-7
10.8.4 Frequency ............................................................................................................................... 10-8
10.9 Inputs and outputs.........................................................................................10-9
10.9.1 Digital inputs .......................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.9.2 Contact outputs................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.9.3 Circuit continuity supervision inputs ....................................................................... 10-10
10.9.4 Latching circuits ................................................................................................................ 10-10
10.10 Connections for testing protection elements ........................................10-11
10.11 Instantaneous overcurrent (50PH, 50PL, 50N, 50G, 50SG) ...................10-12
10.12 Time overcurrent (51PH, 51PL, 51N, 51G, 46) .........................................10-13
10.13 Directional elements (67P, 67N, 67G, 67SG)............................................10-14
10.13.1 67P element......................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.13.2 67N element........................................................................................................................ 10-14
10.13.3 67G element........................................................................................................................ 10-15
10.13.4 67SG element ..................................................................................................................... 10-15
10.14 Undervoltage elements (27P, 27X)............................................................10-17
10.14.1 27P element......................................................................................................................... 10-17
10.14.2 27X element ........................................................................................................................ 10-17
10.15 Overvoltage elements (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47).................................10-18

CHAPTER 1:
10.15.1 59P element.........................................................................................................................10-18

10.15.2 59X element.........................................................................................................................10-18
10.15.3 59NH and 59NL elements .............................................................................................10-19
10.15.4 47 element - Neg Seq OV ..............................................................................................10-19
10.16 Frequency elements (81O/81U).................................................................10-21
10.17 Recloser (79) .................................................................................................10-22
10.17.1 Reclosing cycle...................................................................................................................10-22
10.17.2 Recloser status ...................................................................................................................10-23
10.17.3 External reclose initiation ..............................................................................................10-23
10.18 Thermal image element (49)......................................................................10-24
11 APPLICATION 11.1 Example 1: Communication & protection settings................................... 11-1

EXAMPLES 11.1.1 Description ..............................................................................................................................11-1
11.1.2 Communicate with the relay ..........................................................................................11-1
11.1.3 Set the protection function..............................................................................................11-3
11.1.4 Test..............................................................................................................................................11-4
11.2 Example 2: TOC protection & reclosing settings...................................... 11-5
11.2.1 Description ..............................................................................................................................11-5
11.2.2 Communicate with the relay ..........................................................................................11-5
11.2.3 Set the protection function..............................................................................................11-5
11.2.4 Set the recloser .....................................................................................................................11-6
11.2.5 Set the synchrocheck.........................................................................................................11-6
11.3 Example 3: Set an operation......................................................................... 11-8
11.3.1 Description ..............................................................................................................................11-8
11.3.2 Procedure.................................................................................................................................11-8
11.3.3 Test...........................................................................................................................................11-10
12 FREQUENTLY ASKED 12.1 Communications ............................................................................................ 12-1

QUESTIONS 12.2 Protection ........................................................................................................ 12-3
12.3 Control & HMI .................................................................................................. 12-4
12.4 Relay configuration........................................................................................ 12-6
13 F650 13.1 Symptoms and recommended actions....................................................... 13-1

TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE
A LOGIC OPERANDS A.1 Operands - F650 - model FX - GX ..................................................................A-1
B MODBUS PROTOCOL B.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... B-1

B.2 MODBUS F650 ................................................................................................... B-1
B.2.1 Implemented MODBUS functionality ........................................................................... B-1
B.2.2 Physical layer .......................................................................................................................... B-2
B.2.2.1 Serial layer ...........................................................................................................................................B-2
B.2.2.2 B.2.2.2 TCP/IP layer ..........................................................................................................................B-2
B.2.3 Data link layer ......................................................................................................................... B-2
B.2.4 Generic reading ..................................................................................................................... B-3
B.2.5 Generic writing ....................................................................................................................... B-4
B.2.6 Function codes ....................................................................................................................... B-5
B.2.7 Exception and error responses ....................................................................................... B-6
B.3 Data type .......................................................................................................... B-6
B.4 MODBUS data ................................................................................................... B-7

CHAPTER 1:
B.4.1 Data management .............................................................................................................. B-7

B.4.2 Writing settings ...................................................................................................................... B-7
B.4.3 Snapshot events .................................................................................................................... B-7
B.4.4 Operations .............................................................................................................................B-10
B.4.5 Force outputs of IO boards ............................................................................................B-11
B.4.6 Control events ......................................................................................................................B-11
B.4.6.1 Event structure ............................................................................................................................... B-12
B.4.6.2 Event collection process............................................................................................................. B-13
B.4.6.3 Control events from the command line.............................................................................. B-14
B.4.6.4 Event status request (alarms) .................................................................................................. B-14
B.4.6.5 Acknowledging alarms ............................................................................................................... B-15
B.4.7 Write virtual inputs .............................................................................................................B-15
B.4.8 User map ................................................................................................................................B-15
B.4.9 Retrieve oscillography ......................................................................................................B-16
B.4.10 Time synchronization .......................................................................................................B-16
B.4.11 Queueing messages ..........................................................................................................B-17
B.4.12 Traces and troubleshooting ...........................................................................................B-17
B.4.13 MODBUS CRC generation function .............................................................................B-17
B.5 Memory map ..................................................................................................B-20
C DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL C.1 DNP 3.0 protocol settings ..............................................................................C-1

FOR F650 C.2 DNP 3.0 device profile document .................................................................C-5
C.3 Implementation table .....................................................................................C-8
C.4 Binary input points ........................................................................................C-11
C.5 DNP configuration examples .......................................................................C-13
C.5.1 Configuring DNP user map ............................................................................................C-13
C.5.2 Example of custom binary input points map ........................................................C-15
C.5.3 Multiple DNP 3.0 masters communication with F650 .......................................C-16
C.6 Binary output and control relay output ....................................................C-18
C.7 Binary counters ..............................................................................................C-19
C.8 Analog inputs .................................................................................................C-20
D IEC 60870-5-104 D.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... D-1

PROTOCOL D.2 Technical description ..................................................................................... D-1
D.3 Basic application functions .......................................................................... D-1
D.4 IEC 104 settings .............................................................................................. D-2
D.5 IEC 60870-5-104 point list ............................................................................. D-9
D.6 IEC 60870-5-104 Interoperability ................................................................ D-9
E PROCOME E.1 PROCOME protocol .......................................................................................... E-1

PROTOCOL
F IEC 60870-5-103 F.1 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol................................................................................ F-1

PROTOCOL F.1.1 Interoperability document ................................................................................................. F-1
F.1.2 Application level ......................................................................................................................F-6

CHAPTER 1:
G REDUNDANCY G.1 PRP and HSR Ethernet protocols ...................................................................G-1

PROTOCOL G.1.1 PRP ................................................................................................................................................G-4
G.1.2 HSR................................................................................................................................................G-5
G.2 RSTP (IEEE 802.1D-2004) and daisy chain ....................................................G-5
G.2.1 RSTP description .....................................................................................................................G-5
G.2.2 RSTP concepts .........................................................................................................................G-5
G.2.3 Use in meshed networks ....................................................................................................G-6
G.2.4 Daisy chain................................................................................................................................G-6
G.3 Link loss alert (LLA)...........................................................................................G-7
G.3.1 LLA.................................................................................................................................................G-7
G.3.2 LLA priority ................................................................................................................................G-7
G.3.3 LLA timeout ...............................................................................................................................G-8
H FACTORY DEFAULT
LOGIC
I FACTORY DEFAULT I.1 Factory default settings ................................................................................. I-1

CONFIGURATION I.2 Factory default configuration ...................................................................... I-27
J MISCELLANEOUS J.1 Warranty............................................................................................................ J-1

J.2 Revision History ............................................................................................... J-1
J.2.1 Major Updates ..........................................................................................................................J-2

CHAPTER 1:

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 1: Getting Started
GETTING STARTED
1.1 Important procedures

Use this chapter for initial setup of your new F650 Digital Bay Controller.
1.1.1 Cautions and warnings

To help ensure years of trouble free operation, please read through the following chapter for information to help guide you
through the initial installation procedures of your new relay.
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all warnings and cautions in this manual are reviewed to
help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/or downtime.
The following safety and equipment symbols are used in this document.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
NOTICE

1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED
1.1.1.1 General cautions and warnings

The following general safety precautions and warnings apply.
Ensure that all connections to the product are correct so as to avoid accidental risk of shock
WARNING and/or fire, for example such as can arise from high voltage connected to low voltage terminals.
Follow the requirements of this manual, including adequate wiring size and type, terminal torque settings, voltage,
current magnitudes applied, and adequate isolation/clearance in external wiring from high to low voltage circuits.
Use the device only for its intended purpose and application.
Ensure that all ground paths are uncompromised for safety purposes during device operation and service.
Ensure that the control power applied to the device, the AC current, and voltage input match the ratings specified on
the relay nameplate. Do not apply current or voltage in excess of the specified limits.
Only qualified personnel are to operate the device. Such personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all safety
cautions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country, regional, utility, and plant safety regulations.
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers, voltage
transformers, control, and test circuit terminals. Make sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to
attempting work on the device.
Hazardous voltages can exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current transformers. Make sure that
current transformer secondary circuits are shorted out before making or removing any connection to the current
transformer (CT) input terminals of the device.
For tests with secondary test equipment, ensure that no other sources of voltages or currents are connected to such
equipment and that trip and close commands to the circuit breakers or other switching apparatus are isolated,
unless this is required by the test procedure and is specified by appropriate utility/plant procedure.
When the device is used to control primary equipment, such as circuit breakers, isolators, and other switching
apparatus, all control circuits from the device to the primary equipment must be isolated while personnel are working
on or around this primary equipment to prevent any inadvertent command from this device.
Uses an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.
LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class 1M. Class 1M
WARNING devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used in Utility, Substation Industrial
NOTICE environments. Not to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.
Figure 1-1: Front view of F650 unit

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1.1.1.2 Communication board withdrawal/insertion
MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION SHALL ONLY BE PERFORMED BY DULY QUALIFIED

WARNING SERVICE PERSONNEL. FOR PERSONAL SECURITY PURPOSES, BEFORE ACCOMPLISHING ANY
WITHDRAWAL OR INSERTION OPERATION, THE RELAY MUST BE POWERED OFF AND ALL THE REAR
TERMINALS MUST BE POTENTIAL FREE. THE RELAY MUST BE GROUNDED USING THE REAR
GROUNDING SCREW.
The modular design of the relay allows for the withdrawal and insertion of the communication module.
Figure 1-2: Module withdrawal/insertion shows the location of communication modules on the rear part of the relay.
Qualified personnel must carry out the insertion or extraction of the communication boards only after disconnecting the
relay auxiliary voltage and ensuring that all the rear terminals are potential free.
Communication boards are installed on the rear of the unit, with upper port reserved for the asynchronous
communications board and CAN bus, and the lower port for the ETHERNET board. (The Ethernet module can be withdrawn
or inserted only in models with Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2: "B", "C", "D" or "E". For the remaining options,
Ethernet communications are included in the main CPU).
Before performing any of these actions, control power must be removed from the relay and all the rear terminals must
be potential free. A grounded antistatic wristband must be used when manipulating the module in order to avoid
electrostatic discharges that may cause damage to the electronic components.
WITHDRAWAL: Loosen the small screws that keep the faceplate in place and extract the module.
INSERTION: Insert the module and press it firmly in the case, until it is completely fixed. After this, bolt the faceplate
screws and replace the control power. Check that the relay is fully operative.
Figure 1-2: Module withdrawal/insertion
GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage to the relay, connected equipment or personnel whenever these
safety rules are not followed.

1.1.1.3 Magnetic module terminals

The transformer module for the VTs and CTs is already connected to a female connector screwed to the case. The current
inputs incorporate shorting bars, so that the module can be extracted without the need to short-circuit the currents
externally. It is very important, for safety reasons, not to change or switch the terminals for CTs and VTs.
Figure 1-3: Rear view of F650 unit
GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage of the relay, connected equipment or personnel whenever
these safety rules are not followed.

1.1.2 Inspection checklist

1. Unwrap the relay and inspect the relay for physical damage.
2. View the nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered and delivered. The model number is at the
top.
Figure 1-4: Identification label (A4454P6)
Please ensure that you received the following items with your relay:
• Mounting screws for fixing the relay to a cabinet
• GE EnerVista™ DVD (includes the EnerVista 650 Setup software and manuals in PDF format)
• Wiring diagram.
• Certificate of Compliance
For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin Home
Page: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin

Note: If there is any physical damage detected on the relay, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact
GE Grid Solutions, Multilin immediately:
EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICA:

GE Grid Solutions
Av. Pinoa, 10
48170 Zamudio, Vizcaya (SPAIN)
Tel.: (34) 94-485 88 54
Fax: (34) 94-485 88 38
E-mail: [email protected]
AMERICA, ASIA AND AUSTRALIA:

GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
North America toll-free: +1 800 547 8629
Tel.: +1 905 927 7070
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
E-mail: [email protected]
The information provided herein is not intended to cover all the details of the variations of the
CAUTION equipment, nor does it take into account the circumstances that may be present in your
installation, operating or maintenance activities.
Should you wish to receive additional information, or for any particular problem that cannot be solved by referring to the
information contained herein, please contact General Electric, Grid Solutions.

1.1.3 Safety instructions

The F650 ground screw shown in Figure 1-5: Location of grounding screw must be correctly grounded.
Figure 1-5: Location of grounding screw
Before communicating with the F650 through the front USB port, ensure that the computer's power supply is grounded.
When using a laptop, it is recommended that the power supply be disconnected. In many cases the laptop may not be
correctly grounded either due to the power supply or to the connector cables used.
GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage to the relay or connected equipment when this basic safety rule
is not followed.

1.1.3.1 General safety instructions
CAUTION
• Failure to practice safe working procedures is likely to damage the equipment, cause severe injury and/or death.
• The use of appropriate safety gloves, safety glasses and protective clothing are recommended during equipment
installation, maintenance and service of the equipment.
• All procedures must be strictly adhered to.
• Failure to observe and follow the instructions provided in the equipment manual(s) could cause irreversible
damage to the equipment and could lead to property damage, personal injury and/or death.
• Before attempting to use the equipment, it is important that all danger and caution indicators are reviewed.
• If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer or functions abnormally, proceed with
caution. Otherwise, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired and can result in Impaired
operation and injury.
• Beware of potential hazards, wear personal protective equipment and carefully inspect the work area for tools
and objects that may have been left inside the equipment.
• Caution: Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death.
• Test/Installation/Service personnel must be familiar with general device test practices, safety precautions and
follow standard ESD precautions to avoid personal injury or equipment damage.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or periodic maintenance on this device or associated circuits, isolate
or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources of electric power.
• Failure to shut equipment power off prior to removing the power connections could expose you to dangerous
voltages causing injury or death.
• All recommended equipment that should be grounded must have a reliable and un-compromised grounding path
for safety purposes, protection against electromagnetic interference and proper device operation.
• Equipment grounds should be bonded together and connected to the facility's main ground system for primary
power.
• Keep all ground leads as short as possible.
• At all times, equipment ground terminal must be grounded during device operation.
• While the equipment manual may suggest several safety and reliability steps, safety precautions must be used in
conjunction with the safety codes in force at your location.
• LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class 1M. Class 1M devices are
considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
• It is the responsibility of the user to check the equipment ratings and installation instructions prior to
commissioning, service.
• Use a lift system with side rails/bucket to reduce a fall hazard as opposed to other means when installing or
servicing.
• In addition to the safety precautions mentioned all electrical connections made must respect the applicable local
jurisdiction electrical code.
• Before working on CTs, they must be short circuited.
• Do not remove the voltage terminal blocks or disconnect the voltage input wires when the voltage phases are
live. The voltage inputs must be de-energized prior to any servicing.

1.1.3.2 Warning symbols

The following table explains the meaning of warning symbols that may appear on the device or in this manual.
The relevant circuit is direct current.

Le circuit principal est à courant continu.
The relevant circuit is alternating current.
Le circuit principal est à courant alternatif.
CAUTION: Refer to the documentation for important operating and maintenance
instructions. Failure to take or avoid a specified action can result in loss of data or
! physical damage.
AVERTISSEMENT: Se réferer à la documentation pour l'entretien et l'utilisation.
L'absence ou èviter de prender des mesures spècifiques peut entraîner des pertes
de données ou même causer des dommages physiques.
WARNING! Dangerous voltage constituting a risk of electric shock is present
within the unit. Failure to take or avoid a specified action can result in physical
harm to the user.
AVERTISSEMENT! Tensions dangereuses comportant un risque de choc électrique
sont presents dans l'equipement. L'absence ou èviter de prender des mesures
spècifiques peut causer des dommages physiques à l'utilisateur.
CAUTION: Class 1M Laser (IEC 60825-1 Safety of laser products)
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS.
AVERTISSEMENT: Laser de classe 1M (IEC60825-1) ÉVITER DE REGARDER
DIRECTEMENT LE DISPOSITIF QUI ÉMET LE LASER OPTIQUE.
CAUTION: Hot surface.
AVERTISSEMENT: Surface chaude.
Earth (Ground) Terminal.

Terminal de terre (masse).
Protective Earth Terminal.

Terminal de terre de protection.
Note: Read all instructions included in package before using your product. Additional safety information
Product Safety Supplement document available at; http://www.gegridsolutions.com/ProductSafety/

1.2 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED
1.2 Overview
1.2.1 Introduction to the 650 family of relays
The GE 650 family relay is a new generation of digital and multifunction equipment that is easily incorporated into
automation systems, at both the station and enterprise levels.
1.2.2 Hardware architecture
1.2.2.1 F650 basic design

The 650 is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The 650 family can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming
device, or another 650 device.
The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as
programming logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input Elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The 650 isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output Elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital signals that can be used to
control field devices.
Figure 1-6: 650 concept block diagram

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.2 OVERVIEW
1.2.2.2 F650 signal type

Contact Inputs/Outputs: Digital signals.
CT and VT inputs: Signals coming from the inputs of current and voltage transformers, used for monitoring the power
system signals.
Remote CAN Bus Inputs/Outputs: Signals associated with physical input/output contacts from a Remote Digital Input/
Output Module (CIO) connected to the 650 unit via the CAN Bus existing in options X, Y, Z, C and M for rear serial
communication board 1.
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. Control module that enables the unit configuration (assignment of inputs/outputs)
and the implementation of logic circuits.
Protection Elements: Relay protection elements, for example: Overcurrent, overvoltage, etc.
Remote inputs and outputs: Provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote devices using IEC
61850 GSSE and GOOSE messages.
Analog Inputs: Signals associated with transducers.
1.2.3 Communications architecture

A dedicated serial port is used for communication between the main processor and the human-machine interface. The
serial connection provides immunity against electromagnetic disturbances, thus increasing system safety.
All 650 units incorporate one RS232 (USB or DB9)serial port on the front of the relay. They can also incorporate up to two
additional communication modules on the rear.
One of the modules provides asynchronous serial communications, using different physical media (RS485 + cable remote
CAN bus I/O, plastic or glass fiber optic) depending on the selected model. The module incorporates two identical ports,
COM1 and COM2. The COM2 port is multiplexed with the front port. Additionally, this module may incorporate a port for
CAN bus communications, used for the connection to the remote CAN Bus I/O module. This feature increases the I/O
capability by up to 100% if the maximum number of I/Os available inside the relay is not enough for a specific application.
Available options are:
Table 1-1: Rear serial communications board 1
Board Code Functionality
F Without additional communication ports
A Two RS485 ports
P Two Plastic F.O. ports
G Two Glass F.O. ports
X Two RS485 ports and a CAN port for remote CAN bus Inputs/Outputs
Y Two Plastic F.O. ports and a CAN port for remote CAN bus Inputs/Outputs (fiber)
Z Two Glass F.O. ports and a CAN port for remote CAN bus Inputs/Outputs (fiber)
C CAN port for remote CAN Bus I/O (cable)
M RS485 + RS485 port and a CAN port for remote CAN Bus I/O (cable)
The other module provides Ethernet communications (ETH Port), using 10/100BaseTX (self-negotiable speed) or 100BaseFX
connectors, depending on the selected model. The most complete models include a double redundant 100BaseFX fiber
optic port. Redundancy is provided at the physical level, for options D and E; the unit incorporates internally duplicated
and independent controllers for extended system reliability and accessibility.

1.2 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED
Available Options are:

Table 1-2: REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2
Board Code Functionality
B One 10/100BaseTX port (self-negotiable speed)
C One 10/100BaseTX port and one 100BaseFX port.
D One 10/100BaseTX port and redundant 100BaseFX ports
E Redundant 10/100BaseTX ports
For options C and D you must select the active physical media, by means of an internal selector inside the module. The
factory configuration for this selection is the 10/100BaseTX port. For firmware versions 7.00 and above, the following
options are available:
G 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base TX

H 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base FX
J PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
K PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
L PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX + Redundant 100 Base TX
M PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX + Redundant 100 Base TX
Finally, internal communication with input and output modules is performed via an internal CAN Bus, independent of the
one used for remote CAN Bus I/Os. This provides increased communication speed, and acknowledgement of modules,
abnormalities, etc. As this is a serial port supporting a communications protocol, it provides immunity against external or
internal disturbances.

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.2 OVERVIEW
CAN COM1 COM2
ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS
CAN
REMOTE
ETH1 Redundancy I/O
(Optional)
SERIAL
MAIN PROCESSOR COM 1
DIGITAL SUPERVISION
ETH2 ETH3
COMMUNICATION
CONTROL I/O I/O
PROTECTION
CAN I/O
INTERNAL
SERIAL MULTIPLEXED
SERIAL COM 2
DSP COM H
MEASUREMENT
PROCESSOR
ANALOG
SERIAL
INPUTS COM2
COM H
CURENT AC
AND FRONT
VOLTAGE AC HMI HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE SERIAL
PORT
Figure 1-7: Communications architecture (B6816F2)

1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED
1.3 EnerVista 650 Setup software

1.3.1 System requirements
The relay front panel or the EnerVista 650 Setup software can be used to communicate with the relay. The software
interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the computer monitor can display more
information.
The minimum system requirements for the EnerVista 650 Setup software are as follows:
• Pentium® 4 (Core Duo recommended).
• Windows® XP with Service Pack 2 (Service Pack 3 recommended), Windows 7, or Windows 8
• 1 GB of RAM (2 GB recommended).
• 500 MB free hard drive space (1 GB recommended).
• 1024 x 768 display (1280 x 800 recommended).
• RS232 and USB serial and/or Ethernet port for communications with the relay.
1.3.2 Installation
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista 650 Setup are met (see previous section), obtain the
software from the GE EnerVista DVD, or download from: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/ as follows:
1. Insert the GE EnerVista DVD into the DVD drive of your computer.
2. Click Install Now and follow the installation instructions to install the complimentary EnerVista software.
3. When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4. Click IED Setup in the Launch Pad window.
Figure 1-8: Launchpad window

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE
5. Click Add Product and select the “F650 Bay Controller” relay from the Install Software window as shown below. Select
the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software release, or select “CD” if you do not have a web connection, then
click Add Now to list software items for the F650.
Figure 1-9: Add Product window
6. EnerVista Launchpad obtains the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, double-
click the installation program to install the EnerVista 650 Setup software.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the EnerVista 650 Setup software. When the Welcome window appears,
click Next to continue with the installation.
Figure 1-10: EnerVista 650 Setup installation

8. When the Choose Destination Location window is displayed, change the installation directory id needed by clicking
Change… and typing in the complete path name including the new directory name. Click Next to continue with the
installation.
Figure 1-11: EnerVista 650 Setup installation cont.
9. The default program group containing the application is added to as shown in the Selected Program Folder window.
Click Next to begin the installation process, and all the necessary program files are copied into the selected directory.
Figure 1-12: Select program folder

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.3 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE
10. To complete the installation, select the desired language for startup.
Figure 1-13: Language window
11. Click Finish to end the installation. The F650 device has been added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista
Launchpad window, as shown below.
Figure 1-14: EnerVista Launchpad

1.3.3 Connecting EnerVista 650 Setup to the F650

This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the EnerVista 650 Setup software. Refer to section 4.1 in this manual
for more information about the EnerVista 650 Setup software interface.
1.3.3.1 Configuring an Ethernet connection

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 650 Setup software (available from the GE EnerVista DVD or online
from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin (see previous section for installation instructions).
2. Go to Communication > Computer.
3. Select Control Type as MODBUS TCP/IP from the drop-down list. This option displays a number of interface
parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet communications.
4. Enter the relay IP address (from Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > Network > IP Address) in the
IP Address field in MODBUS TCP/IP SETUP.
5. Enter the relay ModBus address (from Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > ModBus Protocol >
ModBus Address COM1/COM2 setting) in the Unit Identifier (Slave Address) field.
6. Enter the ModBus port address (from Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > ModBus Protocol >
ModBus Port Number setting) in the ModBus Port field.
7. The Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Click ON to begin communicating.
1.3.3.2 Configuring the RS232 connection

Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable, or the USB Cable, is properly connected to the RS232port or the USB port
on the front panel of the relay.
1. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 650 Setup software (available from the GE EnerVista DVD or online
from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/index.htm (see previous section for installation instructions).
2. Go to Communication > Computer and enter the following data referred to communications:
3. Under Control Type select No Control Type from the drop-down list.
4. Enter the relay Slave Address (Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings > ModBus Protocol) in the Slave
Address field. The default value is 254.
5. Enter the physical communications parameters (Baud rate and parity settings) from the Setpoint > Product Setup >
Communication Settings > Serial Ports menu. Default values are 19200 for baud rate and none for parity.
6. The unit has now been configured for RS232 communications. Click ON to begin communicating.

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.4 650 HARDWARE
1.4 650 hardware

1.4.1 Mounting & wiring
Refer to Chapter 3. Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions.
1.4.2 650 communications

The Enervista 650 Setup software communicates with the relay via the faceplate USB port in hardware 04 (E in order code)
or RS232 port or the rear RS485/Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard “straight-
through” serial cable is used. The DB-9 male end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected
to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described in Figure 1-15: Relay- PC connection for RS232 front port. To communicate via
USB port a male A / male B USB shielded wire is needed
To communicate via the F650 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is
required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a “straight-through” serial cable. A shielded
twisted-pair (20, 22 or 24 AWG according to American standards; 0.25, 0.34 or 0.5 mm2 according to European standards)
connects the F485 converter to the F650 rear communication port.
To minimize communication errors that can be caused by external noise, a shielded twisted pair is recommended. In order
to avoid loops where external currents can flow, the cable shield must be grounded at one end only.
The converter box (-, +, GND) terminals are connected to the relay (SDA, SDB, GND) terminals respectively. For long
communications cables (longer than 1 km), the RS485 circuit must be terminated in an RC network (i.e. 120 ohm, 1 nF). This
circuit is shown in Figure 1-16: RS485 connection for 650 units, associated with the text Zt(*).
Figure 1-15: Relay- PC connection for RS232 front port

To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. For correct operation, polarity must
be respected, although a different polarity will not damage the unit. For instance, the relays must be connected with all
RS485 SDA terminals connected together, and all SDB terminals connected together. This may result in confusion, as the
RS485 standard refers to terminals “A” and “B”, although many devices use terminals labeled “+” and “-“.

1.4 650 HARDWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED
As a general rule, terminals labeled “A” should be connected to terminals “-“, and terminals “B” to “+”. The GND terminal
should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. Otherwise, it should be connected to the shield.
Each relay should also be daisy chained to the next relay in the system. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this
manner without exceeding driver capability; for larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also
possible to use commercially available repeaters to increase the number of relays on a single channel. Do not use other
connection configurations.
Lightening strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are provided internally. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
Figure 1-16: RS485 connection for 650 units

To communicate through the F650 rear Ethernet port from a PC, a crossover cable is required. If the connection is
performed through a hub or a switch, a direct Ethernet cable is required.
1.4.3 Faceplate display

All messages are displayed on a 20x4 character LCD display. An optional graphic display is also available. Messages are
displayed in different languages depending on the model and configuration settings.

CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED 1.4 650 HARDWARE
1.4.4 Maintenance
1.4.4.1 General maintenance

The F650 requires minimum maintenance once it is commissioned into service. F650 is a microprocessor based relay and
its characteristics do not change over time; as such no further functional tests are required. While the F650 performs
continual self-tests, it is recommended that maintenance be scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance
can involve in-service, out-of-service, or unscheduled maintenance.
If it is concluded that the relay or one of its modules is of concern, contact GE Multilin or one of its representative for
prompt service.
1.4.4.2 In-service maintenance

1. Visual verification of the analog value integrity such as voltage and current (in comparison to other devices in the
system).
2. Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages and LED indications.
3. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust or loose wires.
4. Event recorder file download with further event analysis.
1.4.4.3 Out-of-service maintenance

1. Check wiring connections for firmness.
2. Analog value (current, voltages, analog inputs) injection test and metering accuracy verification. Calibrated test
equipment is required.
3. Protection element setpoint verification (analog values injection or visual verification of setting file entries against
relay settings).
4. Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the
system functional testing.
5. Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion or dust.
6. Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized
NOTICE state once per year, for one hour continuously.
1.4.4.4 Unscheduled maintenance

Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance causing system interruption:
• View the event recorder and oscillography or fault report for correct operation of inputs,outputs and elements.
1.4.5 Storage
Store the unit indoors in a cool, dry place. If possible, store in the original packaging. Follow the storage temperature range
outlined in the Specifications.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized
NOTICE state once per year, for one hour continuously.

1.4 650 HARDWARE CHAPTER 1: GETTING STARTED
1.4.6 Repairs
The firmware and software can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for repair is as follows:
• Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in the first chapter.
• Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support Center.
• Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
• Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or styrofoam inserts or packaging peanuts to cushion
the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby you place the box in a larger box that contains at least 5 cm of
cushioning material.
• Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and RMA, to the factory.
• Fax a copy of the shipping information to the GE Grid Solutions service department. Customers are responsible for
shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the unit is under warranty.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
1.4.7 Disposal
The F650 is intended to be part of defective large-scale stationary industrial tools and large-scale fixed installations. This
product cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. For proper recycling return this
product to your supplier or a designated collection point. For more information go to www.recyclethis.info.

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 2: Product Description
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1 F650 Overview

F650 is a protection, control, monitoring, metering and registering unit, suitable for many different applications, such as
main protection for distribution feeders and transmission lines, as well as backup protection for transformers, busbars,
capacitor banks, etc.
Overvoltage and undervoltage protection, overfrequency and underfrequency protection, breaker failure protection,
directional current supervision fault diagnostics and programmable logic functions are provided.
This relay also provides phase, neutral, ground and sensitive ground, instantaneous and time overcurrent protection. The
time overcurrent function provides multiple curve shapes or FlexCurves™ for optimum co-ordination. Automatic reclosing,
synchrocheck, and line fault locator features are also provided.
Voltage, current, power, and energy metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are
available as true RMS magnitude, or as RMS magnitude of undamental frequency and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include a sequence of records. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an
IRIG-B signal or via SNTP, DNP or Modbus protocol over the Ethernet port. From firmware version 7.00 and above, IEEE
1588 time protocol is also available. Precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined throughout the
system. Oscillography data capture may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing
on a personal computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the
event of a system fault.
A faceplate RS232 or USB port may be used to connect to a PC for programming settings and monitoring actual values.
A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and
engineering personnel. All serial ports use the Modbus® RTU protocol. Optional communications modules include a
100BaseFX Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments.

2.1 F650 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Another option provides two 100BaseFX fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports IEC 61850, Modbus®/
TCP, DNP 3.0 and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser. The IEC 60870-5-104
protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. The Ethernet port also supports the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) and
High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) of IEC 62439-3 (clause 4 (PRP) and clause 5 (HSR)) for firmware version 7.00
and so on.
Rear port COM1 can be set to support IEC60870-5-103 protocol
The F650 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added:
Figure 2-1: FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.2 ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS
2.2 ANSI device numbers and functions
Main features available in the relay are gathered in tables below
DEVICE NUMBER PROTECTION & CONTROL FUNCTIONS

25 Synchronism Check
27/27X Bus/Line Undervoltage
32 Sensitive Directional Power
32FP Forward Power
32N Wattmetric Zero-Sequence Directional
46 Negative Sequence Time Overcurrent
47 Negative Sequence Voltage
48 Locked Rotor
49 Thermal Image - overload protection
50 BF Breaker Failure
50PH/PL Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (High/Low)
50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent
50G Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
50SG Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent for sensitive ground systems (measured from 5th current
transformer input)
50IG Isolated Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (measured from 5th current transformer input)
51N Neutral Time Overcurrent
51G Ground Time Overcurrent
51SG Sensitive Ground Time Overcurrent
51PH/V Voltage Restraint Phase Time Overcurrent
51PL/V Voltage Restraint Phase Time Overcurrent
59/59X Bus/Line Overvoltage
59NH/NL Neutral Overvoltage - High/Low
67P Phase Directional Overcurrent
67N Neutral Directional Overcurrent
67SG Sensitive Ground Directional Overcurrent
79 Autoreclose (Four shot recloser)
81 U/O Under/Over Frequency Broken Conductor Detection
N/A Load Encroachment
N/A Broken Conductor
81df/dt Frequency Rate of Change
VTFF VT Fuse Failure Detection
60CTS Failure Current Transformer Failure **
2nd Harmonic Second Harminic Inhibit **
Inhibit
** These functions are available for firmware version 7.50 or above

2.3 OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.3 Other device functions
INPUTS/OUTPUTS METERING COMMUNICATIONS

9 Analog Inputs: Metering Current for phases, ground and Front RS232 port, USB port in HMI
5 current inputs (3 for phases, 1 for ground, 1 sensitive ground inputs option E, Two rear RS485/fibre optic
for sensitive ground), ports, 10/100 TX and 100 FX Mbps
4 voltage inputs (3 for phases, 1 for busbar or Ethernet port
auxiliary voltage)
Digital Programmable Contact Inputs (up to Voltages phase to phase and phase to ModBus Communications RTU and
64) ground over TCP/IP
Digital Programmable Contact Outputs (up to Real, Reactive and Apparent Power and DNP Multimaster (3.0 Level 2)
16) Power Factor
32 Latched Virtual Inputs Three Phase Energy IEC 870-5-104
32 Self-Reset Virtual Inputs
Virtual Outputs (up to 512) Frequency ModBus User Map
Tripping and closing circuit supervision Sequence components of currents and IEC 61850 protocol
voltages
Remote Inputs/Outputs (GSSE and GOOSE Pulse Counters IEC 870-5-103 protocol
messages)
Analog Inputs (dCmA) Analog Comparators
*Digital Counters
*This functionality is available from firmware version 7.00
USER INTERFACE RECORDS OTHERS

Alphanumerical display (4x20) Data Logger Breaking Arcing Current (I2t)
Graphic display (16 x 40) Demand Breaker Control
User Programmable LEDs (15) Event Recorder (up to 128 configurable IRIG-B synchronization/SNTP/
events) IEEE 1588
User Programmable Keys (up to 5) Fault Locator and Fault report (up to 10 Logic Equations (PLC Editor)
records)
Easy menu management Oscillography (up to 20 records) Operations (up to 24)
Configurable One-Line Diagram (Graphic Snapshot Events (up to 1023)** Web Server Application
model only)
Phasor Diagram (available in EnerVista 650
Setup)
** Maximum number of events can vary depend on firmware version. See details in section 2.5.3.3

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 ORDER CODES
2.4 Order codes

F650 units are supplied as ½ 19” rack, 6 units high, containing the following modules: power supply, CPU, I/O modules,
communication modules. The required information to completely define an F650 model is shown on Table 2–1:
Table 2-1: Order codes
F650 - - - F - G - - - - - DESCRIPTION
B Basic Display (See Note 2)
M Graphic Display with Standard Symbols (See Note 2)
N Graphic Display with IEC symbols (See Note 2)
REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 1
F None
A Redundant RS485
P Redundant plastic fiber optic
G Redundant glass fiber optic
X Redundant RS485 + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
Y Redundant plastic fiber optic + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
Z Redundant glass fiber optic + fiber remote CAN bus I/O
C Cable Remote CAN bus I/O
M RS485 + cable Remote CAN bus I/O
REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2
B 10/100 Base TX
C 10/100 Base TX + 100 Base FX
D 10/100 Base TX + Redundant 100 Base FX
E Redundant 10/100 Base TX
G 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base TX (See Note 3)
H 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base FX (See Note 3)
J PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX (See Note 4)
K PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
(See note4)
L PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX*+ Redundant 100 Base TX (See Note 4)
M PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX*+ Redundant 100 Base TX
(See Note 4)
I/O BOARD IN SLOT F
1 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs
2 8 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs + 2 trip/close circuit supervision circuits
4 32 Digital Inputs
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs
I/O BOARD IN SLOT G
0 None
1 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs
4 32 Digital Inputs (see Note 1)
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs (See Note 1)
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
LO 24-48 Vdc (range 19.2 – 57.6)
110-250 Vdc (range 88 – 300).
HI
120-230 Vac (range 96 – 250)
LOR Redundant LO
HIR Redundant HI
LANGUAGE
- English/English
C Chinese/English (See Note 2 and Note 7)

2.4 ORDER CODES CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
F French/English
P Russian/English (See Note 2)
S Spanish/English
T Turkish/English
COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
- Modbus® RTU, TCP/IP, DNP 3.0 Level 2, IEC 60870-5-104
3 IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus® RTU,TCP/IP
IEC 61850 (See Note 10), Modbus® RTU and TCP/IP,DNP 3.0 Level 2,
6
IEC 60870-5-104
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
- Without Harsh (Chemical) Environment Conformal Coating
H Harsh (Chemical) Environment Conformal Coating
M Marine range: Lloyd’s Register (See Note 9)
ENHANCED DISPLAY
- Display with RS232 (See Note 8)
E Enhanced Display with USB
SPECIAL MODELS MOD001 (Abbreviation "+M1"): have 6A output contacts instead of 16A.
Notes:
(*) For firmware version 7.00 or above, Port E is only intended for maintenance purposes.
(1) Order code option F4 requires option G4 or G5. Order code option F5 requires option G5.
For example: F1G5 is a valid selection and F5G1 is an invalid selection.
(2) Display options with language selection:
Graphic display: available for English, French, Spanish and Chinese languages. For Chinese and Russian only IEC symbols option is
available (N in order code).
Basic display: available for all languages
(3) Advance functionalities Level I:
G, H: IEEE1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP), 61850 Edition 2.0. Digital counters. Max numbers of starts and Cold Load Pick-up
functionalities.
(4) Advance functionalities Level II:
J, L: Parallel Redundancy Port (PRP,) IEEE1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP), 61850 Edition 2.0. Digital counters, DFT, 16 Switchgear
mapped in IEC61850, 16 nodes CILO, mapping of BlkOpn and BlkCls leafs of XSWI nodes, Max numbers of starts and Cold Load Pick-
up functionalities.
K, M: High-Availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR), Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), Parallel Redundancy Port (PRP,) IEEE1588
Precision Time Protocol (PTC), 61850 Edition 2.0. Digital counters, DFT, 16 Switchgear mapped in IEC61850, 16 nodes CILO, mapping of
BlkOpn and BlkCls leafs of XSWI nodes, Max numbers of starts and Cold Load Pick-up functionalities.
(5) For special models requested, relay order code shall be codified as a standard model (Table 2-1) following by Abbreviation + MX where X
indicates the number of special model selected.
(6) For non-last released firmware version models requested, relay order code shall be codified as standard model (Table 2-1), following
by Abbreviation +VXXXXXBYYYYY where XXXXX is the firmware version requested and YYYYY is the corresponding bootcode version.
(7) Chinese Language: This language is not supported for Rear Ethernet Communication Board options: G, H, J, K, L or M
(8) Display option with RS232 is not available for F650 Models with Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 options from G to M or with
Environmental Protection option M
(9) Marine Range option M in the Environmental Protection section is only available with REAR ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 2
options G,H,J,K,L or M
(10) For F650 order codes with Communication Option 6, Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2, and firmware version 7.52 or above,
IEC 61850 Edition 1.0 is also available. The relay will work with IEC 61850 Edition 1.0 or Edition 2.0, depending on which ICD file has been
sent to the device. See section7.6.3.1.2: Quick Menu Toolbar on page 7–221.

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.4 ORDER CODES
2.4.1 CIO Modules

For applications requiring a high number of inputs and outputs, F650 units can be connected to a CIO module
(Remote CAN bus I/O module) for using up to 2 additional boards.
F650 units allow monitoring and configuring these I/O boards as if they were internal boards, located on slots F and G. In
this case, slots are labeled as H and J.
The required information to completely define a CIO Module is shown on Table 2–2:.
Table 2-2: Order code for CIO module
CIO H - J - - DESCRIPTION
I/O BOARD IN SLOT H
1 16 Digital inputs + 8 outputs
2 8 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs + 2 trip/close circuit supervision circuits
4 32 Digital Inputs
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs
I/O BOARD IN SLOT J
0 None
1 16 Digital inputs + 8 outputs
4 32 Digital Inputs (See Note 1)
5 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Analog Inputs (See Note 1)
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
LO 24-48 Vdc (range 19.2 – 57.6)
HI 110-250 Vdc (range 88 – 300)
120-230 Vac (range 96 – 250)
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
H Harsh (Chemical) Environment Conformal Coating
(1) The digit selected for option J must be equal or higher than the digit selected for option H for models including boards 4 and 5.
CIOH1J5**: is a valid selection
CIOH5J1**: is an invalid selection

2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.5 Technical specifications
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
2.5.1 Protection
Phase and Ground protection functions use currents measured through CT inputs for performing internal calculations,
while the Neutral protection functions use the current calculated from three phase currents.
The sensitive ground protection functions are usually used for applications where the neutral is completely isolated. These
functions use current measured though the sensitive ground current input. This CT has a sensitivity 10 time higher than
standard CT inputs (Connected to 1A and 5A CT) and its current withstand is lower.
PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (51PH/51PL)

Current Input: .............................................................................phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current:............................................................................for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Dropout Level:............................................................................97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................values at nominal frequency:
±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
±1.5% of the reading for higher values
Curve Shape: ..............................................................................IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC A/B/C/long-time inverse/short time inverse curve
IAC extremely/very/moderately inverse
ANSI extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial):.................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type: ..................................................................................instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
(whichever is greater)
Voltage Restraint: .....................................................................selectable by setting
Saturation Level: .......................................................................48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51G)

Current Input:............................................................................. phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
Rated Current:........................................................................... for connection to 1 or 5 A CTs
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 97% to 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ values at nominal frequency:
Curve Shape:.............................................................................. IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
Curve Multiplier (Time Dial): ................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Type: ................................................................................. instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
Saturation Level: ...................................................................... 48 times the pickup level
Snapshot Events: ..................................................................... selectable by setting
NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (51N)

Current Input:............................................................................. fundamental phasor (without harmonics) or RMS
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve

SENSITIVE GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (51SG)

Curve Shape: ..............................................................................IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
Reset Type: ..................................................................................instantaneous or time delayed, according to IEEE
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................Operate at > 1.03 times the pickup ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
Saturation Level: .......................................................................48 times the pickup level
PHASE AND GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50PH/50PL/50G)

Overreach: ...................................................................................< 2%
Trip Delay:....................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time: ............................................................................< 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms
at non-zero time delay: ±3% of operate time or 50 ms
NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50N)

Current Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Overreach: ...................................................................................< 2%
Operate Time: ............................................................................< 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms

SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50SG)

Overreach: .................................................................................. < 2%
Trip Delay: ................................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Delay: ............................................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms
ISOLATED GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50IG)

Current Input:............................................................................. fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Voltage Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor (without harmonics)
Current Pickup Level:.............................................................. 0.005 to 0.400 A in steps of 0.001 A
Voltage Pickup Level: ............................................................. 2 to 70 V in steps of 1 V
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ ±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 16.000 A
Time to Instantaneous: ......................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 50 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... at 0 ms time delay (no intentional delay): 50 ms
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE CURRENT (46)

±0.5% of the reading ±10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve

PHASE DIRECTIONAL (67P)

Directionality: .............................................................................forward and reverse selectable by setting
Polarizing:.....................................................................................quadrature voltage:
ABC seq: Phase A (VBC), Phase B (VCA), Phase C (VAB)
ACB seq: Phase A (VCB), Phase B (VAC), Phase C (VBA)
Polarizing Voltage Threshold:..............................................0 to 300 Vac in steps of 1 V
Current Sensitivity Threshold:.............................................50 mA
Characteristic Angle:...............................................................-90º to +90º in steps of 1º
Block Logic: .................................................................................permission or block selectable by setting
Angle Accuracy: ........................................................................±3º for I > 0.1 A and V > 5 Vac
Voltage Memory Time:...........................................................0.00 to 3.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time: ............................................................................< 30 ms, typically
GROUND DIRECTIONAL (67G)

Polarizing:.....................................................................................voltage, current, dual
Polarizing Voltage:....................................................................VN (measured or calculated, selected by setting)
Polarizing Current:....................................................................Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)
Operating Current:...................................................................Ig (measured from 4th current transformer)
Polarizing Current Threshold:..............................................0.005 A
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL (67N)

Polarizing:.....................................................................................voltage, current, dual
Polarizing Current:....................................................................Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)
Operating Current:...................................................................IN
Polarizing Current Threshold:..............................................0.005 A
SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL (67SG)

Polarizing:.....................................................................................voltage
Operating Current:...................................................................Isg (measured from 5th current transformer)

THERMAL MODEL (49)

Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... ±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Heating Constant:.................................................................... 3.0 to 600.0 minutes in steps of 0.1 minutes
Cooling Constant: .................................................................... 1.00 to 6.00 times the heating constant, in steps of 0.01
PHASE OVERVOLTAGE (59P)

Voltage Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor (without harmonics) of phase-to-phase voltages
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 2 to 30 V in steps of 1 V
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ ±1% of the reading from 10 to 208 V at nominal frequency
Logic: ............................................................................................. Any/Two/All phases logic, selectable by setting
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (27P)

Voltage Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor of phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltages (selectable by
setting)
Curve Shapes: ........................................................................... fixed time or inverse curves
Reset Type: ................................................................................. instantaneous
Minimum Voltage Threshold:.............................................. 0 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Logic: ............................................................................................. Any/Two/All phases logic, selectable by setting
Supervised by Breaker:......................................................... selectable by setting
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (59NH/59NL)

Voltage Input: ............................................................................ fundamental phasor of the neutral voltage

NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OVERVOLTAGE (47)

Voltage Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................3 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±1% of the reading from 10 to 208 V
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................±3.5% of operating time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (59X)

Voltage Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor of the auxiliary voltage
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±1% of the reading from 10 to 208 V at nominal frequency
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (27X)

Voltage Input: .............................................................................fundamental phasor of the auxiliary voltage
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±1% of the reading from 10 to 208 V at nominal frequency
Curve Shapes: ............................................................................fixed time or inverse curves
Reset Type: ..................................................................................instantaneous
UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Dropout Level:............................................................................pickup + 0.03 Hz
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±0.05 Hz of the reading from 30 to 80 Hz
Minimum Voltage Threshold: ..............................................10 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Time Delay Accuracy:............................................................0 to 7 cycles
Operate Time: ............................................................................typically 10 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change
OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
Pickup Level: ...............................................................................20.00 to 65.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Dropout Level:............................................................................pickup - 0.03 Hz
Level Accuracy: .........................................................................±0.05 Hz of the reading from 30.00 to 80.00 Hz
Minimum Voltage Threshold: ..............................................10 to 300 V in steps of 1 V
Time Delay Accuracy:............................................................0 to 7 cycles
Operate Time: ............................................................................typically 10 cycles at 0.1 Hz/s change

FORWARD POWER (32FP)

Current, Voltage: ...................................................................... fundamental phasor (primary values)
Number of Stages:................................................................... 2
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.00 to 10000.00 MW in steps of 0.01 MW
Level Accuracy for Primary Magnitudes: ..................... ±3% of complete range
Trip Delay (Two Stages):........................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... ±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
Block Time After Close: ......................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)

Current, Voltage: ...................................................................... fundamental phasor (primary values)
Number of Stages:................................................................... 2
Pickup Level:............................................................................... -10000.00 to 10000.00 MW (primary values) in steps of 0.01 MW
Characteristic Angle (Two Stages): .................................. 0.00º to 359.99º in steps of 0.01º
Accuracy for Primary Magnitudes: ................................. ±3% of complete range
Trip Delay (Two Stages):........................................................ 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Block Time After Close: ......................................................... 0.00 to 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 45 ms at 50 Hz, typically
WATTMETRIC ZERO-SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL (32N)

Measured Power:..................................................................... zero sequence
Number of Elements: ............................................................. 6 (3 high level, 3 low level)
Voltage Pickup Level VN:....................................................... 2.00 to 70.00 V in steps of 0.01 V
voltage calculated from phases if auxiliary voltage is set to Vx
voltage measured from the 4th voltage transformer if auxiliary voltage is set to VN
Level Accuracy for Voltage: ................................................ ±1% of reading from 10 to 208
Current Selection: .................................................................... IN (calculated from phases)
IG (measured from the 4th current transformer)
OC Pickup Level: ....................................................................... 0.005 to 0.400 A in steps of 0.001
Level Accuracy for Current: ................................................ ±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
OC Pickup Delay:...................................................................... 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Power Pickup Level: ................................................................ 0.01 to 4.50 W in steps of 0.01 W
Characteristic Angle (MTA):.................................................. 0º to 360º in steps of 1º
Power Pickup Delay:............................................................... 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Level Accuracy for Power:................................................... ±2.5% of the reading at -0.8 ≤ PF ≤ -1 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1
Curve Shapes: ........................................................................... Inverse Curve
Definite Time
FlexCurveTM A/B/C/D user curves
Tripping Time Accuracy: ...................................................... ±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms whichever is greater

2.5.2 Control
AUTORECLOSE (79)
Schemes: ......................................................................................three-pole tripping schemes
Number of Shots:......................................................................up to 4 reclose attempts before lockout
Dead Time: ..................................................................................independent dead time setting before each shot
adjustable between 0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s.
Reclaim Time:.............................................................................0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Condition Permisison:.............................................................selectable by setting
Hold Time:....................................................................................0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Reset Time:..................................................................................0.00 and 900.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Protection settings can be modified after each shot through PLC programming (block signals are available after each shot).
SYNCHROCHECK (25)
Dead/live Level for Line and Bus:......................................0.00 to 300.00 in steps of 0.01 V
Maximum Voltage Difference:............................................2.00 to 300.00 V in steps of 0.01 V
Maximum Angle Difference:................................................2.0º to 80.0º in steps of 0.1º
Maximum Frequency Slip:....................................................10 to 5000 mHz in steps of 10 mHz
Synchronism Time:..................................................................0.01 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Angle Accuracy: ........................................................................3º
Dead Source Function:...........................................................None
(DL-DB) Dead Line - Dead Bus
(LL-DB) Live Line-Dead Bus
(DL-LB) Dead Line – Live Bus
FUSE FAILURE
Algorithm based on positive sequence of voltage and current
Activation by V2/V1 ratio
BREAKER FAILURE (50BF)

Current Input: .............................................................................phasor (without harmonics)
Pickup Level for Supervision: ..............................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Pickup Level for High Level: .................................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Pickup Level for Low Level: ..................................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Pickup Level for Internal Arcing:........................................0.05 to 160.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................±3.5% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)

CT SUPERVISION FAILURE (60CTS)

Inputs:............................................................................................ Neutral Current I N
Neutral Voltage VN (from three-phase VTs)
Ground Current Ig
Sensitive Ground Current Isg
Time Delay:................................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
3IO Level Accuracy: ................................................................ ±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A (for ground)
±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 5.000 A (for sensitive ground
3VO Level Accuracy:............................................................... ±1% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Ground Current Accuracy: .................................................. ±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A
Sensitive Ground Current Accuracy: .............................. ±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 5.000 A
Operate Time:............................................................................ < 20 ms at 60 Hz
< 25 ms at 50 Hz
SECOND HARMONIC INHIBIT

Operating Parameter: ........................................................... current 2nd harmonic per phase or average
Pickup Level:............................................................................... 0.1 to 40.0% in steps of 0.1%
Dropout Level: ........................................................................... 98% of the pickup level
Level Accuracy: ........................................................................ 2% or 10 mA
Minimum Current:.................................................................... 0.05 to 15.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Time Delay:................................................................................. 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Time Delay Accuracy: ........................................................... ±3% of expected time or 1.5 cycles (whichever is greater)
Time Accuracy:......................................................................... 3% or 1.5 cycles
BROKEN CONDUCTOR (I2/I1)

Pickup Level:............................................................................... 20.0-100.0% (I2/I1 ratio) in steps of 0.1%
Operation Threshold: ............................................................. 0.000 to 1.000 A in steps of 0.001 A
Current Inhibition Level:........................................................ selectable by setting from 0.000 to 1.000 A in steps of 0.001 A
LOCKED ROTOR (48)

Full Load Current:..................................................................... 0.10 to 10.00 kA in steps of 0.01 kA
Pickup Level:............................................................................... .1.01 to 109.00 in steps of 0.01 x FLC
Level Accuracy for Primary Magnitudes: ..................... ±3% complete range
Operate Time:............................................................................ 20 ms at 3 x pickup at 50 Hz, typically
Timing Accuracy:..................................................................... ±3% of operate time or 50 ms (whichever is greater)
PULSE COUNTERS
Number of Pulse Counters Available:............................. up to 8
Multiplier Factor: ...................................................................... 0.000 to 65000.000 in steps of 0.001
Overload Factor: ...................................................................... 0 to 10000000 in steps of 1
Board Origin: .............................................................................. all available input/output boards in the device. See order code (F, G, H, J)
Input Origin:................................................................................ up to 32 (depending on board selection type)

ANALOG COMPARATORS
Analog Input: ..............................................................................any analog value in the device
Analog Maximum Threshold Value: .................................-100000.000 to 100000.000 in steps of 0.001
Analog Minimum Threshold Value: ..................................-100000.000 to 100000.000 in steps of 0.001
Analog Delay:.............................................................................0.00 to 900.00 in steps of 0.01
Analog Hysteresis: ...................................................................0.0 to 50.0 in steps of 0.1
Analog Direction (for activation inside or outside the
deadband: .............................................................................. IN or OUT
FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE

df/dt Trend:..................................................................................increasing, decreasing, bidirectional
df/dt Pickup Level:....................................................................0.10 to 10.00 Hz/s in steps of 0.01 Hz/s
df/dt Level Accuracy:..............................................................80 mHz/s or 3.5% (whichever is greater)
Overvoltage Supv. ....................................................................0.00 to 110.00% in steps of 0.01%
95% Settling Time for df/dt: ................................................< 24 cycles
Operate Time: ............................................................................at 2 x pickup: 12 cycles
at 3 x pickup: 8 cycles
at 5 x pickup: 6 cycles
Frequency Rate Min................................................................20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Frequency Rate Max...............................................................20.00 to 80.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Frequency Rate Delay: ..........................................................0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
LOAD ENCROACHMENT
Responds to: ...............................................................................positive sequence quantities
Minimum Voltage: ....................................................................0.00 to 300.00 V in steps of 0.01 V
Reach (sec.Ω): ...........................................................................0.02 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01 Ω
Impedance Accuracy: ............................................................±3%
Angle: .............................................................................................5 to 50º in steps of 1º
Angle Accuracy: ........................................................................±3%
Pickup Delay:..............................................................................0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Reset Delay: ................................................................................0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
Time Accuracy: .........................................................................±3.5% or ±60 ms, whichever is greater
Operate Time: ............................................................................< 60 ms at 50 Hz, typically
BREAKER SETTINGS
Number of Switchgear: .........................................................1 to 16 (selection of switchgear for breaker control)
Maximum KI2t: ...........................................................................0.00 to 9999.99 (kA)2s in steps of 0.01 (kA)2s
KI2t Integration Time: .............................................................0.03 to 0.25 s in steps of 0.01
Maximum Openings:...............................................................0 to 9999 in steps of 1
Maximum Openings in One Hour: ....................................1 to 60 in steps of 1
BREAKER MAINTENANCE
KI2t Breaker Counters for Phases A, B, C:......................0.00 to 9999.99 (kA)2s in steps of 0.01 (kA)2s
Breaker Opening Counters: .................................................0 to 9999 in steps of 1
Breaker Closing Counters:....................................................0 to 9999 in steps of 1
SWITCHGEAR
Switchgear: .................................................................................1 to 16 (configurable in Relay Configuration)
Snapshpt Events: ......................................................................selectable by setting (for each switchgear, in System Setup)
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF STARTS

Metering Algorithm:.................................................................fundamental
Tripping Time Accuracy: .......................................................±250 ms or 5% (whichever is greater)
Full Load Amps: .........................................................................0.5 to 10.0 A in steps of 0.1 A
Breaker Supervision: ...............................................................selectable by setting
Min. Stop Time: ..........................................................................0.0 to 900.0 s in steps of 0.1 s

Number of Starts:..................................................................... 0 to 10 in steps of 1

Time to Restart: ........................................................................ 0 to 100 minutes in steps of 1 minute
Reset Counter:........................................................................... selectable by setting
DIGITAL COUNTERS
Function: ...................................................................................... Disabled, Enabled
Name:............................................................................................ any 12 alphanumeric characters
Preset: ........................................................................................... -2147483648, 0, +2147483647
Compare: ..................................................................................... -2147483648, 0, +2147483647
COLD LOAD PICKUP

Cold Outage Time:................................................................... 1 to 1000 minutes in steps of 1 minute
Cold Blocking Time: ................................................................ 1 to 1000 s in steps of 1 s
2.5.3 Monitoring
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum Records: ................................................................. up to 20 oscillography records
Sampling Rate:.......................................................................... programmable to 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64 samples per power cycle
Capacity per record:............................................................... (27592 samples)/(number of oscillos x number of samples/cycle)
Maximum Records: ................................................................. up to 20 oscillography records
Trigger Position:........................................................................ 5% to 95% of total length
Trigger:.......................................................................................... programmable via PLC
Data:............................................................................................... 5 current channels and 4 voltage channels up to 16 digital channels programmable
through PLC
Data Storage:............................................................................. non-volatile (flash) memory without battery
Format: ......................................................................................... International Standard COMTRADE ASCII - IEEE C37.111-1999
Automatic Overwrite:............................................................. selectable by setting (oscillography records can be concatenated)
FAULT LOCATOR
Method: ........................................................................................ single-ended
Positive Sequence Module: ................................................. 0.01 to 250.00 Ohm in steps of 0.01 Ohms
Positive Sequence Angle: ..................................................... 25 to 90º in steps of 1º
Zero Sequence Module: ........................................................ 0.01 to 750.00 Ω in steps of 0.01 Ω
Zero Sequence Angle:............................................................ 25 to 90º in steps of 1º
Line Length: ................................................................................ 0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1 miles or km (as per line length setting)
Accuracy:..................................................................................... 5% (typically)
Show Fault on HMI:................................................................. selectable by setting
Maximum Records: ................................................................. up to 10 fault report records
Data:............................................................................................... Fault date and time, pre-fault currents and voltages, fault currents and voltages, fault
type, distance to the fault (fault location), line parameters, recloser and breaker status
information.
Data Storage:............................................................................. In non-volatile (flash) memory without battery available through communications In
volatile (RAM) memory available through HMI (if selectable by setting)
Format: ......................................................................................... text in ASCII format

SNAPSHOT EVENTS
Capacity*: ....................................................................................1023 scrolling events
Time-tag: ......................................................................................1 ms using an internal clock of 100 μs
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................1 ms (using IRIG-B synchronization)
Triggers: ........................................................................................any element pickup, dropout, or operation
digital input/output change of state
virtual inputs and control events
Data Storage: .............................................................................non-volatile (flash) memory without battery
*Note: For firmware 7.20, up to 511 snapshot events are available. For firmware below 7.20, up to 479 snapshot events are available.
CONTROL EVENTS
Capacity: ......................................................................................128 events programmable through PLC
Time-tag: ......................................................................................1 ms plus one PLC cycle using an internal clock of 100 μs. For digital inputs,
the debounce time of these digital inputs must be added.
Timing Accuracy: .....................................................................1 ms (with IRIG-B synchronization input)
Trigger: ..........................................................................................Any digital signal programmable through the PLC
Alarm:.............................................................................................Control events can be displayed as an alarm on the alarms panel. Information is
always available through Communications for all models and in the HMI for models
with a graphical display (M in order code).
Data Storage: .............................................................................non-volatile (flash) memory without battery
Control events are also displayed in the snapshot events recording
DEMAND
Channels:......................................................................................9
Parameters:.................................................................................Ia (kA RMS), Ib (kA RMS), Ic (kA RMS), Ig (kA RMS), Isg (kA RMS), I2 (kA), P (MW), Q (MVAr)
and S (MVA)
Current and Power Method: ................................................Thermal Exponential, Block Interval, Rolling Demand
Measurements:..........................................................................Each channel shows the present and maximum measured value, with date and time
for the maximum recorded value.
Samples: .......................................................................................5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes
Accuracy: .....................................................................................±2%
Trigger Input: ..............................................................................selectable by setting (operation mode selection for the block interval calculation
method)
DATA LOGGER
Number of Channels:..............................................................1 to 16
Parameters:.................................................................................any available analog actual value
Samples: .......................................................................................1 second, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes
Storage Capacity:.....................................................................fixed, 32768 measurements

2.5.4 User-programmable
PLC LOGIC
Programming language: ...................................................... The logical configuration is performed using graphical functions based on the IEC
61131-3 standard.
Lines of code*:........................................................................... 640 lines of code or 15360 bytes, whichever is greater (for versions < 7.00)
1000 total equations or 15360 bytes, whichever is greater (for versions >= 7.00)
(*) Note: Reserved Modbus memory space of PLC equations in text format is up to 15360 bytes. This space is shared with information
configured in Enervista at Setpoint > Relay Configuration. According to this, the number of PLC equations can be limited by values
configured on that section.
Supported operations: .......................................................... NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 8 inputs), AND (2 to 8 inputs), NOR (2 to 8 inputs),
NAND (2 to 8 inputs), Latch (Reset Dominant), Edge Detectors, Timers.
2 inputs default gates, from 3 to 8 inputs provided in library format.
Starting in version 7.20, analog operators are also available.
Libraries:....................................................................................... Logical gates fully programmable by user. Used to create user-programmable logic to
be distributed as a single object.
Inputs:............................................................................................ any logical variable, contact or virtual input
Number of Timers: .................................................................. 8 maximum in each logic scheme (provided in library format)
FLEXCURVES
Number: ....................................................................................... 4 (A through D)
Reset Points:............................................................................... 40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Operate Point: ........................................................................... 80 (0 through 20 of pickup)
Time Delay:................................................................................. 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 ms
Saturation Level: ...................................................................... 20 x the pickup level
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
Number: ....................................................................................... 15 configurable LEDs plus the Ready non-configurable LED
Programmability:..................................................................... any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Reset Mode:................................................................................ self-reset or latched.
The first 5 LEDs (red) are latched by hardware, usually configured for trip signals.
The following 10 LEDs (yellow and green) are self-reset but can be latched through PLC
configuration.
Reset Signal:............................................................................... The LEDs can be reset by hardware, pressing the front “esc” key for more than 3
seconds or using the LED reset signal through PLC configuration.
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
Number of Configurable Displays:.................................. 1: one line diagram fully configurable. In graphical displays only
Number of Fixed Displays: .................................................. 6: Metering (selectable between Primary and Secondary values), Snapshot Events (all
and new), Alarms, Inputs and Outputs screen with test functionality for inputs and
outputs. (In graphical displays only.)
Number of Selectable Displays:........................................ 2: Logotype, Metering, or both in scrolling mode can be selected as the default screen
in text display for all models (basic and mimic). The metering screen contains current
and voltages for phases and ground in primary or secondary values.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE FRONT KEYS

Number of Configurable Keys:.......................................... 5
Operation: ................................................................................... Drive PLC operands

2.5.5 Metering
CURRENT
Accuracy (at nominal frequency): ....................................±0.5% of the reading ± 10 mA from 0.05 to 10.00 A (for phases and ground)
±1.5% of the reading ± 1 mA from 0.005 to 5 A (for sensitive ground)
% of Load-to-trip Accuracy: ................................................±0.5% of full-scale
VOLTAGE
Accuracy: .....................................................................................±1% of reading from 10 to 208 V
REAL POWER (WATTS)

Accuracy: .....................................................................................±2.0% of the reading at -0.8 ≤ PF ≤ -1.0 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1.0
REACTIVE POWER (VARS)

Accuracy: .....................................................................................±2.0% of the reading at -0.2 ≤ PF ≤ 0.2
APPARENT POWER (VA)

Accuracy: .....................................................................................±2.0% of the reading
WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Range:............................................................................................-2147483 to +2147483 MWh
Parameters:.................................................................................3-phase only
Update Rate:...............................................................................100 ms
WAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)

Range:............................................................................................-2147483 to +2147483 MVArh
Parameters:.................................................................................3-phase only
Update Rate:...............................................................................100 ms
FREQUENCY
Accuracy: .....................................................................................+/- 0.03Hz

From 30 to 80 Hz
Note: Voltage input must be above 10 V to start measuring frequency
ANGLE
Accuracy: .....................................................................................±3º
2.5.6 Inputs
AC CURRENT INPUTS
CT Ratio:........................................................................................1.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1
Rated Currents:..........................................................................Appropriate for 1 or 5 A. F650 has universal range for CT (valid for 1 or 5 A to only one
terminal).
Relay Burden:.............................................................................< 8 mVA at 1 A
< 200 mVA at 5 A VA
Input Impedance: .....................................................................< 8 mOhm
Current Withstand: ..................................................................Continuous at 20 A
1 s at 500 A for phases and ground
1 s at 50 A for sensitive ground

AC VOLTAGE INPUTS
VT Ratio: ....................................................................................... 1.0 to 6000.0 in steps of 0.1
Rated Voltage:........................................................................... 275 Vac
Metering Range:....................................................................... From 2 to 275 Vac
Relay Burden: ............................................................................ 0.05 VA at 120 Vac (50 or 60 Hz)
Voltage Withstand:.................................................................. Continuous at 275 V to neutral
1 min/hr at 420 to neutral
VAC inputs do not need varistors, as the impulse test is applied to 100% of the transformers
CONTACT INPUTS
Input Activation Threshold: ................................................. 10 to 230 Vdc in steps of 1 V (selectable by setting)
Impedance:................................................................................. > 100 kΩ
Maximum Error:........................................................................ ±10% setting or ± 5 V
Load for Voltage Supervision Inputs:.............................. 2 mA + V/100 kΩ
Voltage Threshold for Voltage Supervision Inputs: .. < 10 V (fixed)
Debounce Time: ....................................................................... 1 to 50 ms in steps of 1 ms
Recognition Time:.................................................................... 2 ms (typical)
Timing Resolution:................................................................... 1 ms
For Activation Voltage Threshold and Debounce Time there is a single setting for all inputs in the same group (all inputs sharing the same
common).
Input Type and Delay Input Time are not grouped; there is a different setting for each input.
Input Type: .................................................................................. positive-edge/negative-edge/positive/negative
Delay Input Time: .................................................................... 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms (input signal time delay)
REMOTE INPUTS (IEC61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Number of Input Devices: .................................................... 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
Number f Remote Devices: ................................................. 16 (24 for relay version 7.00 and above)
Default States on Loss of Comms:................................... On, Off, Latest/on, Latest/off
ANALOG INPUTS
Input Impedance: .................................................................... 116Ω
Current Input (mADC):............................................................ 0 to -1; 0 to +1; -1 to +1; 0 to 5; 0 to 10; 0 to 20; 4 to 20 (programmable)
Conversion Range: .................................................................. -1 to +20 mA
Accuracy:..................................................................................... ±0.2% of full scale
Type: .............................................................................................. passive
IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude Modulation:.......................................................... DC SHIFT = demodulated input (no carrier)
Input Voltage: ............................................................................ TTL
Input Burden: ............................................................................. 1.5 mA
Input Impedance: .................................................................... 3.3 kΩ
Minimum Input Voltage: ....................................................... 2.4 V
Maximum Input Voltage: ...................................................... ± 24 V
Formats: ....................................................................................... B000 (*) B001, B002 and B003 (*
(*) Signal combinations recognized in accordance with IRIG Standard 200-95
Isolation:....................................................................................... 2 kV

2.5.7 Real time clock

Accuracy: .....................................................................................typical ±20 ppm
Backup Energy: .........................................................................more than 1 week
Note: For relay versions before 7.00, when the relay date and time is changed using any documented methods (Modbus, IRIG-B, SNTP,
Front Panel...) the relay acknowledges and updates the time instantly but it takes nearly 3 minutes for the new time to be permanently
stored in the Real Time Clock’s NVRAM.
2.5.8 Outputs
OUTPUTS
Single Contact Carry continuous:.....................................16 A
Make and Carry for 1 s: .........................................................60 A
Break at L/R of 40 ms: ............................................................0.3 A DC max. at 125 Vdc
0.25 A DC max. at 250 Vdc
Operate Time: ............................................................................< 8 ms
Contact Material: ......................................................................silver alloy
Output Logic Type, Output Type and Pulse Output Time are selectable by setting for each output
Output Logic Type:...................................................................positive/negative
Output Type: ...............................................................................normal/pulse/latch (selectable by setting for each output)
Pulse Output Time: ..................................................................0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms (applicable only to signals sent as pulse type)
Separate operate and reset signals can be configured by any digital signal programmable through the PLC
Contact Outputs (F31-F33, F34-F36) for board type
2 (supervision) in slot F: ....................................................The current seal-in circuit is used for verifying the current condition in a circuit during
the time that the tripping contact remains closed. If the current in the tripping circuit is
maintained over 500 mA, the function is sealed independently of the status of the
function that caused the trip.
REMOTE OUTPUTS (IEC61850 GSSE/GOOSE)

Standard Output Points: ........................................................32
User Output Points:..................................................................32
2.5.9 Control power supply
LOW RANGE (LO) ALL RANGES

Nominal DC Voltage: 24 to 48 V Power Consumption: Typical =25 VA, Maximum =45 VA
Min/Max DC Voltage 19.2 / 57.6 V Display backlight auto power-off mode after 15 minutes without touching
Note: Low range is DC only any key, in order to ensure long life and
minimum consumption
Voltage Loss hold-up time:(*) 24 Vdc 30 ms
48 Vdc 100 ms
(*) These figures have been calculated for models with the following characteristic:
- IEC Symbols Graphic display
- Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2: PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX+ Redundant 100 Base FX
- F and G I/O Board:
Slot F: 8 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs + 2 Trip / Close circuit supervision circuits
Slot G: 16 Digital Inputs + 8 Outputs
HIGH RANGE (HI) INTERNAL FUSE

Nominal DC Voltage: 110 to 250 V V: 250 VAC
Min/Max DC Voltage 88 / 300 V I: 2.5A
Nominal AC Voltage: 120 to 230 V Size: 5 x 20 mm
Min/Max AC Voltage: 102 / 250 V Type: Quick acting (F)
Voltage Loss Hold-up Time: 200 ms typical UL listed miniature Fuse
100 ms worst case

2.5.10 Communications
FRONT PORT:
Front port: COM2
Type: RS232/USB
Baud Rate: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 baud
Default Baud Rate: 19200 baud
Protocols: ModBus® RTU/DNP 3.0
Typical Distance: 3m
Isolation: 2 kV
ASYNCHRONOUS REAR PORTS:
None or two rear ports (depending on model): COM1, COM2 (rear COM2 multiplexed with front port)
Type (depending on model):
Model F None
Model A Redundant RS485
Model X Redundant RS485 + fiber CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model P Redundant 1mm-plastic F.O.
Model Y Redundant 1mm-plastic F.O. + fiber CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model G Redundant multimode glass F.O.
Model Z Redundant multimode glass F.O. + fiber CAN for inputs/outputs module
Model C Cable CAN port for I/O module
Model M Cable CAN port for I/O module (cable) + RS485 (ModBus RTU)
Optic Features for ST Connector Devices: Wave length: 1300nm
Fiber type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Baud Rate: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 baud
Default Baud Rate: 19200 baud
Protocols: ModBus® RTU/DNP 3.0/IEC103
Typical Distance: 1200 m for cooper cable, 1000 m for glass fiber and 50 m for plastic fiber
Isolation: 2 kV
CAN PORT:
Rear Port: CAN port in models C, M, X, Y, Z for asynchronous rear ports
Type: Multimode glass F.O. port with ST connectors
Fiber Wavelength: 820 nm
Fiber Type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Maximum Recommended Length: 300 m for cooper cable and glass fiber
Isolation: 2 kV
ETHERNET PORT:
Rear port:
For models B, C, D, E: ETH_1/ ETH_2
For models G, H, J, K, L, M: ETH_E/ ETH_A/ ETH_B
Type (depending on model):
Model B: 10/100BaseTX self-negotiable
Model C: 10/100BaseTX + 100Base FX
Model D: 10/100BaseTX + redundant 100BaseFX (Physical media redundancy)
Model E: Redundant 10/100BaseTX self-negotiable ports
Model G: 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base TX
Model H: 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + 100 Base FX
Model J: PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
Model K: PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base FX
Model L: PRP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base TX
Model M: PRP, HSR, RSTP, 1588, 10/100 Base TX* + Redundant 100 Base TX
(*) Note: This Ethernet port (ETH_E) is intended only for maintenance purposes.

10/100BaseTX: RJ45 connector

100BaseFX: ST connectors
Wavelength: 1300 nm
Fiber Type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Protocols: ModBus® TCP/IP
DNP over TCP/IP and UDP/IP
IEC 61850
http, ftp, tftp (allow the use of a standard Internet browser)
Typical Distance: 1000 m for glass fiber and 150 m for RJ45 cable
Response Time to ModBus Commands: 10 ms typical
Isolation: 2 kV
In Models C and D, the 10/100BaseTX port is selected by an internal switch (see 3.3.3)
Two witness LEDs for transmission and reception are included
SIMPLE NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL (SNTP)
Clock Synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (PTP)
PTP IEEE Std 1588 2008 (version 2)
Power Profile (PP) per IEEE Standard PC37.238TM2011
Slave-only ordinary clock
Peer delay measurement mechanism
PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP) (IEC 62439-3 CLAUSE 4, 2012)
Ethernet ports: A and B
Networks: 10/100 MB Ethernet
PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (HSR) (IEC 62439-3 CLAUSE 5, 2012)
RAPID SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL (RSTP) (IEC 62439-1, IEEE 801.2D)

2.5.11 Optical
Wave length: 1300 nm
Connector types: ST package style
Fiber type: multimode 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm
Transmitter characteristics
Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit Reference
Output Optical Power BOL -19 -14 dBm avg. Note 1
62.5/125 μm, NA = 0.275 Fiber EOL -20
Output Optical Power BOL -22.5 -14 dBm avg. Note 1
50/125 μm, NA = 0.275 Fiber EOL -23.5
Output Optical Power at -45 dBm avg. Note 2
Logic “0” State
Receiver characteristics
Parameter Min. Typ. Max. Unit Reference
Input Optical Power -33.9 -31 dBm avg. Note 3
Minimum at Window Edge
Input Optical Power -35.2 -31.8 dBm avg. Note 4
Minimum at Eye Center
Input Optical Power Maximum -14 dBm avg. Note 3
Notes:
1. These optical power values are measured with the following conditions:
The Beginning of Live (BOL) to the End of Life (EOL) optical power degradation is typically 1.5 dB per industry
convention for long wavelength LEDs. The actual degradation observed in Agilent’s 1300nm LED products is <1 dB, as
specified in this data sheet.
Over the specified operating voltage and temperature ranges.
With HALT Line State, (12.5 MHz square-wave), input signal.
At the end of one meter of noted optical fiber with cladding modes removed.
The average power value can be converted to a peak power value by adding 3 dB. Higher output optical power
transmitters are available on special request.
2. The transmitter provides compliance with the need for Transmit_Disable commands from the FDDI SMT layer by
providing an Output Optical Power level of <-45 dBm average in response to a logic “0” input. This specification
applies to either 62.5/125 μm or 50/125 μm fiber cables.
3. This specification is intended to indicate the performance of the receiver section of the transceiver when Input Optical
Power signal characteristics are present per the following definitions. The Input Optical Power dynamic range from
the minimum level (with a window time-width) to the maximum level is the range over which the receiver is
guaranteed to provide output data with a Bit Error Ratio (BER) better than or equal to 2.5e-10.
At the Beginning of Life (BOL).
Over the specified operating temperature and voltage ranges.
4. All conditions for Note 3 apply except that the measurement is made at the center of the symbol with no window
time-width.

2.5.12 Environmental
Operating Temperature:........................................................- 10°C to + 60°C
Storage Temperature: ............................................................- 40°C to + 85°C
Humidity (non-condensing):................................................95%
Altitude: .........................................................................................up to 2000 m
Class of Equipment:.................................................................I
Equipment Mobility: ................................................................fixed
Overvoltage Category:...........................................................III
Pollution Degree:.......................................................................2
2.5.13 Packaging and weight

Net Weight:..................................................................................5 kg
Packaged Weight: ....................................................................6 kg
Package Dimensions: .............................................................30 x 40 x 40 cm (D x W x H)
2.5.14 Type tests
CATEGORY STANDARD CLASS TEST

Dielectric voltage withstand IEC60255-27 2 KV / 2.3 KV
SAFETY Impulse voltage withstand IEC60255-27 5 KV
Insulation resistance IEC60255-27 500 V (test level)
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-2 Level 4
Radiated RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-3 Level 3
Electrical Fast Transient Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-4 Zone A
Surge Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-5 Zone A
Conducted RF Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-6 Level 3
Power magnetic Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-8 Level 5
EMC Power Frequency Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-16 Zone A
Damped Oscillatory Wave Immunity IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-18 2.5 KV Common Mode 1 KV Diff. Mode
Voltage Dips & Interruptions IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-11/ Levels based on IEC61000-4-11 &
IEC61000-4-29 IEC61000-4-29
Ripple on DC IEC60255-26/IEC61000-4-17 15% Rated DC value
Radiated & Conducted Emissions IEC60255-26/CISPR11/ Class A
CISPR22
Sinusoidal Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
Shock & Bump IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
MECHANICAL
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 2
Enclosure Protection IEC60255-27/IEC60529 IP52
Cold test (storage) IEC60068-2-1 -40˚C 16 hrs
Cold test (operational) IEC60068-2-1 -20˚C 16 hrs
Dry heat test (storage) IEC60068-2-2 85˚C 16 hrs
CLIMATIC Dry heat test (operational) IEC60068-2-2 60˚C 16 hrs
Change of Temperature IEC60068-2-14 5 cycles (3+3) -20˚C/60˚C
Damp Heat Humidity Cyclic IEC60068-2-30 6 cycles (12+12) 55˚C @ 93% R.H.
Damp Heat steady state IEC60068-2-78 40˚C @ 93% R.H.
Type test report available upon request.

F650 has been designed to comply with the highest existing requirements. More specifically, UNIPEDE recommendations
for high voltage substations are followed, even if for most applications such high classes are not required.
The relay complies with ANSI C37.90 standards, and has been designed to comply with international standards.

2.5.15 Approvals
APPLICABLE COUNCIL DIRECTIVE ACCORDING TO

CE COMPLIANCE Low voltage directive IEC60255-27
EMC Directive IEC60255-26
NORTH AMERICA UL UL508
EAC Machines and Equipment TR CU 010/2011
ISO Manufactured under a registered quality program ISO9001
EAC
The EAC Technical Regulations (TR) for Machines and Equipment apply to the Customs Union (CU) of the Russian
Federation, Belarus, and Kazakhstan
Item Description
Country of origin Spain
Date of manufacture See label on the F650 unit
Declaration of Conformity and/or Certificate of Conformity Available on request

2.6 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.6 External connections
Figure 2-2: F650 wiring diagram (189C4216H2)

CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.6 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
INPUTS / OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION FOR BOARDS F1 AND F2

SLOT F CONFIGURATION (BOARD TYPE 1)
INPUTS F1 OUTPUTS F1
F1 + CC1 52b F19
F2 + CC2 50P BLOCK O1 F20 79 BLOCK
F3 + CC3 51P BLOCK F21
USER CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS

USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS
F5 + CC5 50G BLOCK O2 F23 27/59 PICKUP
F6 + CC6 51G BLOCK F24
F7 + CC7 79 INITIATE F25
O3 50/67G PICKUP
F8 + CC8 79 BLOCK F26
F9 - COMMON 1/8 COMMON 1/8 F27
O4 51/67G PICKUP
F11 + CC9 NOT USED F29
O5 50/67P PICKUP
O6 51/67P PICKUP
O7 RECLOSE
O8 TRIP
SLOT F CONFIGURATION (BOARD TYPE 2)

INPUTS F2 OUTPUTS F2
F1 + COIL 1 F19
52/a SUPERVISION O1 79 BLOCK
COIL 1
V
F2 - 52/a F20
F3 + COIL 1 F21
52/b SUPERVISION O2 27/59 PICKUP
V
F4 - 52/b USER CONFIGURABLE OUTPUTS F22

F5 + CC1 52b F23
O3 50/67G PICKUP
USER CONFIGURABLE INPUTS

O4 51/67G PICKUP
O5 50/67P PICKUP
O6 51/67P PICKUP
F13 + CC7 79 INITIATE I SENS F31
I
F14 + CC8 79 BLOCK F32 RECLOSE

O7
F15 + COIL 2 F33
V
52/a SUPERVISION
COIL 2
F16 - 52/a I SENS F34

I
F17 + COIL 2 F35 TRIP

52/b SUPERVISION O8
V
F18 - 52/b F36
Figure 2-3: Input/output configurations for boards F1 and F2 (189C4216H1)

NOTE: For detailed information about different I/O boards types configuration, see section 5.6.1: Input/output placement
on page 5–136.

2.6 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 3: Hardware
HARDWARE
3.1 Module description

High Speed serial CAN Bus
CPU Digital Optional Power

Transformer
Module Module I/O Digital Supply
I/O
VTs
and
CTs
SCREEN
Keypad
LEDs
RS
RS232 Local/
23
322
2 Remote
USB
Figure 3-1: Block diagram

3.1 MODULE DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE
F650 units incorporate the following modules:

• Power supply, which can be simple or redundant, depending on the selected model
• Front module with alphanumerical (4 x 20) or optional graphical (16 x 40 characters) display. It includes the bus on
its rear, which communicates with the rest of modules via a high speed CAN bus.
• Transformer module with 5 current transformers and 4 voltage transformers
• CPU including a powerful DSP for measure processing as well as synchronous and asynchronous communication
accessories.
• Input/Output module included in basic unit
• Optionally, a second I/O module can be added.

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.2 POWER SUPPLY
3.2 Power supply

F650 can incorporate a simple or redundant power supply. The main and backup modules are identical.
Control power supplied to the relay must be connected to the matching power supply range of the
NOTICE relay. If the voltage is applied to the wrong terminals, damage can occur.
The F650 relay contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well known to be subject to
NOTICE deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by
powering the relays up once a year.
In the case of a redundant power supply the two modules work in parallel continuously, distributing 50% of the load on
each, thus ensuring greater reliability and an instantaneous load transfer from a failed power supply to the backup,
without loss of time or module reset.
A contact relay connected to the low voltage side of the power supply monitors this voltage. The three contact terminals,
normally open, common, and normally closed, are available at the external connector terminals. The contact monitors the
power supply integrity and it is not controlled by the main microprocessor. In order to monitor whether the unit is ready to
protect (READY), an auxiliary output contacts in the unit should be programmed. This “fly-back” type power supply
provides high efficiency, stability and reliability and is available in two ranges, Hi and Low, in order to optimize efficiency
and general performance, including the capability to tolerate auxiliary voltage interruptions (dips).
Oversized components highly resistant to temperature are used. For example, all capacitors are specified to stand up to
105ºC, transformer components are specially designed to stand up to 180ºC, the MOSFET transistor has very low
resistance, supports high voltage and is refrigerated by an oversized heat sink. This allows temperatures over the 60ºC
shown in the Technical Characteristics section, and prolonged overloads such as those occurring at batteries in deep
charge mode (much higher than +15% voltage shown in the Technical Characteristics section).
High capacitance capacitors are also used, providing high tolerance to prolonged dips, 100ms, even in the most
unfavorable consumption conditions. This allows the relay to continue operating normally without undesired resets
leaving protection features offline.
In the case of a blown fuse, replacement should be conducted by authorized/trained personnel

CAUTION only. Use replacement fuses with the same characteristics.
Fuse Requirements:
V: 250 VAC
I: 2.5A
Size: 5 x 20 mm
Type: Quick acting (F)
UL listed miniature fuse
Note: Contact technical support for further guidance.

3.3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE
3.3 Mechanical description

The model number and electrical characteristics of the unit are indicated on the label located on the right side of the relay
case.
The metallic case of the unit is highly resistant to corrosion. It is made of stainless steel (AISI 430), coated with an epoxy
layer. The rest of the metallic pieces are covered with a high quality resistive coating that has successfully passed at least
96 hours in the salt spray chamber (S/N ASTM B-117).
The front of the relay is made of a thermoplastic, flame retardant (V0, UL94), highly resistive material, which guarantees
the unit’s immunity to all kinds of EMI/RFI/ESD interferences. There is also an IP52 (IEC 529) protection rating against dust
and water through the front and with the relay mounted in the panel.
3.3.1 Mounting
The unit is designed for semi-flush mounting. The relay is secured to the panel with the 4 M6 screws provided with the unit.
The front keypad, display, and communications port are easily access on the front of the unit. The wiring is at the rear of
the unit. Drilling dimensions are shown on Figure 3-3: Cutout and drilling dimensions
Figure 3-2: Panel mount

The relay width allows the mounting of two units on a standard 19’’ panel, 8 units high.

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION
1.10 (28) 6.80 (172,8)

0.75 (19,1) 9.33 (237)
10.26 (260,7)
10.48 (266,3)
8.39±0.039 (213±1)
0.47 (12) 7.44 (189) 0.47 (12)

4xØ0.27 (7)
10.36 (263)
7.5 (190,5)
Figure 3-3: Cutout and drilling dimensions

Figure 3-4: 19” rack dimensions 8U high for two relays

3.3.2 Rear description

Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed
WARNING from the unit.
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. a static wrap) must be used when coming in
contact with products while the relay is energized.
The relay is wired through the terminal blocks located at the rear of the unit.
The magnetic module, which receives the CT secondary currents and the metering voltages, incorporates a very robust
terminal board (columns A and B) The maximum tightening torque for the screws on terminal boards A and B is 1.2 Nm.
Current inputs provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits. The maximum recommended cable section for this
terminal board, with the appropriate terminal, is 6 mm2 (AWG 10).
The use of twisted pair wire and/or shielded is recommended for the CT secondary current Isg.
The rest of the terminal blocks, incorporate high quality connectors with the capacity to withstand a rated current of 15 A
at 300 V. These terminal blocks admit a cable section of up to 2.54 mm2 (AWG 12).
The relay should be connected directly to the ground bus, using the shortest practical path. A tinned copper, braided,
shielding and bonding cable should be used. As a minimum, 96 strands of number 34 AWG should be used.
The communication boards have different types of connector depending on the selected media: RS485, glass or plastic
fiber optic.
Figure 3-5: Connector locations

TYPE OF COMMUNICATION CONNECTOR

RS485 / CAN cable Plug-in, 3 poles.
IRIG B Plug-in, 2 poles.
Plastic fiber optic Versatile Link
Ethernet 10/100 UTP (10/100BaseTX) RJ45, Class 5.
Glass fiber optic (100BaseFX) ST

Ethernet 100 FX (100BaseFX) ST
CAN Fiber ST
Figure 3-6: Communications media selector guide

Communication boards are installed at the rear part of the unit, the upper port being reserved for the asynchronous
communications board and CAN, and the lower port for the Ethernet board in any of its configurations.
Figure 3-7: Detail of insertion/extraction of communication modules
Note: For version 7.00 and above, only the serial card can be removed
The transformer module housing the VTs and CTs is already connected to a female connector
WARNING screwed to the case that incorporates shorting bars in the current inputs, so that it can be
extracted without the need to short-circuit the currents externally. It is very important, for
safety reasons, not to change or switch the terminals for CTs and VTs.

A grounded antistatic wristband must be used when manipulating the module in order to avoid electrostatic discharges
that may cause damage to the electronic components
Special care is required when disconnecting CT wire leads from the terminal block.
WARNING A high voltage potential can occur if a wire is disconnected while a CT is energized.
CT isolation or de-energization is required prior to CT terminal wire removal.

3.4 WIRING CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE
3.4 Wiring
3.4.1 External connections
F650 units can have different options for the F module:
Option 1: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 outputs.
Option 2: Board with 8 digital inputs, 4 circuit supervision inputs, 6 conventional outputs, and two current sensing
outputs
Option 4: Board with 32 digital inputs.
Option 5: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 analog inputs.
For slot G there are five different options:
Option 0: No board
Option 1: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 outputs.
Option 2: Board with 8 digital inputs, 4 circuit supervision inputs, 6 conventional outputs, and two current sensing
outputs
Option 4: Board with 32 digital inputs.
Option 5: Board with 16 digital inputs and 8 analog inputs.
The number selected for slot G must be equal or higher than the number selected for option F for models including boards
4 and 5.
3.4.2 Digital inputs with trip circuit supervision

The Option 2 I/O board includes two groups of 4 inputs with one common, in terminals F9 to F10. It also includes 6 auxiliary
outputs, in terminals F19 to F30 with normally open contacts and two current sensing (latching) outputs (F31-F33 and F34-
F36).
Besides, there are 2 groups of inputs for trip circuit supervision. The first group includes two isolated digital inputs,
terminals F1-F2 and F3-F4. The second group, symmetrical and identical to the first, is formed by isolated voltage inputs
F15-F16 and F17-F18.
Using voltage detectors and current sensing, it is possible to implement several trip or close circuit supervision schemes, as
well as protection of the unit output contact.
In order to implement these schemes, it is not necessary to perform any setting in the unit.
NOTICE Internal functions are always operative. A detailed description of trip circuit supervision is
included in chapter 5 in this manual.

CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE 3.4 WIRING
3.4.3 Cable/fiber Ethernet board

The Ethernet board for versions prior to 7.00 is an independent module located in the bottom at the rear part of the relay.
In models C and D (options for versions prior to 7.00), the 10/100BaseTx port is selected by an internal switch. This switch
must be configured as shown in the figure 3-8 in order to select between fiber or cable.
Figure 3-8: Fiber/cable selection

3.5 TRANSCEIVER OPTICAL POWER BUDGET VS. LINK LENGTH CHAPTER 3: HARDWARE
3.5 Transceiver optical power budget vs. link length

Optical Power Budget (OPB) is the available optical power for a fiber optic link to accommodate fiber cable losses plus
losses due to in-line connectors, splices, and optical switches. OPB also provides a margin for link aging and unplanned
losses due to cable plant reconfiguration and repair.
OPB (dB) Fiber optic Cable length

(km)
62.5/125 μm 50/125 μm
11.4 8 0
10.9 7.4 0.3
10.5 7.1 0.5
9.6 6.2 1.0
8.5 5.3 1.5
7.3 4.3 2.0
6 3.3 2.5

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 4: Interfaces, Settings & Actual Values
INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES
4.1 EnerVista 650 Setup software

4.1.1 Introduction
The EnerVista 650 Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two direct interfaces with a 650
device. The alternate interface is implemented via the device faceplate keypad and display (see the Human Machine
Interface (HMI) section in this chapter).
The EnerVista 650 Setup software interface provides access to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the
operation of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while
disconnected (offline) or connected (online) with a 650 device. In offline mode, settings files can be created for eventual
download to the device. In online mode, real-time communication with the device is supported.
The EnerVista 650 Setup software, provided with every F650 relay, can be run from a computer supporting Microsoft
Windows XP(SP 2 or 3), Windows 7 or Windows 8. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista 650 Setup
software interface features. The EnerVista 650 Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista
650 Setup software interface.
The EnerVista 650 Setup software package uses ModBus protocol, and is designed to communicate with a single relay at a
time. GE offers different communication software packages, such as GE-POWER, which can be used to communicate
simultaneously with several relays.
EnerVista 650 Setup software provides an easy way to configure, monitor and manage all F650 features.

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES
4.1.1.1 Using settings files

The EnerVista 650 Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
1. In offline mode (relay disconnected), create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
2. In online mode (relay connected), modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then save the settings to
the relay.
3. Combining online and offline modes, create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is
connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
• Product Setup
• System Setup
• Protection Elements
• Control Elements
• Inputs/Outputs
• Quick Settings
• Relay Configuration
• Logic Configuration
4.1.1.2 Viewing actual values

You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measurements while connected to a relay.
4.1.1.3 Viewing triggered events

In online mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified parameters, via one of the following:
• Event Recorder: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 479 events, listed in
chronological order from most recent to oldest. For firmware version 7.20 or higher, 511 events are available.
• Oscillography: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power
system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.
4.1.1.4 Firmware upgrades

The firmware of a F650 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista 650 Setup software. Instructions are
provided in Chapter 9: Bootcode and firmware upgrade.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values,
minimum/maximum values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware.
The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.
4.1.1.5 One line diagrams

You can configure a one line diagram (bay mimic) to be used in relays with a graphical display.

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE
4.1.2 Main screen

The EnerVista 650 Setup software main window includes the following components:
• Title bar
• Main menu bar
• Main icon bar
• Working area
• Status bar
Title
Working Area
Figure 4-1: EnerVista 650 Setup main screen

4.1.3 Connect to the relay

To start communicating with the relay go to Communication > Computer in the main EnerVista 650 Setup menu.
Safety instructions must be followed before connecting the computer to the relay. Safety
NOTICE instructions are detailed in section 1.1.3 Safety instructions. Connect the relay ground terminal and
the communicating computer to a good grounding. Otherwise, communication may not be viable, or
even, in worst cases, the relay and/or the computer can result damaged by overvoltages.
When working online, ensure that all relay communication parameters, such as baud rate, slave ModBus address, etc.,
match the computer settings before connected to the relay.
Figure 4-2: Communication parameters menu

The Communication > Computer screen is divided in several subsections:
• Computer settings: Main communication parameters for serial communication and control type selection.
• Modbus/TCP Setup (if ModBus /TCP is selected as control type): Communication parameters for ModBus TCP
communication.
• Communication control: Device communication status (communicating or not communicating).
• Communication optimization: allows optimizing the communication time outs and failure establishing.

4.1.3.1 Computer Settings:

This section shows the communication parameters needed to establish communication with the unit, such as slave
address, communication port, baud rate, parity, control type and startup mode.
Baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits and ModBus slave address for Com2 (RS232 front port and second serial port in the
rear communication board) are displayed in the default text on the relay main screen.
ModBus Slave Address: ModBus address used for serial and Ethernet communication; default 254.
Communication ports: Ports used in the computer for serial communication.
Baud Rate: Baud rate for serial communication (from 1200 to 115200 baud in EnerVista 650 Setup, from 300 to 115200
baud in relay).
Parity: Parity for serial communication. None, odd or even can be selected.
Control Type: The available control modes are:
• No Control Type, this option selects the serial communication mode, for use with serial communication ports (front
port, RS485, or plastic or glass fiber optic).
• MODBUS/TCP, this option selects ModBus TCP/IP communication mode, for communication through the Ethernet port.
In this case, the top right window shows the typical parameters to be programmed; IP address, port address and unit
identifier in the MODBUS TCP SETUP section.
• MODEM, this option displays the parameter to set in case of using a modem for the communication, such as Phone
number, Time out (sec.), init. command, type of dialing (tones or pulses).
4.1.3.2 Communication Control:

Located at the bottom of the screen, this section shows the status of communication with the relay. When the relay is not
communicating, the message "650 Setup is not talking to an 650" is shown and the ON button is enabled. Click ON to start
the EnerVista 650 Setup software communicating with the relay.
When the relay is communicating, the message "650 Setup is now talking to an 650" is shown and OFF is enabled. Click
OFF to disconnect communications between the relay and PC.
4.1.3.3 Communication Optimization:

Adjusting the parameters in the Communication optimization section can improve communication, although using the
default values is recommended in most cases. These parameters are the maximum time to wait for a response in the relay
(in ms) and the maximum number of connection attempts to perform before assuming communications failure.

4.1.4 File management menu

File management with EnerVista 650 Setup software differs for firmware below version 7.70. and for firmware version 7.70
and above.
4.1.4.1 File Management menu for firmware below v7.70
4.1.4.1.1 Offline mode (firmware below v7.70)
Run EnerVista 650 Setup
Open a *.650 file

(“File>Open” menu)
Modify Settings and relay

configuration
YES
Is it necessary to
program
additional logic?
Launch the Logic Configuration tool in EnerVista

650 Setup (“Setpoint>Logic Configuration”)
Create new or modify the existing logic:

(“File>Open Project”)
NO NO
Compile and save logic file (*.pep) and drawing

design (*.aut) in Logic Configuration tool
Exit PLC Graphic Editor and save the *.650 file

from the main application menu
Is the relay
completely
configured?
YES
Save *.650 settings & configuration file
Store in the computer the Logic configuration files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) as
well as the *.650 for further logic changes.
Figure 4-3: Offline mode file management (firmware below v7.70)1

1. “Relay and logic configuration” and “Protection and Control Settings” must be uploaded to the F650 relay or the device
to operate properly

Table 4-1: Types of files generated by EnerVista 650 Setup software, offline:
Logic Configuration Files (*.pep, *aut, *.lib)
Settings & Configuration File *.650
*.pep *.aut *.lib
Description Settings and Configuration Section Header for Logic Graphical edition User programmable
project container. Logic logic objects
equations (Virtual
Outputs) in FDB
format.
Created by EnerVista 650 Setup Logic configuration Logic configuration Logic configuration
graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLC
Editor) Editor) Editor)
Contents Relay configuration file containing all elements PLC project file PLC Project file Library file to be
Settings, input/output and LEDs configuration, graphic containing the containing all the included as an
display configuration, etc. necessary drawings used by object in a PLC
Equations corresponding to the logic created and information the logic, required project. Logic
compiled in the PLC Editor relative to the relay by 650 relay based packages that can
model, logic on IEC 61131-3 be stored into
libraries included in standard. Functional libraries and be
the project (*.lib), block diagram (FDB). distributed in
graphic file name different PLC
(*.aut), etc. projects.
How to save EnerVista 650 Setup: PLC Editor: PLC Editor: PLC Editor:
File > Save * File > Save Project File > Save Project File > Save Library
How to open EnerVista 650 Setup: PLC Editor: PLC Editor: PLC Editor:
File>Open * File > Open Project File > Open Project File > Library > New
Library
How to Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer) Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer)
transfer to Open the created file (File > Open *) Launch Logic equations Editor (Setpoint > Logic
relay Send to relay from the menu: File > Send info to relay Configuration)
Note that texts used in the configuration of inputs, Open the created PLC project (File > Open Project)
outputs, etc. are not sent to the relay. The only texts Compile the project (Run > Compile)
sent to relay are operations, events, and LEDs. Now the logic (virtual outputs) can be sent directly to relay
(Run > Send Equations to Relay). Texts of virtual outputs are
not stored in the relay, only in the logic configuration files to
be edited.
When using element libraries (both pre-existing in File Library > Open Library or created by the user in File Library > New
Library), the program creates and manages the corresponding files (*.lib) in a folder named FDB (Functional Block
Diagram). These files are used for PLC project compilation. The element library files must be stored with the other logic
configuration files that build the PLC project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib).
Besides sending configuration information to the relay (Settings & configuration in *.650 format), storing the complete set
of *.650, *.pep, *.aut and *.lib files inside the relay is recommended (Communication > Upload info files to relay). This
ensures that logic configuration files are available in future for logic modifications. Even if these files are not used by the
relay, they are required to connect to the relay and analyze its configuration. The EnerVista 650 Setup software program
manages the logic configuration files globally, so that when the *.pep file is uploaded to the relay, the associated *.aut and
*.lib files are also stored.
File storage inside the relay Communication > Upload info files to relay through Ethernet
(RECOMMENDED)
Retrieval of files stored in the relay Communication > Download info files from relay through Ethernet
(RECOMMENDED)

4.1.4.1.2 Online mode (firmware below v7.70)
Run EnerVista 650 Setup
Connect to the relay

(“Communication>Computer>ON”)
NO
Modify and send to the
relay protection Settings
and relay configuration
YES
Is it necessary to
program
additional logic?
Launch the Logic Configuration tool in EnerVista

650 Setup (“Setpoint>Logic Configuration”)
Create new or modify the existing logic

(“File>Open Project”)
NO Compile (“Run>Compile”)
and save logic file (*.pep) and drawing design
(*.aut) in Logic Configuration tool (“File>Save
Project”)
Send logic to relay (“Run>Send Equations to

Relay”) and Exit PLC Graphic Editor
Is the relay
completely
configured?
YES
Save all settings & configuration (“File>Get info from relay”)
Store in the relay the Logic configuration files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) as well as the
*.650 for further logic changes. (“Communication>Upload info files to relay”)
Figure 4-4: Online mode file management (firmware below v7.70)

Table 4-2: Types of files generated by EnerVista 650 Setup software, online
Logic Configuration Files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib)
Settings & Configuration File *.650
*.pep *.aut *.lib
Description Settings and Configuration Section Header for Logic Graphical edition User programmable
project container. Logic logic objects
equations (Virtual
Outputs) in FDB
format.
Created by EnerVista 650 Setup Logic configuration Logic configurationLogic configuration
graphic editor (PLC graphic editor (PLCgraphic editor (PLC
Editor) Editor) Editor)
Contents Relay configuration file containing all elements, PLC project file PLC Project file Library file to be
settings, input/output and LEDs configuration, graphic containing the containing all the included as an object
display configuration, etc. necessary drawings used by in a PLC project.
Equations corresponding to the logic created and information the logic, requiredLogic packages that
compiled in the PLC Editor relative to the relay by 650 relay based can be stored into
model, logic on IEC 61131-3 libraries and be
libraries included in standard. distributed in
the project (*.lib), Functional block different PLC
graphic file name diagram (FDB). projects.
(*.aut), etc.
How to Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer) Connect with the relay (Communications > Computer)
transfer to Send settings and configuration from file Launch 650 Logic equations editor (Setpoint > Logic
relay Configuration)
Open the created PLC project (File > Open Project)
Compile the project (Run > Compile)
Now the logic (virtual outputs) can be sent directly to relay
(Run > Send Equations to Relay). Texts of virtual outputs are
not stored in the relay, only in the logic configuration files to be
edited.
Modify settings and configuration directly in the relay:
How to save EnerVista 650 Setup: PLC Editor:

File > Get info from relay. User definable texts retrieved File > Save Project File > Save Library
are operations, events, and LEDs.
The relay does not The relay does not The relay does not
provide this provide this provide this
information unless information unless information unless
the *.pep file is the *.pep file is the *.pep file is
stored in the relay stored in the relay. stored in the relay.
To store the logic configuration files in the relay use the
Communication > Upload info files to relay option
How to store Communication > Upload info files to relay through Communication > Upload info files to relay through Ethernet
in the relay Ethernet
How to Communication > Download info files from relay Communication > Download info files from relay through
retrieve from through Ethernet Ethernet
the relay
REMINDER:
Logic programming support files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) CANNOT be retrieved directly from the relay.
It is necessary to do one of the following to store support files:

* Store in the PC
* Upload to the relay (Communication > Upload info files to relay), after which they can be retrieved from the relay

4.1.4.2 File Management menu for firmware v7.70 and above

Firmware versions 7.70 and above work with EnerVista 650 Setup software version 8.10 and above (see corresponding
release notes).
EnerVista 650 Setup software 8.10 and above uses a new *.650 file format, combining previous settings and configuration
files (*.650) along with Logic configuration files (*.pep, *.aut,*.lib) into a single *.650 file.
4.1.4.2.1 Offline mode (firmware v7.70 and above)

This mode will allow to create, open and/or modify only one file (*.650) instead of multiple files that are managed for
firmware versions below 7.70 (setting and configuration file (*.650) and Logic configuration files (*.pep, *.aut,*.lib)).
Existing *.650 files for firmware below 7.70 must be converted to files supported by firmware version 7.70 or above using
Enervista 650 Setup version 8.10 or above. During the update process, a PLC project file (*.aut,*.pep,*.lib) must be selected.

Run Enervista 650 Setup

(version 8.10 or above)
In Offline mode
Convert a *.650 file from

Firmware version below 7.70 Open a *.650 file from
to Firmware version 7.70 or Firmware version 7.70 or
above. (File > Config File above.
(*.650) Converter) (File > Open)
Select the original *.650 file

to convert, and choose a Modify settings and relay
model and firmware version configuration
for the new file.
Select a storage path for the

new file.
Is additional logic
required? YES
Does original *.650 file

include a logic section?
Launch the Logic
Configuration tool
(Setpoint > Logic
Configuration)
YES
650 PLC editor launches.
Does the open *.650 file

Select PLC project (*.pep,
contain a previous logic
*.qut, *.lib) to add to new
configuration? YES
*.650 file.
NO
NO
Does selected PLC project NO The PLC project

Warning pop-up message is Select, create, or import a PLC (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib)
NO match logic configuration
shown. project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) corresponding to the
compiled in original *.650 file?
(File > Open, File > New, logic configuration in
or File > Import) the *.650 file
automatically opens
NO
Overwrite the logic
configuration in the original
*650 file with the selected
Modify logic, Compile, and
PLC project?
Save changes.
(WARNING: Modifications
that are compiled but not
saved will be lost!)
NO YES
YES
Select a new PLC project
(*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) using File
> Open Project or create a
new PLC project using File >
New Project
Is the relay
completely
Compile the PLC project Selected PLC project is configured?
(Run > Compile) compiled and inserted into
new *.650 file.
YES
Save the PLC project New converted *.650 file is Save the *650
(File > Save Project) created and stored in the configuration file.
selected path. (File > Save)
Figure 4-5: Offline mode file management (firmware v7.70 and above))

4.1.4.2.2 Online mode (firmware v7.70 and above)

This mode allows the modification of Logic Configuration that is running in the relay without having to store a backup of
the PLC project (*.pep,*.aut,*.lib) on the local computer or by running Communication > Upload info files to relay as was
done previously.
NOTE: Storing a local PC back-up of the following 650 relay configuration files before changing settings or logic is highly
recommended:
• *.650 configuration file
• Logic programming support files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) inserted into *.650 (PLC Editor> File> Export)
Do not try to communicate with the relay during the start-up process. Doing so may cause loss
WARNING of the configuration file (*.650), leading to unexpected behavior.
Communication can be established safely once relay has fully started-up. The relay has completed
its start-up process when Menus are accessible from the HMI.

Run Enervista 650 Setup

(version 8.10 or above)
Connect to a relay running

First time connecting to the
Firmware v7.70 or above Does the relay contain any
relay since upgrading from YES YES
(Communication > logic configuration?
Firmware below v7.70?
Computer > On)
650 PLC editor launches.
NO
Select PLC project (*.pep, *.qut,
NO *.lib) that matches equations
NO configured in the relay.
Modify settings and relay
configuration, and send to
the relay.
Does selected PLC
project match logic configuration
The PLC project is compiled YES compiled and running in the
and sent to the relay. The relay?
Is the relay PLC editor closes.
Is additional logic
completely NO
required?
configured? NO
Warning pop-up message

YES YES inform of mismatch.
YES
Save the *650 Launch the Logic

configuration file. Configuration tool
(File > Save) (Setpoint > Logic
Configuration) Overwrite the logic
configuration in the original
*650 file with the selected
The logic configuration
PLC project?
(PLC project
*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) available
in the relay automatically
opens NO
Select a new PLC project (*.pep, *.aut,
Modify existing logic, create a *.lib) using File > Open Project,
PLC project (File > New), or create a new PLC project using File >
import a PLC project from a New Project, or import a PLC project
*.650 file (File > Import) from a *.650 file using File > Import.
YES
Compile the changed PLC

project. (Run > Compile)
NO
Go to Run > Save
YES Configuration File.
Do you want to send
equations to the relay?
The PLC project is sent to the
relay and the new equations
start to run.
NO
Do you want to save the

Close the project.
project in the *.650
(File > Close Project)
configuration file?
Figure 4-6: Online mode file management (firmware v7.70 and above)

4.1.5 EnerVista 650 Setup menu

The EnerVista 650 Setup menu structure is shown in Table 4-3: EnerVista 650 Setup menu structure.
Unless specified, options are available in both online and offline mode.
(*) indicates options enabled only in online mode. (**) indicates options enabled only in offline mode.
The View > Language submenu allows the user to change the default language for the EnerVista
NOTICE 650 Setup program. This feature is only enabled when the relay is not communicating and no file has
been opened.
Table 4-3: EnerVista 650 Setup menu structure
IEC 61850
File Setpoint Actual Operations(*) Communication Security View Help
CONFIGURATOR
New (**) Product Setup Front Fixed Computer Login user Traces Instruction
Panel commands Manual
Open (**) System Setup Status Modem (*) Change ModBus GE Multilin
Password Memory on the web
Map
Save (**) Protection Metering Troubleshooti User Languages About
Elements ng (*) Managemen (**) EnerVista
t 650 Setup
Save As (**) Control Inputs/ Calibration (*)
Elements Outputs
Close (**) Inputs/Outputs Records Upgrade Relay
Quick Settings (*) (*)
Config File Relay
(* 650) Converter Configuration
Compare to
settings file
Properties (**) Logic Upgrade 650
Configuration Web Server
Procome Update
Configuration Magnetic
Module
IEC103
Configuration
Get info from Clock (*) Upload info
relay (*) files to relay
Send info to Download info
relay (*) files from
relay
Print Setup (**)
Print Preview (**)
Print (**)
Print to file
PLC Checksum
Calculation
Settings
Checksum
Calculation
Order Code
Exit

4.1.6 File menu

File
New (**) Create a new settings and configuration file, with the default relay
settings and no configuration
Open (**) Open a settings and configuration file for offline working.
Save (**) Save *.650 settings and configuration file
Save As (**) Save as *.650 settings and configuration file.
Close (**) Close the opened *.650 file in EnerVista 650 Setup.
Config File (*.650) Converter Tool to convert the *.650 files from one version to another
Compare to settings file Compare online unit or opened settings file to another settings file
Properties (**) File properties for *.650.
Get info from relay (*) Retrieve the *.650 settings and relay configuration compiled equations
from the relay.
Send info to relay (*) Send and write the *.650 settings and configuration to the relay.
Print Setup (**) To configure printer settings.
Print Preview (**) Preview of settings and configuration file printing format.
Print (**) Launch the *.650 file to be printed.
Print to file (*.xls) (**) *.650 printed to file in excel format.
PLC Checksum Calculation Calculate the CRC of PLC equations of the .650 file (When a .650 is
uploaded to the relay, the calculate PLC CRC and the actual value of the
PLC CRC read from the relay must match).
Settings Checksum Calculate the CRC of settings of the .650 file (When a .650 is uploaded to
Calculation the relay, the calculate Setting CRC and the actual value of the Setting
CRC read from the relay must match).
Order code(*) Option available for F650 with firmware version 7.00 or above. This
allows a model to have special functionality (see model selection) with
password requirements. For detailed information go to section "9.6.3.3
ORDER CODE UPGRADE PROCESS" in chapter 9.
Exit Quit the application closing all the open windows.
(*) indicates online only, (**) indicates offline only

4.1.6.1 New
Use the File > New menu option to create a new default settings file while working offline.
To access this menu, there must be no communication between the Enervista 650 Setup program and the relay (offline
mode).
1. Select File > New.
EnerVista 650 Setup opens a pop-up window with a list of all files available for different models/firmware versions.
– Relay Selection: Select a 650 family relay (F650, R650, C650, W650 or G650).
– Redundancy Selection (firmware v7.00 and above only): Select to include files for F650/C650 relays with Rear
Ethernet Communications 2 Board options J, K, L and M.
– Models and Firmware Selection: Click to select one of the different models and firmware versions available.
2. Once you have selected a file, click OK and wait until the file has finished loading.

3. A message indicates when the new *650 file has been created. Click OK to access the new file in offline mode.
4.1.6.2 Open
Use the File > Open menu option to open an existing settings file while working offline.
mode).
Open a *.650 configuration file for firmware versions below 7.70:

• Navigate to File > Open and select a file to open.
Figure 4-7: Open file menu
Open a *.650 configuration file for firmware versions 7.70 and above:
Enervista 650 Setup version 8.10 or above is required.
1. Navigate to File > Open and select a file to open.
– If the file is a firmware v7.70 or higher file, or has already been converted, proceed to edit the settings and
configuration.
– If the file has logic configuration that has not yet been updated for firmware v 7.70 and higher, continue to follow
these steps.

2. The following message is shown:
Click OK to continue with the update process.

3. Select a name and path for the new, updated *650 file being created.
A message explains that the *.650 file needs a PLC project

4. Select PLC files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) as prompted.

Depending on the *.650 file and selected PLC project files, one of the following messages may be displayed:
Message Meaning
Warning: Opening a file with firmware version x.xx while editing a file The version of the *.650 configuration file and version of the PLC
with firmware version y.yy project (*.pep, *.aut,*.lib) do not match.
Logic might be modified. Continue anyway?
Some PLC project variables may not be supported by the *.650
configuration file.
Compiled equations are different from the ones stored. Do you want Logic equations compiled in the *.650 configuration file do not match
to overwrite the stored equations? equations in the selected PLC project (*.pep, *.aut,*.lib).
Select Yes, and logic configuration from the selected PLC project
(*.pep, *.aut,*.lib) will be compiled and saved into *.650 configuration
file.
Select No, and the original logic will remain in the *.650 configuration
file.
File conversion failure. You must select an existing or a new PLC This message indicates that the conversion process is unsuccessful
project to continue with file conversion. because a PLC project has not been selected.
A PLC project (*.pep, *.aut,*.lib) must be selected for insertion into the
*.650 configuration file, and the conversion process restarts.
5. Upon successful file conversion, the newly converted *.650 file is saved.
4.1.6.3 Save/Save as
The Save as and Close file options are used to save the *.650 file into the computer and to close the current file. To work in
offline mode for settings and configuration editing, a new *.650 file can be opened without closing the previous file.
mode).

During settings and configuration edits, saving your file regularly is recommended. Unsaved changes will be lost when the
file is closed.
Figure 4-8: Save/Save as file menu
4.1.6.4 Close
In addition to closing the working file, the File > Close option is used to clear all data in the EnerVista 650 Setup program,
enabling the Language, Upgrade firmware version, and Upgrade Operating system menu options.
Use the File > Close menu option to close a settings file while working offline.
mode).
If File > Close is selected during *.650 configuration process, without first saving the file (File > Save), the following warning
message is shown:
Click OK to open the File > Save/Save as window, or Cancel to close without saving.

4.1.6.5 Configuration file converter

The configuration file converter tool provides automatic conversion of configuration files from and older firmware version
to a newer version. In order to convert a configuration file, follow these steps:
1. Working in offline mode, go to File > Config File (*.650) Converter
2. Select the file to be converted.
3. After source file selection is complete, select conversion settings. Make the following selections:
Source Model: Indicates source F650 model and original version of selected file.
Destination model: Drop-down list of available F650 models and firmware versions. Select a
destination model and firmware version. In the bottom part of this section, a
brief description of all models affected is displayed in green after selecting one
model in the list.
Source file path Indicates the path where source model file is located.
Source Model
Destination Model
Source file path
Figure 4-9: Config file (*650) converter menu

It is possible to change the model type (FXGX) using the conversion tool. It must be taken into account that part of the logic
can be readjusted to fit the new input and output board selection. Notice also that the external wiring of inputs and
outputs boards is different for type 1, 2, 4 and 5.
File conversion to firmware version 7.70 or above

The *.650 configuration files for firmware v7.70 and above include the logic configuration and don’t require separate PLC
project files (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib), some extra actions are required when converting configuration files from below firmware
v7.70 to firmware v 7.70 or above.
After selecting the *.650 source file and conversion settings:
• If the source (*.650) configuration file does not contain Logic configuration, file conversion is completed
automatically.

• If the source (*.650) configuration file contains Logic configuration, a PLC project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) must be selected
for insertion into the converted (*.650) configuration file.:
The selected PLC project file is checked against the (*.650) configuration file to ensure they match. If the files do not match,
the following message pops-up:
Select Yes, and the equations available on selected PLC project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) will be compiled and stored into (*.650)
configuration file. New equations will overwrite the equations existing in (*.650) configuration file
Select No, and the following message will display to indicate that file conversion process has failed.

To convert the *,650 file, a new PLC project (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib) must be selected for insertion into the converted (*.650)
configuration file.
Note: If the PLC editor is closed before selecting, compiling and storing a PLC project, the file conversion process will not be
successful.
File conversion to firmware 7.50 or above (including firmware 7.70 or above)

The file conversion tool has been modified to include the increased number of setting groups available in firmware version
7.50 and above. In firmware version 7.50, the maximum number of setting groups (SG) available increased from 3 to 6.
Some considerations must be taken into account previous to convert (*.650) files from firmware version below 7.50 to
firmware version 7.50 or above. In these cases, the tool internally checks if setting groups functionality is enabled or
disable at Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting group in the source file and depend on its value, different conversions
are performed in elements affected by setting groups.
For example, if the Phase TOC High element is configured in the source *.650 file as described below:
Phase TOC High Phase TOC High 1 (G1) Phase TOC High 2 Phase TOC High 3(G3)
(G2)
Function ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED
Input PHASOR(DFT) PHASOR(DFT) PHASOR(DFT)
Pickup Level 0.10 1.50 2.00
Curve Definite time Definite time Definite time
TD Multiplier 0.02 0.05 0.1
Reset INSTANTANEOUS INSTANTANEOUS INSTANTANEOUS
Voltage Restraint DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED
Snapshot Events ENABLED ENABLED ENABLED
1. Note that fields in blue contain default values

CASE 1: If the setting groups option is disabled (Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting group) in the source file, conversion
is performed in the destination file as follows:
• Settings of different elements (Phase TOC High 1, 2 and 3) that belong to Setting group 1(SG1) in the source file are
copied into elements that belong to Setting Group 1 in the destination file.
• Elements in the other setting groups are configured with default values in the configuration file.
SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6
Phase TOC High G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3
Function ENABLED DISABLED
Input PHASOR(DFT)
Pickup Level 0.10 1.50 2.00 1.00
Curve Definite time IEEE Ext Inv
TD Multiplier 0.02 0.05 0.10 1.00
Reset INSTANTANEOUS
Voltage DISABLED
Restraint
Snapshot Events ENABLED
CASE 2: If the setting groups option is enabled (Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting group) in the source file, conversion
to the destination file is as follows:
• Settings of different elements (Phase TOC High 1, 2 and 3) that belong to different setting groups in the source file are
copied into elements that belong to first group of first three setting groups in the destination file
• Protection elements in the other groups/setting groups are configured with default values in the destination file.
SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6
Phase TOC High G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3
Function ENABLED DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED

Input PHASOR(DFT)

Pickup Level 0.10 1.50 1,00 2.00 1.00

1.00
Curve Definite IEEE Ext Definite time IEEE Ext Inv Definite time IEEE Ext Inv
time Inv
TD Multiplier 0.02 1.00 0.05 1,00 0.10 1.00
Reset INSTANTANEOUS
Voltage DISABLED
Restraint
Snapshot ENABLED
Events
4.1.6.6 Properties
When this option is selected, the program displays the relay model information, firmware version, etc. of the file being
edited, as shown:
Figure 4-10: File properties menu

4.1.6.7 Print options

The printing options are active only in offline mode with a file open, and not in online mode, connected with the relay.
Print setup
Option to configure the printer options and settings.
Print preview
Option to preview the whole settings and configuration file (*.650) in paper format to be printed as shown:
Figure 4-11: Print preview of settings file
Print
Option to print the relay configuration using the PC default (active) printer on port COMx or LPT. This option is active only in
offline mode and in file edition (not in online mode while connected to the relay).
Print to file (*xls)

Option to export the configuration file to an Excel file.

4.1.6.8 Compare to settings file

This tool provides an automatic comparison of two different configuration files, or of an online unit to one settings file.
Open the source *.650 file and select the version and model to compare against. The results of the comparison are
displayed as shown:
Figure 4-12: Compare to settings file
4.1.6.9 PLC checksum calculation

When working in offline mode, the PLC Checksum calculation option calculates the CRC of the PLC equations and Relay
configuration section for the open *.650 file. When a *.650 file is uploaded to the relay, the calculated PLC Checksum and
the actual value of the PLC Checksum read from the relay (Actual values > Status > System Info) must match.
In order to calculate this checksum, the following sections of the * .650 file are considered:
• All equations compiled in the file and located in EnerVista 650 Setup Setpoint > Logic configuration
• Configuration available in the file and located in EnerVista 650 Setup Setpoint > Relay configuration, excluding:
– HMI tab configuration
– All configured text
– Opening and closing time in the Switchgear section

4.1.6.10 Setting checksum calculation

When working in offline mode, the Settings Checksum calculation option calculates the CRC of different configured
settings for the open *.650 file. When a *.650 file is uploaded to the relay, the calculated Settings Checksum and the actual
value of the Settings Checksum read from the relay (Actual values > Status > System Info) must match.
In order to calculate this checksum, the following sections of the * .650 file are considered:
• All settings in the relay configuration section (Setpoint > Relay configuration) excluding:
– Those communication settings: Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication settings > SerialPorts or
Network (Ethernet) or Modbus Protocol or Routing
– Relay calibration factors
– Opening and closing time in the Switchgear section
4.1.7 Setpoint menu
Setpoint
Product Setup Communications settings for all protocols and physical mediums. ModBus user map
definition, fault report, oscillography, data logger demand settings and Time Settings.
System Setup General Settings, Flex Curves Definition, Breaker settings, maintenance, switchgear
snapshot events management and Miscellaneous Settings.
Protection Elements Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground and Negative Sequence Current Settings.
Voltage Elements settings and Power Settings management.
Control Elements Setting groups, under- and over-frequency settings, synchrocheck, autoreclose, breaker
failure, VT fuse failure, broken conductor, locked rotor settings management, Pulse
Counters, Analog comparators, Frequency Rate of Change, Load encroachment, max
number of starts, Digital Counters, Cold Load Pickup and PLC Timer Masks
Inputs/Outputs Contact I/O settings for all boards available in device, Remote Comms Force Outputs and
Virtual inputs.
Quick Settings Menu that encompass the most important settings to configure the device such as;
Current and Voltage sensing or current protection element.
Relay Configuration Configuration of Outputs, LEDs, Operations, Protection Elements, Oscillography, Control
Events, Control Elements, Switchgear, Inputs, Virtual Inputs, Operations and HMI. Whole
relay configuration with internal relay signals or user-definable ones as logic (virtual
outputs).
Logic Configuration Logic configuration graphic editor (PLC Editor). It is a PLC Project file editor that contains all
the internal drawings used to make the logic (virtual outputs) based on IEC 61131-3
standard. Functional block diagram (FDB).
Procome Procome Configuration tool. Only available for Procome models (5) when communicating
Configuration through Ethernet with EnerVista 650 Setup
IEC103 Configuration IEC103 settings for available IEC103 models (3) when communicating through Ethernet
with Enervista 650 Setup
Clock (*) Relay synchronization to computer clock or to user-definable date and time. Online mode
only.

4.1.7.1 Product setup menu
Product Setup
Communication Serial Ports, Network (Ethernet), ModBus Protocol, DNP Slave, IEC 870-5-104, SNTP settings
Settings and procome (if available on model selection), PTP1588 and Routing (for firmware version
7.00 and higher)
ModBus User Map ModBus user map definition. The ModBus user map is formed by 256 records, selectable
from the complete relay ModBus map.
Fault Report Fault report settings. Possibility to show fault reports on HMI screen.
Oscillography Oscillography settings (trigger position, samples per cycle, etc.). The trigger and digital
channels (up to 16) must be configured in Setpoint > Relay configuration.
Data Logger Data logger configuration
Demand Demand settings. The demand trigger and demand reset signals must be configured in
Setpoint > Relay configuration
Time Settings Time settings.
4.1.7.2 Communication settings menu

This section details the settings related to communication parameters for the different protocols available in the F650.
COMMUNICATIoN
SETTINGS
Serial Ports Baud rate and parity for COM1 and COM2 serial communication ports.
Network (Ethernet) Ethernet communication parameters for ETH_1/ETH2 or ETH_E/ETH_A/ETH_B
(Depending on model) (IP Address, Netmask, Gateway IP)
NOTE: The ModBus Slave address used by Ethernet ports is the one set for
COM2.EnerVista 650 Setup software allows programming two different Ethernet
addresses, but the first IP has always to be set as the second IP Address is an Alias.
ModBus Protocol ModBus Slave Addresses for serial and Ethernet communication and the ModBus port
number used for ModBus TCP/IP
DNP3 Slave Physical port, Slave Address for DNP, IP Addresses for Masters, TCP/UDP Port,
Unsolicited Response parameters, Analog scale factors and deadbands, message
fragment size, Binary input block.Available for standard and IEC61850 models.
IEC 870-5-104 TCP Port, Common Addr of ASDU, Cyclic Meter Period and, Synchronization Event
settings.Available for standard and IEC61850 models.
SNTP (*) Synchronization over Ethernet settings
PROCOME Comm port and slave number for procome protocol. Only available for
procome models (5).
PTP 1588 Precission Time Protocol 1588 settings. (Available on fw version 7.00 or higher)
Routing A default route and a maximum number of 6 static routes may be configured. The
default route is used as the last choice, if no other route towards a given destination is
found.This option is only available for version 7.00 and higher.

4.1.7.3 System setup menu
SYSTEM SETUP
General Settings This screen describes and enables the settings of the power system where the relay
operates. Some of these settings are used only for metering values presentation purposes;
however, some of them apply directly to the sampling and analog-digital conversion
process (rated frequency setting). Therefore, these settings need to be adjusted to fit the
system settings.
Flex Curves Flex Curves ‚Äì Programmable user curves: The relay incorporates 4 user curves called Flex
Curve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are defined by the user in Setpoint >
System Setup > Flex Curves > Edit Curve menu in EnerVista 650 Setup. User defined flex
curves can be selected as an operation curve in all the time overcurrent functions in the
relay.
Breaker Breaker Configuration
Switchgear: Configuration of snapshot events for each switchgear (enable or disable)
Miscellaneous Settings This screen contains settings related with relay working mode. Out of service setting,
Local/Remote mode and Active language mode are options listed below.
4.1.7.4 Breaker menu
Breaker settings Breaker settings, maintenance and switchgear selection of the device configured as breaker in the F650. The
selected switchgear is used in recloser, breaker failure and synchronism functions. The settings are Number of
Switchgear, Maximum KI2t, KI2t Integ. Time, Maximum Openings, Max.Openings 1 hour and Snapshot Events.
Breaker maintenance These settings correspond to the initialization of (KI)2t counters, and the counting of number of openings and
closings of the switchgear configured as breaker. These Counters allow the breaker Maintenance. They are
used to cumulate the breaker ageing produced by a trip or a breaker opening. In order to incorporate the
breaker historic, in case of existing breakers, the system allows assigning an initial value to accumulated
amperes, and to the number of opening and closing operations.
4.1.7.5 Protection elements menu

This option shows all protection elements available in the relay as shown in the following two tables (exact menu depends
on firmware version).
For firmware versions below 7.50, each group of protection elements includes the specific protection units of the same
type. For example phase currents group includes TOC, IOC, directional units, etc. There are three groups available, so there
are three protection units of each function that can work in grouped mode or ungrouped (altogether).
Table 4-4: Protection elements menu, firmware version below 7.50

Protection
Elements
Phase Current All overcurrent functions for phase current.
Neutral Current All overcurrent functions for neutral current. (Calculated from phases, not measured)
Ground Current All overcurrent functions for ground current. (Measured from 4th current input)
Sensitive Ground All overcurrent functions for sensitive ground current. (Measured from 5th current input)
Current
Negative Sequence All Negative sequence overcurrent functions.
Current
Voltage Elements All voltage functions for phases, neutral, ground and auxiliary voltage
Power Forward power, directional power and wattmetric ground fault (High and Low) protection
functions.

For firmware version 7.50 and above, there are six setting groups of protection elements. Protection element groups are
within each setting group.
Table 4-5: Protection elements menu, firmware version 7.50 or above

Protection
Elements
Setting Group 1 All protection functions available when setting group 1 is the active group

For firmware version 7.5 and above, the specific protection element menus shown are available under each setting group.
For firmware versions below 7.5, these menus are located directly under the Protection Element menu.
Table 4-6: Protection elements in each setting group

Phase Current
Phase TOC High Phase time overcurrent, high level (51PH)
Phase TOC Low Phase time overcurrent, low level (51PL)
Phase IOC High Phase instantaneous overcurrent, high level (50PH)
Phase IOC Low Phase instantaneous overcurrent, low level (50PL)
Phase Directional Phase directional unit (67P). Quadrature Voltage for polarization
Thermal Model Thermal model or Thermal image unit for phases (49)
Neutral Current
Neutral TOC Neutral time overcurrent (51N)
Neutral IOC Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (50N)
Neutral Directional Neutral directional unit (67N). Voltage, current and dual polarization.
Ground Current
Ground TOC Ground time overcurrent (51G)
Ground IOC Ground instantaneous overcurrent (50G)
Ground Directional Ground directional unit (67G). Voltage, current and dual polarization.
Sensitive Ground
Current
Sensitive Ground TOC Sensitive ground time overcurrent (51SG).
Sensitive Ground IOC Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent (50SG).
Isolated Ground IOC Isolated ground overcurrent (50IG)
Sensitive Ground Sensitive ground directional unit (67SG)
Directional
Negative
Sequence
Current
Negative Sequence Negative sequence time overcurrent (46P)
TOC
Voltage
Elements
Phase UV Phase undervoltage (27P)

Phase OV Phase overvoltage (59P)

Neutral OV High Neutral overvoltage, high level (59NH)
Neutral OV Low Neutral overvoltage, low level (59NL)
Negative Sequence OV Negative sequence overvoltage (47)
Auxiliary OV Auxiliary overvoltage (59X)
Auxiliary UV Auxiliary undervoltage (27X)
Power
Forward Power Forward power (32FP), in primary values.
Directional Power Directional power (32), in primary values.
Watt Gnd Flt High Wattmetric ground fault high (32N High), in secondary values
Watt Gnd Flt Low Wattmetric ground fault low (32N Low), in secondary values
Firmware version 7.50 and above also include Frequency and Miscellaneous menus in the Protection Element section.
Frequency
Underfrequency Underfrequency unit (81U).
Overfrequency Overfrequency unit (81O).
Frequency Rate of Frequency rate of change function (81R).
Change
Miscellaneous
Broken Conductor Broken or fallen conductor detection function (I2/I1). Grouped element. Ratio between
the negative sequence current, I2, and the positive sequence current I1. In normal and
balanced load situations, this ratio is zero, while in severe load fault conditions, an
unbalance is produced and this ratio is increased.
Locked Rotor Locked rotor detection function (48).
Load Encroachment Load Encroachment function.

4.1.7.6 Control elements menu

This option shows all protection elements available in the relay as shown in the following two tables (exact menu depends
on firmware version).
Table 4-7: Control elements menu, firmware version below 7.50

Control Elements
Setting Group Control elements can be used in either a single setting group (default mode-all units can
operate simultaneously) or three setting groups (elements are grouped in three
independent tables, with only one active at a given time).
Underfrequency Underfrequency unit (81U). Grouped element.
Overfrequency Overfrequency unit (81O). Grouped element.
Synchrocheck Synchronism check unit (25). Single element.
Autoreclose Recloser (79). Single element.
Breaker Failure Breaker failure (50BF). Single element
VT Fuse Failure Fuse Failure (VTFF). Single element.
Broken Conductor Broken or fallen conductor detection function (I2/I1). Grouped element.
Ratio between the negative sequence current, I2, and the positive sequence current I1. In
normal and balanced load situations, this ratio is zero, while in severe load fault conditions,
an unbalance is produced and this ratio is increased.
Locked Rotor Locked rotor detection function (48). Grouped element.
Pulse Counters Pulse counters function. 8 counters provided.
Analog Comparators Analog comparator function. 20 analog comparators provided.
Frequency Rate of Frequency rate of change function (81R). Grouped element.
Change
Load Encroachment Load Encroachment function. Grouped element.
Max. Number of Starts Maximum Number of Starts (66). Single element.
Digital Counters Up to 8 Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup Cold Load Pickup Function. Not grouped, a single unit provided (Available starting on
firmware version 7.00).
PLC Timer Masks Configuration of masks that can be assigned to PLC timers

Table 4-8: Control elements menu, firmware version 7.50 and above
Control Elements
Setting Group F650 incorporate a flexible grouping capability for protection units can be used in either
single setting group (default mode- All units that belong to Active group, configured in
Setpoint > Control > Setting Group, can operate simultaneously ) or up to six setting groups
(in this mode, all protection elements, that are available when setting group function is
disabled, will be available in each individual setting group (Up to maximum of 6). Only one
of setting group will be active at a given time). Units grouped under Protection elements
section will be the units affected by changing of setting group.
Synchrocheck Synchronism check unit (25). Single element.
Autoreclose Recloser (79). Single element.
Breaker Failure Breaker failure (50BF). Single element.
VT Fuse Failure Fuse Failure (VTFF). Single element.
Pulse Counters Pulse counters function. 8 counters provided.
Analog Comparators Analog comparator function. 20 analog comparators provided.
Max. Number of Starts Maximum Number of Starts (66). Single element.
Digital Counters Up to 8 Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup Cold Load Pickup Function. Single element. Available for firmware version 7.00 and above.
PLC Timer Masks Configuration of masks that can be assigned to PLC timers
60 CTS Failure Current transformer failure function
2nd HRMC Inhibit Second harmonic inhibit
4.1.7.7 Inputs/Outputs menu

Section that contains the settings for all input and output boards and the Force Outputs and Virtual inputs activation tools.
Inputs/Outputs
Contact I/O Inputs and outputs settings for all boards in F650. The I/O settings configuration can only
be performed through EnerVista 650 Setup, not available through the HMI.
Force Outputs (*) This menu allows activating each contact output in the relay, to facilitate maintenance
testing. Online mode only.
Virtual Inputs (*) This menu allows operating virtual inputs. These variables are used as inputs to logic
schemes configured in the relay. Virtual inputs can be operated in a latched mode (32
latched virtual inputs) or in Self-reset mode (32 self reset virtual inputs).
Remote Comms. This menu allows configuring remote inputs coming from other devices and allow
enabling None, GSSE or GOOSE messages. Available for IEC61850 (6) models only.
This section shows the settings related to inputs and outputs for the different boards available in F650 (F, G, H, J)
Contact I/O
Board F Board located in first slot, always connected.
Board G Board located in second slot, depending on model definition. If model is type G0 there is no
board in second slot.
Board H Board located in first slot of CIO Module (external inputs/outputs module)
Board J Board located in second slot of CIO Module (external inputs/outputs module)

4.1.7.8 Quick settings menu

This menu allows quick access to the main Setpoints of the relay.
Figure 4-13: Quick Settings
4.1.7.9 Relay configuration menu

This is the relay configuration section in which the relay can be configured using internal states or already compiled
equation on PLC Editor
.
Relay
Configuration
Outputs Configuration of contact output operate and reset signals for all boards.
LEDs 15 LEDs fully configurable from any logical variable, contact or virtual input. First 5 LEDs
are latched by hardware, the rest are self-reset but can be latched through PLC
configuration. For firmware version 7.20 and higher, all 15 LEDs can be latched by setting.
From the LED configuration screen, it is possible to print the vertical LED label for the relay.
Operations Configurable operations up to 24. Operation texts, interlocks, final states, frontal keys, time
outs and masters.
Protection Elements This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different protection
elements. To block, reset, initiate the different protection elements inputs.
Control Elements This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different control elements.
Oscillography Trigger and up to 16 digital channels to be included in oscillography records, are
programmable from any logical variable, contact or virtual input. Text configuration is only
for offline mode.
NOTE: This screen is used for the configuration of digital channels and oscillography
trigger. The rest of parameters, such as function enabling/disabling, sampling rate,
number of oscillography files, etc. must be set on the Setpoint > Product Setup >
Oscillography menu.
Control Events Up to 128 user programmable events from any logical variable, contact or virtual input.
Possibility to display the event as an alarm on the alarms panel. Control events are also
displayed in the snapshot events recording. 1 ms time tagging.
A control event is a logic signal associated with an operand or combination of operands,
that allows following the status of that signal.

Switchgear Up to 16 configurable switchgear elements. A switchgear element can be a breaker, a line

selector switch, a grounding selector switch, a busbar selector switch, etc. This screen
allows configuration of type of contacts, opening and closing time, contact assignation
and text for events related to switchgear. There are 64 pre-established events for
switchgear, which correspond to opening, closing, Error01 and Error11 of the 16
programmable switchgear elements.
Remote outputs Up to 32 DNA bits and 64 user St bits to be transmitted to remote devices over CAN using
GSSE messages
Inputs Text configuration for offline mode file management for all the contact inputs available in
device.
Virtual Inputs Text configuration for offline mode file management. 32 latched and 32 self reset virtual
inputs.
MMI (HMI-Human Screen one line diagram configuration. This menu shows a canvas to draw a simplified
Machine Interface) one-line diagram of a bay in a feeder, line, transformer, etc. The menu includes a library for
power elements, metering elements, text and drawings. See an example on the next page.
The following figures show an example of the default factory configuration for F650:
Figure 4-14: Relay configuration

Figure 4-15: HMI configuration
4.1.7.10 Logic Configuration menu

This logic configuration allows creating more complex configurations, using the graphical PLC, than using the tables from
Relay Configuration. For file management detailed information go to section 4.1.4 File management menu.
File description:
*.pep:Header for Logic project: PLC project file containing the necessary information relative to the relay model, logic
libraries included in the project (*.lib), graphic file name (*.aut), etc.
*.aut:PLC Project file containing all the drawings used by the logic, required by 650 relay based on IEC 61131-3 standard.
Functional block diagram (FDB).
*.lib:User programmable logic objects: Library file to be included as an object in a PLC project. Logic packages that can be
stored into libraries and be distributed in different PLC projects.

4.1.7.11 IEC 103 Configuration menu

This menu allows to update the IEC 103 configuration of the unit.
Figure 4-16: IEC 103 Configurator

See chapter 5.13
4.1.7.12 Clock menu

This menu allows updates to the date and time of the relay, either synchronizing them with the PC clock, or entering the
information manually.
Figure 4-17: Clock

4.1.8 Actual values menu

The menu bar in the main screen of EnerVista 650 Setup software shows the ACTUAL menu option. This option
concentrates and displays all the status of protection, control elements, metering, counters information, oscillography,
events, fault locator, etc. This section shows only the structure of menus in EnerVista 650 Setup.
Actual
Front Panel The relay front LED status is shown on this menu.
Status Protection and control status signals for all available protection functions in device.
Metering All metering values available in device. Primary and secondary values, frequency and
phasor diagram provided.
Inputs/Outputs All input and output status provided. For contact inputs and contact outputs as well as
virtual input and virtual output signals.
Records Only enabled in online mode, retrieval of all the available records in device. Snapshot
events, control events, oscillography and fault reports.
4.1.8.1 Front panel

The front panel menu shows the LEDs submenu where all the front LEDs can be monitored.
4.1.8.2 Status
The following menu includes all the available protection status in the device. Location of different menus can vary
depending firmware version.
status
Operation Bits Up to 24 elements. OPERATION BIT XX is (0) when the configured time out for the operation
XX expires or when success conditions are met. And it is (1) if operation XX is executed and
interlocks are fulfilled.
Breaker Breaker status (open, closed or undefined). The rest of the status signals corresponding to
the switchgear XX configured as breaker are in the Status > Switchgear Status >
Switchgear XX menu.
Protection Status of all the protection units in the device.
Control Elements Status of all the control units available in the device.
Protection Summary This screen shows a complete list of all protection and control elements in the relay,
showing their status (enabled or not).
Snapshots Events Summary of the snapshot events status (enabled or disabled) for protection, control, inputs
summary and outputs boards and switchgear.
ModBus User Map Up to 256 elements. Value in SIGNED INT 16 BIT format of the reading for the selected
address configured in Setpoint > Product Setup > ModBus User Map
Switchgear Status Up to 16 blocks of switchgear status signals for the 16 configurable devices. Status signals
such as inputs for A and B contacts, status for A and B, open and close status, error 00 and
error 11, open init and close init, fail to open and fail to close signals.
Calibration Internal states for calibration. Factory calibration and calibration error signals.
FlexCurves Flex curve status for A, B, C and D user curves. (0) if it is not configured, (1) if it is configured.
To configure a flex curve go to Setpoint > System Setup > Flex Curves menu.
System Info This screen can monitor the system parameters and the internal status of the Relay
operating system. Not enabled by default, password required
Records Status Information related to the different records stored in the Relay, such as: Fault reports,
control events, oscillography, data logger, demand, energy, and breaker maintenance.
SNTP-IRIG_B & PTP Information related to synchronization via IRIG_B, SNTP or PTP1588.
1588
Versions Information related to the different firmware versions and hardware revisions.
Redundancy Information related to the status of the frames sent through PRP and HSR. Also information
related to the status of RSTP port.

Table 4-9: Protection elements, actual values menu

Protection
Protection Blocks This screen shows all the protection element blocks available. Protection elements block
signals can be configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements.
Phase Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent, instantaneous
overcurrent and directional protection functions for phase current.
Neutral Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent, instantaneous
overcurrent and directional protection functions for neutral current (calculated from
phases).
Ground Current Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent, instantaneous
overcurrent and directional protection functions for ground current (measured from 4th
current input).
Sensitive Ground Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for time overcurrent, instantaneous
Current overcurrent, isolated and directional protection functions for ground current (measured
from 5th current input).
Negative Sequence Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for negative sequence time overcurrent
Current function.
Thermal Model Protection status signals for thermal model. Reset, alarm and operation signals for phases
and for unit, besides the thermal image values in percentage for all phases and units.
Voltage Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for all voltage functions, undervoltage,
overvoltage, neutral overvoltage, negative sequence overvoltage and auxiliary under and
over voltage.
Power Protection status signals (pickups and operations) for forward, directional and wattmetric
ground fault (high and low) power units, and power factor status. Power values for 32N
High and Low functions (in watts).
Table 4-10: Control elements, actual values menu, firmware versions below 7.50
Control Elements
Frequency Status signals (pickups and operations) for under, overfrequency and frequency rate of
change units.
Synchrocheck Status signals for synchrocheck function (25).
Autoreclose Status signals for autoreclose function (79). Close signal, recloser status (ready, lockout,
etc.), block signals after each shot.
Breaker Failure Status signals for breaker failure function (50BF).
VT Fuse Failure Fuse failure detection signal.
Broken Conductor Status signals (pickups and operations) for broken conductor (I2/I1).
Setting Groups Status signals (activations and blocks) for the relay setting group change. By default the
"setting group" setting is disabled and all the grouped elements can be enabled at the
same time.
Locked Rotor Status signals (pickups and operations) for locked rotor units.
Pulse Counters Status signals for pulse counters units.
Analog Comparator Status signals for analog comparator units.
Load Encroachment Status signals (pickups and operations) for load encroachment units.
Max. Number of Starts Status signal for number of starts operations
Digital Counters Status signals for the Digital Counter units.
Cold Load Pickup Status signals for the Cold Load Pickup Function.

Table 4-11: Control elements, actual values menu, firmware version 7.50 and above
Control Elements
Frequency Status signals (pickups and operations) for under, overfrequency and frequency rate of
change units.
Synchrocheck Status signals for synchrocheck function (25).
Autoreclose Status signals for autoreclose function (79). Close signal, recloser status (ready, lockout, etc.),
block signals after each shot.
Breaker Failure Status signals for breaker failure function (50BF).
VT Fuse Failure Fuse failure detection signal.
Broken Conductor Status signals (pickups and operations) for broken conductor (I2/I1).
Setting Groups Status signals (activations and blocks) for the relay setting group change. By default the
Setting Groups setting is disabled and all the grouped elements can be enabled at the same
time.
Locked Rotor Status signals (pickups and operations) for locked rotor units.
Pulse Counters Status signals for pulse counters units.
Analog Comparator Status signals for analog comparator units.
Load Encroachment Status signals (pickups and operations) for load encroachment units.
Max. Number of Starts Status signal for number of starts operations
Digital Counters Status signals for the Digital Counter units.
Cold Load Pickup Status signals for the Cold Load Pickup Function.
60CTS Failure Status signals of Current transformer failure Function
2nd HRMC Inhibit Status signals of Second Harmonic Inhibit Function
Table 4-12: Records status, actual values menu

Record Status
Fault Reports This menu shows the fault report status signals, as fault report trigger, fault date, fault type
and location, besides the fault report number.
Control Events Status of the control events (if the signal configured to launch the control event is active or
not).
Oscillography Status of signals related to oscillography recording, such as status or digital channels,
oscillography trigger, number of records available, etc.
Data Logger Data logger information about oldest and newest sample time stamp, and number of
channels and days configured in data logger settings.
Demand Demand trigger and reset inputs status.
Energy Freeze, unfreeze and reset input signals for energy counters.
Breaker Maintenance All signals related to breaker maintenance, such as number of openings, closings, (KI)2t
counters, alarm signal for (KI)2t, etc.
4.1.8.3 Metering
The Metering menu includes all the measurements available in the device. Primary and secondary values, and also the
data related to the recording functions in the relay
metering
Primary Values Primary values measurements for currents, voltages, power, energy and demand
Secondary Values Secondary values measurements for currents, voltages and power.
Phasor Diagram Current, voltage and sequence components.
Frequency Line and Bus frequencies.

4.1.8.4 Inputs/Outputs menu

The Inputs/Outputs menu includes all the inputs and outputs signals available in the device. Contact and virtual type.
inputs/outputs
Contact Inputs Status of digital inputs in the Relay for each board according to the relay model.
Contact Output Status Status of digital outputs in the Relay for each board according to the relay model.
Contact Outputs Status (activated or not) of the variables used to operate a contact output. To configure
Operates these signals go to Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs menu.
Contact Outputs Status (activated or not) of the variables used to reset a contact output. To configure these
Resets signals go to Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs menu. This output reset
Command is only effective if latch is selected for Output Type setting on the I/O board,
thus the contact output has been configured to emulate function 86 (latching relay).
IO Board Status Status of I/O boards. This status provides if the hardware it is OK (boards matching relay
model, correctly inserted in their tracks, in good state and communicating through the
internal CAN bus).
Virtual Inputs Status of Virtual inputs latched (32) and self-reset (32).
Virtual Outputs Status of virtual outputs (configured in PLC Editor). Up to 512.
Remote Outputs States of remote outputs for IEC61850 models.
Remote Inputs Status of remote device and remote inputs for IEC61850 models.
Analog Inputs (*) Measurements coming from analog inputs (DCMA)
Virtual Output Latched Status of Virtual Output Latched (configured in PLC Editor). Up to 16.
Virtual output Status of Virtual OutputAnalogues configured in PLC Editor). Up to 49 float values and 49
Analogue integer values can be used.
4.1.8.5 Records menu

The Records menu is only available in online mode and includes the possibility to retrieve all the records available in the
device. By serial or Ethernet.
Records (*)
Event recorder (*) Retrieval and visualization of snapshot event (all and new), control events and alarm panel.
By serial or Ethernet (ModBus RTU or TCP/IP)
Waveform capture (*) Retrieval of oscillography files, by Ethernet.
Fault Report (*) Retrieval and visualization of fault report files, by Ethernet.
Data logger (*) Retrieval and visualization of data logger files. Only by Ethernet.

4.1.9 Operations menu

Option only available in online mode, showing all the operations previously configured in the relay with their
corresponding texts, which must be different from the default text (Op_X not configured).
operations
Operation 1 (*) Entry to first operation (with its corresponding text)
... ...
Operation 24 (*) Entry to 24th operation (with its corresponding text)
4.1.10 Communications menu

The communication menu includes the computer screen to start communicating with the relay, the different update
procedures available in device: firmware, operating system, web server and other file storing capabilities (upload and
download info files to/from relay).
For more detail information go to section 4.1.3 Connect to the relay for communication menus description and to section 5
for flash memory update procedures.
Communication
Computer Menu to start communication with the relay.
Modem (**) Configure the unit for remote communications via modem, using a telephone line. This is
only available if the relay is not communicating and if modem has been selected under
Communication > Computer control type.
Troubleshooting (*) Read/write to ModBus addresses, for verifying communications and access to different
positions in the ModBus memory map. Only available if the communication has already
been established.
Calibration (*) Retrieve the unit calibration settings and storing them in a file (with extension *.cal). For
reading or storing the calibration settings in the relay go to Communications >
Calibration > Get or Set calibration settings and select the intended calibration file. The
calibration retrieval process must be performed before updating the operating system.
When the firmware and bootcode are updated, all the data in the relay is deleted,
including the factory calibration settings. When only the firmware is updated (for versions
higher than 1.50), the calibration settings are automatically saved in the relay.
Upgrade relay (**) Upgrade firmware version (Ethernet connection): Update the relay firmware through
Ethernet communication . Firmware is related to the relay internal program, designed by
GE Multilin, which performs the protection and control functions, and which is run by the
relay main microprocessor.
Upgrade 650 web Upgrade 650 web server (Ethernet connection):Go to Communications > Upgrade 650 web
server server. The relay web server application can be updated to further versions (if available)
using this menu without modifying the relay operating system.
Upload info files to Upload info files to relay (Ethernet connection): This functionality is used to store setting
relay files (*.650) inside the relay, as well as auxiliary files used by the programmable logic
graphical editor (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib).
Download info files Download info files from relay (Ethernet connection): This functionality is used for
from relay retrieving the files (*.650 and *.pep, *.aut, *.lib) that have been previously stored in the
relay flash memory.

CAREFULLY READ THE FLASH MEMORY UPDATE PROCEDURE DESCRIBED IN SECTION

CAUTION “BOOT CODE AND FIRMWARE" AND CLOSE ALL RUNNING APPLICATIONS BEFORE
PERFORMING FIRMWARE AND OPERATING SYSTEM UPDATES.
For firmware versions below 7.00, check that the firmware version that is going to be
NOTICE updated matches the operating system version of the relay before updating firmware. If
not, update the operating system before proceeding to update the firmware. Other
combinations of firmware and operating system different from the listed in section 5 will
not be operative.
For previous version than 7.00 the operating system version is available in the logotype
main screen in HMI; it is the number between brackets in the first line, e.g. F650 1.70 (2.35).
The operating system version is 2.35
*.650 files contain protection, control settings, relay configuration and compiled logic equations. This
NOTICE file can be retrieved from the relay, using the File > Get info from relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup
(through serial or Ethernet communication). File > Send info to relay option stores this *.650 file in
the relay.
*.pep, *.aut and *.lib files contain the logic configuration projects necessary to modify the logic
(virtual outputs) in the relay. These files can be stored in the relay, using the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup (through Ethernet communication). They can
be retrieved using Communication > Download info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup
program (Ethernet communication). Take into account that the *.pep, *.aut and library files are
necessary to modify the PLC logic (virtual outputs). Without these files setting and configuration can
be modified but not logic equations (virtual outputs). It is advisable to use the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option to store these logic configuration files into the relay.
*.pep, *.aut and *.lib files contain the logic configuration projects necessary to modify the logic
(virtual outputs) in the relay. These files can be stored in the relay, using the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup (through Ethernet communication). They can
be retrieved using Communication > Download info files to relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup
program (Ethernet communication). Take into account that the *.pep, *.aut and library files are
necessary to modify the PLC logic (virtual outputs). Without these files setting and configuration can
be modified but not logic equations (virtual outputs). It is advisable to use the Communication >
Upload info files to relay option to store these logic configuration files into the relay.

An example of Communication > Troubleshooting follows:
Figure 4-18: Communication troubleshooting example
4.1.11 Security menu

The security menu includes all the menus related to security control in EnerVista 650 Setup. EnerVista 650 Setup security
users and passwords are not related to passwords in HMI. Each security level has its own access for HMI management
and EnerVista 650 Setup management.
security
Login User (*) Log on menu for EnerVista 650 Setup. Enabled after security control has been enabled in
user management menu.
Change Password (*) Menu to change passwords and establish password recovering questions.
User Management (*) User management dialog box.

4.1.12 View menu

The view menu includes the computer screen to start communicating with the relay, the different update procedures
available in device: firmware, operating system, web server and other file storing capabilities (upload and download info
files to/from relay).
The ModBus memory map is detailed in the complete instruction manual (English only) and can be obtained from
EnerVista 650 Setup program.
View
Traces (*) ModBus communication traces between the EnerVista 650 Setup and the relay.
ModBus Memory map Complete ModBus memory map description.
Languages (**) Option to change the EnerVista 650 Setup default language. Only available if the relay is
not communicating and no file (*650) is open.
4.1.13 Help menu

Complete instructions manual and data about EnerVista 650 Setup release.
Help
Instruction Manual Instructions manual in the language selected in View > Languages.
GE Mulitlin on the Web GE Multilin web page link.
About EnerVista 650 Release version and date of the EnerVista 650 Setup program.
Setup

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)
4.2 Human-machine interface (HMI)

The HMI interface consists of several functional panels. The faceplate can be unscrewed to allow easy access to the
removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the display and other cover that protects the front
RS232 Communications port and the commands buttons that can be sealed. The following figure shows the HMI in F650
HMI Interface
DISPLAY & LEDS
Graphic 16x40 or text 4x20 LCD display

Fluorescent backlight to improve visibility
Multicolor programmable LEDs with label panel
KEYPAD & SHUTTLE
Ergonomic programmable keys

Shuttle control for easy navigation
ESC key, built-in ENTER function and audio feedback
Local / Remote / Off pushbutton with LEDs
FRONT PORT
Electrically isolated front RS232 communication port

Transparent cover can be sealed for security
Figure 4-19: HMI interface, available for firmware versions 7.00 and below

4.2 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES
Figure 4-20: Enhanced HMI interface
4.2.1 Display
F650 units are available with two different options for the front display. The first option is an alphanumerical display of 4
lines with 20 characters each, and the second option is a graphical display of 16 lines with 40 characters each (128x240
pixels).
The boot code and firmware versions can be seen in the relay text main screen, this screen is the default screen in the text
menu for all models: After the text "F650", appears the relay firmware version (7.00 in the example), and between brackets
the boot program version (7.00 in the example), followed by "General Electric", the relay model and the default front port
(COM2) communication parameters.
F650 7.00 (7.00)

General Electric
F650MZKF2G1HI6E
19200N81: MODBUS: 254
Figure 4-21: Text main screen

4.2.2 LED indicators

The relay provides 16 LED indicators, 15 user programmable plus one non-configurable LED (READY) that shows if the relay
is in service.
Programmable LEDs are divided into groups of 5 LEDs, each of the groups having a different color. The first group of LED
indicators is latched by hardware (red), usually configured for trip signals. The second group (yellow) and third group
(green) of LED indicators are self-reset and will reset once the condition has been cleared. These LEDs can also be latched
using logic through PLC configuration. For firmware version 7.20 and above, all 15 LEDs are latched through relay settings.
The ESC key is used to reset any latched LED indicator, once the condition has been cleared. Keep the ESC button pressed
for more than 3 seconds; all LEDs light up, verifying their correct operation. When releasing the ESC key, all indicators
programmed with memory, such as tripping LEDs, are reset. For models with enhanced display, there is a reset LEDs
button dedicated for this purpose.
The latched conditions can also be reset via communications using the LED reset input (to configure this signal go to
Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Control Elements > LED RESET INPUT). By default this LED reset input signal is set to
LEDS RESET operation.
4.2.3 Pushbuttons
The front panel provides:
Push buttons: keypad (5 user programmable plus ESC/ESCAPE non configurable), shuttle key or keypad for easy
navigation, command pushbutton to select operations mode.
RS232/USB port: intended for connection to a portable PC.
4.2.3.1 Keypad and shuttle key
I
This button can be used for closing the user-programmable switchgear. It is fully
programmable by the user.
O This button can be used for closing the user-programmable switchgear. It is fully
programmable by the user.
*
User programmable.
F1
User programmable.
F2 User programmable.
(ESC) Escape key. When pressed for more than 3 seconds, it tests all LEDs and resets the
ESC
trip LEDs.
Rotary knob or Shuttle Key (it can be both rotated and pressed): Used for selecting
menus, submenus, settings and for confirmation. Press or rotate the shuttle key to enter
the text main menu from the text standby screen.
Figure 4-22: Keypad and shuttle key description, basic display models (not enhanced)

8sed for closing the user programmable

switchgear. It is fully Srogrammable.
8VHGIRUFORVLQJWKHXVHUSURJUDPPDEOH
VZLWFKJHDU,WLVIXOO\SURJUDPPDEOH
F1. User programmable.
F2. User programmable.
F3 / *. User programmable.
Up Key. Used for selecting menus,

submenus, DQGseWtinJV
Down Key. Used for selecting menus,
submenus, and changLQJ values of settings
Enter Key. Press to enter to submenus

or to change values.
Escape key. Press key to exit from menus
Reset key. 3UHVVWR test all LEDs and reset

the trip LEDs.
Figure 4-23: Enhanced keypad description

4.2.3.2 Command push button

The unit incorporates a command pushbutton located at the bottom right side of the HMI interface and at the top left for
Enhanced interface, with three options: local, remote, and off. The first option (LOCAL) allows executing operations in local
mode (HMI, front port, and rear COM2 port). The second option (REMOTE) allows operation execution only through remote
communications (COM1 and ETH_1/ETH2 or ETH_E/ETH_A/ETH_B (Depending on model)). The third option (OFF) blocks the
execution of operations. Each position is identified with an LED indicator, as follows:
LOCAL operations (green)

REMOTE operations (green)
OFF (red)
Press the command button to switch from local to remote operations mode and vice versa. OFF status (operation inhibited
for maintenance and safety) can be reach pressing the commands pushbutton during several seconds (local-remote-off
sequence).
The local-remote-off sequence can be also available through communications (see chapter 5.8), with a configurable signal
that can be set in the Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Control Elements screen.
4.2.4 Front port and cover sealing system

The following Figure 4-24: Detail of front port and cover sealing system shows a detail of the front RS232 communication
port and local/remote button access cover sealing system in basic (not enhanced) displays. The sealing system is similar
to the one used in energy meters, using wire and plumb seal. High quality plastic have been used in the design to
withstand extreme environmental conditions, both mechanical and electrical, sun radiation, humidity, etc. in order to
guarantee a long life for the unit.
Cover sealing system
Screen contrast regulator
Electrically isolated RS232 port
Local/remote Operations access
Figure 4-24: Detail of front port and cover sealing system

4.2.5 Screen contrast

Regulation of screen contrast should be performed as described below depend on display model selected:
Basic HMI:Dedicated screen contrast regulator is located below cover sealing system. See Figure 4-24: Detail of front port
and cover sealing system.
Enhanced HMI: Backlight level regulation can be performed by using enhanced keypad. Reset button must be pressed at
the same time that the up or down key is pressed to increase or decrease the contrast.
4.2.6 Text menus
4.2.6.1 Navigation
Text menu is available for all models, this is the main menu for visualizing actual values, metering, changing settings, etc.
through the HMI. In models with graphical display besides this text main menu there are several screens providing more
performance for control purposes.
Press (or rotate left or right) the enter/shuttle key to enter the main menu, starting from the standby screen (default main
screen). The default main screen can be accessed pressing ESC key until it appears. In all the navigation press the enter/
shuttle key to select the desired header display (top-level menu). Each press of the enter/shuttle key advances through the
main heading pages as illustrated below. To return to previous menus press the ESC key. To move inside the top-level
menu without changing to other low levels, rotate the shuttle key left to move up and right to move down (or use up/down
keys).
When rotating the shuttle key (or up/down keys) the selected menu is marked by a single scroll bar character. The mark (>)
in the right part of any menu means that contains more than one level.
Figure 4-25: Text menu navigation Shows an example of main menu navigation:
Figure 4-25: Text menu navigation

4.2.6.2 Text menu hierarchy

The structure of HMI text menu is similar to the EnerVista 650 Setup menu in the actual values and settings (view and
change) menus. The main menu shows the following options:
Name Description Navigation in menu

Actual Values Actual values of all the signals available in device. Press shuttle key or enter key to enter next level.
Status of protection and control elements, Press ESC to return to default main screen.
measurements, inputs and outputs, etc.
Snapshot events Visualization of all snapshot events in text mode (two Press shuttle key or enter key to visualize snapshot
screens for each snapshot event). In graphical displays events in text menu. Press ESC to return to default
there can be seen in a dedicated screen. main screen.
Fault Report Fault reports information available in HMI (two screens Press shuttle key or enter key to enter next level.
for each fault report) Move Up/Downto see all the available fault reports
in device. Press shuttle key or enter key to enter
particular information for fault report selected.
View Settings Visualization of all protection and control settings Press shuttle key or enter keyto enter next level.
available in device. Move Up/Down to select submenu. Press ESC to
return to previous level.
Change Settings Menu that allows changing all protection and control Press shuttle key or enter key to enter next level.
settings available in device. Inputs and outputs Move Up/Down to select submenu. Press esc to
settings, relay configuration and logic configuration return to previous level.
are not available in HMI, only via EnerVista 650 Setup
software.
Date & Time Date and time visualization and modification by user. First mode is visualization. Press again shuttle key
or enter key to start modification in date and time.
Press ESC to return to previous level.
Commands Operations execution in local mode. Move Up/Down to pre select operation. Press
shuttle key or enter key to select and confirm.
Press ESC to return to previous level.
Password Password menu for settings and commands Move Up/Down to select submenu. Press shuttle
key or enter key to enter next level. Press ESC to
Select Main Screen Selection of default main screen in text menu. Move Up/Down to select the default main screen
type. Press shuttle key or enter key to confirm.
Select Language Language selection. Between default language (see Move Up/Down to select the default language.
order code) and English. Press shuttle key or enter key to confirm selection.
Switch the relay off and on.
< - return Return to previous level Press shuttle key or enter key to return to previous
level.
4.2.6.3 Actual Values

The Actual Values menu option in HMI concentrates and displays all the status of protection, control elements, metering,
counters information, oscillography, events, fault locator, etc.
Front Panel >

LEDs
Status >
Operation Bits
Breaker

Protection > Protection Blocks

Phase Current
Neutral Current
Ground Current
Sens. Ground Current
Neg. Seq. Current
Thermal Model
Voltage
Power
Voltage
Power
Control Elements > Frequency

Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure
Broken Conductor
Setting Groups
Locked Rotor
Pulse Counters
Analog Comparators
Load Encroachment
Max. Number of starts
Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup
Switchgear Status > Switchgear 1

Switchgear...
Switchgear 16
Calibration
FlexCurves
System Info
Records Status > Fault Reports
Control Events
Oscillography
Data logger
Demand
Energy
Breaker Maintenance
SNTP-IRIG_B-PTP
Versions
Redundancy
Metering >
Primary Values > Current
Voltage
Power
Energy
Demand
Secondary Values > Current

Voltage
Power
Frequency
Inputs/Outputs >
Contact Inputs > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output St. > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output Op. > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J
Cont. Output Rs. > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J

IO Board Status
Virtual Inputs > Virtual Inp.Latched
Virtual Inp.SR
Virtual Outputs
Remote Outputs (for DNA
IEC61850 models only) > User St
GOOSE Dig Outputs
Remote Inputs for IEC61850 Remote Input
models only)> Remote Devices
GOOSE Dig Inputs
GOOSE Analog Inputs
Analog Inputs > Board F/ Board G/ Board H/ Board J

Virtual out. Latched
Virtual out. Analogue
To enter this menu press the shuttle key or enter key when the option Actual Values is selected in main menu. A secondary
level is displayed with different sublevels as shown on . Pressing Up/down keys or rotating the shuttle key, (left for moving
up and right for moving down) select the next level to be displayed, press the enter/shuttle key again to enter in next level
and press ESC key to return to previous level if desired. This navigation is performed the same for all the menus in Actual
Values. Once the last sublevel is reached, move up and down to visualize the actual values selected.
One example of data screen for actual values is shown in Figure 4-26: Actual values screen data.
First Line: Header of last level in actual values (Phase Current in the example)
Second Line: Data identifier (in the example PH IOC1 HIGH A, is the pickup signal for the first instantaneous overcurrent
function level high for phase A).
Third line: Status of the displayed actual value.
Fourth Line:Relative position in the menu (it is the first value of 114)
Phase Current
PH IOC1 HIGH A PKP
OFF
(1/114)
Figure 4-26: Actual values screen data

In the Actual Values menus are different types of data; each type of data displays its particular status type (on and off, 0 or
1, OK or fail, analog values, etc.)
4.2.6.4 Snapshot events

To enter this menu press the enter/shuttle key when the option Snapshot events is selected in main menu (). In this menu
all the snapshot events stored can be displayed.
Snapshot events are changes in the relay internal status.
One snapshot event is displayed in two text screens:
The first screen display the status, date and time of the snapshot event: the snapshot event identifier, its status, event
number and the date and time of the occurrence. If the snapshot event identifier does not fit the first line, the whole text is
shown using as well the second line alternating with the status and event number.
The second screen displays currents and voltages in primary values for that particular snapshot event. Ia, Ib, Ic and Ig for
currents and Vab, Vbc, Vca and V0 for voltages. To access the metering screen in snapshot events menu, press shuttle key
from the snapshot event first screen. To exit from the metering screen press ESC.

To select different snapshot events to be displayed, press the up-down keys or rotate the shuttle key to select the
snapshot event and then press the enter/shuttle key to enter the metering screen. Press esc to exit the metering screen
and return to snapshot events menu.
Figure 4-27: Snapshot event navigation HMI shows an example of snapshot events navigation:
Press enter/shuttle key from the default main screen and enter in the main text
menu.
Move the shuttle key or press up-down keys until a single scroll bar character
(o) appears in the left part of Snapshot event header.
Press enter/shuttle key to enter in the snapshot events menu)
Select the snapshot event to display using the up/down keys or shuttle key (left
and right to move up and down inside the recorded snapshot events).
Once selected the snapshot event, identifier, status, date and time are
displayed.
In the second line St: is showing the status and the relative snapshot index from
the whole recorded number. Third and fourth lines are used to display the time
and date of the snapshot event.
Pressing the enter/shuttle key the metering screen for the snapshot event is
displayed.
To exit from this screen press the ESC key and return to the snapshot events
menu.
Figure 4-27: Snapshot event navigation HMI
4.2.6.5 Fault report

To enter the Fault Report menu, press the enter/shuttle key when the option Fault report is selected in main menu (). This
menu displays information about the last ten faults recorded in the relay.
The relay HMI can handle fault reports stored in the relay in two different ways:
1. Show fault warning messages on the HMI display when the fault is produced. This option is disabled by default. To
enable the display of warning messages from the HMI go to the menu Change Settings > Product Setup > Fault
Report > Show Fault On HMI and select Enable.
2. Save information from the last ten faults in the relay. View in the HMI Fault Report menu
In the first option, when a fault occurs a warning message is displayed including information about the fault in two
screens, one with general fault information, and a second with the measured values at the time the fault occurred.

The fault-warning message must be acknowledged by the user before performing any other operation. In the event of
several consecutive faults, the HMI shows the most recent fault, however the user needs to acknowledge all faults (up to a
maximum of ten faults).
In the second option, fault reports can be viewed through the HMI Fault Report menu accessed by pressing the enter/
shuttle key. The display shows information from the last ten faults, including both general information and metering
screens for each fault. Displayed information starts with the most recent fault, and previous faults can be viewed by
rotating the enter/shuttle key.
Displayed information is stored in the relay volatile memory, so if the relay is turned off this information is lost, as also
happens if a Clear Fault Report command is executed. However, saved fault reports stored in the relay non-volatile
memory remain after the Fault reset, and can be obtained from the relay using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, Actual >
Records > Fault report.
If there is no fault report available through the display, the relay shows a Fault report not available message.
The format of the displayed screens is as follows:
Select the Fault report menu in text menu
If there is more than one fault record press the up-down keys or rotate the shuttle
key and select the desired record to be displayed.
First screen with general fault information: Fault report #number, fault type,
distance and date and time.
Second screen with metering data for that fault record. All this data is a summary
from the fault report file that can be retrieved via EnerVista 650 Setup software.
Figure 4-28: Fault report navigation in HMI

Possible fault types are as follows:
GROUND Ground faults

AG phase A to ground
ABG phase AB to ground
BG phase BG to ground
BCG phase BCG to ground
CG phase CG to ground
CAG phase CAG to ground
PHASE Phase to phase faults
AB phase A to phase B
BC phase B to phase C
CA phase C to phase A
3PHASE Three-phase faults (shown on the display as 3PH)
NAF Fault type not calculated
4.2.6.6 View settings menu

To enter this menu press the enter/shuttle key when the option View Settings is selected in main menu (o). A secondary
level is displayed with different sublevels. Pressing up-down keys or rotating the shuttle key, (left for moving up and right
for moving down) select the next level to be displayed (o), press the enter/shuttle key again to enter in next level and press
esc key to return to previous level if desired. This navigation is performed the same for all the menus in "View Settings".
Once the last sublevel is reached, move up and down to see the available settings.
MAIN SETTINGS FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL

MENU
Product Setup >
Communication >
Serial Ports
Ethernet > Ethernet A
Ethernet B
Ethernet E
Redundancy
ModBus Protocol
DNP3 Slave (Available for standard and DNP3 Slave 1..3
IEC61850 models)>
IEC 870-5-104(Available for standard and
IEC61850 models)>
SNTP
PROCOME (Available for procome models
only).
PTP 1588
Routing
Fault Report
Oscillography
Demand
Time Settings
System Setup >
General Settings


MENU
Breaker > Breaker Settings
Breaker Maintenance
Misc. settings
Protection Element >
(*) See note
Phase Current >
Phase TOC High > Phase TOC High 1..3
Phase TOC Low > Phase TOC Low 1..3
Phase IOC High > Phase IOC High 1..3
Phase IOC Low > Phase IOC Low 1..3
Phase Directional > Phase Directional 1..3
Thermal Model > Thermal Model 1..3
Neutral Current >
Neutral TOC > Neutral TOC 1..3
Neutral IOC > Neutral IOC 1..3
Neutral Dir > Neutral Dir 1..3
Ground Current >
Ground TOC > Ground TOC 1..3
Ground IOC > Ground IOC 1..3
Ground Dir > Ground Dir 1..3
Sens. Ground Curr >
Sens. Ground TOC. > Sens. Ground TOC 1..3
Sens. Ground IOC > Sens. Ground IOC 1..3
Isolated Gnd IOC > Isolated Gnd IOC 1..3
Sens. Ground Dir. > Sens. Ground Dir. 1..3
Neg. Seq. Current >
Neg. Seq. TOC > Neg. Seq. TOC 1..3
Voltage Elements >
Phase UV > Phase UV 1..3
Phase OV > Phase OV 1..3
Neutral OV High > Neutral OV High 1..3
Neutral OV Low > Neutral OV Low 1..3
Neg. Seq. OV > Neg. Seq. OV 1..3
Auxiliary OV > Auxiliary OV 1..3
Auxiliary UV > Auxiliary UV 1..3
Power>
Forward Power > Forward Power 1..3
Directional Power > Directional Power 1..3
Watt Gnd Flt High > Watt Gnd Flt High 1..3
Watt Gnd Flt Low > Watt Gnd Flt Low 1..3
Control elements >
(*) See note
Setting Group
Underfrequency > Underfrequency 1..6
Overfrequency > Overfrequency 1..6
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure.
Broken Conductor > Broken Conductor 1..3


MENU
Locked Rotor > Locked Rotor 1..3
Fq Rate of Change Fq Rate of Change 1..3
Load Encroachment Load Encroachment 1..3
Max. Num of starts
Cold Load Pickup
PLC Timer Masks
(*) This menu changes as indicated in table 4.35 for firmware version 7.50 or above.
Table 4-13: Protection Element and control element menu for firmware version 7.50 or above
MAIN SETTINGS MENU FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL MAIN SETTINGS MENU
Protection Element >
Setting Group X>
Phase Current >
Phase TOC High > Phase TOC High 1..3
Phase TOC Low > Phase TOC Low 1..3
Phase IOC High > Phase IOC High 1..3
Phase IOC Low > Phase IOC Low 1..3
Phase Directional > Phase Directional 1..3
Thermal Model > Thermal Model 1..3
Neutral Current >
Neutral TOC > Neutral TOC 1..3
Neutral IOC > Neutral IOC 1..3
Neutral Dir > Neutral Dir 1..3
Ground Current >
Ground TOC > Ground TOC 1..3
Ground IOC > Ground IOC 1..3
Ground Dir > Ground Dir 1..3
Sens. Ground Curr >
Sens. Ground TOC > Sens. Ground TOC 1..3
Sens. Ground IOC > Sens. Ground IOC 1..3
Isolated Gnd IOC > Isolated Gnd IOC 1..3
Sens. Ground Dir. > Sens. Ground Dir. 1..3
Neg. Seq. Current >
Neg. Seq. TOC > Neg. Seq. TOC 1..3
Voltage Elements >
Phase UV > Phase UV 1..3
Phase OV > Phase OV 1
Neutral OV High > Neutral OV High 1..3
Neutral OV Low > Neutral OV Low 1
Neg. Seq. OV > Neg. Seq. OV 1..3
Auxiliary OV > Auxiliary OV 1..3
Auxiliary UV > Auxiliary UV 1

Power >
Forward Power > Forward Power 1..3
Directional Power > Directional Power 1..3
Watt Gnd Flt High > Watt Gnd Flt High 1
Watt Gnd Flt Low > Watt Gnd Flt Low 1..3

Frequency >
Underfrequency > Underfrequency 1..6
Overfrequency > Overfrequency 1..6
Fq Rate of Change > Fq Rate of Change 1..3
Miscellaneous >
Broken Conductor > Broken Conductor 1..3
Locked Rotor > Locked Rotor 1..3
Load Encroachment > Load Encroachment 1..3
Control Elements >
Setting Group
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure
VT Fuse Failure.
Max. Num of starts
Cold Load Pickup
PLC Timer Masks
60 CTS Failure
2nd HRMC Inhibit

4.2.6.7 Change Settings

To enter this menu press the enter/shuttle key when Change Settings is selected in main menu. A secondary level is
displayed with different sublevels. Press up-down key or rotating the shuttle key, (left for moving up and right for moving
down) select the next level to be displayed, press the enter/shuttle key again to enter in next level and press ESC key to
return to previous level if desired. This navigation is performed the same for all the menus in Change Settings. Once the
last sublevel is reached, move up and down to visualize the settings selected.
To change a particular setting, press the enter/shuttle key on the setting to be modified. After selecting the setting, the
value for that setting appears between brackets. Choose the new value moving up and down . After selecting the
appropriate value press again the enter/shuttle key to fix that value. To save the new settings, go to the end of the menu
pressing down key or rotating the shuttle key right, and select Press Enter to save settings. When pressing the shuttle key
inside this menu the new settings is saved.
Select the menu Change settings and press the enter/shuttle key to enter in the
next sublevel.
If there is more than one sublevel, select the next sublevel by pressing the up-down
keys or rotating and pressing the enter/shuttle key until the last level is reached.
Press the enter/shuttle key in the function to be modified
-> Group of settings

-> Setting to be modified
-> Value
-> Range and step
Pressing the enter/shuttle key, value appears between brackets and can be
modified pressing the up-down keys or rotating the shuttle key. Pressing again the
enter/shuttle key, the new value is accepted.
Once all settings inside the group have been modified, go to the last screen pressing
the down key or rotating the shuttle key and press Enter. At this moment of time,
the new settings is active in the relay.
Figure 4-29: Change settings in HMI

4.2.6.8 Date & time

The "Date & Time" menu shows the relay date and time information in the following format:
DST: Daylight Saving Time information
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:Hour:Minutes:Seconds
To modify date and time, press the enter/shuttle key. The relay shows the year between brackets at the top of the screen.
By pressing the up-down keys or rotating the shuttle key, reach the desired value for the year, and press the enter/shuttle
key to select and store that value. After the year, the relay shows the month. Proceed as in the case of the year. The date
& time modification sequence is as follows:
Press the up-down key or rotate the shuttle key to select the "Date and Time" menu
and press to enter in it
The date and time data appear in the format described above.
Pressing the enter/shuttle key the year can be modified pressing up-down key or
rotating the shuttle key, after selecting the desired value, press again the enter/
shuttle key to store the value.
"Year"
Date:Day/Month/<Year>
After storing the value for Year, Month appears between brackets and can be
modified
"Month"
Date:Day/<Month>/Year
After storing the value for Month, Day appears between brackets and can be
modified
"Day"
Date:<Day>/Month/Year
After storing the value for Day, Hour appears between brackets and can be
modified
"Hour"
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:<Hour>:Minutes:Seconds
After storing the value for Hour, Minutes appears between brackets and can be
modified
"Minute"
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:Hour:<Minute>:Seconds
After storing the value for Minutes, Seconds appears between brackets and can be
modified
"Second"
Date:Day/Month/Year
Time:Hour: Minute:<Seconds>

Once this sequence is completed, these values remain stored in the relay, and the display once again shows the date at
the bottom of the text screen.
Figure 4-30: Change date & time in HMI
4.2.6.9 Commands
Commands are configured using EnerVista 650 Setup, and they can be executed using the pushbuttons on the relay front.
Use the EnerVista 650 Setup software to configure up to 24 commands with a descriptive text. When executing the
operations from the relay front panel, the operation description is displayed.
Example of commands (operations) executions via HMI
Press the enter/shuttle key when Commands is selected in the display (o).
All the previously configured commands are displayed. Press up-down keys or
rotate the shuttle key to move through the available commands. Press ESC to
Press the enter/shuttle key to pre-select the operation to execute.
When the message Push Enter for Confirmation appears, press the enter/shuttle
key to confirm.
Once the command has been performed or the time out has expired the Command
completed message is shown on the display.
Figure 4-31: Commands in HMI

4.2.6.10 Passwords
The F650 units incorporate independent passwords for protection and control, in order to prevent unauthorized keypad
and display access to the relay.
Settings Password:
This password restricts access to settings changes in the relay protection elements.
Commands Password:
This password restricts access to executing operation commands through the keypad and display.
If the Commands Password is activated, when the user tries to execute an operation, the relay requests this password.
When using single-line diagrams for graphical display models, all objects are not operational until the password is entered,
either by logging in to Login Pwd Commands, or by entering the password in the Commands menu.
Relay settings view, measures, and other monitored information are not password-protected, and can be accessed by all
users.
The password menu is located at the Password option in the relay text menu. This menu includes the following options:
"Login Pwd Settings"
"Logout Pwd Settings"
"Change Pwd Settings"
"Login Pwd Commands"
"Logout Pwd Commands"
"Change Pwd Commands"
"Forgot Password?"
Among the available options in this menu, there are three types of functionality:
Login: For entering the password, either for settings or commands, and enable access to settings
or commands. Once entering the password the relay is no longer password protected, and
access is enabled to settings modification or commands execution.
Logout: Once the necessary setting changes or operation commands have been executed, the
user can log out, so that the relay is password protected again.
Change: Setting or modifying the desired password.
Forgot Password: Retrieves the encrypted password, so that it can be recovered if the user loses or forgets it.
Passwords are restricted for Settings change and Commands execution. To password-protect the relay, it is first
necessary to set the desired password, using the corresponding Change Pwd... menu. The default password is 0000. This
password provides access to the whole relay functionality.
Once a new password has been set, the user must log in to access the protected functionality; otherwise, the relay
requests the password when trying to change settings or execute commands. Once the password is entered the relay is
unprotected (as if the user had logged in), and remains so for 15 minutes of inactivity or until the user logs out.
Password range
The valid range for F650 passwords is a number from 0000 to 9999.
The default password is 0000, which provides access to the whole relay functionality. This is the default option for enabling
relay use without using passwords.

Entering passwords (Login PWD)

This operation is the same for both the settings and commands passwords. The only difference is the access menu. For
entering the password, the user must access the Login menus inside the Password menu.
Login Pwd Settings or Login Pwd Commands:
The relay requests the password with the following message on the screen:
Setting passwd.
Login: < 1000 >
For entering the desired password, the user must press up-down key or rotate the shuttle key to the left (decrease) or to
the right (increase), and establish the desired number. Once entered, the selected password between brackets has been
entered, the relay shows the message "Processing passwd. Wait...". If the password is correct, the relay allows access to
the settings change or command execution. It is not necessary to enter the password every time a change is to be
performed. The relay requests the password again after 15 minutes of inactivity. This period of time is the same that takes
the relay to turn off the display backlighting.
Logging out (Logout PWD)

To disable access to settings and commands, the user must logout.
Logout Pwd Settings or Logout Pwd Commands:
For safety reasons, the relay automatically logs out the active user 15 minutes after the last keypad action.
Changing the password (Change PWD commands)

To set a password in the relay, both for settings and commands, the corresponding menu must be accessed inside the
Password menu:
Change Pwd Settings or Change Pwd Commands:
To change the password, the user must first log in with the existing password; if the relay has the default factory
password, this would be 0000.
The relay requests the existing password with the following message:
(Setting or Command) passwd.
Login: < 0000 >
Once the existing password has been acknowledged, the new password must be entered:
(Setting or Command) passwd.
New passwd: < 1000 >
Once the new password has been entered, the relay returns to the general Passwords menu.
Service Command for password recovery

In the event of losing all passwords, the Service Command allows the customer to reset both Settings and Commands HMI
Passwords.
1. Customer must call the customer support service.
2. A secret key will be provided by customer support to facilitate the reset
3. At the moment, the HMI has no passwords for Settings and Commands. The customer can reintroduce new
passwords.

4.2.6.11 Select main screen

The relay display offers the possibility to select the default main screen. For this purpose, the user must access Select
Main Screen through the HMI. This menu includes the following options:
Logotype
This option selects as main screen the relay logotype including the firmware and boot code versions, the relay model and
the communication parameters for local port COM2.
Figure 4-32: Default logotype screen

Metering
This option shows a Metering screen including the phase and ground currents as well as phase-to-phase voltage, and zero
sequence voltage values, all of them in primary values.
Ia 0.000 Vab 0.000

Ib 0.000 Vbc 0.000
Ic 0.000 Vca 0.000
Ig 0.000 V0 0.000
Figure 4-33: Default metering screen

All
This option alternates in time the two previous options.
4.2.6.12 Select language

Option only available for versions 1.70 or higher than 5.20.
The relay display offers the possibility to select the default language for the relay. For this purpose, the user must access
the "Select language" menu located at the end of the main menu through the HMI. This menu allows the user to set the
default language of the relay between English (always available) and second language selected in the relay model.
For example one relay in French language (e.g. FC650MZDF2G1HIRF) can be displayed in French or in English only by
changing the language setting in HMI. It is necessary to switch off and on the relay to start working with the new language
configuration in the relay. In EnerVista 650 Setup it is possible to select the language for the software (View > Languages).
Example of language selection in HMI

Press the enter/shuttle key to enter the select language menu.

Depending on the relay model there are different language selections available:
English/French, English/ Russian, etc.
Press up-down keys or rotate the shuttle key to select the desired language and
press enter to store the selection in the relay
Once the new language has been selected it is necessary to reboot the relay in
order to start working with the new language in the device.
Figure 4-34: Language selection in HMI
4.2.7 Graphic display
4.2.7.1 One-line diagram

In models with graphic display default main screen is the single-line diagram. This single-line diagram can be configured
using EnerVista 650 Setup software by choosing the HMI menu inside Relay Configuration (Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > HMI).
F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER
Ia = 0.000 kA Vab =0.000 kV
Ib = 0.000 kA Vbc =0.000 kV
Ic = 0.000 kA Vca =0.000 kV
Freq = 0.00 Hz
Esc: Menu. Enter:Next. :Select
Figure 4-35: One-line diagram
The bottom of the display shows a legend that indicates the possible selections that can be made from this screen.

Esc: Menu. Enter: Next. : Select.
The meaning of these options is as follows:

Esc: Menu.
Press the ESC key to access the relay main menu, similar to the one displayed by the text-display model (F650B).
Press the ESC key again and the menu selection screen (Actual Values, Snapshot events, etc.) is displayed. This main menu
screen is identical to the one described for the text display, with functionality described in section 4.2.6 Text menus.
Intro: Next.
Press the enter/shuttle key to access the next graphical screen, which in this case corresponds to the primary metering
values screen.
: Select
Once the different switchgear elements have been configured using EnerVista 650 Setup, they can be operated from the
graphic display.
If a single-line diagram has been configured in the EnerVista 650 Setup software, in the HMI option inside the Relay
Configuration menu, the different switchgear elements configured for the display are operative from the graphic display.
By pressing the up-down key or rotating the shuttle key to the left and right, the cursor moves among the elements and
blinks on each of them. When an element is selected by pressing the enter/shuttle key, the relay indicates the command
to be executed, and the user needs to confirm by pressing the enter/shuttle key.
The following sections describe only the operation of screens that are specific for the graphic display models.
4.2.7.2 Metering screen

The Metering screen displays relay analog measures in their primary values. Available metering values are as follows:
Metering Screen. Total metering 53

Phasor Ia Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ib Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ic Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Ig Primary 0.000 KA
Phasor Isg Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ia Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ib Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ic Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Ig Primary 0.000 KA
RMS Isg Primary 0.000 KA
I0 Primary 0.000 KA
Enter: Next. ESC: Prev :Scroll.
Figure 4-36: METERING SCREEN

As in the rest of graphical display screens, the bottom part shows a legend that indicates the possible options for the user.
In this case, the options are:
Enter: Next.Esc: Prev. : Scroll.
Intro: Next.
Pressing the enter shuttle key the user accesses the next screen, in this case the ALL EVENTS screen.
Esc: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key the user returns to the previous screen (One-line diagram)
: Scroll.

Pressing the up-down key or rotating the shuttle key to the left (L) or right (R) the user can access all the Metering values in
the screen.
METERING SCREEN ANALOG MEASURES IN PRIMARY VALUES

Phasor Ia Primary V0 Primary Phase A Real Pwr Line Frequency Primary
Phasor Ib Primary V1 Primary Phase B Reactive Pwr Bus Frequency Primary
Phasor Ic Primary V2 Primary Phase B Apparent Pwr Vx Primary
Phasor Ig Primary Vab Primary Phase B Real Pwr Pos MVarhour Freeze
Phasor Isg Primary Vbc Primary Phase C Reactive Pwr NegMVarhour Freeze
Phasor In Primary Vca Primary Phase C Apparent Pwr PosMWatthour Freeze
RMS Ia Primary Vn Primary Phase C Real Pwr Neg MWatthour Freeze
RMS Ib Primary Va Primary 3 Phase Reactive Pwr Positive MVarhour
RMS Ic Primary Vb Primary 3 Phase Apparent Pwr Negative MVarhour
RMS Ig Primary Vc Primary 3 Phase Real Pwr Positive MWatthour
RMS Isg Primary VL Primary Phase A Power Factor Negative MWatthour
I0 Primary VBB Primary Phase B Power Factor % of Load-to-trip
I1 Primary Phase A Reactive Pwr Phase C Power Factor
I2 Primary Phase A Apparent Pwr 3 Phase Power Factor
4.2.7.3 All events screen

This screen shows all events that have been produced in the relay. The top of the screen shows its name (All Events), and
the relative and total number of events contained in the screen.
All Events (1/479) or (1/511 for Firmware version 7.20 or higher)
This legend means that there are a total of events stored in the relay, and that the cursor is located on event number 1.
The information shown on this screen for each event is as follows:
"Hour:Minute:Second:Millisecond" "Event text" "Event status (ON/OFF)"
All Events (1/479).

- [ Ready LED ON ] -
16:11:08.035 Ready LED ON ON
16:11:08.017 Breaker Closed ON ON
16:11:08.005 Isolated Gnd3 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Sens Gnd TOC3 Block OFF OFF
16:11:08.005 Ground TOC3 Block OFF OFF
Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Scroll.
Figure 4-37: All events screen

The screen legend options are:
Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Scroll.

Esc: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key, the user returns to the previous screen (Metering screen)
Intro: Menu.
Pressing the enter/shuttle key, the user accesses the Events menu that offers the following options at the bottom of the
screen:
nextprevreloaddetailsAt
To access the different options in the snapshot events graphic menu the user must move the cursor from up to down or
from left to right. The selected option is displayed in upper case and between brackets. To access the selected option, the
user must press again the enter/shuttle key.
<NEXT>
The user accesses the next available graphic screen (Events ‚Äì New)
<PREV>
This option returns to the general events graphic menu (All Events)
<RELOAD>
This option updates all events stored in the relay and returns to the general events screen.
<DETAILS>
The Details screen provides access to metering values, and date and time related with the event.
The top of the screen displays a legend with the event text, followed by the date and time, the event status (ON or
OFF), and the event index number related to the complete list of events in the relay, for example (1/479). The rest of
information provided by the Details screen corresponds to the relay measures in the moment of the event. Metering
values provided in the events are secondary, and voltage values correspond to phase-to-ground voltage.
Ready LED ON
Date: 07/Nov/2004 St:ON
Time: 16:11:08.035 (1/479)
Phasor Ia Primary 0.000

Phasor Ib Primary 0.000
Phasor Ic Primary 0.000
Line Frequency 0.000
Phasor Ig Primary 0.000
Phasor Isg Primary 0.000
I0 Primary 0.000
I1 Primary 0.000
Enter: Meters. ESC: Prev : Scroll.
Figure 4-38: Snapshot events details screen

To navigate this screen the user must follow the legend at the bottom of the screen:
Enter: Meters. ESC: Prev. : Scroll.

Intro: Meters.
To access the metering values in the moment of the event, the user must press the enter/shuttle key. A new metering
screen is displayed, containing the primary metering values in the snapshot event, such as:
Phasor Ia Primary I2 Primary

Phasor Ib Primary Vab Primary
Phasor Ic Primary Vbc Primary
Line Frequency Primary Vca Primary
Phasor Ig Primary V1 Primary
Phasor Isg Primary V2 Primary
I0 Primary V0 Primary
I1 Primary 3 Phase Power Factor
Once inside the Metering screen, a new legend is shown for each event (Intro or ESC: Prev. U-D (L-R: Scroll); press ESC
or the shuttle key to return to the Event Details screen, and press the up-down key or rotate the shuttle key to access
all the metering values contained in the metering screen of the selected event.
ESC: Prev.
If the user presses the ESC key from the event detail screen, the system returns to the all events screen.
: Scroll.
Pressing the up-down key or rotating the shuttle key left (L) or right (R) moves among all the events contained in the all
events screen, allowing a preview of the details for each of them.
<AT>
When this option is selected, the system marks the event where the cursor is located. A relative time stamp is
performed, in such a way that the selected event, marked with an asterisk (*) between the time and the event name is
set with a relative time of 00:00:00:000 on the top line of the event screen, together with its relative index, and the rest
of events in the screen shows a date/time that relates to the marked event. This operation mode allows a quick
inspection of the relative time passed between several events, which is very useful for analyzing events in the field.
The corresponding legend to this relative event-marking screen is as follows:
Esc: Out At.Enter: Tag event.
Esc: Out At.
The relative event marking is eliminated and the system returns to the general events screen.
Enter: Tag event.
If the user places the cursor on a different event by pressing the up-down key or rotating the shuttle key left or
right, pressing the enter/shuttle key changes the relative mark to that new event.
4.2.7.4 New events screen

This screen shows the new events that have been produced in the relay since the last time the New Events screen was
read. The top of the screen shows a "New Events" legend, and the relative and total number of events contained.
Navigation through the different menus in this New Events screen is similar to the one described in the previous section for
All Events. The main difference is that in the case of new events it is necessary to select the RELOAD submenu to update
the screen with new events that have been produced, while in the All Events screen, this refreshment is automatic.
After the new events have been read, if the user selects again the Reload menu, the system shows a <No new events
available.> message, indicating that there are no more new events available since the last reading.

4.2.7.5 Alarms panel

Alarms panel can be viewed in all F650 models using communication software EnerVista 650 Setup, however, only models
with graphic display allow access to the alarms panel from the HMI.
First line shows the relative and total number of alarms existing in that screen. The relative number refers to the alarm on
which the cursor is located, and the total number refers to the total amount of alarms available. The second line on this
screen shows an index that indicates the number of the configured control event that corresponds to the displayed alarm,
followed by the alarm text configured in the Control Events menu inside the Relay Configuration option (Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Control Events).
Alarm Panel (1/3).

#1 OPERATIONS IN LOCAL MODE
7/11/04 16:54:16 OPERATIONS IN LO. ON

7/11/04 16:54:16 GENERAL PICKUP ON
7/11/04 16:54:16 GENERAL TRIP ON
Esc: Prev. Enter: Next
Figure 4-39: Alarms panel in HMI

The rest of the screen shows the different alarms produced in the relay with the date and time when the corresponding
event was produced, followed by the alarm identification text, and its status, active (ON) or inactive (OFF).
In the previous example, the produced alarm is the change to local of the execution of operations (OPERATIONS IN LOCAL
MODE), the date and time when this event has been produced, and its status (ON):
The bottom of the screen shows the legend that indicates how to navigate through the different options available in the
screen.
ESC: Prev.Enter: Next.
ESC: Prev.
Pressing the ESC key, the system returns to the previous New Events screen.
Enter: Next.
Pressing the enter/shuttle key, the user accessed the available alarms menu, which includes the following options.
nextprevackack all
To access the different options provided by the alarms graphic menu, the user must press the up-down key or move the
shuttle key left to right. The selected option is displayed in upper case and between brackets. To access the selected
option, the enter/shuttle key must be pressed.
<NEXT>
This option provides access to the next available graphic screen (I/O boards)
<PREV>
The system returns to the previous New Events screen.
<ACK>
This option acknowledges the alarm on which the cursor is located.

<ACK ALL>
This option acknowledges all alarms. Alarm acknowledgement through the graphic HMI is considered as through
communication port COM2, as it is considered to be Local in both cases.
When an alarm has been acknowledged, a selection mark appears to the right of its status. Inactive alarms disappear
from the screen once they are acknowledged.
4.2.7.6 Input/output monitoring screen

This is the last screen available in the graphic display. This screen allows viewing the status of the relay inputs and outputs,
as well as emulate inputs (for verification of the logic, or related functions), and contact outputs (to verify wiring).
The format of this screen is shown on the figure below.
The first line shows the name of the screen "I/O Cards", followed by the type and description of the board where the cursor
is located, which appears between selection marks > < and blinking.
IO Card.
Type: 2, Nº IN 8, Nº OUT 8
>F<
G
H
J
Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Chg Card.
Figure 4-40: INPUTS/OUTPUTS GENERAL SCREEN

The navigation legend on this screen is as follows:
Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Chg Card

Esc: Prev.
This option returns to the previous screen (Alarms Panel).
Enter: Menu.
This option provides access to the selected I/O board menu:
This menu includes the following options.
nextviewtest inputtest output
As in previous screens, to access the different options provided by the inputs/outputs graphic menu, the user must press
the up-down key or move the shuttle key left to right. The selected option is displayed in upper case and between
brackets. To access the selected option, the enter/shuttle key must be pressed.

IO Card F. Type: 2, # IN 8, # OUT 8
Input (ON OFF) Output
0 CC1 8 Va COIL1
1 CC2 9 Vb COIL1
2 CC3 10 Va COIL2
3 CC4 11 Vb COIL2
4 CC5 12 Isense1
5 CC6 13 Isense1
6 CC7 14 SUP21
7 CC8 15 SUP22
next >VIEW< test input test output
Figure 4-41: Input/output viewing screen

<NEXT>
This option brings the system back to the one-line diagram.
<VIEW>
This option shows the real status of all inputs and outputs in the selected board. Depending on the type of board, with
or without supervision, the screen varies depending on the board characteristics.
The first line of this screen shows the slot where the board is located, F, G, H or J, and the type of board. The view
menu differentiates inputs and outputs; the active status (ON) is represented by the lighting of the corresponding
input or output.
The legend at the bottom of the screen indicates how to navigate:
Esc: Prev. Enter: Menu. : Chg Card
Esc: Prev.
Returns to the general I/O screen
Enter: Menu.
Provides access to the I/O menu (next, view, test input, test output).
: Chg Card
Pressing the up-down key or Moving the shuttle key to the left or right provides access to the status of inputs/
outputs for the different boards available in the relay.
<TEST INPUT>
This option allows testing the input activation (in emulation mode). The displayed screen is similar to the viewing
screen, but in this case the user can operate the different relay inputs.
This screen shows the Input name lit up, showing that this is an Input emulation mode.
The first relay input appears blinking and between brackets; the user can select a different input by pressing up-down
key or rotating the enter/shuttle key. When the shuttle key is pressed, the selected input is activated. Navigation
through this screen is indicated by the following legend:
Esc: Exit Text. Enter: Chg Input.

Esc: Exit Text.

The ESC option returns to the general I/O board menu.
Enter: Chg Input.
Pressing the enter/shuttle key on the blinking input, this input is activated in emulation mode.
Note: input emulation can only be executed through the TEST INPUT tool on the graphic display.
<TEST OUTPUT>
This option allows testing the output activation in emulation mode. The displayed screen is similar to the viewing
screen, but in this case the user can operate the different relay contact outputs to test the wiring.
This screen shows the Output name lit up, showing that this is an output emulation mode.
The first relay output appears blinking and between brackets; the user can select a different output by pressing the
up-down key or rotating the shuttle key. When the enter/shuttle key is pressed, the selected output is activated.
Navigation through this screen is indicated by the following legend:
Esc: Exit Text. Enter: Chg Output.
Esc: Exit Text.
The ESC option returns to the general I/O board menu.
Enter: Chg Output.
Pressing the enter/shuttle key on the blinking output, this output is activated in emulation mode.
Note: Output emulation can be executed through the TEST OUTPUT tool on the graphic display, and also
through communications using EnerVista 650 Setup software for all F650 models.
: Chg Card
Pressing the up-down key or rotating the shuttle key allows to change the selected I/O board in the main I/O screen.

CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES 4.3 WEB SERVER
4.3 Web server

4.3.1 Home
The web server in the F650 can be accessed running the Windows explorer, and typing http://xxx.xxx.xx.xxx, where
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the relay IP address, which must be configured in Setpoint > Product Setup > Communication Settings
> Ethernet.
The main screen of the F650 web server shows the different monitoring possibilities for snapshot events, events, alarms,
oscillography, fault reports, data logger and metering values provided by the relay through the web.
In order to access the different functions provided by the web server, the user must simply click the list name on the left
side of the screen.
The web server (for version 1.70 and higher ones) allows the user to visualize the different web server screen languages:
English, French, Spanish, Russian and Chinese by pressing the language button on the top right corner of the main
window. Take into account that this selection only changes the language in the web server screen, all the relay texts, such
as snapshot events, control events, etc. are in the language selected in the relay (see section 4.2.6.12 Select language in
this manual).
Figure 4-42: Web server main screen

4.3 WEB SERVER CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES, SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES
4.3.2 Snapshot events

The Snapshot events screen shows all Snapshot events produced in the relay. This screen is refreshed automatically every
minute.
The information provided in this screen includes: first, the relative event index, the lowest index corresponding to the most
recent event; next, the event text that shows the reason for the event, its status, active (ON) or inactive (OFF), and finally the
date and time when the event was produced.
The bottom of the screen shows a Metering screen; clicking on one of the events, the associated metering values are
shown on that screen.
Figure 4-43: Snapshot events screen

4.3.3 Control events

The control events screen provides access to all events that have been configured in the Control Events screen inside the
Relay Configuration menu of EnerVista 650 Setup.
Figure 4-44: Control events screen
Unlike the case of Snapshot events, in this screen the highest index corresponds to the most recent event. The information
provided is the control event index, the text that has been associated with the event when configured, its status, active
(ON) or inactive (OFF), and its date and time.

4.3.4 Alarms
The alarms screen provides access to alarms configured in the relay. As in the case of snapshot events and control events,
this screen allows only to view the alarms, but not to acknowledge them.
Figure 4-45: Alarms screen

4.3.5 Oscillography
The oscillography screen allows obtaining from the relay available oscillography records in that moment.
This screen includes two windows. The first window shows oscillography records available in the relay, identified by an
index, being the highest index the most recent record (oscillography record No 6 in the example below).
Figure 4-46: Oscillography screen

If the user clicks on the oscillography record he wants to retrieve, the window on the right shows a description of the
record header, indicating its date, time, and the most relevant parameters of the record. Once a record is selected, it is
required to press the Download button. The system then opens a window to allow saving the files in Comtrade format on
the PC hard drive. Once the records have been saved, the system asks if the user wants to open GE-OSC tool (Comtrade
record viewer) to view the downloaded files.
Figure 4-47: GE-osc launch screen

4.3.6 Fault report

The fault report screen provides access to the last 10 fault reports obtained by the relay. These records are stored
according to an index that marks their position among all records produced in the relay, with a range from 1 to 999,
returning to 1 in case of exceeding the limit of 999. As in the case of oscillography records, the highest index corresponds
to the most recent record.
In the fault report, oscillography and data logger screens, the system requests acceptance of a safety-warning message.
Figure 4-48: Fault report screen

The information provided in this screen includes the date and time when the fault was registered, fault calculations such
as distance to the fault, type of fault, date and time, and the line parameters, as well as the recloser and breaker status
during the fault.
This screen shows also prefault and fault voltage and current primary values. At the top of the screen, associated with the
trigger event number there is a button labeled as INFO. This button displays at the bottom of the screen the events
produced before and after the fault report trigger, so that the user has very useful information about the moment when
the fault was produced.
To obtain a text file with all the fault report information, press the Download option and save the file in the computer.

4.3.7 Data logger

The data logger screen allows viewing the data logger first and last value retrieval date and allows downloading the data record
files in Comtrade format, by pressing the Download option. Stored files can be viewed later using any Comtrade format viewer.
Figure 4-49: Data logger screen


GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 5: Setpoints
SETPOINTS
5.1 Overview
5.1.1 Setpoint main menu
Table 5-1: Setpoint main menu in EnerVista 650 Setup software:
Product Setup
Communication settings
Serial Ports
Network (Ethernet)
ModBus Protocol
DNP3 Slave (Available for standard and
IEC61850 models, not available for IEC 870-
5-103 models)
IEC 870-5-104 (Available for standard and
IEC61850 models, not available for IEC 870-
5-103 models)
SNTP
Procome (Available for Procome models
only)
IEC 870-5-103 (Available for IEC 870-5-103
models only)
PTP 1588 (Available from V7.00)
Routing (Available from V7.00)
ModBus User Map
Fault Report
Oscillography
Data Logger
Demand
Time Settings
System Setup
General settings

5.1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
Flex Curves
Breaker
Breaker Settings
Breaker Maintenance
Switchgear
Miscellaneous Settings
Protection Elements
Phase Current
Phase TOC High
Phase TOC Low
Phase IOC High
Phase IOC Low
Phase Directional
Thermal Model
Neutral Current
Neutral TOC
Neutral IOC
Neutral Directional
Ground Current
Ground TOC
Ground IOC
Ground Directional
Sensitive Ground Current.
Sensitive Ground TOC
Sensitive Ground IOC
Isolated Ground IOC
Sensitive Ground Directional
Negative Sequence Current
Negative Sequence TOC
voltage Elements
Phase UV
Phase OV
Neutral OV High
Neutral OV Low
Negative Sequence OV
Auxiliary OV
Auxiliary UV
Power
Forward Power
Directional Power
Watt Gnd Flt High
Watt Gnd Flt Low
Control Elements
Setting Group
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Synchrocheck
Autoreclose
Breaker Failure.
VT Fuse Failure.
Broken Conductor

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.1 OVERVIEW
Locked Rotor
Pulse Counters
Analog Comparator
Frequency rate of change
Load Encroachment
Max. Number of Starts
Digital Counters
Cold Load Pickup
Input/Outputs
Contact I/O
Board F
Board G
Board H
Board J
Force Outputs.
Remote Comms (Available for IEC61850
models only).
Virtual Inputs

5.2 PRODUCT SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
5.2 Product setup

5.2.1 Communication settings
5.2.1.1 Serial ports

Baud rate and parity for COM1 and COM2 serial communication ports.
Product Setup > Communication settings >Serial Ports

Name Default Value Step Range
COM1 Baud Rate 19200 N/A [300 : 115200]
COM2 Baud Rate 19200 N/A [300: 115200]
COM1Parity NONE N/A [NONE:ODD:EVEN]
COM2Parity NONE N/A [NONE:ODD:EVEN]
5.2.1.2 Network (Ethernet)

Depending on the firmware version the Network (Ethernet) setting window vary.
For versions previous to 7.00 of firmware; the network Ethernet window settings are for configure Ethernet communication
parameters for ETH_1/ETH2 (Depending on model). Two different Ethernet addresses can be used, but the first IP always
has to be set as the second IP Address is an Alias. The ModBus Slave address used by Ethernet ports is the one set for
COM2.
Table 5-2: NETWORK settings for firmware versions previous to 7.00

Product Setup > Communication settings >Network (Ethernet) Network (Ethernet)1> NETWORK
(ETHERNET)2
IP Address Oct1 0 N/A [0: 255]
Netmask Oct1 0 N/A [0: 255]
Gateway IP Oct1 0 N/A [0: 255]
For firmware versions 7.00 or higher; the Network settings are the Ethernet communication parameters for Port A, Port B
and Port E. Depending on the order code, up to three different Ethernet addresses can be used, The ModBus Slave address
used by Ethernet ports is the one set for COM2.
Table 5-3: Network settings for firmware version 7.00 and above
PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS >NETWORK (ETHERNET) NETWORK (ETHERNET)A>

NETWORK (ETHERNET)B> NETWORK (ETHERNET) E > REDUNDANCY

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
DEFAULT
NAME VALUE STEP RANGE USER VALUE
IP Address Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
IP ADDRESS: This setting sets the ports IPv4 address in standard IPV4 format. Note that this setting is only valid on port B if
port A’s REDUNDANCY is set to INDEPENDENT.
NETMASK: This setting sets the ports IPv4 subnet mask in standard IPV4 format. Note that this setting is only valid on port
B if port A’s REDUNDANCY is set to INDEPENDENT.
Table 5-4: Redundancy settings
PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > NETWORK (ETHERNET) > REDUNDANCY
NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
[INDEPENDENT; LLA; PRP; HSR; RSTP;
REDUNDANCY MODE INDEPENDENT N/A DAISY_CHAIN]
LLA Priority DISABLED N/A [ENABLED; DISABLED]
LLA Timeout 5000 N/A [0 : 600000]
RSTP BRIDGE PRIORITY 32768 N/A [0 : 61440]
RSTP PORT A PRIORITY 128 N/A [0 : 240]
RSTP PORT A PATHCOST 200000 N/A [0 : 2000000]
RSTP PORT B PRIORITY 128 N/A [0 : 240]
RSTP PORT B PATHCOST 200000 N/A [0 : 2000000]
REDUNDANCY MODE: This setting is available only if the hardware has multiple ports. The setting determines if ports A and B
operate in redundant or independent mode. Different options are liste below:
-Independent: In non-redundant mode, port A and B operate independently with their own MAC, IP address, mask and
gateway.
NOTE: When using more than one Ethernet port, each port must be configured to belong to a different network,
otherwise communications becomes unpredictable.
NOTE 2: When non-redundant mode is selected, MAC address assigned to port A is the same as MAC address assigned
to port E but increased in one unit and MAC address assigned to port B is the same as MAC address assigned to port A
but increased in one unit.
E.g (MAC_portE: 00AFF40A24DA, MAC_portA:00AFF40A24DB, MAC_portB: 00AFF40A24DC)
-LLA (Link Loss) operation: The operation of ports A and B are as follows:
Ports A and B use port A’s MAC and IP address settings while port B is in standby mode in that it does not actively
communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its link.
-PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol): ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and combine
information at the link layer. It is intended to only be used if the two ports are connected to separate parallel LAN’s. In
this mode of operation both ports cannot be connected to the same LAN. The receiving devices process the first frame
received and discard the duplicate through a link redundancy entity (LRE) or similar service that operates below layer

2. Aside from LRE, PRP uses conventional Ethernet hardware but both ports must know they are in PRP. Both ports of
PRP devices operate with the same Internet Protocol (IP) addresses for traffic that uses IP Management protocols such
as Address Resolution Protocol (ARP).
-HSR (High-availability Seamless Redundancy): ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and
combine information at the link layer. It is intended to work in a ring topology. In this mode of operation port A is
connected to other device´s port B, and port B is connected to other device´s port A provided that ring topology is
respected. The receiving devices process the first frame received and discard the duplicate through a link redundancy
entity (LRE) or similar service that operates below layer 2. Aside from LRE, HSR uses conventional Ethernet hardware
but both ports must know they are in HSR. Both ports of HSR devices operate with the same Internet Protocol (IP)
addresses for traffic that uses IP Management protocols such as Address Resolution Protocol (ARP).
-RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol): ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and can operate
with different network topologies. The device operates only with one IP address through these 2 ports
-Daisy Chain: ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and operate by chaining one device with the
next one. Note that it is important not to create a loop in this topology. Both ends of the chain can be connected to
different networks. The device operates only with one IP address through these 2 ports.
NOTE 3: When LLA/PRP/HSR or PRR mode is selected, MAC addresses assigned to port A and B are the same between
them and a consecutive value of MAC address assigned to port E.
E.g (MAC_portE: 00AFF40A24DA, MAC_portA:00AFF40A24DB, MAC_portB: 00AFF40A24DB)
NOTA 4: When LLA/PRP/HSP/RSTP or DAISY CHAIN mode is selected, the IP configured at
Product Setup > Communication Settings > Network (Ethernet) > Network (Ethernet) A is the one used by both
ports (A and B) to communicate in these modes.
LLA PRIORITY: If this setting is set to enabled, the port A has the priority. If PORTA’s LLA detects a problem with the link,
communications is switched to Port B. Port B is, in effect, acting as a redundant or backup link to the network for port A.
LLA TIMEOUT: This setting is active only when the LLA PRIORITY is set to ENABLED. When the link on primary port is
detected again after it fails, there is LLA TIMEOUT (ms) monitoring time for the health of the network. During this time, the
secondary port remains active. If primary network is healthy for more than LLA TIMEOUT value, the switch over to primary
port is automatic.
RSTP BRIDGE PRIORITY: Specifies the switch (bridge) priority value. This value is used along with the switch MAC
address to determine which switch in the network is the root device. Lower values mean higher priority. The value ranges
from 0 to 65535, with a default of 32768.
RSTP PORTA PRIORITY: This is to determine which ports are used for forwarding. Lower the number means higher
priority. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Default is 128.
RSTP PORTA PATHCOST: This is the assigned port cost value used for the switch to determine the forwarding points.
Values range from 1 to 2000000. The lower the value, the lower the cost and hence the preferred route.
RSTP PORTB PRIORITY: This is to determine which ports are used for forwarding. Lower the number means higher
priority. Value ranges from 0 to 255. Default is 128.
RSTP PORTB PATHCOST: This is the assigned port cost value used for the switch to determine the forwarding points.
Values range from 1 to 2000000. The lower the value, the lower the cost and hence the preferred route.
For this setting change to take effect, a reboot is required.

5.2.1.3 MODBUS protocol

ModBus Slave Addresses for serial and Ethernet communication and the ModBus port number used for ModBus TCP/IP. For
more detailed information go to appendix B in this manual.
Product Setup > Communication settings >ModBus ProtocoL

ModBus Address COM1 254 1 [1 : 255]
ModBus Address COM2 254 1 [1 : 255]
ModBus Port Number 502 1 [0 : 65535]
5.2.1.4 DNP3 slave

Physical port, Slave Address for DNP, IP Addresses for Masters, TCP/UDP Port, Unsolicited Response parameters, Analog
scale factors and deadbands, message fragment size, Binary input block. For more detailed information go to appendix C
in this manual. DNP protocol is available for standard and IEC61850 models but it is not available Procome models.
Table 5-5: DNP protocol settings
Product Setup > Communication settings >DNP3 Slave
DNP3 Slave 1 > DNP3 Slave 2 > DNP3 Slave 3
Physical Port NONE N/A [COM1:COM2:NETWORK]
Address 255 1 [0 : 65534]
IP Addr Client1 Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
TCP/UDP Port 20000 1 [0 : 65535]
Unsol Resp Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Unsol Resp TimeOut 5 1 [0 : 60]
Unsol Resp Max Ret 10 1 [0 : 255]
Unsol Resp Dest Adr 200 1 [0 : 65535]
Current Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
Product Setup > Communication settings >DNP3 Slave
Voltage Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]

Power Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-

100-1000-10000]
Energy Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
PF Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000-10000]
Other Scale Factor 1 N/A [0.00001-0.0001-0.001-0.01-0.1-1-10-
100-1000]
Current Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Voltage Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Power Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Energy Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
PF Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 32767]
Other Deadband 30000 1 [0 : 65535]
Msg Fragment Size 240 1 [30 : 2048]
Binary Input Block 1 CTL EVENTS 1-16 N/A
Binary Input Block 9 SWITCHGEAR 1-8 N/A
Binary Input Block 10 SWITCHGEAR 9-16 N/A
Default Analog Map ENABLED N/A
Analog Input Point 0 End of list N/A


5.2.1.5 IEC 60870-5-104

Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. For more detailed information go to appendix D in this manual.
DNP protocol is available for standard and IEC61850 models but it is not available Procome models.
Table 5-6: IEC 60870-5-104 protocol settings

Product Setup > Communication settings >IEC 870-5-104
Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED-ENABLED]
TCP Port 2404 1 [1 : 65535]
Common Addr of ASDU 255 1 [0 : 65535]
Cyclic Meter Period 0 1 [0 : 3600]
Synchronization Event 0 1 [0 : 3600]
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 OCTET1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
Function 2 DISABLED N/A
TCP Port 2 2404 N/A [0 : 65535]
Common Addr of ASDU 2 255 N/A [0 : 65535]
IEC104 SCALE CURRENT 1 [0,00001; 0,0001; 0,001; 0,01; 0,1; 1; 10;
100; 1000; 10000]
IEC104 SCALE VOLTAGE 1
IEC104 SCALE POWER 1 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 SCALE ENERGY 1 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 SCALE OTHER 1 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 DEADBAND CURRENT 30000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 DEADBAND VOLTAGE 30000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 DEADBAND POWER 30000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 DEADBAND ENERGY 30000 [0 : 65535]

IEC104 DEADBAND OTHER 30000 [0 : 65535]

IEC104 IOA BINARIES 1000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA DOUBLE POINTS 1500 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA ANALOGS 2000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA COUNTERS 4000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA COMMANDS 3000 [0 : 65535]
IEC104 IOA ANALOG PARAMETERS 5000 [0 : 65535]
5.2.1.6 SNTP
Product Setup > Communication settings >SNTP> SNTP1/SNTP2

Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
UDP Port 123 1 [1 : 65535]
Server Ip Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
Server Ip Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
Server Ip Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
Server Ip Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
The F650 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the F650 can obtain the clock time
over an Ethernet network. The F650 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a
dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Three different modes of SNTP operation are
supported. These modes are unicast, broadcast and anycast.
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as an IRIG-B source is connected to the F650, the IRIG-B signal provides
the time value to the F650 clock for as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained
from the SNTP server is used.
To use SNTP in unicast mode, Server IP Oct1...4 must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is set
and the Function setting is “UNICAST”, the F650 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many
time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes forty seconds until the F650 clock is synchronized with the
SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to one minute for the F650 to signal an SNTP FAIL state if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the Function setting to “BROADCAST”. The F650 then listens to SNTP messages sent to
the “all ones” broadcast address for the subnet. The F650 waits up to eighteen minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving
an SNTP broadcast message before signalling an SNTP FAIL state.
To use SNTP in anycast mode, set the Function setting to “ANYCAST”. Anycast mode is designed for use with a set of
cooperating servers whose addresses are not known beforehand by the client. The F650 sends a request to a multicast
group address assigned by IANA for NTP protocol. This address is 224.0.1.1 and a group of SNTP/NTP servers listens to it.
Upon receiving a request each server sends a unicast response to the SNTP/NTP client. The F650 relay binds to the first
unicast message received from any server. Then it continues operating with SNTP/NTP server in unicast mode. Any further
responses from other SNTP/NTP servers are ignored. In unicast mode of operation the chosen time server can go offline, in
that case it takes about one minute for the F650 to signal an SNTP FAIL state and to switch again to anycast mode to try to
find another time server. In anycast mode the F650 tries to send multicast messages up to five minutes before signalling
an SNTP FAIL state.
The F650 relay does not support the multicast mode of SNTP functionality.
For firmware version 7.20 or above, F650 shall accept time synchronization from up to two different SNTP servers. In order
to define number of SNTP servers to be used, different settings for each SNTP server must be configured in the F650.
SNTP1 or/and SNTP2 tab settings shall be configured.
If only one SNTP server is used to synchronize the relay, SNTP1 tab settings shall be filled with its corresponding settings. If
two SNTP servers are used, SNTP1 and SNTP2 tab shall be filled as follow:
"SNTP1 tab shall contain settings of main SNTP server.

"SNTP2 tab shall contain settings of back-up SNTP server.

If two SNTP servers are configured, F650 operation mode is described as follow:
Scenario Expected behaviour

SNTP1 server= Available F650 shall be synchronized by SNTP1 server.
SNTP2 server= Available
No alarm
SNTP1 server= Available F650 shall continue to be synchronized by SNTP1 server
SNTP2 server= Not Available No alarm
SNTP1 server= Not Available If SNTP1 server fails, F650 shall get synchronization from SNTP2
SNTP2 server= Available server. When SNTP1 server recovers, F650 shall switch to be
synchronized by SNTP1 server.
No alarm
SNTP1 server= Not Available "Not Syncronized" Alarm shall appear in local mimic
SNTP2 server= Not Available
NOTE: SNTP settings take effect after rebooting the device.
5.2.1.7 Procome protocol settings

Communication settings for Procome protocol. For more detail information go to APPENDIX E in this manual.
Product Setup > Communication settings >PROCOME

COMM Port NONE N/A [NONE - COM1]
Slave Number 0 1 [0 : 254]
When NONE is selected in the comm port setting the protocol is not enabled. The com1 selection enables Procome for the
com1 (remote) serial port.
Slave Number:is the Procome slave number.
Baud rate and parity for COM1 must be set in the Setpoint>Communications>Serial Ports menu.
5.2.1.8 IEC 870-5-103 protocol settings

Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. For more detailed information go to 5.13 Section in this manual.
Product Setup > Communication settings >IEC 870-5-103

COMM Port NONE N/A [NONE - COM1]
Slave Number 1 1 [0 : 254]
Synchronization Timeout 30 min 1 [0 : 1440]
DNP protocol is available for standard and IEC61850 models but it is not available IEC 60870-5-103 models.
If COMM Port is set to NONE, IEC 870-5-103 communication protocol is not available.
If the user sets a value different from 0 in the Synchronization Timeout setting, when this timer expires without receiving a
synchronization message, the Invalid bit is set in the time stamp of a time-tagged message.

5.2.1.9 PTP IEEE 1588 protocol settings
PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > PTP 1588

Name Default Value Step
PTP FUNCTION DISABLE [DISABLE; ENABLE]
PORTA DELAY ADDER 0 ns [0 : 60000]
PORTA DELAY ASYM 0 ns [-1000 : 1000]
PORTB DELAY ADDER 0 ns [0 : 60000]
PORTB DELAY ASYM 0 ns [-1000 : 1000]
STRICT POWER PROFILE DISABLED DISABLED/ENABLED
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER 0 [0 : 255]
PTP VLAN PRIORITY 4 [0 : 7]
PTP VLAN ID 0 [0 : 4095]
PTP EPOCH UTC SINCE 2000 UTC SINCE 2000; UTC SINCE 1970; UTC SINCE 1900
F650 relay supports IEEE 1588 version 2.

The relay meets the time accuracy requirements of IEC 61850-5-Ed2 clause 11.1.3.3 time synchronization class T5 (± 1 µs)
and of the IEEE Std. PC37.118.1 Draft 1.6 clause 4.3 (± 1 µs), given an error-free PP input and stable temperature
The relay resynchronizes to a grandmaster slewing at ±2 µs/s when the rate of change of frequency stabilizes. It may
become unsynchronized when the ramp starts or stops.
The relay only supports Peer-To-Peer delay mechanism.
PTP FUNCTION
While this port setting is selected to disabled, PTP is disabled on this port. The relay does not generate or listen to PTP
messages on this port.
PORT A, B PATH DELAY ADDER

The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the time value in this setting prior to the time being used to synchronize the
relay’s real time clock. This is to compensate to the extent practical for time delivery delays not compensated for in the
network. In a fully compliant PP network, the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms compensate for all the
delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, this setting should be zero.
In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these mechanisms, not all
delays are compensated, so the time of message arrival at the relay is later than the time indicated in the message. This
setting can be used to approximately compensate for this delay. However, as the relay is not aware of network switching
that dynamically changes the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no setting that is always completely correct for
uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen to reduce the worst-case error to half of the range between minimum and
maximum uncompensated delay, if these values are known.
PORT A, B PATH DELAY ASYMMETRY

Range: -1 000 … +1 000 ns
Default: 0
This setting corresponds to “delayAsymmetry” in PTP, which is used by the peer delay mechanism to compensate for any
difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in unusual cases, the two fibers are of
essentially identical length and composition, so this setting should be set to zero.
In unusual cases where the length of the link is different in different directions, this setting should be set to the number of
nanoseconds the Ethernet propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and from
the relay. For instance, if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the fibers that
the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9 000 ns and the that the delay from the switch to the
relay is 11 000 ns, then the mean delay is 10 000 ns, and the path delay asymmetry is +1 000 ns.

STRICT POWER PROFILE

Power profile (IEEE Std C37.238™-2011) requires that the relay only select as a grandmaster power profile compliant
clocks, that the delivered time have worst-case error of ±1 µs, and that the peer delay mechanism be implemented. With
the strict power profile setting enabled, the relay only selects master clocks displaying the IEEE_C37_238 identification
codes. It uses a port only when the peer delay mechanism is operational. With the strict power profile setting disabled, the
relay uses clocks without the power profile identification when no power profile clocks are present, and uses ports even if
the peer delay mechanism is non-operational.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER

This setting should be set to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to be synchronized to. A network
may support multiple time distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain number. More commonly, there
is a single domain using the default domain number zero.
PTP VLAN PRIORITY

This setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s peer
delay mechanism. In compliance with PP the default VLAN priority is 4, but it is recommended that in accordance with PTP
it be set to 7.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN Priority may have no effect.
PTP VLAN ID
This setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s peer delay
mechanism. It is provided in compliance with PP. As these messages have a destination address that indicates they are
not to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no function, and so may be left at its default value.
Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is directly linked, VLAN ID may have no effect.
PTP EPOCH
This setting sets the reference point from which time is measured.
NOTE: PTP settings take effect after rebooting the device.

5.2.1.10 Routing
A default route and a maximum number of 6 static routes may be configured. The default route is used as the last choice,
if no other route towards a given destination is found.
PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > ROUTING

Default RT GWY Oct1 10 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 IP Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 Mask Oct1 0 [0 : 255]
Static RT1 GWY Oct1 0 [0 : 255]


The redundancy communications comes with the capability of setting a number of static routes and one default route, which
is used instead of default gateway.

Default RT GWY:
This setting sets the gateway of the default route to be used by IP traffic sent from the relay, if no other route towards a
given IP destination is found.
Note that this setting is only valid on port B if port REDUNDANCY is set to INDEPENDENT.
Static RTX IP: This setting sets the destination IPv4 route.
Static RTX MASK: This setting sets the IP mask associated with the route.
Static RTX GWY: This setting sets the gateway to reach the destination IP route.
Important Notes:
1. Host routes are not supported at present.
2. The route mask has IPv4 mask format. In binary this should be a set of contiguous bits of 1 from left to right, followed
by one or more contiguous bits of 0.
3. The route destination and mask must match.
•This can be verified by checking that RtDestination & RtMask == RtDestination
•Example of good configuration: RtDestination= 10.1.1.0; Rt Mask= 255.255.255.0
•Example of bad configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.1; Rt Mask= 255.255.255.0
4) The route destination must not be a connected network.
5) The route gateway must be on a connected network. This rule applies to the gateway address of the default route as
well.
5.2.2 MODBUS user map settings

The ModBus user map definition. 256 records, selectable from the complete relay ModBus map, from the ModBus user
map. For more detailed information go to appendix B in this manual.
Product Setup > ModBus User Map

Address 00 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
Address 01 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
... ...
Address 254 0000 [0000 : FFFF]
Address 255 0000 [0000 : FFFF]

5.2.3 Fault report settings

The fault report module defines the type of fault (three-phase, phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground), and the distance to the
fault. The fault activation signal (FAULT REPORT TRIGG) is programmed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements.
The fault report provides fault date, fault type and fault location information.
Information referred to the last ten faults is stored as fault report and available to the user through the EnerVista 650 Setup
software or the web server application. Each fault report includes the following information:
• Fault date and time
• Pre-fault current and voltage in primary values
• Fault current and voltages in primary values
• Fault type
• Distance to the fault (fault location)
• Line parameters
• Recloser and breaker status information
As an option, the Relay offers the possibility to display a fault-warning message on the relay HMI (selectable by setting).
5.2.3.1 Fault report settings
Setpoint > Product Setup > Fault Report

Setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Positive sequence impedance module Pos Seq Module 3.00 0.01 Ohm [0.01 : 250.00]
Positive sequence impedance angle Pos Seq Angle 75 1 Deg [25 : 90]
Zero sequence impedance module Zero Seq Module 9.00 0.01 Ohm [0.01 : 750.00]
Zero sequence impedance angle Zero Seq Angle 75 1 Deg [25 : 90]
Line length Line Length 100.0 0.1 [0.0 : 2000.0]
Display fault on HMI Show Fault On HMI DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
CT Direction CT Direction REVERSE N/A REVERSE-FORWARD
CT Connections CT Connections CTA+CTB+CTC N/A [CTA+CTB+CTC-CTA+CTB-
CTA+CTC-CTB+CTC]
Function permission (Function): Enabling this setting allows to create a fault report
when the FAULT REPORT TRIGG is activated.
Positive sequence impedance module (Pos Seq Module): Value, in ohms, of the line positive sequence
impedance module.
Positive sequence impedance Angle (Pos Seq Angle): Value, in degrees, of the line positive sequence angle.
Zero sequence impedance module (Zero Seq Module): Value, in ohms, of the line zero sequence impedance
module.
Zero sequence impedance Angle (Zero Seq Angle): Value, in degrees, of the line zero sequence angle.
Line Length: The metering element can be kilometers or miles.
Show Fault On HMI: This setting enables or disables the option to display
faults on the Relay HMI.
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables the snapshot event
generation for the fault report element.
CT Direction: Direction of the phase current transformers.

Forward: The polarity of he current transformers is as

the F650 wiring diagram.
Reverse: The polarity of the current transformers is
inverted. Voltage and current are 180º out of phase.
CT Connections: This setting allows fault locator function to work with
different CTs configurations. Based on this selection,
fault locator function can work with two different
configurations:
-With three phase current inputs measured through
phase CT inputs
-With two phase current inputs and ground current
inputs measured through corresponding CT inputs.
Third phase current inputs is calculated using
measured values of current inputs previously
described.
Settings available:
CTA+CTB+CTC- All three currents used during fault
location are the ones that are measured directly from
Ia, Ib, Ic current inputs.
CTA+CTB- Ia and Ib used by fault locator are the ones
measured and Ic is calculated based on Ia, Ib and Ig.
CTA+CTC- Ia and Ic used by fault locator are the ones
measured and Ib is calculated based on Ia, Ic and Ig.
CTB+CTC- Ib and Ic used by fault locator are the ones
measured and Ib is calculated based on Ia, Ic and Ig.
WARNING
If only two phase CTs are connected to the relay, several protection elements are affected and could experience
unexpected behaviors. Also several measurements are affected and accuracy will not be met.
Proper behavior of all protection elements and measurements accuracy cannot be guaranteed if any of these
settings is selected: CTA+CTB, CTA+CTC, CTB+CTC.
States associated with the fault report (Actual >Status>Records Status > Fault Reports), are shown on Table 5-7: Fault
report states
Table 5-7: Fault report states
FAULT REPORT STATES
FAULT REPORT TRIGG
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS
FAULT DATE
FAULT TYPE
FAULT LOCATION
FAULT REPORT NUMBER
FAULT REPORT TRIGG: The activation of this state initiates the calculation of the fault location and the generation
of the corresponding report.

CLEAR FAULT REPORTS: The activation of this state produces the removal of all faults stored in the relay.
Additionally, all active faults on the HMI display are acknowledged. This signal is
programmed at “Setpoint>Relay Configuration>Protection Elements”.
FAULT DATE: Date and time of the last fault.
FAULT TYPE: Type of the last fault produced (3PHASE, AG, BG, CG, AB, ABG, BC, BCG, CA, CAG, NAF). NAF
indicates that the type of fault has not been calculated.
FAULT LOCATION: Calculated distance to the last fault (the metering element is the same used for setting the
line length).
FAULT REPORT NUMBER: Number of the fault report file saved in the relay’s non-volatile memory, associated with
the last fault produced.
5.2.3.2 Fault report retrieval

Fault report files can be retrieved using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at "http:\\relay IP address".
To obtain fault reports using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, go to Actual > Records > Fault report. The top of the
window shows the number of the last fault report stored by the device (Fault Record Number). Click View header to see the
header of the record selected under Select Record.
Click Download to retrieve the file and save in a selected folder. The file name is “FLTxxx.TXT”, where xxx is the
corresponding record number.
• For firmware versions below 7.XX, oscillography record retrieval uses serial (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp)
communication ports.
• For firmware versions below 7.70, oscillography record retrieval uses Ethernet communications ports (ftp, tftp).
• For firmware versions 7.70 and above, oscillography record retrieval uses serial (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp)
Fault reports are stored in the relay’s non-volatile memory, so they are accessible from the EnerVista 650 Setup software
or the relay’s web server. The fault report is a text file named FLTxxx.txt where xxx is the record number, with a range of
001 to 999. Only files from the 10 last faults are stored. If there are already ten files stored and a new fault occurs, the new
fault overwrites the oldest one. If Show Fault on HMI is enabled, real-time fault information is also displayed on the HMI.
When a fault is produced and a warning message is displayed on the HMI, fault information alternates between two
separate screens: one with general information, and a second with the fault metering values. This screen needs to be
acknowledged by the user to exit the fault report screen. If several consecutive faults are produced, the HMI displays the
most recent one. Each stored fault needs to be acknowledged (up to a maximum of 10 faults). The HMI menu offers an
option to view the last 10 faults produced, with both the general information screen and the metering screen available for
each fault.

5.2.4 Oscillography settings

Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
This trigger can be configured with a programmable logic operand.
Oscillography records are stored in COMTRADE ASCII - IEEE C37.111-1999 standard format.
The oscillography module is in charge of storing the instantaneous values of the 9 analog signals and the 16
programmable digital signals at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Oscillography in fault conditions (OSCILLO TRIGGER
signal activation).
All oscillography records store all analog signals (fixed) plus 16 digital signals (programmable). The order of storage in the
case of analog signals is as follows:
Analog 1 IA channel.
Analog 2 IB channel.
Analog 3 IC channel.
Analog 4 IG channel.
Analog 5 ISG channel.
Analog 6 VA or VAB channel, depending on the selected configuration (Wye or Delta, at “Setpoint>System Setup >
General Settings > Serial VT Connection”).
Analog 7 VB or VBC channel, depending on the selected configuration (Wye or Delta, at “Setpoint>System Setup >
General settings > Phase VT Connection”).
Analog 8 VC or VCA channel, depending on the selected configuration (Wye or Delta, at “Setpoint>System Setup >
General settings>Phase VT Connection”).
Analog 9 VN or VX channel, depending on the selected configuration (zero sequence measured, or busbar voltage, at
“Setpoint>System Setup>General settings>Auxiliary Voltage”).
The 16 digital channels and the oscillography trigger signal are programmable using the EnerVista 650 Setup software at
Setpoint > Relay configuration > Oscillography. Each digital channel can be associated with a single status or to a logic
status. In this last case, the logic must be configured using the PLC Editor tool, at Setpoint > Logic Configuration inside
EnerVista 650 Setup. The oscillography trigger signal can be a single status or a configured logic. The relay’s default
configuration associates the oscillography trigger to Virtual Output 83, which corresponds to the logic associated with the
general trip of protection elements.
5.2.4.1 Oscillography settings
Setpoint > Product Setup > Oscillography

Function Permission Function ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Prefault Trigger Position 30 1% [5 : 95]
Samples per cycle Samples/Cycle 64 N/A [4 – 8 – 16 –32 – 64]
Maximum number of oscillos Max. Number Osc. 4 1 oscillo [1 : 20]
Automatic oscillography overwrite Automatic Overwrite DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Function Permission (Function): Enabling this setting allows to create an oscillography record when the “TRIGGER
OSCILLO” signal is activated.
Trigger Position: This setting defines the prefault data (in percentage) stored every time a new oscillo is
produced.
Samples/Cycle: This setting defines the number of samples per cycle stored in each oscillography
record.

Maximum Number of Oscillos (Max. Number Osc.):

1 to 20 oscillography records can be selected.
Automatic Overwrite: This setting allows chained oscillographies during the fault (TRIGGER OSCILLO signal
activated). The oscillography module is reset once the data has been completely
stored in Flash memory and the TRIGGER OSCILLO state is deactivated.
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables snapshot event generation for the oscillography
element.
Oscillography files calculations
The overall maximum samples capacity is allocated for 27594 samples. The size of each oscillography file depends on the
configured number of oscillographies and is evenly distributed based on the maximum samples value using these
formulas:
Number of samples per oscillography = (27594 samples)/(Max. Number Osc. setpoint)

Number of cycles per oscillography = (Number of samples per oscillography)/(Samples / Cycle setpoint).
After a change in oscillography settings all oscillography files stored on the flash memory are
NOTICE erased.
EXAMPLE
For a Max. Number Osc. of 4, each record stores 27594 / 4 = 6898 samples per stored oscillo.
If we set the Samples /Cycle setpoint to 64 samples per cycle, each record stores up to 6898 / 64 = 107.78 signal cycles.
This value expressed in terms of time is:
For 50 Hz: 204.79 cycles x 20 ms/cycle = 4095.8 ms.
For 60 Hz: 204.79 cycles x 16.67 ms/cycle = 3413 ms.
5.2.4.2 Oscillography states
OSCILLOGRAPHY STATES
OSC DIG CHANNEL 1
OSC DIG CHANNEL 2
OSC DIG CHANNEL 3
OSC DIG CHANNEL 4
OSC DIG CHANNEL 5
OSC DIG CHANNEL 6
OSC DIG CHANNEL 7
OSC DIG CHANNEL 8
OSC DIG CHANNEL 9
OSC DIG CHANNEL 10
OSC DIG CHANNEL 11
OSC DIG CHANNEL 12
OSC DIG CHANNEL 13
OSC DIG CHANNEL 14
OSC DIG CHANNEL 15
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
OSCILLO TRIGGER
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS
CYCLES PER RECORD
AVAILABLE RECORDS

OSC DIGITAL CHANNEL XX: These states are configured at “Setpoint>Relay configuration>Oscillography”. Each
of these states can be associated with a protection state or to a virtual output. Each
oscillography record reflects the changes experienced by this state during the record.
OSCILLO TRIGGER: The activation of this state produces the oscillography record capture. Each record
uses a percentage of its capacity to store prefault information. This percentage is
selected in the Trigger Position setting, and the rest of the record’s capacity stores
post-fault information.
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: This is the number of the most recent oscillography record stored in the relay. The
record is stored in COMTRADE format. The range is 0 to 999.
CYCLES PER RECORD: This state displays the number of cycles that are stored in each oscillography record.
Although the number of cycles can be a decimal number, the record represents only
the integer part.
AVAILABLE RECORDS: The range is 0 to 20.
5.2.4.3 Oscillography file retrieval

Oscillography files can be retrieved using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at “http:\\relay IP address”.
To obtain the oscillography records using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, go to “Actual>Records>Waveform capture”.
The top of the window shows the number of the last oscillography record stored by the device (Newest Record Number),
followed by the maximum number of oscillos available (Available Records in Device). Click View header to show the header
of the record selected at Select Record.
Click Download and the three files (*.DAT, *.HDR, *.CFG) that form the oscillography record in the COMTRADE standard are
retrieved and viewed automatically if the GE-OSC software is installed in the computer. Retrieved oscillography records
can be viewed using any Comtrade viewer. The EnerVista 650 Setup software stores oscillography records in the folder
“.\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\osc” by default, in the same directory where the program is installed. The file names are
“OSCxxx.DAT”, “OSCxxx.CFG”, “OSCxxx.HDR”, where xxx is the corresponding record number.
• For firmware versions below 7.XX, oscillography record retrieval uses serial (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp)
• For firmware versions below 7.70, oscillography record retrieval uses Ethernet communications ports (ftp, tftp).
• For firmware versions 7.70 and above, oscillography record retrieval uses serial (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp)
5.2.5 Data logger settings

The F650 data logger can store information from up to 16 analog channels, among all channels available in the relay, with
a selectable sampling rate. The memory of the data logger is fixed at 64 Kilobytes with two bytes needed per channel. The
selected channels take all available memory space, therefore, the number of days of storage depends on the selected
number of channels and sampling rate.
5.2.5.1 Data logger SETTINGS
Setpoint > Product Setup > Data Logger

Data logger Rate Data Logger Rate 1s N/A [1 s, 5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 20 min., 30 min., 60 min.]
Data Logger analog channels X Data Logger Chnl X None N/A [1 to 16]
Function permission (Function): This must be enabled to start storing information.

Data Logger Rate: the data logger can be configured in rates of 1 second, and 5, 10, 15,
20, 30 and 60 minutes

Data Logger Analog Channel X (Data Logger Chnl X): Analog Channels programmable in the data logger. The X value has
a range from 0 to 16.
Any setting change in the Data Logger erases all stored information.
5.2.5.2 Data logger associated states

States associated with the data logger module (“Actual >Status>Records Status>Data logger) are shown on the table
below:
DATA LOGGER STATES

OLDEST SAMPLE TIME
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS
DATA LOGGER DAYS
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME: The Date/time of the oldest state with 6 characters. This is the time that corresponds
to the oldest sample. This value remains constant until the available memory capacity
is exceeded. Afterwards, this value changes according to the sampling rate (Data
Logger Rate).
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME: The Date/time of the newest state with 6 characters. This is the time when the most
recent sample was taken. This value is updated according to the sample rate selected.
If no channel has been selected, these settings do not change.
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS: This state shows the number of channels selected.
DATA LOGGER DAYS: This state shows the number of days that can be stored. It depends on the Data
Logger Rate setting, and on the number of channels selected.
5.2.5.3 Data logger file format and retrieval
File Retrieval
Data logger files can be retrieved using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, or the web server at “http:\\relay IP address”.
For obtaining the data logger files using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, the user must access “Actual>Records>Data
Logger”. The top of the window shows the date when the oldest sample was taken, and then the date when the newest
sample was taken.
This screen shows the measurements stored for the different channels through the time.
Clicking on the “Download” button, all the information contained in the file can be read.
Clicking on the “Save” button, the data logger files (*.DAT, *.CFG) are retrieved in COMTRADE format, and saved by default
in the folder “...\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\osc”, using “DLGxxx.DAT”, “DLGxxx.CFG” names, where xxx is the corresponding
record number.
For firmware versions below 7.70, datalogger record retrieval uses Ethernet communications ports (ftp, tftp). For firmware
versions 7.70 or above, datalogger record retrieval uses serial (ModBus RTU) or Ethernet (ftp, tftp) communication ports
File Format
Data logger information is made of two text files: configuration file (datalogger.cfg), and data file (datalogger.dat).

5.2.6 Demand settings
5.2.6.1 Metering values and settings

The demand calculation is made according to the following primary parameters:
Table 5-8: Primary demand values

PRIMARY DEMAND VALUES STEP
IA (RMS) KA
IB (RMS) KA
IC (RMS) KA
IG (RMS) KA
ISG (RMS) KA
I2 KA
Three phase active power (W) MW
Three phase reactive power (VAR) MVAr
Apparent power (VA) MVA
*Note: The step depends on the selected “Primary Meter Units” in System Setup > General Settings (A_V; KA_KV)
Different integration methods can be selected to calculate current and power values.
Calculated demand values are as follows:
Table 5-9: Demand calculated values
DEMAND CALCULATED VALUES
DEMAND IA DEMAND IG DEMAND W
DEMAND IA MAX DEMAND IG MAX DEMAND W MAX
DEMAND IA DATE DEMAND IG DATE DEMAND W DATE
DEMAND IB DEMAND ISG DEMAND VAR PWR
DEMAND IB MAX DEMAND ISG MAX DEMAND VAR MAX
DEMAND IB DATE DEMAND ISG DATE DEMAND VAR DATE
DEMAND IC DEMAND I2 DEMAND VA PWR
DEMAND IC MAX DEMAND I2 MAX DEMAND VA MAX
DEMAND IC DATE DEMAND I2 DATE DEMAND VA DATE
The relay measures current demanded on each phase, ground and sensitive ground, negative sequence and three-phase
demand for real, reactive and apparent power. Current and Power methods can be chosen separately. Settings are
provided to disable certain measuring techniques. These techniques are used by many utilities for statistical or control
purposes.

Demand module settings are as follows:

Table 5-10: Demand settings
Setpoint > Product Setup > Demand
Function permission Demand Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Demand method for current CRNT Demand Method THERMAL EXPONENTIAL N/A [BLOCK INTERVAL -
values ROLLING DEMAND -
THERMAL EXPONENTIAL]
Demand method for Power values POWER Demand Method THERMAL EXPONENTIAL N/A [BLOCK INTERVAL -
ROLLING DEMAND -
Demand interval Demand Interval 5 Minutes N/A [5 – 10 – 15 – 20– 30–60]
Trigger Enabled Trigger Enabled DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Function permission (Function): This setting enables the demand function.

Demand Method for Current values (CRNT Demand Method): Selection of the demand calculation method for current
values. Available methods are Thermal Exponential, Block interval, and Rolling
Demand.
Demand Method for Power values (POWER Demand Method): Selection of the demand calculation method for power
values. Available methods are Thermal Exponential, Block interval, and Rolling
Demand.
Demand Interval: Integration interval. Available intervals are 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes.
Measurement integration is performed in the period adjusted in the Demand Interval
setting.
Demand Trigger: Operation mode selection for the Block Interval calculation method. This operation
mode depends on the “Trigger Enabled” setting. If trigger enabled is set as disabled,
measurement integration is made in the Demand Interval period. If trigger enabled is
enabled, measurement integration is made during the time interval between two
consecutive pulses of the input assigned as DEMAND TRIGGER INP,. This input is set
at Setpoint > Relay configuration > Protection Elements
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the demand
element.
5.2.6.2 Demand calculation methods
Calculation Method 1: Thermal Exponential

This method simulates the action of an analog peak recording thermal demand meter. The relay measures the magnitude
for each phase (or three-phase, depending on the case) every second, and it assumes that the magnitude remains the
same until the next update. It calculates the equivalent thermal demand using the following equation:
d (t ) =D(1 − e−Kt )
Where:
D Input signal (constant).
d(t) Demand value after applying the input value during time t (in minutes)
K 2.3 / thermal 90% response time

Illustrated bellow is the curve with a 90% characteristic time of 15 minutes. A setting establishes the time to reach 90% of
a steady-state value, just as the response time of an analog instrument. A steady-state valve applied for twice the
response time indicates 99% of the value.
Calculation Method 2: Rolling Demand.

This method calculates the linear average of the quantity over the set demand time interval. The calculation is made every
second. The value is updated every minute and indicates the demand over the time interval just preceding the time of
update.
Calculation Method 3: Block Interval

The Block Interval operation mode depends on the “Trigger Enabled” setting.
Calculation Method 3a: Block Interval – With trigger setting DISABLED.

This method consists on integrating the measurements during the time period specified in the DEMAND INTERVAL
setting. The calculation is made every second and the demand value is the average of all values produced during the
time interval. The time interval is chosen in the DEMAND INTERVAL setting. The interval demand value is shown once
this time has expired.
If, for example, the setting indicates 15 minutes for integration, the demand value update is made every 15 minutes
(although the calculation is made every second). This method calculates a linear average of the magnitude.
Calculation Method 3b: Block Interval – With trigger setting ENABLED.

The demand value is given by integration of the measurement during the time between two consecutive pulses in the
input assigned. The input is assigned to DEMAND TRIGGER in Relay Configuration. The integration is made every
second with each new measure.
In case the interval between two consecutive pulses exceeds 60 minutes, the relay calculates the demand after 60
minutes from the last pulse, this measure is updated in the status and a new demand count starts. This method
calculates a linear average of the magnitude.

Figure 5-1: Response to different demand methods shows the behavior of the demand, depending on the Selected setting
for demand calculation.
1,2
0,8
0,6
Input
0,4
0,2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0,2
Time (minutes)
1,2
0,8
Demand %
0,6
0,4
0,2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0,2
Time (minutes)
1,2
0,8
Demand %
0,6
0,4
0,2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
-0,2
Time (minutes)
Block interval
1,2
0,8
Demand %
0,6
0,4
0,2
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 3
-0,2
Time (minutes)
Rolling demand
Figure 5-1: Response to different demand methods

5.2.6.3 Demand function measurements and states

Demand values are available at Actual > Metering > Primary Values > Demand.
Table 5-11: Demand measurements
DEMAND IA 0.000 KA
DEMAND IA MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IA DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IB 0.000 KA
DEMAND IB MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IB DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IC 0.000 KA
DEMAND IC MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IC DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND IG 0.000 KA
DEMAND IG MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND IG DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND ISG 0.000 KA
DEMAND ISG MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND ISG DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND I2 0.000 KA
DEMAND I2 MAX 0.000 KA
DEMAND I2 DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND W 0.000 MW
DEMAND W MAX 0.000 MW
DEMAND W DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND VAR PWR 0.000 MVAr
DEMAND VAR MAX 0.000 MVAr
DEMAND VAR DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
DEMAND VA PWR 0.000 MVA
DEMAND VA MAX 0.000 MVA
DEMAND VA DATE 01-Jan-2000 00:00:00.000
*Note: The step depends on the selected “Primary Meter Units” in System Setup > General Settings (A_V; KA_KV)
Demand measurements for current values are as follows:

DEMAND IX This is the demanded value every minute or every integration period, depending on the
selected settings.
DEMAND IX MAX Demanded maximeter; it stores the Maximum demand value until a demand reset is
issued.
DEMAND IX DATE Date of the Maximum demand value
Being X the phase considered in each case.
Demand measurements for power values are as follows:

DEMAND Y This is the demanded value every minute or every integration period, depending on the
selected settings
DEMAND Y MAX Demanded maximeter; it stores the Maximum demand value until a demand reset is
issued.
DEMAND Y DATE Date of the Maximum demand value.

Being Y the power considered in each case.
W Three-phase active power

VAR Three-phase reactive power
VA Three-phase apparent power
The maximum demanded value is stored in non-volatile memory. It is not cleared when the relay is turned off. When the
relay is turned on again, the maximum values are updated.
States associated with the demand (“Actual>Status>Records Status>Demand”) are the following:
Table 5-12: Demand associated values

DEMAND ASOCIATED STATES
DEMAND TRIGGER INP
DEMAND RESET INP
Besides the previously considered demand measures, two states are used for demand control:
DEMAND TRIGGER INP Bit type state, Programmable at “Setpoint>Relay Configuration>Protection Elements” in the
EnerVista 650 Setup software. This signal is used by the Block Interval demand method.
DEMAND RESET INP Bit type state, programmable at “Setpoint>Relay Configuration>Protection Elements” in the
EnerVista 650 Setup software. When this bit is activated, the demand measures are reset. All
stored values are reset to zero (for demand dates, this value represents January 1st, 2000).
5.2.7 Time Settings

The date and time can be synchronized to a known time using the SNTP protocol, IRIG-B protocol (when it provides UTC
Time) or IEEE1588 (Available starting from version V7.00) and the TIME SETTINGS allow setting the date and time provided
by these protocols to the proper local time on the Real Time Clock.
When there is no SNTP protocol enabled, IRIG-B protocol is not set to UTC Time or IEEE1588 synchronization, the TIME
SETTINGS are not used in the Real Time Clock but are still used to calculate the UTC Time (i.e., for the IEC61850 protocol),
but its behavior is not assumed correct in several critical hour changes because of Daylight Savings Time getting effective.
In these configuration cases, it is recommended to disable Daylight Savings Time.
Table 5-13: Time Settings

The TIME SETTINGS settings are as follows:
LOC. TIME OFFS. UTC:

Is used to specify the local time zone offset from Universal Coordinated Time (Greenwich Mean Time) in hours.
DAYLIG. SAVINGS TIME:

Allow the unit clock to follow DST rules of the local time zone.
DST START MONTH:

Allow to set the start month of the DST from January to December
DST START WEEKDAY

Allow to set the start weekday of the DST from Monday to Sunday
DST START DAY INST:

Allow to set the start day instance from First, Second, Third, Fourth or Last
DST START HOUR

Allow to set the starting hour of the DST (in local time)
DST STOP MONTH

Allow to set the stop month of the DST from January to December
DST STOP WEEKDAY

Allow to set the stop weekday of the DST from Monday to Sunday
DST STOP DAY INST

Allow to set the stop day instance from First, Second, Third, Fourth or Last
DST STOP HOUR

Allow to set the stop hour of the DST (in local time)
IRIG-B LOCAL TIME:

Determines, in case of being enabled, if the IRIG-B protocol would carry the date in local time or else in UTC Time.
IRIG-B FUNCTION:
Setting for enable or disable the IRIG-B protocol
PTP IRIG-B PRIORITY:

If two or more time sources are setup the time source with the higher priority shown in the table below is used where 1 is
considered to be the highest priority. Note that the time source priority of PTP and IRIG-B can be swapped. Setting
changes become active after reboot.
The F650 is capable of receiving a time reference from several time sources in addition to its own internal clock for the
purpose of time stamping events, transient recorders and other occurrences within the relay. The accuracy of the time
stamp is based on the time reference that is used. The F650 supports an internal clock, SNTP, IRIG-B and 1588 as potential
time references.
Regarding the PTP, F650 acts as an ordinary clock, with only Sync and Pdelay_Req messages.

Table 5-14: Synchronization priority table

Time source Accuracy Priority
PTP 1*
IRIG-B 2*
SNTP 3
Internal Clock 4
The priority of IRIG B and PTP can be swapped
Note:
Synchronization by IEC103, DNP, Modbus and IEC104 is not going to be issued if there is a synch source from IRIG-B,
SNTP or PTP.

5.3 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
5.3 System setup
This section shows the settings related to the system setup definition.
5.3.1 General settings

This section determines the settings of the element configuration regarding its connection to the power system.
Setpoint > System Setup > General settings

setting Description Name Default Value Step Range
Phase CT ratio Phase CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Ground CT ratio Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Sensitive ground CT ratio Stv Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT ratio Phase VT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT connection Phase VT Connection WYE N/A [WYE – DELTA]
Rated voltage Nominal Voltage 100.0 0.1 [1.0 : 250.0]
Rated Frequency Nominal Frequency 50 Hz N/A [50-60]
Phase rotation Phase Rotation ABC N/A [ABC – ACB]
Frequency reference Frequency Reference VI N/A [VI-VII-VIII]
Auxiliary Voltage Auxiliary Voltage VX N/A [VX – VN]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Primary Meter Units Primary Meter Units KA_KV N/A [KA_KV; A_V]
Device Name Device Name N/A
The system rated voltage is used as reference by the voltage restraint in the phase timed overcurrent element.
The Frequency reference marks the voltage channel to which the system Frequency is measured.
The auxiliary voltage setting can be selected between VN and VX.
VN means that all elements using neutral voltage take the value directly from the fourth voltage input.
VX means that all elements using neutral voltage take the value calculated from phase voltages.
5.3.2 Miscellaneous settings

This section determines the relays status configuration regarding the service and local or remote modes.
Setpoint > System Setup > MISCELLANEOUS settings

Relay Out of Service Relay Out of Service ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Local/Remote Blocked Local/Remote Blocked OFF N/A [ON -OFF]
Active Language Active Language 0 N/A [0;1]
5.3.2.1 Out of service setting

The unit Relay Out of Service setting is configured in Setpoint > System Setup > Miscellaneous. The unit also has an Out
of Service status that is configured in Relay configuration > Protection elements. When active, these states stop all
changes to PLC equations and functions, including changes in the input/output boards, so if there is a change in any input

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
or output the unit will not show this change until has returned to ready mode. For example, if an output is closed and the
unit goes to the Out of Service state, the output is kept closed even if the state that closed it changes and would otherwise
open the output. When the unit goes out of the Out of Service state, the output is then opened.
Functions affected by Out of service State

- IO Boards.
- Protection functions
o Current:
• Phase IOC Low (50PL)
• Phase IOC High (50PH)
• Phase TOC High (51PH)
• Phase TOC Low (51PL)
• Phase Dir (67P)
• Thermal Model (49)
• Ground TOC (51G)
• Ground IOC (50G)
• Ground Dir (67G)
• Neutral TOC (51N)
• Neutral IOC (50N)
• Neutral Dir (67N)
• Senstv Gnd TOC (51SG)
• Senstv Gnd IOC (50SG)
• Sensitive Gnd Dir (67SG)
• IS Ground IOC (50IG)
• Neg Seq TOC (46)
• Neg Seq Dir (67I2)
o Voltage:
• Auxiliary OV (59X)
• Voltage Unbalance (60V)
• Phase UV (27)
• Neutral OV High (59NH)
• Neutral OV Low (59NL)
• Neg Seq OV (47)
• Auxiliary UV (27X)
• Phase OV (59)
o Power:
• Forward Power (32FP)
• Directional Power (32DIR)
• Watt Gnd Flt Low (32NL)
• Watt Gnd Flt High (32NH)
o Frequency:

• Underfrequency (81U)
• Overfrequency (81O)
• Frequency Rate of Change (81df/dt)
o Misc:
• Broken Conductor (I1I2)
• Load Encroachment
• Rotor Blocked (48)
• Setting Groups
• Recloser (79)
• Oscillography
• Synchrocheck (25)
• Fault Locator
• Max. number of starts (66)
• Fuse Failure (VTFF)
• Data Logger
• Comparator
• Switchgear
• Breaker
When the Out of Service status goes to ON, or the setting has been changed to Enabled, the ready LED changes to red. Be
careful if the ready LED is linked to an output, because the output will not change its state. To set an output to the ready
state, see the factory default Logic & Configuration. Take notice that VO_000 is set to the output instead of VO_099
The following figure shows the flow chart of these states
Only if there is any change from Enabled to
OUT OF SERVICE Disabled

Only if LOGIC:
FLOWCHART Relay Out Of Service
goes from Enabled to
Disabled
RELAY IN Ready OoS status

SERVICE LED ON OFF
SETTING: LOGIC:
START Relay Out Relay Out
Disabled Disabled
Of Service Of Service
Enabled Enabled
Only if there is a change

OoS status from Disabled to Enabled
ON
RELAY OUT
Only if there is any OF SERVICE
change from Disabled to
Enabled
Ready
LED OFF

5.3.2.2 Local - remote block setting

In the enhanced HMI with USB port new setting has been released in order to be able to lock the Local/Remote front key.
This setting is available via COMS or frontal HMI menu. The settings can be locked by password, so the operator wouldn't
be able to change the local-remote without inserting the password.
Definitions
The value is defined as:
• OFF: The operator is able to change the operations from local to remote or OFF.
• ON: The operator is not able to change the operations from local to remote or OFF.
Settings
The unit is set by the HMI and by 650PC software as it is shown in the following figure.
5.3.3 FlexCurve settings

The relay incorporates 4 user curves called Flex Curve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are defined by the user in
“Setpoint>System Setup>Flex Curves” menu in EnerVista 650 Setup. User defined flex curves can be selected as an
operation curve in all the time overcurrent functions in the relay.
In the flex curves menu there are 120 points to define a user curve. 40 points for reset (from 0 to 0.98 times the pickup
value) and 80 for operate (from 1.03 to 20 times the pickup).
Table 5-15: FlexCurve settings
Setpoint > System Setup > Flex Curves
Flex Curves A > Flex Curves B> Flex Curves C > Flex Curves D
Values for reset points 0.00 pkp Time 0.00xPKP [RST] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
… … … … …
Values for operation points 1.03 pkp Time 1.03xPKP [OP] 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
… … … … …

The definition of the curve points can be introduced directly in the Flex Curve settings menu. Alternatively they can be
created using the graphical tool provided by clicking Edit Curve in the Flex curves menu in EnerVista 650 Setup.
In the user curve edit screen (see Figure 5-2: FlexCurves edition), a base curve can be selected, from the Standard Curves
menu. This curve is used as a template to create the user curve. Once the standard curve is viewed, it is possible to make
the user curve (operate, reset or both) reconcile the standard curve, using the Flex curve > set flex curve from the
standard curve, and then modifying any of the points by editing in the table the corresponding value.
The user can also view a different curve model to the one the FlexCurve has been adapted to, and compare both models to
adopt the most appropriate values in each case. If once the user curve has been configured, the user wants to store the
information, the “Flex Curve > Exit with Data” menu must be selected. If the results are not to be saved, the Exit without
Data option must be selected. Now, calculated points must be saved in the Flex Curve using the “Store” option.
Figure 5-2: FlexCurves edition

5.3.4 Breaker settings

There are two types of breaker settings:
Breaker settings: These settings correspond to the switchgear configured as a breaker in the F650; this switchgear is used
in the recloser functions, breaker failure and synchronism.
Breaker Maintenance: These settings correspond to the initialization of the (KI)2t counters, and the counting of the number
of openings and closings of the switchgear configured as a breaker.
Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker settings

Setting Description Name Default Step Range
Value
Number of Switchgear selected as breaker Number of Switchgear 1 1 [1 : 16]
Maximum value of (KI)2t Maximum (KI)2t 9999.99 0.01(KA)2 s [0.00 : 9999.99]
(KI)2t integration time (KI)2t Integ. Time 0.03 0.01s [0.03 : 0.25]
Maximum number of openings Maximum Openings 9999 1 [0 : 9999]
Maximum Openings in one hour Max.Openings 1 hour 40 1 [1 : 60]
Breaker settings are as follows:

Number of switchgear: This is the Number of the Switchgear that is configured as a breaker. It is the reference for
breaker failure (50BF), recloser (79) and synchronism (25) elements. The selected
switchgear in the breaker settings must be previously configured at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Switchgear. The relay allows to configure up to 16 switchgear elements,
but the one configured as a breaker is the reference for (KI)2t, openings and closings
counters.
Maximum (KI)2t: This is the maximum set value for the square of the current multiplied by the breaker
opening time. There is a separate counter for each phase, but the value stored as the
maximum is a single value for the three phases.
(KI)2t Integration Time: This is the integration time taken as the base (fixed opening time) for the calculation of
(KI)2t.
Maximum Openings: This is the maximum number of openings allowed in the relay, with a limit of 9999; once
this value is exceeded, the relay produces an alarm. When the limit 9999 is reached the
maximum openings counter starts from zero.
Maximum Openings in 1 hour: This is the maximum number of openings allowed in the relay during one hour; once this
value is reached, the corresponding alarm signal is activated; this value is updated and
reset after one hour.
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the breaker signals.
The interrupted current limit setting, fixes the Maximum breaker capacity (this value is set depending on the information
provided by the breaker manufacturer); the relay incorporates a (KI)2t counter for each phase, when a breaker opening
occurs, the counter increases its value (in primary values). If the flowing current is lower than the rated current, the relay
takes the rated current value for its calculations. When the accumulated counter for each phase reaches or exceeds the
set value, the corresponding alarm signal is activated.
The purpose of this function is to provide closer information of the current status of the breaker’s internal contacts. This is,
in order to ensure appropriate breaker maintenance, and to decrease the risk of damage when the breaker has suffered
severe operations during a long time. Once the breaker has been operated, and the preventive maintenance is in place,
the accumulated I2t values and the number of operations are reset to zero.

5.3.4.1 Breaker maintenance

To consider used breakers, the relay allows to set initial I2t values as well as an initial number of operations, in order to take
into account previous breaker operations, as well as operations produced during testing. Breaker maintenance
parameters can be set in the breaker maintenance menu.
Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker Maintenance

2
(KI) t Counter Phase A 2
(KI) t BKR Ph A Cnt 0.00 2
0.01 (KA) s [0.00 : 9999.99]
2
(KI) t Counter Phase B 2
(KI) t BKR Ph B Cnt 0.00 2
0.01 (KA) s [0.00 : 9999.99]
(KI)2t Counter Phase C (KI)2t BKR Ph C Cnt 0.00 0.01 (KA)2 s [0.00 : 9999.99]
Openings counter BKR Openings Cnt 0 1 [0 : 9999]
Closings counter BKR Closings Cnt 0 1 [0 : 9999]
In this group of settings, the start values of the breaker Counters can be set.
These Counters allow the breaker Maintenance. They are used to accumulate the breaker aging produced by a trip or a
breaker opening. In order to incorporate the breaker’s history, in case of used breakers, the system allows assigning an
initial value to accumulated amperes, and to the number of opening and closing operations.
To supervise breaker aging, S(KI)2t accumulated values are calculated and stored for each phase in each opening. If the
rated current is not exceeded, as in the case of a manual opening command, without fault current, the relay uses the rated
current instead of the measured value.
(KI)2t value is accumulated and maintained in independent Counters for each phase. Counters can be accessed through
the local HMI as well as through the EnerVista 650 Setup software. The element incorporates a setting to select the
integration time ((KI)2t Integ. Time).
The signals associated with the opened or closed status of the breaker can be monitored at Actual > Status > Breaker
Table 5-16: Breaker status
BREAKER STATUS DESCRIPTION
BREAKER OPEN Breaker in open position.
BREAKER CLOSED Breaker in close position
BREAKER UNDEFINED Breaker undefined
The signals associated with breaker maintenance can be monitored at Actual > Status > Records Status > Breaker
Maintenance, and they are as follows:
Table 5-17: Breaker maintenance status
BREAKER MAINTENANCE DESCRIPTION
(KI)2t PHASE A ALARM This signal activates when the set value for phase A is exceeded.
(KI)2t PHASE B ALARM This signal activates when the set value for phase B is exceeded.
(KI)2t PHASE C ALARM This signal activates when the set value for phase C is exceeded.
BKR OPENINGS ALARM Relay total Number of Openings alarm
BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALRM Relay total Number of Openings in one hour alarm
RESET (KI)2t COUNTERS (KI)2t Counters reset signal. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements, and it is used for resetting the (KI)2t counter through the corresponding signal, command,
digital input, etc.
RESET BKR COUNTERS Reset signal for the Opening and Closing Counters. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements, and it is used for resetting the breaker Opening and closing
counters.
BREAKER OPENINGS Number of Breaker openings
BREAKER CLOSINGS Number of Breaker closings
(KI)2t PHASE A Accumulated (KI)2t value for phase A ((KI)2t Counter for Phase A)

(KI)2t PHASE B Accumulated (KI)2t value for phase B ((KI)2t Counter for Phase B)
(KI)2t PHASE C Accumulated (KI)2t value for phase C ((KI)2t Counter for Phase C)
BKR OPENING TIME Maximum breaker Opening time. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration
>Switchgear in the number of switchgear corresponding to the breaker selection
BKR CLOSING TIME Maximum breaker Closing time. This signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration
>Switchgear in the number of switchgear corresponding to the breaker selection
BKR OPEN TIMING Exact time in opening the breaker
BKR CLOSE TIMING Exact time in closing the breaker
5.3.5 Switchgear settings

There is the possibility to enable or disable the generation of internal signals for the different elements (protection, control,
inputs and outputs, switchgear) available in the device.
Setpoint > System Setup > Switchgear

Setting Description Name Default Step Range
Value
Snapshot Event generation for switchgear #1 Snapshot Events SWGR 1 DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
5.4 Protection elements

NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, menu references to EnerVista 650 Setup software are related to version 7.5X or above in
this section. To obtain menu information for older firmware version, refer to the corresponding manual.
5.4.1 Available settings and setting groups

Available protection elements and setting groups are described for different firmware versions, along with configuration
examples. Ensure you are looking at the correct firmware version for your relay: 5.4.1.1 Firmware 7.2x and below or 5.4.1.2
Firmware 7.50 or above.
5.4.1.1 Firmware 7.2x and below

This section only affects F650 units with firmware version 7.2x or below.
F650 relays incorporate the following protection elements:
CURRENT ELEMENTS
Instantaneous overcurrent:
3 x PHASE IOC HIGH (50PH)
3 x PHASE IOC LOW (50PL)
3 x NEUTRAL IOC (50N)
3 x GROUND IOC (50G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND IOC (50SG)
3 x ISOLATED GROUND IOC (50IG)
Time delayed overcurrent:
3 x PHASE TOC HIGH (51PH)
3 x PHASE TOC LOW (51PL)
3 x NEUTRAL TOC (51N)
3 x GROUND TOC (51G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND TOC (51SG)
Negative sequence overcurrent:
3 x NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC (46P)
Thermal image:
3 x THERMAL MODEL (49P)
DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS
3 x PHASE DIR (67P)
3 x NEUTRAL DIR (67N)
3 x GROUND DIR (67G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND DIR (67SG)
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
Phase under/overvoltage
3 x PHASE UV (27P)
3 x PHASE OV (59P)

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
Zero sequence overvoltage

3 x NEUTRAL OV HIGH (59NH)
3 x NEUTRAL OV LOW (59NL)
Additional auxiliary under/overvoltage (for VX selection in auxiliary voltage)
3 x AUXILIARY OV (59X)
3 x AUXILIARY UV (27X)
Negative sequence overvoltage:
3 x NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV (47P)
POWER
3 x FORWARD POWER (32FP)
3 x DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)
3 x WATT GND FLT HIGH (32NH)
3 x WATT GND FLT LOW (32NL)
The F650 elements incorporate also the following control elements:
1 x SETTINGS GROUP
3 x OVERFREQUENCY (81O)*1
3 x UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)*1
1 x SYNCHROCHECK(25)
1 x AUTORECLOSE (79)
1 x BREAKER FAILURE (50BF)
1 x FUSE FAILURE (VTFF)
3 x BROKEN CONDUCTOR
1 x BREAKER SETTINGS
3 x LOCKED ROTOR
8 x PULSE COUNTERS (No group concept)
20 x ANALOG COMPARATORS (No group concept)
3 x FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE (81 df/dt)
3 x LOAD ENCROACHMENT
Note *1: For firmware version 7.20 or above, three extra underfrequency and overfrequency elements have been added
which gives a total of 6 underfrequency and 6 overfrequency elements.
F650 elements incorporate a flexible grouping capability for protection ELEMENTS. This means that protection elements
can be used in either one of the following modes:
5.4.1.1.1 Single setting groups

In this operation mode, all protection elements can be activated and operated simultaneously.
5.4.1.1.2 Three setting groups

In this mode, protection elements are grouped in three independent tables. Only one of them is active at a given time. A
logic signal, e.g. a digital input, selects which table is active at each time, providing adaptive protection to each network
condition.

Protection element grouping involves only Protection elements together with broken conductor detection and active and
directional power, which are usually considered as control elements. The rest of the control elements such as recloser,
fuse failure, breaker failure, synchronism, and breaker settings are not involved in the tabled groups concept.
The distribution of protection elements in tabled groups is described in Table 5-18: Distribution of protection and control
elements
Table 5-18: Distribution of protection and control elements
TABLE 1 TABLE 2 TABLE 3
1x50PH 1x50PH 1x50PH
1x50PL 1x50PL 1x50PL
1x50N 1x50N 1x50N
1x50G 1x50G 1x50G
1x50SG 1x50SG 1x50SG
1x50IG 1x50IG 1x50IG
1x51PH 1x51PH 1x51PH
1x51PL 1x51PL 1x51PL
1x51N 1x51N 1x51N
1x51G 1x51G 1x51G
1x46P 1x46P 1x46P
1x49P 1x49P 1x49P
1x67P 1x67P 1x67P
1x67N 1x67N 1x67N
1x67G 1x67G 1x67G
1x27P 1x27P 1x27P
1x59P 1x59P 1x59P
1x47P 1x47P 1x47P
1x59NH 1x59NH 1x59NH
1x59NL 1x59NL 1x59NL
1x59X 1x59X 1x59X
1x27X 1x27X 1x27X
1x32FP 1x32FP 1x32FP
1x32 1x32 1x32
1x32N High 1x32N High 1x32N High
1x32N Low 1x32N Low 1x32N Low
1x81U 1x81U 1x81U
1x81O 1x81O 1x81O
1 x Broken conductor 1 x Broken conductor 1 x Broken conductor
1 x Locked Rotor 1 x Locked Rotor 1 x Locked Rotor
1 x Freq. Rate of Change 1 x Fq. Rate of Change 1 x Fq. Rate of Change
1 x Load Encroachment 1 x Load Encroachment 1 x Load Encroachment
The settings used for setting table management are located in Setpoint >Control Elements > Setting Group:
Setpoint > Control Elements > setting Group

Setting Grouping Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Active Group Active Group GROUP 1 N/A [GROUP 1 – GROUP 2 – GROUP 3]

Setting Group settings are as follows:

Function: Possible values are: [DISABLED – ENABLED]
When this setting is disabled, the relay is working in single setting group mode, with all the available protection elements
working at the same time. If this function is enabled, the setting groups are enabled, and only the setting group indicated
by the Active Group setting is active.
Active group: Possible values are 1, 2 or 3.
The setting group selected by default is setting Group 1. This setting indicates which setting group is active (for this
purpose, the previous setting must be set as ENABLED)
The Relay incorporates several signals associated with the Protection elements grouping in tables. First, signals that
indicate the group activation:
GROUP 1 ACT ON This signal produces the activation of setting group 1
These activation signals for the different setting groups are configured using EnerVista 650 Setup at Setpoint >
Relay Configuration > Control Elements as shown in the figure. For firmware prior to 7.00, these signal are located at
Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements
Figure 5-3: Table change signals configuration example
The example above uses three digital inputs to perform the table selection, but it is possible to use any other logic signal in
the relay.
In case of using digital inputs, the user can select the setting table activating these digital inputs (which can come from the
PLC, or from a different relay, or from an auxiliary switch, for adaptive protection). This selection of the active group has
priority over the setting. If several signals are active at the same time, the highest one is taken as valid. For example, if
selection signals for both groups 1 and 2 are active, the active table is number 2.
The time used in the table change is one PLC logic scan cycle (5 ms typical), allowing a fast adaptation to system changes.
Another type of signals are block signals. These are internal relay signals that indicate which groups are active, and which
are blocked. For example, if the setting group function is enabled and setting group 1 has been set as active, block signals
from setting groups 2 and 3 are active, and the block signal that corresponds to group 1 is inactive because that group is
enabled.
Block signals are as follows:
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
All signals corresponding to setting Groups, both the activation and the block signals, are located in the Actual > Status >
Control Elements > setting Groups menu.

5.4.1.2 Firmware 7.50 or above

This section only affects to F650s which work with firmware version 7.5X or above.
All F650 functions that are affected by setting groups are located in Enervista 650 Setup under Protection (Setpoints >
Protection Elements > Setting Group X). All these functions are grouped into every different setting group available (up to
6).
CURRENT ELEMENTS
Instantaneous overcurrent:
3 x PHASE IOC HIGH (50PH)
3 x PHASE IOC LOW (50PL)
3 x NEUTRAL IOC (50N)
3 x GROUND IOC (50G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND IOC (50SG)
3 x ISOLATED GROUND IOC (50IG)
Time delayed overcurrent:
3 x PHASE TOC HIGH (51PH)
3 x PHASE TOC LOW (51PL)
3 x NEUTRAL TOC (51N)
3 x GROUND TOC (51G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND TOC (51SG)
Negative sequence overcurrent:
3 x NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC (46P)
Thermal image:
3 x THERMAL MODEL (49P)
DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS
3 x PHASE DIR (67P)
3 x NEUTRAL DIR (67N)
3 x GROUND DIR (67G)
3 x SENSITIVE GROUND DIR (67SG)
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
Phase under/overvoltage
3 x PHASE UV (27P)
3 x PHASE OV (59P)
Zero sequence overvoltage
3 x NEUTRAL OV HIGH (59NH)
3 x NEUTRAL OV LOW (59NL)
Additional auxiliary under/overvoltage (for VX selection in auxiliary voltage)
3 x AUXILIARY OV (59X)
3 x AUXILIARY UV (27X)
Negative sequence overvoltage:
3 x NEGATIVE SEQUENCE OV (47P)

POWER
3 x FORWARD POWER (32FP)
3 x DIRECTIONAL POWER (32)
3 x WATT GND FLT HIGH (32NH)
3 x WATT GND FLT LOW (32NL)
FREQUENCY ELEMENTS
6 x OVERFREQUENCY (81O)
6 x UNDERFREQUENCY (81U)
3 x FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE (81 df/dt)
MISCELLANEOUS:
3 x BROKEN CONDUCTOR
3 x LOCKED ROTOR
3 x LOAD ENCROACHMENT
The F650 elements incorporate also the following control elements. These control elements are not affected by setting
groups and they are available in Enervista 650 Setup at Setpoints>Control Elements
1 x SETTINGS GROUP
1 x SYNCHROCHECK(25)
1 x AUTORECLOSE (79)
1 x BREAKER FAILURE (50BF)
1 x VT FUSE FAILURE (VTFF)
8 x PULSE COUNTERS
8 x DIGITAL COUNTERS
20 x ANALOG COMPARATORS
1x MAX. NUMBERS OF STARTS
1 x COLD LOAD PICKUP
16 x PLC TIMER MASK
1x 60 CTS FAILURE
1x 2ND HRMC INHIBIT
As in previous firmware versions, F650 elements incorporate a flexible grouping capability for elements grouped in
protection elements section. However, two different working modes have been implemented for firmware version 7.5X
and above
This means that protection elements can be used in either one of the following modes:
5.4.1.2.1 Single setting group

In this operation mode, all protection elements under one particular Setting Group can be activated and operated
simultaneously. When the Setting Group Function is disabled at Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting Group, protection
elements of the group selected as the Active Group become available.

5.4.1.2.2 Multiple setting groups

In this mode, all protection elements are available in each individual setting group (up to maximum of 6). Only one
configured setting groups is active at a given time. A logic signal, e.g. a digital input, selects which table is active at each
time, providing adaptive protection to each network condition.
The distribution of protection elements in groups is described in Table 5–33:

Table 5-19: DISTRIBUTION OF PROTECTION ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1 SETTING GROUP 2 SETTING GROUP 3 SETTING GROUP 4 SETTING GROUP 5 SETTING GROUP 6
3x50PH 3x50PH 3x50PH 3x50PH 3x50PH 3x50PH
3x50PL 3x50PL 3x50PL 3x50PL 3x50PL 3x50PL
3x50N 3x50N 3x50N 3x50N 3x50N 3x50N
3x50G 3x50G 3x50G 3x50G 3x50G 3x50G
3x50SG 3x50SG 3x50SG 3x50SG 3x50SG 3x50SG
3x50IG 3x50IG 3x50IG 3x50IG 3x50IG 3x50IG
3x51PH 3x51PH 3x51PH 3x51PH 3x51PH 3x51PH
3x51PL 3x51PL 3x51PL 3x51PL 3x51PL 3x51PL
3x51N 3x51N 3x51N 3x51N 3x51N 3x51N
3x51G 3x51G 3x51G 3x51G 3x51G 3x51G
3x46P 3x46P 3x46P 3x46P 3x46P 3x46P
3x49P 3x49P 3x49P 3x49P 3x49P 3x49P
3x67P 3x67P 3x67P 3x67P 3x67P 3x67P
3x67N 3x67N 3x67N 3x67N 3x67N 3x67N
3x67G 3x67G 3x67G 3x67G 3x67G 3x67G
3x27P 3x27P 3x27P 3x27P 3x27P 3x27P
3x59P 3x59P 3x59P 3x59P 3x59P 3x59P
3x47P 3x47P 3x47P 3x47P 3x47P 3x47P
3x59NH 3x59NH 3x59NH 3x59NH 3x59NH 3x59NH
3x59NL 3x59NL 3x59NL 3x59NL 3x59NL 3x59NL
3x59X 3x59X 3x59X 3x59X 3x59X 3x59X
3x27X 3x27X 3x27X 3x27X 3x27X 3x27X
3x32FP 3x32FP 3x32FP 3x32FP 3x32FP 3x32FP
3x32 3x32 3x32 3x32 3x32 3x32
3x32N High 3x32N High 3x32N High 3x32N High 3x32N High 3x32N High
3x32N Low 3x32N Low 3x32N Low 3x32N Low 3x32N Low 3x32N Low
6x81U 6x81U 6x81U 6x81U 6x81U 6x81U
6x81O 6x81O 6x81O 6x81O 6x81O 6x81O
3 x Broken conductor 3 x Broken conductor 3 x Broken conductor 3 x Broken conductor 3 x Broken conductor 3 x Broken conductor
3 x Locked Rotor 3 x Locked Rotor 3 x Locked Rotor 3 x Locked Rotor 3 x Locked Rotor 3 x Locked Rotor
3 x Freq. Rate of 3 x Freq. Rate of 3 x Freq. Rate of 3 x Freq. Rate of 3 x Freq. Rate of 3 x Freq. Rate of
Change Change Change Change Change Change
3 x Load 3 x Load 3 x Load 3 x Load 3 x Load 3 x Load
Encroachment Encroachment Encroachment Encroachment Encroachment Encroachment
The settings used for setting group management are located in Setpoint >Control Elements > Setting Group

Table 5-20: Setting group settings

Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting Group
Active Group Active Group GROUP 1 N/A [GROUP 1 – GROUP 2 – GROUP 3- GROUP 4-
GROUP 5-GROUP 6]
Setting Group settings are as follows:

Function: Possible values are: [DISABLED – ENABLED]
When this setting is DISABLED, the relay is working in single setting group mode. All protection elements that belong to the
group selected in the active groups setting are available and working at the same time if required.
If this setting is ENABLED, the relay is working in multiple setting groups mode. In this mode, all protection elements of
different setting groups are available to be activated. However, only protection elements of the Active Group selected are
real active ones. In this case, selection of active setting group can be modified through logic signals.
IActive group: Possible values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6.
This setting indicates which setting group is active by default. Default configuration value is 1.
• When this function is disabled, the Active Group value indicates which setting group of protection elements is
available, e.g if Active Group is GROUP 1, all protection elements under setting group 1 in SetPoint > Protection
Elements are available.
• When this function is enabled, the Active Group value indicates the active setting group when no group is selected as
the active one.
Snapshot events: Possible values are: [DISABLED – ENABLED]
If this setting is ENABLED, Snapshot events related to change of setting groups are reported.
Regarding changing between setting groups when working in multiple setting groups mode, the Relay incorporates
several signals associated with the Protection elements grouping in tables.
First, signals that indicate the group activation:
GROUP 1 ACT ON: This signal produces the activation of setting group 1
Priority of activation signals is indicated as follow:

GROUP 6 > GROUP 5 > GROUP 4 > GROUP 3 > GROUP 2 > GROUP 1
E.g: If group 4 and group 1 are selected at the same time, setting group 4 is the active one due to the higher priority level.
As previously mentioned, when no activation signal is selected, the default group set in Enervista 650 Setup under
Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting Group > Active group is the active group.
These activation signals for the different setting groups can be configured using EnerVista 650 Setup at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Control Elements as shown. Different inputs can be linked to different activation signals.

Figure 5-4: Table change signals configuration example

The example above uses six digital inputs to perform the table selection, but it is possible to use any other logic signal in
the relay.
In case of using digital inputs, the user can select the setting table activating these digital inputs (which can come from the
PLC, or from a different relay, or from an auxiliary switch, for adaptive protection). This selection of the active group has
priority over default setting.
The time used in the table change is one PLC logic scan cycle (5 ms typical), allowing a fast adaptation to system changes.
Another type of signal is PROT ACTIVE GROUP, which indicates the active setting group. Protection element settings in the
active group are the values being used by different protection functions.
All actual values signals corresponding to setting groups are located in the Actual > Status > Control Elements > Setting
Groups menu.
5.4.2 Inverse time curve characteristics

Inverse time curves available in time overcurrent elements are as follows:
IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC Curve A/B/C/Long-Time Inverse/ Short-Time Inverse
IAC extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time curves
Rectifier time curves
User Curve - FlexCurve A/B/C/D
Recloser Curves
The saturation level for the user curve is 20 times the pickup value, for the rest of time overcurrent elements the
saturation level is 48 times the pickup.
All these curves follow the standards defined for each of them, allowing an efficient coordination with other devices
located downstream. A dial or curve setting allows selection of a tripping time X times the set time in the selected curve.
Fixing this value to 0 would produce an instantaneous response for any selected curve.
Tripping time calculations are performed on the base of an internal variable called “energy”. This energy represents the
system dissipation capability, that is, when 100% of energy is reached, this means that the tripping time associated with
the curve for a certain current value has expired.
Therefore, once the current value has exceeded the pickup value, the relay starts increasing the energy variable value. If it
reaches 100%, a trip is produced. When the current value falls below 97% of the pickup value, the element is reset. There
are two reset types: Instantaneous and Timed (IEEE) or Linear.

The instantaneous mode provides that, when the current value falls below the reset level, energy is immediately reset to 0.
This mode is used for coordinating with static devices, which behave in a similar way. In the Linear mode, energy is
reduced at a speed associated with the reset times curve (showed in the curve tables), trying to simulate the behavior of
electromechanical relays.
5.4.2.1 IEEE curves

This family of curves follows the standard IEEE C37.112-1996 for extremely inverse, very inverse, and inverse curves. The
following formulas define this type of curve:
Where:
t = Operation time in seconds
Dial = multiplier setting
I = Input current
Itap = Current pickup value
A, B, p = constants defined by the standard
TRESET = reset time in seconds
tr = characteristic constant.
Table 5-21: Constants for IEEE curves
IEEE Curve Shape Name A B p tr
IEEE Extremely Inverse IEEE Ext Inv 28.2 0.1217 2.0000 29.1
IEEE Very Inverse IEEE Very Inv 19.61 0.491 2.0000 21.6
IEEE Inverse IEEE Mod Inv 0.0515 0.1140 0.0200 4.85
Table 5-22: Tripping time in seconds for IEEE curves

Dial Current (I/Itap)
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEEE Extremely Inverse
0.5 11.341 4.761 1.823 1.001 0.648 0.464 0.355 0.285 0.237 0.203
1.0 22.682 9.522 3.647 2.002 1.297 0.927 0.709 0.569 0.474 0.407
2.0 45.363 19.043 7.293 4.003 2.593 1.855 1.418 1.139 0.948 0.813
4.0 90.727 38.087 14.587 8.007 5.187 3.710 2.837 2.277 1.897 1.626
6.0 136.090 57.130 21.880 12.010 7.780 5.564 4.255 3.416 2.845 2.439
8.0 181.454 76.174 29.174 16.014 10.374 7.419 5.674 4.555 3.794 3.252
10.0 226.817 95.217 36.467 20.017 12.967 9.274 7.092 5.693 4.742 4.065
IEEE Very Inverse
0.5 8.090 3.514 1.471 0.899 0.654 0.526 0.450 0.401 0.368 0.345
1.0 16.179 7.028 2.942 1.798 1.308 1.051 0.900 0.802 0.736 0.689
2.0 32.358 14.055 5.885 3.597 2.616 2.103 1.799 1.605 1.472 1.378
4.0 64.716 28.111 11.769 7.193 5.232 4.205 3.598 3.209 2.945 2.756
6.0 97.074 42.166 17.654 10.790 7.849 6.308 5.397 4.814 4.417 4.134

8.0 129.432 56.221 23.538 14.387 10.465 8.410 7.196 6.418 5.889 5.513
10.0 161.790 70.277 29.423 17.983 13.081 10.513 8.995 8.023 7.361 6.891
IEEE Inverse
0.5 3.220 1.902 1.216 0.973 0.844 0.763 0.706 0.663 0.630 0.603
1.0 6.439 3.803 2.432 1.946 1.688 1.526 1.412 1.327 1.260 1.207
2.0 12.878 7.606 4.864 3.892 3.377 3.051 2.823 2.653 2.521 2.414
4.0 25.756 15.213 9.729 7.783 6.753 6.102 5.647 5.307 5.041 4.827
6.0 38.634 22.819 14.593 11.675 10.130 9.153 8.470 7.960 7.562 7.241
8.0 51.512 30.426 19.458 15.567 13.507 12.204 11.294 10.614 10.083 9.654
10.0 64.390 38.032 24.322 19.458 16.883 15.255 14.117 13.267 12.604 12.068
5.4.2.2 IEC curves

This family of curves follows the European standard IEC 255-4, and the British standard BF142 for IEC Curves A, B and C,
IEC Long-Time Inverse and IEC Short-Time Inverse. The formulas that define these curves are as follows:
Where:
Dial = multiplying factor
I = Input current
K, E = constants defined by the standard
TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated)
Table 5-23: Constants for IEC curves

IEC Curve Shape Name K E tr
IEC Curve A IEC Curve A 0.140 0.020 9.7
IEC Curve B IEC Curve B 13.500 1.000 43.2
IEC Curve C IEC Curve C 80.000 2.000 58.2
IEC Long-Time Inverse IEC Long-Time Inv 120.000 1.000 120.0
IEC Short-Time Inverse IEC Short-Time Inv 0.050 0.040 0.5

Table 5-24: Tripping time in seconds for IEC curves

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IEC Curve A
0.05 0.860 0.501 0.315 0.249 0.214 0.192 0.176 0.165 0.156 0.149
0.10 1.719 1.003 0.630 0.498 0.428 0.384 0.353 0.330 0.312 0.297
0.20 3.439 2.006 1.260 0.996 0.856 0.767 0.706 0.659 0.623 0.594
0.40 6.878 4.012 2.521 1.992 1.712 1.535 1.411 1.319 1.247 1.188
0.60 10.317 6.017 3.781 2.988 2.568 2.302 2.117 1.978 1.870 1.782
0.80 13.755 8.023 5.042 3.984 3.424 3.070 2.822 2.637 2.493 2.376
1.00 17.194 10.029 6.302 4.980 4.280 3.837 3.528 3.297 3.116 2.971
IEC Curve B
0.05 1.350 0.675 0.338 0.225 0.169 0.135 0.113 0.096 0.084 0.075
0.10 2.700 1.350 0.675 0.450 0.338 0.270 0.225 0.193 0.169 0.150
0.20 5.400 2.700 1.350 0.900 0.675 0.540 0.450 0.386 0.338 0.300
0.40 10.800 5.400 2.700 1.800 1.350 1.080 0.900 0.771 0.675 0.600
0.60 16.200 8.100 4.050 2.700 2.025 1.620 1.350 1.157 1.013 0.900
0.80 21.600 10.800 5.400 3.600 2.700 2.160 1.800 1.543 1.350 1.200
1.00 27.000 13.500 6.750 4.500 3.375 2.700 2.250 1.929 1.688 1.500
IEC Curve C
0.05 3.200 1.333 0.500 0.267 0.167 0.114 0.083 0.063 0.050 0.040
0.10 6.400 2.667 1.000 0.533 0.333 0.229 0.167 0.127 0.100 0.081
0.20 12.800 5.333 2.000 1.067 0.667 0.457 0.333 0.254 0.200 0.162
0.40 25.600 10.667 4.000 2.133 1.333 0.914 0.667 0.508 0.400 0.323
0.60 38.400 16.000 6.000 3.200 2.000 1.371 1.000 0.762 0.600 0.485
0.80 51.200 21.333 8.000 4.267 2.667 1.829 1.333 1.016 0.800 0.646
1.00 64.000 26.667 10.000 5.333 3.333 2.286 1.667 1.270 1.000 0.808
IEC Long-Time Inverse
0.05 12.000 6.000 3.000 2.000 1.500 1.200 1.000 0.857 0.750 0.667
0.10 24.000 12.000 6.000 4.000 3.000 2.400 2.000 1.714 1.500 1.333
0.20 48.000 24.000 12.000 8.000 6.000 4.800 4.000 3.429 3.000 2.667
0.40 96.000 48.000 24.000 16.000 12.000 9.600 8.000 6.857 6.000 5.333
0.60 144.000 72.000 36.000 24.000 18.000 14.400 12.000 10.286 9.000 8.000
0.80 192.000 96.000 48.000 32.000 24.000 19.200 16.000 13.714 12.000 10.667
1.00 240.000 120.000 60.000 40.000 30.000 24.000 20.000 17.143 15.000 13.333
IEC Short-Time Inverse
0.05 0.153 0.089 0.056 0.044 0.038 0.034 0.031 0.029 0.027 0.026
0.10 0.306 0.178 0.111 0.088 0.075 0.067 0.062 0.058 0.054 0.052
0.20 0.612 0.356 0.223 0.175 0.150 0.135 0.124 0.115 0.109 0.104
0.40 1.223 0.711 0.445 0.351 0.301 0.269 0.247 0.231 0.218 0.207
0.60 1.835 1.067 0.668 0.526 0.451 0.404 0.371 0.346 0.327 0.311
0.80 2.446 1.423 0.890 0.702 0.602 0.538 0.494 0.461 0.435 0.415
1.00 3.058 1.778 1.113 0.877 0.752 0.673 0.618 0.576 0.544 0.518

5.4.2.3 IAC curves

This family of curves follows the time response of the General Electric IAC electromechanical relays. The following formulas
define these curves:
Where:
I = Input current
A, B, C, D, E = predefined constants
Table 5-25: Constants for IAC curves

IAC Curve Shape Name A B C D E tr
IAC Extremely Inverse IAC Ext Inv 0.0040 0.6379 0.6200 1.7872 0.2461 6.008
IAC Very Inverse IAC Very Inv 0.0900 0.7955 0.1000 -1.2885 7.9586 4.678
IAC Inverse IAC Mod Inv 0.2078 0.8630 0.8000 -0.4180 0.1947 0.990
Table 5-26: Tripping time in seconds for IAC curves

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
IAC Extremely Inverse
0.5 1.699 0.749 0.303 0.178 0.123 0.093 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.046
1.0 3.398 1.498 0.606 0.356 0.246 0.186 0.149 0.124 0.106 0.093
2.0 6.796 2.997 1.212 0.711 0.491 0.372 0.298 0.248 0.212 0.185
4.0 13.591 5.993 2.423 1.422 0.983 0.744 0.595 0.495 0.424 0.370
6.0 20.387 8.990 3.635 2.133 1.474 1.115 0.893 0.743 0.636 0.556
8.0 27.183 11.987 4.846 2.844 1.966 1.487 1.191 0.991 0.848 0.741
10.0 33.979 14.983 6.058 3.555 2.457 1.859 1.488 1.239 1.060 0.926
IAC Very Inverse
0.5 1.451 0.656 0.269 0.172 0.133 0.113 0.101 0.093 0.087 0.083
1.0 2.901 1.312 0.537 0.343 0.266 0.227 0.202 0.186 0.174 0.165
2.0 5.802 2.624 1.075 0.687 0.533 0.453 0.405 0.372 0.349 0.331
4.0 11.605 5.248 2.150 1.374 1.065 0.906 0.810 0.745 0.698 0.662
6.0 17.407 7.872 3.225 2.061 1.598 1.359 1.215 1.117 1.046 0.992
8.0 23.209 10.497 4.299 2.747 2.131 1.813 1.620 1.490 1.395 1.323
10.0 29.012 13.121 5.374 3.434 2.663 2.266 2.025 1.862 1.744 1.654
IAC Inverse

0.5 0.578 0.375 0.266 0.221 0.196 0.180 0.168 0.160 0.154 0.148
1.0 1.155 0.749 0.532 0.443 0.392 0.360 0.337 0.320 0.307 0.297
2.0 2.310 1.499 1.064 0.885 0.784 0.719 0.674 0.640 0.614 0.594
4.0 4.621 2.997 2.128 1.770 1.569 1.439 1.348 1.280 1.229 1.188
6.0 6.931 4.496 3.192 2.656 2.353 2.158 2.022 1.921 1.843 1.781
8.0 9.242 5.995 4.256 3.541 3.138 2.878 2.695 2.561 2.457 2.375
10.0 11.552 7.494 5.320 4.426 3.922 3.597 3.369 3.201 3.072 2.969
5.4.2.4 ANSI curves

This family of curves complies with the American Standard ANSI C37.90 for Extremely inverse, Very inverse, Normally
inverse and Moderately inverse curves. The formulas that define these curves are as follows:
where:
T = Operation time (in seconds).
Dial = Multiplying factor
I = Input current
Ipickup = Current pickup setting
A, B, C, D, E = Constants
Treset = Reset time (in seconds) assuming a 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated
Tr = Characteristic constant
The different constants that define the above-mentioned curves are:
Table 5-27: Constants for ANSI curves

ANSI Curve Shape A B C D E Tr
ANSI Extremely Inverse 0.0399 0.2294 0.5 3.0094 0.7222 5.67
ANSI Very Inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.34 -0.284 4.0505 3.88
ANSI Normally Inverse 0.0274 2.2614 0.3 -4.1899 9.1272 5.95
ANSI Moderately Inverse 0.1735 0.6791 0.8 -0.08 0.1271 1.08

Table 5-28: Tripping time in seconds for ANSI curves

1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
ANSI Extremely inverse
0.50 2.000 0.872 0.330 0.184 0.124 0.093 0.075 0.063 0.055 0.049
1.00 4.001 1.744 0.659 0.368 0.247 0.185 0.149 0.126 0.110 0.098
2.00 8.002 3.489 1.319 0.736 0.495 0.371 0.298 0.251 0.219 0.196
4.00 16.004 6.977 2.638 1.472 0.990 0.742 0.596 0.503 0.439 0.393
6.00 24.005 10.466 3.956 2.208 1.484 1.113 0.894 0.754 0.658 0.589
8.00 32.007 13.955 5.275 2.944 1.979 1.483 1.192 1.006 0.878 0.786
10.00 40.009 17.443 6.594 3.680 2.474 1.854 1.491 1.257 1.097 0.982
ANSI Very Inverse
0.50 1.567 0.663 0.268 0.171 0.130 0.108 0.094 0.085 0.078 0.073
1.00 3.134 1.325 0.537 0.341 0.260 0.216 0.189 0.170 0.156 0.146
2.00 6.268 2.650 1.074 0.682 0.520 0.432 0.378 0.340 0.312 0.291
4.00 12.537 5.301 2.148 1.365 1.040 0.864 0.755 0.680 0.625 0.583
6.00 18.805 7.951 3.221 2.047 1.559 1.297 1.133 1.020 0.937 0.874
8.00 25.073 10.602 4.295 2.730 2.079 1.729 1.510 1.360 1.250 1.165
10.00 31.341 13.252 5.369 3.412 2.599 2.161 1.888 1.700 1.562 1.457
ANSI Normally inverse
0.50 2.142 0.883 0.377 0.256 0.203 0.172 0.151 0.135 0.123 0.113
1.00 4.284 1.766 0.754 0.513 0.407 0.344 0.302 0.270 0.246 0.226
2.00 8.568 3.531 1.508 1.025 0.814 0.689 0.604 0.541 0.492 0.452
4.00 17.137 7.062 3.016 2.051 1.627 1.378 1.208 1.082 0.983 0.904
6.00 25.705 10.594 4.524 3.076 2.441 2.067 1.812 1.622 1.475 1.356
8.00 34.274 14.125 6.031 4.102 3.254 2.756 2.415 2.163 1.967 1.808
10.00 42.842 17.656 7.539 5.127 4.068 3.445 3.019 2.704 2.458 2.260
ANSI Moderately inverse
0.50 0.675 0.379 0.239 0.191 0.166 0.151 0.141 0.133 0.128 0.123
1.00 1.351 0.757 0.478 0.382 0.332 0.302 0.281 0.267 0.255 0.247
2.00 2.702 1.515 0.955 0.764 0.665 0.604 0.563 0.533 0.511 0.493
4.00 5.404 3.030 1.910 1.527 1.329 1.208 1.126 1.066 1.021 0.986
6.00 8.106 4.544 2.866 2.291 1.994 1.812 1.689 1.600 1.532 1.479
8.00 10.807 6.059 3.821 3.054 2.659 2.416 2.252 2.133 2.043 1.972
10.00 13.509 7.574 4.776 3.818 3.324 3.020 2.815 2.666 2.554 2.465

5.4.2.5 I2t curves

The following formulas define this type of curves:
where:
I = Input current
Table 5-29: Tripping time in seconds for I2t curves
1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
0.01 0.444 0.250 0.111 0.063 0.040 0.028 0.020 0.016 0.012 0.010
0.10 4.444 2.500 1.111 0.625 0.400 0.278 0.204 0.156 0.123 0.100
1.00 44.444 25.000 11.111 6.250 4.000 2.778 2.041 1.563 1.235 1.000
10.00 444.444 250.000 111.111 62.500 40.000 27.778 20.408 15.625 12.346 10.000
100.00 4444.444 2500.000 1111.111 625.000 400.000 277.778 204.082 156.250 123.457 100.000
600.00 26666.667 15000.000 6666.667 3750.000 2400.000 1666.667 1224.490 937.500 740.741 600.000
5.4.2.6 Definite time curves

The definite time makes the element trip when the current value is maintained beyond the pickup value during a longer
time period than the set value. The Dial setting allows modifying this time frame from instantaneous to 900 seconds in
steps of 10 ms.
5.4.2.7 Rectifier time curves

Rectifier curves are generated from the following formulas:
where:
T = Operation time (in seconds).
TDM = Multiplying factor
I = Input current
Ipickup = Pickup current
Treset = Reset time (in seconds) assuming a 100% of power capacity and that the reset is activated

5.4.2.8 User curves - FlexCurves A/B/C/D

The relay incorporates 4 user curves called User Curve A, B, C and D. The points for these curves are defined by the user.
Each of the four curves has an operation characteristic (operate), defined by 80 points, and a reset characteristic, defined
by 40 points. Each point is defined as a time value for each I/Ipickup value (number of times the pickup current) given on the
table. The user can assign values between 0 and 65.535 seconds in steps of 1 ms.
The following table details the 120 points as well as the characteristic for each of them, and a blank cell where the user can
write the time value when the operation (for I > Ipickup) or the reset (for I < Ipickup) is required,
Table 5-30: User curve characteristics

RESET Time RESET Time OPERATE Time OPERATE Time OPERATE Time OPERATE Time
(xPKP) (s) (xPKP) (s) (xPKP) (s) (xPKP) (s) (xPKP) (s) (xPKP) (s)
0.00 0.68 1.03 2.9 4.9 10.5
0.05 0.70 1.05 3.0 5.0 11.0
0.10 0.72 1.1 3.1 5.1 11.5
0.15 0.74 1.2 3.2 5.2 12.0
0.20 0.76 1.3 3.3 5.3 12.5
0.25 0.78 1.4 3.4 5.4 13.0
0.30 0.80 1.5 3.5 5.5 13.5
0.35 0.82 1.6 3.6 5.6 14.0
0.40 0.84 1.7 3.7 5.7 14.5
0.45 0.86 1.8 3.8 5.8 15.0
0.48 0.88 1.9 3.9 5.9 15.5
0.50 0.90 2.0 4.0 6.0 16.0
0.52 0.91 2.1 4.1 6.5 16.5
0.54 0.92 2.2 4.2 7.0 17.0
0.56 0.93 2.3 4.3 7.5 17.5
0.58 0.94 2.4 4.4 8.0 18.0
0.60 0.95 2.5 4.5 8.5 18.5
0.62 0.96 2.6 4.6 9.0 19.0
0.64 0.97 2.7 4.7 9.5 19.5
0.66 0.98 2.8 4.8 10.0 20.0
The two first columns (40 points) correspond to the RESET curve. The other 4 columns, with 80 points in total, correspond to
the OPERATE curve. The reset characteristic values are between 0 and 0.98, and the operation values are between 1.03
and 20.
The final curve is created by means of a linear interpolation from the points defined by the user. This is a separate process
for the RESET and the OPERATE curve.
The definition of these points is performed in a separate module from the relay, using a configuration program included in
the EnerVista 650 Setup, which incorporates a graphical environment for viewing the curve, thus making it easy for the
user to create it. This module can be accessed from the “Edit Curve” option in the FlexCurve menu, at Setpoint > System
Setup > Flex Curves.

5.4.3 Phase current

The F650 Phase current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
Phase time overcurrent (51PH/51PL)
Phase instantaneous overcurrent (50PH/50PL)
Phase directional overcurrent (67P)
Thermal Model (49)
5.4.3.1 Phase time delayed overcurrent elements – phase high/low (51Ph/51pl)

The phase overcurrent element (51P) can be configured in Enervista 650 Setup at Setppoint> Protection Element>Setting
Group X>Phase Current.
Table 5-31: Phase time overcurrent settings

SETPOINT> PROTECTION ELEMENT> SETTING GROUP X > Phase Current >
> Phase TOC High > Phase TOC High 1> Phase TOC High 2 > Phase TOC High 3
> Phase TOC Low > Phase TOC Low 1 > Phase TOC Low 2 > Phase TOC Low 3
Input type Input PHASOR(DFT) N/A [PHASOR – RMS]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Curve shape Curve IEEE Ext Inv N/A [See list of curves]
Time Dial TD Multiplier 1.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset type Reset INSTANTANEOUS N/A [INSTANTANEOUS – LINEAR]
Voltage Restraint Voltage Restraint DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
The phase overcurrent element (51P) operates in a time period that depends on the applied current and on the set curve.
Possible outputs for the protection element logic are the pickup and tripping signals independent for each phase, and the
general element pickup and tripping signals.
Function: This setting allows enabling or disabling the corresponding directional element.
Input: The phase current input may be selected as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform
RMS magnitude as required by the application.
Pickup Level: This setting allows selecting the current level for the Phase Time Overcurrent element to
operate. The PICKUP setting of the element can be dynamically reduced by a VOLTAGE
RESTRAINT feature
Curve: This setting allows to select the curve that want to be use to operate this element. If the element
Curve is set as Definite Time, then the TD Multiplier setting is used to define both the Operation
time and, in case of selecting Linear reset, the Reset time of the element.
TD Multiplier: This setting allows the curve to be shifted up or down on the time-current characteristic curve.
This allows configuration of the relay depending on network selectivity
Reset: The element reset can be selected between Instantaneous and Linear (timed according to the
corresponding equation).
Voltage Restraint: As mention above, the pickup current magnitude can be dynamically reduced depending on
the existing voltage value. This is done using the Voltage Restraint setting. The pickup current
level is proportional to the phase-to-phase voltage measured according to a coefficient shown
on Figure 5–5:.This is accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase
voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve; the pickup level is calculated as ‘Mvr’
times the ‘Pickup’ setting. In the figure, Vpp is the phase-to-phase voltage, and VT Nominal is the
rated voltage set under General settings (refer to section 5.3.1)

Figure 5-5: Voltage restraint characteristics

If the voltage restraint feature is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the value set in
the Pickup Level setting.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the phase
directional elements.
Phase time delayed overcurrent element is an independent Protection element that provides block and Operation signals
for each phase. Block signal status can be monitored through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at Actual >
Status > Protection > Protection Block and Operation Signal status at Actual > Status > Protection > Phase Current
The element incorporates independent block inputs for each phase. Block signals indicate blocked elements by an external
block input. When a particular signal is activated, the element is blocked. These inputs can be configured using Enervista
650 setup at Setpoint>Relay Configuration>Protection elements
Table 5-32: Block signal for the phase time delayed overcurrent element
BLOCK SIGNALS FOR 51P

PH TOC1 HIGH A BLK
PH TOC1 HIGH B BLK
PH TOC1 HIGH C BLK
PH TOC2 HIGH A BLK
PH TOC2 HIGH B BLK
PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK
PH TOC3 HIGH A BLK
PH TOC3 HIGH B BLK
PH TOC3 HIGH C BLK
When the element is blocked, the tripping time counter is reset to 0. This feature allows the use of this input to
instantaneously reset the protection element timing

The following diagram shows the logic scheme followed by high range and low range time overcurrent elements (51PH and 51PL)
in the following figure.
Figure 5-6: TOC element logic scheme (A6632F2)

5.4.3.2 Phase instantaneous overcurrent element- phase high/low (50PH/ 50PL)

The Phase instantaneous overcurrent element has a setting range from 0.05 A to 160 A. It can be set as instantaneous or
timed, with the timer selectable between 0.00 and 900 seconds. The input quantities may be chosen as Fundamental
phasor magnitude or RMS magnitude as required by the application. The element incorporates a reset time selectable
between 0 and 900 seconds.
This element also incorporates a block input for disabling the pickup and trip signals. The logic outputs for the element are
the pickup and trip flags, independent for each phase, and general pickup and trip flags.
SETPOINT> PROTECTION ELEMENTS> SETPOINT GROUP X> Phase Current >

> Phase IOC High > Phase IOC High 1> Phase IOC High 2 > Phase IOC High 3
> Phase IOC Low > Phase IOC Low 1 > Phase IOC Low 2 > Phase IOC Low 3
Trip time Trip Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for these elements.

The following figure shows the logic scheme diagram for high range and low range Instantaneous overcurrent elements
(50PH, 50PL).
Figure 5-7: Phase IOC elements logic scheme (A6632F1)

5.4.3.3 Phase directional element (67P)

The Phase directional element (67P) provides independent elements for each phase, and determines the direction of the
current both in permanence and in fault condition.
Its main function is to apply a blocking signal to the overcurrent elements to prevent their operation when the current is
flowing in a certain direction. In order to determine the direction of the current, the element uses phase current values as
operation magnitude, and phase-to-phase voltage values as polarization magnitude. This means that in order to polarize a
phase, we use the phase-to-phase voltage of the other two phases, known as crossed polarization. To increase security for
three phase faults very close to the VTs used to measure the polarizing voltage, a voltage memory feature is incorporated.
This feature remembers the measurement of the polarizing voltage 3 cycles back from the moment when the voltage has
collapsed below the “polarizing voltage threshold”, and uses it to determine direction. The voltage memory remains valid
for a maximum of 3 seconds after the voltage has collapsed. This time is configurable.
The following table describes the phase directional element settings.
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > SETPOINT GROUP X > Phase Current > Phase Directional >
Phase Directional 1> Phase Directional 2 > Phase Directional 3
Maximum Torque Angle MTA 45º 1 Deg [-90 : +90]
Operation Direction Direction FORWARD N/A [FORWARD – REVERSE]
Block logic Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
Polarization voltage threshold Pol V Threshold 40 1V [0 : 300]
Voltage Memory Time Voltage Memory time 0,00 s [0,00: 3,00]
Function: This setting allows enabling or disabling the corresponding directional element.
MTA: The MTA setting corresponds to the Torque angle, which is the rotation applied to
phase-to-phase crossed voltage.
Direction: This setting allows selecting the area for the directional element to operate, either
forward or reverse.
Block Logic: This setting allows selecting either permission or block, depending on the logic to be
applied upon expiration of voltage memory.
Polarization Voltage Threshold: This is the minimum voltage considered for the direction calculation. Under this setting,
memory voltage is used.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the
phase directional elements.
Voltage Memory Time: This is the time voltage memory is considered as valid and used for direction
calculation when polarization voltage collapses.
Phase directional element is an independent Protection element that provides block and Operation signals for each phase.
These signals can be monitored both through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at “Actual > Status > Protection
> Phase Current”

Table 5-33: Block and operation signals for the phase directional element
BLOCK AND OPERATION FOR 67P
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR1 A OP
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR1 B OP
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR1 C OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR2 A OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR2 B OP
PHASE DIR2 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR2 C OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK A
PHASE DIR3 A OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK B
PHASE DIR3 B OP
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK C
PHASE DIR3 C OP
Signals provided by the directional element are, block and operation signals. Signals used to block overcurrent elements
are configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements.
Operation signals are active when operation and polarization magnitudes meet conditions given by the settings.
Block signals indicate blocked elements by an external block input or by polarization voltage loss after voltage
memorize time elapses. Using the “Block logic” setting, the user can select how the directional element responds in case
of a block. When the “Block” option is selected, the operational signal is not activated in a block condition. When the
“Permission” option is selected, the operation signal is activated in a block condition.
Figure 5-8: Overcurrent elements block configuration by the directional element shows the default configuration for the
phase overcurrent block input. When the “Block logic” setting is set as “Block”, this input is active in case of a block in the
directional element, avoiding any phase overcurrent trip.
When the “Block logic” setting is set as “Permission”, the phase overcurrent element is enabled to trip as the block input is
not active in case of polarization voltage memory expiration.

Figure 5-8: Overcurrent elements block configuration by the directional element
Directional elements can also be blocked with signals coming from other relays, PLCs, or through signals configured in the
relay PLC Editor (Logic configuration tool). The signal used in that case is PHASE DIR BLK INP. Figure 5-9: Directional
element blosk configuration by input shows an example of the default block configuration of directional elements by
digital input. There is one block signal per input for each setting group.
Figure 5-9: Directional element blosk configuration by input

The main component of the phase directional element is the angle comparator with two inputs: the operation magnitude
(phase current) and the polarization magnitude (phase-to-phase voltage rotated the angle set in MTA setting), which is the
torque angle.
The Polarization type used in the directional element is crossed, this means that in case of a fault in phase A, the Operation
magnitude is Ia, and the polarization magnitude is Vbc, rotated by the torque angle. In case of a fault in phase B, the
operation magnitude is Ib, and the polarization magnitude is Vca rotated by the torque angle. Finally, in case of a fault in
phase C, the operation magnitudes is Ic, and Vab.
Table 5-34: Operation and polarization magnitudes for directional units

POLARIZING SIGNAL VPOL
PHASE OPERATING SIGNAL ABC PHASE SEQUENCE ACB PHASE SEQUENCE
A IA angle VBC angle x 1 MTA VCB angle x 1 MTA
B IB angle VCA angle x 1 MTA VAC angle x 1 MTA
C IC angle VAB angle x 1 MTA VBA angle x 1 MTA

The polarization diagram is as follows:
Figure 5-10: Polarization diagram

The diagram shows a fault in phase A, therefore the Operation magnitude is IA, the polarization magnitude is VBC, which
has been rotated the torque angle set as MTA. Positive angles are considered as counter clockwise rotations, and negative
angles clockwise rotations. Direction is considered to be forward when the fault current is inside an arc of ±90º to both
sides of the polarization voltage. In the directional element settings there is a Direction setting that allows to select in
which area the element operation is allowed, either forward or reverse. Operation areas include a safety zone of 5º to each
side of the cone. This safety cone is applied when the operation direction calculation is performed from initial block
conditions. When we go from a non-trip area to a trip area, the safety cone is considered.When going from a trip area to a
non-trip area, this cone is not considered, and the whole area is operative. This safety cone is always located in the
operation area, both in forward and reverse cases.
NOTE: In situations where a current inversion is produced during a fault, the phase directional element requires a period of
time to establish the blocking signal. This time is approximately 20 ms. Certain instantaneous overcurrent elements can be
activated before receiving the blocking signal from the directional element. In cases where these situations can be
expected, we recommend to add a 50ms delay to IOC elements.

The following figure shows the logic scheme for the phase directional element.
Figure 5-11: Directional element logic scheme (A6632F3)

5.4.3.4 Thermal model element (49)

Thermal model is a protection element that calculates the thermal heating generated as a result of the flowing current,
and prevents this heating from causing damage to the protected equipment. In order to calculate the tripping time, the
following equation is used:
Where,
t is the heating/cooling time constant.
I’ is the ratio current/pickup
Table 5-35: Thermal model element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X Phase Current > Thermal Model >
Thermal Model 1> Thermal Model 2 > Thermal Model 3
setting Description Name Default Step Range
Value
Heating time constant Heat Time Constant 6.0 0.1 min [3.0 : 600.0]
Cooling time constant Cool Time Constant 2.00 0.01 times Heat Time [1.00 : 6.00]
Alarm level Alarm Level 80.0 0.1 % [1.0 : 110.0]
The cooling constant is given in times the heating constant.

The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the thermal model elements.

5.4.4 Neutral current

The Neutral Current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
• Neutral time overcurrent (51N)
• Neutral instantaneous overcurrent (50N)
• Neutral directional element (67N)
5.4.4.1 Neutral time-delayed overcurrent element (51N)

Neutral TOC is a neutral time delayed overcurrent protection element. This element uses as the input quantity the neutral
current, calculated from the phase currents. The trip can be timed by a curve selectable by setting. The reset can be
instantaneous or linear.
Table 5-36: Neutral toc element settings
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Neutral Current > Neutral TOC
Neutral TOC 1> Neutral TOC 2 > Neutral TOC 3
The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element.
5.4.4.2 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element (50N)

This function can be used as an instantaneous element or as a definite time element. The element responds to the neutral
current, calculated from phase currents.
Table 5-37: Neutral IOC element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Neutral Current > Neutral IOC
Neutral IOC 1> Neutral IOC 2 > Neutral IOC 3

The following figure shows the logic scheme for the neutral Instantaneous overcurrent element.
Figure 5-12: LOGIC SCHEME FOR NEUTRAL IOC element

5.4.4.3 Neutral directional element (67N)

The Neutral directional element is used for supervising the neutral (3I0) overcurrent elements. This element can be set to
use either the neutral voltage, or the polarization current measured by the 5th current input (Ip), or both as polarization
magnitude.
Table 5-38: 67N element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Neutral Current > Neutral Directional >
Neutral Directional 1> Neutral Directional 2 > Neutral Directional 3
Maximum Torque Angle MTA -45 1 Deg [-90 : +90]
Polarization type Polarization VO N/A [V0 – IP – V0+IP – V0*IP ]
Block logic type Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
Settings for this element are:

Maximum Torque Angle (MTA): Angle used to rotate the polarization voltage. Positive angles are counter clockwise
rotations, and negative angles are clockwise rotations. The polarization magnitude,
once rotated, defines the MTA line. Vn rotated by this angle points to the semi plane
that corresponds to a Reverse fault. -Vn rotated this angle points to the semi plane
that corresponds to a Forward fault. A typical setting can be –45º.
Directional element direction (Direction): This setting indicates the Direction for which the element allows a trip.
Depending on this setting, the element is activated for faults in the forward
direction, or ion the reverse direction, allowing its use in tripping or blocking
schemes. Possible options for this setting are FORWARD and REVERSE.
Polarization type (Polarization): This setting indicates the type of Polarization to be used. The relay can use voltage
polarization (V0), and/or current polarization (Ip). Possible setting values are:
V0 Voltage polarization
Ip Current polarization
V0 + Ip Voltage or current polarization. This allows the element to
operate when any of the polarization magnitudes allow
operation.
V0 * Ip Voltage and current polarization. This allows the element to
operate when both polarization magnitudes allow operation.
If the selected polarization type is V0+Ip, then the relay operates when any of the
polarization magnitudes indicate the selected direction in the Direction setting.
If the selected polarization type is V0*Ip, then the relay only operates when both
polarization magnitudes indicate the selected direction in the Direction setting.
Polarization Voltage Threshold This is the minimum voltage considered for the direction calculation. Under this
setting, the element is blocked.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for
this elements.

The Neutral directional element is an independent Protection element that provides Block and Operation signals. These
signals can be monitored both through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at “Actual > Status > Protection >
Neutral Current”
67N Block (NEUTRAL DIR BLOCK): It indicates that the element is blocked by digital input or because the Operation
magnitude (In current), or the Polarization magnitude (Vn voltage and/or Ip current) level is too low.
67N Operation (NEUTRAL DIR OP): It indicates that the directional element is giving permission, that the angle relations
between the operation magnitude and the polarization magnitude are met, according to the set conditions, or in case of
having selected Permission in the Block Logic setting, it indicates that the element allows operation under block conditions.
Table 5-39: Signals for the neutral directional element
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL
NEUTRAL DIR1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP
NEUTRAL DIR2 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR2 OP
NEUTRAL DIR3 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR3 OP
5.4.4.4 Voltage polarization operation principles

Operation Magnitude: In = 3·Io, calculated from the phase currents.
Polarization Magnitude: -3V0. Calculated from the phase voltages or measured at the input terminals (A11, A12).The
relay measures 3V0 and rotates 180º internally to obtain -3V0.
shows the operation of the zero sequence polarization, 3V0, in case of an AG fault. In this case, the polarization magnitude
3V0 can be calculated from the three phase voltage values, or measured through the fourth voltage input (Vx). In this last
case, the voltage transformer must be wye connected, and the Auxiliary Voltage setting in General settings must be
configured as VX. The operation magnitude In, is calculated from the phase currents.
When Ip Polarization is selected, the Polarization magnitude is Ip, this current value measured at the fifth current input
(terminals B11-B12). This polarization current usually comes from a CT measuring the current flow from the ground to the
neutral of the neutral fault current source, which is usually a transformer. The direction is considered to be Forward when
the neutral current In is inside a ±90º arc at both sides of the polarization current. In any other case, the direction is
Reverse. If the polarization current is lower than 5 mA, the element output takes the value of the Block Logic setting. See
Figure 5-13: Voltage polarization.

Figure 5-13: Voltage polarization shows the Operation of the directional element for a Phase A to Ground fault, where the
Phase A current grows in magnitude and is delayed with respect to its voltage by an angle similar to the protected line. Va
voltage decreases or can even disappear if the fault is close and the fault resistance is very low.
-3V0
Fault Ia In
Cone 5º Maximum
-45º torque angle
IA
-85º = 90º - 5º cone

-90º
Forward
Vc Vb
3V0 = Va +Vb+Vc
Figure 5-13: Voltage polarization

The voltage polarization algorithm uses –Vn, -(Va+Vb+Vc) = -3·V0, as a substitute for the faulted phase voltage. This
magnitude can be rotated by the desired angle to fix the MTA line and to define the operative semi plane of the relay,
following the rule that positive angles are in counter clockwise direction. A typical setting is –45º, as shown on the figure.
The operative semi plane is delimited to ± 85º of the MTA line. Every time the operation magnitude, In, is inside this semi
plane, the element considers the direction to be forward. If the Direction setting is set as Forward, the operation signal of
the neutral directional element (NEUTRAL DIR OP) is activated.
Minimum acceptable values, both for the polarization magnitude and the operation magnitude are as follows: minimum In
current for the element to operate is 50 mA. Minimum polarization voltage for the element to operate is set in the
Polarization Voltage Threshold setting. Minimum polarization current (Ip) is 5 mA.
The voltage polarized directional element needs a typical time of 1 cycle (20ms @ 50Hz) to polarize. This time must be
considered when setting the overcurrent elements with the Block Logic setting as Permission. This may cause, especially
in testing processes, the relay to trip with counter direction faults when voltage and current are applied at the same time
starting from zero. As there is no previous polarization voltage, the overcurrent element is ready to trip under any
overcurrent (as set in the Block Logic setting), while the directional element needs a complete cycle to polarize and give
the correct direction. If the current is high enough to pickup the overcurrent element and there is no set time delay, the
element trips before the directional element blocks the trip. In cases where this situation is foreseen, it is recommended to
program the Block Logic setting as Block, or else to add a small time delay to the overcurrent element to allow the
directional element to polarize and block the trip.
5.4.4.5 Current polarization operation principles:

Operation Magnitude: In = calculated from phase currents.
Polarization Magnitude: Ip, measured at input terminals B11-B12.

To perform a directional comparison by current, the polarization magnitude used is the current measured at the relay Ip
input, terminals B11-B12, with input or “positive” in B11. This current is taken from the source (transformer or generator)
neutral grounding.
Direction is considered to be forward when the phase shift between both magnitudes is lower than 85º. If the angle is
higher than 85º, the fault is considered to be reverse.
The following table shows the element’s output signals management (block and permission) depending on the polarization
type setting.
Table 5-40: Output signals management according to polarization type setting

POLARIZATION setting NEUTRAL DIR BLOCK SIGNAL NEUTRAL DIR OP SIGNAL
Vo Vo < POL V THRESHOLD setting Permission Vo
Ip Ip < 5 mA Permission Ip
Vo + Ip Vo < POL V THRESHOLD Permission Vo
Ip < 5 mA Permission Ip
Vo * Ip Vo < POL V THRESHOLD Permission Vo

Ip < 5 mA Permission Ip
Configuration of the required signals for blocking the neutral overcurrent elements from the signals provided by the
neutral directional elements is performed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements using the inverted
operation signals to block the trip, as shown in the following example:
How to block neutral time overcurrent elements with neutral directional functions:
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK = NOT (NEUTRAL DIR1 OP)
To block neutral instantaneous elements:
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK = NOT (NEUTRAL DIR1 OP)

Table 5-41: Quantities

POLARIZING MODE DIRECTION COMPARED PHASORS
FORWARD -Vo Io x 1 MTA
VOLTAGE (Vo)
REVERSE -Vo -Io x 1 MTA
FORWARD Isg Io
CURRENT (Ip)
REVERSE Isg -Io
- Vo Io
FORWARD or
Isg Io
Vo + Ip
- Vo -Io
REVERSE or
Isg -Io
- Vo Io
FORWARD and
Isg Io
Vo * Ip
- Vo -Io
REVERSE and
Isg -Io
5.4.5 Ground current

The Ground Current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
Ground time overcurrent (51G)
Ground instantaneous overcurrent (50G)
Ground directional element (67G)
5.4.5.1 Ground time-delayed overcurrent element (51G)

Ground TOC is a ground time delayed overcurrent protection element. The ground current is measured from the ground
input, terminals B9-B10, and it may be programmed as Fundamental phasor magnitude or RMS magnitude as required by
the application. The element trip can be time delayed using a selectable curve. It incorporates a reset time that is
selectable between instantaneous or linear.
Table 5-42: 51G element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Ground Current > Ground TOC
Ground TOC 1> Ground TOC 2 > Ground TOC 3

5.4.5.2 Ground instantaneous overcurrent element (50G)

Ground IOC is a ground instantaneous overcurrent protection element, with a setting range from 0.05 A to 160 A, which
can also be time delayed. The delay is selectable between 0.00 and 900 seconds. The ground current input quantity is
measured from the ground input, and it may be programmed as Fundamental phasor magnitude or RMS magnitude as
required by the application. The element incorporates a reset time selectable between 0 and 900 seconds, and a block
input that resets the pickup and trip signals to 0. The element outputs are the general pickup and trip signals of the
element.
Table 5-43: 50G element settingS

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Ground Current > Ground IOC
Ground IOC 1> Ground IOC 2 > Ground IOC 3
5.4.5.3 Ground directional element (67G)

Ground directional is a directional protection element, used for monitoring the ground overcurrent elements. The
operation magnitude is the ground current measured directly from the corresponding input (B9-B10), while the
polarization magnitude is the neutral voltage (Vn). The neutral voltage is calculated from the three phase voltages or
measured from the dedicated voltage input (A11-A12).
In case of using the voltage measured from the dedicated voltage input terminals, the Auxiliary Voltage setting in General
settings must be VN.
If the F650 is set to have synchronism check protection, then this input is adjusted as busbar voltage and it will not be
the 3V0 voltage (AUXILIARY VOLTAGE setting as VX)
If the F650 does not have a synchronism check element, then this input can be set as In neutral voltage, and it can be
used as polarization magnitude for the 67G element (AUXILIARY VOLTAGE setting as VN).
As in the case of a phase directional element, this element incorporates a voltage loss logic that allows blocking or
permitting the trip by means of a setting.
Table 5-44: 67G element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Ground Current > Ground Directional >
Ground Directional 1> Ground Directional 2 > Ground Directional 3

Operation of the Ground directional element 67G is similar to the operation of the neutral directional element 67N (refer to
section 5.4.4.3 Neutral directional element (67N)), with the exception that the operation magnitude here is the ground
current Ig (67G), measured from the input terminals B9-B10 instead of the Neutral current, In (67N), calculated from the
phase currents.
Polarization magnitudes can be, as in the case of 67N, Polarization voltage (3Vo), either calculated from the phase voltages
or measured from terminals A11-A12, or polarization current (Ip), measured from the fifth input transformer terminals, Isg,
terminals B11-B12.
The following table shows the used magnitudes in each of the Polarization possibilities:
Table 5-45: Magnitudes according to polarization setting

POLARIZATION setting OPERATION MAG. POLARIZATION MAG.
Vo Ig 3V0
Ip Ig Isg
Vo + Ip Ig 3V0 or Isg
Vo * Ip Ig 3V0 and Isg
The following table shows the management of the element output signals (block and permission) depending on the
Polarization Type setting.
Table 5-46: Output signal management according to polarization type setting

POLARIZATION setting GROUND DIR BLOCK SIGNAL GROUND DIR OP SIGNAL
Vo V0 < Ajs. POL V THRESHOLD Permission V0
Ip IP < 5 mA Permission IP
Vo + Ip V0 < POL V THRESHOLD Permission V0
IP < 5 mA Permission IP
Vo * Ip V0 < POL V THRESHOLD Permission V0

IP < 5 mA Permission IP
The configuration of the signals required for blocking the Ground overcurrent elements from the signals provided by the
Ground directional element is made at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements using inverted operation
signals to block the trip.
For example, to block the ground time delayed elements:
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK = NOT (GROUND DIR1 OP)
To block the Ground Instantaneous elements:
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK = NOT (GROUND DIR1 OP)

Table 5-47: Quantities

POLARIZING MODE DIRECTION COMPARED PHASORS
FORWARD -Vo Io x 1 MTA
VOLTAGE (Vo)
REVERSE -Vo -Io x 1 MTA
FORWARD Isg Io
CURRENT (Ip)
REVERSE Isg -Io
- Vo Io
FORWARD or
Isg Io
Vo + Ip
- Vo -Io
REVERSE or
Isg -Io
- Vo Io
FORWARD and
Isg Io
Vo * Ip
- Vo -Io
REVERSE and
Isg -Io
5.4.6 Sensitive ground current

The F650 Sensitive ground Current menu incorporates the following overcurrent elements:
• Sensitive ground time overcurrent (51SG)
• Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent (50SG)
• Isolated ground overcurrent (50IG)
• Sensitive ground directional overcurrent (67SG)
5.4.6.1 Sensitive ground time-delayed overcurrent element (51SG)

Sensitive Ground TOC is a sensitive ground time delayed overcurrent protection element with a setting range 0.005A to
16A. The sensitive ground current input quantity is measured from the sensitive ground input, terminals B11-B12, and it
may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or RMS magnitude as required by the application. The element
trip can be time delayed using a selectable curve. And it incorporates a reset time selectable between instantaneous or
linear.
Table 5-48: 51SG element settings
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Sensitive Ground Current > Sensitive Ground TOC
Sensitive Ground TOC 1> Sensitive Ground TOC 2 > Sensitive Ground TOC 3

5.4.6.2 Senstitive ground instantaneous overcurrent element (50SG)

50SG is a sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent protection element, with a setting range from 0.005 A to 16.00 A,
which can also be time delayed, with a delay selectable between 0 and 900 seconds. The ground current input quantity is
measured from the sensitive ground input, and it may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or RMS
magnitude as required by the application. The element incorporates a reset time selectable between 0 and 900 seconds,
and a block input that resets the pickup and trip signals to 0. The element outputs are the general pickup and trip signals of
the element.
Table 5-49: 50SG element settings
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Sensitive Ground Current > Sensitive Ground IOC
Sensitive Ground IOC 1> Sensitive Ground IOC 2 > Sensitive Ground IOC 3
5.4.6.3 Instantaneous overcurrent element for ungrounded systems (50IG)

The operation of this element is similar to sensitive ground overcurrent elements; the difference is that in this case, 3I0
current is capacitive, and uses very reduced magnitudes (0.5-10.0 A primary values).
The operation characteristic is shown on figure Figure 5-14: Operations characteristics, element 50IG, where Vh, Vl, Ih and
Il are element settings.
Vn=3V0
Operation Area
Vh
Vl
Il Ih In=3I0
Figure 5-14: Operations characteristics, element 50IG

Table 5-50: Isolated ground IOC element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Sensitive Ground Current > Isolated Ground IOC
Isolated Ground IOC 1> Isolated Ground IOC 2 > Isolated Ground IOC 3
Function Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
High Voltage Vh Level 20 1V [2 : 70]
Low Current Il LEVEL 0.005 0.001 A [0.005 : 0.400]
Low Voltage Vl LEVEL 2 1V [2 : 70]
High Current Ih LEVEL 0.025 0.001 A [0.005 : 0.400]
Operation time Delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Deviation time to instantaneous Time to inst 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
The relay settings for the Isolated Ground IOC elements are as follows:
Function: This setting determines whether the element is operative and can generate pickup
and trip events, which can be configured to close outputs, light up LEDs or trigger
oscillography.
Vh, VL, Ih, IL: Vn and In values that define the points in the operative area.
Operation time (Delay): This is the selectable period between the element pickup and trip, with a range from
0 to 900 seconds in steps of 0,01 seconds.
Deviation time to Instantaneous (Time to inst): Time after the trip during which the elements become instantaneous. It
must be set to zero if the functionality is not required.
this element.
OPERATION PRINCIPLES:
Operation of the isolated Ground element is based on the detection of a current that exceeds the setting, with neutral
voltage supervision (3V0). This allows very sensitive setting of the element, with a very low current level, ensuring that
small angle or ratio errors in the current transformers do not cause the relay to operate, as the neutral voltage verified is
higher than the one set.
Values for Ih, IL, Vh and VL, which define the relay operation area, are configurable. H magnitudes must be higher than L
magnitudes. The 50IG element can be supervised by directional element 67SG.
Using the relay input magnitudes In and Vn, if the point defined by (In, Vn) is inside the operation area and if the directional
element (if directional supervision is set) allows it, the element picks up and the set delay time starts counting down. If a
directional block appears during the countdown, the element is reset. After the set time the element trips. Once tripped, the
relay cannot be blocked by the directional element, and the trip remains while the fault exists.
After the trip, the deviation time to instantaneous starts to run, so that all pickups produced during this time produce an
Instantaneous trip. This means that, if after a trip the breaker is reclosed and the fault persists or reappears, the trip is
instantaneous. If the user doesn’t want to use this function, then the Deviation Time to Instantaneous (Time to inst)
setting must be set to zero seconds. Once the time has expired, the element returns to its normal operation.

5.4.6.4 Sensitive ground directional element (67SG)

Sensitive Ground directional is a directional element used for supervising sensitive ground overcurrent functions. The
operation magnitude is the ground current measured directly from the corresponding input (terminals B11-B12), while the
polarization magnitude is the neutral voltage (3Vo). The neutral voltage is either calculated from three phase voltages or
measured from the dedicated voltage input (A11-A12)
In case of using the voltage measured at the dedicated voltage input terminals, the Auxiliary Voltage setting in Setpoint >
System Setup > General settings must be VN.
If the F650 is set to have synchronism check protection, then this input is adjusted as busbar voltage and it will not be the
3V0 voltage (AUXILIARY VOLTAGE setting as VX)
If the F650 does not have a synchronism check element, then this input can be set as 3V0 neutral voltage, and it can be used
as polarization magnitude for the 67SG element (AUXILIARY VOLTAGE setting as VN).
The same way as the directional element for phases, it has a polarization voltage loss logic that allows blocking or
producing trip depending on the setting.
Table 5-51: Sensitive ground directional element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Sensitive Ground Current > Sensitive Ground Directional >
Sensitive Ground Directional 1> Sensitive Ground Directional 2 > Sensitive Ground Directional 3
Available settings are:

Function permission (Function): This setting determines whether the sensitive Ground directional element is enabled or
Disabled.
Maximum Torque Angle (MTA): This angle is used to rotate the Polarization voltage. Positive angles mean counter
clockwise rotation, and negative angles mean clockwise. The polarization magnitude,
once rotated, defines the MTA line. Vn rotated by this angle points to the semi plane
that corresponds to a Reverse fault. (-Vn) rotated this angle points to the semi plane
that corresponds to a Forward fault.
Operation Direction (Direction): This setting indicates the Direction for which the element allows a trip. Depending on
this setting, the element is activated for faults in a direction or in the opposite direction.
Possible setting values are FORWARD or REVERSE.
Polarization Voltage Threshold (Pol. V Threshold):This is the minimum polarization voltage threshold. For a voltage value
lower than this setting the directional element is blocked.
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this
element.
Sensitive ground directional element is an independent Protection element that provides block and Operation signals.
These signals can be monitored both through the relay HMI or using EnerVista 650 Setup at Actual > Status > Protection
> Sensitive Ground Current

67SG Block (SENS GND DIR1 BLOCK): It indicates that the element is blocked by digital input or because the Operation
magnitude (In current), or the Polarization magnitude (Vn voltage and/or Ip current) level is too low.
67SG Operation (SENS GND DIR1 OP): It indicates that the directional element is giving permission, the operation
magnitude and the polarization magnitude conditions are met, or in case of having selected Permission in the Block Logic
setting, it indicates that the element allows operation under block conditions.
Table 5-52: Sensitive ground directional signals
SENS GND DIRECTIONAL
SENS GND DIR1 BLOCK
SENS GND DIR1 OP
SENS GND DIR2 BLOCK
SENS GND DIR2 OP
SENS GND DIR3 BLOCK
SENS GND DIR3 OP
Configuration of the required signals for blocking the sensitive ground overcurrent elements from the signals provided by
the sensitive ground directional elements is performed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements. This is
done using the inverted operation signals to block the trip, as shown in the following example:
For example, to block sensitive Ground time overcurrent elements, use the following signals:
SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK = NOT (SENS GND DIR1 OP)
To block Ground instantaneous elements:
SENS GND IOC1 BLOCK = NOT (SENS GND DIR1 OP)
To block isolated Ground elements:
ISOLATED GND1 BLK = NOT (SENS GND DIR1 OP)

5.4.7 Negative sequence current

The Negative sequence menu incorporates the Negative sequence time overcurrent (46P) element:
5.4.7.1 Negative sequence overcurrent element (46P)

Negative Sequence TOC is an overcurrent protection element that uses the fundamental phasor of the negative sequence
current as input magnitude, calculated from the phase currents. This element can be used for detecting load unbalance in
the system, and for open phase conditions (fallen or broken conductor). The trip can be time delayed by a curve selectable
by setting. The reset can be instantaneous or linear.
Table 5-53: Negative sequence toc element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Negative Sequence Current > Negative Sequence TOC >
Negative Sequence TOC 1> Negative Sequence TOC 2 > Negative Sequence TOC 3

5.4.8 Voltage elements

The F650 incorporates the following voltage elements:
• Phase undervoltage (27P)
• Phase overvoltage (59P)
• Neutral overvoltage (59NH/59NL)
• Negative sequence overvoltage (47)
• Auxiliary overvoltage (59X)
• Auxiliary undervoltage (27X)
These protection elements can be used in multiple applications, such as:
Undervoltage protection: for induction motor load types, where a voltage dip can cause an increase of the consumed
current. Element 27P (phase undervoltage) can be used to issue a trip or an alarm.
Transfer Schemes: in the event of an undervoltage condition, we can use the 27P element (phase undervoltage) to send a
signal that transfers load to another power source.
Undervoltage elements can be set to operate with definite time or with an inverse time curve. If the element is set as
definite time, it operates when voltage remains under the set value during the set period of time. This period can be set
from 0s to 900.00 s in steps of 10ms.
These elements can also be set as inverse time curves. This family of curves is defined by the following formula:
D
T=
V
1−
Vpickup
Where:
T = operation time
D = operation time setting (delay)
V = voltage applied to the relay
Vpickup = pickup setting (Pickup level)
Figure 5-15: Inverse time undervoltage curves

5.4.8.1 Phase undervoltage element (27P)

This element may be used to give a desired time-delayed operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage
(phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for wye VT connection, or phase-to phase- for Delta VT connection) or as a Definite
time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage.
The delay setting selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the
operating voltage below which the element is blocked (a setting of “0” allows a dead source to be considered a fault
condition.
This element generates independent pickup and trip signals per phase, and general pickup and trip signals for the element.
These last signals can be selected, by means of the operation logic setting, to be an OR (any phase signal) or an AND (all
phase signals).
Table 5-54: 27P element settings
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Voltage Elements > Phase UV >
Phase UV 1> Phase UV 2 > Phase UV 3
Input mode Mode PHASE-PHASE N/A [PHASE-PHASE, PHASE-GROUND]
Pickup Level Pickup Level 10 1V [3 : 300]
Curve shape Curve DEFINITE TIME N/A [DEFINITE TIME – INVERSE TIME]
Time Dial Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Minimum Voltage Threshold Minimum Voltage 0 1V [0 : 300]
Operation logic Logic ANY PHASE N/A [ANY PHASE – TWO PHASES – ALL PHASES]
Supervision by breaker status Supervised by 52 DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Phase undervoltage element settings are:

Function Permission (Function): This setting indicates whether the phase undervoltage element is enabled or disabled.
Input mode (Mode): This setting allows selecting operation for phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltage,
depending on the selected setting.
Pickup Level: This is the voltage threshold below which the undervoltage element operates.
Curve Shape (Curve): Undervoltage elements can be set to operate with definite time or with an inverse time
curve. Elements set as definite time operate when the voltage value remains under the
pickup setting during the set time. If inverse time is selected, the element operates
according to the previously described inverse time curve.
Time Dial (Delay): Setting of the Protection element operation time.
Minimum voltage Threshold (Minimum Voltage):Voltage setting under which the undervoltage element is inhibited, in
order not to operate in dead line cases.
Operation logic (Logic): This setting allows the element operation logic selection:
ANY PHASE The element operates under an undervoltage condition in any of the
three phases.
TWO PHASES The element operates under an undervoltage condition in at least two
phases.
ALL PHASES The element operates under an undervoltage condition in three phases.
Supervision by breaker status (Supervised by 52):This setting allows inhibiting the undervoltage element if the breaker is
open breaker. In case this setting is enabled, the undervoltage element is supervised by
the breaker status. Otherwise, the element operates independently of the breaker status.
element.

5.4.8.2 Phase overvoltage element (59P)

The Phase overvoltage element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional time delay or as a Definite
Time element. The input voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage, either measured directly from Delta-connected VTs or as
calculated from phase-to-ground (wye) connected VTs. The time delay can be set from instantaneous to 900 seconds. The
element reset can be delayed up to 900 seconds.
As in the case of the undervoltage element, this element generates independent pickup and trip signals for each phase.
The general signal is selectable by setting to be an OR or an AND of the phase signals.
Table 5-55: 59P element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Voltage Elements > Phase OV >
Phase OV 1> Phase OV 2 > Phase OV 3
Operation logic Logic ANY PHASE N/A [ANY PHASE – TWO PHASES – ALL PHASES]
Phase overvoltage element settings are:

Function Permission (Function): This setting indicates whether the phase overvoltage element is enabled or disabled.
Pickup Level: This is the voltage threshold over which the overvoltage element operates.
Trip time (Trip Delay): setting of the Protection element operation time.
Reset time (Reset Delay): Reset time of the Protection element.
Operation logic (Logic): This setting allows the element operation logic selection:
ANY PHASE The element operates under an overvoltage condition in any of the
three phases.
TWO PHASES The element operates under an overvoltage condition in at least two
phases.
ALL PHASES The element operates under an overvoltage condition in three
phases.
element.
5.4.8.3 Neutral overvoltage element high/low (59NH/59nl)

The Neutral Overvoltage element can be used to detect an asymmetrical system voltage condition due to a ground fault
or to the loss of one or two phases of the source.
The element responds to the system neutral voltage (3V0), calculated from the phase voltages or measured by the 4th
voltage transformer.
VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element.
The element time delay is selectable between 0 and 900 seconds and incorporates a reset with a selectable delay
between 0 and 900 seconds.
Notice that the neutral overvoltage element is not be available if a DELTA Connection is set in the Phase VT Connection
setting in General settings, and the fourth voltage transformer input is set to the busbar voltage for the synchronism
element (Vx in Auxiliary Voltage setting). This is because with this combination of settings it is not possible to calculate the
zero sequence component from the phase-to-phase voltage magnitudes.

Table 5-56: 59NH/59NL element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Voltage Elements >
>Neutral OV High > Neutral OV High 1> Neutral OV High 2 > Neutral OV High 3
>Neutral OV Low > Neutral OV Low 1> Neutral OV Low 2 > Neutral OV Low 3
Pickup Level Pickup Level 10 1V [3 : 300 ]
5.4.8.4 Negative sequence overvoltage element (47)

The Negative sequence phase overvoltage element uses as its input magnitude the negative sequence component
calculated from the phase voltage values. This element can be used to detect the loss of one or two phases, unbalance
voltage conditions, etc.
Table 5-57: 47 element settings
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > Negative Sequence OV >
Negative Sequence OV 1> Negative Sequence OV 2 > Negative Sequence OV 3
5.4.8.5 Auxiliary overvoltage element (59X)

This is an Auxiliary overvoltage element for general use that uses as its input magnitude the voltage measured by the 4th
VT (when VX is selected as Auxiliary Voltage in General Settings). The time delay for element 59X can be set from 0 to 900
seconds. The element has a reset than can be programmed from 0 to 900 seconds.
Table 5-58: 59X element settings
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > Auxiliary OV >
Auxiliary OV 1> Auxiliary OV 2 > Auxiliary OV 3

5.4.8.6 Auxiliary undervoltage element (27X)

This is an Auxiliary undervoltage element for general use that uses as its input magnitude the voltage measured by the 4th
VT, terminals A11-A12 (when VX is selected as Auxiliary Voltage in General Settings).
Table 5-59: 27X element settings
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > VOLTAGE ELEMENTS > Auxiliary UV >
Auxiliary UV 1> Auxiliary UV 2 > Auxiliary UV 3
Curve shape Curve DEFINITE TIME N/A [DEFINITE TIME – INVERSE TIME]
Time Dial Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
5.4.9 Power elements
5.4.9.1 Forward power element (32FP)

The 32FP element produces a trip when exported power exceeds the setting value. Monitored power is active power,
calculated by the three phase voltages and currents, and it is considered to be exported, positive active power, the one
given in the direction of the line protected by the relay; in this situation, the angle between secondary voltage and current
is lower than 90º, according to the relay wiring diagram.
RESTRAINING OPERATION
P- P+
0
Figure 5-16: Forward power characteristics
Table 5-60: 2FP element settings

SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Power > Forward Power
Forward Power 1> Forward Power 2 > Forward Power 3
Block from offline Blk Time After Close 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Pickup level for stage 1 Stage 1 Tap 10.00 0.01MW [0.00 : 10000.00]
Trip time for stage 1 Stage 1 Time 60.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Pickup level for stage 2 Stage 2 Tap 20.00 0.01MW [0.00 : 10000.00]
The F650 includes three 32FP elements. Each elements incorporates two stages, the first stage, less critical, is intended to
produce an alarm, the second stage is used for trip. Both levels are set in primary values, for instance: if in general
settings we set CT_RATIO to a value of 100, and the same value for PT_RATIO, the base power is: 100 x 100 = 10000 W

The block time allows blocking the element operation during a set time after the coupling breaker closure. For this purpose
it is necessary to connect the breaker bay using a 52B type contact. The purpose of this setting is to avoid spurious trips
caused by overloads after the breaker closure.
Power calculations depending on the VT connection:
1- WYE VT connection, or only one transformer in phase-to-ground connection:
P = Va ∗ Ia ∗ cos ϕa + Vb ∗ Ib ∗ cos ϕb + Vc ∗ Ic ∗ cos ϕc
2- DELTA VT connection, or only one voltage transformer in phase-to-ground connection:
Vab Vbc Vca

P= ∗ Ia ∗ cos (ϕa - 30) + ∗ Ib ∗ cos (ϕb - 30) + ∗ Ic ∗ cos (ϕc - 30)
3 3 3
5.4.9.2 Directional power element (32)
Element description
The Directional Power element responds to three-phase active power measured from the feeder associated with the F650.
This element can be selected to operate according to the power threshold adjusted in the corresponding setting. This
element is ideal for reverse power applications (F32 REV) or forward power (F32 FWD), depending on the selected setting.
The relay measures the three-phase power for wye or delta connections.
The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional Power
Characteristic diagram. The element responds to the following condition:
P cos(j) + Q sin (j) > SMIN
where: P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the F650 convention, j is the angle set at the 32 setting
(DIR POWER ANGLE) in degrees in steps of 0.01º, and SMIN is the minimum operating power.
The element has two independent (as to the pickup and delay settings) elements. Both elements can be used for alarm and
trip, and they can be set separately to provide a mixed power protection.
The Directional Power Characteristic is shown in the following diagram.
DIR POWER ANGLE
Figure 5-17: Power directional characteristics

By making the characteristic angle adjustable from 0º to 360º in steps of 0.01º, a variety of operating characteristics can
be achieved as presented in the figures below. For example, for an angle of 0º, the element would operate as a 32 Forward
Power element, while if setting an RCA angle of 180º, the element would operate as a 32 Reverse Power element. For
angles of 90º and 270º, the case would be similar but with reactive power.
Figures (a, b, c, d, e, f) below shows settings for different power applications.
Figure 5-18: Directional power element sample applications

The following table shows the SMIN and angle values that must be used for some typical applications:
Table 5-61: Directional power element
SMIN (Stage Tap) ANGLE (RCA) ELEMENT
>0 0º Forward Active Power
<0 0º Reverse Low Forward Active Power
>0 180º Reverse Forward Active Power
<0 180º Low Forward Active Power
By adding 90º to the angles shown on figures a, b, c and d, the represented elements would be similar but with Reactive
Power instead of Active Power.
Any other angle would provide a mixed Protection Between Active and Reactive power.
A different angle selection for Stage 1 and Stage 2 can provide in a single element, a Reactive and Active power limitation.
For example, using the following values:
Dir Power Angle 1(RCA) 0º
Stage 1 Tap 0
Dir Power Angle 2(RCA) 90º
Stage 2 Tap 0
We would obtain a mixed Protection Between figure (d) and figure (e).
Settings
Table 5-62: 32 element settings
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Power > Directional Power>
Directional Power 1> Directional Power 2 > Directional Power 3
Block from offline Blk Time After Close 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Directional Angle for stage 1 (RCA1) Dir Power Angle 1 0.00 1 Deg [0.00 : 359.99]
Pickup level for stage 1 Stage 1 Tap 10.00 0.01MW [-10000.00 : 10000.00]
Directional Angle for stage 2 (RCA2) Dir Power Angle 2 0.00 1 Deg [0.00 : 359.99]
Pickup level for stage 2 Stage 2 Tap 20.00 0.01MW [-10000.00 : 10000.00]
Function: Enables or disables the directional element.
Blk Time After Close: In seconds. This settings allow to block the element 32 during the time specified in the
setting after the breaker switches from OPEN to CLOSED.
Dir Power Angle (1-2) (RCA): This setting specifies the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the directional power
element. This setting provides ability to respond to the function in any direction
defined (active forward power, active low forward power, etc.)

The following figure illustrates the conventions established:
Figure 5-19: Angles

Stage (1 - 2) Tap: This setting specifies the minimum Operation three-phase power for the Stage 1 (2) element. The power
value defined in this setting is the minimum distance between the source and the directional power characteristic. This
value can be positive or negative. The value of this setting is defined in total MW (primary) – the CT and VT value is
considered in the calculations.
NOTE:
Even if the element defined in this setting is MW, this does not necessarily mean that the resulting value and the RCA
setting are in MW. For example:
RCA: 30 º SMIN: 100 MW.
If we assume that there is only active power. The element operation would be produced for a value of:
P = 100 / cos (30) = 115,7 MW.
If there was only reactive power:
Q = 100/sin (30) = 200,0 MVar.
(In this case the real Operation elements are Mvar, even if SMIN is expressed in MW.)
Stage 1 (2)Time: This setting specifies the delay for Stage 1 of the element. For reverse power or direct power applications,
usually Stage 1 is used for alarm functions, while Stage 2 is used for tripping functions.
Snapshot Events: This setting enables or disables the generation of events. All states in this function are affected by this
setting.
Status
Statuses defined for this Function are as follows:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) BLOCK: Writing status, operates by level. When this status is activated externally (via PLC), the
directional power element is blocked. This status affects both elements in the
protection element (stage 1 and 2).
Activation of this status produces the event: DIR PWR1 (2, 3) BLK ON.
Deactivation produces the event : DIR PWR1 (2, 3) BLK OFF.
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) OP: This is activated when the element that corresponds to stage 1/2 is activated. Events
generated by this element are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) OP ON
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) OP OFF
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) PKP: Activation of this status indicates that the power value has exceeded the threshold
indicated by the Stage 1/2 element. Events generated by this element are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) PKP ON
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG1 (2) PKP OFF
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG PKP: This status is a logic OR between the DIR PWR STG1 PKP and DIR PWR STG2 PKP
statuses. Activation of this status indicates that the power value has exceeded the
threshold indicated by any of the Stage 1/2 elements. Events generated by this
element are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG PKP ON
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG PKP OFF
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG OP: This status is a logic OR between the DIR PWR STG1 OP and DIR PWR STG2 OP
statuses. This is activated when the element that corresponds to stage 1/2 is
activated. Events generated by this element are:
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG OP ON
DIR PWR1 (2, 3) STG OP OFF

5.4.9.3 Wattmetric ground fault (32N)

This document specifies wattmetric zero-sequence directional function, which can be used on solidly grounded, low-
resistance grounded, isolated or resonant (Petersen coil) grounded systems. The function determines presence and
direction of ground faults by measuring value and direction of zero-sequence power.
The element responds to power derived from zero-sequence voltage and current in a direction specified by the element
characteristic angle. The angle can be set within all four quadrants, the power can be selected to be either active or
reactive. Therefore, the element may be used to sense either forward or reverse ground faults in either inductive,
capacitive or resistive networks. Inverse time characteristic allows time coordination of the elements across the network.
Typical applications include ground fault protection in solidly grounded transmission networks, grounded/ungrounded/
resistor-grounded/resonant-grounded distribution networks, or for directionalizing other non-directional ground elements.
Element settings
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > POWER >
WATT GND FLT HIGH 1> WATT GND FLT HIGH 2 > WATT GND FLT HIGH 3
WATT GND FLT LOW 1> WATT GND FLT LOW 2 > WATT GND FLT LOW 3
SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED-ENABLED]
Supervision minimun voltage Voltage Pickup Level 2.00 0.01 V [2.00 : 70.00]
Source of operating current. Current selection IN N/A [IN-IG]
Pickup Level for Overcurrent OC Pickup Level 0.005 0.001A [0.005 : 0.400]
Pickup Delay for Overcurrent OC Pickup Delay 0.20 0.01 s [0.00 : 600.00]
Pickup Level for operating Power Power Pickup 0.01 0.01 W [0.01 : 4.50]
Max torque angle MTA 0 1 Deg [0 : 360]
Pickup Delay for Operating Power Power Pickup Delay 0.20 0.01 s [0.00 : 600.00]
Curve shape Curve DEFINITE TIME N/A [DEFINITE TIME - INVERSE TIME - USER
CURVE A - USER CURVE B - USER
CURVE C - USER CURVE D]
Multiplier Multiplier 1.00 0.01 s [0.02 : 2.00]
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Event DISABLED N/A [DISABLED-ENABLED]
Function: Enables or disables the directional element.

Voltage Pickup Level: The element uses neutral, i.e. 3 times zero-sequence, voltage. This setting specifies the
minimum neutral voltage supervising the directional power measurement. This threshold
should be higher than possible unbalance during normal operation of the system.
Current selection: The element responds to the neutral (3 times zero-sequence) current, either calculated
internally (IN) from the phase currents, or supplied externally (IG) via the ground CT input. This
setting allows selecting the source of the operating current.
OC Pickup Level: This setting specifies the current supervision level for the measurement of the zero-sequence
power.
OC Pickup Delay: This setting specifies delay for the overcurrent portion of this element. The delay applies to
the 32N1(2 3) HIGH(LOW) OC PKP operand driven from the overcurrent condition.
Power Pickup: This setting specifies the operating point of the element.
MTA: This setting adjusts the maximum torque angle of the element.

Power Pickup Delay: This setting defines a definite time delay before the inverse time characteristic is activated. If the
curve selection is set as “Definite Time”, the element would operate after this security time delay.
Curve: This setting allows choosing one of three methods to delay operate signal once all conditions are
met to discriminate fault direction:
Definite time: Fixed time delay defined by the POWER PICKUP DELAY setting
Inverse time: Inverse time characteristics delay defined by:
S PKP
t = m • -------------
S OP
where m is a multiplier defined by the MULTIPLIER setting, SPKP is the pickup setting and
SOP is the operating power at the time.
FlexCurve A,B,C,D: any time characteristics programmed by the user with FlexCurves.
Multiplier: Time dial multiplier
Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the wattmetric
ground fault elements.
Element description
The operating power is calculated as:
S_op= real(Vn(In 1ÐMTA)*)
where: * stands for complex conjugate. By varying the MTA angle one can make the element to respond to forward or
reverse direction in inductive, resistive, or capacitive networks as shown in the figure below.

Figure 5-20: Angles

Operating power
Vn – neutral voltage (3 times V_0): either calculated (VX as auxiliary voltage setting) or supplied from the Auxiliary voltage
channel (VN as auxiliary voltage setting)
In – neutral current (3 times I_0): either calculated (IN as current selection setting) or supplied from the ground current
channel (IG as current selection setting)
The following figure shows the logic scheme diagram for high range and low range wattmetric ground fault elements
(32NH, 32NL).

Figure 5-21: Wattmetric ground fault elements logic scheme

Status
Statuses defined for this Function are as follows:
32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) BLOCK :Writing status, operates by level. When this status is activated externally (via PLC), the
wattmetric ground fault element is blocked.
The activation produces the event: 32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) BLOCK ON.
Deactivation produces the event: 32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) BLOCK OFF.
32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) OC PKP: The activation of this status indicates that the current value has exceeded the
threshold indicated and pickup delay has expired. Events generated by this element
are:
32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) OC PKP ON
32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) OC PKP OFF
32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) PKP:Activation of this status indicates that the current, voltage and power value has exceeded
the threshold indicated and power pickup delay has expired.
Events generated by this element are:
32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) PKP ON
32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) PKP OFF
32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) OP: This is activated when the element is activated. Events generated by this element are:
32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) OP ON
32N1 (2, 3) HIGH (LOW) OP OFF
5.4.10 Frequency elements
5.4.10.1 Underfrequency element (81U)

The steady-state frequency of a power system is a certain indicator of the existing balance between the generated power
and the load. Whenever this balance is disrupted through the loss of an important generating unit, the effect is a reduction
in frequency. A reliable method to quickly restore the balance between load and generation is to automatically disconnect
the selected loads, based on the actual system frequency. This technique called “load-shedding” maintains system
integrity and minimizes widespread outages.
The 81U element is an underfrequency control element. The pickup setting can be selected from 20.00 to 65.00 Hz. The
element reset time delayed is selectable between 0.00 and 900 seconds, and for the element to operate it is necessary
that the voltage value is over the value set for minimum voltage threshold. This way undesired trips are prevented when
the signal for metering the frequency is not available or has a very low value.
Underfrequency elements (81U) can be configured by using Enervista 650 Setup at Setpoint>Protection
Elements>Setting Group X
Table 5-63: 81U element settings

Setpoint > Control Elements > Underfrequency
UNDERFREQUENCY 1 > UNDERFREQUENCY 2 > UNDERFREQUENCY 3 >UNDERFREQUENCY 4>UNDERFREQUENCY
5>UNDEFREQUENCY 6 **
Pickup level Pickup Level 49.50 0.01 Hz [20.00 : 65.00]


Minimum voltage threshold Minimum Voltage 30 1V [10 : 300]
Frequency Source Frequency Source LINE FRQ N/A [LINE FRQ - BUS FRQ]
** For firmware below 7.20 version, only the first three underfrequency elements is available.
Frequency elements operate with the system frequency, this frequency is measured in the voltage channel set for the
frequency reference, in the Frequency Reference setting inside Setpoint > System Setup >General Settings.
5.4.10.2 Overfrequency element (81O)

81O is an overfrequency protection element. The pickup setting can be selected from 20.00 to 65.00 Hz, with a time delay
selectable between 0 and 900 seconds. The element-reset delay is from 0.00 to 900.00 seconds.
Underfrequency elements (81U) can be configured by using Enervista 650 Setup at Setpoint>Protection
Elements>Setting Group X
Table 5-64: 81O element settings

Setpoint > Control Elements > Overfrequency
OVERFREQUENCY 1 > OVERFREQUENCY 2 > OVERFREQUENCY 3 >OVERFREQUENCY 4>OVERFREQUENCY 5>OVERFREQUENCY 6
Pickup level Pickup Level 50.50 0.01 Hz [20.00 : 65.00]
Frequency Source Frequency Source LINE FRQ N/A [LINE FRQ - BUS FRQ]
** For firmware below 7.20 version, only the first three overfrequency elements is available.
Frequency elements operate with the system frequency, this frequency is measured in the voltage channel set for the
frequency reference, in the Frequency Reference setting inside Setpoint > System Setup >General Settings.
5.4.10.3 Frequency rate of change

F650 uses a defined signal as frequency reference. This signal is analyzed by the Digital Signal Processor and time
between two consecutive zero-crossing is measured. Reference signal is set in Setpoint > System Setup > General
Settings > Frequency Reference.
SETPOINT > Protection Elements > Setting Group X > FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE
FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 1 > FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 2 > FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 3
Direction of the frequency change Freq. rate trend INCREASING N/A [INCREASING - DECREASING - BI-
DIRECTIONAL]
Operation Value in Hz/s Freq. rate pickup 0.50 0.01 Hz/s [0.10 : 10.00]
Minimum required voltage in % Freq. rate OV supv 40.00 0.01% [0.00 : 110.00]
nominal voltage
Minimum Frequency Threshold Freq. rate min 45.00 0.01 Hz [20.00 : 80.00]
Maximum Frequency Threshold Freq. rate max 65.00 0.01 Hz [20.00 : 80.00]
Frequency rate Trip Delay Freq. rate delay 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 60.00]

Snapshot Events Generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Rate of Change Function: This setting allows enabling or disabling the frequency rate of change element.
Freq rate trend: This setting allows to configure the element in order to answer to increasing,
decreasing or both directions frequency changes.
Freq. Rate Pickup: This setting defines the value to operate the element. If Direction is set as "Increasing",
element operates when df/dt > Pickup Level, if set as "Decreasing" when -df/dt >
Pickup Level, if set as both when |df/dt| > Pickup Level.
Freq. Rate OV supv: This setting defines the minimum required voltage. Under this level, the frequency rate
of change element is blocked. This is the percentage of the nominal voltage (adjust in
general settings). Voltage used as reference is line voltage (see frequency reference
setting in general settings).
Freq rate Min: This setting defines the minimum frequency required in this unit to be enabled. For
any value under this level the element is disabled.
Freq rate Max: This setting defines the maximum frequency allowed in this unit to be enabled. For
any value above this level the element is disabled.
Freq rate Delay: Time that the element must remain picked up before it operates.
Snapshot events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this
element.
The frequency rate of change actual values can be viewed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Frequency:
Table 5-65: Frequency rate of change status
FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE STATUS
FREQ RATE1 PKP
FREQ RATE1 OP
FREQ RATE2 PKP
FREQ RATE2 OP
FREQ RATE3 PKP
FREQ RATE3 OP
The block signals for the frequency rate of change element can be viewed at: Actual> Status > Protection > Protection
Blocks:
Table 5-66: Frequency rate of change blocks

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE BLOCKS
FREQ RATE1 BLOCK
FREQ RATE2 BLOCK
FREQ RATE3 BLOCK

5.4.11 Miscellaneous elements
5.4.11.1 Broken conductor

F650 incorporates a broken or fallen conductor detection function. The relay uses the ratio between the negative
sequence current, I2, and the positive sequence current I1. In normal and balanced load situations, this ratio is zero, while
in severe load fault conditions, an unbalance is produced and this ratio increases.
SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENTS >SETTING GROUP X > MISCELLANEOUS > BROKEN CONDUCTOR
Tap Level in percentage of I2/I1 Tap 20.0 0.1% [20.0 : 100.0]
Trip Time Trip Delay 60.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Current Inhibition Level setting Operation Threshold 0.005 0.001 A [0.000 : 1.000]
This way, when the function is enabled and the unbalance is produced over the set percentage, the element picks up. If
unbalance conditions are maintained during a period longer than the set time delay, the element trips.
In order to avoid trips or pickups with very weak loads there is a current level threshold to inhibit the operation of the
element when the three phase currents are below a fixed level.
Note: The I2/I1 current inhibition level for the different firmware versions is as follows:
Firmware Version Current Inhibition Level

1.50 or Lower 10 mA
1.60 or Higher 50 mA
1.80 or Higher Selectable by setting from 0.000 to 1.000 in steps of 0.001 A
The Operation Threshold level has been included to allow the user selecting the current inhibition level suitable for a
particular application, in order to avoid operation of the element when the relay is not connected to the line or in case the
relay has previously operated correctly and has been disconnected from the line, as in this case the operation condition is
met but the relay should not trip.
The operation threshold operation is as follows:
The Broken conductor element is fully operational if at least one of the phase currents is higher than the setting. This
condition assumes that the relay is connected to the line.
If the element is on trip or pickup condition, the element is reset if the three phase currents are below the operation
threshold level. This condition assumes that the relay is not connected to the line and therefore the relay should not trip.
Due to the response time of this function, if the set time delay is 0s, a trip can occur in situations where, for example, one of
the currents is stopped before the rest, as these currents would produce a negative sequence current calculation.
Therefore, to avoid this kind of undesired trips, it is strongly recommended to establish a minimum time delay setting, such
as 100 ms, or higher depending on the expected normal unbalances in the network. This is to differentiate these situations
from broken conductor situations.
5.4.11.2 Locker rotor

F650 incorporates a locked rotor element (48) with three elements. Protection element produces a trip when current
(primary values) exceeds the set value. This current setting value is the product of the set Full load current by the pickup
setting.
Settings can be configured by using ENervista 650 setup at Setpoint> Protection Elements> Setting Group X>
Miscellaneous>Locked Rotor

Table 5-67: Locker rotor element settings

SETPOINT> PROTECTION ELEMENTS>SETTING GROUP X> MISCELLANEOUS>LOCKED ROTOR 1> LOCKED ROTOR
2> LOCKED ROTOR 3
Input type Input PHASOR (DFT) N/A [PHASOR – RMS]
Full load current Full Load Current 0.50 KA [0.10 : 10.00]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.01 N/A [1.01 : 109.00]
Trip time Trip Delay 0.00 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Locked rotor element settings are:

Function Permission (Function): This setting indicates whether the locked rotor element is enabled or disabled.
Input (Phasor(DFT)-RMS): Selection between fundamental phasor magnitude (DFT) or total waveform RMS
magnitude.
Full Load Current (FLC): This is the average maximum expected operating phase current for the motor.
Pickup Level: This is the current threshold over the full load current setting with which the
element operates. The operating current for this element is calculated as follows:
I tap = FLC× Pickup_ Level
Trip time (Trip Delay): Setting of the Protection element operation time.
Reset time (Reset Delay): Reset time of the Protection element.
this element.
The signals related to the locked rotor pickups and operations for the three locked rotor elements can be viewed at Actual
> Status > Control Elements > Locked Rotor and they are as follows:
Table 5-68: Locked rotor status
LOCKED ROTOR STATUS
LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR1 OP
LOCKED ROTOR2 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR2 OP
LOCKED ROTOR3 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR3 OP
The block signals for the locked rotor element can be configured at: Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements
Table 5-69: Locked rotor blocks
LOCKED ROTOR BLOCKS
LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK
LOCKED ROTOR2 BLK
LOCKED ROTOR3 BLK
Note:
The element works with primary values.
The element picks up if at least one of the three phase currents is above the adjusted level. The operation value is the
higher of the three.
The reset level is 97% to 98% of the pickup level.

5.4.12 Load encroachment
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > LOAD ENCROACHMENT

LOAD ENCROACHMENT 1 > LOAD ENCROACHMENT 2 > LOAD ENCROACHMENT 3
Minimum positive-sequence voltage required Min. Voltage 25.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Impedance reach of the element Reach 1.00 0.01 Ohm [0.02 : 250.00]
Angle (Size of the blocking region) Angle 5 1 Deg [5 : 50]
Trip Time Pickup Delay 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
Reset Time Reset Delay 0.000 0.001 s [0.000 : 65.535]
The load encroachment element responds to the positive-sequence voltage and current and applies a characteristic
shown in the figure below.
Figure 5-22: Load encroachment characteristics

The element operates if the positive-sequence voltage is above a selectable level and asserts its output signal that can be
used to block selected protection elements such as distance or phase overcurrent.
Take into account that the time programmed in the overcurrent element must be higher than the time programmed in the
load encroachment function to avoid false tripping.
Load encroachment settings description:
Load Encroachment function: enable/disable the Load Encroachment function.
Min Voltage: This setting specifies the minimum positive-sequence voltage required for operation of the
element. If the voltage is below this threshold a blocking signal is not asserted by the
element.
Reach: This setting specifies the impedance reach of the element as shown in the load
encroachment characteristic diagram. This settings should be entered in secondary ohms
and be calculated as the positive-sequence impedance seen by the relay under maximum
load conditions.

Angle: This setting specifies the size of the blocking region as shown on the Load Encroachment
Characteristic diagram and applies to the positive sequence impedance.
Pickup Delay: This setting specifies the delay for the trip of Load Encroachment element. After this time
expires the signal Load Encroachment Operate is asserted.
Reset Delay: This setting specifies the time that the signal Pickup and operate are asserted after trip
conditions have been removed.
Snapshot events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this
element.
The Load Encroachment actual values can be viewed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Load Encroachment
Table 5-70: Load encroachment status
LOAD ENCROACHMENT STATUS

LOAD ENCR1 PKP
LOAD ENCR1 OP
LOAD ENCR2 PKP
LOAD ENCR2 OP
LOAD ENCR3 PKP
LOAD ENCR3 OP
The block signals for the Load Encroachment element can be viewed at: Actual> Status > Protection > Protection Blocks:
Table 5-71: Load encroachment blocks
LOAD ENCROACHMENT BLOCKS

LOAD ENCR1 BLOCK
LOAD ENCR2 BLOCK
LOAD ENCR3 BLOCK
There are three load encroachment type of signals:

Load Encroachment Block: Writing status. When this signal is asserted the Load Encroachment function is blocked until
this signal is eliminated and the positive sequence voltage is above the settable level programmed in the Min. Voltage
setting.
Load Encroachment pickup: Reading state. This state is asserted when the conditions for the operate are fulfilled.
Load Encroachment operate: Reading state. This state is asserted after the conditions for the operate are fulfilled at least
during the period of time programmed in the pickup delay setting.

5.5 CONTROL ELEMENTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
5.5 Control elements
The F650 incorporates the following control elements:

Setting Group
Synchrocheck (25)
Autoreclose (79)
Breaker Failure (50BF)
VT Fuse Failure
Pulse Counters
Digital Counters
Analog Comparators
Max Number of starts
Cold Load Pickup
PLC Timer mask
60 CTS Failure
2nd Harmonic Inhibit
Note: for all control elements related to the breaker, it must be considered that all operations are performed considering
the status of the switchgear configured as breaker. In Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear up to 16 switchgear
elements can be configured to operate and be monitored, but only one of them can be configured as a breaker, for
monitoring, number of openings and closings counters, (KI)2t.
5.5.1 Setting group

The settings used for setting table management are located in Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting Group:
Table 5-72: Setting group settings

Setpoint > Control Elements > setting Group
Active Group Active Group GROUP 1 N/A [GROUP 1 – GROUP 2 – GROUP 3 - GROUP 4 –
GROUP 5 – GROUP 6]
For more detailed information go to section 5.4.1 Available settings and setting groups

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.5 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.5.2 Synchronism check element - synchrocheck (25)

Note: The Switchgear element used in the F650 synchronism element is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setting inside Breaker settings, at “Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker Settings”.
WARNING
When testing this function do not forget that the relay must detect an open breaker to operate.
The synchronism element is used for monitoring the connection of two parts of the circuit by the close of a breaker. This
element verifies that voltages (V1 and V2) at both sides of the breaker are within the magnitude, angle and frequency limits
set by the user. V1 and V2 are the line and busbar voltage values measured by the relay.
Synchronism check (25) is defined as the comparison of the voltage difference of two circuits with different sources to be
either linked through an impedance element (transmission line, feeder, etc.), or connected through parallel circuits of
defined impedance (Figure 5-23: Synchromism check element) The voltage comparison between both sides of a breaker is
performed before closing the breaker, in order to minimize internal damage that can occur due to the voltage difference,
both in magnitude and angle. This is extremely important in steam generating plants, where reclosing output lines with
angle differences can lead to severe damage to the turbine axis.
Vs
52s 52r Vr
C/2 Zline C/2

25
ZParallel
Figure 5-23: Synchromism check element
The difference in voltage level and phase angle in a given moment is the result of the existing load between remote
sources connected through parallel circuits (load flux), as well as a consequence of the impedance of those elements
connecting them (even if there is no load flux in parallel circuits, or because sources to be connected are completely
independent and isolated from one another).
In interconnected systems, the angle difference between both ends of an open breaker is usually negligible, as its sources
are remotely connected through other elements (equivalent or parallel circuits). However, in isolated circuits as in the case
of an independent generator, the difference in angle, voltage levels and relative slip of voltage phasors can be very
important. It may happen that the relative slip of voltage values is very low or null so that they are rarely in phase. Luckily,
due to the changing conditions of a power system (connection-disconnection of loads, sources, and new inductive-
capacitive elements) the relative slip between phasors is not null and they can be synchronized.
In the first case, even if we must take into consideration the length of the line whose ends (sources) are connected for
determining the angle difference between them, this is not enough to fix the synchronism conditions before closing the
breaker. Experience tells us that the window of angle difference between voltage phasors must be fixed to a value of 15º-
20º.

5.5.2.1 Voltage inputs

In order to perform the synchronism check function, the F650 uses only one voltage from each end of the breaker. Voltage
values to be compared must be on the same basis, either phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltage; they must be the
same at both ends of the breaker; it is not possible to compare a phase-to-ground voltage at one end with a phase-to-
phase voltage at the other end.
Additionally, if on one end, three voltages have been connected, the necessary voltage on the other end for Function 25 is
only single-phase voltage. If there is only one voltage (either phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground) at both ends of the
breaker, this must be from the same phase in both cases.
The selection of voltage values to be used by the synchronism element is made in the relay General settings:
V1 is the line voltage, selectable from the relay voltage channels, using the “Frequency Reference” setting at Setpoint
> System Setup > General settings > Frequency Reference. (refer to the voltage correspondence Table 5-73: Voltage
correspondence element 25)
V2 is the busbar voltage measured at the auxiliary voltage input (terminals A11-A12). To enable the busbar voltage
metering in the relay, it is required to select VX in the Auxiliary Voltage setting at Setpoint > System Setup > General
settings > Auxiliary Voltage.
The voltage correspondence is detailed in the following table:
Table 5-73: Voltage correspondence element 25

VOLTAGE CORRESPONDENCE
Setpoint>System Setup>General settings>Frequency Reference VI VII VIII
Voltage selection for element 25 of F650
Setpoint>System Setup>General settings>Phase VT Connection=WYE Va-g Vb-g Vc-g
Phase-to-ground voltage connection.(Wye connection)
Setpoint>System Setup>General settings>Phase VT Connection=DELTA Va-b Vb-c Vc-a
Phase-to-phase voltage connection.(Delta connection).
Setpoint>System Setup>General settings> Vx
Auxiliary Voltage=Vx
Setpoint > System Setup > General settings > Auxiliary Voltage setting must be set to Vx, in order to monitor auxiliary
voltage instead of Vn (neutral voltage, coming from an open delta connection).
5.5.2.2 Application
Even if the application range of the F650 is quite wide and the element can be used in distribution lines at any voltage level,
it must be taken into account that it is a three-pole tripping relay, designed for managing a single breaker. This is why
F650 is not suitable for one and a half breaker configurations, or ring configurations where a transmission line or feeder
has two breakers.

5.5.2.3 Settings
There is only one synchrocheck element in the F650.
Setpoint > Control Elements > Synchrocheck

Dead bus voltage level Dead Bus Level 10.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Live bus voltage level Live Bus Level 50.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Dead line voltage level Dead Line Level 10.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Live line voltage level Live Line Level 50.00 0.01 V [0.00 : 300.00]
Voltage Difference Max Volt Difference 10.00 0.01 V [2.00 : 300.00]
Angle Difference Max Angle Difference 10.0 0.1 Deg [2.0 : 80.0]
Frequency Slip Max Freq Difference 20 10 mHz [10 : 5000]
Breaker Closing time Time 0.50 0.01 s [0.01 : 1.00]
Dead Line – Dead Bus Function permission DL-DB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Live Line – Dead Bus Function permission LL-DB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Dead Line – Live Bus Function permission DL-LB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Settings description for element 25:

Function permission (Function): This setting allows enabling and disabling the synchrocheck element.
Voltage Level determination settings for busbar and line:

This setting group allows determining the voltage levels considered as dead and live for line and busbar voltage.
Dead Bus voltage level (Dead Bus Level): Voltage level considered as dead bus
Live Bus voltage level (Live Bus Level): Voltage level considered as live bus
Dead Line voltage level (Dead Line Level): Voltage level considered as dead line
Live Line voltage level (Live Line Level): Voltage level considered as live line
Synchrocheck settings (live bus, live line):

F650 relays verify synchronism by establishing and comparing three basic parameters: the difference in module and angle
of voltage phasors, and the frequency slip of a phasor related to the other one. synchrocheck settings include a fourth time
setting, that allows using an anticipative algorithm to issue a closing signal.
Voltage Difference (Max Volt Difference): Maximum Difference in module between the line and busbar
voltage to allow a closing in the synchrocheck element.
Angle Difference (Max Angle Difference): Maximum Difference in angle between the line and busbar
voltage to allow a closing in the synchrocheck element.
Frequency Slip (Max Freq Difference): Maximum difference in frequency (slip) between both voltage
values to be compared in the synchrocheck element.
Breaker Closing time (Time): Estimated breaker Closing time, used for establishing the Closing
order in a moment that allows the busbar and line voltages to be
in phase.
This time is considered if the relative slip is higher than 20 mHz; in this case, an anticipative algorithm is
executed to calculate the closing signal with the necessary advance for the breaker effective Closing to be
produced when voltages are in phase. The limit for the anticipative algorithm is two times the maximum

angle difference. This means that if the product of the frequency slip multiplied by the breaker closing time
covers an angle greater than two times the maximum angle, closing is not allowed. For further information
see 5.5.4.5.
Closing permission logic settings:
In case that the voltage at one or both ends of the breaker is null, the synchronism element cannot establish the necessary
parameters to give closing conditions, and therefore it does not issue synchronism permission. For those situations where
the user wants to enable the closing permission in a condition of loss of one or both voltages at both ends of the breaker,
F650 elements incorporate closing permission logics for the cases of: dead line-dead bus, live line-dead bus and dead line-
live bus.
Dead line- Dead Bus Function permission (DL-DB Function): Enabling this Function allows issuing a
Closing permission signal in dead line and dead bus Condition (without voltage at both sides of the breaker).
Live line- Dead Bus Function permission (LL-DB Function): Enabling this Function allows to issue a Closing
permission signal in live line and dead bus Condition (without voltage at the sides of the breaker that
corresponds to the busbar voltage)
Dead line- Live Bus Function permission (DL-LB Function): Enabling this Function allows issuing a Closing
permission signal in live line and dead bus Condition (without voltage at the sides of the breaker that
corresponds to the line voltage).
Snapshot event: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element.
5.5.2.4 Synchrocheck states

Internal signals provided by the F650 (Actual> Status > Control Elements > Synchrocheck) for the synchronism element
are as follows:
Table 5-74: Synchrocheck internal states
SYNCHROCHECK ACTUAL VALUES
SYNCROCHECK BLK INP
SYNCROCHECK OP
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
SYNCROCHECK COND OP
DL-DB OPERATION
DL-LB OPERATION
LL-DB OPERATION
SLIP CONDITION
BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ
BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ
VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE
FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE
SYNCROCHECK BLK INP: Block signal for the synchrocheck element, configurable at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Control Elements
SYNCROCHECK OP: Closing permission signal in live line-live bus conditions with open breaker.
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM: General Closing permission of the Synchronism element. It contemplates all possible
situations, live line-live bus conditions, and the closing permission logics (dead line-
dead bus, live line- dead bus, dead line-live bus). Note: in case the Function is
disabled, the Closing permission signal is activated in order not to interfere with
possible logics where it is included. If the synchronism element is enabled, this signal
is only activated in the closing conditions established by setting.
SYNCROCHECK COND OP: Closing permission according to permission logics (DL-DB, LL-DB, DL-LB).
DL-DB OPERATION: Closing permission in dead line – dead bus condition.
DL-LB OPERATION: Closing permission in dead line – live bus condition.

LL-DB OPERATION: Closing permission in live line – dead bus condition.

SLIP CONDITION: Internal signal indicating frequency slip between the line voltage and bus voltage
phasors.
BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ: Busbar Frequency higher than line frequency
BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ: Busbar Frequency lower than line frequency
VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE: Voltage difference in Volts between line and busbar
FREQ. DIFFERENCE: Frequency difference in Hz between line and busbar
Voltage and frequency values for the line and busbar can be obtained, both in primary and secondary values at:
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Voltage
VBB Primary (KV) Busbar voltage in primary values
VL Primary (KV) Line voltage in primary values
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Voltage
Line Voltage (V) Line voltage in secondary values
Bus Voltage (V) Busbar voltage in secondary values
Actual> Metering > Frequency

Line Frequency (Hz) Line frequency in Hz
Bus Frequency (Hz) Bus frequency in Hz
The voltage angles can be obtained in primary metering values (Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Voltage), being the
line voltage angle, the one that corresponds to the voltage set in the frequency reference in General settings (refer to the
voltage correspondence table (Table 5-73: Voltage correspondence element 25), and the angle of the busbar voltage the
one that corresponds to Vx Angle, when the Auxiliary Voltage setting as been selected as VX.
5.5.2.5 Algorithm
F650 elements perform the synchronism check by basically establishing and comparing three parameters:
Module difference of voltage phasors DV (V)
Phase angle of voltage phasors Dj (º)
Frequency slip between two phasors S (Hz)
These parameters are continuously determined and managed once that element 25 has been enabled by setting, and
in open breaker conditions. It is necessary to consider that all calculations are made once the open breaker condition is
detected; if the breaker is closed or undefined, the synchronism element does not issue a closing permission signal, even
when closing conditions are met.
If voltage on one side of the breaker to be closed is null, the synchronism element cannot establish the synchronism check,
and therefore it does not issue synchronism permission. For these cases, usual in breaker maintenance situations, or in
new installations where voltage might not be present, but the breaker operation needs to be verified, F650 elements
incorporate closing permission logics for situations of:
Dead Line – Dead Bus (DL-DB)
Live Line – Dead Bus (LL-DB)
Dead Line – Live Bus (DL-LB)
In order to establish the closing permission signal, the first parameter used by the algorithm is the difference in magnitude
between line and bus voltages, and afterwards, the angle difference and frequency slip are verified.
Voltage Difference DV

Comparing the voltage values for line voltage (V1) and busbar voltage (V2) at both sides of the breaker, the relay can
determine the synchronism situation of the element (see Table 5-75: Synchronism conditions).
Being:
V1 line voltage
V2 bus voltage
VL Minimum acceptable voltage by setting to establish synchronism conditions (dead line and bus levels).
VH Appropriate voltage to establish synchronism conditions, configured by setting (live line and bus levels).
Table 5-75: Synchronism conditions

Synchronism Situation Synchronism check Closing logic Line voltage levels Busbar voltage levels
(1) VL < (V1 & V2)< VH Not permitted Not permitted V1 > dead line level V2 > dead bus level
V1 < live line level V2 < live bus level
(2) (V1 & V2) > VH Permitted Live Line – Live Bus V1 > live line level V2 > live bus level
(3) (V1 & V2) < VL Not permitted Dead Line – Dead Bus V1 < dead line level V2 < dead bus level
(4) (V1 < VL) & (VL< V2 < VH) Not permitted Not permitted V1 < dead line level V2 > dead bus level
V2 < live bus level
(5) (V2 < VL) & (VL < V1 < VH) Not permitted Not permitted V1 > dead line level V2 < dead bus level
V1 < live line level
(6) (V1 < VL) & (V2 > VH) Not permitted Dead Line – Live Bus V1 < dead line level V2 > live bus level
(7) (V2 < VL) & (V1 > VH) Not permitted Live Line – Dead Bus V1 > live line level V2 < dead bus level
Table 5-75: Synchronism conditions shows the different synchrocheck and closing logic situations, that can be produced
depending on the line and busbar voltage levels.
Live Line – Live Bus (Synchronism check): Only in case number (2), with live line and live bus, the element starts evaluating
the line and busbar voltage comparison with respect to the setting DVset established
by setting (Max Volt Difference). In this case, if the voltage difference is lower than
DVset, the synchronism check element (25) verifies the angle difference Dj adjusted
by setting (Max Angle Difference).
Dead Line – Dead Bus (DL - DB): Case number (3) does not allow the synchronism function, but it does allow DL-DB
operation logic, if this logic is enabled by setting (DL-DB Function).
Dead Line – Live Bus (DL - LB): Case number (6) does not allow the synchronism function, but it does allow DL-LB
Operation logic, if this logic is enabled by setting (DL-LB Function)
Live Line – Dead Bus (LL - DB): Case number (7) does not allow the synchronism function, but it does allow LL-DB
operation logic, if this logic is enabled by setting (LL-DB Function)
Case numbers (1), (4) and (5) are not considered neither for synchronism check purposes, nor for closing logic.

Phase Angle Difference Dj

In the live line-live bus Condition, once the voltage difference has been successfully verified in magnitude, the system
establishes the angle difference between both voltage phasors. If the angle difference is lower than the Djset (Max Angle
Difference) setting, then the system verifies the frequency slip S (Max Freq Difference).
set
actua
VH
VL
V1 V2
Figure 5-24: Voltage angle difference
In the live-live bus condition, once the voltage difference has been successfully verified in magnitude, the relative
frequency slip between phasors is calculated. From the information obtained from the relay, the algorithm knows the slip
(mHz) of both phasors,and it takes as reference (VRef) the lowest frequency phasor. The behaviour of the algorithm
depends on the slip frequency and the breaker close time as follows:
1. If the relative slip, ∆f, is equal or lower than 20 mHz, the algorithm gives permission to close as soon as the angle
difference is slower than the ∆?set (Max Angle Difference), because at such a low speed, the hold time for getting an
“in-phase” closing permission would be too long.
2. If the relative slip is higher than 20 mHz, the element performs an anticipative algorithm, determining the right
moment to give the closing command to the breaker, so that the breaker closes when the line and busbar voltages are
in phase. When the difference between voltage values equals “two times” the set angle as maximum angle difference
(∆V = ∆Vset), the anticipative algorithm starts running and uses the set breaker closing time to establish the initiation
of permission, so that it is executed in the moment when both voltage phasors are completely in phase, thus
minimizing the voltage difference in the breaker chamber to negligible values. The main benefit is that after a
considerable number of breaker operations, damage to internal connection elements, as well as to the chamber
isolating element is drastically reduced, ensuring a longer life for the breaker, and reducing costly maintenance
operations.
3. If the product of frequency slip and breaker closing time is higher than Max Angle difference and lower than two times
this setting, as an in phase close is not possible, the algorithm ensures that the difference between voltages in the real
closing moment is not higher than the set value (Max Volt Difference).
4. If this product is beyond two times Max Angle difference, closing operation is not allowed.

The Closing process using anticipative algorithm is described on the following figure:
VRef V’s V
Figure 5-25: Anticipative algorithm

Where:
Vref Referenced phasor (the one with lower frequency)
Vs Actual voltage phasor (the one with lower frequency)
V’s Calculated voltage phasor, depending on the set breaker closing time (anticipative algorithm)
j 360º *TCB *Df = Calculated angle for phasor V’s
TCB Breaker Closing time defined by setting
Df Frequency slip (mHz) between phasors
j1 Angle difference set as maximum angle difference (Djset , Max Angle Difference)
j2 = Angle difference between Vref and Vs. The algorithm starts operating when j2 equals two times the angle
set as maximum angle difference.
Closing permission is given when V’s is over Vref, which means that line and busbar voltages are in phase.
If the frequency slip is high, it is possible that as soon as the window defined by two times the maximum angle difference
(j2) is entered, the relay produces a closing permission output, if it is guaranteed that the projected phasor is within the limit
marked by the setting, as shown in the following figure. Besides, when the product of frequency slip and breaker close
time goes beyond this window, closing is not allowed.
1 1
VRef
V’s
V
Figure 5-26: High slip closing permission signal

5.5.3 Autoreclose (79)

Note: The Switchgear element used in the F650 autoreclose element is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setting inside Breaker settings, at “Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker settings”. Configuration of these
Switchgear parameters is performed at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear using the EnerVista 650 Setup
software.
The F650 autoreclose element produces up to four breaker “shots” prior to lockout. Thanks to the great flexibility of F650
configurable logic, the conditions to produce the autoreclose initiation and the selection of protection elements is enabled
after each shot can be programmed. This flexibility allows implementing protection schemes that used to require wiring
and special functions in conventional equipment. One application is, for instance, programming as instantaneous the first
protection trip while the second one is time delayed, in order to give time for output fuses to burning of a feeder branch.
This can be as simple as disabling the instantaneous elements after the first shot using programmable logic. (see example
in section 5.5.3.5 Logic for blocking protection functions during reclose cycle)
5.5.3.1 Main autoreclose settings
Setpoint > Control Elements > Autoreclose

Maximum Number of shots Max Number Shots 1 N/A [1 : 4]
Dead time 1 Dead Time 1 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reclaim time or reset lockout delay Reclaim Time 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reclose conditions permission Cond. Permission DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Hold time Hold Time 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Time 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Autoreclose settings description:

Function: This setting allows enabling or disabling the autoreclose operation. If this setting is adjusted as
DISABLED, the recloser is out of service.
Max Number Shots: This setting specifies the number of autoreclose shots allowed in the element. If this number is
exceeded, the autoreclose goes to LOCKOUT status, and the fault is considered to be permanent.
Dead Time 1 ... 4: These times correspond to the first, second, third and fourth breaker reclosings configured in the
element.
Reclaim Time (also known as safety time or reset lockout delay): This is the time required to go from LOCKOUT to
READY status once the breaker is closed.
Cond. Permission: This setting enables the verification of the relay reclose conditions. If this setting is enabled, before
the breaker closing command execution the system verifies the possible reclose conditions. If this
setting is disabled, the closing command is executed after the reclose time without verifying these
conditions. The reclose conditions input is configured as AR CONDS INPUT at Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements
Hold Time: This setting indicates the waiting time for the reclose conditions to be present. This setting is only
operative if the Cond. Permission setting is enabled.
Reset Time: This is the time that the autoreclose takes to return to READY status after a successful reclose. Once
this time has expired, the shot counter resets and the autoreclose goes to READY.

5.5.3.2 Autoreclose inputs

For the correct operation of the autoreclose element, it is required to configure several input signals in the Relay. These
signals can be configured using the EnerVista 650 Setup software, at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements. The Protection Elements screen allows to select simple signals provided directly by the relay (states), or to use
more complex logics using virtual outputs, configured at Setpoint > Logic Configuration using the PLC Editor tool inside
EnerVista 650 Setup.
Actual> Status > Control Elements > Autoreclose

Table 5-76: 79 configurable inputs
AUTORECLOSE INPUTS
AR LEVEL BLOCK
AR PULSE BLOCK
AR PULSE UNBLOCK
AR INITIATE
AR CONDS INPUT
AR LEVEL BLOCK: This signal is configured to block the autoreclose by level; when the block signal disappears, the
recloser goes to Lockout status before returning to either the READY status, or the corresponding
status in the reclosing cycle.
AR PULSE BLOCK: This signal is configured to block the autoreclose by pulse; a pulse moves the autoreclose to
BLOCK status. The autoreclose block is active until an unblock signal is received.
AR PULSE UNBLOCK: This signal is configured as autoreclose unblock by pulse; this pulse is required to bring the
recloser out of the block status. The autoreclose goes to Lockout after a block situation.
AR INITIATE: This signal indicates the autoreclose initiation. Usually, the factory default configuration sets this
signal as a combination of the general trip signal (Virtual Output 83), and an external input
configured as AR Initiate.
AR CONDS INPUT: This signal configures the conditions that are to be met before executing a breaker close
command. These conditions are verified once the configured Dead Time has expired, and they
are only considered if the Cond. Permission setting is enabled. Otherwise, these conditions
wouldn’t have any effect. In the default factory configuration, the conditions input is associated
with the synchronism check element close permission.

5.5.3.3 Autoreclose internal status

Actual> Status > Control Elements > Autoreclose. These signals can be used as conditions for executing logics in the
relay; they are also useful to know the autoreclose behavior.
Table 5-77: 79 internal status

AUTORECLOSE SINGLE STATUS AUTORECLOSE ENUMERATED STATUS
AR CLOSE BREAKER AR STATUS
AR OUT OF SERVICE AR READY
AR READY AR LOCKOUT
AR LOCKOUT AR BLOCK
AR BLOCK AR RCL IN PROGRESS
AR RCL IN PROGRESS AR LOCKOUT MODE
AR LCK BY ANOMALY AR LCK BY ANOMALY
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE
AR LCK BY USER AR LCK BY USER
AR LCK BY CONDS AR LCK BY CONDS
AR LCK BY TRIPS AR LCK BY TRIPS
AR LCK BY SHOTS AR LCK BY SHOTS
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT AR BLOCK MODE
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT AR BLOCK BY LEVEL
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT AR BLOCK BY PULSE
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL
AR BLOCK BY PULSE
Description of autoreclose internal status:

AR CLOSE BREAKER Breaker close command given by the autoreclose
AR OUT OF SERVICE Autoreclose out of service (Disabled)
AR READY Autoreclose in service
AR LOCKOUT Autoreclose in lockout status (finished cycled-definite trip)
AR BLOCK Autoreclose blocked (by input, logic, others, etc.).
AR RCL IN PROGRESS Cycle in course (autoreclose in progress).
AR LCK BY ANOMALY Autoreclose in “Lockout” by anomaly.
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN Autoreclose in “Lockout” by failure to open
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE Autoreclose in “Lockout” by failure to close
AR LCK BY USER Autoreclose in “Lockout” by user Command; manual breaker close during the autoreclose cycle
AR LCK BY CONDS Autoreclose in lockout by non-compliance of the autoreclose conditions
AR LCK BY TRIPS Autoreclose in “Lockout” by maximum number of trips (Lockout status not available)
AR LCK BY SHOTS Autoreclose in “Lockout” at the end of cycle – Definite trip (due to Maximum Number of shots
reached).
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT Block signal sent by the autoreclose after the first shot
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT Block signal sent by the autoreclose after the second shot
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT Block signal sent by the autoreclose after the third shot
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT Block signal sent by the autoreclose after the fourth shot
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL Autoreclose blocked by level. See AR block signals configuration (AR LEVEL BLOCK)

AR BLOCK BY PULSE Autoreclose blocked by pulse. See AR block signals configuration (AR PULSE BLOCK)
AR STATUS Autoreclose status (see Table 5-77: 79 internal status)
AR LOCKOUT MODE Autoreclose lockout mode (see Table 5-77: 79 internal status)
AR BLOCK MODE Autoreclose block mode (see Table 5-77: 79 internal status)
5.5.3.4 General autoreclose staus diagram

The following diagram describes the different autoreclose states, as well as the transitions between states.
Figure 5-27: General autoreclose status diagram
Description of the general autoreclose status:

OUT OF SERVICE / AR DISABLE
In this status, the autoreclose is disabled. From any state, if the Function setting is set as DISABLED, the autoreclose moves
to OUT OF SERVICE status, where it is not operative.
AR READY
This is the initiation and normality situation status: closed breaker. There are neither faults producing a autoreclose
initiation nor Block signal.
If the autoreclose was in LOCKOUT, if the breaker is closed and the time set in Reclaim Time setting expires, the
autoreclose goes to the initial status of READY.
From RECLOSE IN PROGRESS, the recloser moves to READY, if the Reset Time setting expires without any autoreclose
initiation condition.
AR RECLOSE IN PROGRESS

From READY status, a reclose initiation sets the cycle counter to 1 and a reclosing sequence is initiated which
sproduce breaker close commands, unless any abnormality is produced that makes the autoreclose go to LOCKOUT
status.
The reclosing sequence consists on the following steps:
Wait until the breaker is open, if the waiting exceeds the Fail to Open Time setting, the autoreclose goes to LOCKOUT
by failure of opening status (AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN).
Once the breaker is open, it waits for the time set in the Dead Time N setting, N being the number of the cycles in
progress. If during this waiting the breaker is closed or reclose initiation conditions are given, the recloser goes to
LOCKOUT status by anomaly (AR LCK BY ANOMALY).
Once the Dead Time has expired, in case the Conditions Permission setting is disabled, a closing command would be
produced. If the conditions permission setting is enabled, the system waits for the conditions fixed in the conditions
input (AR CONDS INPUT) configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements; if the waiting period for
the reclosing conditions signal activation exceeds the Hold Time, the autoreclose goes to Lockout status by
conditions (AR LCK BY CONDS).
The autoreclose gives a Closing command and waits for the breaker to close. If the Fail to Close Time setting is
exceeded, the autoreclose goes to lockout by failure to close (AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE).
At this point, the diagram indicates that a reclosing cycle has been reached, and so the cycle counter is increased. In this
time, the period set in Reset Time starts to count. If during the set element reset time there is no autoreclose initiation, the
cycle counter resets to its initial value (1), and the autoreclose returns to the standby status (READY). If during the Reset
Time setting period, there is a new autoreclose initiation, the Reclose In Progress sequence starts again. If this reclose is
produced after the last configured cycle in the Maximum Number of Shots setting, the autorecloser goes to Lockout by
maximum number of shots (AR LCK BY SHOTS).
AR LOCKOUT
This is a safety status, scheme lockout blocks all phases of the reclosing cycle, preventing automatic reclosure.
From the out of service (AR DISABLE) and BLOCK statuses, the autoreclose stays in LOCKOUT prior to going to READY.
From the RECLOSE IN PROGRESS status, the recloser goes to LOCKOUT status if any of the anomalies described above
occur.
To go from the LOCKOUT status to READY it is necessary that the breaker is closed and stays closed for preset time in
Reclaim Time setting.
AR BLOCK
The BLOCK status is similar to the LOCKOUT status, as it guarantees that if the autoreclose is in Block, no breaker close
command is produced, but the difference between them is that this Block status is reached by an external action. The
autoreclose block can be configured by pulse or level signals. This configuration must be selected at Setpoint > Relay
When the autoreclose block signal is deactivated, either by a level change in the set signal (in case of block by level) or
by an Unblock pulse (in case of block by pulse), the block status is abandoned and the autoreclose returns to the
Lockout status.
Configurable signals to block the autorecloser are described in section 5.5.3.2 Autoreclose inputs.
5.5.3.5 Logic for blocking protection functions during reclose cycle

The F650 autoreclose generates a series of internal signals that allow performing block logics for Protection elements
during the reclosing cycle. These signals are blocks after autoreclose shots (BLK AFTER SHOT). For example, if the user
wants to block a protection element during the complete reclosing cycle, it is necessary to configure a signal as an OR of
the four blocking signals provided after each reclosing cycle in the logic configuration tool Setpoint > Logic Configuration,
and then use it to block the desired protection elements at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements.
Figure 5-28: clock signal suring reclose cycleshows an example of the logic configuration for the block signal during the
reclosing cycle.

Figure 5-28: clock signal suring reclose cycle
Figure 5-29: Reclose initiation and block signals configuration example shows an example of the autoreclose initiation and
protection element block signals after the different trips. The autoreclose initiate signal is configured to the relay general
trip that corresponds to virtual output 83 configured in the logic configuration tool, and a physical contact to generate an
external autoreclose initiation.
In the example shown on the figure, the 50PH element block signal is configured as a combination of block by digital input,
block by non-trip permission of the directional element, and finally the element remains blocked during the reclosing
cycle. This means that only the first trip can be executed by the phase instantaneous overcurrent element; after the first
reclose trip, the element remains blocked until the end of the cycle.
Figure 5-29: Reclose initiation and block signals configuration example

5.5.4 Breaker failure element (50BF)

Note: The Switchgear element used in the Breaker Failure element is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setting, inside Breaker settings at SETPOINT > PROTECTION ELEMENT > SETTING GROUP X > Breaker > Breaker settings
The breaker failure element is used to determine when a trip command sent to a breaker has not been executed within a
selectable delay. Most commonly it is a failure to open from the tripped breaker. In the event of a breaker failure, the 50BF
element must issue a signal that trips the rest of breakers connected at that time to the same busbar, and that can provide
fault current.
Comparing the current measured by the Relay with a setting level makes breaker failure detection. If after receiving a
breaker initiate signal, the current level is maintained over the set level for a time period longer than the set time, this
indicates that the breaker that has received the opening command has not been able to open and clear the fault. The relay
would issue the corresponding breaker failure signal.
F650 elements incorporate 2 levels of current and time, together with a trip without current element, and an internal arc
detection element.
The breaker failure Initiate signal is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements. In the BRK
FAILURE INITIATE input, the user must select the desired signal for the breaker failure initiation.
The following table describes the breaker failure element settings: Setpoint > Control Elements > Breaker Failure
Table 5-78: 50BF element settings
Setpoint > Control Elements > Breaker Failure
Supervision (retrip) pickup level Supervision Pickup 1.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Hiset pickup level Hiset Pickup 5.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Lowset pickup level Lowset Pickup 2.00 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Internal arc pickup level Internal Arc Pickup 0.10 0.01 A [0.05 : 160.00]
Internal arc time delay Internal Arc Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Retrip time delay Supervision Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Hiset time delay HiSet Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Lowset time delay LowSet Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Second stage time delay 2nd Step Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
WITHOUT current element time delay No Current Delay 10.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Settings description for breaker failure element:

Function permission (Function): This setting allows enabling and disabling the 50BF element
Supervision or retrip pickup level (Supervision Pickup): Supervision level pickup current threshold
Hiset pickup level (Hiset Pickup): High-level pickup current threshold.
Lowset pickup level (Loset Pickup): Low level pickup current threshold.
Internal arc pickup level (Internal Arc Pickup): Internal arc element pickup current threshold.
Internal arc time delay (Internal Arc Delay): Time delay applied to the internal arc element
Supervision or Retrip time delay (Supervision Delay): Time delay applied to the supervision or retrip element.
High-level time delay (Hiset Delay): Time delay applied to the high level element.
Low-level time delay (Lowset Delay): Time delay applied to the low level element.
2nd step time delay (2nd Step Delay): Time delay applied to the breaker failure second step.
No current element time delay (No Current Delay): Time delay applied to the trip without current element.
Signals relative to breaker failure provided by the relay can be viewed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Breaker
Failure, and they are as follows:

Table 5-79: Breaker failure status

BREAKER FAILURE STATUS
BKR FAIL INITIATE
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT
BKR FAIL SUPERVISION
BKR FAIL HISET
BKR FAIL LOWSET
INTERNAL ARC
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP
BKR FAIL INITIATE External signal for breaker failure initiation. (Configurable at settings> Relay
Configuration > Protection Elements).
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT Signal for breaker failure without current
BKR FAIL SUPERVISION Signal for supervision level breaker failure (retrip)
BKR FAIL HISET Signal for high-level breaker failure
BKR FAIL LOWSET Signal for low-level breaker failure
INTERNAL ARC Signal for internal arc
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP Signal for Second level breaker failure (high and low)

The following figure shows the logic scheme for the breaker failure element:
HI
HI
HI
LO
LO
LO
Figure 5-30: Logic scheme for 50BF

The breaker failure element has three levels. The first one is called “Retrip” or “Supervision”. This operation level can be
used to give a signal to the breaker on which the initial opening has been executed. This is sometimes a usual practice; 50
milliseconds after the trip signal, a retrip signal is sent to the breaker.
Besides the supervision or retrip level, there are two additional levels, known as “Hiset” and “Lowset”. These two levels,
together with their time delays, allow executing complex protection schemes. Additionally to these two supervision levels,
there is a second time stage called “second step”.
Operation of breaker failure elements by level (supervision, hi set and lo set) is produced when the current level is higher
than the set current for the pickup of each level during the time set in the corresponding delay setting.
High and low levels constitute a second step level; for the pickup of this second level, only the pickup of any of the two
levels (hiset and loset) is required. For the element pickup to dropout it is required that the current is under the pickup levels
of both hiset and loset settings. Once the second level time delay has expired, a “Second Step” trip signal is issued.
50BF element incorporates also a no current tripping element, and an internal arc element. The no-current trip element is
governed only by the status of the breaker auxiliary contact; once the external breaker failure initiation signal is received,
if the breaker status does not change to open during the set time in the element (No Current Delay), the corresponding
breaker failure signal is issued (BKR FAIL NO CURRENT),
The internal arc element inside the breaker failure element is independent from the external breaker failure signal; this
element is used to detect arcing produced with an open breaker; if a higher current that the set level is detected during a
period that is longer than the set delay for the element (Internal Arc Delay), and the breaker is open, the corresponding
internal arc signal is issued (INTERNAL ARC).

5.5.5 VT fuse failure element (VTFF)

Note: The Switchgear element used in the VT Fuse Failure element is the one configured in the Number of Switchgear
setting, inside Breaker settings at Setpoint > Protection Element > Setting Group X > Breaker > Breaker Settings. This
switchgear must have previously been configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear
The fuse failure detector is used to block protection elements that can operate incorrectly due to a partial or total voltage
loss. This loss can be caused by the voltage transformers secondary circuit protection fuse failure.
Setpoint > Control Elements > VT Fuse Failure

The fuse failure element has only two settings, one to enable or disable the element and the other to enable or disable the
snapshot event generation.
The fuse failure signal provided by the element (VT FUSE FAILURE) can be monitored at Actual> Status > Control Elements
>VT Fuse Failure
5.5.5.1 Fuse failure algorithm

To detect different types of fuses failures, it is necessary to use different detection methods. In example, a fuse failure
indication with loss of one or two voltage phases provides a significant level of negative sequence voltage, instead of a loss
of all voltage phases which causes a very low positive sequence voltage, but any negative sequence voltage.
F650 elements detect fuse failure under three possible situations:
(1)Breaker closed and positive sequence voltage (V1) under an established value (V1<0.5 p.u.).
(2)Positive sequence voltage lower than 0.5 p.u (V1<0.5 p.u.) and positive sequence current higher than 0.075 p.u. (I1>0.075
p.u.).
(3)Ratio between the negative and positive voltage components (V2/V1) higher than 0.25.
With the activation of any of the three previous signals during a period longer than 80 ms, the fuse failure signal (VT FUSE
FAILURE) is activated. Once this signal is activated, it is latched until whatever caused it disappears; for this purpose the
following condition must be met:
(4)Positive sequence voltage higher than 0.75 p.u and positive sequence current lower than 0.05 p.u.
The fuse failure signal can be used to issue an alarm and/or to block elements that may operate incorrectly due to a
partial or total loss of voltage. Protection elements that are usually blocked by the fuse failure signal are voltage restraint
overcurrent elements, and directional elements. To configure the block of these elements it is necessary to enter the
Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements” menu and select as block input for protection elements, the fuse
failure operation signal.

Figure 5-31: Fuse failure element block diagram
5.5.6 Pulse counters

The F650 includes eight pulse counters, each pulse counter stores the activation number to that pulse counter. This value
can be multiplied for a factor selectable by setting.
The inputs used in this pulse counter function can be selected from all the available in the F650 device. Take into account
that the input/output settings are both set for the generic input as well as for the pulse counter input, e.g. Debounce time.
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > PULSE COUNTERS

Pulse counter enabling setting CntPulses Enabled X DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Name of the pulse counter CntPulses Name X Pulse Counter X N/A N/A
Multiplier factor for the pulse counter CntPulses Factor X 1.000 0.001 [0.000 : 65000.000]
Overflow value for the pulse counter CntPulses Overflow X 65535 1 [0 : 1000000]
Board selection for the pulse counter CntPulses Board Origin X F N/A [F,G,H,I]
Input index inside the selected board CntPulses Input Origin X 1 1 [1 : 32]
Note: X is the pulse counter index, up to 8.
Pulse Counters settings are:

CntPulses Enabled: Enable/disable each pulse counter.
CntPulses Name: Each pulse counter can have a configurable user name.
CntPulses Factor: This is the factor multiplier applied to the input activations number stored in the
pulse counter, providing possibilities to adjust the obtained value to any scale. It the
"CntPulses Factor X" is set to zero it takes no effect.
CntPulses Overflow: It is the maximum value set as result of the CntPulses Factor plus the number of
inputs activation. This means that after reaching that value, the pulse counter value
starts counting from zero.
CntPulses Board Origin: Board selection for the pulse counter input.

CntPulses Input Origin: Index of the input select in the board origin.
The signals related to the 8 pulse counters can be viewed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Pulse Counters and
they are as follows:
Table 5-80: Pulse counters status
PULSE COUNTERS STATUS

CntPulses Value 1
CntPulses Value 2
CntPulses Value 3
CntPulses Value 4
CntPulses Value 5
CntPulses Value 6
CntPulses Value 7
CntPulses Value 8
CntPulses Freeze 1
CntPulses Freeze 2
CntPulses Freeze 3
CntPulses Freeze 4
CntPulses Freeze 5
CntPulses Freeze 6
CntPulses Freeze 7
CntPulses Freeze 8
The F650 includes eight different pulse counters in which the value shown is the result of the number of activation of the
input configured for that counter multiplied plus the CntPulses Factor set for that pulse. For each pulse counter there are
two magnitudes available, the actual value and the frozen value.
The freeze and unfreeze and reset operations are similar to the energy management, the signals used for that purpose are
the same for both energy and pulse counters.
By default, all the values are unfreeze, updating the values in a continuous mode. After a freeze operation the freeze value
stops updating and the actual value is being updated. If a freeze operation is set again, the actual value is copied to the
freeze one, which remains frozen again.
To unfreeze all the values it is necessary to perform an unfreeze operation.
If a reset operation is set, all the values, actual and frozen ones goes to zero.
All the operations (freeze, unfreeze and reset) are performed over all the energy counters (both energy and pulse counters).
It is not possible to set them to a particular counter.

5.5.7 Analog comparators

The F650 provides 20 different analog comparators in an analog comparator module located in the control elements part
of the device. Each analog comparator gives indication when the analog variable selected is inside or outside some
minimum and maximum threshold values.
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > ANALOG COMPARATORS

Generic Analog Function Permission Analog Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Generic Snapshot Events Generation Analog Snapshot Events DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Analog Input Value Selection Analog Input X None N/A [All available analog values]
Analog Maximum Threshold Value Analog Maximum X 1.000 0.001 [-100000.000 : 100000.000]
Analog Minimum Threshold Value Analog Minimum X 1.000 0.001 [-100000.000 : 100000.000]
Analog Delay for Activation Signal Analog Delay X 0.00 0.01 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Analog Hysteresis for the Deadband Analog Hysteresis X 1.0 0.1 [0.0 : 50.0]
Analog Direction for Activation Inside Analog Direction X Out N/A [IN-OUT]
or Outside the Deadband
Note: X is the analog comparator index, up to 20
The analog comparator settings includes two global settings such as

Analog Function: This setting allows enabling or disabling the analog comparators module. Each analog
comparator can not be enabled/disabled individually.
Analog Snapshot Events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element.
Besides the main settings there are some settings for each analog comparator (up to 20) as
follows:
Analog Input: Analog value selected by the user from the available analog variables in the device. This is
used to make the comparison inside a set band for that magnitude.
Analog Maximum: Maximum threshold value for the comparison band.
Analog Minimum: Minimum threshold value for the comparison band.
Analog Delay: Time value for the analog signal to be active inside the comparison band before setting the
Analog Level signal to 1.
Analog Hysteresis: It establishes the deadband at each extreme when going out of operation band.
Direction IN: min value = min - hysteresis (in %)
max value = max + hysteresis (in %)
Direction OUT: min value = min + hysteresis (in %)
max value = max - hysteresis (in %)
Analog Direction: Analog direction for the activation signal to be set Inside or Outside the Deadband.
OUT: The "Analog Level X" gives an activation signal when the analog value is located outside the
comparison band.
IN: The "Analog Level X" gives an activation signal when the analog value is located inside the
comparison band.
The F650 provides 20 different analog comparators. Their status values can be viewed at Actual> Status > Control
Elements > Analog Comparators:

Table 5-81: Analog comparator status
ANALOG COMPARATORS STATUS

Analog Level 01
Analog Level 02
Analog Level 03
Analog Level 04
Analog Level 05
Analog Level 06
Analog Level 07
Analog Level 08
Analog Level 09
Analog Level 10
Analog Level 11
Analog Level 12
Analog Level 13
Analog Level 14
Analog Level 15
Analog Level 16
Analog Level 17
Analog Level 18
Analog Level 19
Analog Level 20
The analog level value is by default in a reset state, when the value meets the comparison (inside or outside the
comparison band) the "Analog Level X" signal is activated if the analog value remains active the time set in the analog
delay setting. When the activation conditions are not met the "Analog Level X" value goes to the reset state.
An analog change must remain active at least 40 ms to be considered, plus the analog time setting. Besides the snapshot
event data has a 20 ms accuracy.
5.5.8 Maximum number of starts (66)

technical characteristics
Metering algorithm Fundamental
Tripping time accuracy ±250 ms or 5% whichever is greater
Full load Amps 0.5 to 10.0 A in steps of 0.1
Breaker supervision Selectable by settings
Min. Stop time 0.0 to 900.0s in steps of 0.1
Number of starts 0 to 10 in steps of 1
Time to restart 0 to 100 minutes in steps of 1
Reset Counter Selectable by settings
Snapshot events Selectable by settings
Operate time <45ms at 50Hz, typically
For F650 with firmware version below 7.XX, the special model F650 MOD003 relay incorporates a maximum number of
starts function (66) to prevent operators from jogging the motor (multiple starts and stops performed in rapid succession).
For F650 with firmware version 7.XX this element is included in standard models (No special model (MOD) is required)
A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the F650 measures the transition of the motor current from below 5% of
FLA to some value above 7% of FLA. Breaker status can also be used to detect motor starts. At this point, one of the Starts/
Hour timers is loaded with 60 minutes. Even unsuccessful start attempts are logged as starts for this feature. Once the

motor is stopped, the number of starts within the past hour is compared to the number of starts allowable. If the two
numbers are the same, a block occurs. If a block occurs, the lockout time is equal to the longest time elapsed since a start
within the past hour, subtracted from one hour.
The time to Restart feature may be used to ensure that a certain amount of time passes between stopping a motor and
restarting that motor. This timer feature may be very useful for some process applications or motor considerations. If a
motor is on a down-hole pump, after the motor stops, the liquid may fall back down the pipe and spin the rotor backwards.
It would be very undesirable to start the motor at this time. In another scenario, a motor may be driving a very high inertia
load. Once the supply to the motor is disconnected, the rotor may continue to turn for a long period of time as it
decelerates. The motor has now become a generator and applying supply voltage out of phase may result in catastrophic
failure.
The Restart Block feature is strictly a timer. The F650 does not sense rotor rotation.
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > MAX. NUMBERS OF STARTS

Function Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED- ENABLED]
Motor Full Load Current Full Load Amps 5.0 0.1 A [0.5: 10.0]
Stop condition supervised Breaker DISABLED N/A [DISABLED- ENABLED]
by breaker Supervision
Min. Stop Time 0.0 0.1s [0.0: 900.0]
Number of Starts per tour Number of Starts 5 1 [0: 100]
Reset counter setting Reset Counter DISABLED N/A [DISABLED- ENABLED]
Snapshot Event Generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED- ENABLED]
NOTE 1: A zero value in the number of starts disables the unit
NOTE 2: The reset counter setting can be enabled to set the motor starting count to zero
Maximum number of starts settings description:

Function: This setting allows enabling or disabling the Maximum numbers of starts function.
Full Load Amps.: This setting must be set with the current at full load of the motor in running conditions.
Breaker Supervision: This setting specifies if the element must consider the motor is stopped when the unit detects that
the breaker is open. If the Breaker supervision is DISABLED, the motor is considered to be stopped when the average
current of the three phases is below 5% of the value set for “Full Load Amps” during at least the period of time
programmed in “Min Stop time”. A motor start-up is detected when, being the motor stopped (according to the above
consideration), the average current of three phases rises above 7% of FLA. If the Breaker supervision is ENABLED, the
motor is considered to be stopped when the unit detects that the breaker is open. A motor start-up is detected when the
breaker is closed.
Min Stop Time: As has been related before, this setting must be configured with the time that this units has to detect the
average current below 5%of FLA, before considering that the motor is stopped.
Number of starts: Once the motor is stopped, the number of starts within the past hour is compared to the number of
starts allowable. If the two values are the same, an inhibit occurs. If an inhibit occurs, the lockout time is equal to one hour
less the first start time stored. A zero value in this setting disables this unit. The global counter of Number of starts
increases at each start of the motor detected but no action is taken.
Time to Restart: This setting may be used to ensure that a certain amount of time passes between stopping a motor and
restarting that motor.
Reset Counter: This settings is always DISABLED by default. When this setting is change or ENABLED the global counters of
starts is set to a zero value. It operates like a command to reset the starts counters, after being enabled it goes to its
default disabled status.
Snapshot events: The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element.

This unit operates only if the motor is stopped, in order to avoid a new start. The unit nevers operate while the motor is
running.
The maximum number of starts actual values can be viewed at Actual > Status > Control Elements >Max. Number of
Starts:
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF STARTS STATUS

NUMBER OF STARTS OP
GLOBAL STARTS CNT
BLOCK LOCKOUT TIME
The block signals for the frequency rate of change element can be viewed at: Actual > Status > Protection > Protection
Blocks:
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF STARTS BLOCKS

BLOCK NUM OF STARTS
Maximum number of starts actual values description:

Number of starts operate: Reading state. This state is activated when maximum number of starts has been reached
within one hour or when the time to restart setting has been programmed.
Global Starts Counter: Reading state. Provides the number of starts of the motor detected by the unit. This value can be
reset by means of “Reset counter” setting. This counter is increased when the motor goes from motor stopped to motor
started. When the “NUMBER OF STARTS OP” is activated indicating a excessive number of starts, changes in the breaker or
average current above 7% do not increase this counter.
Starts Hour Block Lockout Time: Reading state. If the unit is enabled, this state shows the lockout time in minutes until a
new start of the motor is enabled by this element. If maximum number of starts are below “Number of starts” setting, this
state shows 0 min indicating that there is not lockout time.
Block number of starts: Writing state. When this state is set the unit is blocked, meaning that the Lockout time and the
number of starts counted within last hour are reset to a zero value allowing starting operations in the motor. The “Number
of starts counter” continues with the last value and does not reset because of blocking the unit.
Note: All the counters are stored in a RAM memory, therefore when the relay is powered off and powered, on all timers and
counters are set to a zero value.
5.5.9 Digital counters

Digital Counters are functions to count discrete bit logic value changes, for example, it is able to count the number of
pickups of a protection element, the number of breaker openings or the contact inputs state changes.
There are 8 identical digital counters and they count the number of state transitions from Logic 0 to Logic 1, of the logic
states configured by the user, that trigger the increment or decrement commands of the digital counter value.
Settings
SETPOINT> CONTROL ELEMENTS >DIGITAL COUNTERS

Digital counter enabling DigCnt Function X DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
setting
Name of the digital DigCnt Name X Digital Counter X N/A N/A
counter
Initial Digital counter DigCnt Preset X 0.00 0 [-2,147,483,648 : 2,147,483,647]:
value

Compare Digital DigCnt Compare X 0.00 0 [-2,147,483,648 : 2,147,483,647]:

counter value
For each of the 8 digital counters, there exist independent and identical groups of settings:
DigCnt X Function: This setting allow to Enables or disables the specified counter. If a counter’s DigCnt X
Function is set to Disabled, then the DIGCNT X HI, DIGCNT X EQ and DIGCNT X LO are
set to OFF and the DIGCNT X VALUE, DIGCNT X FROZENVALUE and DIGCNT X
FROZENDATE are set unaltered.
DigCnt X Name: Sets a name to identify the specified counter. Note that the name length is cut down to
only 12 characters long.
DigCnt X Preset: Indicates the preset value that the specified counter can be set before counting
operations begin or after a reset command is accomplished.
DigCnt X Compare: Indicates the comparison value that the specified counter current value is compared
to and several logic bits (HI, EQ and LO) are updated accordingly.
Snapshot Events: This is a global setting that affects all of 8 digital counters. Enables or disables the
snapshot events for this function. Note that all enabled digital counters are affected by
this setting.
Relat configuration
To the correct operation of each counter, there are several PLC status variables in Enervista 650 Setup at Setpoint> Relay
Configuration>Control Elements section that should be configured properly. Each one of the 8 digital counters has its
own PLC statuses and they are identical:
SETPOINT> RELAY CONFIGURATION >CONTROL ELEMENTS

SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME
Digital counter block DigCnt X Block
Digital counter UP DigCnt X UP
Digital counter DOWN DigCnt X DOWN
Digital counter SETPRESET DigCnt X SetPreset
Digital counter RESET DigCnt X Reset
Digital counter FREEZERESET DigCnt X FreezeReset
Digital counter FREEZECOUNT DigCnt X FreezeCount
DIGCNT X BLOCK: Blocks the functionality of the specified counter. If a counter’s DIGCNT X BLOCK is set to 1, all the
counter’s values remain unaltered and no counter commands are processed. When the
counter’s DigCnt X Function is set to Enabled and the DIGCNT X BLOCK is set to 0, then the
counter starts running and accepting counter commands.
DIGCNT X UP: Counter command. When this element changes from 0 to 1, the value of the specified counter is
incremented by 1. If the current counter value is 2,147,483,647 and is incremented, the updated
value is set to -2,147,483,648.
DIGCNT X DOWN: Counter command. When this element changes from 0 to 1, the value of the specified counter is
decremented by 1. If the current counter value is -2,147,483,648 and is decremented, the
updated value is set to 2,147,483,647.
DIGCNT X SETPRESET: Counter command. This element defines the behavior of the specified counter’s Reset and the
Freeze/Reset commands or when counter is set from Disabled to Enabled:
• If set to 0, all commands with a Reset involved or when counter is Enabled set the initial counter value to 0

• If set to 1, all commands with a Reset involved or when counter is Enabled set the initial counter value to the one
specified in the setting DigCnt # Preset.
DIGCNT X RESET: Counter command. It sends a Reset command to the specified counter.
DIGCNT X FREEZERESET: Counter command. It copies the current counter value to the DIGCNT X FROZENVALUE
actual value and the current date to the DIGCNT X FROZENDATE actual value. Then a
Reset command is sent to the specified counter.
DIGCNT X FREEZECOUNT: Counter command. It copies the current counter value to the DIGCNT X FROZENVALUE
actual value and the current date to the DIGCNT X FROZENDATE actual value. Then the
specified counter value DIGCNT X VALUE is set to 0 or to the DigCnt X Preset setting
value.
Periodically the counter current Value and Frozen Value and Date are saved to non-volatile memory to keep them safe
from an unexpected energy loss.
Note: Digital Counters only appear in the Actual Values menu option in HMI, in the Control Elements level.
5.5.10 Cold load pickup

The F650 can be programmed to detect a Cold Load condition and generate a signal which can be configured to block
protection elements.
Under normal operating conditions, the actual load on a feeder is less than the maximum connected load, since not all
consumers require maximum load at the same time. A Cold Load condition can be caused by a prolonged outage of the
load or by opening of the circuit breaker. Upon the return of the source, the circuit experiences inrush current into
connected transformers, accelerating currents into motors, and simultaneous demand from many other loads because
the normal load diversity has been lost.
The relay detects Cold Load condition (Cold Load Pickup OP) when the breaker remains opened for a period of time greater
than the Outage Time Before Cold Load setting.
Once the breaker is closed, Cold Load Pickup OP is mantained asserted for the time programmed in Cold Load Pickup
Block. This signal can be used as a source for blocking the protection elements to be inhibited during the Cold Load.
Specifications – Control
COLD LOAD PICKUP

Operating Parameters: Breaker opened (from AV)
Outage time before cold load: 1 -1000 in steps of 1min
Cold Load Blocking time: 1-1000 in steps of 1s
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > COLD LOAD PICKUP

Outage Time before Outage Time 20 min 1 min [1-1000]
ColdLoad before ColdLoad
ColdLoad Blocking Time ColdLoad Blocking 5 s 1s [1-1000]
Time
Setting description for Cold Load Pickup:

Function permission (Function): This setting allows enabling and disabling the Cold Load Pickup element.

Outage Time before ColdLoad: Time that the breaker must remain opened in order to detect Cold Load condition.
ColdLoad Blocking Time: Time that the Cold Load condition is maintained after the breaker has been closed.
Snapshot event generation: Enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element.
5.5.11 60 CTS failure

For firmware 7.50 or above, the F650 incorporates, one CT failure element which can be used to detect if any of the current
transformers experience abnormal conditions resulting in phase lost.
Phase lost, caused by a current transformer (CT) failure, or CT secondary wiring can lead to undesired operation by some
of the enabled protection elements. The most affected protection would be the differential protection - main transformer
percent differential, and the restricted ground fault, as well as some overcurrent protection such as the neutral and
negative sequence instantaneous, and timed over-current elements.
SETPOINTS > CONTROL ELEMENTS > CURRENT TRANSFORMER FAILURE

Function Permission Function Permission DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Neutral Current PKP 3I0 Current PKP 0.10 0.01 [0.05- 10.00]
Neutral Voltage Inhibit 3V0 Voltage Inhibit 20.0 0.1 [0.0-240.0]
GND Current Inhibit GND Current Inhibit 0.05 0.01 [0.05-10.00]
SGND Current Inhibit SGND Current Inhibit 0.005 0.001 [0.005-1.000]
Time Delay Time Delay 0.00 0.01 [0.00 -600.00]
Snapshot events Snapshot events DISABLED N/A ENABLED/DISABLED
Function This setting allows enabling and disabling the CTS function.
3I0 Current PKP: This setting defines the level of neutral current, above which CT failure would pick up.
Refer to the CT Failure logic diagram for more detail.
3V0 Voltage Inhibit This setting defines the level of neutral voltage (3V0) above which the CT failure
detection is inhibited.
GND Current Inhibit This setting defines the level of ground current above which CT failure detection is
inhibited.
SGND Current Inhibit This setting defines the level of sensitive ground current above which CT failure
detection is inhibited.
TIME DELAY This setting defines the time for CT failure to operate.

Figure 5-32: Logic scheme for 60 CTS failure function

Care must be taken when configuring the delay for an IOC or TOC element that is being supervised by CT Supervision
Failure function. The delay time in the IOC function should be set to a value 10 ms greater than CT Supervision Failure
delay timer
5.5.12 Second harmonic inhibit

For firmware 7.50 or above, the F650 incorporates one Second Harmonic Inhibit element which can be used to block
sensitive elements when particular level of inrush currents is detected in phase currents.
During transformer energization, the inrush current presenting in phase currents may impact some sensitive elements,
such as neutral directional overcurrent. Therefore, the ratio of the second harmonic to the fundamental magnitude per
phase is monitored, while exceeding the settable pickup level, an inhibit signal is asserted, which can be used to block such
sensitive elements. In order to get proper functionality, 2nd Harmonic Inhibit delay must be minor than delay of IOC or TOC
element that is being supervised by 2nd Harmonic inhibit function.
Second harmonic function settings are available in Enervista 650 setup at Setpoint > Control Elements > 2nd HRMC
Inhibit
SETPOINTS ð CONTROL ELEMENTS ð 2nd HRMC Inhibit

Function Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Second harmonic 2ND HRMC PICKUP 1 1% [1- 40.00]
pickup
Second harmonic delay 2ND HRMC DELAY 0.00 0.1s [0.00-600.00]
Minimun secondary MINIMUM. CURRENT 0.05 0.01A [0.05-15.00]
current to operate
Phase affected to PHASES FOR ANY ONE N/A [ANY ONE- ANY TWO- ALL THREE- AVERAGE]
operate OPERATION
Snapshot events Snapshot events DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Function This setting allows enabling and disabling the 2nd

Harmonic Inhibit function.
2nd HRMC PICKUP This setting sets the Phase Current 2nd Harmonic value required to allow the Second
Harmonic Inhibit element to pick up.
2nd HRMC DELAY This setting specifies the pickup time delay for this function to operate after pickup.
Note that
MINIMUM CURRENT Sets the minimum value of fundamental secondary current required to allow the
Second Harmonic Inhibit element to operate.
If Phase for Operation is set to AVERAGE, the average of three-phase currents is used
for supervision. The similar adaptive average algorithm is applied to calculate the
average of operation current magnitude.
PHASES FOR OPERATION This setting defines the phases required for operation, and the detail is explained
below:
• ANY ONE: At least one phase picked up.
• ANY TWO: Two or more phases picked up.
• ALL THREE: All three phases picked up.
• AVERAGE: The average of three-phase harmonics picked up.
If set to AVERAGE, the relay calculates the average level of the second harmonic and
compares this level against the pickup setting. Averaging of the selected harmonic
follows an adaptive algorithm depending on the fundamental current magnitude per-
phase. Only phases where the fundamental current exceeds the cut-off level are
included in the average.

Second harmonic Inhibit actual values are available in Enervista 650 setup at Actual
Values>Control Elements> 2nd HRMC Inhibit
Table 5-82: 2nd HRMC inhibit status
2nd HARMONIC STATUS DESCRIPTION

2nd HARMONIC PKP 2nd Harmonic function has picked up
2nd HARMONIC OP 2nd Harmonic function has operated
2nd HARMONIC PHASE A Shows % of 2nd harmonic in phase A
nd
2 HARMONIC PHASE B Shows % of 2nd harmonic in phase B
2nd HARMONIC PHASE C Shows % of 2nd harmonic in phase C
Blocks of 2nd harmonic inhibit can be configured in Enervista 650 Setup at Setpoint> Relay Configuration> Protection
Elements. The status of this signal can be viewed at: Actual> Status > Protection > Protection Blocks.
The following picture shows the logic scheme for the 2nd Harmonic Inhibit function:

Figure 5-33: 2nd harmonic inhibit logic diagram

5.6 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
5.6 Inputs/outputs
5.6.1 Input/output placement
MIXED SUPERVISION INPUTS ANALOG
TERMINALS 1 2 4 5
1 CC1 COIL 1 CC1 CC1
V
2 CC2 52/a CC2 CC2
V
4 CC4 52/b CC4 CC4
5 CC5 CC1 CC5 CC5
6 CC6 CC2 CC6 CC6
7 CC7 CC3 CC7 CC7
8 CC8 CC4 CC8 CC8
9 COMMON 1/8 COMMON 1/4 COMMON 1/8 COMMON 1/8
10 COMMON 9/16 COMMON 5/8 COMMON 9/16 COMMON 9/16
11 CC9 CC5 CC9 CC9
12 CC10 CC6 CC10 CC10
13 CC11 CC7 CC11 CC11
14 CC12 CC8 CC12 CC12
V
16 CC14 52/a CC14 CC14

V
18 CC16 52/b CC16 CC16
19 CC17 SHIELD 1/4

O1
20 O1 CC18
AI 1
21 CC19
O2
22 CC20
AI 2
23 O2 CC21
O3
24 CC22
AI 3
25 CC23
O3 O4
26 CC24
AI 4
27 COMMON 17/24
O4 O5
28 COMMON 25/32
AI 5
29 CC25
O5 O6
30 CC26
AI 6
31 I SENS CC27
O6
I
32 CC28
O7 AI 7
33 CC29
O7
34 I SENS CC30
AI 8
I
35 CC31
O8 O8
36 CC32 SHIELD 5/8
Figure 5-34: Input/output location and type

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.6 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.6.2 Control settings for input/output

Configuration of settings relative to inputs and outputs can only be accessed through the EnerVista 650 Setup
software, and not via the HMI. For this purpose, the user must access Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs > Contact I/O > Board
X, being X the corresponding I/O board.
settings relative to I/O boards are described in Table 5-83: I/O board settings
Table 5-83: I/O board settings

SETPOINT > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT I/O >
BOARD F > BOARD G > BOARD H > BOARD J
I/O board type (available only for CIO modules) I/O Board Type_X NONE N/A [NONE,
16 INP + 8OUT,
8 INP + 8OUT + SUPV,
32 INP
16 INP + 8 ANA]
Input activation voltage threshold Group A Voltage Threshold A_X 80 1V [10 : 230]
Input activation voltage threshold Group B Voltage Threshold B_X 80 1V [10 : 230]
Input activation voltage threshold Group C Voltage Threshold C_X 80 1V [10 : 230]
Input activation voltage threshold Group D Voltage Threshold D_X 80 1V [10 : 230]
Debounce time for Group A Debounce Time A_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Debounce time for Group B Debounce Time B_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Debounce time for Group C Debounce Time C_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Debounce time for Group D Debounce Time D_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Input type Input Type_X_CCY (CCY) POSITIVE N/A [POSITIVE-EDGE,
NEGATIVE-EDGE,
POSITIVE,
NEGATIVE]
Input signal time delay Delay Input Time_X_CCY (CCY) 0 1 ms [0 : 60000]
Output logic type Output Logic_X_0Z POSITIVE N/A [POSITIVE,
NEGATIVE]
Output type Output Type_X_0Z NORMAL N/A [NORMAL,
PULSE,
LATCH]
Output pulse length Pulse Output Time_X_0Z 10000 1 ms [0 : 60000]
Analog Inputs Range Range_X_0Z NONE N/A [NONE,
-1 to 0mA,
0 to 1 mA,
-1 to 1 mA,
0 to 5 mA,
0 to 10 mA]
Minimum Value Min_Value_X_0Z 0.00 0.01 [ -9999.99 : 9999.99]
Maximum Value Max_Value_X_0Z 0.00 0.01 [ -9999.99 : 9999.99]
For versions previous to 7.00, the snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this
element. It is mandatory to enable this setting in order the input/output values to be refreshed in IEC61850 protocol.
Being:
X F, G, H or J, the I/O board name, depending on the Relay model.
F and G are internal Relay boards, and H and J are additional boards available in CIO modules (remote Bus CAN I/O
module).

For the I/O board selection in the relay model, associated digits to each board type are as follows:
Table 5-84: I/O board type
ASSOCIATED DIGIT ENERVISTA 650 Setup BOARD settingS BOARD TYPE
0 NONE None
1 16 INP+ 8OUT Mixed
2 8 INP +8 OUT +SUPV Supervision
4 32 INP 32 digital inputs
5 16 INP + 8 ANA 8 Analog Inputs + 16 digital inputs
CCY Is the name used for inputs in I/O boards

0Z Is the name used for the different outputs in I/O boards

5.6.3 Inputs
Input settings description

Input Activation Voltage Threshold: The range of this value goes from 20 to 230 volts. There is a single setting for all
inputs in the same group (inputs sharing the same common). In mixed and supervision boards there are two groups of
inputs, called A and B., in 32DI board there are four groups of 8 inputs each.
Debounce Time: This is the debounce time set for inputs (1 to 50 ms). The debounce time is the time window for input
filtering. If an input suffers a change of level that lasts less than this set time, the change is not considered. There is a single
setting for all inputs in the same group.
Input Type: Type of logic associated with the physical input. Possible settings are, positive and negative.
Positive and Negative settings correspond to signals that are activated or deactivated with the input level, considering the
delay setting. Positive-edge, and Negative-edge settings correspond to signals that are activated with the change of the
input signal; in this case, the Delay Input Time is not considered, only the Debounce Time; this edge signals are deactivated
automatically after one PLC scan cycle. Figure 5-35: INPUT LOGIC TYPES shows the types of signals associated with the
different input configuration types.
Delay Input Time: This is the delay applied to the input signal; the default value is zero, meaning no delay; the setting
range is 0 to 60000 milliseconds (1 minute). This setting is used in slow switchgear applications.
This is not a grouped setting; there is a different setting for each input. It is important to distinguish between this delay
input time and the debounce time used for filtering undesired transients in the input signal. The Debounce time is always
added to the delay input time.
Figure 5-35: INPUT LOGIC TYPES
Input status signals

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact inputs > Board X (being X the corresponding board in each case). Depending on the I/
O board, inputs are represented as follows:

Table 5-85: Contact inputs status

INPUT STATUS MIXED and analog BOARD SUPERVISION BOARD 32 di
(X: board F, G, H, J) (TYPEs 1 and 5) (TYPE 2) (type 4)
CONT IP_X_CC1 CC1 CC1 CC1 CC17
CONT IP_X_CC9 CC9 Va_COIL1 CC9 CC25
CONT IP_X_CC10 CC10 Vb_COIL1 CC10 CC26
CONT IP_X_CC11 CC11 Va_COIL2 CC11 CC27
CONT IP_X_CC12 CC12 Vb_COIL2 CC12 CC28
CONT IP_X_CC13 CC13 O7_SEAL CC13 CC29
CONT IP_X_CC14 CC14 O8_SEAL CC14 CC30
CONT IP_X_CC15 CC15 SUP_COIL1 CC15 CC31
CONT IP_X_CC16 CC16 SUP_COIL2 CC16 CC32
The operation logic for supervision signals (board type 2) is detailed in section 5.6.5 Circuit supervision and contact seal-in
circuits in this manual.

5.6.4 Outputs
Output settings description

Output Logic_0X _0Z: Type of logic applied to outputs. Possible values are positive and negative. The default value is
positive. Depending on the type of setting selected, the physical output is in the same direction (positive) or opposite
(negative) the output activation command.
Output Type_0X _0Z: Type of output adjusted. Possible values are normal, pulse or latched, the default value is Normal.
Normal: The contact output follows the activation command. Remains active while the operation signal is active.
Pulse: The contact output is active the pulse output time, according to the Pulse Output Time setting.
Latched: The output remains active after the operation signal has been cleared. The reset signal for the latched
outputs is configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs > Contact Output Reset”.
Pulse Output Time_0X _0Z: This is the length of the output pulse in case the output type is selected as pulse; the default
value is 10000 ms.
Figure 5-36: Output logic typesshows the types of signals associated with the different output configuration types.
Figure 5-36: Output logic types
5.6.4.1 Output status signals

Boards types 1 and 2 have both 8 outputs, so the representation is the same for both types as shown in Table 5-86:
Contact output signals
Actual > Inputs/Outputs >Contact Output Status
Real status of the contact output, which corresponds to the transformation of the output activation signal (Contact output
operate), by the logic applied to this output in Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs >Contact I/O > Board X
Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact Output Operates
Activated or deactivated status of those variables used internally to operate a contact output.
Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact Output Resets

These are the logic signals associated with the contact output reset, which produce the reset of those signals previously
configured as Latched. Configuration for the contact output reset signal is set at Setpoint > Relay Configuration >
Outputs > Contact Output Reset.
Actual > Inputs/Outputs >I/O Board Status
These signals are associated with the different I/O boards. There are internal signals that provide information about the
status of these boards, indicating whether there is any anomaly in the board, or whether the board is not available in the
relay according to the relay model.
Table 5-86: Contact output signals

CONTACT OUTPUT STATUS CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATES CONTACT OUTPUT RESETS IO BOARD STATUS
CONT OP_X_01 CONT OP OPER_X_01 CONT OP RESET_X_01 BOARD F STATUS
CONT OP_X_02 CONT OP OPER_X_02 CONT OP RESET_X_02 BOARD G STATUS
CONT OP_X_03 CONT OP OPER_X_03 CONT OP RESET_X_03 BOARD H STATUS
CONT OP_X_04 CONT OP OPER_X_04 CONT OP RESET_X_04 BOARD J STATUS
CONT OP_X_05 CONT OP OPER_X_05 CONT OP RESET_X_05
Being X the corresponding board in each case

5.6.5 Circuit supervision and contact seal-in circuits
Circuit Supervision:
F650 elements can include supervision boards (type 2), either in their internal slot F, or in an additional CIO module
connected to the element via a CAN bus (slots H and J). This type of board includes 4 voltage detectors for implementing
tripping or opening circuit supervision control logics.
Contact Seal-in:
The current seal-in circuit is used for verifying the current condition in a circuit during the time that the tripping contact
remains closed. If the current in the tripping circuit is maintained over 500 mA, the function is sealed independently of the
status of the function that caused the trip.
This current seal-in function in tripping circuits is mainly used in applications where auxiliary contacts 52/a (in charge of
cutting the current in the tripping circuit) are very slow. This may cause that, once the function that produced the trip is
reset, the relay contact opens before the breaker auxiliary 52/a, even if the time delay of the first has expired.
By using this function, we prevent the relay contact from cutting the current (basically inductive and high) from the
tripping circuit, which can cause damage to the element, as these currents exceed the nominal breaking characteristics.
The circuit and the current threshold of the function are as follows:
500 mA min
Figure 5-37: Current supervision
5.6.5.1 Digital inputs
5.6.5.2 With trip circuit supervision

The supervision board includes:
8 digital inputs in two groups of 4 inputs with one common, in terminals F9 to F10
8 auxiliary outputs: 6 normally open contacts in terminals F19 to F30 and two current sensing (latching) outputs (F31-F33
and F34-F36).
2 groups of inputs for trip circuit supervision with 4 voltage detectors. The first group includes two isolated digital inputs,
terminals F1-F2 and F3-F4. The second group, symmetrical and identical to the first, is formed by isolated voltage inputs
F15-F16 and F17-F18.
Using voltage detectors and current sensing, it is possible to implement several trip or close circuit supervision schemes, as
well as protection of the element output contact.

In order to implement these schemes, it is not necessary to set any setting in the element. Internal functions are always
operative and provide the following logic operands:
Table 5-87: Supervision logic operands

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact inputs > Board X
Being X the corresponding board in each case
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
CONT IP_X_CC9 (Va_COIL1) Active when voltage is detected in terminals F1 - F2 (circuit 1)
CONT IP_X_CC10 (Vb_COIL1) Active when voltage is detected in terminals F3 - F4 (circuit 1)
CONT IP_X_CC11 (Va_COIL2) Active when voltage is detected in terminals F15 - F16 (circuit 2)
CONT IP_X_CC12 (Vb_COIL2) Active when voltage is detected in terminals F17 - F18 (circuit 2)
CONT IP_X_CC13 (O7_SEAL) Active if current is detected by sensor in output O7 (F31-F33)
CONT IP_X_CC14 (O8_SEAL) Active if current is detected by sensor in output O8 (F34-F36)
CONT IP_X_CC15 (SUP_COIL1) Active when continuity is detected in circuit 1
CONT IP_X_CC16 (SUP_COIL2) Active when continuity is detected in circuit 2
A continuity failure is detected in a circuit when both voltage detectors (Va and Vb) detect lack of voltage during more than
500 ms. This function is not influenced by the breaker status.
These operands can be associated with internal signals (virtual outputs), LEDs or element outputs, to issue alarm signals or
to block elements, for example for blocking the Breaker close if an anomaly is detected in the trip circuit.
Available schemes are as follows:
1. Without supervision
2. With current supervision (with seal-in)
3. With simple voltage supervision
4. With double voltage supervision
5. With current and simple voltage supervision (with seal-in)
6. With current and double voltage supervision (with seal-in)
7. With current and double voltage supervision (with seal-in) and serial resistor in voltage monitors.
The following subsections describe the different types of connection to create each supervision scheme in an easy way. As
the supervision circuits are identical, only the first group connection examples are described, being also applicable to the
second group.
In order to assure a high isolation level between groups, the digital inputs for supervision have been located in a
symmetrical basis. That is to optimize the isolation between groups that can be connected to different batteries, and
therefore requiring a greater distance between circuits.

5.6.5.3 Without supervision

This is a very frequent common case, and we must only wire the tripping circuit to terminals F35 and F36, leaving unused
terminals F34, F15, F16, F17, F18.
Figure 5-38: Circuit without tripping circuit supervision (A6631F1)
5.6.5.4 With current supervision (with SEAL-IN)

In this case, as shown in Figure 5-39: Current supervision of the tripping contact (A6631F2), the current supervision circuit
consists of a circuit connected in series with the output contact, so that the external circuit is wired to terminals F34 and
F36. This supervision circuit includes a low impedance reed relay that is activated when the current value exceeds 200 mA,
and sends a signal to the main microprocessor. This latches the output relay in such a way that this indication can be used

to produce a latching of the output relay, so that it remains closed while the circulating current is over 200 mA. To use the
seal-in feature in the relay it is not necessary to configure any setting. It works, we only must program the corresponding
Circuit latching setting wiring the external circuit to terminals F34 and F36.
With this scheme, in the case of a failure to open from the breaker auxiliary contact, the F650 output relay does not open
the tripping coil current, as in this case the contact may be damaged, as it is prepared for opening currents around 0.35 A
at 125 Vdc. This latching or memory function is only guaranteed while the element is powered.
Figure 5-39: Current supervision of the tripping contact (A6631F2)

5.6.5.5 With simple voltage supervision
Figure 5-40: Supervision application with auxiliary contact 52a and a resistor (A6631F3)
Table 5-88: Supervision with 52/a
INTERNAL STATE V 52/a SUPERVISION
52 open ON OK
52 closed ON OK
TRIP OFF OK if t < 0.5 s
TRIP with 52 open OFF OK if t < 0.5 s
There is a possibility to monitor the trip circuit and trip coil continuity. This can be done by monitoring Vdc through the
output contact when this is open.

Table 5-89: SUupervision algorithm with simple voltage supervision scheme

Status of Involved Elements Input to F650 Decision
CIRCUIT OUTPUT BREAKER OPERAND OPERAND
STATUS STATUS STATUS CONT IP_X_CC11 CONT IP_X_CC16
(F35-F36) (Va_COIL2) (SUP_COIL2)
V 52/a (F15-F16)
Healthy Open 52 closed ON ON
Healthy Open 52 open ON ON
Healthy Closed 52 closed OFF ON (if t < 500 ms)
OFF (if t > 500 ms)
Healthy Closed 52 open OFF ON (if t < 500 ms)
OFF (if t > 500 ms)
Faulty Open 52 closed OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
Faulty Open 52 open OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
Faulty Closed 52 closed OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
Faulty Closed 52 open OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
In this table, ON means that the voltage detector V52/a is active, detecting a voltage.
In the first case shown on the table, with closed breaker, voltage is detected by V 52/a sensor, and this means that there is
continuity in the supervised circuit.
As shown on Figure 5-40: Supervision application with auxiliary contact 52a and a resistor (A6631F3), when the relay is not
tripped, trip contact F35-F36 remains open. If the breaker is closed, its auxiliary contact 52a is closed. Therefore, a little
current is flowing, about 2 mA, through terminals F15 and F16 through the voltage detector circuit, which flows through
52/a and the tripping coil 52TC (TC = tripping coil). Current only circulates when there is continuity in the whole circuit, so
the complete circuit is monitored, and not only the trip coil. This circuit includes auxiliary 52/a as well as the whole wiring
between the battery and the relay tripping terminals, and between these and the breaker tripping circuit.
For the second case shown on the table, open breaker, its auxiliary contact 52/a remains open, and current cannot flow
through it for detecting continuity. In order to correctly monitor the circuit, a resistor must be used, not included in the
protection, connected in parallel. The value of resistance is selected so that the V 52/a input circuit minimum detection
current flows, but not as high as to activate the breaker-tripping coil. The figure shows the following equation:
Where:
Vmin Is the minimum voltage, in Volts, expected in the battery (e.g. 80% of Vn)
R Resistance, in kilo ohms.
2 2 mA of approximate current flowing through input V 52/a
As shown in the second case in the table, with an open breaker, as current flows through R if there is continuity in the
WHOLE tripping circuit, voltage is detected in input V 52/a.
This works correctly in steady state. However, if the breaker trips, while it is opening, the V 52/a input signal can be
deactivated without this meaning that the circuit is not correct. This is due to the fact that the tripping relay, terminals F35-
F36, short circuits input V 52/a temporarily.
Therefore, if there is a trip signal, it is permitted that no signal is detected during a period of 1s to allow the breaker to open,
and reopen the tripping relay F35-F36.

Figure 5-41: Trip curcuit and trip coil supervision, auxiliary contact 52/a (closed breaker only) (A6631F5) shows the
possibility of monitoring the circuit only when the breaker is closed. In this case resistance R is not used, but it must be
observed in the element logic that the corresponding signal CONT IP_F_CC16 (SUP_COIL2) is activated showing a failure
when the breaker is open. Therefore it is required to supervise the continuity failure signaling by the breaker status
information.
Figure 5-41: Trip curcuit and trip coil supervision, auxiliary contact 52/a (closed breaker only) (A6631F5)

5.6.5.6 With double voltage supervision
Figure 5-42: Supervision application with auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b (A6631F4)
Table 5-90: Supervision algorithm with double voltage supervision scheme
Status of Involved Elements Inputs to 650 Decision
CIRCUIT OUTPUT BREAKER STATUS OPERAND OPERAND OPERAND
STATUS STATUS CONT IP_X_CC11 CONT IP_X_CC12 CONT IP_X_CC16
(F35-F36) (Va_COIL2) (Vb_COIL2) (SUP_COIL2)
V 52/a (F15-F16) V 52/b (F17-F18)

Healthy Open 52 closed ON OFF ON

Healthy Open 52 open ON ON ON
Healthy Closed 52 closed OFF OFF ON (if t < 500 ms)
OFF (if t > 500 ms)
Healthy Closed 52 open OFF ON ON (if t < 500 ms)
OFF (if t > 500 ms)
Defective Open 52 closed OFF OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
Defective Open 52 open OFF OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
Defective Closed 52 closed OFF OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
Defective Closed 52 open OFF OFF OFF (500 ms delay)
There is a possibility to monitor the trip circuit continuity not only via its auxiliary contact 52/a, but also with auxiliary
contact 52/b. This avoids the need to install a resistance in parallel with auxiliary 52/a. The correct connection is shown on
Figure 5-42: Supervision application with auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b (A6631F4)
The circuit works in a similar way to the one described in the previous section, but it uses both supervision inputs F15-F16
and F17-F18.
The advantage in this case is that circuit supervision with 52 open is more complete, as input V 52/b is used through
contact 52/b, (that is closed when the breaker is open).
We must point out that in this scheme, the tripping contact, shown in the example as the F650 trip relay, can be the one in
the relay (terminals F35 and F36), or be provided by another protection or by the parallel of several protections. This
provides high flexibility in the use of this circuit.
The battery voltage can also be monitored, by using one of the standard digital inputs.
5.6.5.7 With double voltage supervision and serial resistor in voltage monitors
Figure 5-43: Supervision application, auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b and series resistor in F15-F16shows the supervision
scheme with an external resistor.
An external series resistor is used with the 52a voltage monitor to prevent CB tripping with a short-circuited voltage
monitor. With CB open, 52/a is open and 52/b is closed. A shorted 52/a voltage monitor does not cause a trip because 52/
b voltage monitor is current limited to 2mA. With a shorted 52/b voltage monitor, no false trip is performed because 52/a is
in series limiting current to 2mA.

Figure 5-43: Supervision application, auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b and series resistor in F15-F16

5.6.6 Analog board specific settings
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital
format for use as required. The relay accepts inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with the most
common transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range.
The Input Range setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
• Range: -1 to 0, 0 to 1, -1 to 1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20, 4 to 20.
The Min and Max Value settings are used to program the span of the transducer in primary units.
• Min Value: -9999.99 to 9999.99
• Max Value: -9999.99 to 9999.99
5.6.7 Virtual inputs

Virtual inputs are signals that can be written directly via communications. Their status can be established as ON (1) and
OFF (0), through writing by communications using EnerVista 650 Setup.
The change of state of virtual inputs is made according to their type. Latched virtual inputs remain at the set value until it
is changed by communications. Self-reset virtual inputs are activated by writing, and they remain active during one cycle.
There are 32 virtual inputs of each type.
5.6.7.1 Virtual inputs writing

Setpoint > Input/Outputs >Virtual Inputs for activating / deactivating signals
To write a virtual input, select the virtual input to activate by clicking on the virtual input checkbox, then click Store and the
virtual input is written to the relay (see Figure 5-44: Virtual input writing through EnerVista 650 Setup).
For self-reset, the value remains active during one PLC cycle and after that the virtual input value is cleared.
For latched, the value remains active until it is cleared by the user, clicking again in the virtual input checkbox and
clicking Store to clear the value.
Figure 5-44: Virtual input writing through EnerVista 650 Setup
5.6.7.2 Virtual inputs status monitoring:

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Inputs > Virtual Input Latched > Virtual Input Self-Reset

Table 5-91: Virtual input status

VIRTUAL INPUTS LATCHED VIRTUAL INPUTS SELF-RESET
LATCHED VIRT IP 1 SELF-RST VIRT IP 1
… …
Text assignment for virtual input is made at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Virtual Inputs. It should be taken into
account that the text assigned for virtual inputs in the relay configuration screen are only for file management, they are
not sent to the relay.
5.6.8 Virtual outputs

There are 512 virtual outputs that may be assigned via Logic configuration. If not assigned, the output is forced to OFF
(Logic 0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of
the logic equations. For more detailed information see chapters 5.9 Relay configuration and 5.10 Logic configuration (PLC
editor) in this manual.
5.6.9 Virtual outputs latched

There are 16 virtual outputs latched that may be assigned via Logic configuration. If not assigned, the output is forced to
OFF (Logic 0). Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the logic equations. These latched virtual
outputs can only be assigned as an S/R output, they only are linked to a PLC's S/R output and their values remain after
switching the unit off and then on.
These virtual output latched may be reset by a PLC setting as it is shown in the following figure

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.7 REMOTE COMMS
5.7 Remote comms

This settings allow configuring the remote comms settings for the IEC61850 protocol regarding GSSE. For more
information see 7.3 IEC 61850 profile for F650.
SETPOINT > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > REMOTE COMMS

Remote comms selection Remote Comms NONE N/A [NONE – GSSE – GOOSE]
SETTING DESCRIPTION FOR GSSE
Remote comms selection Remote Comms GSSE N/A [NONE – GSSE – GOOSE]
Device Identification 650 ID F650 N/A
Hold time signal send by the Hold Time 10000 1 ms [1000 : 60000]
transmitting device
Snapshot Events Generation Snapshot Events Remote Out DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Remote Device Description Remote Device X Remote Device X N/A
Bit Pair Selection Bit Pair X None N/A [DNA-1 to DNA-32 – UserSt-
1 to UserSt-64]
Default Value Selection Default Value X OFF N/A [OFF – ON – LATEST OFF –
LATEST ON]
SETTING DESCRIPTION FOR GOOSE
Remote comms selection Remote Comms GOOSE N/A [NONE – GSSE – GOOSE]
LATEST ON]
Note: X is the Remote Device index, up to 32

5.8 TESTING CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
5.8 Testing
5.8.1 Force IO–input testing
The input testing can only be performed in relay with graphical display, see the human interfaces section in this manual
for more detailed information.
5.8.2 Force IO–output testing

Output testing can be performed via HMI in models with graphical display and via communications through EnerVista 650
Setup in all models.
Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs > Force Outputs
This menu allows activating each contact output in the relay, to facilitate maintenance testing. In the screen, the user can
select the I/O board to be tested, and also select which output is to be forced (operated).
After selecting the desired output, clicking on the checkbox on the left, the user must click Force Output to activate the
selected output.
In order to refresh the real status of outputs, according to the information received by the relay processor, click Refresh.
The following figure shows the output-testing screen:
Figure 5-45: Force IO

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.9 RELAY CONFIGURATION
5.9 Relay configuration
Setpoint > Relay Configuration

This is the relay configuration section in which the relay can be configured (all input/output and LEDs configuration,
protection elements signals, graphic display configuration, etc.) using internal states or already compiled equation on PLC
Editor (see section 5.10 Logic configuration (PLC editor)).
5.9.1 Outputs
Configuration of contact output operates and reset signals for all boards available in the device:
To configure any output it is necessary to select the output to be configured, clicking on the checkbox in the select column
and choose the logic operand in the source column. Simple logics can be performed on this screen, using the “or” and “not”
columns, for more complex logics go to the logic configuration tool to create the virtual outputs and afterwards select it in
the source column.
The different options available in this screen are the following:
• Select checkbox enables each output. The output must be enabled before modifying any other setting on that output
• Name setting for defining identification for the output. Note: nor the Output name, nor the Input name, nor the Virtual
Input name is recorded into the relay.
• Source setting for defining a function, logic, remote input, digital input, etc. that activates the contact.
• OR checkbox for configuring the output operation by activation of any of the indicated signals. The element performs
an OR of the signals, and its output produces operation.
• NOT checkbox for inverting or not the configured logic.
Figure 5-46: Output configuration

5.9 RELAY CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
5.9.2 LEDs
F650 has 15 LEDs fully configurable from any logical variable, contact or virtual input. For firmware version below 7.20, the
first five are latched by hardware, the rest are self reset but can be latched through PLC Configuration. For firmware
version 7.20 or higher, all these LEDs can be individually configured as latched or self-reset. This new setting is accessible
from Setpoint > Relay Configuration > LED.
This window displays all relay LEDs with the following setting options for each one:
• Select checkbox enables each LED. The LED must be enabled before modifying any other setting on that LED
• Name setting for defining identification for the LED
• Source setting defines which function; logic, remote input, digital input, etc. activates the LED.
• OR checkbox for configuring the LED operation by activation of any of the indicated signals. The element performs an
OR of the signals, and its output produces operation.
• NOT checkbox for inverting or not the configured logic.
• For firmware version 7.20 or higher, latched checkboxes are available for configuring the LEDs. If it is selected, LED
shall work as latched, if it is deselected, LED shall work as self-reset.
From the LED configuration screen, it is possible to print the vertical LED label for the relay. For this purpose, click the
printer icon. The label obtained is similar to the default factory label, with black background and the LED texts in white. This
label can replace the original one under the black plastic cover. The label is also provided in word format and can be
modified by the user (e.g. different color marking)
Figure 5-47: LED configuration

5.9.3 Operations
This menu option shows the settings for the 24 control operations that can be programmed, as follows:
• Select checkbox enables the desired operation.
• Command Text setting defines the command name.
• Interlocks Type setting defines the desired interlock type (An interlock is a condition that must be fulfilled for an
operation to be performed). The possible options are Logic or None. If the LOGIC option is selected, the program
enables a new window for creating the logic. If the NONE option is selected, then the following setting (Interlocks) is
irrelevant.
• Interlocks setting define the desired interlocks. This setting is enabled selecting the “logic” option in “Interlock type”.
In the “Interlock logic” screen we can set the interlock logic, as shown on Figure 5-48: Operations and interlocks
The settings on this screen allow creating a logic configuration with up to 3 AND gates and 1 OR gate for each of the
24 operations available in the relay. These settings are:
Select – Enables/disables the selection for the interlock input
Source – Selects a function, digital input, logic, etc. for defining each input of each AND gate.
NOT – Logic inverter
Figure 5-48: Operations and interlocks
• Final State Type setting: defines whether the operation requires (in addition to the interlock logic) any other conditions
to determine a “success condition”. If so, we must select LOGIC. Otherwise, we must select NONE.
• Final State setting: defines the success condition of a programmed operation, if the previous setting (Final State type)
was set as LOGIC.
• Front Key setting: defines the front pushbutton from which the operation can be executed.
• Contact Input setting: defines whether the operation can be executed by digital input. It defines the digital input to be
used for this purpose.
• Virtual Output setting: defines whether the operation can be executed from a virtual output previously defined at the
logic configuration tool (PLC logic).
• Time Out setting: defines the period during which the operation command remains activated waiting for a success
condition. If the success signal is received before this period expires, the command signal is removed and the timer
reset. If the success condition is not received within this period of time, the operation is considered to be finished.
• HMI setting: defines whether the operation can be executed by HMI

• COM1 (REMOTE) setting: defines whether the operation can be executed by communications through the rear port
COM1.
• COM2 (LOCAL) setting: defines whether the operation can be executed by communications through the rear port
COM2. We must note that this local port is the same as the front port (DB-9 connector). We can establish simultaneous
communication with the relay through ports COM1 and COM2. However, it is not possible to use rear COM2 and the
front port simultaneously.
• ETHER-MASTER setting: defines whether the operation can be executed by communications through the ETHERNET.
It must be taken into account that besides the master selection in the operations screen inside relay configuration, there is
a hardware selection (with the operation pushbutton in the front part of the relay) to switch between local (COM2 and HMI)
and remote masters (COM1 and ETHERNET) for operations.The local-remote-off sequence can be also available through
communications selecting the signal to switch in "Setpoint>Relay Configuration>Protection Elements".
The following diagram shows an example of the operations internal logic.
Operations Logic
Without interlock
logic
Condition 1
Interlocking
Condition n
Condition 1
Interlocking Time Out

Condition n Operation Bit
Reset
(state)
Condition 1
Interlocking
Condition n
Keyboard
Push button Operation
Digital input
Condition 1
Success
Condition n
Figure 5-49: Operation logic diagram

5.9.3.1 Programming an operation

Example of how to program an operation to close a breaker with an operating time of 90 ms (closing), incorporating 52/b
contacts to indicate the change of position, using an interlock logic to enable the operation if there is synchronism
condition, and there is no autoreclose in progress. The operation must be commanded from the relay faceplate using one
of the available operation push buttons.
To configure the related operation, go to Setpoint > Relay Configuration and select Operations tab.
This screen shows all the fields required for the operations configuration in the F650. In order to select an operation, click
the operation name under the Select column, and all the related parameters are enabled. The chosen name for the
operation is entered in Command Text. To configure an interlock logic, select the Logic option in Interlocks Type. Once this
option has been selected, the interlock configuration screen is enabled. To display this screen, click Press for Logic for the
desired operation on the Interlocks column. On this Interlocks screen, the two conditions that conform the Interlock that
enables the operation have been selected. To save the interlock, click the disk icon on the toolbar. A Logic Saved displays.
Once the Interlocks have been defined, the user must define the success conditions for the operation, define Final State
Type as LOGIC, and a PRESS FOR LOGIC message lights up below Final States. When clicking PRESS FOR LOGIC, the
success condition screen is displayed, defining there as BREAKER CLOSED.
The front key to be used for executing the Operation can be selected on the Frontal Key column, in this example the Key I
option is selected on Frontal Key. As none of the other contact input or virtual output options are going to be used they are
set to None. The success condition time Time out is set to 500 ms, and the operation is only enabled through the relay
keypad, so only the MMI option is selected, thus disabling the rest of options (COM1, COM2, ETHERNET master are not
selected).
All the selections previously related are summarized in the following table:
Table 5-92: Operation settingSs

OPERATION COMMAND TEXT settingS VALUE/SOURCE
Operation1 CLOSE BREAKER INTERLOCK (LOGIC) SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
FINAL STATES (LOGIC) BREAKER CLOSED
FRONT KEY I Key
INPUT Not configured
VIRTUAL OUTPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS MMI
Finally, configure a contact output to be activated with the programmed Operation (Operation1).

This is done under Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Output, selecting an output and choosing the internal signal
OPERATION BIT 1, which corresponds to the bit that is activated when the related operation is executed.
Figure 5-50: Contact output configuration
Note: Operations time out for confirmation

Configurable screen in graphical HMI: In the relay HMI the configurable objects wait one minute for confirmation after
operation selection. The object is blinking for one minute. After that time, the object is deselected.
Front Keys: In operations performed by front keys, the time out for confirmation is 10 seconds.

5.9.4 Protection elements

This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different protection elements. This way, the user assigns
which operands can reset the Thermal Image, etc. In this screen we can also configure a logic signal to perform the LED
reset by communications.
The settings are as follows:

• Select checkbox enables/disables the selection.
• Source setting defines the operand that performs the function indicated in the SELECT column. NOT setting inverts the
block signal.
• NOT setting for inverting the logic signal.
• OR checkbox to select a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs an OR of the signals, and its
output produces the operation.
The following figure shows this screen:

5.9.5 Control elements tab

This tab allows assigning operands (logic signals) as inputs to different control elements. This way, the user assigns which
operands configure digital counters, etc. In this screen we can also configure a logic signal to perform the LED reset by
communications. The settings are the same as in Protection Elements tab.

5.9.6 Oscillography
This menu is used for selecting the digital channels to be included in oscillography records, and the oscillo trigger signal. As
for the above-described settings, the trigger selection can be any of the signals provided by the relay or a logic
combination of these.
settings are described below:
• Select checkbox enables or disables a digital channel and the oscillography trigger.
• Name setting defines the name of the digital channel to be included in oscillography records.
• Source setting defines the source or signal to be recorded in that specific channel, which can be selected among all
the operands available in the signals menu.
• NOT checkbox inverts the enabled digital channel signal.
output produces operation.
Figure 5-51: Oscillography configuration
NOTE This screen is used for the configuration of digital channels and oscillography trigger. The rest of parameters,
such as function enabling/disabling, sampling rate, number of oscillography files, etc. must be set on the
Setpoint > Product Setup > Oscillography menu.

5.9.7 Control events

This menu is used for defining the CONTROL EVENTS, up to 128 user programmable events.
A control event is a logic signal associated with an operand or combination of operands which monitories the change of
status of the logic operand. The relay shows which events are active each time, as well as their date and time of activation.
There are 128 user programmable events and 64 pre-established events for switchgear, which correspond to opening,
closing, Error00 and Error11 of the 16 programmable switchgear elements. (Refer to section 5.9.9 HMI (human-machine
interface) for more detailed information).
As for the rest of previous settings, the source selection can be made between:
• An operand, selecting it directly on this screen.
• An OR of several operands, selecting directly the OR column in this same menu.
• A logic combination of operands, by selecting a VIRTUAL OUTPUT as trigger source, and using the logic configuration
available in the relay, graphical PLC, that allows to design logic circuits and to assign their outputs to internal
variables, called VIRTUAL OUTPUT.
Available settings are as follows:
• Select checkbox: enables or disables the generation of each event.
• Name setting: defines the text for each control event.
• Source setting defines the source that triggers the event. The source is chosen from the list that shows all the
operands available in the element.
• NOT checkbox inverts the selected signal.
• Alarm checkbox: allows treating the event as an alarm and making the event activation to be reported on the alarm
panel.
Figure 5-52: Control events configuration

The Alarm panel can be displayed in:

HMI screen for models with graphical display.
EnerVista 650 Setup: Actual>Event Recorder>Alarm Panel for all models.
Web Server application: http://xxx. xxx. xxx. xxx /Alarms.htm for all models.
If the event is not selected as an alarm, it can be viewed as an event at:
HMI screen for all models in snapshot event screen (with default text).
EnerVista 650 Setup: Actual>Event Recorder> Control Events for all models.
Web Server application: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/ControlEvents.htm for all models.
Alarm management in F650:
The relay can manage alarms in from three different masters, local, remote COM1, remote Ethernet. The alarms can be
active or not active and can be acknowledged or not acknowledged. As shown in the following table:
Table 5-93: Alarm management

ALARM STATUS MASTER MANAGEMENT
ACTIVE - NOT ACTIVE ALL MASTERS
ACKNOWLEDGED - NOT ACKNOWLEDGED LOCAL REMOTE
COM2 & HMI COM1 ETHERNET
ACTIVE status is shown on the display (relay HMI), showing an ON label on the right of the alarm. The PC shows the alarm
text in red.
ACKNOWLEDGED: Operation acknowledgement can be performed from three independent channels: MMI-COM2 (local),
COM1 (remote) and ETH_1/ETH2 or ETH_E/ETH_A/ETH_B (Ethernet). Inactive alarms disappear from the HMI when being
acknowledged.
HMI: Acknowledged status is shown on the HMI with a selection mark on the right of the ON label.
EnerVista 650 Setup: the acknowledged status is shown by a check mark to the left of the Operation name.

5.9.8 Switchgear
This menu is used for defining the SWITCHGEAR elements to be controlled by the relay. A switchgear element can be a
breaker, a line selector switch, a grounding selector switch, a busbar selector switch, etc. It is possible to define up to 16
switchgear elements. The settings are as follows:
• Select checkbox: enables or disables the control of a new switchgear element
• Contacts setting: allows selecting which type of contact is used for monitoring the status (open/closed) of the
element. The selection can be: 52a (contact type A, showing the same status as the represented element), 52b
(opposite status to the represented element), 52a+52b (both types of contacts are used), NONE (no status monitoring).
• Opening Time setting: defines the maximum opening time of an element. It is used for issuing an opening time failure
signal if the element opening is not produced within this time.
• Closing Time setting: defines the maximum closing time of an element. It is used for issuing a closing time failure
signal if the element closing is not produced within this time.
• Contact A checkbox: allows selecting which operand or combination of operands activate the type A contact status.
Usually it is an input contact wired to type A contact of the element (Breaker/selector switch). This column and the
next two columns are only active if the selected contact type in the Contacts column is 52a or 52a+52b.
• OR checkbox: selects a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs and OR of the signals, and its
• NOT checkbox inverts the status of the signal selected in column Contact A.
• Contact B checkbox: allows selecting which operand or combination of operands activates the type B contact status.
Usually it is an input contact wired to type B contact of the element (Breaker/selector switch). This column and the
next two columns are only active if the selected contact type in the Contacts column is 52b or 52a+52b.
•OR checkbox selects a group of operands instead of a single one. The relay performs OR of the signals, and its output
produces operation.
•NOT checkbox inverts the status of the signal selected in column Contact B.
• Open text setting: allows associating a text to the control event associated with the element opening.
• Close text setting: allows associating a text to the control event associated with the element closing.
• Error 00 text setting: in case of using double contact for the switchgear element status (52a+52b), this setting allows
to associate a text to the Error00 internal status, this means, when both contacts are inactive during a period longer
than the associated with the opening or closing Operation, depending on which Operation is being performed.
• Error 11 text setting: in case of using double contact for the switchgear element status (52a+52b), this setting allows to
associate a text to the Error11 internal status, this means, when both contacts are active during a period longer than
the associated with the opening or closing Operation, depending on which Operation is being performed.
• ALARM setting: enables the issue of an alarm in the event of a close, open, 00-type, 11-type error. If it is configured as
an alarm.
• Opening init setting: this setting selects which operand or combination of operands indicate the initiation of an
opening operation, in order to allow the follow up of the operation and generate the corresponding alarms if the
operation is not successful. The operation bit signal used to launch the opening init must be configured in the
operations tab inside relay configuration.
• Closing init setting: this setting selects which operand or combination of operands indicate the initiation of a closing
operation, in order to allow the follow up of the operation and generate the corresponding alarms if the operation is
not successful. The operation bit signal used to launch the closing init must be configured in the operations tab inside
relay configuration.
• Block Open : allow selecting which operand or combination of operands activates the opening blocks for the
switchgears (XSWI$ST$BlkOpn and XSWI$ST$BlkCls) for operating in 61850.
• Block Close settings: allow selecting which operand or combination of operands activates the closing blocks for the
switchgears (XSWI$ST$BlkOpn and XSWI$ST$BlkCls) for operating in 61850.

Figure 5-53: Switchgear configuration

Note: when a switchgear device is only monitored (open init and closing init signals are not used), it is not possible to
distinguish between the fail to open or fail to close time, the time used to give an error 00 or 11 signal is the maximum of
the opening and closing time configured for that switchgear.

5.9.9 HMI (human-machine interface)

This menu shows a scenario to draw a simplified one-line diagram of a bay in a feeder, line, transformer, etc. The menu
includes a library for power elements, metering elements, text and drawings.
To use the drawing toolbar elements, select the desired element and then click the yellow area. The selected element is
moved to the screen on the selected spot (see Figure 5-54: HMI configuration).
The graphic display can be used to configured switchgear elements, operations, metering values, date and time, etc. The
configured values is always updated with the real status of the relay.
This functionality is only applicable to F650 elements with graphical display, and not for elements with alphanumerical
display . Depending on the relay model, the graphical display can show IEC 1082-1 symbols (N option in order code).
Figure 5-54: HMI configuration

For chinese graphical displays (only available N option in order code) the configuration screen has the following
appearance with full configuration capabilities:
On the left side of the window all the available elements to be programmed on the HMI are displayed. Their meaning is
detailed on the right.

Table 5-94: Active configurable symbols in on-line diagram for graphicalHMI
ACTIVE SYMBOLS
ICONS IN SCREEN DESCRIPTION
SWITCHGEAR SYMBOLS STANDARD AND IEC 1082-1 SWITCHGEAR SYMBOLS
STANDARD SWITCHGEAR SYMBOLS M and C selection for graphic display option in the order code
Switchgear elements: breaker (square) and selector switch (rhombus),in
vertical and horizontal positions.
It is necessary to associate the figure to its corresponding switchgear
number. The figure is shown filled if the element is closed, and blank if the
element is open. The symbol on the right represents an unpluggable breaker.
In this case it is necessary to indicate which operands show whether the
element is plugged or unplugged. The figure shows also graphically these
two statuses.
IEC SWITCHGEAR SYMBOLS N and D selection for graphic display option in the order code
Breakers and breaker trucks in vertical and horizontal positions.
The first fourth symbols are breakers in vertical and horizontal positions for
left and right options. The last fourth symbols are breaker trucks or
unpluggable breakers. When the device is connected two arrows can be
seen, if the device is not connected only one arrow is displayed. When the
device it is inserted the device can be seen and when it is not inserted only a
blank space is displayed
Contactors in vertical and horizontal positions
Selector switches in vertical and horizontal positions.
OTHER CONFIGURABLE SYMBOLS Available for both M, N, C and D selection

MULTISTATE VARIABLE SYMBOL
Displays a dialog box on screen that is one variable status function (like a
switch case) for the following internal states AR STATUS, AR LOCKOUT MODE,
AR BLOCK MODE and FAULT TYPE.
This type of data allows to visualize the different states of one particular
value, for example, AR STATUS has several states such as (0) OUT OF SERVICE,
(1) READY, (2) LOCKOUT, (3) BLOCK, (4) RECLOSE IN PROGRESS. Significant texts
can be associated with those states.
STATUS SYMBOLS (TEXT AND GRAPHIC MODES):
Bit: Represents the state of an operand by means of a configurable text. It
allows associating a test to the active status and a different text to the
inactive status.
Led(O) Performs the same function in a graphical mode. This way, it works as
a virtual LED. When showing a black circle, it means that the selected
operand is active, and if the circle is blank, the operand is inactive
ANALOG MAGNITUDE SYMBOL

Used for displaying analog magnitudes (current, voltage, power, etc.) in
floating point numbers, such as a current value (123.5 A). Both the number of
decimals and the integer characters can be selected, in order to facilitate the
reading. Any of the analog magnitudes available in the relay can be
configured.

ACTIVE SYMBOLS
ICONS IN SCREEN DESCRIPTION
DATE AND TIME SYMBOL
Display the date and time provided by the device in the HMI.
OPERATIONS SYMBOL
Configure and execute operations on the graphic display.
This symbol can only be selected once the operations have been configured
in the Operations screen of the Relay Configuration menu. To select an
Operation, click the element and then the display. A window opens to select
the operation and the tab order. Once selected, a red border square is shown.
Place this square on the object to operate. When the object is selected on the
screen to execute this operation, the object on which it is located blinks. It is
possible to place several operations on the same object, for example to open
and close the breaker object.
Configure and execute operations with the front keys "I" and "O" on the
graphic display over an object selected.
To select the object, click the element and then the display. A window opens
to select the required operations "I" and "O" and the tab order. Once selected,
a blue border square is shown. Place this square on the object to operate.
When the object is selected on the screen to execute these operations, the
object on which it is located blinks. Press key "I" or "O" to execute the
configured operations.
Configure and execute operations with the front keys "I", "O" and "*" on the
to select the required operations "I", "O" and "*" and the tab order. Once
selected, a green border square is shown. Place this square on the object to
operate. When the object is selected on the screen to execute these
operations, the object on which it is located blinks. Press key "I", "O" or "*" to
execute the configured operations.
After executing this kind of operation, information about the result of the
operation is displayed on the HMI..
Configure and execute virtual inputs with the frontal keys "I" and "O" on the
to select the required virtual operations "I" and "O" and the tab order. Once
selected, a white border square is shown. Place this square on the object to
operate. When the object is selected on the screen to execute this virtual
inputs, the object on which it is located blinks. Press key "I" or "O" to set the
configured virtual inputs.
Table 5-95: GRAPHIC AND TEXT EDITION SYMBOLS
GRAPHIC AND TEXT EDITION SYMBOLS

ICONS IN SCREEN DESCRIPTION AVAILABILITY
Ground symbols in different positions. The first two are not available in the
N model (IEC selection).
Voltage Transformers representation Only for standard model M.
Two and three winding voltage transformers Only for N model (IEC selection)
representation.

Current transformer representation Only for N model (IEC selection).
Symbols reserved for future uses Both M and N selection
Symbol for capacitor banks. Both M and N selection
Symbol for vertical capacitor banks. Only for N model (IEC selection).
Symbol for wye connection Both M and N selection
Symbol for open delta and delta connection Both M and N selection
Display of a fix text up to 40 ASCII characters Both M and N selection
Auxiliary drawing lines Both M and N selection
EXTENDED GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
For the extended graphic symbols, extraction device must be set to 52a+52b switchgear device.
Table 5-96: GRAPHIC AND TEXT EDITION SYMBOLS
EXTENDED
GRAPHIC AND TEXT EDITION SYMBOLS
ICONS IN DESCRIPTION AVAILABILITY
SCREEN
Breaker Only for N model (IEC selection)

Breaker+Extraction device (Vertical) Only for N model (IEC selection)
Breaker+Extraction device (Horizontal) Only for N model (IEC selection)
Isolator Only for N model (IEC selection)
Isolator Remote controlled Only for N model (IEC selection)
Neutral Reactance Only for N model (IEC selection)
“Encravado” Interlocked Only for N model (IEC selection)
Autorecloser In Service/ Out of Service Only for N model (IEC selection)
“M”/”A” Symbol for Manual/Automatic Only for N model (IEC selection)
“Regime Especial Exploração” Only for N model (IEC selection)
Voltage transformer Only for N model (IEC selection)
Different Text properties (Bold/Vertical/Reverse Only for N model (IEC selection)

Video)

5.9.10 Device display selection
5.9.10.1 Type of graphical display

On offline mode, when creating a new setting file (*.650), when entering on SETPOINT > RELAY CONFIGURATION > HMI, it is
possible to choose the display type that is wanted to configure from two types of graphical displays depending on the
order code. Green one for standard models and the black one for “N” model IEC selection.

5.10 LOGIC CONFIGURATION (PLC EDITOR) CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
5.10 Logic configuration (PLC editor)

Setpoint > Logic Configuration
The logic configuration (or PLC Editor) tool is a graphical design tool that allows the F650 built complex logic diagram in an
easy way using different logic functions.
The logical configuration is performed using graphical functions based on the IEC 61131-3 standard.
• This standard defines five basic ways of programming:
•Sequential Function Chart (SFC).
•Instruction List (IL).
•Structured Text (ST).
•Ladder Diagram (LD).
•Function Block Diagram (FBD).
Out of these five methods, FBD has been chosen because it allows for graphical configurations that are more
comprehensive. This method provides the possibility of grouping several basic functions inside a single function (hereon
called libraries), achieving higher modularity and clarity in the design.
The first equation entered in the PLC can never be a timer

NOTICE Analog elements (analog comparators, etc,) are not implemented.

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.10 LOGIC CONFIGURATION (PLC EDITOR)
5.10.1 Theory of operation
5.10.1.1 Description
As already mentioned in the introduction, this tool uses FBD mode of IEC 61131-3 standard. For this purpose we have
defined a series of basic operations with illustrations below.
The basic operations available in the PLC Editor are located in the tool bar of the application and are as follows:
Table 5-97: PLC editor basic operation in F650
PLC EDITOR BASIC OPERATION
ICONS IN DESCRIPTION
SCREEN
INPUT TO LOGIC: Selection of the digital input to the logic. (All available internal status can be used as logic inputs **)
OUTPUT FROM LOGIC: Virtual output built with internal logic. (Up to 512)
LIBRARY: Possibility to build blocks of logic in a simple graphic object. OR and AND from 3 to 8 inputs are provided as
libraries.
AND of two digital inputs.
OR of two digital inputs.
NOT of a digital input.
NAND of two digital inputs.
XOR of two digital inputs.
SR: Latch (set-reset): reset dominant.
ONS: signal to pulse an logic input to a signal of one scan cycle length.
TIMER: timer signal with set, reset and mask for timing.
TEXT LABEL: text to customize the logic configuration file.
Flip-Flop D: signal that maintains the actual value frozen during a PLC cycle
MASK: Time mask to be used in timing operations.
For firmware 7.20 or above, analog operands are available. It is possible to use these operands with analog or digital
values.
The basic operations available in PLC Editor are located in the tool bar of the application and are as follows:
PLC EDITOR ANALOG OPERATION

ICONS IN DESCRIPTION
SCREEN
GREATER THAN COMPARATOR of two digital or analog inputs.
EQUAL TO COMPARATOR of two digital or analog inputs

MULTIPLIER of two digital or analog inputs
DIVIDER of two digital or analog inputs
ADDER of two digital or analog inputs
SUBTRACTOR of two digital or analog inputs
**NOTE1: For firmware version 7.20 or above, two new inputs have been added; PLC_BOOL_ON and PLC_BOOL_OFF. These
two inputs are set always to PLC_BOOL_ON =1 and PLC_BOOL_OFF =0 and their values are not accessible via protocol and
cannot be modified.
Example of logic signals in F650 logic configuration:
Table 5-98: Logic signals in F650
LOGIC SIGNALS EXAMPLES
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION TIME DIAGRAM
SET When the input
signal is set to 1 the
1
output signal
remain fixed to 1 0
until a reset signal
is received.
1
0
RESET When the input
signal is reset to 1
1
the output signal
remain fixed to 0. 0
1
ut
0
ONS The input signal is
pulsed. The width of 1
the output pulse is
the same as that of 0
the PLC cycle
1
ut
0
TIMER With selectable
time (MASK), one 1
SET input and one SET input
RESET input 0
1
RESET input
0
1
Output
0
T(ms) T1 T2 T1+T2=T

Example of analog operands in F650 logic configuration:

Table 5-99: Analog operands in F650
When this operand is used, Subtraction between two inputs is performed and result is stored into variable assigned to subtraction output.
ANALOG OPERANDS
OPERANDS example Description
GREATER THAN Analog Variables:
1. If Pulse Cntr value 1 > Pulse Cntr value 2
then Virtual output is set to 1
2. If Pulse Cntr value 1 = Pulse Cntr value 2
3. If Pulse Cntr value 1 < Pulse Cntr value 2
Digital Variables:
1. If Latched Virtual input 1 =0 & Latched
Virtual input 2 =0 then Virtual output is
set to 0
set to 0
set to 1
4 If Latched Virtual input 1 =0 & Latched
set to 0
EQUAL TO Analog Variables:
4. If Vb Angle > Vc Angle then Virtual output
is set to 0
5. If Vb Angle = Vc Angle then Virtual output
is set to 1
6. If Vb Angle < Vc Angle then Virtual
output is set to 0
Digital Variables:
set to 1
set to 1
set to 0
set to 0
MULTIPLIER Result of multiplication of both inputs is
stored into variable assigned to Multiplier
output

DIVISION Result of division of both inputs is stored

into variable assigned to Division output.
If Input 2=0 Then result of division is stored
as 0.
ADDITTION Result of multiplication of both inputs is

stored into variable assigned to addition
output
SUBTRACTION When this operand is used, Subtraction

between two inputs is performed and result
is stored into variable assigned to
subtraction output.
5.10.1.2 Logic compilation

The F650 configuration is made using the basic operations related before and more complex operations can be developed
inside libraries.
All the graphical configuration performed in the Logic configuration editor must be read and interpreted by the PLC as the
F650 engine. The graphical equations must be translated into compiled equations to be understood by the relay. For this
purpose the logic configuration editor provides a compilation option to compile the whole configuration, creating a series
of equations that forms the logical configuration of the element.
The next diagram shows the way compiled logic equations are built.
DAT OPERATION
COMPILATION
PLC
EQUATIONS
PLC
Figure 5-55: Compiled logic equations

A single equation is composed of one or more inputs, one or more operations, and one output. The order of equations is
determined by the relative position of their outputs.
In the following example is shown the order of compilation for equations determined by their relative position in the
configuration file:
EQUATION A EQUATION A OUTPUT
EQUATION B EQUATION B OUTPUT
EQUATION A EQUATION B OUTPUT
EQUATION B EQUATION A OUTPUT

Figure 5-56: Order of equations
In this case, equation A is the first to be executed. However, in the second case, the first equation to be executed would be
B, as its output is before the Equation A output.
5.10.2 Main menu

The PLC Editor tool (Setpoint > Logic Configuration) provides a main menu with different submenus (File, Project, Edit, Run,
View, and Window) that allows the user to built customized logic for the F650 devices.
File menu
The FILE menu includes the following options:
New Project: Create a new project that includes the logic configuration files.
Open Project: Open an existing project.
Close Project: Close the currently open project.
Import***: Obtain the PLC project information (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib files) from another *.650 file
(firmware version 7.70 or above) to insert in the open *.650 file.
Export***: Extract the PLC project information (*.pep, *.aut, *.lib files) from the open *.650
configuration file, and save it to the local PC.
Get Project from Relay**: Retrieve a previously saved project from the relay.
Save Project / Save Project as**: Save the open project.
Save Automatic Function &
Save Automatic Function As**: Save the file of the active project.
Library: Give access to the library sub-menus, where new libraries can be created and
existing libraries can be modified and saved.
Print: Print the active configuration file.
Preview: Preview of the document before printing.
Exit: Close all open projects and exit the application.
***Option only available for firmware v7.70 or above.
** Option only available for firmware below v7.70.

Project menu
The Project menu includes the following options:
Project Explorer: Display a tree structure showing all files contained in the project.
Insert library: Insert a library in the active automatic function.
Edit menu
The Edit menu includes the following options:
Undo: Undo the last modification in the active function.
Redo: Repeat the last modification.
Cut: Cut one or more logic operations.
Copy: Copy one or more logic operations.
Paste: Paste one or more logic operations.
Find: Search for a logic operation in the project.
Copy as Bitmap: Copy the active automatic function to the clipboard in picture format.
View Clipboard: Launch the clipboard viewer application.
Run menu
The RUN menu includes the following options:
Configuration: Not valid in the current application (for analog operations still not available).
Compile: Compile the configuration functions to generate the equations that are interpreted
by the 650 PLC.
Save Configuration file***: Save compiled equations into *.650 configuration file
***Option only available for firmware v7.70 or above.
View menu
The VIEW menu includes the following options:
Log: Display the status name and time stamp of the digital statuses configured in the
PLC logic (still not available).
Equations: Display the equations resulting from the compilation.
Grid: Show or hide the form grid where the configuration functions are developed. It
also aligns the different objects to the grid.
Zoom: Allow selection of the percentage of zoom in the application.
Rectangle Zoom (Zoom rectangular): Allow zooming the selected rectangle.
5.10.3 Configuration generation
5.10.3.1 Create new project

Click File > New Project to open a new PLC project for programming the desired automation. An automation can be
formed by one or more equations.

5.10.3.2 Create equation

A single equation can be formed by one or more inputs, one or more operations, and one output. The order of equations is
determined by the relative position of their respective outputs, this order being downward. To link the output of an
equation with the input of another equation, an internal variable (virtual output) must be used. The virtual output is used as
an input to the second equation.
5.10.3.3 Add input to automation

Click the button that represents the inputs in the toolbar at the top of the screen. A logic input can be any of the available
digital internal status provided by the relay. Such as protection status, contact inputs, contact outputs, I/O status, other
protection status, front keys, LEDs, operation bits, virtual inputs and virtual outputs.
5.10.3.4 Add output to automation

Click the button that represents the outputs in the toolbar at the top of the screen. The logic outputs are virtual outputs (up
to 512 configurable signals), virtual metering (up to float 32 signals, up to 50 int 32 signals) or virtual output latched (up to
16 signals).
5.10.3.5 Add digital operation

Click any of the digital operations in the toolbar at the top of the screen, and then click the window background. A box with
the selected digital operation is displayed and the inputs and outputs must be connected to the logic box as explained
before.
5.10.3.6 Link inputs, outputs, and operations

The user can link the different graphic objects clicking on an object output and dragging to the input of another graphic
object. Graphic objects available in the PLC configuration are digital objects.
There is a series of restrictions when performing connections:
It is not possible to auto-link an object; the output of a certain object cannot be linked to its input;
There can only be one input per object input;
RESET and SET outputs must be internal variables or outputs.
We must take into account that as the timer is a digital operation that operates as an analog, there must only be a single
internal variable or digital input in the timer input.
5.10.3.7 Add library

Click LIB and select the corresponding file.
Users can build their own libraries and distribute them in their projects in an easy way.
The manufacturer provides default libraries such as ORs, ANDs of 3 up to 8 inputs, besides timers (pickup-dropout) and key
examples.
5.10.4 Library generation

Libraries can contain a set of operations grouped in a single graphic object being formed by inputs, outputs and
operations
Working with libraries follows the same procedure as working in the main project menu, the only difference is that the
inputs and outputs to the library must be selected as external inputs and outputs. The rest of variables are internal
variables used in the logic compilation.
The name assigned to the inputs and outputs of the library and to the library itself are used to represent the library as an
object in the main project.
Internal variables inside the libraries are assigned randomly when compiling.

These libraries are saved in the LIB folder in order to be used in further projects
5.10.4.1 Library example

Go to the main menu File >Library > Open Library > New Library
Open a new library or modify an existing one, in this example a timer library is going to be displayed Timer (Pkp-Dpt).lib as
shown on Figure 5-57: Timer (PKP-DPT).LIB configuratin example
Figure 5-57: Timer (PKP-DPT).LIB configuratin example

Green and blue signals are internal inputs and outputs used in the library and are not going to be accessible to the user
when working in the main menu outside the library environment. The white boxes (T_Input, T_Pickup, T_Dropout, T_output)
are inputs and outputs to the library that are going to be accessible to the user to connect the library in the main
application to create virtual outputs to be sent to the relay.
Once the library is created and saved it can be selected in the main application menu in Project > Insert Library. The
library has the following object:
Figure 5-58: Library object

5.10.5 Application example

In this section a simple logic application is described step by step, a logic is such that keeping one digital input activated,
several outputs are activated and deactivated in a time window (outputs remain activated for 200 ms and deactivated for
5 ms). See the following figure:
Figure 5-59: Logic example

Go to the main menu and select File >New project, create a new project and select an input in the icons toolbar on the top
of the window. This input is selected as a digital input among the several options for inputs that can be selected. This
input is the SET input for the first timer to launch the output activation signal. Click the icon related to the timer to insert
the timer on the project. The timer has three inputs (S=set, R=reset and T=timing input)
The reset signal of the first timer is a virtual output called output_deactivation that has been created as an output of
another second timer. This signal is selected as an output
The timing signal for the first timer is a mask provided by the application, in which the time in milliseconds must be entered
in order to configure the timer time delay.
After creating the first timer, the second one for output deactivation is made. The set signal is the virtual output created as
an output of the first timer (VO_100_OUTPUT_ACTIVATION), the reset signal is the output of the second timer
(VO_100_OUTPUT_DEACTIVATION), the time delay is set as 200 ms.
Once the timing logic (timer 1 + timer 2) has been created, the activation signal (VO_100_OUTPUT_ACTIVATION) is linked to
several virtual outputs. Therefore, virtual outputs (VO_102_OUTPUT_1, VO_103_OUTPUT_2, VO_104_OUTPUT_3,
VO_105_OUTPUT_4) are activated if the CONT IP_G_CC1(CC1) variable is set to 1. Once the VO_100_OUTPUT_ACTIVATION
is active, it is deactivated after 200 ms, and remains deactivated for 5 seconds. This process is repeated while the digital
input is active.
To finish the process the logic must be compiled (Run >Compile) and the equations sent to the relay (Run >Send Equations
to relay) to start working with the new logic.

5.11 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
5.11 IEC 61850 configuration

The 61850 Configuration option is only available if the F650 supports this protocol (6 in the order code for protocol
selection) with firmware versions 3.44 or lower. For firmware versions 3.60 or higher ones, go to section 7.6 IEC 61850
Configurator.
This menu is located in Setpoint > 61850 Configuration
The user can configure some 61850 parameters in the F650.icd file, and then send this file to the relay. The parameters
that can be configured are:
Domain name parameters:
· IED Name
· LD Name from the Domain Name
Ethernet parameters:
· IP Address
· Subnet Mask
· Gateway
Figure 5-60: IED name and Ethernet parameter configuration

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.11 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATION
Figure 5-61: LD name configuration

MMXU parameters:
The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when updating the MMXU.mag. and
.cVal. values from the associated .instmag. and .instcVal. values.
The .mag. and .cVal. values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports. These settings correspond to the
associated .db data items in the CF functional constraint of the MMXU logical node, as per the IEC 61850 standard.
According to IEC 61850-7-3, the db values represent the percentage of difference between the maximum and the
minimum in units of 0.00%. Thus, it is important to know the maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity, since this
represents the 100.00% value for the deadband. The minimum value for all quantities is 0; the maximum values are as
follows:
A value of 1000 represent the 1% of the scale.
The minimum and maximum main values (secondary) are:
-For Current 0 to 160 A
-For Voltage 0 to 300 V
-For frequency 20 to 70 Hz

5.11 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
Figure 5-62: MMXU deadband setting configuration

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.12 PROCOME CONFIGURATION
5.12 Procome configuration

The Procome Configuration option is only be available if the F650 supports this protocol (5 in the order code for protocol
selection).
This menu is located in Setpoint > Procome Configuration
When opening the Procome configuration tool, either open a "f650procome.cfg" file or continue to the procome
configuration tool with no file selected. The procome configuration can be retrieved from the relay by clicking Retrieve
Configuration. Changes can be saved to the f650procome.cfg configuration file, and then sent to the relay by clicking
Send Configuration. In order to start working with the new procome configuration, the relay must be switched off and on.
The Procome slave can be identified (besides the slave number) with a long name (8 characters identifier) and with a sort
name (4 characters identifier) that can be set in the Procome configuration file.
The control data that can be configured can be classified in digital signals, measurements and operations. The user can
configure some Procome parameter in the f650procome.conf file and then send this file to the relay. The parameters that
are possible to configure are:
Digital signals:
Figure 5-63: Digital signal configuration

5.12 PROCOME CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
The user must select the digital signals to be sent to the Procome master configuring the identifier number (Procome ID) for
each of them. Take into account that this Procome ID is the bit in which is set the digital signal configured in that ID, for
example, it the contact input 1 from the board G is configured to the Procome ID 10, the signal 10 is located in the byte 1
bit 2 of the answer sent by the Procome slave.
To configure a new signal, set the Procome ID selected for that signal, select the digital signal, and then click Add to add
the new signal to the status list of signals configured in the Procome configuration file. To remove an existing signal from
the status list, select the signal and click Remove. To save the data in the configuration file, click Save; all data is stored in
the "f650procome.cfg" file.
Analog Measurements
In the measurements configuration screen, for each measurement selected the configuration signals are:
• Procome ID: the identification number for each measurement
• Identifier: the measurement selected to be sent in the Procome slave answer
• Factor: the multiplier factor to be applied to the relay measurement to make the final measurement calculation to be
sent to the master
• Offset: an offset factor to be applied to the relay measurement to make the final measurement calculation to be sent
to the master
The Factor and offset parameters allow the user to perform different scaling in the relay measurements. The final
measurement sent to the Procome master is: a*x+b, where x is the relay measurement, a is the multiplier factor and b is
the offset.
Figure 5-64: Measurement configuration

Counters
The counters (pulse counters and energy counters) have the same management as the measurements, this is Procome ID,
Identifier, Factor and offset configuration for each of them.
Figure 5-65: Counter configuration
Operations
This operations configuration screen allow the user to configure the Procome number that identifies the command in the
Procome protocol and the "operation bit number" that the slave when the command has DCO_ON and the operation to be
executed when the command is DCO_OFF. The user can set the same operation for DCO_ON and DCO_OFF or a different
one for each status if desired.
The user must select:
• Procome ID (IEC): which is the identification number for each operation
• Type: type 1 for operation bits.
• Operation ON: DCO_ON operation bit selection
• Operation OFF: DCO_OFF operation bit selection

5.12 PROCOME CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
Figure 5-66: Operation configuration
Counters Operations
The counter operations screen is a dedicated configuration screen for the counter (pulse and energy) operations to freeze,
unfreeze and reset.
These operations must be set in the "Setpoint > Relay configuration > Operations" and "Setpoint > Relay
configuration>Protection Elements" in FREEZE ENERGY CNT, UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT and RESET ENERGY CNT.
For example if the ENERGY RESET operation is the 6th one in the operations screen, it must be configured to the "ENERGY
RESET CNT" input in the protection elements screen. To configure this operation to be launched through Procome see the
example below. This configuration screen has the same management as the operations one.

Figure 5-67: Counter operations configuration

5.13 IEC 60870-5-103 CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS
5.13 IEC 60870-5-103 configuration

The IEC103 Configuration option is only be available if the F650 that supports this protocol (3 in the order code for protocol
selection). The IEC103 protocol for the F650 can be configured using the EnerVista 650 Setup program in the menu
Setpoint > IEC103 Configuration.
When opening the IEC103 configuration tool, either open a "f650iec103.cfg" configuration file or continue to the IEC103
configuration tool with no file selected. The IEC103 configuration can be retrieved from the relay by clicking Retrieve
Configuration. Changes can be saved to the configuration file, and then sent to the relay by clicking Send Configuration.
In order to start working with the new IEC103 configuration, the relay must be switched off and on.
The IEC103 slave can be identified (besides the slave number) with a long name (8 characters identifier) and with a short
name (4 characters identifier for the manufacturer's internal software release) that can be set in the IEC103 configuration
file.
Control data that can be configured includes: digital states, measurands and commands. Some IEC103 parameters can be
set in the configuration file and then sent to the relay
Digital states:
All the digital states that F650 supports are available in order to be mapped using the EnerVista 650 Setup program. All the
mapped information is sent as a response to a general interrogation.
In the interoperability table, the states that the standard propose have been selected with the suitable information
number. Some of them must be generated in the firmware code as an OR operation. This information is mapped by
default, but the user can delete them if desired. For the other states, you can assign the Information Number <1..255> and
the Function Type <0..255>, but the Identification Type 1 (Time-tagged message) is fixed.
• To configure a new mapping of a digital state, set the Function Type and the Information number. Then select Digital
Status from the first combo box in the Status frame for mapping a single digital state, and the digital state to be sent
to the IEC103 master from the second combo box. You can configure a logic OR operation of digital states selecting
Logic in the first combo box and clicking Press for Logic. In the next screen, choose the digital status combination to
be sent to the IEC103 master and click Save.
Finally click Add and the configured data is added to the Status List.
• To remove an existing signal from the status list, select the signal then click Remove. The signal is removed from the
status list.
• In the same way, to change a configured signal from the status list, select the signal, make the changes, and then
click Update. The signal is updated in the status list
• To save the data in the configuration file, click Save and all the data is stored in the corresponding "*.cfg" file.

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.13 IEC 60870-5-103 CONFIGURATION
Figure 5-68: Digital signal configuration for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Measurands
The standard proposes some analog points supported by the F650 with compatible information number that has been
included in the previous profile.
For the other measurands, it would be possible to use the 650 EnerVista Setup to select the desired point and assign the
Identification Type (3 or 9), Function Type <0..255>, and Information Number <1..255>.
If the user selects Identification Type 3 (ASDU 3) only four measurands are available for the configuration, but if
Identification Type 9 (ASDU 9) is selected, up to nine measurands can be sent in the IEC103 slave answer. For each
measurand, all metering values that F650 supports, are available in order to be mapped.
In the measurands configuration screen, with each selected measurement, a Factor and an Offset must be configured. The
Factor is a multiplier factor and the Offset is an offset factor to be applied to the relay measurement to make the final
measurement calculation to be sent to the master The factor and offset parameters allow the user to perform different
scaling in the relay measurements. The final measurement sent to the IEC103 master is: "a*x+b", where "x" is the relay
measurement, "a" is the multiplier factor and "b" is the offset.
The measurands are sent to the primary station as a response to a class 2 request. There is a Timeout configurable with
increments of 100 ms, between 0 and 60 min, in order to configure the interval desired.
Click Add and the configured data is added to the Measurands List. The processes of removing, updating and saving are
done in the same way as for digital states.

Figure 5-69: Measurand configuration for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Commands
All configurable commands and virtual inputs self-reset are available in order to be mapped using the EnerVista 650 Setup
program. It would be possible to choose the desired command for the ON state and the same or different command for
the OFF state.
You can select the Information Number <1..255> and the Function Type <0..255>, but the Identification Type 20 (General
Commands) is fixed and it is used to send a command to the slave station.
Clicking the Add button the configured data is added to the Operations List. The processes of removing, updating and
saving are done in the same way as for digital states and for measurands.

CHAPTER 5: SETPOINTS 5.13 IEC 60870-5-103 CONFIGURATION
Figure 5-70: Command configuration for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol


GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 6: Actual values
ACTUAL VALUES
6.1 Front panel

The menu bar in the main screen of EnerVista 650 Setup software shows the ACTUAL menu option. This option
concentrates and displays all status of protection, control elements, metering, counters information, oscillography, events,
fault locator, etc. This menu is divided in several submenus that are detailed in the following sections.
6.1.1 LEDs
Operation of the relay front LEDs is shown on the following figure (Actual > Front Panel > LEDs) by the lighting of the
associated LED in the appropriate color. The Ready LED is green when the relay is in service. LEDs 1 to 5 light up in red
when active, LEDs 6 to 10 light up in orange, and the last 5 LEDs light up in green.
The first five LEDs are latched by hardware and can
only be reset by a LEDs RESET Command, either pressing the “esc” key on the Front of the Relay, or by Communications
using the appropriate signal. The rest of LEDs are not latched, but can be latched by logic.
Table 6-1: Front panel LEDs
LEDS
READY LED
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
LED 9
LED 10
LED 11
LED 12
LED 13

6.2 STATUS CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
LED 14
LED 15
LOCAL OPERATION MODE
OPERATIONS BLOCKED
ST HMI BACKLIGHT
6.2 Status
6.2.1 Operation bits status
(Actual > Status > Operation bits)
OPERATION BIT 1...24 These 24 bits are the outputs of each possible Operation modules, programmed in menu
Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Operations. The light up LED indicates their status 1
(activation)
OPERATION BITS
OPERATION BIT 1
OPERATION BIT 2
…
OPERATION BIT 24
6.2.2 Breaker status

The signals associated with the opened or closed status of the breaker can be monitored at Actual > Status > Breaker
BREAKER STATUS
BREAKER OPEN
BREAKER CLOSED
BREAKER UNDEFINED
BREAKER OPEN: Open breaker status. In the switchgear selected as breaker, besides providing the usual
switchgear contact status, the system provides also the open breaker, closed breaker, and
undefined breaker states.
BREAKER CLOSED: Breaker closed.
BREAKER UNDEFINED: If there are two digital inputs configured for breaker contacts 52/a and 52/b, this status is present
when both inputs are at 0 or at 1. This status can be caused by a wiring failure, failure of auxiliary
elements, etc.

CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES 6.2 STATUS
6.2.3 Protection status
6.2.3.1 Protection blocks

(Actual > Status > Protection > Protection Blocks)
This screen shows the entire protection element blocks available. If the protection element is blocked, the green LED
located on the right side of the text lights up and remains lit as long as the element remains blocked.
Protection elements block signals are configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements.
Table 6-2: PROTECTION ELEMENTS BLOCK
IOC BLOCK SIGNALS TOC BLOCK SIGNALS DIRECTIONAL BLOCKS VOLTAGE BLOCKS
PH IOC1 HIGH A /B / C BLK PH TOC1 HIGH A /B /C BLK PHASE DIR1 BLK INP PHASE UV1 BLOCK
PH IOC1 LOW A /B / C BLK PH TOC1 LOW A /B /C BLK NEUTRAL DIR1 BLK INP PHASE OV1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK GROUND DIR1 BLK INP NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH BLK
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK GROUND TOC1 BLOCK SENS GND DIR1 BLK IP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW BLK
SENS GND IOC1 BLK SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK POWER BLOCKS AUXILIARY UV1 BLOCK
SENS GND IOC2 BLK SENS GND TOC2 BLOCK FWD PWR1 BLOCK AUXILIARY UV2 BLOCK
SENS GND IOC3 BLK SENS GND TOC3 BLOCK FWD PWR2 BLOCK AUXILIARY UV3 BLOCK
ISOLATED GROUND BLOCKS NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK FWD PWR3 BLOCK AUXILIARY OV1 BLOCK
ISOLATED GND1 BLK NEG SEQ TOC2 BLOCK DIR PWR1 BLOCK AUXILIARY OV2 BLOCK
ISOLATED GND2 BLK NEG SEQ TOC3 BLOCK DIR PWR2 BLOCK AUXILIARY OV3 BLOCK
ISOLATED GND3 BLK THERMAL MODEL BLOCKS DIR PWR3 BLOCK NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK
SETTING GROUPS BLOCK IP THERMAL1 BLOCK 32N1 HIGH BLOCK NEG SEQ OV2 BLOCK
SETT GROUPS BLOCK THERMAL2 BLOCK 32N2 HIGH BLOCK NEG SEQ OV3 BLOCK
GENERAL TRIP BLOCK THERMAL3 BLOCK 32N3 HIGH BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR BLK
GENERAL TRIP BROKEN CONDUCTOR BLK 32N1 LOW BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT1 BLK 32N2 LOW BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR2 BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT2 BLK 32N3 LOW BLOCK LOCKED ROTOR3 BLK
BROKEN CONDUCT3 BLK FREQUENCY BLOCKS LOAD ENCROACHMENT BLKS
OVERFREQ1 BLOCK LOAD ENCR1 BLOCK
OVERFREQ Q4 BLOCK MOTOR BLK
OVERFREQ Q5 BLOCK NUM OF STARTS BLOCKS
OVERFREQ Q6 BLOCK COLD LOAD BLK
UNDERFREQ1 BLOCK COLD LOAD BLOCK
UNDERFREQ2 BLOCK
UNDERFREQ3 BLOCK
UNDERFREQ Q4 BLOCK
UNDERFREQ Q5 BLOCK
UNDERFREQ Q6 BLOCK

6.2.3.2 Phase current

This screen shows the pickup and trip for all phase instantaneous and time overcurrent elements in the F650 and block
and operation signals provided by the phase directional units. Any of these two events of any phase element lights up the
corresponding LED in this screen, and it remains lit as the associated function remains in pickup or operation. All the values
are provided for phases and total as shown on the table below.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual> Status > Protection > Phase Current, and includes the following signaling LEDs:
Table 6-3: Phase current actual values
PHASE IOC ACTUAL VALUES PHASE IOC ACTUAL VALUES PHASE DIRECTIONAL ACTUAL VALUES
PH IOC1 HIGH A / B / C PKP PH TOC1 HIGH A / B / C PKP PHASE DIR1 BLOCK A
PH IOC1 HIGH A / B / C OP PH TOC1 HIGH A / B / C OP PHASE DIR1 A OP
PH IOC1 HIGH PKP PH TOC1 HIGH PKP PHASE DIR1 BLOCK B
PH IOC1 HIGH OP PH TOC1 HIGH OP PHASE DIR1 B OP
PH IOC2 HIGH A / B / C PKP PH TOC2 HIGH A / B / C PKP PHASE DIR1 BLOCK C
PH IOC2 HIGH A / B / C OP PH TOC2 HIGH A / B / C OP PHASE DIR1 C OP
PH IOC2 HIGH PKP PH TOC2 HIGH PKP PHASE DIR2 BLOCK A
PH IOC2 HIGH OP PH TOC2 HIGH OP PHASE DIR2 A OP
PH IOC3 HIGH A / B / C PKP PH TOC3 HIGH A / B / C PKP PHASE DIR2 BLOCK B
PH IOC3 HIGH A / B / C OP PH TOC3 HIGH A / B / C OP PHASE DIR2 B OP
PH IOC3 HIGH PKP PH TOC3 HIGH PKP PHASE DIR2 BLOCK C
PH IOC3 HIGH OP PH TOC3 HIGH OP PHASE DIR2 C OP
PH IOC1 LOW A / B / C PKP PH TOC1 LOW A / B / C PKP PHASE DIR3 BLOCK A
PH IOC1 LOW A / B / C OP PH TOC1 LOW A / B / C OP PHASE DIR3 A OP
PH IOC1 LOW PKP PH TOC1 LOW PKP PHASE DIR3 BLOCK B
PH IOC1 LOW OP PH TOC1 LOW OP PHASE DIR3 B OP
PH IOC2 LOW A / B / C PKP PH TOC2 LOW A / B / C PKP PHASE DIR3 BLOCK C
PH IOC2 LOW A / B / C OP PH TOC2 LOW A / B / C OP PHASE DIR3 C OP
PH IOC2 LOW PKP PH TOC2 LOW PKP
PH IOC2 LOW OP PH TOC2 LOW OP
PH IOC3 LOW A / B / C PKP PH TOC3 LOW A / B / C PKP
PH IOC3 LOW A / B / C OP PH TOC3 LOW A / B / C OP
PH IOC3 LOW PKP PH TOC3 LOW PKP
PH IOC3 LOW OP PH TOC3 LOW OP
6.2.3.3 Neutral current

This screen shows the pickup and trip for all neutral instantaneous and time overcurrent elements in the F650 and block
and operation signals provided by the neutral directional units. Any of these two events of any neutral element lights up
the corresponding LED in this screen, and it remains lit as the associated function remains in pickup or operation.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual > Status > Protection > Neutral Current, and includes the following signaling
LEDs:
Table 6-4: Neutral current actual values
NEUTRAL IOC ACTUAL NEUTRAL TOC ACTUAL NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL
VALUES VALUES ACTUAL VALUES
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP NEUTRAL DIR1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP NEUTRAL TOC1 OP NEUTRAL DIR1 OP

6.2.3.4 Ground current

This screen shows the pickup and trip for all ground instantaneous and time overcurrent elements in the F650 and block
and operation signals provided by the ground directional units. Any of these two events for any ground element light up
the corresponding LED in this screen, and it remains lit as the associated function remains in pickup or operation.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual > Status > Protection > Ground Current, and includes the following signaling
LEDs:
Table 6-5: Ground current actual values
GROUND IOC ACTUAL GROUND TOC ACTUAL GROUND DIRECTIONAL

VALUES VALUES ACTUAL VALUES
GROUND IOC1 PKP GROUND TOC1 PKP GROUND DIR1 BLOCK
GROUND IOC1 OP GROUND TOC1 OP GROUND DIR1 OP
6.2.3.5 Sensitive ground current

This screen shows the pickup and trip for all sensitive ground instantaneous, time overcurrent and isolated ground
elements in the F650 and block and operation signals provided by the sensitive ground directional units. Any of these two
events of any ground element lights up the corresponding LED in this screen, and it remains lit while the associated
function remains in pickup or operation.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual > Status > Protection >Sensitive Ground Current, and includes the following
signaling LEDs:
Table 6-6: Sensitive ground current actual values
SENSITIVE GROUND IOC SENSITIVE GROUND TOC ISOLATED GROUND ACTUAL SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL
ACTUAL VALUES ACTUAL VALUES VALUES ACTUAL VALUES
SENS GND IOC1 PKP SENS GND TOC1 PKP ISOLATED GND1 PKP SENS GND DIR1 BLOCK
SENS GND IOC1 OP SENS GND TOC1 OP ISOLATED GND1 OP SENS GND DIR1 OP

6.2.3.6 Negative sequence current

This screen shows the pickup and trip for negative sequence elements in the F650. Any of these two events of any ground
element lights up the corresponding LED in this screen, and it remains lit while the associated function remains in pickup or
operation.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual> Status > Protection >Negative Sequence Current, and includes the following
signaling LEDs:
Table 6-7: Negative sequence current actual values
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC ACTUAL VALUES
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP
NEG SEQ TOC1 OP
NEG SEQ TOC2 PKP
NEG SEQ TOC2 OP
NEG SEQ TOC3 PKP
NEG SEQ TOC3 OP
6.2.3.7 Thermal model

F650 units incorporate up to 3 thermal image elements. For each of them, this screen shows by means of green LEDs, the
activation of the reset, alarm, operation and thermal image signals for each phase (A, B, C) and each unit (1, 2, 3). Any of the
reset, alarm and operation signals light up the corresponding LED in this screen, and it remains lit as the associated
function remains in reset, pickup or operation. This function also provides the thermal image value for all the phases and
functions in percentage. All the values are provided individually for phases and for the three thermal elements.
This screen is accessed in menu: Actual> Status > Protection >Thermal image, and includes the following signaling LEDs:
Table 6-8: Thermal model actual values
THERMAL IMAGE RESET THERMAL IMAGE ALARM THERMAL IMAGE OPERATION THERMAL IMAGE VALUE
SIGNALS SIGNALS SIGNALS IN %
THERMAL1 ALARM THERMAL1 OP
THERMAL1 A RST THERMAL1 A ALARM THERMAL1 A OP THERMAL1 IMAGE A
THERMAL1 B RST THERMAL1 B ALARM THERMAL1 B OP THERMAL1 IMAGE B
THERMAL1 C RST THERMAL1 C ALARM THERMAL1 C OP THERMAL1 IMAGE C

6.2.3.8 Voltage
This screen shows the activation of all voltage elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu: Actual >
Status > Protection > Voltage, and it includes the following signaling LEDs.
The values shown are:
Pickup and operation signals for phase to ground and phase-to-phase undervoltage elements and the three-phase signal
for pickup and operation for the undervoltage element.
Pickup and operation for negative sequence overvoltage element.
Pickup and operation signals for phase-to-phase overvoltage elements and the three-phase signal for pickup and
operation for the overvoltage element.
Pickup and operation for neutral overvoltage elements (High and low).
Pickup and operation for auxiliary undervoltage and overvoltage elements.
Table 6-9: Voltage actual values
UNDERVOLTAGE ACTUAL VALUES OVERVOLTAGE ACTUAL NEUTRAL OV (HIGH AND LOW)

VALUES ACTUAL VALUES
PHASE UV1 A PKP PHASE UV2 AB OP PHASE OV1 AB PKP NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH PKP
PHASE UV1 A OP PHASE UV2 BC PKP PHASE OV1 AB OP NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH OP
PHASE UV1 B PKP PHASE UV2 BC OP PHASE OV1 BC PKP NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH PKP
PHASE UV1 B OP PHASE UV2 CA PKP PHASE OV1 BC OP NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH OP
PHASE UV1 C PKP PHASE UV2 CA OP PHASE OV1 CA PKP NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH PKP
PHASE UV1 C OP PHASE UV2 PKP PHASE OV1 CA OP NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH OP
PHASE UV1 AB PKP PHASE UV2 OP PHASE OV1 PKP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW PKP
PHASE UV1 AB OP PHASE UV3 A PKP PHASE OV1 OP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW OP
PHASE UV1 BC PKP PHASE UV3 A OP PHASE OV2 AB PKP NEUTRAL OV2 LOW PKP
PHASE UV1 BC OP PHASE UV3 B PKP PHASE OV2 AB OP NEUTRAL OV2 LOW OP
PHASE UV1 CA PKP PHASE UV3 B OP PHASE OV2 BC PKP NEUTRAL OV3 LOW PKP
PHASE UV1 CA OP PHASE UV3 C PKP PHASE OV2 BC OP NEUTRAL OV3 LOW OP
PHASE UV1 PKP PHASE UV3 C OP PHASE OV2 CA PKP AUXILIARY OV
PHASE UV1 OP PHASE UV3 AB PKP PHASE OV2 CA OP AUXILIARY OV1 PKP
PHASE UV2 A PKP PHASE UV3 AB OP PHASE OV2 PKP AUXILIARY OV1 OP
PHASE UV2 A OP PHASE UV3 BC PKP PHASE OV2 OP AUXILIARY OV2 PKP
PHASE UV2 B PKP PHASE UV3 BC OP PHASE OV3 AB PKP AUXILIARY OV2 OP
PHASE UV2 B OP PHASE UV3 CA PKP PHASE OV3 AB OP AUXILIARY OV3 PKP
PHASE UV2 C PKP PHASE UV3 CA OP PHASE OV3 BC PKP AUXILIARY OV3 OP
PHASE UV2 C OP PHASE UV3 PKP PHASE OV3 BC OP AUXILIARY UV
PHASE UV2 AB PKP PHASE UV3 OP PHASE OV3 CA PKP AUXILIARY UV1 PKP
PHASE OV3 CA OP AUXILIARY UV1 OP
PHASE OV3 PKP AUXILIARY UV2 PKP
PHASE OV3 OP AUXILIARY UV2 OP
NEGATIVE SEQ OV1 PKP AUXILIARY UV3 PKP
NEGATIVE SEQ OV1 OP AUXILIARY UV3 OP
NEGATIVE SEQ OV2 PKP
NEGATIVE SEQ OV2 OP
NEGATIVE SEQ OV3 PKP
NEGATIVE SEQ OV3 OP

6.2.3.9 Power
Forward Power and directional power elements
These functions may have several applications, for example, small generating plants connected to the power system, to
limit the supplied power and not to exceed its rated capacity.
If programmed conditions for any of the three elements are met, the corresponding LEDs lights up.
This screen shows the activation of all power elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu: Actual>
Status > Protection >Power, and it includes the following signaling LEDs.
Table 6-10: Power actual values
FORWARD POWER ACTUAL VALUES DIRECTIONAL POWER ACTUAL VALUES wattmetric GROUND fault actual values
FWD PWR1 STG1 PKP DIR PWR1 STG1 PKP 32N1 HIGH PKP
FWD PWR1 STG1 OP DIR PWR1 STG1 OP 32N1 HIGH OC PKP
FWD PWR1 STG2 PKP DIR PWR1 STG2 PKP 32N1 HIGH OP
FWD PWR1 STG2 OP DIR PWR1 STG2 OP 32N2 HIGH PKP
FWD PWR2 STG1 PKP DIR PWR1 STG PKP 32N2 HIGH OC PKP
FWD PWR2 STG1 OP DIR PWR1 STG OP 32N2 HIGH OP
FWD PWR2 STG2 PKP DIR PWR2 STG1 PKP 32N3 HIGH PKP
FWD PWR2 STG2 OP DIR PWR2 STG1 OP 32N3 HIGH OC PKP
FWD PWR3 STG1 PKP DIR PWR2 STG2 PKP 32N3 HIGH OP
FWD PWR3 STG1 OP DIR PWR2 STG2 OP 32N1 LOW PKP
FWD PWR3 STG2 PKP DIR PWR2 STG PKP 32N1 LOW OC PKP
FWD PWR3 STG2 OP DIR PWR2 STG OP 32N1 LOW OP
DIR PWR3 STG1 PKP 32N2 LOW PKP
DIR PWR3 STG1 OP 32N2 LOW OC PKP
DIR PWR3 STG2 PKP 32N2 LOW OP
DIR PWR3 STG2 OP 32N3 LOW PKP
DIR PWR3 STG PKP 32N3 LOW OC PKP
DIR PWR3 STG OP 32N3 LOW OP
wattmetric GROUND FAULT POWER
MEASUREMENT ACTUAL VALUES
32N1 HIGH POWER
32N2 HIGH POWER
32N3 HIGH POWER
32N1 LOW POWER
32N2 LOW POWER
32N3 LOW POWER

6.2.4 Control element status
6.2.4.1 Frequency
F650 units incorporate three overfrequency and three underfrequency units. For each of them there are two magnitudes
pickup and trip (operation).
Frequency elements are often used in generating plants, as well as in the connection of substations to the main system.
Frequency monitoring is the base for synchronous machines protection application, with a couple of setting levels, as well
as for the development of automatic shedding functions and underfrequency reset.
This screen shows the activation of all frequency elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu:
Actual> Status > Control Elements >Frequency, and it includes the following signaling LEDs.
Table 6-11: Frequency actual values
OVERFREQUENCY ACTUAL VALUES UNDERFREQUENCY ACTUAL VALUES
OVERFREQ1 PKP UNDERFREQ1 PKP
OVERFREQ1 OP UNDERFREQ1 OP
FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE ACTUAL
VALUES
FREQ RATE1 PKP
FREQ RATE1 OP
FREQ RATE2 PKP
FREQ RATE2 OP
FREQ RATE3 PKP
FREQ RATE3 OP

6.2.4.2 Synchrocheck
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Synchrocheck, and it includes the following signaling
LEDs for the synchronism check function:
Table 6-12: Synchrocheck actual values
SYNCHROCHECK ACTUAL VALUES
Synchrocheck BLK INP
Synchrocheck OP
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
Synchrocheck COND OP
DL-DB OPERATION
DL-LB OPERATION
LL-DB OPERATION
SLIP CONDITION
BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ
BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ
VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE
FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE
Synchrocheck BLK INP: Block signal for the synchrocheck unit, configurable at Setpoint > Relay
Synchrocheck OP: Closing permission signal in live line-live bus conditions with open breaker.
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM: General Closing permission of the Synchronism unit. It contemplates all possible
situations, live line-live bus conditions, and the closing permission logics (dead line-
dead bus, live line- dead bus, dead line-live bus). Note: in case the Function is disabled,
the Closing permission signal is activated in order not to interfere with possible logics
where it is included. If the synchronism unit is enabled, this signal only activates under
the closing conditions established by setting.
Synchrocheck COND OP: Closing permission according to permission logics (DL-DB, LL-DB, DL-LB).
DL-DB OPERATION: Closing permission in dead line – dead bus condition.
DL-LB OPERATION: Closing permission in dead line – live bus condition.
LL-DB OPERATION: Closing permission in live line – dead bus condition.
SLIP CONDITION: Internal signal indicating frequency slip between the line voltage and bus voltage
phasors.
BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ: Busbar Frequency higher than line frequency
BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ: Busbar Frequency lower than line frequency
VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE: Voltage difference between the line and the busbar in volts (secondary values), only
available if the Synchrocheck element is enabled.
FREQ. DIFFERENCE: Frequency difference between the line and the busbar in Hz, only available if the
Synchrocheck element is enabled.
6.2.4.3 Autoreclose
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Autoreclose, and it includes the following signaling
LEDs for the Autoreclose function:
Table 6-13: Autoreclose actual values
AUTORECLOSE INPUTS
AR LEVEL BLOCK

AR PULSE BLOCK
AR PULSE UNBLOCK
AR INITIATE
AR CONDS INPUT
AUTORECLOSE INTERNAL STATUS
AR CLOSE BREAKER
AR OUT OF SERVICE
AR READY
AR LOCKOUT
AR BLOCK
AR RCL IN PROGRESS
AR LCK BY ANOMALY
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE
AR LCK BY USER
AR LCK BY CONDS
AR LCK BY TRIPS
AR LCK BY SHOTS
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL
AR BLOCK BY PULSE
AR STATUS
AR LOCKOUT MODE
AR BLOCK MODE
AUTORECST_61850
The AUTORECLOSE INPUTS are signal configurable by the user at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements
to:
AR LEVEL BLOCK: programmable signal to block the autoreclose unit by level
AR PULSE BLOCK: programmable signal to block the autoreclose unit by pulse
AR PULSE UNBLOCK: programmable signal to unblock the autoreclose unit by pulse
AR INITIATE: programmable signal to initiate the autoreclose.
AR CONDS INPUT: programmable signal to set the conditions to be met before executing a breaker close.

The AUTORECLOSE INTERNAL STATUS are internal signals provided by the autoreclose unit:
AR CLOSE BREAKER: Breaker close command given by the autoreclose
AR OUT OF SERVICE: Autoreclose out of service (Disabled)
AR READY: Autoreclose in service
AR LOCKOUT: Autoreclose in lockout status (finished cycled-definite trip)
AR BLOCK: Autoreclose blocked (by input, logic, others, etc).
AR RCL IN PROGRESS: Cycle in course (autoreclose in progress).
AR LCK BY ANOMALY: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by anomaly.
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by a failure in opening the breaker.
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by a failure in closing the breaker.
AR LCK BY USER: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by manual close.
AR LCK BY CONDS: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by conditions. See input conditions configuration.
AR LCK BY TRIPS: Autoreclose in “Lockout” by maximum number of trips.
AR LCK BY SHOTS: Autoreclose in “Lockout” at the end of cycle – Definite trip.
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 1st shot.
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 2nd shot.
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 3rd shot.
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT: Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 4th shot.
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL: Autoreclose blocked by level. See AR block signals configuration
AR BLOCK BY PULSE: Autoreclose blocked by pulse. See AR block signals configuration
AR STATUS: Autoreclose status (in service – out of service)
AR LOCKOUT MODE: Relay “Lockout” status.
AR BLOCK MODE: Relay “Block” status
AutoRecSt_61850: Autorecloser status sent in IEC 61850. This value represent whether or not the auto reclosing is ready, in
progress or successful. It is an enumerate type whose values are defined in IEC 61850-7-4 Edition 2.0 standard and it is
available
6.2.4.4 Breaker failure

This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Breaker Failure, and it includes the following
signaling LEDs for the breaker failure function:
Table 6-14: Breaker failure actual values
BREAKER FAILURE ACTUAL VALUES
BKR FAIL INITIATE
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT
BKR FAIL SUPERVISION
BKR FAIL HISET
BKR FAIL LOWSET
INTERNAL ARC
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP
BKR FAIL INITIATE External signal for breaker failure initiation. (configurable at Settings> Relay Configuration >
Protection Elements).
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT Signal for breaker failure without current

BKR FAIL SUPERVISION Signal for supervision level breaker failure (retrip)
BKR FAIL HISET Signal for high-level breaker failure
BKR FAIL LOWSET Signal for low-level breaker failure
INTERNAL ARC Signal for internal arc
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP Signal for Second level breaker failure (high and low)
6.2.4.5 VT fuse failure

This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements >VT Fuse Failure, and it includes only one LEDs for the
VT fuse failure function, indicating the activation of the unit.
Table 6-15: VT fuse failure actual values
VT FUSE FAILURE ACTUAL VALUES
VT FUSE FAILURE
6.2.4.6 Broken conductor

F650 units incorporate three Broken Conductor elements for special applications that may require different timing steps or
levels for alarm or trip purposes.
The green LED lights up when the pickup or trip (operation) of each of the three available functions is activated. The three
functions are identical and can be configured separately.
These functions compare the negative and positive sequence current levels per phase. If this magnitude exceeds a
programmable threshold and is maintained for a programmable time delay, a tripping output is issued. If a pickup or
operation is produced, the corresponding LED in this screen lights up.
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Broken Conductor, and it includes the following
signaling LEDs for the breaker failure function:
Table 6-16: Broken conductor actual values
BROKEN CONDUCTOR ACTUAL VALUES
BROKEN CONDUCT1 PKP
BROKEN CONDUCT1 OP
BROKEN CONDUCT2 PKP
BROKEN CONDUCT2 OP
BROKEN CONDUCT3 PKP
BROKEN CONDUCT3 OP
6.2.4.7 Setting groups

This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Control Elements > Setting Groups, and it includes activation and block
signals for the relay setting groups change in the following signaling LEDs:
Table 6-17: Setting group actual values for firmware version 7.50 or above
SETTING GROUPS ACTUAL VALUES
GROUP 1 ACT ON
GROUP 2 ACT ON
GROUP 3 ACT ON
GROUP 4 ACT ON
GROUP 5 ACT ON
GROUP 6 ACT ON
ACTIVE GROUP

6.2.4.8 Locked rotor

F650 units incorporate three locked rotor units. For each of them there are two magnitudes pickup and trip (operation).
This screen shows the activation of all locked rotor elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu:
Actual> Status > Control Elements > Locked Rotor, and it includes the following signaling LEDs.
Table 6-18: Locked rotor actual values
LOCKED ROTOR ACTUAL VALUES
LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR1 OP
LOCKED ROTOR2 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR2 OP
LOCKED ROTOR3 PKP
LOCKED ROTOR3 OP
6.2.4.9 Pulse counters

F650 units incorporate eight pulse counters. For each of them there are two magnitudes: the actual value and the freeze
value.
This screen shows the activation of all pulse counters available in the F650. It can be accessed from the menu:
Actual> Status > Control Elements > Pulse counters, and it includes the following values.
Table 6-19: Pulse counter actual values
PULSE COUNTERS ACTUAL VALUES

CntPulses Value 1
CntPulses Value 2
CntPulses Value 3
CntPulses Value 4
CntPulses Value 5
CntPulses Value 6
CntPulses Value 7
CntPulses Value 8
CntPulses Freeze 1
CntPulses Freeze 2
CntPulses Freeze 3
CntPulses Freeze 4
CntPulses Freeze 5
CntPulses Freeze 6
CntPulses Freeze 7
CntPulses Freeze 8
Cnt Pulses Freeze
Cnt Pulses Unfreeze
Cnt Pulses Reset
6.2.4.10 Analog comparators

F650 units incorporate 20 analog comparators. This screen can be accessed from the menu:
Actual> Status > Control Elements >Analog Comparators and it includes the following signalling LEDs showing the ON/
OFF status of the analog level.
Table 6-20: Analog comparators actual values

ANALOG COMPARATORS ACTUAL VALUES

Analog Level 01
Analog Level 02
Analog Level 03
Analog Level 04
Analog Level 05
Analog Level 06
Analog Level 07
Analog Level 08
Analog Level 09
Analog Level 10
Analog Level 11
Analog Level 12
Analog Level 13
Analog Level 14
Analog Level 15
Analog Level 16
Analog Level 17
Analog Level 18
Analog Level 19
Analog Level 20
6.2.4.11 Load encroachment

F650 units incorporate three load encroachment units. For each of them there are two magnitudes, pickup and trip
(operation).
This screen shows the activation of all load encroachment elements available in the F650. It can be accessed from the
menu:
Actual> Status > Control Elements > Load Encroachment, and it includes the following signalling LEDs.
Table 6-21: Load encroachment actual values

LOAD ENCROACHMENT ACTUAL VALUES
LOAD ENCR1 PKP
LOAD ENCR1 OP
LOAD ENCR2 PKP
LOAD ENCR2 OP
LOAD ENCR3 PKP
LOAD ENCR3 OP

6.2.4.12 Maximum number of starts

This screen can be accessed at Actual > Status > Control Elements > Max. Number of Starts, and it includes one LEDs
for the Maximum Number of Starts function, indicating the activation of the unit. There are also two magnitudes global starts
and block lockout time.
Table 6-22: Table 6-24: Maximum number of starts actual values
MAX. NUMBER OF STARTS

ACTUAL VALUES
NUMBER OF STARTS OP
GLOBAL STARTS CNT
BLOCK LOCKOUT TIME
6.2.4.13 Digital counters

This screen can be accessed at Actual > Status > Control Elements > Digital Counters, and it includes 24 LEDs for the
8 Digital Counters status, indicating which status is activate (HI, LO or EQ).
Table 6-23: Digital counter actual values
DIGITAL COUNTERS ACTUAL

VALUES
DIGCNT 1 HI
DIGCNT 2 HI
DIGCNT 3 HI
DIGCNT 4 HI
DIGCNT 5 HI
DIGCNT 6 HI
DIGCNT 7 HI
DIGCNT 8 HI
DIGCNT 1 EQ
DIGCNT 2 EQ
DIGCNT 3 EQ
DIGCNT 4 EQ
DIGCNT 5 EQ
DIGCNT 6 EQ
DIGCNT 7 EQ
DIGCNT 8 EQ
DIGCNT 1 LO
DIGCNT 2 LO
DIGCNT 3 LO
DIGCNT 4 LO
DIGCNT 5 LO
DIGCNT 6 LO
DIGCNT 7 LO
DIGCNT 8 LO
DIGCNT 1 VALUE
DIGCNT 2 VALUE
DIGCNT 3 VALUE
DIGCNT 4 VALUE
DIGCNT 5 VALUE
DIGCNT 6 VALUE
DIGCNT 7 VALUE

DIGCNT 8 VALUE
DIGCNT 1 FROZENVALUE
DIGCNT 1 FROZENDATE
DIGCNT 2 FROZENDATE
DIGCNT 3 FROZENDATE
DIGCNT 4 FROZENDATE
DIGCNT 5 FROZENDATE
DIGCNT 6 FROZENDATE
DIGCNT 7 FROZENDATE
DIGCNT 8 FROZENDATE
For each of the 8 digital counters, there exist independent and identical groups of actual values:
• DIGCNT # HI [OFF: ON]: If this bit is activated, the counter value DIGCNT # VALUE is greater than the setting DigCNt
#Compare value.
• DIGCNT # EQ [OFF: ON]: If this bit is activated, the counter value DIGCNT # VALUE is equal than the setting DigCNt
#Compare value.
• DIGCNT # LO [OFF: ON]: If this bit is activated, the counter value DIGCNT # VALUE is lower than the setting DigCNt
#Compare value.
(These 3 previous states are mutually exclusive: only one can be ON at the same time. If the counter is Disabled, the 3 of
them are OFF.)
• DIGCNT # VALUE [-2,147,483,648 : 2,147,483,647]: The specified counter current value.
• DIGCNT # FROZENVALUE [-2,147,483,648 : 2,147,483,647]: The specified counter last captured (frozen) value.
• DIGCNT # FROZENDATE [Valid date]: The specified counter last captured (frozen) date.
6.2.4.14 Cold load pickup

This screen can be accessed at Actual > Status > Control Elements > Cold Load Pickup, and it includes two LEDs for
the Cold Load Pickup function, indicating two magnitudes; pickup and trip (operation).
Table 6-24: Cold load pickup actual values
COLD LOAD PICKUP

Cold Load PKP
Cold Load OP

6.2.4.15 60CTS failure

This screen can be accessed at Actual > Status > Control Elements > 60CTS Inhibit, and it includes two LEDs for the
Current Transformer Supervision element, indicating two magnitudes; pickup and trip (operation).
Table 6-25: 60CTS inhibit actual values
60CTS Inhibit
CT Failure PKP
CT Failure OP
6.2.4.16 2nd HRMC Inhibit

This screen can be accessed at Actual > Status > Control Elements > 2nd HRMC Inhibit.
Table 6-26: 2nd HRMC inhibit actual values
2nd HRMC Inhibit

2nd Harmonic PKP
2nd Harmonic OP
2nd Harmonic Phase A
2nd Harmonic Phase B
2nd Harmonic Phase C
6.2.5 Protection & control status summary

Actual > Status > Protection Summary . This screen shows a complete listing of all protection and control elements in the
relay, showing their status (enabled or not) through the corresponding LED.
6.2.6 Snapshot event summary

Actual > Status > Snapshot Event Summary
The F650 provides via setting the possibility to enable or disable the snapshot event generation in the different functions
available in the device.
This screen shows a complete listing of the snapshot event generation for all the protection, control and inputs/outputs
elements in the relay, showing their status (enabled or not) through the corresponding LED.
6.2.7 MODBUS user map

The ModBus User Map consists of a selection of the most important 256 records in the complete ModBus Map regarding
the application. By selecting these records and defining the user map appropriately, it is possible to read all the
information included by a single ModBus reading operation, optimizing the refresh time.
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status> ModBus User Map, and it includes all the readings for the previously
configured records in the ModBus memory map.
Table 6-27: MODBUS user map actual values
MODBUS USER MAP
Address 00
Address 01
…
Address 255

6.2.8 Switchgear status

Actual > Status > Switchgear Status
For a better understanding of the represented statuses in this screen, figure 6.1 shows the available “Switchgear” modules
to be programmed in the F650. Each of them has a series of inputs/outputs that are the statuses represented on this
screen. Separate signal for each switchgear device (for 1 to 16).
Each Switchgear module can be programmed at: Setpoint > Relay Configuration >Switchgear, and its statuses are as
follows:
Table 6-28: Switchgear status
SWITCHGEAR 1 STATUS SWITCHGEAR X STATUS SWITCHGEAR 16 STATUS
SWITCH 1 A INPUT … SWITCH X A INPUT … SWITCH 16 A INPUT
SWITCH 1 B INPUT … SWITCH X B INPUT … SWITCH 16 B INPUT
SWITCH 1 A STATUS … SWITCH X A STATUS … SWITCH 16 A STATUS
SWITCH 1 B STATUS … SWITCH X B STATUS … SWITCH 16 B STATUS
SWITCH 1 OPEN … SWITCH X OPEN … SWITCH 16 OPEN
SWITCH 1 CLOSED … SWITCH X CLOSED … SWITCH 16 CLOSED
SWITCH 1 00_ERROR … SWITCH X 00_ERROR … SWITCH 16 00_ERROR
SWITCH 1 11_ERROR … SWITCH X 11_ERROR … SWITCH 16 11_ERROR
SWITCH 1 OPEN INIT … SWITCH X OPEN INIT … SWITCH 16 OPEN INIT
SWITCH 1 CLOSE INIT … SWITCH X CLOSE INIT … SWITCH 16 CLOSE INIT
SWGR 1 FAIL TO OPEN … SWGR X FAIL TO OPEN … SWGR 16 FAIL TO OPEN
SWGR 1 FAIL TO CLOSE … SWGR X FAIL TO CLOSE … SWGR 16 FAIL TO CLOSE
SWITCH X A INPUT The LED lights up when the input associated with switchgear Contact A is activated.
SWITCH X B INPUT The LED lights up when the input associated with switchgear Contact B is activated.
SWITCH X A STATUS Status associated with Switchgear contact A. It is activated once the time required for the
Switchgear module to acknowledge contact A has expired.
SWITCH X B STATUS Status associated with Switchgear contact B. It is activated once the time required for the
Switchgear module to acknowledge contact B has expired.
SWITCH X OPEN Lights up when the associated switchgear is open
SWITCH X CLOSED Lights up when the associated switchgear is closed
SWITCH X 00_ERROR Output that represents the Switchgear status 00, considered as abnormal.
SWITCH X 11_ERROR Output that represents the Switchgear status 11, considered as abnormal.
SWITCH X OPEN INIT Programmable input that indicates the initiation of the Opening Operation for the considered
switchgear.
SWITCH X CLOSE INIT Programmable input that indicates the initiation of the closing Operation for the considered
switchgear.
SWGR X FAIL TO OPEN Output that represents a failure to open, from the associated external device (opening time
exceeded)
SWGR X FAIL TO CLOSE Output that represents a failure to close from the associated external device (closing time
exceeded)

See the following figure:
SWITCH X OPEN SWGR X FAIL TO OPEN

INIT
SWITCH X CLOSE SWGR X FAIL TO CLOSE

INIT
SWITCH X A SWITCH X A STATUS

INPUT
SWITCH X B SWITCH X B STATUS

INPUT
SWITCH X OPEN
SWITCH X
CLOSED
Switchgear logic
module SWITCH X
00_ERROR
SWITCH X
11_ERROR
Figure 6-1: Switchgear contacts
6.2.9 Calibration status

This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Calibration, and it includes the internal calibration status for the relay.
Table 6-29: Calibration status
CALIBRATION
FACTORY CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION ERROR
CALIBRATION DATE
FACTORY CALIBRATION: This value is active when the relay calibration settings are the default values (no calibration).
CALIBRATION ERROR: Error shown when there is a problem in the calibration settings (wrong values).
CALIBRATION DATE: This value is showing date when relay was calibrated.

6.2.10 FlexCurves
This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > Flex Curves, and it includes the internal flex curves status.
If the LED associated with the FlexCurve status is lit up, this indicates that the user curve has been configured with new
values (not default values).
Table 6-30: FlexCurve status
FLEX CURVES STATUS
FLEXCURVE A STATUS
FLEXCURVE B STATUS
FLEXCURVE C STATUS
FLEXCURVE D STATUS
6.2.11 System info

This screen can be accessed at Actual> Status > System Info. It can monitor the system parameters and the internal status
of the Relay operating system.
Form firmware version prior to 7.00, System Info pop-up window shows general system information as described in the
table below:
Table 6-31: System info for firmware versions below 7.00
SYSTEM INFO
E2PROM STATUS
DSP COMM ERROR
MAGNETIC MODULE ERROR
Green Zone
Yellow Zone
Orange Zone
Red Zone
Kswapd Time
mtd2 Time
mtd2 Time
CPU Rtai
CPU Linux
Total RAM
Used DRAM
Free RAM
Shared RAM
Buffer RAM
Chached RAM
Green Counter
Yellow Counter
Orange Counter
Red Counter
Up Time

DSP Counter
ICD Status
MAC Address
Serial Number
Manufacturer date
• E2PROM status: LED associated lights in green if E2PROM is configured and working properly
• DSP comm error: LED associated lights in green if communication error between DSP and main processor.
• Magnetic module error: LED associated lights in green if communication error between DSP and magnetic module.
• Green/Yellow/Orange/Red Zones and Counters:
These 4 counters are referred to the total amount of free RAM available in the device. The
usual state should be Green zone and the rest of indicators means that the device can
have or stop some task just in case that they would need to prioritize the protection task.
• Kswapd Time: It should take value always to 0
• Mtd2 Time: Time accessing to this partition with Linux OS
• Mtd3 Time: Time accessing to this partition with Application
• CPU Rtai: Percentage corresponding to protection tasks execution
• CPU Linux: Percentage corresponding to rest of linux tasks execution
• Total RAM: Total RAM in the device
• Used DRAM: Used RAM in the device
• Free RAM: Available RAM in the device
• Chached RAM: Memory reserved for the Linux OS
• Up Time: Second from the last power-up
• DSP Counter: It shows that DSP is running
• ICD Status: Information about status of ICD file stored in the F650. For detailed information go to
Chapter 7, section 7.3.2.2 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR FEATURES FOR CONFIGURATION
• MAC address: MAC address assigned to Ethernet ports, Eth_1 and Eth_2.
• Serial number: Serial number of the relay that is communicating with Enervista 650 Setup.
• Manufacturing date: Date when the relay, connected to Enervista 650 Setup, was assembled.
Table 6-32: System info for firmware versions 7.00 and above
SYSTEM INFO
E2PROM STATUS
DSP COMM ERROR
PLC ERROR
NET CONF ERROR
ORDER CODE ERROR
Total RAM
Used DRAM
Free RAM
Up Time

DSP Counter
CPU Usage
ICD Status
ICD Status NOTVAL
DSP Status
FLASH Usage
KINETICS Usage
CPU Max Usage
Temp Current Value
Temp Max Value
Temp Min Value
Scan Cycle Average
Scan Cycle Rate
PLC Checksum
Settings Checksum
MAC Address
Serial Number
Manufacturer date
• E2PROM Status: LED associated lights in green if E2PROM is configured and working properly
• DSP COMM ERROR: LED associated lights in green if communication error between DSP and main
processor.
• Magnetic module error: LED associated lights in green if communication error between DSP and magnetic
module.
• Plc error: PLC equations sent to the relay have an error or are incorrect.
• Net conf error: Network configuration is incorrect
• Order code error: Order code and hardware configuration do not match
• Total RAM: Total RAM in the device
• Used DRAM: Used RAM in the device
• Free RAM: Available RAM in the device
• UpTime: DSP heartbeat
• DSP Counter: Percentage of CPU in use
• CPU Usage: Percentage of CPU in use
• ICD Status: Information about status of ICD file stored in the F650. For detailed information go to
Chapter 7, section 7.3.2.2 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR FEATURES FOR CONFIGURATION
• ICD Status NotVal: Information about validation of new ICD after being sent into the relay. For detailed
information go to Chapter 7, section 7.3.2.2 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR FEATURES FOR
CONFIGURATION
• Dsp Status: Internal status of the DSP
• Flash Usage: FLASH memory in use
• KINETIS Status: Kinetis working mode
• CPU MAX Usage: Maximum measured CPU usage
• Temp Current Value: Current temperature of CPU. This value is displayed in Celsius units.

• Temp Max Value: Maximum temperature reached by CPU during operating mode. This value is reset
This value is taken into account from last reboot.
• Temp Min Value: Maximum temperature reached by CPU after last reboot.
• Scan Cycle Average: Mean time in nanoseconds that takes a Scan cycle to run
• Scan Cycle Rate: Every miliseconds a Scan cycle is run
• PLC Checksum: Value of CRC of PLC equations. This value is read from the relay.
• Settings checksum: Value of CRC of relay settings. This value is read from the relay.
• MAC address: MAC address assigned to Ethernet port, Eth_E.
• Serial number: Serial number of the relay that is communicating with Enervista 650 Setup.
• Manufacturing date: Date when the relay, connected to Enervista 650 Setup, was assembled.
6.2.12 Record status

This screen shows part of the information related to the different records stored in the Relay, such as:
6.2.12.1 Fault reports

Actual> Status > Records Status > Fault Reports
Table 6-33: Fault report status
FAULT REPORT STATUS
FAULT REPORT TRIGG
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS
PreFault Ia Mod
PreFault Ia Ang
PreFault Ib Mod
PreFault Ib Ang
PreFault Ic Mod
PreFault Ic Ang
PreFault Vab Mod
PreFault Vab Ang
PreFault Vbc Mod
PreFault Vbc Ang
PreFault Vca Mod
PreFault Vca Ang
PreFault Ig Mod
PreFault Ig Ang
PreFault Isg Mod
PreFault Isg Ang
PostFault Ia Mod
PostFault Ia Ang
PostFault Ib Mod
PostFault Ib Ang
PostFault Ic Mod
PostFault Ic Ang
PostFault Vab Mod
PostFault Vab Ang
PostFault Vbc Mod
PostFault Vbc Ang
PostFault Vca Mod

PostFault Vca Ang

PostFault Ig Mod
PostFault Ig Ang
PostFault Isg Mod
PostFault Isg Ang
FAULT DATE
FAULT TYPE
FAULT LOCATION
FAULT REPORT NUMBER
R Primary
R Secondary
X Primary
X Secondary
FAULT RESISTANCE
• PreFault values: Prefault values for all the current and voltage units (Modulus (mod), Angle (deg))
• PostFault values: Postfault values for all the current and voltage units (Modulus (mod), Angle (deg))
• R Primary/ R Secondary: Primary/ Secondary Fault Resistance; this value represents the resistance in primary/
secondary values of the portion of the affected line until the defect.
• Secondary fault resistance: Resistance of Positive sequence x distance / Line Lenght;
• X Primary/X Secondary: Primary/ Secondary Fault Reactance. This value represents the reactance in primary/
secondary values of the portion of the affected line until the defect.
• Secondary fault reactance: Reactance of Positive sequence x distance / Line Lenght;
• Fault resistance: This value provides the estimated ground fault resistance in primary values of the fault
seen by the F650 by neglecting the resistance of the affected portion of the line.
• Fault report trigg: This signal indicates whether the signal that initiates the calculation of the distance to
the fault has been activated.
• Clear fault reports: This signal indicates the reset of fault reports.
• Fault date: Date and time of the last fault produced in the relay. In format (Day/Month/year
Hour:minutes:seconds.milliseconds)
• Fault type: Type of the last fault produced in the Relay (phase to ground, phase to phase, three-
phase, etc).
• Fault location: Location of the last fault produced in the relay.
• Fault report number: Number of fault reports

6.2.12.2 Control events

Actual> Status > Records Status > Control Events
In this screen Actual> Status > Records Status > Control Events, the status of the signals configured to launch the control
events can be seen, activated or not.
The F650 provides the possibility to configure 128 control events (at Settings > Relay Configuration > Control Events). In
the Actual > Records > Event Recorder > Control Events it is possible to see and retrieve the recorded control events to a
file, seeing the text and date and time and status of the preconfigured control event.
Table 6-34: Control event status
CONTROL EVENTS
CONTROL EVENT 1
CONTROL EVENT 2
…
CONTROL EVENT 128
6.2.12.3 Oscillography
Actual> Status > Records Status > Oscillography
The following figure shows the status of the different digital channels that can be programmed to be included in
oscillography records. When the signal associated with a specific channel is active, its LED lights up on this screen.
This screen also shows the oscillography trigger status, active or inactive, by lighting up that channel.
Table 6-35: Oscillography status
OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSC DIG CHANNEL 1
OSC DIG CHANNEL 2
OSC DIG CHANNEL 3
OSC DIG CHANNEL 4
OSC DIG CHANNEL 5
OSC DIG CHANNEL 6
OSC DIG CHANNEL 7
OSC DIG CHANNEL 8
OSC DIG CHANNEL 9
OSC DIG CHANNEL 10
OSC DIG CHANNEL 11
OSC DIG CHANNEL 12
OSC DIG CHANNEL 13
OSC DIG CHANNEL 14
OSC DIG CHANNEL 15
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
OSCILLO TRIGGER
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS
CYCLES PER RECORD
AVAILABLE RECORDS
The last three values shown are as follows:

NUMBER OF TRIGGERS: This is the number of the last oscillography record obtained in the relay. This value has a
range of 0 to 999.
CYCLES PER RECORD: This is the number of cycles contained in the oscillography record; this value depends on the
settings adjusted on the oscillography menu at Setpoint > Product Setup > Oscillography.
AVAILABLE RECORDS: This is the number of available oscillography records in the relay.
Values for these last 3 fields are reset every time the oscillography settings are modified.

6.2.12.4 Data logger

Actual> Status > Records Status > Data Logger
Table 6-36: Data logger status
DATA LOGGER
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS
DATA LOGGER DAYS
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME: Date and time of the oldest value stored in the data logger.
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME: Date and time of the most recent value stored in the data logger
DATA LOGGER CHANNELS: Number of channels configured in the data logger
DATA LOGGER DAYS: Time in days during which, samples are stored without overwriting them.
6.2.12.5 Demand
Actual> Status > Records Status > Demand
Table 6-37: Demand status
DEMAND
DEMAND TRIGGER INP
DEMAND RESET INP
DEMAND TRIGGER INP: Signal used for triggering the demand in the case of Rolling demand.
DEMAND RESET INP: Signal to reset the demand.
These signals can be configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements
6.2.12.6 Energy
Freeze/Unfreeze/reset Energy: These signals correspond to the relay energy counters statuses of freeze, unfreeze and
reset.
Actual> Status > Records Status > Energy
Table 6-38: Energy status
ENERGY
FREEZE ENERGY CNT
UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT
RESET ENERGY CNT
FREEZE ENERGY CNT: Signal used to freeze the energy counters for measurement purposes.
UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT: Signal used to unfreeze the energy counters.
RESET ENERGY CNT: Signal to reset the energy measurements and set the values to zero.
These signals can be configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements

6.2.12.7 Breaker maintenance

Actual> Status > Records Status > Breaker Maintenance
This screen shows the breaker status related to breaker maintenance. Other statuses are provided in the different
switchgear or breaker status signals.
Table 6-39: Breaker maintenance status
BREAKER MAINTENANCE INPUTS
RESET KI2t COUNTERS
RESET BKR COUNTERS
BREAKER MAINTENANCE STATUS
KI2t PHASE A ALARM
KI2t PHASE B ALARM
KI2t PHASE C ALARM
BKR OPENINGS ALARM
BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALARM
BREAKER OPENINGS
BREAKER CLOSINGS
KI2t PHASE A
KI2t PHASE B
KI2t PHASE C
BKR OPENING TIME
BKR CLOSING TIME
BKR OPEN TIMING
BKR CLOSE TIMING
The breaker maintenance inputs are signals that can be configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection
Elements:
RESET KI2t COUNTERS Signal to reset and set to zero all the KI2t counters (for all phases)
RESET BKR COUNTERS Signal to reset and set to zero all the breaker counters (number of openings and closings
and alarms)
KI2t PHASE A ALARM Alarm signal for maximum breaking capacity in phase A exceeded
KI2t PHASE B ALARM Alarm signal for maximum breaking capacity in phase B exceeded
KI2t PHASE C ALARM Alarm signal for maximum breaking capacity in phase C exceeded
BKR OPENINGS ALARM Alarm related to the maximum number of breaker openings
BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALARM Alarm related to the maximum number of breaker openings in one hour
BREAKER OPENINGS Counter of the total number of openings performed by the breaker
BREAKER CLOSINGS Counter of the total number of closings performed by the breaker
KI2t PHASE A kI2t phase A counter (total accumulative breaking level – phase A)
KI2t PHASE B kI2t phase B counter (total accumulative breaking level – phase B)
KI2t PHASE C kI2t phase C counter (total accumulative breaking level – phase C)
BKR OPENING TIME Time to set a failure in opening the breaker.
BKR CLOSING TIME Time to set a failure in closing the breaker.
BKR OPEN TIMING Exact time in opening the breaker
BKR CLOSE TIMING Exact time in closing the breaker
Breaker opening and closing time signals are configured at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear for the related
switchgear device.

6.2.13 IEEE 1588 precision time protocol (PTP)

Actual> Status > IRIG-B PTP 1588
This screen shows the IRIG-B and PRP status. It includes the following signaling LEDs showing the FAILURE of the SNTP and
IRIG-B and other statuses are provided.
SNTP - IRIGB - PTP1588 STATUS

SNTP FAILURE
IRIG-B FAILURE
RTC Sync Source
GrandMaster-ID LOW
GrandMaster-ID HIGH
PTP ACCURACY
The RTC Sync Source actual value is the time synchronizing source the relay is using at present. Possible sources are: Port
A PTP Clock, Port B PTP Clock, IRIG B, SNTP and None.
Grandmaster ID is the grandmaster Identity code being received from the present PTP grandmaster if any. When the
relay is not using any PTP grandmaster, this actual value is zero. The grandmaster Identity code is specified by PTP to be
globally unique, so one can always know which clock is grandmaster in a system with multiple grandmaster-capable
clocks.
PTP Accuracy is the estimated maximum time error at present in the Real Time Clock (RTC), considering the quality
information embedded in the received time signal, how long the relay has had to lock to the time source, and in the case of
time signal interruptions, the length of the interruption. The value 999,999,999 indicates that the magnitude of the
estimated error is one second or more, or that the error cannot be estimated.
Note:
The F650 does not support the end-to-end delay mechanism, so it is not unexpected that changing the device to which the
F650 is connected to this mode would cause the (NoPDelay) message. When PTP source clock is having "End to End clock
delay” configured, and if F650 is receiving PTP packets from this clock F650 is getting synchronized and status is showing
Synch'd (No Pdelay). Note that the relay does not allow manual overwriting of its RTC time if PTP is functional.
6.2.14 Versions
This screen can be accessed at Actual > Status > Versions. It shows the current versions and dates of the different
applications.
VERSIONS
HMI Version
DISPLAY TYPE
Boot Version
Boot Date
Kinetis Boot Version
Kinetis Boot Date
Kinetis Loader Ver
Kinetis Loader Date
Kinetis App Version
Kinetis App Date
DSP Version
DSP Date
Firmware Date
FPGA Version
RM PRP HSR Version
RM RSTP Version
RM LLA Version
RM Bypass Version
CPU Revision

HMI Version: Relay display version
DISPLAY TYPE: Relay’s display model (refers to order code, basic or graphic)
1. Basic display
2. Graphic display
3. Chinese Basic
4. Chinese Graphic (IEC symbols)
Boot Version: Boot version
Boot Date: Boot versions release date
Kinetis Boot Version: Kinetis microprocessor boot version
Kinetis Boot Date: Kinetis boot release date
Kinetis Loader Ver: Kinetis bootloader version
Kinetis Loader Date: Kinetis bootloader release date
Kinetis App Version: Kinetis application version
Kinetis App Date: Kinetis application release date
DSP Version: Digital Signal Processor firmware version
DSP Date: Digital Signal Processor firmware release date
Firmware Date: Firmware application release date
FPGA Version: Current version of the bitstream running in CPU FPGA.
RM PRP HSR Version: Current version of the PRP_HSR bitstream running in the redundancy module FPGA.
RM RSTP Version: Current version of the RSTP-Daisy Chain bitstream running in the redundancy module FPGA.
RM LLA Version: Current version of the LLA bitstream running in the redundancy module FPGA.
RM Bypass Version: Current version of the Bypass bitstream running in the redundancy module FPGA.
CPU Revision: CPU hardware version:
• Redundant Fiber Optic: 0
• Redundant Cooper Cable: 1
• Single Fiber Optic: 2
• Single Cooper Cable: 3

6.2.15 Redundancy
Actual> Status > Redundancy: This screen shows the port A and B statuses related to PRP, HSR and RSTP protocols.
REDUNDANCY
PRP_HSR A tx
PRP_HSR B tx
PRP_HSR A err
PRP_HSR B err
RSTP PortA State
RSTP PortB State
• PRP_HSR A TX: This is the number of the transmitted messages over port A when PRP or HSR option is
enabled.
• PRP_HSR B TX: This is the number of the transmitted messages over port B when PRP or HSR option is
enabled.
• PRP_HSR A ERR: This value shows the number of messages received over port A with wrong LAN ID.
• PRP_HSR B ERR: This value shows the number of messages received over port B with wrong LAN ID.
• RSTP PortA State: This is the state of RSTP for port A (Discarding, Learning & Forwarding)
• RSTP PortB State: This is the state of RSTP for port B (Discarding, Learning & Forwarding)

6.3 METERING CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 Metering
6.3.1 Primary values
6.3.1.1 Current
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Current
Description UNITS
CT Ratio N/A
CT Ratio Ig N/A
CT Ratio Isg N/A
Ia Angle Deg
Ib Angle Deg
Ic Angle Deg
In Angle Deg
Ig Angle Deg
Isg Angle Deg
Phasor Ia Primary KA
Phasor Ib Primary KA
Phasor Ic Primary KA
Phasor Ig Primary KA
Phasor Isg Primary KA
Phasor In Primary KA
RMS Ia Primary KA
RMS Ib Primary KA
RMS Ic Primary KA
RMS Ig Primary KA
RMS Isg Primary KA
I0 Primary KA
I1 Primary KA
I2 Primary KA
% Load to trip N/A
6.3.1.2 Voltage
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Voltage
description UNITS
PT Ratio N/A
Va Angle Deg
Vb Angle Deg
Vc Angle Deg
Vn Angle Deg
Vx Angle Deg
Vab Angle Deg
Vbc Angle Deg
Vca Angle Deg
V0 Primary KV
V1 Primary KV

CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES 6.3 METERING
V2 Primary KV
Vab Primary KV
Vbc Primary KV
Vca Primary KV
Va Primary KV
Vb Primary KV
Vc Primary KV
Vn Primary KV
Vx Primary KV
VBB Primary KV
VL Primary KV
6.3.1.3 Power
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Power
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phase A Real Pwr MW
Phase A Reactive Pwr MVAr
Phase A Apparent Pwr MVA
Phase B Real Pwr MW
Phase B Reactive Pwr MVAr
Phase B Apparent Pwr MVA
Phase C Real Pwr MW
Phase C Reactive Pwr MVAr
Phase C Apparent Pwr MVA
3 Phase Real Pwr MW
3 Phase Reactive Pwr MVAr
3 Phase Apparent Pwr MVA
Phase A Power Factor N/A
Phase B Power Factor N/A
Phase C Power Factor N/A
3 Phase Power Factor N/A
NOTE: If voltage inputs are configured in Delta connection and the auxiliary voltage input is set as Vx, measurements of
single phase power value cannot be duly calculated, and therefore, its value is zero. For the three-phase power value, the
system uses the ARON method, or two-wattmeters method.
NOTE 2: When currents and neither voltages are not available in the F650, default value for power factor wil be indicated
as zero.

6.3.1.4 Energy
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Energy
Energy is only given in three phase primary values
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Positive MWatthour MWh
Negative MWatthour MWh
Positive MVarhour MVArh
Negative MVarhour MVArh
Pos Mwatthour Cnt MWh
Neg Mwatthour Cnt MWh
Pos MVarhour Cnt MVArh
Neg MVarhour Cnt MVArh
When the energy counters reach the value (2ˆ 31)/1000 (approximately 2147483 MVArh and MWh) all the values are set to
zero and starts counting again.
6.3.1.5 Demand
Actual> Metering > Primary Values > Demand
Demand is only given in primary values
DESCRIPTION UNITS
DEMAND IA KA
DEMAND IA MAX KA
DEMAND IA DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND IB KA
DEMAND IB MAX KA
DEMAND IB DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND IC KA
DEMAND IC MAX KA
DEMAND IC DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND IG KA
DEMAND IG MAX KA
DEMAND IG DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND ISG KA
DEMAND ISG MAX KA
DEMAND ISG DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND I2 KA
DEMAND I2 MAX KA
DEMAND I2 DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND W MW
DEMAND W MAX MW
DEMAND W DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND VAR PWR MVAr
DEMAND VAR MAX MVAr
DEMAND VAR DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms
DEMAND VA PWR MVA
DEMAND VA MAX MVA
DEMAND VA DATE dd/mm/yy hh:mm:ss:ms

6.3.2 Secondary values
6.3.2.1 Current
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Current
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phasor Ia A
RMS Ia A
Phasor Ib A
RMS Ib A
Phasor Ic A
RMS Ic A
Phasor In A
Phasor Ig A
RMS Ig A
Phasor Isg A
RMS Isg A
Zero seq I0 A
Positive Seq I1 A
Negative Seq I2 A
6.3.2.2 Voltage
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Voltage
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phasor Vab V
Phasor Vbc V
Phasor Vca V
Phasor Van V
Phasor Vbn V
Phasor Vcn V
Phasor Vn V
Positive Seq V1 V
Negative Seq V2 V
Zero Seq V0 V
Phasor Vx V
Nominal Voltage V
Line Voltage V
Bus Voltage V

6.3.2.3 Power
Actual> Metering > Secondary Values > Power
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Phase A Apparent Pwr VA
Phase B Apparent Pwr VA
Phase C Apparent Pwr VA
Phase A Real Pwr W
Phase B Real Pwr W
Phase C Real Pwr W
Phase A Reactive Pwr VARS
Phase B Reactive Pwr VARS
Phase C Reactive Pwr VARS
3 Phase Apparent Pwr VA
3 Phase Real Pwr W
3 Phase Reactive Pwr VARS
Phase A Power Factor N/A
Phase B Power Factor N/A
Phase C Power Factor N/A
3 Phase Power Factor N/A
NOTE: If voltage inputs are configured in Delta connection and the auxiliary voltage input is set as Vx, measurements of
single phase power value cannot be duly calculated, and therefore, its value is zero. For the three-phase power value, the
system uses the ARON method, or two-wattmeters method.

6.3.3 Phasor diagram

Actual> Metering > Phasor Diagram
This window shows the phasors for voltage and current values, phase to phase, phase to ground and sequence values,
provided by the unit. The angles provided by the unit are counter clockwise, all the angles are positive values, so for a
system Va (0,0°), Vb (0,-120°), Vc (0,120°) the relay provides the following angles Va (0,0°), Vb (0,240°), Vc (0,120°).
The following figure shows the phasor diagram provided by EnerVista 650 Setup:
Figure 6-2: Phasor diagram

6.3.4 Frequency
Actual> Metering > Frequency
DESCRIPTION UNITS
Line Frequency Hz
Bus Frequency Hz
df/dt Hz/s

CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES 6.4 INPUTS / OUTPUTS
6.4 Inputs / outputs

Digital inputs and outputs are located in the same board. Depending on the relay model, the number of inputs and outputs
varies.
6.4.1 Contact inputs

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact inputs > Board X (being X the corresponding board in each case).
On the inputs screen, the LED associated with the activated input lights in green, if an input is not activated, the LED does
not light up. The Board X Status LED indicates the status of the board; it is lit up if the board is correct and the
communication or the Relay model is appropriate.
Table 6-40: Contact input activation signals
CONTACT INPUTS TYPE 1 CONTACT INPUTS TYPE 2 CONTACT INPUTS TYPE 4 CONTACT INPUTS TYPE 5
CONT IP_X_CC1 (CC1) CONT IP_X_CC1 (CC1) CONT IP_X_CC1 (CC1) CONT IP_X_CC17 (CC17) CONT IP_X_CC1 (CC1)
CONT IP_X_CC9 (Va_COIL1) CONT IP_X_CC9 (CC9) CONT IP_X_CC9 (CC9) CONT IP_X_CC25 (CC25) CONT IP_X_CC9 (CC9)
CONT IP_X_CC10 (Vb_COIL1) CONT IP_X_CC10 (CC10) CONT IP_X_CC10 (CC10) CONT IP_X_CC26 (CC26) CONT IP_X_CC10 (CC10)
CONT IP_X_CC11 (Va_COIL2) CONT IP_X_CC11 (CC11) CONT IP_X_CC11 (CC11) CONT IP_X_CC27 (CC27) CONT IP_X_CC11 (CC11)
CONT IP_X_CC12 (Vb_COIL2) CONT IP_X_CC12 (CC12) CONT IP_X_CC12 (CC12) CONT IP_X_CC28 (CC28) CONT IP_X_CC12 (CC12)
CONT IP_X_CC13 (O7_SEAL) CONT IP_X_CC13 (CC13) CONT IP_X_CC13 (CC13) CONT IP_X_CC29 (CC29) CONT IP_X_CC13 (CC13)
CONT IP_X_CC14 (O8_SEAL) CONT IP_X_CC14 (CC14) CONT IP_X_CC14 (CC14) CONT IP_X_CC30 (CC30) CONT IP_X_CC14 (CC14)
CONT IP_X_CC15 (SUP_COIL1) CONT IP_X_CC15 (CC15) CONT IP_X_CC15 (CC15) CONT IP_X_CC31 (CC31) CONT IP_X_CC15 (CC15)
CONT IP_X_CC16 (SUP_COIL2) CONT IP_X_CC16 (CC16) CONT IP_X_CC16 (CC16) CONT IP_X_CC32 (CC32) CONT IP_X_CC16 (CC16)
BOARD X STATUS BOARD X STATUS BOARD X STATUS BOARD X STATUS
6.4.2 Contact output status

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact Output Status > Board X (being X the corresponding board in each case).
The corresponding Outputs screen displays the activation of a contact output by lighting in green the associated LED.
Boards types 1 and 2 have both 8 outputs, so the representation is the same for both types as shown in the table below.
This screen shows the real status of the contact output, which corresponds to the transformation of the output activation
signal (Contact output operate), by the logic applied to this output in Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs >Contact I/O > Board X
CONTACT OUTPUT STATUS

CONT OP_X_01
CONT OP_X_02
CONT OP_X_03
CONT OP_X_04
CONT OP_X_05
CONT OP_X_06
CONT OP_X_07
CONT OP_X_08
BOARD X STATUS
NOTE: Both in the outputs menu as in the rest of menus available in “Actual”, the user can view several screens at the
same time to facilitate analysis.

6.4 INPUTS / OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
6.4.3 Contact output operates

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact Output Operates > Board X (being X the corresponding board in each case).
CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATES

CONT OP OPER_X_01
CONT OP OPER_X_02
CONT OP OPER_X_03
CONT OP OPER_X_04
CONT OP OPER_X_05
CONT OP OPER_X_06
CONT OP OPER_X_07
CONT OP OPER_X_08
BOARD X STATUS
These screens are available for all boards incorporated in the relay model, which can be F, G, H, and/or J.
This screen shows the activated or deactivated status of those variables used internally to operate a contact output.
Signals shown on this screen are configured in the Outputs screen inside the Setpoint > Relay Configuration menu, either
directly by selecting the signals provided by the relay, or selecting a signal provided by the logic configured at Setpoint >
Logic Configuration.
These logic signals (Contact Output Operates), when being transformed by the outputs logic configured at Setpoint >
Inputs/Outputs >Contact I/O > Board X become Contact Output signals. This output logic can be POSITIVE, NEGATIVE,
pulse, latched, etc.
Operation example of output contacts:
Figure 6-3: Output contact operation

6.4.4 Contact output resets

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Contact Output Resets > Board X (being X the corresponding board in each case).
Boards types 1 and 2 have both 8 outputs, so the representation is the same for both types as shown in
If the reset signal is active, the green LED lights up. Otherwise, it remains unlit.
CONTACT OUTPUT RESETS

CONT OP RESET_X_01
CONT OP RESET_X_02
CONT OP RESET_X_03
CONT OP RESET_X_04
CONT OP RESET_X_05
CONT OP RESET_X_06
CONT OP RESET_X_07
CONT OP RESET_X_08
BOARD X STATUS
The last LED in this screen, labeled Board Status, indicates the general board status.
This output reset Command is only be effective if latch has been selected for Output Type on the I/O board, thus the
contact output has been configured to emulate function 86 (latching relay).
Configuration for the contact output reset signal is set at Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs > Contact Output
Reset.
6.4.5 I/O board status

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > I/O Board Status
This screen is used for verifying the status of I/O boards. If all the I/O boards, one (F) or both (F and G) depending on the
relay model, are correctly inserted in their tracks and are in good state and communicating through the internal CAN bus,
the green LED remains lit.
I/O boards accessible through the external CAN bus are labeled as H and J. In order to start working with the external I/O
boards is necessary to select the appropriated I/O board type for each slot (H or J for the CIO module) at Setpoint >
Inputs/Outputs >Contact I/O > Board H and J. Otherwise the relay will not start communicating through the external
CAN bus to the related board.
If one of the boards has been extracted, or the relay model does not match the installed hardware, the corresponding LED
remains unlit.
I/O BOARD STATUS

BOARD F STATUS
BOARD G STATUS
BOARD H STATUS
BOARD J STATUS
For all I/O board screens described above, the last LED provides this same information individually.

6.4.6 Virtual inputs

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Inputs > Virtual Input Latched > Virtual Input Self-Reset
“Virtual Inputs” are signals transmitted by communications. The EnerVista 650 Setup provides a tool to set virtual inputs
through ModBus at Setpoint > Inputs /Outputs /Virtual inputs that is only available in online mode (communicating to
the relay). There are two available groups of 32 signals each: Latched inputs and Self-reset inputs, and all of them can be
used internally to perform operations, new logics in the PLC, etc.
In this actual values screen the status of the assigned virtual inputs can as shown on
VIRTUAL INPUTS LATCHED VIRTUAL INPUTS SELF-RESET

… …
6.4.7 Virtual outputs

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Outputs
This screen provides the status of the 512 configurable virtual outputs (internal variables) used in the logic scheme. The
virtual outputs are set from 000 to 511.
The configuration of the logic associated with the virtual output is in the Setpoint > Logic Configuration tool provided by
EnerVista 650 Setup program.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT STATUS

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 000
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 001
…
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 511
6.4.8 Remote outputs

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Outputs > DNA
This screen provides the status of the 32 DNA remote outputs.
Table 6-41: DNA STATUS
DNA STATUS
DNA 1
DNA 2
DNA 3
...
DNA 32

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Outputs > UserSt

This screen provides the status of the 64 UserSt remote outputs.
Table 6-42: USER ST STATUS
USERst STATUS
UserSt 1
UserSt 2
UserSt 3
...
UserSt 64
Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Outputs > Remote GOOSE Dig Outputs
This screen provides the status of the 32 Remote GOOSE Digital Outputs.
Table 6-43: Remote GOOSE digital output status
REMOTE GOOSE DIG OUTPUTS STATUS
Rem GOOSE Dig Out 1
Rem GOOSE Dig Out 2
Rem GOOSE Dig Out 3
...
Rem GOOSE Dig Out 32

6.4.9 Remote inputs

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Intputs > Remote Input
This screen provides the status of the 32 remote inputs.
remote inputs STATUS

Remote Input 1
Remote Input 2
Remote Input 3
...
Remote Input 32
Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Intputs > Remote Device

This screen provides the status of the 16 remote devices.
remote device STATUS

Remote Device 1
Remote Device 2
Remote Device 3
...
Remote Device 16
Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Outputs > Remote GOOSE Digital Inputs
This screen provides the status of the 32 Remote GOOSE Digital Inputs.
REMOTE GOOSE DIG INPUTS STATUS

Rem GOOSE Dig Inp 1
Rem GOOSE Dig Inp 2
Rem GOOSE Dig Inp 3
...
Rem GOOSE Dig Inp 32
Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Outputs > Remote GOOSE Analog Inputs
This screen provides the values of the 16 Remote GOOSE Analog Inputs. Eight of them are float type and the other eight
are integer type.
REMOTE GOOSE ANALOG INPUTS STATUS

Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 1
Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 2
Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 3
...
Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 8
Rem Ana Inp INT 1
Rem Ana Inp INT 2
Rem Ana Inp INT 3
...
Rem Ana Inp INT 8

6.4.10 Analog inputs

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Analog Intputs > Board X
This screen provides the values of the analog inputs.
analog inputs values

Analog_Inp_X_01
Analog_Inp_X_02
Analog_Inp_X_03
...
Analog_Inp_X_08
6.4.11 Virtual output latched

Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Output Latched
This screen provides the values of virtual output latched
VIRTUAL OUTPUT LATCHED

V.O. Latched 1
V.O. Latched 2
V.O. Latched 3
….
V.O. Latched 16
6.4.12 RIOs
Actual > Inputs/Outputs > RIOs
This screen provides the values of virtual output analogues, integer and float values
INTEGER VALUES FLOAT VALUES

INT32_000 FLT32_000
INT32_001 FLT32_001
INT32_002 FLT32_002
…. …
INT32_049 FLT32_049

6.5 RECORDS CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
6.5 Records
6.5.1 Event recorder
6.5.1.1 All snapshot events

Actual > Records > Event Recorder > All Snapshot Events
By selecting this option, the F650 provides a general list of all snapshot events stored in the relay up to the request
moment:
Figure 6-4: Event recorder - all snapshot events

The different options available on this screen are as follows:
Save: It allows saving the Snapshot events information obtained in the relay in a CSV format file.
Print: It allows printing the viewed data.
View data: It allows to view the information contained in the selected event, such as the event number, date and time,
cause of the event, as well as the voltage and current values in the moment of the event (see Figure 6-5:
Snapshot event details).

CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES 6.5 RECORDS
There is a “Select” option, which is used for selecting the events that are required to appear when the screen information is
printed or saved.
Figure 6-5: Snapshot event details
6.5.1.2 New snapshot events

Actual > Records > Event Recorder > New Snapshot Events
This screen shows new Snapshot events, updated since the last time that this menu was accessed; there are three possible
ways to access new events; in local mode (COM2-HMI), remote mode (COM1) and via Ethernet (ETH_1/ETH2 or ETH_E/
ETH_A/ETH_B)
It is the same type of screen as shown on all snapshot event retrieval.
6.5.1.3 Control events

Actual > Records > Event Recorder > Control Events
This screen is identical to the previous ones. The difference is that this screen displays only control events, i.e., those events
configured in section Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Events. There are a total of 128 configurable events and 64 non-
configurable switchgear events.
In this screen, red or black color for a specific event indicates whether it is activated (to 1) or in standby (to 0)

Figure 6-6: Control events
6.5.1.4 Alarm panel

The alarm panel can be accessed at Actual > Records > Event Recorder > Alarm Panel.
The following screen provides information about the issued alarms. The screen shows information about their status:
active not acknowledged, active acknowledged and not active. The user can either acknowledge all alarms at the same
time, or do it partially by selecting the alarms to be acknowledged.
Figure 6-7: Alarm panel

6.5.2 Waveform capture

The Actual > Records > Waveform Capture screen displays a list of all oscillography records available in the relay. The
F650 stores oscillography records from 1 to 999; this is the index of the obtained oscillography record. This screen allows
selecting the records to be saved among all records available. Download of these records is done through the selected
connection in the “Communication > Computer” menu, either serial mode or Ethernet.
Figure 6-8: Oscillography record retrieval, EnerVista 650 Setup

The screen shows all the available records in the Relay, and by clicking on each of them, the system displays the heading
information for that record, allowing downloading the information to a disk. Once the file to be downloaded has been
selected, the oscillography record can be opened using GE-OSC software.
GE-OSC is GE proprietary software that is not distributed together with EnerVista 650 Setup. This program is a COMTRADE
viewer and analysis software for oscillography files.
If the user does not have the GE-OSC tool, the oscillography record can be stored and viewed using any other analysis tool
capable of reproducing COMTRADE.1999 files.
When using GE-OSC software, this program requires the use of a template for each relay. If there is a stored template for
F650 relays (as shown in the following figure), select the template and click Open Selected Template. The program then
prepares to view oscillography and digital records using the options in available menus (Waveforms and Digital Flags).
Otherwise, select the Create New Template option, and the program helps create a new template. See the GE-OSC
software instruction manual for details.
Figure 6-9: GE-OSC oscillography analysis software

Note that any settings change in the oscillography removes all the information stored up to that moment.
6.5.3 Fault report

When selecting the Actual > Records > Fault Report menu, EnerVista 650 Setup shows the following screen, indicating the
fault reports available in the relay.
Figure 6-10: Fault report retrieval, EnerVista 650 Setup
When selecting one of the records, a new screen details the following information:
• Date
• Time
• Pre-fault current and voltage in primary values
• Fault current and voltage in primary values
• Fault type
• Distance to the fault
The operation of this screen is similar to that of the previous oscillography screen, being in this case the number of fault
reports a fixed number (10), instead of variable and setting-selected like as in the previous case.
Once a fault report is selected, its heading description is displayed, showing pre-fault information, fault information and
the distance to the fault. This file can be downloaded to the computer in a CSV format file.
Note that any settings change in the fault report remove all information stored up to that moment. Fault report retrieval is
described in section 5.2.3.2 Fault report retrieval.

6.5.4 Data logger

The access menu is Actual > Records > Data Logger. Once open, this menu shows a screen containing the information
monitored by the relay according to the settings adjusted at Setpoint > Product Setup > Data Logger, where the user can
select which analog channels are recorded, as well as the sampling rate.
Note that any settings change in the data logger removes all information stored up to that moment.
The data logger screen diagram shows the time during which the displayed values have been obtained.
The upper part of the window shows the time when the oldest sample was taken, as well as the time when the most recent
value was taken.
Figure 6-11: Data logger

This screen offers the possibility of storing the data logger record obtained for a further analysis, in COMTRADE format.
Data Logger file retrieval can be performed only via Ethernet communications.
NOTE: Data logger information takes several minutes to be available.


GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 7: IEC 61850 protocol
IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
This chapter outlines the IEC 61850 communications protocol. The IEC 61850 protocol applies when ordered with the
product. (Check the order code to determine whether IEC 61850 is included with your product).
7.1 IEC 61850 Overview

This section contains a description of IEC 61850, an International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) series of documents
entitled Communication Networks and Systems for Power Utility Automation. IEC 61850 is a series of international
standards and technical reports applicable to power utility automation systems (PUAS). It includes semantics, abstract
communication services, specific communication services, performance specifications, network engineering guidelines,
configuration description methodologies, and engineering processes. The objective of the standard is to provide a
framework to achieve interoperability among the intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) from different suppliers, and
interoperability among software configuration tools from different suppliers. Interoperability in this case is the ability for
IEDs to operate on the same network or communication path sharing information and commands, and for configuration
tools to understand each other's configuration files. The standards can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch).
650 models with an IEC 61850 option support both the IEC61850 GOOSE and IEC 61850 MMS Server service:
• 650 Family relays with firmware version below 7.00 firmware: As per IEC 61850 standard Edition 1
• 650 Family relays with firmware version from 7.00 to 7.50: As per IEC 61850 standard Edition 2
• F650- Feeder protection relay for firmware version 7.52 or above: As per IEC 61850 standard Edition 1 or 2 (depending
on the CID file selected and sent to the relay)
• C650-Digital Bay Controller for firmware version 7.70 or above: As per IEC 61850 standard Edition 1 or 2 (depending on
the CID file selected and sent to the relay)
• R650 Recloser Controller: As per IEC 61850 standard Edition 2
The GOOSE messaging service provides the 650 relay unit the ability to Publish/Subscribe Digital Input Status and its
Quality and Timestamp to and from other IEDs which support the GOOSE messaging service, while the server support
allows remote a control center, RTU/Gateway, local HMI or other client role devices access to the relay for monitoring and
control. The configuration of IEC61850 services is accomplished using the 650 IEC61850 configuration software, EnerVista
650 Setup software. A reboot is required before any changes made in the IEC61850 configuration take effect in the F650
relay.
These models support also Generic Substation State Events (GSSE).

7.2 IEC 61850 GENERIC SUBSTATION STATE EVENT (GSSE) CHAPTER 7: IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
7.2 IEC 61850 generic substation state event (GSSE)

7.2.1 Overview
IEC 61850 specifies two types of peer-to-peer data transfer services: Generic Substation State Events (GSSE) and Generic
Object Oriented Substation Events (GOOSE). Both GSSE and GOOSE messages are designed to be short, reliable, and high
priority.
GSSE services are compatible with UCA 2.0 GOOSE. IEC 61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support, Ethernet
priority tagging, and Ethertype Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and priority tagging allows for the
optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic,
and they can be separated onto specific VLANs. Because of the additional features of GOOSE services versus GSSE
services, it is recommended that GOOSE be used wherever backwards compatibility with GSSE (or UCA 2.0 GOOSE) is not
required.
Devices that transmit GSSE and/or GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GSSE publisher contains a "GSSE
control block" to configure and control the transmission. Each GOOSE publisher contains a "GOOSE control block" to
configure and control the transmission. The transmission is also controlled via device settings. These settings can be seen
in the ICD and/or SCD files, or in the device configuration software or files. IEC 61850 recommends a default priority value
of 4 for GOOSE. Ethernet traffic that does not contain a priority tag has a default priority of 1. More details are specified in
IEC 61850 part 8-1. IEC 61850 recommends that the Ethertype Application ID number be configured according to the
GOOSE source. A common number may be used for all GOOSE transmitters in a system. More details are specified in IEC
61850 part 8-1.
GSSE messages contain a fixed set of digital points. IEC 61850 GOOSE messages can, in general, contain any configurable
data items. When used by the remote input/output feature, IEC 61850 GOOSE messages contain the same data as GSSE
messages. The GSSE message structure contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. In
addition to digital point states, GSSE/GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other
information required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data only
from messages that have originated from selected devices
7.2.2 Remote communication

The IEC 61850 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting
and receiving devices. Each transmitting device sends a GSSE/GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when the
state of any included point changes, or after a specified interval, four times the Hold Time setting value, if a change-of-
state has not occurred.
Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for the messages they require, as recognized
by the identification of the originating device carried in the message. If the receiving relay has not received another
message from the originating device when the specified timeout period elapses, the remote device is declared to be non-
communicating, so it uses the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device.
If a message is received from a remote device before the interval of four times the Hold Time expires, all points for that
device are updated to the states contained in the message. The status of a remote device can be displayed.
Remote inputs and outputs provide a means of exchanging digital state information between Ethernet-networked devices.
The GSSE facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs.
7.2.3 GSSE configuration

GSSE messages contain a number of double point status data items. These items are transmitted in two pre-defined data
structures named DNA and UserSt. Each DNA and UserSt item is referred to as a 'bit pair'. GSSE messages are transmitted
in response to state changes in any of the data points contained in the message. GSSE messages always contain the same
number of DNA and UserSt bit pairs. Depending on the configuration, only some of these bit pairs may have values that
are of interest to receiving devices.

CHAPTER 7: IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7.2 IEC 61850 GENERIC SUBSTATION STATE EVENT (GSSE)
The relay provides 32 "DNA" bit pairs that represent the state of two pre-defined events and 64 "UserSt" bit pairs, which are
status bits representing user-definable events.
GSSE service can be configured using the EnerVista 650 Setup program in the menu Setpoint > Input/Outputs > Remote
Comms.
Remote Comms must be set to "GSSE" to enable GSSE configuration.
650 ID represents the IEC 61850 GSSE application ID name string sent as part of each GSSE message. This string identifies
the GSSE message to the receiving device.
Hold time is used to calculate the interval, if a change-of-state has not occurred, that the device waits to send GSSE
message.
Remote Device (1 to 32) is used to select specific remote devices by entering the exact identification (ID) assigned to these
devices. A maximum of 32 devices can be configured for receiving GSSE messages.
Bit Pair (1 to 32) is used to assign the data from the GSSE message to remote inputs.
Figure 7-1: Remote communication

Default Value (1 to 32) selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or the remote device
sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:
• ON value defaults the input to Logic 1.
• OFF value defaults the input to Logic 0.
• Latest OFF freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-
up but before the first communication exchange, the input defaults to Logic 0. When communication resumes, the
input becomes fully operational.
• Latest ON freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known, such as after relay power-
up but before the first communication exchange, the input defaults to Logic 1. When communication resumes, the
input becomes fully operational.
Destination MAC Data (1 to 3): If a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is entered, this address is used as the destination
MAC address for GSSE messages. If a valid multicast Ethernet MAC address is not entered (for example, 00 00 00 00 00 00),
the device uses the source Ethernet MAC address as the destination, with the multicast bit set.
GSSE RemDevice (1 to 24) MAC Data (1 to 3) is used to filter receiving messages.
GSSE PORT sets the network port through messaging will be done. Possible values are "Port A", "Port B" or "Both".

7.2.4 Remote inputs

Remote inputs, which create PLC operands at the receiving relay, are extracted from GSSE messages originating in remote
devices. The relay provides 32 remote inputs, each of which can be selected from a list consisting of 96 selections: DNA-1
to DNA-32 and UserSt-1 to UserSt-64. The function of DNA and UserSt bits is in both cases the same so user can assign a
Remote input either of them through the Bit Pair 1 to 32 field (see figure 1). They can be configured using the EnerVista 650
Setup program in the menu Setpoint > Input/Outputs > Remote Comms.
Figure 7-2: Remote communication (remote inputs)

CHAPTER 7: IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7.2 IEC 61850 GENERIC SUBSTATION STATE EVENT (GSSE)
7.2.5 Remote outputs
7.2.5.1 DNA bit pairs

Remote Outputs (1 to 32) are PLC operands inserted into GSSE messages that are transmitted to remote devices on a LAN.
Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific PLC operand, except reserved
points DNA1 and DNA2. The complete operand setting represents a specific DNA function to be transmitted. These states
are displayed in the F650 relay and in the EnerVista 650 Setup software in the menu Actual Values > Input/Outputs >
Remote Outputs > DNA.
Each DNA point can only be programmed in the EnerVista 650 Setup software in the menu Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Remote Outputs.
Figure 7-3: Remote outputs (DNA)

7.2.5.2 UserSt bit pairs

Remote Outputs 1 to 64 originates GSSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the message
must be programmed to carry the state of a specific PLC operand. The UserSt (User Setpoint) setting is used to select the
operand which represents a specific UserSt function to be transmitted. These states are displayed in the F650 relay and in
the EnerVista 650 Setup software in the menu Actual Values > Input/Outputs > Remote Outputs > UserSt.
Each User Set point can only be programmed and displayed in EnerVista 650 Setup in the menu Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Remote Outputs.
Figure 7-4: Remote outputs (UserSt)

CHAPTER 7: IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7.3 IEC 61850 PROFILE FOR F650
7.3 IEC 61850 profile for F650

7.3.1 Overview
IEC 61850 is a series of standards describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and
configuration, testing, environmental and project standards.
The 10 parts of the standard IEC 61850 are as listed in the following tables:
1.1.1 System Aspects

Part 1: Introduction and Overview
Part 2: Glossary
Part 3: General Requirements
Part 4: System and Project Management
Part 5: Communication Requirements for Functions and Device Models
1.1.2 Configuration
Part 6: Configuration Description Language For Communication In Electrical
Substations Related To IEDs
1.1.3 Testing
Part 10: Conformance Testing
The following parts define how the IED behaves:
1.1.4 Data Models

Basic Communication Structure for Substations and Feeder Equipment
Part 7-4: Compatible Logical Node Classes and Data Classes
Part 7-3: Common Data Classes
1.1.5 Abstract Communications

Basic Communication Structure for Substations and Feeder Equipment
Part 7-2: Abstract Communication Services Interface (ACSI)
Part 7-1: Principles and Models
1.1.6 Mapping to real Communication Networks (SCSM)

Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM)
Part 8-1: Mappings to MMS
(ISO 9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
Part 9-1: Sampled Values Over Serial Unidirectional Multidrop Point to Point Link
Part 9-2: Sampled values over ISO/IEC 8802-3
Mapping on a IEEE 8802-3 based Process Bus
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended that all those involved with
any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.

7.3 IEC 61850 PROFILE FOR F650 CHAPTER 7: IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
7.3.1.1 Scope and outline of IEC 61850
Basic principles Part 1
Glossary Part 2
General Requirements Part 3
System and project management Part 4
Communication requirements Part 5
Substation Automation System Configuration Part 6
Basic Communication Structure (4 sections) Part 7
Mapping to MMS and 1.1 Sampled Measured Values

Part 8 Ethernet Part 9
Mapping to Ethernet
Conformance testing
Part 10
Parts 3, 4, and 5 of the standard start by identifying the general and specific functional requirements for communications
in a substation. These requirements are then used as forcing functions to aid in the identification of the services and data
models needed, application protocol required, and the underlying transport, network, data link, and physical layers that
meet the overall requirements.
The major architectural construct that 61850 adopts is that of "abstracting" the definition of the data items and the
services, that is, creating data items/objects and services that are independent of any underlying protocols. The abstract
definitions then allow "mapping" of the data objects and services to any other protocol that can meet the data and service
requirements.
The definition of the abstract services is found in part 7.2 of the standard and the abstraction of the data objects (referred
to as Logical Nodes) is found in part 7.4.
In as much as many of the data objects are made up of common pieces (such as Status, Control, Measurement,
Substitution), the concept of "Common Data Classes" or "CDC" was developed which defined common building blocks for
creating the larger data objects. The CDC elements are defined in part 7.3.
Given the data and services abstract definitions, the final step was one of "mapping" the abstract services into an actual
protocol. Section 8.1 defines the mapping of the abstract data object and services onto the Manufacturing Messaging
Specification - MMS2 and sections 9.1 and 9.2 define the mapping of the Sample Measured Values (unidirectional point-to-
point and bi-directional multipoint accordingly) onto an Ethernet data frame. The 9.2 document defines what has become
known as the Process Bus.
From a system perspective, there is a significant amount of configuration that is required in order to put all the pieces
together and have them work. In order to facilitate this process and to eliminate much of the human error component, an
XML based Substation Configuration Language (SCL) was defined in part 6. It allows the formal description of the relations

between the substation automation system and the substation. At the application level, the substation topology itself and
the relation of the substation structure to the SAS functions (logical nodes) configured on the IEDs can be described. Each
device must provide an SCL file that describes the configuration of itself.
Finally, part 10 defines a testing methodology in order to determine "conformance" with the numerous protocol definitions
and constraints defined in the standard.
7.3.2 Communication profiles

The F650 relay supports IEC61850 server services over TCP/IP. This profile requires the F650 to have an IP address to
establish communications. It is possible to have up to five simultaneous connections.
7.3.3 TCP connection timing

A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of 30 seconds is employed by the F650 to detect “dead” connections. If there is no
data traffic on a TCP connection for greater than 30 seconds, the connection is aborted by the server. Therefore, when
using IEC61850 reporting, clients should configure report control block items such that an integrity report is issued al least
every 30 seconds. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection al least once every 30 seconds, this timeout
does not apply.
For firmware version 7.20 or higher, TCP connection timeout is configurable from 120 to 1800 seconds and its default value
is 120 seconds
7.3.4 MMS protocol

IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (application) layer for transfer
of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number of years and provides a set of services suitable for the
transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Actual MMS protocol services are mapped to IEC 61850 abstract
services in IEC 61850-8-1.
The exact structure and values of the supported IEC61850 logical nodes can be seen by connecting to a F650 relay with an
MMS browser, such as “MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS” DDE/OPC server from Sisco Inc.
7.3.5 Peer-to-peer communication

Peer-to-peer communication of a digital state information (remote inputs/outputs) is supported using the IEC61850
GOOSE/GSE services. This feature allows digital points to be exchanged between IEC 61850 conforming devices.
7.3.6 File services

MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record, or other files from a F650 relay.

7.3.7 IEC 61850 conformance statements

This section describes conformity with IEC 61850.
7.3.7.1 Abbreviations and acronyms

• ASCI Abstract Communication Service Interface
• SCSM Specific Communication Service Mapping
• SCL Substation Configuration Language
• GSE Generic Substation Events
• GOOSE Generic Object Oriented Substation Events
• GSSE Generic Substation Status Events
• SVC Sampled Value Control
• LCB Log Control Block
• PICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
• MICS Model Implementation Conformance Statement
• PIXIT Protocol Implementation extra Information for Testing
• TICS Technical Issues Conformance Statement
7.3.7.2 Definitions of the ISO/OSI reference model

Communications are based on the OSI Reference Model (OSI/IEC 7498-1) for a multi-layer communication function, to
achieve stable data exchange.
The table below shows the ISO Application (A) and Transport (T) profiles.
• An ISO A profile is a set of specifications and declarations regarding the top three layers of the ISO/OSI reference
model (i.e. the application, presentation, and session layers).
• The T profile is a set of specifications and declarations regarding the lower four layers (i.e. transport, network, data
link, and physical layers).
Table 7-1: OSI reference model and profiles
Application layer
Presentation layer A Profile
Session layer
Transport layer
Network layer
T Profile
Data link layer
Physical layer
A and T profiles can be combined in various ways to form different types of services and information items that can be
exchanged. The services specified in Part 7-2 of the IEC61850 standard are mapped onto four different combinations of
the profiles. These four combinations are used for
• Client/server services,
• GOOSE/GSE management services,
• GSSE services,
• Time synchronization,
• Services for measured value sampling.

7.3.7.3 Conformance statements for F650 devices

For F650 relays whose order code contains Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 "B", "C", "D" or "E" and Communication
protocol "6", product protocol and model implementation conformance statements are described in the following sections:
• 7.3.7.3.1 PICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 "B", "C", "D", "E" on
page 7–12 (PICS for 650 family of relays v1_7 firm3_60)
• 7.3.7.3.4 MICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 option "B", "C", "D",
"E" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 on page 7–41 (MICS for 650 family rev1.4 firm3_60”)
• 7.3.7.3.7 TICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 option "B", "C", "D",
"E" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 on page 7–176 (TICS for 650 family of relays v1_7 firm3_60)
• 7.3.7.3.10 PIXIT for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 option "B", "C",
"D", "E" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 on page 7–185 (PIXIT for 650 family of relays v1_5 firm3_60
For F650 relays whose order code contains Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 "G", "H", "J", "K", "L" or "M" and
Communication protocol "6", product protocol and model implementation conformance statements are described in the
following sections:
IEC 61850 Edition 2:
• 7.3.7.3.2 PICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 "H", "G", "K", "J","L",
"M" and IEC 61850 Edition 2 on page 7–24 (PICS for 650 family of relays v1_4 firm7_20)
• 7.3.7.3.5 MICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 option "H", "G", "K",
"J", "L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 2 on page 7–65 MICS for 650 family of relays v1_01 firm7_20
• 7.3.7.3.8 TICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 option "H", "G", "K",
"J", "L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 2 on page 7–180 (TICS for 650 family of relays v1_0 firm7_20)
• 7.3.7.3.11 PIXIT for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 option "H", "G",
"K", "J", "L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 2 on page 7–193 (PIXIT for 650 family of relays v1_6 firm7_20)
IEC 61850 Edition 1:
• 7.3.7.3.3 PICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 option "H", "G", "K",
"J", "L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 on page 7–36 (PICS For F650 relay V1_6 firm7_52)
• 7.3.7.3.6 MICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 option "H", "G", "K",
"J", "L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 on page 7–125 (MICS For F650 relay V1_10 firm7_52)
• 7.3.7.3.9 TICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 option "H", "G", "K",
"J", "L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 on page 7–183 (TICS For F650 relay V3_04 firm7_52)
• 7.3.7.3.12 PIXIT for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2 option "H", "G",
"K", "J", "L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 1 on page 7–202 (PIXIT For F650 relay V1_10 firm7_52)

7.3.7.3.1 PICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2
"B", "C", "D", "E"
Reference documentation: PICS for 650 family rev1_7 firm3_60.
This document describes the:
• ACSI Conformance Statement
• PICS (“Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement”) for 650 family of relays.
1 ACSI Conformance Statement
The following ACSI conformance statements shall be used to provide an overview and details about a device claiming
conformance with ACSI to specify the communication features mapped to an SCSM:
• ACSI BASIC conformance statement.

• ACSI MODELS conformance statement.
• ACSI SERVICE conformance statement.
1.1 Notation
For the following clauses, these definitions apply:
• Y: The item is implemented.
• N: The item is not implemented.
• AA: Application Association.
• TP: Two-party (application association).
• MC: Multicast (application association).

1.2 ACSI BASIC conformance statement
Client/ subscriber Server/ Value/ comments

publisher
Client-server roles
B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION) - Y
B12 Client side of (TWO-PARTY APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION) - N
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 6185-8-1 used - Y
B22 SCSM: IEC 6185-9-1 used - N
B24 SCSM: other - N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side - Y Both GSSE and
GOOSE
B32 Subscriber side Y - Both GSSE and
GOOSE
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side - N
B42 Subscriber side N -
1.3 ACSI MODELS conformance statement
Client/ subscriber Server/ Value/ comments

publisher
If Server side (B11) supported
M1 Logical device - Y
M2 Logical node - Y
M3 Data - Y
M4 Data set - Y
M5 Substitution - N
M6 Setting group control - Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control - Y
M7-1 sequence-number - Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp - Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion - Y
M7-4 data-set-name - Y
M7-5 data-reference - Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow - Y
M7-7 entryID - Y
M7-8 BufTm - Y
M7-9 IntgPd - Y
M7-10 GI - Y
M8 Unbuffered report control - Y
M8-6 BufTm - Y
If Server side (B11) supported(cont.)

M8-7 IntgPd - Y
M8-8 GI - Y
Logging
M9 Log control - N
M9-1 IntgPd - N
M10 Log - N
M11 Control - Y
f GSE (B31/B32) supported
GOOSE Y Y
M12-1 entryID N N
M12-2 DataRefInc N N
M13 GSSE Y Y
If SVC (B41/B42) supported
M14 Multicast SVC - N
M15 Unicast SVC - N
M16 Time - Y Time source with
required accuracy
shall be available
M17 File Transfer - Y
1.4 ACSI SERVICE conformance statement

The ACSI service conformance statement shall be defined depending on the statements in previous tables.
Services AA: Client/ subscriber Server/ Comments

TP / MC publisher
Server (Clause 6)
S1 ServerDirectory TP - Y
Application association (Clause 7)

S2 Associate - Y
S3 Abort - Y
S4 Release - Y
Logical device (Clause 8)

S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory TP - Y
Logical node (Clause 9)

S6 LogicalNodeDirectory TP - Y
S7 GetAllDataValues TP - Y
Data (Clause 10)

S8 GetDataValues TP - Y
S9 SetDataValues TP - Y
S10 GetDataDirectory TP - Y
S11 GetDataDefinition TP - Y
Data set (Clause 11)

S12 GetDataSetValues TP - Y
S13 SetDataSetValues TP - N
S14 CreateDataSet TP - N

S15 DeleteDataSet TP - N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory TP - Y
Substitution (Clause 12)

S17 SetDataValues TP - N
Setting group control (Clause 13)

S18 SelectActiveSG TP - Y
S19 SelectEditSG TP - Y
S20 SetSGValues TP - Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues TP - Y
S22 GetSGValues TP - Y
S23 GetSGCBValues TP - Y
Reporting (Clause 14)

Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 Report TP - Y
S24-1 data-change (dchg) - Y
S24-2 qchg-change (qchg) - N
S24-3 data-update (dupd) - N
S25 GetBRCBValues TP - Y
S26 SetBRCBValues TP - Y
Unbuffered report control block (URCB)
S27 Report TP - Y
S27-1 data-change (dchg) - Y
S27-2 qchg-change (qchg) - N
S27-3 data-update (dupd) - N
S28 GetURCBValues TP - Y
S29 SetURCBValues TP - Y
Logging (Clause 14)

Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues TP - N
S31 SetLCBValues TP - N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime TP - N
S33 QueryLogAfter TP - N
S34 GetLogStatusValues TP - N
Generic substation event model (GSE) (Clause 14.3.5.3.4)

GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35 SendGOOSEMessage MC - Y
S36 GetGoReference TP - N
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber TP - N
S38 GetGoCBValues TP - Y
S39 SetGoCBValues TP - Y Only GoEna is
writable, the rest
of attributes are
read-only
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40 SendGSSEMessage MC - Y

S41 GetGsReference TP - N
S42 GetGSSEElementNumber TP - N
S43 GetGsCBValues TP - Y
S44 SetGsCBValues TP - Y
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC) (Clause 16)

Multicast SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage MC - N
S46 GetMSVCBValues TP - N
S47 SetMSVCBValues TP - N
Unicast SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage TP - N
S49 GetUSVCBValues TP - N
S50 SetUSVCBValues TP - N
Control (Clause 17.5.1)

S51 Select - Y
S52 SelectWithValue TP - Y
S53 Cancel TP - Y
S54 Operate TP - Y
S55 Command- Termination TP - Y
S56 TimeActivated-Operate TP - N
File transfer (Clause 20)

S57 GetFile TP - Y
S58 SetFile TP - N
S59 DeleteFile TP - N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues TP - Y
Time (Clause 5.5)

T1 Time resolution of internal clock 10 Nearest negative
power of 2 in
seconds
T2 Time accuracy of internal clock T0
T1
Y T2
T3
T4
T5
T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 10 Nearest value of
2**-n in seconds
according to
5.5.3.7.3.3 of Part
7-2
2 PICS (“Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement”)

The tables in sections below appear in the same sequence as in standard IEC 61850-8-1, section 24.
The tables refer to part 7 of the standard and the corresponding information must be contained in the PICS.

2.1 Notation
• x: excluded. The implementation shall not implement this item.
• i: out-of-scope. The implementation of the item is not within the scope of this standard.
• F/S: Functional Standard. Should be applied.
• Base: Shall be applied in any application claiming conformance to this standard.
2.2 Profile conformance
The following tables define the basic conformance statement.
2.2.1 PICS for A-Profile support
A-Profile Client Server

shortcut Profile description Value/comment
realized realized
A1 Client/server A-profile N Y
A2 GOOSE/GSE Management A-profile Y Y Only GOOSE not GSE
management
A3 GSSE A-profile Y Y
A4 Time sync A-profile Y N
2.2.2 PICS for T-Profile support

realized realized
T1 TCP/IP T-profile N Y
T2 OSI T-profile N N
T3 GOOSE/GSE T-profile Y Y Only GOOSE not GSE
management
T4 GSSE T-profile Y Y
T5 TimeSync T-profile Y N
Refer to the services of Part 7 to see whether these profiles are supported. No distinction is made between A- and T-
Profiles there because the definition only refers to the application.
2.3 MMS conformance
The following conformance statements are conditional upon the support of the client/server A-Profile (e.g. A1 see profile
description in Clause 6) being declared.
Except where present, MMS conformance shall be in accordance with ISO/ISP 14226-2.
2.3.1 MMS Initiate conformance
2.3.1.1 MMS InitiateRequest general parameters
Client-CR Server-CR
InitiateRequest realized Value/range realized Value/range
InitiateRequest
localDetailCalling Y
proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling Y
ProposedMaxServOustandingCalled Y
InitRequestDetail Y

InitiateRequestDetail
proposedVersionNumber Y
proposedParameterCBB Y
servicesSupportedCalling Y
additionalSupportedCalling N
additionalCbbSupportedCalling N
privilegeClassIdentityCalling N
2.3.1.2 MMS InitiateResponse general parameters
Client-CR Server-CR
InitiateResponse
localDetailCalled Y
negotiatedMaxServOutstandingCalling Y 1
negotiatedMaxServOustandingCalled Y 3
initResponseDetail Y
InitiateResponseDetail Y
negotiatedVersionNumber Y
negotiatedParameterCBB Y
servicesSupportedCalled Y
additionalSupportedCalled N
additionalCbbSupportedCalled N
privilegeClassIdentityCalled N
2.3.2 MMS services supported conformance statement

This table defines the service support requirement, and restrictions, for this standard. Relationship to ACSI services can be
found in Table 1 of Part 8-1.
Client-CR Server-CR
MMS service supported CBB
realized Value/range realized Value/range
status Y
getNameList Y
identify Y
rename N
read Y
write Y
getVariableAccessAttributes Y
defineNamedVariable N
defineScatteredAccess N
getScatteredAccessAttributes N
deleteVariableAccess N
defineNamedVariableList N
getNamedVariableListAttributes Y
deleteNamedVariableList N
defineNamedType N
getNamedTypeAttributes N
deleteNamedType N
Input N
Output N
takeControl N
relinquishControl N

defineSemaphore N
deleteSemaphore N
reportPoolSemaphoreStatus N
reportSemaphoreStatus N
initiateDownloadSequence N
downloadSegment N
terminateDownloadSequence N
initiateUploadSequence N
uploadSegment N
terminateUploadSequence N
requestDomainDownload N
requestDomainUpload N
loadDomainContent N
storeDomainContent N
deleteDomain N
getDomainAttributes Y
createProgramInvocation N
deleteProgramInvocation N
Start N
Stop N
Resume N
Reset N
Kill N
getProgramInvocationAttributes N
obtainFile N
defineEventCondition N
Client-CR Server-CR
MMS service supported CBB(cont.)
deleteEventCondition N
getEventConditionAttributes N
reportEventConditionStatus N
alterEventConditionMonitoring N
triggerEvent N
defineEventAction N
deleteEventAction N
alterEventEnrollment N
reportEventEnrollmentStatus N
getEventEnrollmentAttributes N
acknowledgeEventNotification N
getAlarmSummary N
getAlarmEnrollmentSummary N
readJournal N
writeJournal N
initializeJournal N
reportJournalStatus N
createJournal N
deleteJournal N
FileOpen Y
FileRead Y
FileClose Y
fileRename N

fileDelete N
fileDirectory Y
unsolicitedStatus N
informationReport Y
eventNotification N
attachToEventCondition N
attachToSemaphore N
Conclude Y
Cancel Y
getDataExchangeAttributes N
exchangeData N
defineAccessControlList N
getAccessControlListAttributes N
reportAccessControlledObjects N
deleteAccessControlList N
alterAccessControl N
reconfigureProgramInvocation N
2.3.3 MMS parameter Conformance Building Block (CBB)
Client-CR Server-CR
MMS parameter CBB
STR1 Y
STR2 Y
VNAM Y
VALT Y
VADR N
VSCA N
TPY N
VLIS Y
REAL N
CEI N
NEST Y 7
ACO N
SEM N
CSR N
CSNC N
CSPLC N
CSPI N
2.3.4 GetNameList conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
GetNameList
Request
ObjectClass Y
ObjectScope Y
DomainName Y
ContinueAfter Y
Response+
List Of Identifier Y

MoreFollows Y
Response–
Error Type Y
NOTE Object class ‘vmd' (formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1.0) shall not appear. If a request contains this ObjectClass, an MMS
Reject shall be issued.
2.3.5 Variable access conformance statement
2.3.5.1 Supporting productions
2.3.5.1.1 AlternateAccessSelection conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
AlternateAccessSelection realized Value/range realized Value/range
accessSelection Y
component Y
index N
indexRange N
allElements N
alternateAccess Y
selectAccess Y
component Y
index N
indexRange N
allElements N
2.3.5.1.2 VariableAccessSpecification conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
VariableAccessSpecification realized Value/range realized Value/range
listOfVariable Y
variableSpecification Y
alternateAccess Y
variableListName Y
2.3.5.1.3 VariableSpecification conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
VariableSpecification
name Y
address N
variableDescription N
scatteredAccessDescription N
invalidated N
2.3.5.2 Read conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
Read
Request
specificationWithResult Y

variableAccessSpecification Y
Response
listOfAccessResult Y
2.3.5.3 Write conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
Write
Request
listOfData Y
Response
failure Y
success Y
2.3.5.4 InformationReport conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
InformationReport
Request
2.3.5.5 GetVariableAccessAttributes conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
GetVariableAccessAttributes
Request
name Y
address N
Response
mmsDeletable Y
address N
typeSpecification Y
2.3.5.6 GetNamedVariableListAttributes conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
GetNamedVariableListAttributes realized Value/range realized Value/range
Request
ObjectName Y
Response
mmsDeletable Y
listOfVariable Y
alternateAccess Y

2.3.6 File management services
2.3.6.1 FileDirectory conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
FileDirectory
Request
filespecification Y
continueAfter Y
Response+
listOfDirectoryEntry Y
MoreFollows Y
2.3.6.2 FileOpen conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
FileOpen
Request
filename Y
initialPosition Y
Response+
frsmID Y
fileAttributes Y
2.3.6.3 FileRead conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
FileRead
Request
FrsmID Y
Response+
FileData Y
moreFollows Y
2.3.6.4 FileClose conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
FileClose
Request
FrsmID Y
Response+ Y

"H", "G", "K", "J","L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 2
Reference documentation: PICS for 650 family of relays v1_4 firm7_20.
• PICS ("Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement") for 650 family of relays.
1 ACSI Conformance Statement
The following ACSI conformance statements shall be used to provide an overview and details about a device claiming
conformance with ACSI to specify the communication features mapped to an SCSM:

The statements specify the communication features mapped to IEC 61850-8-1 First Edition and/or Edition 2.
1.1 Notation

• AA: Application Association.
• TP: Two-party (application association).
• MC: Multicast (application association).
1.2 ASCI basic conformance statement
The basic conformance statement is defined in Table 7-2: Basic conformance statement
Table 7-2: Basic conformance statement
Client/ Server/
Value/ Comments
Subscriber Publisher
Client-Server roles
Server side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-

B11 - Y
ASSOCIATION)
Client side of (TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-
B12 - N
ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 6185-8-1 used - Y

B22 SCSM: IEC 6185-9-1 used - N Ed2:Deprecated


B24 SCSM: other - N
B31 Publisher side - Y

B32 Subscriber side Y -
B41 Publisher side

B42 Subscriber side
–
Y = supported
N or empty = not supported
1.3 ACSI models conformance statement

The ACSI models conformance statement is defined in Table 7-3: ACSI models conformance statement.
Table 7-3: ACSI models conformance statement
Client/ Server/ Value/

Subscriber Publisher Comments
If Server or Client side (B11/12) supported
M1 Logical device - Y
M2 Logical node - Y
M3 Data - Y
M4 Data set - Y
M5 Substitution
M6 Setting group control - Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control - Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow - Y
M7-7 entryID - Y
M7-8 BufTm - Y
M7-9 IntgPd - Y
M7-10 GI - Y
M7-11 conf-revision - Y
M8 Unbuffered report control - Y
M8-6 BufTm - Y
M8-7 IntgPd - Y
M8-8 GI - Y

M8-9 conf-revision - Y
Logging
M9 Log control -
M9-1 IntgPd -
M10 Log -
M11 Control - Y
M17 File Transfer Y
M18 Application association Y
M19 GOOSE Control Block Y
M20 Sampled Value Control Block
If GSE (B31/32) is supported
M12 GOOSE Y
M13 GSSE Deprecated
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC

M15 Unicast SVC
For all IEDs
M16 Time Y Y
Y = service is supported
N or empty = service is not supported
1.4 ACSI service conformance statement

The ACSI service conformance statement is defined in Table 7-4: ACSI service conformance statement.
Table 7-4: ACSI service conformance statement
AA: Client Server

Ed ACSI Service Comments
TP/MC Sub(C) Pub(S)
Server
GetServerDirectory(LOGICAL-
S1 1,2 TP Y
DEVICE)
Application association
S2 1,2 Associate TP Y
S3 1,2 Abort TP Y
S4 1,2 Release TP Y
Logical device
S5 1,2 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory TP Y
Logical node
S6 1,2 GetLogicalNodeDirectory TP Y
S7 1,2 GetAllDataValues TP Y
Data
S8 1,2 GetDataValues TP Y
S9 1,2 SetDataValues TP Y
S10 1,2 GetDataDirectory TP Y
S11 1,2 GetDataDefinition TP Y
Data set

S12 1,2 GetDataSetValues TP Y

S13 1,2 SetDataSetValues TP N
S14 1,2 CreateDataSet TP N
S15 1,2 DeleteDataSet TP N
S16 1,2 GetDataSetDirectory TP Y
Substitution
S17 1 SetDataValues TP N Ed1 only
Setting group control

S18 1,2 SelectActiveSG TP Y
S19 1,2 SelectEditSG TP Y
S20 1,2 SetEditSGValues TP Y
S21 1,2 ConfirmEditSGValues TP Y
S22 1,2 GetEditSGValues TP Y
S23 1,2 GetSGCBValues TP Y
Reporting
S24 1,2 Report TP Y
S24-1 1,2 data-change (dchg) Y
S24-2 1,2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S24-3 1,2 data-update (dupd) N
S25 1,2 GetBRCBValues TP Y
S26 1,2 SetBRCBValues TP Y
S27 1,2 Report TP Y
S28 1,2 GetURCBValues TP Y
S29 1,2 SetURCBValues TP Y
Logging
Log control
S30 1,2 GetLCBValues TP N
S31 1,2 SetLCBValues TP N
Log
S32 1,2 QueryLogByTime TP N
S33 1,2 QueryLogAfter TP N
S34 1,2 GetLogStatusValues TP N

GOOSE
S35 1,2 SendGOOSEMessage MC Y
GOOSE Control Block
S36 1,2 GetGoReference TP
S37 1,2 GetGOOSEElementNumber TP
S38 1,2 GetGoCBValues TP Y
S39 1,2 SetGoCBValues TP Y
GSSE (Ed2:61850-7-2 Annex C)
S40 1,2 SendGSSEMessage MC N Deprecated
GSSE Control Block (Ed2:61850-7-2 Annex C)
S41 1,2 GetGsReference TP N Deprecated
S42 1,2 GetGSSEDataOffset TP N Deprecated
S43 1,2 GetGsCBValues TP N Deprecated
S44 1,2 SetGsCBValues TP N Deprecated


Multicast SV
S45 1,2 SendMSVMessage MC N Use for 9-2LE or IEC 61869-9
Multicast Sampled Value Control Block
S46 1,2 GetMSVCBValues TP N
S47 1,2 SetMSVCBValues TP N
Unicast SV
S48 1,2 SendUSVMessage TP N
Unicast Sampled Value Control Block
S49 1,2 GetUSVCBValues TP N
S50 1,2 SetUSVCBValues TP N
Control
S51 1,2 Select TP Y SBO Normal Security
S52 1,2 SelectWithValue TP Y SBO Enhanced Security
S53 1,2 Cancel TP Y
S54 1,2 Operate TP Y
S55 1,2 CommandTermination TP Y
S56 1,2 TimeActivatedOperate TP N
File transfer
S57 1,2 GetFile TP Y
S58 1,2 SetFile TP N
S59 1,2 DeleteFile TP N
S60 1,2 GetFileAttributeValues TP Y
S61 1,2 GetServerDirectory (FILE) TP Y
Time
T1 1,2 Time resolution of internal clock - 2ms nearest negative power of 2 in seconds
TL (ms) (low accuracy), T3 < 7) (only
T2 2 Time accuracy of internal clock -
Ed2)
1,2 - T0 (ms) (<= 10 ms), 7 <= T3 < 9)
1,2 - T1 (µs) (<= 1 ms), 10 <= T3 < 13
1,2 - T2 (µs) (<= 100 µS), 13 <= T3 < 15
1,2 - T3 (µs) (<= 25 µS), 15 <= T3 < 18
1,2 - T4 (µs) (<= 4 µS), 18 <= T3 < 20
1,2 - Y T5 (µs) (<= 1 µS), T3 >= 20)
T3 1,2 Supported TimeStamp resolution - 1ms nearest negative power of 2 in seconds
2 PICS (“Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement”)

The tables in sections below appear in the same sequence as in standard IEC 61850-8-1, section 24.
The tables refer to part 7 of the standard and the corresponding information must be contained in the PICS.
2.1 Notation
• x: excluded. The implementation shall not implement this item.
• i: out-of-scope. The implementation of the item is not within the scope of this standard.
• F/S: Functional Standard. Should be applied.

• Base: Shall be applied in any application claiming conformance to this standard.

2.2 Profile conformance
The following tables define the basic conformance statement.
2.2.1 PICS for A-Profile support

realized realized
A1 Client/server A-profile N Y
A2 GOOSE/GSE Management A-profile Y Y Only GOOSE not GSE
management
A3 GSSE A-profile Y Y
A4 Time sync A-profile Y N
2.2.2 PICS for T-Profile support

realized realized
T1 TCP/IP T-profile N Y
T2 OSI T-profile N N
T3 GOOSE/GSE T-profile Y Y Only GOOSE not GSE
management
T4 GSSE T-profile Y Y
T5 TimeSync T-profile Y N
Refer to the services of Part 7 to see whether these profiles are supported. No distinction is made between A- and T-
Profiles there because the definition only refers to the application.
2.3 MMS conformance
The following conformance statements are conditional upon the support of the client/server A-Profile (e.g. A1 see profile
description in Clause 6) being declared.
Except where present, MMS conformance shall be in accordance with ISO/ISP 14226-2.
2.3.1 MMS Initiate conformance
2.3.1.1 MMS InitiateRequest general parameters
Client-CR Server-CR
InitiateRequest
localDetailCalling Y
proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling Y
ProposedMaxServOustandingCalled Y
InitRequestDetail Y
InitiateRequestDetail
proposedVersionNumber Y
proposedParameterCBB Y
servicesSupportedCalling Y
additionalSupportedCalling N
additionalCbbSupportedCalling N
privilegeClassIdentityCalling N

2.3.1.2 MMS InitiateResponse general parameters
Client-CR Server-CR
InitiateResponse
localDetailCalled Y
negotiatedMaxServOutstandingCalling Y 1
negotiatedMaxServOustandingCalled Y 3
initResponseDetail Y
InitiateResponseDetail Y
negotiatedVersionNumber Y
negotiatedParameterCBB Y
servicesSupportedCalled Y
additionalSupportedCalled N
additionalCbbSupportedCalled N
privilegeClassIdentityCalled N
2.3.2 MMS services supported conformance statement

This table defines the service support requirement, and restrictions, for this standard. Relationship to ACSI services can be
found in Table 1 of Part 8-1.
Client-CR Server-CR
MMS service supported CBB
status Y
getNameList Y
identify Y
rename N
read Y
write Y
getVariableAccessAttributes Y
defineNamedVariable N
defineScatteredAccess N
getScatteredAccessAttributes N
deleteVariableAccess N
defineNamedVariableList N
getNamedVariableListAttributes Y
deleteNamedVariableList N
defineNamedType N
getNamedTypeAttributes N
deleteNamedType N
Input N
Output N
takeControl N
relinquishControl N
defineSemaphore N
deleteSemaphore N
reportPoolSemaphoreStatus N
reportSemaphoreStatus N
initiateDownloadSequence N
downloadSegment N
terminateDownloadSequence N
initiateUploadSequence N

uploadSegment N
terminateUploadSequence N
requestDomainDownload N
requestDomainUpload N
loadDomainContent N
storeDomainContent N
deleteDomain N
getDomainAttributes Y
createProgramInvocation N
deleteProgramInvocation N
Start N
Stop N
Resume N
Reset N
Kill N
getProgramInvocationAttributes N
obtainFile N
defineEventCondition N
deleteEventCondition N
getEventConditionAttributes N
reportEventConditionStatus N
alterEventConditionMonitoring N
triggerEvent N
defineEventAction N
deleteEventAction N
alterEventEnrollment N
reportEventEnrollmentStatus N
getEventEnrollmentAttributes N
acknowledgeEventNotification N
getAlarmSummary N
getAlarmEnrollmentSummary N
readJournal N
writeJournal N
initializeJournal N
reportJournalStatus N
createJournal N
deleteJournal N
FileOpen Y
FileRead Y
FileClose Y
fileRename N
fileDelete N
fileDirectory Y
unsolicitedStatus N
informationReport Y
eventNotification N
attachToEventCondition N
attachToSemaphore N
Conclude Y
Cancel Y
getDataExchangeAttributes N

exchangeData N
defineAccessControlList N
getAccessControlListAttributes N
reportAccessControlledObjects N
deleteAccessControlList N
alterAccessControl N
reconfigureProgramInvocation N
2.3.3 MMS parameter Conformance Building Block (CBB)
Client-CR Server-CR
MMS parameter CBB
STR1 Y
STR2 Y
VNAM Y
VALT Y
VADR N
VSCA N
TPY N
VLIS Y
REAL N
CEI N
NEST Y 7
ACO N
SEM N
CSR N
CSNC N
CSPLC N
CSPI N
2.3.4 GetNameList conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
GetNameList
Request
ObjectClass Y
ObjectScope Y
DomainName Y
ContinueAfter Y
Response+
List Of Identifier Y
MoreFollows Y
Response–
Error Type Y
NOTE Object class ‘vmd' (formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1.0) shall not appear. If a request contains this ObjectClass, an MMS
Reject shall be issued.

2.3.5 Variable access conformance statement

2.3.5.1 Supporting productions
2.3.5.1.1 AlternateAccessSelection conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
AlternateAccessSelection realized Value/range realized Value/range
accessSelection Y
component Y
index N
indexRange N
allElements N
alternateAccess Y
selectAccess Y
component Y
index N
indexRange N
allElements N
2.3.5.1.2 VariableAccessSpecification conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
VariableAccessSpecification realized Value/range realized Value/range
listOfVariable Y
alternateAccess Y
variableListName Y
2.3.5.1.3 VariableSpecification conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
VariableSpecification
name Y
address N
variableDescription N
scatteredAccessDescription N
invalidated N
2.3.5.2 Read conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
Read
Request
specificationWithResult Y
Response

2.3.5.3 Write conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
Write
Request
listOfData Y
Response
failure Y
success Y
2.3.5.4 InformationReport conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
InformationReport
Request
2.3.5.5 GetVariableAccessAttributes conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
GetVariableAccessAttributes
Request
name Y
address N
Response
mmsDeletable Y
address N
typeSpecification Y
2.3.5.6 GetNamedVariableListAttributes conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
GetNamedVariableListAttributes realized Value/range realized Value/range
Request
ObjectName Y
Response
mmsDeletable Y
listOfVariable Y
alternateAccess Y

2.3.6 File management services
2.3.6.1 FileDirectory conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
FileDirectory
Request
filespecification Y
continueAfter Y
Response+
listOfDirectoryEntry Y
MoreFollows Y
2.3.6.2 FileOpen conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
FileOpen
Request
filename Y
initialPosition Y
Response+
frsmID Y
fileAttributes Y
2.3.6.3 FileRead conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
FileRead
Request
FrsmID Y
Response+
FileData Y
moreFollows Y
2.3.6.4 FileClose conformance statement
Client-CR Server-CR
FileClose
Request
FrsmID Y
Response+ Y

option "H", "G", "K", "J", "L", "M" and IEC 61850 Edition 1
Reference documentation: PICS For F650 relay V1_6 firm7_52.
• PICS ("Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement") for 650 family of relays.
1 General
The following ACSI conformance statements are used to provide an overview and details about F650 bay controller, with
firmware 7.52:
The statements specify the communication features mapped to IEC 61850-8-1 First Edition and/or Edition 2.
2 ASCI basic conformance statement

The basic conformance statement is defined in Table 7-5: Basic conformance statement
Table 7-5: Basic conformance statement
Client/ Server/
Value/ Comments
Subscriber Publisher
Client-Server roles
Server side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-

B11 Y
ASSOCIATION)
Client side of (TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-
B12
ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 6185-8-1 used Y

B22 SCSM: IEC 6185-9-1 used Ed2:Deprecated
B23 SCSM: IEC 6185-9-2 used
B24 SCSM: other
B31 Publisher side Y

B32 Subscriber side Y
B41 Publisher side

B42 Subscriber side
–
Y = supported
N or empty = not supported

3 ACSI models conformance statement

The ACSI models conformance statement is defined in Table 7-6: ACSI models conformance statement.
Table 7-6: ACSI models conformance statement
Client/ Server/ Value/

Subscriber Publisher Comments
If Server or Client side (B11/12) supported
M1 Logical device Y
M2 Logical node Y
M3 Data Y
M4 Data set Y
M5 Substitution
M6 Setting group control Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y
M7-5 data-reference Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y
M7-7 entryID Y
M7-8 BufTm Y
M7-9 IntgPd Y
M7-10 GI Y
M7-11 conf-revision Y
M8 Unbuffered report control Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y
M8-5 data-reference Y
M8-6 BufTm Y
M8-7 IntgPd Y
M8-8 GI Y
M8-9 conf-revision Y
Logging
M9 Log control
M9-1 IntgPd
M10 Log
M11 Control Y
M17 File Transfer Y
M18 Application association Y
M19 GOOSE Control Block Y
M20 Sampled Value Control Block
If GSE (B31/32) is supported
M12 GOOSE Y
M13 GSSE Deprecated
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC

M15 Unicast SVC

For all IEDs
M16 Time Y Y
Y = service is supported
N or empty = service is not supported
4 ACSI service conformance statement

The ACSI service conformance statement is defined in Table 7-7: ACSI service conformance statement.
Table 7-7: ACSI service conformance statement
AA: Client Server

Ed ACSI Service Comments
TP/MC Sub(C) Pub(S)
Server
GetServerDirectory(LOGICAL-
S1 1,2 TP Y
DEVICE)
Application association
S2 1,2 Associate TP Y
S3 1,2 Abort TP Y
S4 1,2 Release TP Y
Logical device
S5 1,2 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory TP Y
Logical node
S6 1,2 GetLogicalNodeDirectory TP Y
S7 1,2 GetAllDataValues TP Y
Data
S8 1,2 GetDataValues TP Y
S9 1,2 SetDataValues TP Y
S10 1,2 GetDataDirectory TP Y
S11 1,2 GetDataDefinition TP Y
Data set
S12 1,2 GetDataSetValues TP Y
S13 1,2 SetDataSetValues TP N
S14 1,2 CreateDataSet TP N
S15 1,2 DeleteDataSet TP N
S16 1,2 GetDataSetDirectory TP Y
Substitution
S17 1 SetDataValues TP N Ed1 only
Setting group control

S18 1,2 SelectActiveSG TP Y
S19 1,2 SelectEditSG TP Y
S20 1,2 SetEditSGValues TP Y
S21 1,2 ConfirmEditSGValues TP Y
S22 1,2 GetEditSGValues TP Y
S23 1,2 GetSGCBValues TP Y
Reporting
S24 1,2 Report TP Y


S25 1,2 GetBRCBValues TP Y
S26 1,2 SetBRCBValues TP Y
S27 1,2 Report TP Y
S28 1,2 GetURCBValues TP Y
S29 1,2 SetURCBValues TP Y
Logging
Log control
S30 1,2 GetLCBValues TP N
S31 1,2 SetLCBValues TP N
Log
S32 1,2 QueryLogByTime TP N
S33 1,2 QueryLogAfter TP N
S34 1,2 GetLogStatusValues TP N

GOOSE
S35 1,2 SendGOOSEMessage MC Y
GOOSE Control Block
S36 1,2 GetGoReference TP
S37 1,2 GetGOOSEElementNumber TP
S38 1,2 GetGoCBValues TP Y
S39 1,2 SetGoCBValues TP Y
GSSE (Ed2:61850-7-2 Annex C)
S40 1,2 SendGSSEMessage MC N Deprecated
GSSE Control Block (Ed2:61850-7-2 Annex C)
S41 1,2 GetGsReference TP N Deprecated
S42 1,2 GetGSSEDataOffset TP N Deprecated
S43 1,2 GetGsCBValues TP N Deprecated
S44 1,2 SetGsCBValues TP N Deprecated

Multicast SV
S45 1,2 SendMSVMessage MC N Use for 9-2LE or IEC 61869-9
Multicast Sampled Value Control Block
S46 1,2 GetMSVCBValues TP N
S47 1,2 SetMSVCBValues TP N
Unicast SV
S48 1,2 SendUSVMessage TP N
Unicast Sampled Value Control Block
S49 1,2 GetUSVCBValues TP N
S50 1,2 SetUSVCBValues TP N
Control
S51 1,2 Select TP Y SBO Normal Security
S52 1,2 SelectWithValue TP Y SBO Enhanced Security
S53 1,2 Cancel TP Y
S54 1,2 Operate TP Y
S55 1,2 CommandTermination TP Y
S56 1,2 TimeActivatedOperate TP N

File transfer
S57 1,2 GetFile TP Y
S58 1,2 SetFile TP N
S59 1,2 DeleteFile TP N
S60 1,2 GetFileAttributeValues TP Y
S61 1,2 GetServerDirectory (FILE) TP Y
Time
T1 1,2 Time resolution of internal clock - 2ms nearest negative power of 2 in seconds
TL (ms) (low accuracy), T3 < 7) (only
T2 2 Time accuracy of internal clock -
Ed2)
1,2 - T0 (ms) (<= 10 ms), 7 <= T3 < 10)
1,2 - T1 (µs) (<= 1 ms), 10 <= T3 < 13
1,2 - T2 (µs) (<= 100 µS), 13 <= T3 < 15
1,2 - T3 (µs) (<= 25 µS), 15 <= T3 < 18
1,2 - T4 (µs) (<= 4 µS), 18 <= T3 < 20
1,2 - Y T5 (µs) (<= 1 µS), T3 >= 20)
T3 1,2 Supported TimeStamp resolution - 1ms nearest negative power of 2 in seconds

7.3.7.3.4 MICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2
option "B", "C", "D", "E" and IEC 61850 Edition 1
Reference documentation: MICS for 650 family rev1.4 firm3_60.
• Logical Nodes List
• Logical Nodes and Extensions
• Enum types implementation
1 Logical Nodes List
The following table contains the list of logical nodes implemented in the device with firmware version lower than 7.00:
L: System Logical Nodes

LPHD (Physical device information)
LLN0 (Logical node zero)
P: Logical Nodes for protection functions
PIOC (Instantaneous overcurrent)
PTOC (Time overcurrent)
PTOF (Overfrequency)
PTOV (Overvoltage)
PTUV (Undervoltage)
PTUF (Underfrequency)
R: Logical nodes for protection related functions
RDIR (Directional element)
RREC (Autoreclosing)
C: Logical Nodes for control
CSWI (Switch controller)
G: Logical Nodes for generic references
GGIO (Generic process I/O)
M: Logical Nodes for metering and measurement
MMTR (Metering)
MMXU (Measurement)
MSQI (Sequence and imbalance)
X: Logical Nodes for switchgear
XCBR (Circuit breaker)
XSWI (Circuit switch)
2 Logical Nodes and Extensions

Some of the following logical nodes have been extended with extra data. All extra data has been highligthed in the tables
and marked as “E” (Extended), these data contains “dataNs” attribute with the NameSpace “GE MICS for 650 family
rev1.3”.
Comments:
ØM: Data is mandatory in the IEC-61850-7-4.
ØO: Data is optional in the IEC-61850-7-4 and is used in the device.
ØE: Data is an extension to the IEC-61850-7-4.

2.1 System Logical Nodes. LN Group: L

2.1.1LPHD (Physical device information)
LPHD class
Attribute Name Attribute Type Explanation M/O/E Notes
LPHD Physical device information M
Data
Common Logical Node Information
PhyNam DPL Physical device name plate M
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M
2.1.2 LLN0 (Logical node zero)
LLN0 class
LLN0 Logical node zero
Data
Mod INC Mode M Status-only
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
NamPlt LPL Name plate M
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O
Optmh INS Operation time M
GsCB (ACSI class GSSE control block)
GsCB GsCB
GoCB (ACSI class GOOSE control block)
GoCB GoCB
SGCB (ACSI class Setting Group control block)
SGCB SGCB
2.1.2.1 GsCB (GSSE control block class definition)
GsCB class
Attribute Name Attribute Type FC Notes
GsEna BOOLEAN GS Enable (TRUE), disable (FALSE)
GsID VISIBLE STRING65 GS
DNALabels[1..n] VISIBLE STRING65 GS Labels of DNA bit pairs
UserSTLabels[1..n] VISIBLE STRING65 GS Label of ST bit pairs
LSentData [1..n] GSSEData GS Derived from GSSE message
2.1.2.2 GoCB (GOOSE control block class definition)
GoCB class
GoEna BOOLEAN GO Enable (TRUE), disable (FALSE)
GoID VISIBLE STRING65 GO

DatSet VISIBLE STRING65 GO

ConfRev INT32U GO
NdsCom BOOLEAN GO
DstAddress
Addr OCTET-STRING GO
PRIORITY UNSIGNED8 GO
VID UNSIGNED16 GO
APPID UNSIGNED16 GO
2.1.2.3 SGCB (Setting Group control block class definition)
SGCB class
NumOfSG INT8U SP Total number of settings group available in the logical
device. Fixed as 3
ActSG INT8U SP Setting group whose values are used by a logical node
to performing its function. Values: 1, 2 or 3
EditSG INT8U SP Setting group whose values can be set. Values: 1, 2 or 3
CnfEdit BOOLEAN SP
LActTm Timestamp SP
2.2 Logical Nodes for protection functions. LN Group:P

2.2.1 PIOC (Instantaneous overcurrent)
2.2.1.1 phsPIOC
This logical node class is used for phase instantaneous overcurrent and has 6 instances inside the device.
PIOC class
Attribute Attribute Explanation M/O/E Notes
Name Type
PIOC Instantaneous overcurrent
Data
Beh INS behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Str ACD Start O IOC PKP
Op ACT Operate M IOC OP
Blk ACT Blk E IOC BLK
Settings
StrVal ASG Start value M Pickup Level (0,05 – 160)
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time E Trip Delay (0-900000)
Units in milliseconds
InMagTyp ING Input Type E (Phasor or RMS)
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay E Reset Delay (0-900000)
Units in milliseconds
PIOCEna SPG Function IOC enable E Function
Note: ACT includes origin attribute in ST, this is implemented according to Tissue 68.

2.2.1.2 ndPIOC
This logical node class is used for neutral instantaneous overcurrent and has 3 instances inside the device.
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Settings
StrVal ASG Start value M Pickup Level (0,05 – 160)
Units in miliseconds
2.2.1.3 gndPIOC/hsePIOC
This logical node class is used for ground instantaneous and sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent. There are 6
instances of this logical node inside the device.
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Settings
StrVal ASG Start value M Pickup Level (0,05 – 160)*
InMagTyp ING Input Type E (Phasor or RMS)

*For sensitive ground pickup level (0,005 - 16)

2.2.2 PTOC (Time overcurrent)
2.2.2.1 phsPTOC
This logical node class is used for phase time overcurrent and has 6 instances inside the device.
PTOC class
Name Type
PTOC Time overcurrent
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Str ACD Start M TOC PKP
Op ACT Operate M TOC OP
Blk ACT Block E TOC BLK
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating curve type M Curve
StrVal ASG Start value O Pickup Level (0,05 - 160)
TmMult ASG Time dial multiplier O TD Multiplier (0 – 900)
RsMod ING Reset Mode E Reset (instantaneous, lineal)
InMagTyp ING Input Type E Input (Phasor, RMS)
VolRst SPG Voltage Restraint E (enable, Disable)
PTOCEna SPG Function TOC enable E Function
2.2.2.2 ndPTOC
This logical node class is used for neutral time overcurrent and has 3 instances inside the device.
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Str ACD Start M TOC PKP
Blk ACT Block E TOC BLK
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating curve type M Curve
StrVal ASG Start value O Pickup Level (0,05 - 160)


RsMod ING Reset Mode E Reset (instantaneous, lineal)
PTOCEna SPG Function TOC enable E Function
2.2.2.3 gndPTOC
This logical node class is used for ground time overcurrent and sensitive ground time overcurrent. There are 6 instances
inside of this logical node inside the device, three of them are used for ground time overcurrent a and three for sensitive
ground time overcurrent.
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Str ACD Start O TOC PKP
Blk ACT Block O TOC BLK
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating curve type O Curve
StrVal ASG Start value O Pickup Level (0,05 – 160)
RsMod ING Reset Mode O Reset (instantaneous, lineal)
InMagTyp ING Input Type O Input (Phasor, RMS)
PTOCEna SPG Function TOC enable O Function
2.2.3 PTOF (OverFrequency)

This logical node class is used for overfrequency and has 3 instances inside the device.
PTOF class
Name Type
PTOF OverFrequency
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Str ACD Start M TOF PKP
Op ACD Operate M TOF OP
Blk ACT Block E TOF BLK
Settings
StrVal ASG Start value (frequency) O Pickup Level (20-65)

BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Minimun Voltage (10-300)

OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Trip Delay (0-900000)
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O Reset Delay (0-900000)
PTOFEna SPG Function TOF enable E Function (Enable,Disable)
2.2.4 PTOV (Overvoltage)
2.2.4.1 phsPTOV
This logical node class is used for phase overvoltage and has 3 instances inside the device.
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Str ACD Start M TOV PKP
Op ACT Operate O TOV OP
Blk ACT Block E TOV BLK
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value O Pickup Level (3 – 300)
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Trip Delay ( 0 – 900000 )
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O Reset Delay ( 0 – 900000 )
PhLogic ING Logic Mode E Logic ( Any, two, all phases )
PTOVEna SPG Function TOV enable E Function
2.2.4.2 auxPTOV
This logical node class is used for auxiliary overvoltage and has 3 instances inside the device.
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information

Settings
2.2.4.3 neuPTOV
This logical node class is used for neutral overvoltage and has 6 instances inside the device.
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Settings
2.2.5 PTUV (Undervoltage)

2.2.5.1 phsPTUV
This logical node class is used for phase undervoltage and has 3 instances inside the device.
PTUV class
Name Type
PTUV Undervoltage
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Str ACD Start M TUV PKP

Op ACT Operate M TUV OP

Blk ACT Block E TUV BLK
StrPhGn ACD Start E TUV Phase-Gnd PKP
OpPhGn ACT Operate E TUV Phase-Gnd OP
StrPhPh ACD Start E TUV Phase-Phase PKP
OpPhPh ACT Operate E TUV Phase-Phase OP
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE_2 Operating curve type O Curve ( definitive, inverse )
StrVal ASG Start value O Pickup Level (3 – 300)
TmMult ASG Time dial multiplier O Delay (0 – 900)
DeaLinVal ASG Minimum Voltage E Minimum Voltage (0 – 300)
PhLogic ING Logic E Logic (Any, Two, All phases)
InMod ING Mode E Phase-Phase, Phase-Ground
BkrMon SPG Supervised by 52 E Enable, Disable
PTUVEna SPG Function TUV enable E Function
Notes:
TmVCrv object uses Enum type setCharact_2 (See the Enum types implementation section).
ACT includes origin attribute in ST, this is implemented according to Tissue 68.
2.2.5.2 AuxPTUV
This logical node class is used for auxiliary undervoltage and has 3 instances inside the device.
PTUV class
Name Type
PTUV Undervoltage
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Str ACD Start M TUV PKP
Op ACT Operate M TUV OP
Blk ACT Block E TUV BLK
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE_2 Operating curve type O Curve ( definitive, inverse )
StrVal ASG Start value O Pickup Level (3 – 300)
TmMult ASG Time dial multiplier O Delay (0 – 900)
PTUVEna SPG Function TUV enable E Function
Notes:
TmVCrv object uses Enum type setCharact_2 (See the Enum types implementation section).
2.2.6 PTUF (UnderFrequency)

This logical node class is used for phase underfrequency and has 3 instances inside the device.

PTUF class
Name Type
PTUF UnderFrequency
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Str ACD Start M TUF PKP
Op ACD Operate M TUF OP
Blk ACT Block E TUF BLK
Settings
StrVal ASG Start value (frequency) O Pickup Level (20-65)
BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O Minimun Voltage (10-300)
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Trip Delay (0-900000)
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O Reset Delay (0-900000)
PTUFEna SPG Function TUF enable E Function (Enable,Disable)
2.3 Logical Nodes for protection related functions. LN Group: R
2.3.1 RDIR (Directional element)
2.3.1.1 phsRDIR
This logical node class is used for phase directional elements and has 3 instances inside the device.
RDIR class
Name Type
RDIR Directional Element
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Dir ACD Direction M Fixed to unknown value
Op ACT Operate O Phase Dir OP
Blk ACT Block O Phase Dir Block
BlkIn ACT Phase Dir Blk Inp O Phase Dir Blk Inp
Settings
ChrAng ASG Characteristic Angle O (-90, 90) MTA
BlkValV ASG Minimun operating current O (0, 300) Pol V Threshold
PolOpMod ING Direction E (Reverse, Forward)
BlkMod ING Block Logical E (Prmission, Blocked)
RDIREna SPG Function Permission E (Enable, Disable)

2.3.1.2 ndRDIR
This logical node class is used for neutral directional elements and has 3 instances inside the device.
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Op ACT Operate E Neutral Dir OP
Blk ACT Block E Neutral Dir Block
BlkIn ACT Neutral Dir Blk Inp E Neutral Dir Blk Inp
Settings
BlkMod ING Block Logica E (Prmission, Blocked)
PolQty ING Polarisation O (VO,IP,VO+IP,VO*IP)
2.3.1.3 gndRDIR
This logical node class is used for ground directional elements and has 3 instances inside the device.
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Op ACT Operate E Ground Dir OP
Blk ACT Block E Ground Dir Block
BlkIn ACT Ground Dir Blk Inp E Ground Dir Blk Inp
Settings


PolQty ING Polarisation O (VO,IP,VO+IP,VO*IP)
2.3.1.4 hseRDIR
This logical node class is used for sensitive ground directional elements and has 3 instances inside the device.
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Op ACT Operate E Sens Gnd Dir OP
Blk ACT Block E Sens Gnd Dir Block
BlkIn ACT Sens Gnd Dir Blk Inp E Sens Gnd Dir Blk Inp
Settings
2.3.2 RREC (Autoreclosing)

This logical node class is used for autorecloser and has 1 instance inside the device.
RREC class
Name Type
RREC Autoreclosing
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status Information
Op ACT Operate M AR Close Breaker
AutoRecSt INS Auto Reclosing status M AR Status
AutoRecLo INS Auto Reclosing Lockout Status E AR Lockout Mode

AutoRecBlk INS Auto Reclosing Block Status E AR Block Mode

Settings
Rec1Tmms ING First Reclose Time O Dead Time 1
Rec2Tmms ING Second Reclose Time O Dead Time 2
Rec3Tmms ING Third Reclose Time O Dead Time 3
Rec4Tmms ING Fourth Reclose Time E Dead Time 4
RclTmms ING Reclaim Time O Reclaim Time
MaxNumShot ING Max number of Shots E Max number Shots
RsTmms ASG Reclosing --> Ready E Reset Time
HoldTmms ASG Cond Check Time E Hold Time
CondEna SPG Check Cond (Enable, Disable) E Cond Permission
RRECEna SPG Function Enable, Disable E Function Permission
Notes:
AutoRecSt object includes extra enum values specified by Tissue 3 and Tissue 133 (See the Enum types implementation
section).
2.4 Logical Nodes for control. LN Group: C
2.4.1 CSWI (Switch controller)
CSWI class
Name Type
CSWI Switch controller
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Controls
Pos DPC Switch position M Switch open, close, undefined
In the F650 there are up to 9 configurable switchgears. Currently nine XSWI and nine CSWI are implemented and mapped
to first nine switchgears in F650. XSWI and CSWI Logical Nodes can be seen as paired objects in F650 as one pair of XSWI
and CSWI map to the same switchgear. XSWI1 and CSWI1 map to Switchgear1, XSWI2 and CSWI2 map to Switchgear2,
etc. The difference between XSWI and CSWI in F650 is that control commands cannot be sent directly via XSWI LN. Control
commands have to be sent via CSWI LN.
In CSWI LN for "Pos" controllable attribute all possible control models are applicable:
• “direct-control-with-normal-security”
• “SBO-control-with-normal-security”
• “direct-control-with-enhanced-security”
• “SBO-control-with-enhanced-security”
The sboTimeout attribute for Pos is configurable in a range from 500 ms to 60 seconds.

The sboClass attribute for Pos can only have value "0" (operate-once).
2.5 Logical Nodes for generic references. LN Group: G

2.5.1 GGIO (Generic process I/O)
2.5.1.1 GGIO
This logical node class is used is used to map digital and analogue inputs of I/O boards F, G, H and J.
GGIO class
Name Type
GGIO Generic process I/O
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status information
BoardSt SPS Board Status E Board Status.
True:
board present and working correctly
False:
board not present
board present and board model
mismatch
board present and hardware failure
Ind1 SPS General Indication ( binary input ) O Contact Input 1

Ind33 SPS General Indication ( binary input ) O Contact Output 1
.. .. .. .. ..
Ind48 SPS General Indication ( binary input ) O Contact Output 16
Measured Values
AnIn1 MV Analogue input O Analog Input 1

2.5.1.2 vinGGIO
This logical node class is used is used to map the latched and self reset virtual Inputs.
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Controls
DPCSO1 geDPC Double point controllable status O Latched Virtual Input 1, 2
output
output
.. .. .. .. ..
output
SPCSO1 SPC Single point controllable status O Latched Virtual Input 1
output
output
.. .. .. .. ..
output
SPCSO33 SPC Single point controllable status O Self reset Virtual Input 1
output
output
.. .. .. .. ..
output
Note:
Double control points operate on pairs of Virtual Inputs in a manner that one Virtual Input of the pair is set to “1” and the
other Virtual Input of the pair is set to "0".
For all controllable attributes in this logical node only "direct-control-with-normal-security" model of control is applicable.

2.5.1.3 eveGGIO
This logical node class is used to map data from the list of any all internal digital states (PLC control events).
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status information
Ind1 SPS General Indication ( binary O Control Event 1
input )
input )
......... .......... ............... .......... ..............
input )
Ind129 SPS General Indication ( binary O Switchgear 1 event 1
input )
input )
input )
input )
input )
......... .......... ............... .......... ..............
input )
2.5.1.4 geRemoteInputsGGIO
This logical node class is used to map data from incoming GOOSE messages.
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status information
Ind1 SPS General Indication ( binary O Remote Digital Input 1
input )
input )
......... .......... ............... .......... ..............


input )
AnIn1 SPS Analogue input O Remote Analogue Input 1
......... .......... ............... .......... ..............
2.5.1.5 geRemoteOutputsGGIO
This logical node class is used to map PLC digital states for outgoing GOOSE messages.
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status information
Ind1 SPS General Indication ( binary O Remote Digital Output 1
input )
input )
......... .......... ............... .......... ..............
input )
input )
Note: In 650 relays data from all logical nodes can be sent through outgoing GOOSE messages. Apart from that, logical
node rouGGIO gives the ability to send through GOOSE digital states that are results of PLC logic equations. Mapping and
configuration of rouGGIO states should be done with Enervista650 software.

2.6 Logical Nodes for metering and measurement. LN Group: M

2.6.1 MMTR (Metering)
MMTR class
Name Type
MMTR Metering
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Measured values
SupWh BCR Mapped to generic pulse counter O Pulse Counter 1
SupVArh BCR Mapped to generic pulse counter O Pulse Counter 2
DmdWh BCR Mapped to generic pulse counter O Pulse Counter 3
DmdVArh BCR Mapped to generic pulse counter O Pulse Counter 4
CntPsWh MV Positive Wat Counter O
CntNgWh MV Negative Wat Counter O
CntPsVArh MV Positive VAR Counter O
CntNgVArh MV Negative VAR Counter O
Note: actVal in BCR is imlemented as INT32.
2.6.2 MMXU (Measurement)
MMXU class
Name Type
MMXU Measurement
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Measured values
TotW MV Total active power (P) O Phase Real Pwr
TotVAr MV Total reactive power (Q) O Ph Reactive Pwr
TotVA MV Total apparent power (S) O Ph Apparent Pwr
TotPF MV Average power factor (PF) O 3 Ph Power Factor
Hz MV Frequency O Frequency
PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1L2,...) O Phase-to-Phase Primary
Voltages
PhV WYE Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, ...) O Phase Primary Voltages
A WYE Phase currents (IL1, ...) O Phasor Primary
AuxV CMV Auxiliary Voltage E Vx Primary
BusHz MV Bus Frequency E Bus Frequency

2.6.3 MSQI (Sequence and imbalance)
MSQI class
Name Type
MSQI Sequence and imbalance
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Measured values
SeqA SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence C
Current
SeqV SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence C
Voltage
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.
2.7 Logical Nodes for switchgear. LN Group: X

2.7.1 XCBR (Circuit Breaker)
XCBR class
Name Type
XCBR Circuit breaker
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
NamPlt LPL Name plate M Number of Switchgear
Loc SPS Local operation M Local / Remote
OpCnt INS Operation counter M Breaker openings
Controls
Pos geDPC Switch position M Breaker open, close, und
BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Status-only
BlkCls SPC Block closing M Status-only
Metered Values
SumSwARs BCR Sum of Switched Amperes O Maximum KI2t value of any of
the phases
Status information
CBOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability M Fixed value = 5
Settings
ThAlSwA ASG Threshold Alarm of Switched Amps E Maximum KI2t
SumSwATmms ASG Sum of sw. Amps integration time E KI2t Integ. Time
ExNumTr ASG Excessive number of trips E Maximum Openings
ExNumTr1hr ASG Excessive number of trips in 1 hour E Max. Openings 1 hour
Note: actVal in BCR is imlemented as INT32.

In F650 relay the Circuit Breaker (XCBR1 Logical Node) by default is mapped to first switchgear (exactly like XSWI1 and
CSWI1 LNs). However it is possible to map the Circuit Breaker to any of the 16 switchgears of F650 relay. It can be done by
modification of the following setting: Setpoint >System Setup > Breaker Settings > Number of Switchgear.
In XCBR LN for "Pos" controllable attribute all possible control models are applicable:
• "direct-control-with-normal-security"
• "SBO-control-with-normal-security"
• "direct-control-with-enhanced-security"
• "SBO-control-with-enhanced-security"
2.7.2 XSWI (Circuit switch)
XSWI class
Name Type
XSWI Circuit switch
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
EEHealth INS External equipment health O
Controls
Pos geDPC Switch position M Status-only
BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Status-only
BlkCls SPC Block closing M Status-only
Status information
SwTyp INS Switch Type M Fixed value = 2 (Disconnector)
SwOpCap INS Switch operating capability M Fixed value = 5
"Pos" attribute is not controllable in XSWI it has ctlModel = Status-only. In order to control the switch mapped to given XSWI
the corresponding CSWI LN should be used.

3 Enum types implementation

3.1 setCharact
Enum type : setCharact

Value Description supported new enum 650 setting 650 Relay curve
value added internal
value
0 - N - - -
1 ANSI Extremely Inverse Y - 11 ANSI Ext Inv
2 ANSI Very Inverse Y - 12 ANSI Very Inv
3 ANSI Normal Inverse Y - 13 ANSI Norm Inv
4 ANSI Moderately Inverse Y - 14 ANSI Mod Inv
5 ANSI Definite Time N - - -
6 Long-Time Extremely Inverse N - - -
7 Long-Time Very Inverse N - - -
8 Long-Time Inverse N - - -
9 IEC Normal Inverse Y - 3 IEC Curve A
10 IEC Very Inverse Y - 4 IEC Curve B
11 IEC Inverse N - - -
12 IEC Extremely Inverse Y - 5 IEC Curve C
13 IEC Short-Time Inverse Y - 7 IEC Short-Time Inv
14 IEC Long-Time Inverse Y - 6 IEC Long-Time Inv
15 IEC Definite Time Y - 16 Definite Time
16 Reserved N - - -
17 Definable curve 1 based on formula Y - 0 IEEE Ext Inv
[x=f(y,A,B,C,D,E,F)]
18 Definable curve 2 based on formula Y - 1 IEEE Very Inv
19 Definable curve 3 based on formula Y - 2 IEEE Mod Inv
20 Definable curve 4 based on formula Y - 8 IAC Ext Inv
21 Definable curve 5 based on formula Y - 9 IAC Very Inv
22 Definable curve 6 based on formula Y - 10 IAC Mod Inv
23 Definable curve 7 based on formula Y - 15 I2t
24 Definable curve 8 based on formula Y - 17 Rectifier Curve
25 Definable curve 9 based on formula N - - -

Enum type : setCharact(cont.)

value
33 Vendor specific curve 1 defined by n Y - 11 User Curve A
pairs (x,y)
34 Vendor specific curve 2 defined by n Y - 12 User Curve B
pairs (x,y)
35 Vendor specific curve 3 defined by n Y - 13 User Curve C
pairs (x,y)
36 Vendor specific curve 4 defined by n Y - 14 User Curve D
pairs (x,y)
37 Vendor specific curve 5 defined by n N - - -
pairs (x,y)
pairs (x,y)
pairs (x,y)
pairs (x,y)
pairs (x,y)
pairs (x,y)
pairs (x,y)
pairs (x,y)
pairs (x,y)
pairs (x,y)
pairs (x,y)
pairs (x,y)
3.2 setCharact_2
Enum type : setCharact_2

value
0 Definite Time Y Y 0 Definite Time
1 Inverse Time Y Y 1 Definite Time

3.3 PolQty
Enum type : PolQty

Value Description supported new enum 650 setting 650 Relay Polarization
value
-2 Vendor specific quantity 2 Y Y 3 V0*IP
-1 Vendor specific quantity 1 Y Y 2 V0+IP
1 None N - - -
2 Zero Sequence Current Y - 1 IP
3 Zero Sequence Voltage Y - 0 V0
4 Negative Sequence Voltage N - - -
5 Phase to Phase Voltages N - - -
6 Phase to Ground Voltages N - - -
3.4 AutoRecSt
Enum type : AutoRecSt

Value Description supported new enum Comments
value added
-1 Definite Trip Y - Specified by Tissue 133
1 Ready Y -
2 In Progress Y -
3 Successful Y -
4 Unsuccessful Y - Specified by Tissue 3
3.5 InMagTyp
Enum type : InMagTyp

Value Description supported new enum Value of 650 Relay setting
value added
0 phasor Y Y PHASOR(DFT)
1 rms Y Y RMS
3.6 RsMod
Enum type : RsMod

value added
0 instantaneous Y Y INSTANTANEOUS
1 lineal Y Y LINEAL

3.7 PolOpMod
Enum type : PolOpMod

value added
0 reverse Y Y REVERSE
1 forward Y Y FORWARD
3.8 InMod
Enum type : InMod

value added
0 phase-phase Y Y PHASE-PHASE
1 phase-ground Y Y PHASE-GROUND
3.9 PhLogic
Enum type : PhLogic

value added
0 any phase Y Y ANY PHASE
1 two phases Y Y TWO PHASES
2 all phases Y Y ALL PHASES
3.10 MaxNumShot
Enum type : MaxNumShot

value added
0 1 Shot Y Y 1
1 2 Shots Y Y 2
2 3 Shots Y Y 3
3 4 Shots Y Y 4

Reference documentation: MICS for 650 family rev1.01 firm7_20.
1 Logical Node List

IEC61850 profile has been updated for F650 firmware version 7.00. The Firmware version 7.00 and above supports IEC
61850 Edition 2. Several Logical Nodes have been added and they have been distributed according its functionality in two
different Logical Devices, one for protection functions and the other for control and measure functions. LGOS (24
instances), PTRC, RBRF, RFLO and CILO (16 instances) have been included. Other Logical Nodes like XSWI and CSWI have
increased their instances to 16 for each one. GGIO nodes and the Logical Nodes for protection functions have suffered
some extensions.
For firmware 7.20 new logical nodes have been included in the data model such as RDRE, RBDR and PTTR. Other logical
nodes like PTOF and PTUF have increased their instances to 6 for each one and suffered some extensions, and CSWI logical
node has also extended its data model.

LGOS (GOOSE subscription)
GoCB (GOOSE Control Block Class definition)
PTOV (Overvoltage)
PTRC (Protection trip conditioning)
PTTR (Thermal overload)
PTUV (Undervoltage)
PDOP (Power)**
PFRC (Frequency Rate of Change)**
PDIS (Load Enchroahment)**
PRTR (Locked Rotor)**
RBDR (Disturbance recorder channel binary)
RBRF (Breaker failure)
RDRE (Disturbance recorder function)
RFLO (Fault Locator)
RSYN (Synchrocheck)**
CILO (Interlocking)


MMTR (Metering)
MMXU (Measurement)
Nodes with ** in the table above have been included from firmware version 7.50
Notation:
ØM: Data is mandatory in the IEC-61850-7-4.
ØO: Data is optional in the IEC-61850-7-4 and is used in the device.
ØE: Data is an extension to the IEC-61850-7-4.
2.1.1LPHD (Physical device information)
LPHD class
Attribute Attr. Explanation M/O Notes
Name Type
Data
PhyNam DPL Physical device name plate M
PhyHealth HealthENS Physical device health M
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M
LLN0 class
Attribute Attr. Explanation M/O notes
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Beh BehENS Behaviour M
Health HealthENS Health M
NamPlt LPL_1 Name plate M
Loc SPS Local control behaviour O
OpTmh INS Operation time O
GoCB GoCB

2.1.2.1 GoCB (GOOSE control block class definition)
GoCB class
Attribute Name Attribute Type FC notes
GoID VISIBLE STRING65 GO
DatSet Object Reference GO
ConfRev INT32U GO
NdsCom BOOLEAN GO
DstAddress PHYCOMADDR GO
2.1.3 LGOS (GOOSE subscription)

For firmware version 7.00 or higher, this LN Logical is used for monitoring GOOSE messages, diagnosing the subscription
state of a GOOSE message and has 24 instances inside the device
LLN0 class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
St SPS Status of the subscription M
LastStNum INS Last state number received O
ConfRevNum INS Expected conf. revision num. O
GoCBRef ORG Ref. to the subscribed GOOSE control block O

2.2.1.1 phsPIOC
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str PhsACD Start O IOC PKP
Op PhsACT Operate M IOC OP
Blk SPS Block O
Settings

PIOCEna SPG Function O

InMagTyp ING_0 Input O
StrVal FloatASG Pickup level O
OpDlTmms ING_8 Trip delay O
RsDlTmms ING_8 Reset delay O
SnpshtEvEna SPG Snapshot events enabled O
2.2.1.2 phsPIOC_2
This logical node class is used for phase instantaneous overcurrent when setting group option is enabled and has 2
instances inside the device. This logical node class is available only for firmware version below 7.50.
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str PhsACD Start O IOC PKP
Op PhsACT Operate M IOC OP
Blk SPS Block O
Settings
PIOCEna SPG_2 Function O
InMagTyp ING_0_2 Input O
StrVal FloatASG_2 Pickup level O
OpDlTmms ING_8_2 Trip delay O
RsDlTmms ING_8_2 Reset delay O
SnpshtEvEna SPG_2 Snapshot events enabled O
2.2.1.3 ndPIOC
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str NeutACD Start O IOC PKP
Op NeutACT Operate M IOC OP
Blk SPS Block O
Settings
PIOCEna SPG Function O
OpDlTmms ING_8 Trip delay O
RsDlTmms ING_8 Reset delay O

2.2.1.4 ndPIOC_2
This logical node class is used for neutral instantaneous overcurrent if setting group option is enable and has 1 instance
inside the device. This logical node class is available only for firmware version below 7.50
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str NeutACD Start O IOC PKP
Op NeutACT Operate M IOC OP
Blk SPS Block O
Settings
PIOCEna SPG_2 Function O
OpDlTmms ING_8_2 Trip delay O
RsDlTmms ING_8_2 Reset delay O
2.2.1.5 gndPIOC/hsePIOC
This logical node class is used for ground instantaneous and sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent. There are 6
instances (3 for ground and 3 for sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent) of this logical node inside the device.
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Health geHealthENS Health M
NamPlt geLPL Name plate M
Status Information
Str geNeutACD Start O IOC PKP
Op geNeutACT Operate M IOC OP
Blk geSPS Block O
Settings
PIOCEna geSPG Function O
InMagTyp geING_0 Input O
StrVal geFloatASG Pickup level O
OpDlTmms geING_8 Trip delay O
RsDlTmms geING_8 Reset delay O
SnpshtEvEna geSPG Snapshot events enabled O

2.2.1.5 gndPIOC_2
This logical node class is used for ground instantaneous and sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent when setting
group option is enable. There are 2 instances (1 for ground and 1 for sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent) of this
logical node inside the device. This logical node class is available only for firmware version below 7.50.
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str gePhsACD Start O IOC PKP
Op gePhsACT Operate M IOC OP
Blk geSPS Block O
Settings
PIOCEna geSPG_2 Function O
InMagTyp geING_0_2 Input O
StrVal geFloatASG_2 Pickup level O
OpDlTmms geING_8_2 Trip delay O
RsDlTmms geING_8_2 Reset delay O
SnpshtEvEna geSPG_2 Snapshot events enabled O
2.2.1.6 IsoGndPIOC
This logical node class is used for isolated ground overcurrent and has 3 instances inside the device.
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Beh geBehENS Behaviour M
Status Information
Blk geSPS Block O
Settings
VhStr geIntASG_2 Vh level O
VlStr geIntASG_2 Vl level O
IhStr geFloatASG_1_2 Ih level O
IlStr geFloatASG_1_2 Il level O

2.2.1.7 BknCndPIOC
This logical node class is used for broken conductor function and has 3 instances inside the device. This node have been
included for firmware versions 7.50 or above.
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS Block O
Settings
BlkCurrent geFloatASG_1_2 Operation Threshold O


2.2.2.1 phsPTOC
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str gePhsACD Start O TOC PKP
Op gePhsACT Operate M TOC OP
Blk geSPS Block O TOC BLK
Settings
PTOCEna geSPG Function O
InMagTyp geING_0 Input O
TmACrv geCURVE Curve O
VolRst geSPG Voltage Restraint O
TmMult geFloatASG TD Multiplier O
RsMod geING_0 Reset O
2.2.2.2 phsPTOC_2
This logical node class is used for phase time overcurrent when setting group option is enabled and has 2 instances inside
the device. This logical node class is available only for firmware version below 7.50
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Settings
PTOCEna geSPG_2 Function O
TmACrv geCURVE_3 Curve O
VolRst geSPG_2 Voltage Restraint O
TmMult geFloatASG_2 TD Multiplier O
RsMod geING_0_2 Reset O

2.2.2.3 ndPTOC
PTOC class
Name Type
PIOC Time overcurrent
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str geNeutACD Start O TOC PKP
Op geNeutACT Operate M TOC OP
Settings
PTOCEna geSPG Function O
TmACrv geCURVE Curve O
2.2.2.4 ndPTOC_2
This logical node class is used for neutral time overcurrent when setting group option is enable and has 1 instances inside
the device.
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Settings

2.2.2.5 gndPTOC
This logical node class is used for ground time overcurrent and sensitive ground time overcurrent. There are 6 instances
inside of this logical node inside the device. 3 for ground and 3 for sensitive ground time overcurrent.
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str PhsACD Start M TOC PKP
Op PhsACT Operate M TOC OP
Blk SPS Block O TOC BLK
Settings
PTOCEna SPG Function O
InMagTyp ING_0 Input O
TmACrv CURVE Curve O
2.2.2.6 gndPTOC_2
This logical node class is used for ground time overcurrent and sensitive ground time overcurrent when setting group
option is enable. There are 2 instances inside of this logical node inside the device, 1 for ground and 1 for sensitive ground
time overcurrent. This logical node class is available only for firmware version below 7.50
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str PhsACD Start M TOC PKP
Op PhsACT Operate M TOC OP
Blk SPS Block O TOC BLK
Settings
PTOCEna SPG_2 Function O
InMagTyp ING_0_2 Input O
TmACrv CURVE_3 Curve O
TmMult FloatASG_2 TD Multiplier O
RsMod ING_0_2 Reset O

2.2.2.7 hsePTOC
This logical node class is used for sensitive ground time overcurrent function and has 3 instances inside the device.
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Settings
2.2.2.8 NgSeqPTOC
This logical node class is used for negative sequence time overcurrent function and has 3 instances inside the device.
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Settings


2.2.3.1 PTOF
This logical node class is used for overfrequency and has 3 instances for firmware version below 7.20 and 6 instances for
firmware version 7.20 or above inside the device.
PTOF class
Attribute Name Attribute type Explanation M/O/C/E Notes
PTOF Overfrequency
Data
Mod ENC Mode M Status-only
Beh ENS Behaviour M
Health ENS Health M
NamPlt LPL Name Plate M
Status information
Op ACT Operate M TOF OP
Blk SPS Block O TOF BLK
Settings
StrVal ASG Start value (frequency) O
BlkVal ASG Voltage block value O
OpDlTmms ING Operate delay time O
RsDlTmms ING Reset delay time O
PTOFEna SPG Function TOF enable E
SnpshtEvEna SPG Snapshot events enabled E
FreqSource SPG Frequency source E Firmware version 7.20 or above
2.2.3.2 PTOF_2
This logical node class is used for overfrequency when setting group option is anable and has 1 instances inside the
device.
PTOF class
PTOF Overfrequency
Data
Beh ENS Behaviour M
Health ENS Health M
Status information
Op ACT Operate M TOF OP
Blk SPS Block O TOF BLK
Settings
PTOFEna SPG Function TOF enable E
FreqSource SPG Frequency source E Firmware version 7.20 or above


2.2.4.1 phsPTOV
This logical node class is used for phase overvoltage and has 3 instances inside the device
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str PhsACD Start M TOV PKP
Op PhsACT Operate M TOV OP
Blk SPS Block O TOV BLK
Settings
PTOVEna SPG Function O
StrVal IntASG Start value O
OpDlTmms ING_8 Operate delay time O
RsDlTmms ING_8 Reset delay time O
PhLogic ING_0 Logic O
2.2.4.2 phsPTOV_2
This logical node class is used for phase overvoltage when setting group option is enabled and has 1 instance inside the
device.
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str PhsACD Start M TOV PKP
Op PhsACT Operate M TOV OP
Settings
PTOVEna SPG_2 Function O
StrVal IntASG_3 Start value O
OpDlTmms ING_8_2 Operate delay time O
RsDlTmms ING_8_2 Reset delay time O
PhLogic ING_0_2 Logic O

2.2.4.3 auxPTOV
This logical node class is used for auxiliary overvoltage and has 3 instances inside the device.
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str GeneralACD Start M TOV PKP
Op GeneralACT Operate M TOV OP
Settings
2.2.4.4 auxPTOV_2
This logical node class is used for auxiliary overvoltage when setting group option is enabled and has 1 instance inside the
device.
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Settings

2.2.4.5 neuPTOV
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Settings
PTOVEna SPG Function O
OpDlTmms ING_8 Operate delay time O
RsDlTmms ING_8 Reset delay time O
2.2.4.6 neuPTOV_2
This logical node class is used for neutral overvoltage when setting group option is enabled and has 2 instances inside the
device. This logical node class is available only for firmware version below 7.50.
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Settings

2.2.4.7 NgSeqPTOV
This logical node class is used for neutral sequence overvoltage and has 3 instances inside the device. This logical node
class has been included from firmware version 7.50.
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str geGeneralACD Start M TOV PKP
Op geGeneralACT Operate M TOV OP
Blk geSPS Block O TOV BLK
Settings
PTOVEna geSPG_2 Function O
StrVal geIntASG_3 Start value O
OpDlTmms geING_8_2 Operate delay time O
RsDlTmms geING_8_2 Reset delay time O
2.2.5 PTRC (Protection trip conditioning)

For firmware version 7.00 or higher, this logical node shall be used to connect the operate outputs of one or more
protection functions to a common trip to be transmitted to XCBR logical node and has 1 instance inside the device.
PTRC class
Name Type
PTRC Trip bus
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Op geGeneralACT Operate M
2.2.6 PTUV (Undervoltage)

2.2.6.1 phsPTUV
PTUV class
Name Type
PTUV Undervoltage
Data


Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str GeneralACD Start M TUV PKP
Op GeneralACT Operate M TUV OP
Blk SPS Block O TUV BLK
StrPhGn PhsACD_1 Pickup Phase-Ground O
OpPhGn PhsACT_1 Operate Phase-Ground O
StrPhPh PhsACD_1 Pickup Phase-Phase O
OpPhPh PhsACT_1 Operate Phase-Phase O
Settings
PTUVEna SPG Function O
InMod ING_0 Mode O
TmVCrv CURVE_2 Operating curve type O
TmMult FloatASG Time dial multiplier O
DeaLinVal IntASG Minimum Voltage O
PhLogic ING_0 Logic O
BkrMon SPG Supervised by 52 O
2.2.6.2 phsPTUV_2
This logical node class is used for phase undervoltage when setting group option is enabled and has 1 instances inside the
device.
PTUV class
Name Type
PTUV Undervoltage
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
StrPhGn PhsACD_1 Pickup Phase-Ground O
OpPhGn PhsACT_1 Operate Phase-Ground O
StrPhPh PhsACD_1 Pickup Phase-Phase O
OpPhPh PhsACT_1 Operate Phase-Phase O
Settings
PTUVEna SPG_2 Function O
InMod ING_0_2 Mode O
TmMult FloatASG_2 Time dial multiplier O
DeaLinVal IntASG_3 Minimum Voltage O
PhLogic ING_0_2 Logic O
BkrMon SPG_2 Supervised by 52 O

2.2.6.3 AuxPTUV
PTUV class
Name Type
PTUV Undervoltage
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Settings
PTUVEna SPG Function O
TmMult FloatASG Time dial multiplier O
2.2.6.3 AuxPTUV_2
This logical node class is used for auxiliary undervoltage when setting group is anabled and has 1 instances inside the
device.
PTUV class
Name Type
PTUV Undervoltage
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str geGeneralACD Start M TUV PKP
Op geGeneralACT Operate M TUV OP
Blk geSPS Block O TUV BLK
Settings
PTUVEna geSPG_2 Function O
TmVCrv geCURVE_4 Operating curve type O
TmMult geFloatASG_2 Time dial multiplier O


2.2.7.1 PTUF
This logical node class is used for phase underfrequency and has 6 instances inside the device.
PTUF class
PTUF Underfrequency
Data
Beh ENS Behaviour M
Health ENS Health M
Status information
Op ACT Operate M TUF OP
Blk SPS Block O TUF BLK
Settings
PTUFEna SPG Function TUF enable E
FreqSource SPG Frequency source E
2.2.7.2 PTUF_2
This logical node class is used for phase underfrequency when setting group option is enabled and has 1 instance inside
the device.
PTUF class
PTUF Underfrequency
Data
Beh ENS Behaviour M
Health ENS Health M
Status information
Op ACT Operate M TUF OP
Blk SPS Block O TUF BLK
Settings
PTUFEna SPG Function TUF enable E
FreqSource SPG Frequency source E

2.2.8. PTTR (Thermal overload)

This logical node shall be used to model the thermal overload functions and has three instances inside the device. This
node has been implemented in firmware version 7.20 or above.
PTTR class
PTTR Thermal overload
Data
Beh ENS Behaviour M
Health ENS Health M
Status information
Str ACD Start M Thermal PKP
Op ACT Operate M Thermal OP
Blk SPS Block O Thermal BLK
AlmThm SPS Thermal alarm O
AlmThmPhA SPS Thermal alarm phase A E
AlmThmPhB SPS Thermal alarm phase B E
AlmThmPhC SPS Thermal alarm phase C E
Settings
PTTREna SPG Thermal overload enable E
ConsTmmHeat ASG Heat time constant E
ConsTmmCool ASG Cool time constant E
StrVal ASG Pickup level O
AlmVal ASG Alarm level O
2.2.9 PDOP (Directional Overpower)

All logical node classes described in this section have been included from firmware version 7.50.
2.2.9.1 FwdPDOP
This logical node class shall be used to model the forward overpower function and has three instances inside the device.
PDOP class
Name Type
PDOP Overpower
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str gePhsACD Start M Stage 1 PKP
Op gePhsACT Operate M Stage 1 OP
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
S2Str gePhsACD_2 Start O Stage 2 PKP
S2Op gePhsACT_1 Operate O Stage 2 OP
Settings
PDOPEna geSPG_2 Function O
BlkCloseTmms geING_0_2 Blk time after close O
StrVal geFloatASG_2 Stage 1 Tap O
OpDlTmms geING_8_2 Stage 1 Time O
S2StrVal geFloatASG_2 Stage 2 Tap O
S2OpDlTmms geING_8_2 Stage 2 Time O

2.2.9.2 DirPDOP
This logical node class shall be used to model the directional overpower function and has three instances inside the
device.
PDOP class
Name Type
PDOP Overpower
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Str gePhsACD Start M
Op gePhsACT Operate M
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
BlkCloseTmms geING_0_2 Blk time after close O
S1DirPwrAng geFloatASG_1_2 Dir Power Angle 1 O
S1StrVal geFloatASG_1_2 Stage 1 Tap O
S2DirPwrAng geFloatASG_1_2 Dir Power Angle 2 O
2.2.9.3 WattPDOP
This logical node class shall be used to model the wattmeter ground overpower function and has six instances inside the
device.
PDOP class
Name Type
PDOP Overpower
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
SupStr gePhsACD_2 Start O
Settings
OVStrVal geFloatASG_1_2 Voltage Pickup Level O
InMagTyp geING_0_2 Current Selection O
OCStrVal geFloatASG_1_2 OC Pickup level O

OCStrDlTmms geING_0_2 OC Pickup Delay O

PWStrVal geFloatASG_1_2 Power Pickup O
ChrAng geFloatASG_1_2 MTA O
PWStrDlTmms geING_0_2 Power Pickup Delay O
Curve geING_0_2 Curve O
MltTmms geING_0_2 Multiplier O
2.2.10 PFRC (Frequency Rate of Change)

2.2.10.1 PFRC
This logical node class shall be used to model the frequency rate of change function and has three instances inside the
device.
PFRC class
Name Type
PFRC Frequency Rate of Change
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
PFRCEna geSPG_2 Function O
Trend geING_0_2 Freq Rate Trend O
StrVal geFloatASG_2 Freq Rate Pickup O
BlkVal geFloatASG_2 Freq Rate Min Volt O
BlkMinFreq geFloatASG_1_2 Freq Rate Min Freq O
BlkMaxFreq geFloatASG_1_2 Freq Rate Max Freq O
OpDlTmms geING_8_2 Freq Rate Delay O
SnpshtEvEna geSPG_2 Snapshot events O

2.2.11 PDIS (Distance)

2.2.11.1 LodEncPDIS
This logical node class shall be used to model the load encroachment function and has three instances inside the device.
PDIS class
Name Type
PDIS Distance
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
PDISEna geSPG_2 Function O
MinVoltage geFloatASG_1_2 Freq Rate Trend O
RisLod geFloatASG_2 Freq Rate Pickup O
AngLod geFloatASG_2 Freq Rate Min Volt O
OpDlTmms geING_8_2 Operation Delay O
RsDlTmms geING_8_2 Reset Delay O
2.2.12 PRTR (Rotor Protection)

2.2.12.1 LockedPRTR
This logical node class shall be used to model the locked rotor function and has three instances inside the device.
PRTR class
Name Type
PRTR Rotor Protection
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
PRTREna geSPG_2 Function O
LodCurrent geFloatASG_1_2 Full Load Current O
strVal geFloatASG_2 Pickup Level O


2.3.1.1 phsRDIR
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Dir PhsACD Direction M
Op PhsACT Operate O
Blk SPS Block O
BlkIn GeneralACT_1 Block Input O
Settings
RDIREna SPG Function O
ChrAng FloatASG Characteristic angle O
PolOpMod ING_0 Direction O
BlkMod ING_0 Block Logic O
BlkValV IntASG Minimum operating current O
VMemTms FloatASG Voltage Memory Time O
2.3.1.2 phsRDIR_2
This logical node class is used for phase directional elements when setting group option is enabled and has 1
instance inside the device.
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Dir PhsACD Direction M
Op PhsACT Operate O
Blk SPS Block O
Settings
RDIREna SPG_2 Function O
ChrAng FloatASG_2 Characteristic angle O
PolOpMod ING_0_2 Direction O
BlkMod ING_0_2 Block Logic O
BlkValV IntASG_3 Minimum operating current O
VMemTms FloatASG_1_2 Voltage Memory Time O

2.3.1.3 ndRDIR
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Dir NeutACD Direction M
Op NeutACT Operate O
Blk SPS Block O
BlkIn NeutACT_1 Block Input O
Settings
PolQty ENG Polarizing quantity O
2.3.1.4 ndRDIR_2
This logical node class is used for neutral directional elements when setting group option is enable and has 1 instance
inside the device.
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Blk SPS Block O
Settings
PolQty ENG_2 Polarizing quantity O

2.3.1.5 gndRDIR
This logical node class is used for ground directional elements and has 3 instances inside the device
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Blk SPS Block O
Settings
PolQty ENG Polarizing quantity O
2.3.1.6 gndRDIR_2
This logical node class is used for ground directional elements when setting group option is enabled and has 1 instance
inside the device
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Blk SPS Block O
Settings
PolQty ENG_2 Polarizing quantity O

2.3.1.7 hseRDIR
This logical node class is used for sensitive ground directional elements and has 3 instances inside the device.
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Dir GeneralACD Direction M
Op GeneralACT Operate O
Blk SPS Block O
Settings
2.3.1.8 hseRDIR_2
This logical node class is used for sensitive ground directional elements when setting group option is enabled and has 1
instance inside the device. This logical node class is available only for firmware version below 7.50.
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
Dir GeneralACD Direction M
Op GeneralACT Operate O
Blk SPS Block O
Settings


RREC class
Name Type
RREC Autoreclosing Element
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
OpCls GeneralACT Direction M
AutoRecSt AutoRecStENS Operate M
AutoRecLo INS_1 Block O
AutoRecBlk INS_1 Block Input O
Settings
RRECEna SPG Function O
MaxNumShot ING_0 Max. Number Shots O
Rec1Tmms1 ING_8 Dead Time 1 O
RclTmms ING_8 Reclaim time
CondEna SPG Cond. Permission
HoldTmms FloatASG_1 Hold Time
RsTmms FloatASG_1 Reset Time
2.3.3 RBRF (Breaker failure):
For firmware versions 7.00 or higher, this logical node class is used for breaker failure and has 1 instance inside the device.
RREC class
Name Type
RBRF Breaker failure element
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
OpEx GeneralACT Direction M
2.3.4 RFLO (Fault Locator):

For firmware version 7.00 or higher, this logical node class is used for fault locator and has 1 instance inside the device.
RFLO class
Name Type
RFLO Fault locator element

Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status Information
FltRprtTrg SPS_1 Fault Report Trigger O
ClrFltRprts SPS_1 Clear fault reports O
FltZ FloatCMV Fault impedance M
FltDiskm FloatMV_3 Fault distance in km O
RPriFlt FloatMV_2 Primary Fault Resistance O
XPriFlt FloatMV_2 Primary Fault Reactance O
RSeFlt FloatMV_2 Secondary Fault Resistance O
XSeFlt FloatMV_2 Secondary Fault Reactance O
RFault FloatMV_2 Fault Resistance O
FltTyp INS_1 Fault type O
FltRprtNum INS_1 Fault report number O
PreFltIaMod FloatMV_2 Prefault Ia module O
PreFltIaAng FloatMV_2 Prefault Ia angle O
PreFltIbMod FloatMV_2 O
PreFltIbAng FloatMV_2 O
PreFltIcMod FloatMV_2 O
PreFltIcAng FloatMV_2 O
PreFltIgMod FloatMV_2 O
PreFltIgAng FloatMV_2 O
PreFltIsgMod FloatMV_2 O
PreFltIsgAng FloatMV_2 O
PreFltVabMod FloatMV_2 O
PreFltVabAng FloatMV_2 O
PreFltVbcMod FloatMV_2 O
PreFltVbcAng FloatMV_2 O
PreFltVcaMod FloatMV_2 O
PreFltVcaAng FloatMV_2 O
PstFltIaMod FloatMV_2 Postfault Ia module O
PstFltIaAng FloatMV_2 Postfault Ia angle O
PstFltIbMod FloatMV_2 O
PstFltIbAng FloatMV_2 O
PstFltIcMod FloatMV_2 O
PstFltIcAng FloatMV_2 O
PstFltIgMod FloatMV_2 O
PstFltIgAng FloatMV_2 O
PstFltIsgMod FloatMV_2 O
PstFltIsgAng FloatMV_2 O
PstFltVabMod FloatMV_2 O
PstFltVabAng FloatMV_2 O
PstFltVbcMod FloatMV_2 O
PstFltVbcAng FloatMV_2 O
PstFltVcaMod FloatMV_2 O
PstFltVcaAng FloatMV_2 O
Settings
RFLOEna SPG Function
Z1Mod FloatASG_1 Pos.Seq. Module
Z1Ang IntASG_1 Pos.Seq. Angle
Z0Mod FloatASG_1 Zero Seq. Module
Z0Ang IntASG_1 Zero Seq. Angle
LinLenkm FloatASG Line length
ShwFltHMI SPG Show fault in HMI
SnpshtEvEna SPG Snapshot Events enabled
PhCtPol SPG Phase CT Polarity

2.3.5 RBDR (Disturbance recorder channel binary):

This node has been implemented in firmware version 7.20. This logical node class is used for providing the circuit
component and phase identification and has 1 instance inside the device. RBDR and RDRE logical nodes make available all
attributes needed for the COMTRADE file.
RBDR class
RBDR Disturbance recorder channel binary
Data
Beh ENS Behaviour M
Health ENS Health M
Status information
ChTrg SPS Channel triggered M
DigCh01 SPS E
… … … …
DigChn16 SPS E
2.3.6 RDRE (Disturbance recorder function)

This logical node has been developed in firmware 7.20. This logical node class is used modelling the disturbance recording
function and has 1 instance inside the device. RBDR and RDRE logical nodes make available all attributes needed for the
COMTRADE file.
RDRE class
RDRE Disturbance recorder channel binary
Data
Beh ENS Behaviour M
Health ENS Health M
Status information
RcdMade SPS Recording made M
FltNum INS Fault number M
OscTrg SPS Oscillo trigger E
CycRcd INS Cycles per record E
RcdNum INS Available records E
Settings
RDREEna SPG Oscillography function enable E
TrgPos ING Trigger position E
SmpCyc ENG Samples per cycle E
MaxNumRcd ING Maximum number of records O
RcdMod ENG Recorder operation mode O

2.3.7 RSYN (Synchronism-check)

This logical node has been included from firmware 7.50. This logical node class is used modelling the synchrocheck
function and has 1 instance inside the device
RSYN class
Name Type
RSYN Synchronism-check
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status Information
SynBlkIn geSPS_1 Block signal O
SynOp geSPS_1 Closing permission signal O
Rel geSPS Release M
SynCondOp geSPS_1 Closing perm. according to logic O
DLDBOp geSPS_1 Closing perm. in DLDB condition O
DLLBOp geSPS_1 Closing perm. in DLLB condition O
LLDBOp geSPS_1 Closing perm. in LLDB condition O
HzInd geSPS Frequency difference indicator O
BusHzHiLinHz geSPS_1 Busbar frequency > line frequency O
BusHzLoLinHz geSPS_1 Busbar frequency < line frequency O
Measured values
DifVClc geFloatMV Calculated difference in voltage O
DifHzClc geFloatMV Calculated difference in frequency O
Settings
RSYNEna geSPG Function O
DeaBusVal geFloatASG Dead bus value O
LivBusVal geFloatASG Live bus value O
DeaLinVal geFloatASG Dead line value O
LivLinVal geFloatASG Live line value O
DifV geFloatASG Difference voltage O
DifAng geFloatASG Difference angle O
DifHz geIntASG Difference frequency O
TotTmms geING_8 Total time of synch. process O
DLDBEna geSPG Dead line - dead bus permission O
LLDBEna geSPG Live line - dead bus permission O
DLLBEna geSPG Dead line - live bus permission O


2.4.1 CILO (Interlocking):
For firmware version 7.00 or higher, this logical node class is used for interlocking the operations performed over the
switchgears and has 16 instances inside the device.
CILO class
Name Type
CILO Switch controller
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status information
EnaOpn SPS Enable Open M
EnaCls SPS Enable Close

This logical node class is used for switchgears status and has 16 instances inside the device.
CSWI class
Data
Beh ENS Behaviour M
Health ENS Health M
Controls
Pos DPC Switch position M Switch open, close, undefined
Status Information
Loc SPS Local control behaviour O Local/Remote
For firmware version 7.20 or above
In the F650 there are up to 16 configurable switchgears. Currently sixteen XSWI and sixteen CSWI are implemented and
mapped to all switchgears in F650. XSWI and CSWI Logical Nodes can be seen as paired objects in F650 as one pair of
XSWI and CSWI map to the same switchgear. XSWI1 and CSWI1 map to Switchgear1, XSWI2 and CSWI2 map to
Switchgear2, etc. The difference between XSWI and CSWI in F650 is that control commands cannot be sent directly via
XSWI LN. Control commands have to be sent via CSWI LN.
• In CSWI LN for "Pos" controllable attribute all possible control models are applicable:

2.5.1.1 GGIO
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status information
BoardSt SPS_1 Board status O
Ind1 SPS Status contact input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
Ind33 SPS Status contact output 1 O
.. .. ..
Ind48 SPS Status contact output 16 O
Measured and metered values
AnIn1 FloatMV Analog input 1 O
.. .. ..
Settings
VThrldA IntASG_1 Voltage threshold A O
VThrldB IntASG_1 Voltage threshold B O
VThrldC IntASG_1 Voltage threshold C O
VThrldD IntASG_1 Voltage threshold D O
DbceTmmsA ING_0 Debounce time A O
DbceTmmsB ING_0 Debounce time B O
DbceTmmsC ING_0 Debounce time C O
DbceTmmsD ING_0 Debounce time D O
InTyp01 ING_0 Type input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
DlInTmms01 ING_0 Delay time input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
OutLogic01 ING_0 Logic output 1 O
.. .. .. ..
OutTyp01 ING_0 Type output 1 O


.. .. ..
PlsOutTmms01 ING_0 Pulse time output 1 O
.. .. ..
Rng01 ING_0 Range analog input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
OscTmmsA ING_0 Oscillation time A O
OscTmmsB ING_0 Oscillation time B O
OscTmmsC ING_0 Oscillation time C O
OscTmmsD ING_0 Oscillation time D O
NumChgs ING_0 Number of transient changes O
SnpshtEvEna SPG Snapshot Events enabled O

2.5.1.2 vinGGIO
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Controls
output
output
.. .. .. .. ..
output
SPCSO1 SPC Single point controllable status output O Latched Virtual Input 1
.. .. .. .. ..
SPCSO33 SPC Single point controllable status output O Self reset Virtual Input 1
.. .. .. .. ..
Note:
Double control points operate on pairs of Virtual Inputs in a manner that one Virtual Input of the pair is set to "1" and the
other Virtual Input of the pair is set to "0".
For all controllable attributes in this logical node only "direct-control-with-normal-security" model of control is applicable
2.5.1.3 eveGGIO
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Beh INS Behaviour M
Health INS Health M
Status information


input )
input )
......... .......... ............... .......... ..............
input )
input )
input )
input )
input )
input )
......... .......... ............... .......... ..............
input )
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status information
Ind1 SPS Remote digital input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
AnIn1 FloatMV Remote float input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
AnIn9 IntMV_1 Remote integer input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
Settings
OscTmms ING_0 Oscillation time remote inputs O
NumChgs ING_0 Number of transient changes O

GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status information
Ind1 SPS Remote digital output 1 O
.. .. .. ..
Note: In 650 relays data from all logical nodes can be sent through outgoing GOOSE messages. Apart from that, logical
node rouGGIO gives the ability to send through GOOSE digital states that are results of PLC logic equations. Mapping and
configuration of rouGGIO states should be done with Enervista650 software.
2.5.1.6 dcntGGIO:
For versions 7.00 or higher, this logical node is used for modelling the eight digital counters of F650 relay.
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status information
Cnt1 BCR_2 Digital counter 1 O
.. .. .. ..
Cnt8 BCR_2 Digital counter 8 O
CntBlk1 SPS_1 Digital counter 1 block O
.. .. ..
CntBlk8 SPS_1 Digital counter 8 block O
CntHi1 SPS_1 Digital counter 1 high O
.. .. ..
CntHi8 SPS_1 Digital counter 8 high O
CntEq1 SPS_1 Digital counter 1 equal O
.. .. ..
CntEq8 SPS_1 Digital counter 8 equal O
CntLo1 SPS_1 Digital counter 1 low O
.. .. ..
CntLo8 SPS_1 Digital counter 8 low O

CntUp1 SPS_1 Digital counter 1 up O

.. .. ..
CntUp8 SPS_1 Digital counter 8 up O
CntDwn1 SPS_1 Digital counter 1 down O
.. .. ..
CntDwn8 SPS_1 Digital counter 8 down O
CntSetPre1 SPS_1 Digital counter 1 set preset O
.. .. ..
CntSetPre8 SPS_1 Digital counter 8 set preset O
CntRst1 SPS_1 Digital counter 1 reset O
.. .. ..
CntRst8 SPS_1 Digital counter 8 reset O
CntFrzRst1 SPS_1 Digital counter 1 FreezeReset O
.. .. ..
CntFrzRst8 SPS_1 Digital counter 8 FreezeReset O
CntFrzCnt1 SPS_1 Digital counter 1 FreezeCount O
.. .. ..
CntFrzCnt8 SPS_1 Digital counter 8 FreezeCount O

MMTR class
Name Type
MMTR Measurement
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Measured values
SupWh BCR O
SupVArh BCR O
DmdWh BCR O
DmdVArh BCR O
CntPsWh FloatMV_1 O
CntNgWh FloatMV_1 O
CntPsVArh FloatMV_1 O
CntNgVArh FloatMV_1 O
MMXU class
Name Type
MMXU Measurement
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M


Measured values
TotW FloatMV Total active power (P) O
TotVAr FloatMV Total reactive power (Q) O
TotVA FloatMV Total apparent power (S) O
TotPF FloatMV Average power factor (PF) O
Hz FloatMV Line Frequency O
PPV FloatDEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1L2,...) O
PhV FloatPhsWYE Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, ...) O
A FloatWYE Phase currents (IL1, ...) O
AuxV FloatCMV_1 Auxiliar Phase Voltage O
BusHz FloatMV_1
MSQI class
Name Type
MSQI Measurement
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Measured values
SeqA FloatSEQ O
SeqV FloatSEQ O

XCBR class
Name Type
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status information
SumSwARs O
CBOpCap CBOpCapENS Cicruit breaker operating O
capability
Controls
Pos DPC_1 Switch position M Breaker open, close
BlkOpn SPC_1 Block opening M Virtual output
BlkClr SPC_1 Block closing M Virtual output
Settings
ThAlSwA FloatASG_1 Maximum KI2t O
SumSwATmms FloatASG_1 KI2t Integ. Time O
ExNumTr IntASG_1 Maximum Openings O

ExNumTr1hr IntASG_1 Max.Openings 1 hour O

In F650 relay the Circuit Breaker (XCBR1 Logical Node) by default is mapped to first switchgear (exactly like XSWI1 and
CSWI1 LNs). However it is possible to map the Circuit Breaker to any of the 16 switchgears of F650 relay. It can be done by
modification of the following setting: Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker Settings > Number of Switchgear.
In XCBR LN for "Pos" controllable attribute all possible control models are applicable:

XSWI LN. Control commands have to be sent via CSWI LN. "Pos" attribute is not controllable in XSWI it has ctlModel =
Status-only. In order to control the switch mapped to given XSWI the corresponding CSWI LN should be used.
XCBR class
Name Type
XSWI Circuit switch
Data
Mod ModENC Mode M
Status information
EEHealth EEHealthENS Ext. equipment health O
Controls
Pos DPC_2 Switch position M Breaker open, close
BlkOpn SPC_1 Block opening M Virtual output
BlkClr SPC_1 Block closing M Virtual output
SwTyp SwTypENS Switch type M
SwOpCap SwOpCapENS Switch operating capability

3. Common Data Class

3.1 Common Data Class for status information
3.1.1 Single Point Status (SPS)
SPS class (Single point status)

gsSPS
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Boolean ST dchg M
q BVstring13 ST qchg M
t Utctime ST M
configuration, description and extension
d Vstring255 DC O
geSPS_1
Name
DataAttribute
status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
dataNs Vstring255 EX AC_DLN_M
3.1.2 Integer Status (INS)
INS class (Integer status)

geINS
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geINS_1
Name
DataAttribute
status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O

3.1.3 Enumerated Status (ENS)
ENS class (Enumerated status)

geAutoRecStENS (AutoRecSt)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enum ST dchg Ready,InProgress,Successful,.. M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geBehENS (Beh)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enum ST dchg On,blocked,test,test/blocked,Off M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geHealthENS (Health)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enum ST dchg Ok,Warning,Alarm M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geEEHealthENS (EEHealth)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg Ok,Warning,Alarm M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geCBOpCapENS (CBOpCap)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enumerated ST dchg None,Open,Close-Open,… M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geSwOpCapENS (SwOpCap)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enumerated ST dchg None,Open,Close,… M
t Utctime ST M


d Vstring255 DC O
geSwTypENS (SwTyp)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enumerated ST dchg Load Break,Disconnector,… M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.1.4 Protection activation information (ACT)
ACT class (Protection activation information)

gePhsACT
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
general Boolean ST dchg M
phsA Boolean ST dchg O
phsB Boolean ST dchg O
phsC Boolean ST dchg O
q Bvstring13 ST qchg M
t Utctime ST M
originSrc Struct ST O
d Vstring255 DC O
gePhsACT_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geNeutACT
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
neut Boolean ST dchg O
t Utctime ST M

d Vstring255 DC O
geNeutACT_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geGeneralACT
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geGeneralACT_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O

3.1.5 Directional protection activation information (ACD)
ACD class (Directional protection activation information)

gePhsACD
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
general Boolean ST Dchg M
dirGeneral Enumerated (Byte) ST Dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M
phsA Boolean ST Dchg GC_2(1)
dirPhsA Enumerated (Byte) ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2(1)
phsB Boolean ST dchg GC_2(2)
dirPhsB Enumerated (Byte) ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2(2)
phsC Boolean ST dchg GC_2(3)
dirPhsC Enumerated (Byte) ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2(3)
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
gePhsACD_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geNeutACD
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geNeutACD_1
Name
DataAttribute

control and status

t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geGeneralACD
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.1.6 Binary counter reading (BCR)
BCR class (Binary counter reading)

geBCR
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
actVal Int64 ST Dchg M
t Utctime ST M
units Unit CF O
pulsQty Float32 CF M
d Vstring255 DC O
geBCR_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
actVal Int64 ST dchg M
frVal Int64 ST dchg GC_2_1
frTm Utctime ST GC_2_1
t Utctime ST M
frEna Boolean CF GC_2_1
strTm Utctime CF GC_2_1
frPd Int32 CF GC_2_1
frRs Boolean CF GC_2_1
d Vstring255 DC O
geBCR_2

Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.2 Common data class specifications for measurand information

3.2.1 Measured Value (MV)
MV class (Measured value)

geFloatMV
Attribute Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C
DataAttribute
measured attributes
instMag FloatAnalogueValue MX ------ O
f FLOAT32 GC_1
mag FloatAnalogueValue MX dchg M
f FLOAT32 GC_1
range ENUMERATED(Byte) MX dchg O
q BVstring13 MX qchg M
t Utctime MX M
Configuration, description and extension
units Unit CF O
SIUnit ENUMERATED(Byte) M
Multiplier ENUMERATED(Byte)
O
db INT32U CF O
zeroDb INT32U CF O

rangeC RangeConfig CF O
hhLim FloatAnalogueValue
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
hlim
FloatAnalogueValue
f
lLim FLOAT32 GC_1
f FloatAnalogueValue
llLim FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FloatAnalogueValue
min
f FLOAT32 GC_1
max FloatAnalogueValue
f FLOAT32 GC_1
limDb FloatAnalogueValue
FLOAT32 GC_1
INT32U
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatMV_1
DataAttribute
measured attributes
f FLOAT32 GC_1
f FLOAT32 GC_1
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
Multiplier
ENUMERATED(Byte) O
db INT32U CF O
zeroDb INT32U CF O
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
hlim
FloatAnalogueValue
f
lLim FLOAT32 GC_1
llLim FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FloatAnalogueValue
min
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
f FLOAT32 GC_1
FLOAT32 GC_1
INT32U
d Vstring255 DC O

geFloatMV_2
DataAttribute
measured attributes
f FLOAT32 GC_1
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
Multiplier
ENUMERATED(Byte) O
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatMV_3
DataAttribute
measured attributes
f FLOAT32 GC_1
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
Multiplier
ENUMERATED(Byte) O
d Vstring255 DC O
geIntMV
DataAttribute
measured attributes
instMag IntAnalogueValue MX ------ O
i INT32 GC_1
mag IntAnalogueValue MX dchg M
i INT32 GC_1
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
Multiplier
ENUMERATED(Byte) O
db INT32U CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geIntMV_1
DataAttribute
measured attributes
i INT32 GC_1


i INT32 GC_1
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
Multiplier
ENUMERATED(Byte) O
db INT32U CF O
zeroDb INT32U CF O
hhLim IntAnalogueValue
i
INT32U GC_1
hlim
IntAnalogueValue
i
lLim UINT32 GC_1
i IntAnalogueValue
llLim INT32U GC_1
i
IntAnalogueValue
min
INT32U GC_1
i
max IntAnalogueValue
i INT32U GC_1
limDb IntAnalogueValue
INT32U GC_1
INT32U
d Vstring255 DC O
3.2.2 Complex Measured Value (CMV)
CMV class (Complex measured value)

geFloatCMV
Name
DataAttribute
measured attributes
instCVal FloatVector MX ------ O
mag FloatAnalogueValue
f
FLOAT32
cVal FloatVector MX dchg M
f
FLOAT32
rangeAng ENUMERATED(Byte) MX dchg O
t Utctime MX M

units Unit CF O
SIUnit Byte M
Multiplier
Byte O
db INT32U CF O
dbAng INT32U CF O
zeroDb INT32U CF O
rangeAngC RangeConfig CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatCMV_1
Name
DataAttribute
measured attributes
f
FLOAT32
f
FLOAT32
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
SIUnit Byte M
Multiplier
Byte O
db INT32U CF O
dbAng INT32U CF O
zeroDb INT32U CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
dataNs Vstring255 EX M

3.2.3 Phase to ground related measured values of a three phase system ( WYE )
WYE class
geFloatPhsWYE
Name
Data
phsA CMV_0 GC_1
phsB CMV_0 GC_1
phsC CMV_0 GC_1
neut CMV_0 GC_1
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatWYE
Name
Data
phsA CMV_0 GC_1
phsB CMV_0 GC_1
phsC CMV_0 GC_1
neut CMV_0 GC_1
net CMV_0 GC_1
res CMV_0 GC_1
d Vstring255 DC O
3.2.4 Phase to phase related measured values of a three phase system ( DEL )
DEL class (Phase to phase related measured values of a three phase system)
geFloatDEL
Name
Data
phsAB CMV_0 GC_1
phsBC CMV_0 GC_1
phsCA CMV_0 GC_1
d Vstring255 DC O
3.2.5 Sequence (SEQ)
SEQ class ( Sequence )

geFloatSEQ
Name
Data
c1 CMV_0 GC_1
c2 CMV_0 GC_1
c3 CMV_0 GC_1

Measured attributes
seqT enumerated MX Pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero O
d Vstring255 DC O
3.3 Common data class specifications for controllable status information

3.3.1 Controlable single point (SPC).
SPC class
geSPC
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
stVal Boolean ST FALSE | TRUE AC_ST
q Quality ST AC_ST
t TimeStamp ST AC_ST
control and status
Oper ctlVal Boolean CO AC_CO_M
origin Originator CO AC_CO_M
orCat ENUMERATED M
orIdent OCTECT64 M
ctlNum INT8U CO M
T Btime6 CO M
Test Boolean CO M
Check ENUMERATED CO M
ctlModel ENUMERATED CF ctlModel M
operTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O
d Vstring255 DC O
geSPC_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
Q Quality ST AC_ST
ctlModel ENUMERATED CF ctlModel_1 M
d Vstring255 DC O

3.3.2 Controllable double point (DPC)
DPC class (Controllable double point)

geDPC
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
origin Originator CO,ST AC_CO_M
orCat ENUMERATED M
orIdent OCTECT64 M
ctlNum INT8U CO,ST M
T Btime6 CO M
Test Boolean CO M
stVal CODE ENUM ST dchg intermediate-state | off | on | bad- M
state
q BVstring13 ST qchg AC_ST
t Utctime ST AC_ST
ctlModel ENUMERATED CF M
d Vstring255 DC O
geDPC_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
orCat ENUMERATED M
orIdent OCTECT64 M
T Btime6 CO M
Test Boolean CO M
Cancel
SBO
SBOw
state
t Utctime ST AC_ST
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O
sboClass ENUMERATED CF AC_CO_O
d Vstring255 DC O
geDPC_2
Name
DataAttribute

control and status

state
t Utctime ST AC_ST
d Vstring255 DC O
3.3.3 Controllable enumerated status (ENC).
ENC class (Controllable integer status)

geModENC (type Mod)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enum ST dcgh M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.4 Common data class specifications for status settings

3.4.1 Single point setting (SPG)
SPG class
geSPG
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal Boolean SP AC_NSG_M
d Vstring255 DC O
dataNs Vstring255 EX O
geSPG_1
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal Boolean SG AC_SG_M
d Vstring255 DC O

3.4.2 Integer status setting (ING)
ING class
geING_0
Name
DataAttribute
setting
minVal INT32 CF O
maxVal INT32 CF O
stepSize INT32 CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geING_0_2
Name
DataAttribute
setting
minVal INT32 CF O
maxVal INT32 CF O
stepSize INT32 CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geING_8
Name
DataAttribute
setting
minVal INT32 CF O
maxVal INT32 CF O
stepSize INT32 CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geING_8_2
Name
DataAttribute
setting
minVal INT32 CF O
maxVal INT32 CF O
stepSize INT32 CF O
d Vstring255 DC O

3.4.3 Enumerated status setting (ENG)
ENG class
geENG
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal Enumerated SP PolQty AC_NSG_M
d Vstring255 DC O
geENG_2
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal Enumerated SG PolQty AC_SG_M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.4.4 Object reference setting
ORG class
geORG
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setSrcRef ObjectReference SP Object reference M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.5 Common data class specifications for analogue settings

3.5.1 Analoque setting (ASG)
ASG class
geIntASG
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag IntAnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M
INT32 GC_1
i
units Unit CF
minVal IntAnalogueValue CF O
INT32 GC_1
i

maxVal IntAnalogueValue CF O
INT32 GC_1
i
stepSize IntAnalogueValue CF O
INT32 GC_1
i
d Vstring255 DC O
geIntASG_1
Name
DataAttribute
setting
INT32 GC_1
i
units Unit CF
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
d Vstring255 DC O
geIntASG_3
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag IntAnalogueValue SG AC_SG_M
INT32 GC_1
i
units Unit CF
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatASG
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag FloatAnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
Units Unit CF

minVal FloatAnalogueValue CF O
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
maxVal FloatAnalogueValue CF O
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
stepSize FloatAnalogueValue CF O
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatASG_1
Name
DataAttribute
setting
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
Units Unit CF
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatASG_2
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag FloatAnalogueValue SG AC_SG_M
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
Units Unit CF
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
d Vstring255 DC O

3.6 Common data class specifications for description information

3.6.1 Device name plate (DPL)
DPL class (Device name plate)

geDPL
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
vendor Vstring255 DC M
hwRev Vstring255 DC O
swRev Vstring255 DC O
serNum Vstring255 DC O
model Vstring255 DC O
3.6.2 Logical node name plate (LPL)
LPL class (Logical node name plate)

geLPL
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
swRev Vstring255 DC M
d Vstring255 DC M
configRev Vstring255 DC AC_LN0_M
geLPL_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
d Vstring255 DC M
ldNs Vstring255 EX O

Reference documentation: MICS For F650 relay V1_4 firm7_52.
This model implementation conformance statement is applicable for F650 Bay Controller, with firmware 7.52.
This MICS document specifies the modelling extensions compared to IEC 61850 edition 1. For the exact details on the
standardized model please compare the ICD substation configuration file: “<F650_6SG_v752_Ed1.icd>”, version <1.0>.
1 Logical Node List

The following table contains the list of logical nodes implemented in the device:

LGOS (GOOSE subscription)
GoCB (GOOSE Control Block Class definition)
PTOV (Overvoltage)
PTRC (Protection trip conditioning)
PTTR (Thermal overload)
PTUV (Undervoltage)
PDOP (Power)
PFRC (Frequency Rate of Change)
PDIS (Load Encroachment)
RBDR (Disturbance recorder channel binary)
RBRF (Breaker failure)
RDRE (Disturbance recorder function)
RFLO (Fault Locator)
RSYN (Synchrocheck)
CILO (Interlocking)
MMTR (Metering)
MMXU (Measurement)


Notation:
• M: Data is mandatory in the IEC-61850-7-4.
• O: Data is optional in the IEC-61850-7-4 and is used in the device.
• E: Data is an extension to the IEC-61850-7-4.
2.1.1 LPHD (Physical device information)
LPHD class
Name Type
Data
PhyNam geDPL Physical device name plate M
PhyHealth geHealthINS Physical device health M
Proxy geSPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M
LLN0 class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Beh geBehINS Behaviour M
Health geHealthINS Health M
NamPlt geLPL_1 Name plate M
Loc geSPS Local control behaviour O
OpTmh geINS Operation time O
GoCB GoCB
2.1.3 LGOS (GOOSE subscription)

This LN Logical is used for monitoring GOOSE messages, diagnosing the subscription state of a GOOSE message and has
24 instances inside the device
LLN0 class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M


St geSPS Status of the subscription M
LastStNum geINS Last state number received O
ConfRevNum geINS Expected conf. revision num. O
GoCBRef geORG Ref. to the subscribed GOOSE control block O
2.1.4 GoCB (GOOSE control block class definition)
GoCB class
Attribute Name Attribute Type FC notes
GoID VISIBLE STRINGS GO
DatSet Object Reference GO
ConfRev INT32U GO
NdsCom BOOLEAN GO
DstAddress PHYCOMADDR GO

2.2.1.1 gePhsPIOC_2
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
EventEna geSPG_2 Snapshot events enabled O
2.2.1.2 geNdPIOC_2
PIOC class
Name Type

Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Str geNeutACD Start O IOC PKP
Op geNeutACT Operate M IOC OP
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
2.2.1.3 geGndPIOC_2
This logical node class is used for ground instantaneous overcurrent (3 instances) and sensitive ground instantaneous
overcurrent (3 instances). There are 6 instances this logical node inside the device.
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
2.2.1.4 IsoGndPIOC_2
This logical node class is used for Isolated sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent. There are 3 instances this logical
node inside the device.
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M


Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
VhStr geIntASG_2 Vh level O
VIStr geIntASG_2 VI level O
IhStr geFloatASG_1_2 Ih level O
IIStr geFloatASG_1_2 II level O
2.2.1.5 geBknCndPIOC_2
This logical node class is used for broken conductor instantaneous overcurrent. There are 3 instances this logical node
inside the device.
PIOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS Block O
Settings
BlkCurrent geFloatASG_1_2 Operation Threshold O


2.2.2.1 gePhsPTOC_2
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O TOC BLK
Settings
VolRst geSPG_2 Voltage Restraint O
2.2.2.2 geNdPTOC_2
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Settings

2.2.2.3 geGndPTOC_2
This logical node class is used for ground time overcurrent (3 instances) and for sensitive ground time overcurrent (3
instances). There are 6 instances inside of this logical node inside the device
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Str gePhsACD Start M TOC PKP
Settings
2.2.2.4 geNgSeqPTOC_2
This logical node class is used for negative sequence time overcurrent function and has 3 instances inside the device.
PTOC class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Settings


2.2.3.1 gePTOF
This logical node class is used for overfrequency and has 6 instances inside the device.
PTOF class
PTOF Overfrequency
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
NamPlt geLPL Name Plate M
Status information
Str geGeneralACD Start M TOF PKP
Op geGeneralACT Operate M TOF OP
Blk geSPS_1 Block O TOF BLK
Settings
PTOFEna geSPG_2 Function E
StrVal geFloatASG_2 Start value (frequency) O
BlkVal geIntASG_3 Voltage block value O
FreqSource geSPG_2 Frequency source E
EventEna geSPG_2 Snapshot events enabled E

2.2.4.1 gePTUF
This logical node class is used for underfrequency and has 6 instances inside the device.
PTOF class
PTUF Underfrequency
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status information
Str geGeneralACD Start M TU PKP
Op geGeneralACT Operate M TUF OP
Blk geSPS_1 Block O TUF BLK
Settings
PTUFEna geSPG_2 Function E
StrVal geFloatASG_2 Start value (frequency) O
BlkVal geIntASG_3 Voltage block value O
FreqSource geSPG_2 Frequency source E

2.2.5 PTUV
2.2.5.1 gePhsPTUV_2
PTOV class
Name Type
PTUV Undervoltage
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O TUV BLK
StrPhGn gePhsACD_1 Pickup Phase-Ground O
OpPhGn gePhsACT_1 Operate Phase-Ground O
StrPhPh gePhsACD_1 Pickup Phase-Phase O
OpPhPh gePhsACT_1 Operate Phase-Phase O
Settings
InMod geING_0_2 Mode O
TmVCrv geCURVE_4 Operating Curve Type O
DeaLinVal geIntASG_3 Minimum Voltage O
PhLogic geING_0_2 Logic O
BkrMon geSPG_2 Supervised by 52 O
2.2.5.2 geAuxPTUV_2
PTUV class
Name Type
PTUV Undervoltage
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O TUV BLK
Settings
TmVCrv geCURVE_4 Operating Curve Type O


2.2.6.1 gePhsPTOV_2
This logical node class is used for phase overvoltage and has 3 instances inside the device
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Str gePhsACD Start M TOV PKP
Op gePhsACT Operate M TOV OP
Settings
PhLogic geING_0_2 Logic O
2.2.6.2 geAuxPTOV_2
This logical node class is used for auxiliary overvoltage and has 3 instances inside the device
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O TOV BLK
Settings

2.2.6.3 geNeutPTOV_2
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O TOV BLK
Settings
2.2.6.4 geNgSeqPTOV_2
This logical node class is used for negative sequence overvoltage and has 3 instances inside the device.
PTOV class
Name Type
PTOV Overvoltage
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Settings

2.2.7 PDOP (Directional Overpower)

2.2.7.1 geFwdPDOP_2
This logical node class shall be used to model the forward overpower function and has 3 instances inside the device.
PDOP class
Name Type
PDOP Overpower
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Str gePhsACD Start M Stage 1 PKP
Op gePhsACT Operate M Stage 1 OP
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
BlkClsTms geING_0_2 Blk time after close O
StrVal geFloatASG_2 Stage 1 Tap O
OpDlTmms geING_8_2 Stage 1 Time O
S2StrVal geFloatASG_2 Stage 2 Tap O
2.2.7.2 geDirPDOP_2
This logical node class shall be used to model the directional overpower function and has 3 instances inside the device.
PDOP class
Name Type
PDOP Overpower
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
BlkClsTms geING_0_2 Blk time after close O
S1DirPwAng geFloatASG_1_2 Dir Power Angle 1 O
S2DirPwAng geFloatASG_1_2 Dir Power Angle 2 O


2.2.7.3 geWattPDOP_2
This logical node class shall be used to model the wattmeter ground overpower function and has 6 instances inside the
device.
PDOP class
Name Type
PDOP Overpower
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
SupStr gePhsACD_2 Start O
Settings
OVStrVal geFloatASG_1_2 Voltage Pickup Level O
InMagTyp geING_0_2 Current Selection O
OCStrVal geFloatASG_1_2 OC Pickup level O
OCStrDlTms geING_0_2 OC Pickup Delay O
PWStrVal geFloatASG_1_2 Power Pickup O
ChrAng geFloatASG_2 MTA O
PWStrDlTms geING_0_2 Power Pickup Delay O
Curve geING_0_2 Curve O
MltTmms geING_0_2 Multiplier O
2.2.8 PFRC (Frequency Rate of Change)

2.2.8.1 gePFRC_2
This logical node class shall be used to model the frequency rate of change function and has three instances inside the
device.
PFRC class
Name Type
PFRC Frequency Rate of Change
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
PFRCEna geSPG_2 Function O
Trend geING_0_2 Freq Rate Trend O
StrVal geFloatASG_2 Freq Rate Pickup O
BlkVal geFloatASG_2 Freq Rate Min Volt O

BlkMinFreq geFloatASG_1_2 Freq Rate Min Freq O

BlkMaxFreq geFloatASG_1_2 Freq Rate Max Freq O
OpDlTmms geING_8_2 Freq Rate Delay O
EventEna geSPG_2 Snapshot events O
2.2.9 PDIS (Distance)
2.2.9.1 gePDIS_2
This logical node class shall be used to model the load encroachment function and has three instances inside the device.
PDIS class
Name Type
PDIS Distance
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
Settings
PDISEna geSPG_2 Function O
MinVoltage geFloatASG_1_2 Freq Rate Trend O
RisLod geFloatASG_2 Freq Rate Pickup O
AngLod geFloatASG_2 Freq Rate Min Volt O
EventEna geSPG_2 Snapshot events O
2.2.10 PTTR (Thermal overload)

2.2.10.1 gePTTR_2
This logical node shall be used to model the thermal overload functions and has three instances inside the device.
PTTR class
PTTR Thermal overload
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status information
Str geGeneralACD Start M
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
AlmThm geGeneralACT Thermal alarm O
AlmThmPhA geSPS_1 Thermal alarm phase A E
AlmThmPhB geSPS_1 Thermal alarm phase B E
AlmThmPhC geSPS_1 Thermal alarm phase C E
Settings
PTTREna geSPG_2 Function E
ConsTmHeat geFloatASG_1_2 Heat time constant E

ConsTmCool geFloatASG_1_2 Cool time constant E

AlmVal geFloatASG_2 Alarm level O
2.2.11 PTRC (Protection trip conditioning)

2.2.11.1 PTRC
This logical node shall be used to connect the operate outputs of one or more
protection functions to a common trip to be transmitted to XCBR logical node and has 1 instance inside the device.
PTRC class
Name Type
PTRC Trip bus
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Op geGeneralACT Operate M

2.3.1.1 gePhsRDIR_2
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Dir gePhsACD Direction M
Op gePhsACT Operate O
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
BlkIn geGeneralACT_1 Block Input O
Settings
RDIREna geSPG_2 Function O
ChrAng geFloatASG_2 Characteristic angle O
PolOpMod geING_0_2 Direction O
BlkMod geING_0_2 Block Logic O
BlkValV geIntASG_3 Minimum operating current O
VMemTms geFloatASG_1_2 Voltage Memory Time O

2.3.1.2 geNdRDIR_2
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Dir geNeutACD Direction M
Op geNeutACT Operate O
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
BlkIn geNeutACT_1 Block Input O
Settings
PolQty geING_9 Polarizing quantity O
2.3.1.3 geGndRDIR_2
This logical node class is used for ground directional elements (3 instances) and for sensitive ground directional (3
instances).
RDIR class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Dir geNeutACD Direction M
Op geNeutACT Operate O
Blk geSPS_1 Block O
BlkIn geNeutACT_1 Block Input O
Settings
PolQty geING_9 Polarizing quantity O


2.3.2.1 geRREC
RREC class
Name Type
RREC Autoreclosing Element
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
Op geGeneralACT M
OpCls geGeneralACT Direction M
AutoRecSt geAutoRecStENS Operate M
AutoRecLo geINS_1 Block O
AutoRecBlk geINS_1 Block Input O
Settings
RRECEna geSPG Function O
MaxNumShot geING_0 Max. Number Shots O
Rec1Tmms1 geING_8 Dead Time 1 O
RclTmms geING_8 Reclaim time
CondEna geSPG Cond. Permission
HoldTmms geFloatASG_1 Hold Time
RsTmms geFloatASG_1 Reset Time
2.3.3 RBRF (Breaker failure)

2.3.3.1 RBRF :
This logical node class is used for breaker failure and has 1 instance inside the device.
RREC class
Name Type
RBRF Breaker failure element
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
OpEx geGeneralACT Direction M

2.3.4 RFLO (Fault Locator)

2.3.4.1ge RFLO
This logical node class is used for modelling the fault locator and has 1 instance inside the device.
RFLO class
Name Type
RFLO Fault locator element
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
FltRprtTrg geSPS_1 Fault Report Trigger O
ClrFltRprts geSPS_1 Clear fault reports O
FltZ geFloatCMV Fault impedance M
FltDiskm geFloatMV_3 Fault distance in km O
RPriFlt geFloatMV_2 Primary Fault Resistance O
XPriFlt geFloatMV_2 Primary Fault Reactance O
RSeFlt geFloatMV_2 Secondary Fault Resistance O
XSeFlt geFloatMV_2 Secondary Fault Reactance O
RFault geFloatMV_2 Fault Resistance O
FltTyp geINS_1 Fault type O
FltRprtNum geINS_1 Fault report number O
PreFlaMod geFloatMV_2 Prefault Ia module O
PreFlaAng geFloatMV_2 Prefault Ia angle O
PreFlbMod geFloatMV_2 O
PreFlbAng geFloatMV_2 O
PreFlcMod geFloatMV_2 O
PreFlcAng geFloatMV_2 O
PreFlgMod geFloatMV_2 O
PreFlgAng geFloatMV_2 O
PreFlsgMod geFloatMV_2 O
PreFlsgAng geFloatMV_2 O
PreFVabMod geFloatMV_2 O
PreFVabAng geFloatMV_2 O
PreFVbcMod geFloatMV_2 O
PreFVbcAng geFloatMV_2 O
PreFVcaMod geFloatMV_2 O
PreFVcaAng geFloatMV_2 O
PstFlaMod geFloatMV_2 Postfault Ia module O
PstFlaAng geFloatMV_2 Postfault Ia angle O
PstFlbMod geFloatMV_2 O
PstFlbAng geFloatMV_2 O
PstFlcMod geFloatMV_2 O
PstFlcAng geFloatMV_2 O
PstFlgMod geFloatMV_2 O
PstFlgAng geFloatMV_2 O
PstFlsgMod geFloatMV_2 O
PstFltIsgAng geFloatMV_2 O
PstFVabMod geFloatMV_2 O
PstFVabAng geFloatMV_2 O
PstFVbcMod geFloatMV_2 O
PstFVbcAng geFloatMV_2 O
PstFVcaMod geFloatMV_2 O
PstFVcaAng geFloatMV_2 O
Settings

RFLOEna geSPG Function

Z1Mod geFloatASG_1 Pos.Seq. Module
Z1Ang geIntASG_1 Pos.Seq. Angle
Z0Mod geFloatASG_1 Zero Seq. Module
Z0Ang geIntASG_1 Zero Seq. Angle
LinLenkm geFloatASG Line length
ShwFltHMI geSPG Show fault in HMI
EventEna geSPG Snapshot Events enabled
PhCtPol geSPG Phase CT Polarity
2.3.5 RSYN (Synchronism-check)

2.3.5.1 RSYN
This logical node class is used modelling the synchrocheck function and has 1 instance inside the device
RSYN class
Name Type
RSYN Synchronism-check
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status Information
SynBlkIn geSPS_1 Block signal O
SynOp geSPS_1 Closing permission signal O
Rel geSPS Release M
SynCondOp geSPS_1 Closing perm. according to logic O
DLDBOp geSPS_1 Closing perm. in DLDB condition O
DLLBOp geSPS_1 Closing perm. in DLLB condition O
LLDBOp geSPS_1 Closing perm. in LLDB condition O
HzInd geSPS Frequency difference indicator O
BusHzHiLinHz geSPS_1 Busbar frequency > line frequency O
BusHzLoLinHz geSPS_1 Busbar frequency < line frequency O
Measured values
DifVClc geFloatMV Calculated difference in voltage O
DifHzClc geFloatMV Calculated difference in frequency O
Settings
RSYNEna geSPG Function O
DeaBusVal geFloatASG Dead bus value O
LivBusVal geFloatASG Live bus value O
DeaLinVal geFloatASG Dead line value O
LivLinVal geFloatASG Live line value O
DifV geFloatASG Difference voltage O
DifAng geFloatASG Difference angle O
DifHz geIntASG Difference frequency O
TotTmms geING_8 Total time of synch. process O
DLDBEna geSPG Dead line - dead bus permission O
LLDBEna geSPG Live line - dead bus permission O
DLLBEna geSPG Dead line - live bus permission O
EventEna geSPG Snapshot events enabled O

2.3.6 RDRE (Disturbance recorder function)

This logical node class is used modelling the disturbance recording function and has 1 instance inside the device. RBDR
and RDRE logical nodes make available all attributes needed for the COMTRADE file.
RDRE class
RDRE Disturbance recorder
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M Status-only
Status information
RcdMade geSPS Recording made M
FltNum geINS Fault number M
CycRcd geINS_1 Cycles per record E
RcdNum geINS_1 Available records E
Settings
RDREEna geSPG Oscillography function enable E
TrgPos geINS_0 Trigger position E
SmpCyc geINS_10 Samples per cycle E
MaxNumRcd geINS_8 Maximum number of records O
RcdMod geINS_11 Recorder operation mode O
EventEna geSPG Snapshot events enabled E
2.3.7 RBDR (Disturbance recorder channel binary):

This logical node class is used for providing the circuit component and phase identification and has 1 instance inside the
device. RBDR and RDRE logical nodes make available all attributes needed for the COMTRADE file.
RBDR class
RBDR Disturbance recorder channel binary
Data
Status information
ChTrg geSPS Channel triggered M
FltNum geINS Fault Number M
DigCh01 geSPS_01 O
… … … …
DigCh16 geSPS_01 O


2.4.1.1 geCSWI
mapped to first nine switchgears in F650. XSWI and CSWI Logical Nodes can be seen as paired objects in F650 as one pair
of XSWI and CSWI map to the same switchgear. XSWI1 and CSWI1 map to Switchgear1, XSWI2 and CSWI2 map to
CSWI class
Data
Controls
Loc geSPS Local operation O Local/Remote
Pos geDPC_1 Switch position M Switch open, close, undefined
2.4.2 CILO (Interlocking)

2.4.2.1 geCILO -> 16 switchgear
This logical node class is used for interlocking the operations performed over the
switchgears and has 16 instances inside the device.
CILO class
Name Type
CILO Switch controller
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status information
EnaOpn geSPS Enable Open M
EnaCls geSPS Enable Close


2.5.1.1 geBoardGGIO
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status information
BoardSt geSPS_1 Board status O
Ind1 geSPS Status contact input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
Ind33 geSPS Status contact output 1 O
.. .. ..
Ind48 geSPS Status contact output 16 O
Measured and metered values
AnIn1 geFloatMV Analog input 1 O
.. .. ..
Settings
VThrldA geIntASG_1 Voltage threshold A O
VThrldB geIntASG_1 Voltage threshold B O
VThrldC geIntASG_1 Voltage threshold C O
VThrldD geIntASG_1 Voltage threshold D O
DbceTmmsA geING_0 Debounce time A O
DbceTmmsB geING_0 Debounce time B O
DbceTmmsC geING_0 Debounce time C O
DbceTmmsD geING_0 Debounce time D O
InTyp01 geING_0 Type input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
DlInTmms01 geING_0 Delay time input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
OutLogic01 geING_0 Logic output 1 O
.. .. .. ..
OutTyp01 geING_0 Type output 1 O
.. .. ..

PlsOutms01 geING_0 Pulse time output 1 O

.. .. ..
Rng01 geING_0 Range analog input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
OscTmmsA geING_0 Oscillation time A O
OscTmmsB geING_0 Oscillation time B O
OscTmmsC geING_0 Oscillation time C O
OscTmmsD geING_0 Oscillation time D O
NumChgs geING_0 Number of transient changes O
EventEna geSPG Snapshot Events enabled O
2.5.1.2 geVirtualGGIO
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Controls
DPCSO01 geSPC Virtual input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
2.5.1.3 geEventsGGIO
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Status information
Ind1 geSPS Control Event 1 O
Ind2 SPS Control Event 2 O Control Event 2
......... .......... ............... .......... ..............
Ind192 SPS Control Event 32 O Control Event 32

GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status information
Ind1 geSPS Remote digital input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
AnIn1 geFloatMV Remote float input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
AnIn9 geIntMV_1 Remote integer input 1 O
.. .. .. ..
Settings
OscTmms geING_0 Oscillation time remote inputs O
NumChgs geING_0 Number of transient changes O
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status information
Ind1 geSPS Remote digital output 1 O
Ind2 geSPS Remote digital output 2 O
.. .. .. ..
Ind32 SgePS Remote digital output 32 O

2.5.1.6 geDigitalCountersGGIO
This logical node is used for modelling the eight digital counters of F650 relay.
GGIO class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModENC Mode M
Status information
Cnt1 geBCR_2 Digital counter 1 O
.. .. .. ..
Cnt8 geBCR_2 Digital counter 8 O
CntBlk1 geSPS_1 Digital counter 1 block O
.. .. ..
CntBlk8 geSPS_1 Digital counter 8 block O
CntHi1 geSPS_1 Digital counter 1 high O
.. .. ..
CntHi8 geSPS_1 Digital counter 8 high O
CntEq1 geSPS_1 Digital counter 1 equal O
.. .. ..
CntEq8 geSPS_1 Digital counter 8 equal O
CntLo1 geSPS_1 Digital counter 1 low O
.. .. ..
CntLo8 geSPS_1 Digital counter 8 low O
CntUp1 geSPS_1 Digital counter 1 up O
.. .. ..
CntUp8 geSPS_1 Digital counter 8 up O
CntDwn1 geSPS_1 Digital counter 1 down O
.. .. ..
CntDwn8 geSPS_1 Digital counter 8 down O
CntSetPre1 geSPS_1 Digital counter 1 set preset O
.. .. ..
CntSetPre8 geSPS_1 Digital counter 8 set preset O
CntRst1 geSPS_1 Digital counter 1 reset O
.. .. ..
CntRst8 geSPS_1 Digital counter 8 reset O
CntFrzRst1 geSPS_1 Digital counter 1 FreezeReset O
.. .. ..
CntFrzRst8 geSPS_1 Digital counter 8 FreezeReset O
CntFrzCnt1 geSPS_1 Digital counter 1 FreezeCount O
.. .. ..
CntFrzCnt8 geSPS_1 Digital counter 8 FreezeCount O


2.6.1.1 geMMXU
MMXU class
Name Type
MMXU Measurement
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Measured values
TotW geFloatMV Total active power (P) O
TotVAr geFloatMV Total reactive power (Q) O
TotVA geFloatMV Total apparent power (S) O
TotPF geFloatMV Average power factor (PF) O
Hz geFloatMV Line Frequency O
PPV geFloatDEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1L2,...) O
PhV geFloatPhsWYE Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, ...) O
A geFloatWYE Phase currents (IL1, ...) O
AuxV geFloatCMV_1 Auxiliary Phase Voltage O
BusHz geFloatMV_1

2.6.2.1 geMSQI
MSQI class
Name Type
MSQI Measurement
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Measured values
SeqA geFloatSEQ O
SeqV geFloatSEQ O

2.6.3.1 geMMTR
MMTR class
Name Type
MMTR Measurement
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M


Measured values
SupWh geBCR O
SupVArh geBCR O
DmdWh geBCR O
DmdVArh geBCR O
CntPsWh geFloatMV_1 O
CntNgWh geFloatMV_1 O
CntPsVArh geFloatMV_1 O
CntNgVArh geFloatMV_1 O

2.7.1.1 geXCBR -> 1 circuit breaker
This logical node is used for modelling the circuit breaker of F650 relay
XCBR class
Name Type
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status information
Loc geSPS Local operation M Local / Remote
OpCnt geINS Operation counter M Breaker openings
SumSwARs O
CBOpCap geCBOpCapENS Cicruit breaker operating O
capability
Controls
Pos geDPC_1 Switch position M Breaker open, close
BlkOpn geSPC_1 Block opening M Virtual output
BlkClr geSPC_1 Block closing M Virtual output
Settings
ThAlSwA geFloatASG_1 Maximum KI2t O
SumSwATmms geFloatASG_1 KI2t Integ. Time O
ExNumTr geIntASG_1 Maximum Openings O
ExNumTr1hr geIntASG_1 Max.Openings 1 hour O


2.7.2.1 geXSWI
XSWI LN. Control commands have to be sent via CSWI LN. "Pos" attribute is not controllable in XSWI it has ctlModel =
Status-only. In order to control the switch mapped to given XSWI the corresponding CSWI LN should be used.
XCBR class
Name Type
XSWI Circuit switch
Data
Mod geModINC Mode M
Status information
Loc geSPS Local operation M Local / Remote
EEHealth geEEHealthENS Ext. equipment health O
OpCnt geINS Operation counter M Breaker openings
Controls
Pos geDPC_2 Switch position M Breaker open, close
BlkOpn geSPC_1 Block opening M Virtual output
BlkClr geSPC_1 Block closing M Virtual output
SwTyp geSwTypENS Switch type M
SwOpCap geSwOpCapENS Switch operating capability

3. Common Data Class

3.1 Common Data Class for status information
3.1.1 Single Point Status (SPS)
SPS class (Single point status)

gsSPS
Name
DataAttribute
status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geSPS_1
Name
DataAttribute
status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.1.2 Integer Status (INS)
INS class (Integer status)

geINS
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geINS_1
Name
DataAttribute
status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O

3.1.3 Enumerated Status (ENS)
ENS class (Enumerated status)

geAutoRecStINS (AutoRecSt)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enum ST dchg Ready,InProgress,Successful,.. M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geBehINS (Beh)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enum ST dchg On,blocked,test,test/blocked,Off M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geHealthINS (Health)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enum ST dchg Ok,Warning,Alarm M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geEEHealthINS (EEHealth)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg Ok,Warning,Alarm M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geCBOpCapINS (CBOpCap)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enumerated ST dchg None,Open,Close-Open,… M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geSwOpCapINS (SwOpCap)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enumerated ST dchg None,Open,Close,… M
t Utctime ST M


d Vstring255 DC O
geSwTypINS (SwTyp)
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enumerated ST dchg Load Break, Disconnector,… M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.1.4 Protection activation information (ACT)
ACT class (Protection activation information)

gePhsACT
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
cdcNs Vstring255 EX O
cdcName Vstring255 EX O
gePhsACT_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geNeutACT
Name
DataAttribute
control and status


t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geNeutACT_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geGeneralACT
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geGeneralACT_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O

3.1.5 Directional protection activation information (ACD)
ACD class (Directional protection activation information)

gePhsACD
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
gePhsACD_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geNeutACD
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geNeutACD_1
Name
DataAttribute

control and status

t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geGeneralACD
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.1.6 Binary counter reading (BCR)
BCR class (Binary counter reading)

geBCR
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
actVal Int64 ST Dchg M
t Utctime ST M
units Unit CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geBCR_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
geBCR_2

Name
DataAttribute
control and status
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.2 Common data class specifications for measurand information

3.2.1 Measured Value (MV)
MV class (Measured value)

geFloatMV
DataAttribute
measured attributes
f FLOAT32 GC_1
f FLOAT32 GC_1
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
Multiplier ENUMERATED(Byte)
O
db INT32U CF O
zeroDb INT32U CF O

f
FLOAT32 GC_1
hlim
FloatAnalogueValue
f
lLim FLOAT32 GC_1
llLim FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FloatAnalogueValue
min
f FLOAT32 GC_1
f FLOAT32 GC_1
FLOAT32 GC_1
INT32U
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatMV_1
DataAttribute
measured attributes
f FLOAT32 GC_1
f FLOAT32 GC_1
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
Multiplier
ENUMERATED(Byte) O
db INT32U CF O
zeroDb INT32U CF O
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
hlim
FloatAnalogueValue
f
lLim FLOAT32 GC_1
llLim FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FloatAnalogueValue
min
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
f FLOAT32 GC_1
FLOAT32 GC_1
INT32U
d Vstring255 DC O

geFloatMV_2
DataAttribute
measured attributes
f FLOAT32 GC_1
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
Multiplier
ENUMERATED(Byte) O
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatMV_3
DataAttribute
measured attributes
f FLOAT32 GC_1
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
Multiplier
ENUMERATED(Byte) O
d Vstring255 DC O
geIntMV
DataAttribute
measured attributes
i INT32 GC_1
i INT32 GC_1
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
Multiplier
ENUMERATED(Byte) O
db INT32U CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geIntMV_1
DataAttribute
measured attributes
i INT32 GC_1


i INT32 GC_1
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
Multiplier
ENUMERATED(Byte) O
db INT32U CF O
zeroDb INT32U CF O
hhLim IntAnalogueValue
i
INT32U GC_1
hlim
IntAnalogueValue
i
lLim UINT32 GC_1
i IntAnalogueValue
llLim INT32U GC_1
i
IntAnalogueValue
min
INT32U GC_1
i
max IntAnalogueValue
i INT32U GC_1
limDb IntAnalogueValue
INT32U GC_1
INT32U
d Vstring255 DC O
3.2.2 Complex Measured Value (CMV)
CMV class (Complex measured value)

geFloatCMV
Name
DataAttribute
measured attributes
f
FLOAT32
f
FLOAT32
t Utctime MX M

units Unit CF O
SIUnit Byte M
Multiplier
Byte O
db INT32U CF O
dbAng INT32U CF O
zeroDb INT32U CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatCMV_1
Name
DataAttribute
measured attributes
f
FLOAT32
f
FLOAT32
t Utctime MX M
units Unit CF O
SIUnit Byte M
Multiplier
Byte O
db INT32U CF O
dbAng INT32U CF O
zeroDb INT32U CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
dataNs Vstring255 EX M
3.2.3 Phase to ground related measured values of a three phase system ( WYE )
WYE class
geFloatPhsWYE
Name
Data
phsA CMV_0 GC_1
phsB CMV_0 GC_1
phsC CMV_0 GC_1
neut CMV_0 GC_1

d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatWYE
Name
Data
phsA CMV_0 GC_1
phsB CMV_0 GC_1
phsC CMV_0 GC_1
neut CMV_0 GC_1
net CMV_0 GC_1
res CMV_0 GC_1
d Vstring255 DC O
3.2.4 Phase to phase related measured values of a three phase system ( DEL )
DEL class (Phase to phase related measured values of a three phase system)
geFloatDEL
Name
Data
phsAB CMV_0 GC_1
phsBC CMV_0 GC_1
phsCA CMV_0 GC_1
d Vstring255 DC O
3.2.5 Sequence (SEQ)
SEQ class ( Sequence )

geFloatSEQ
Name
Data
c1 CMV_0 GC_1
c2 CMV_0 GC_1
c3 CMV_0 GC_1
Measured attributes
seqT enumerated MX Pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero O
d Vstring255 DC O
3.3 Common data class specifications for controllable status information

3.3.1 Controllable single point (SPC).
SPC class
geSPC

Name
DataAttribute
control and status
q Quality ST AC_ST
control and status
origin Originator CO AC_CO_M
orCat ENUMERATED M
orIdent OCTECT64 M
ctlNum INT8U CO M
T Btime6 CO M
Test Boolean CO M
ctlModel ENUMERATED CF ctlModel M
d Vstring255 DC O
cdcNs Vstring255 EX
cdcName Vstring255 EX
geSPC_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
Q Quality ST AC_ST
ctlModel ENUMERATED CF ctlModel_1 M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.3.2 Controllable double point (DPC)
DPC class (Controllable double point)

geDPC
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
orCat ENUMERATED M
orIdent OCTECT64 M
T Btime6 CO M
Test Boolean CO M
state

t Utctime ST AC_ST
d Vstring255 DC O
cdcNs Vstring255 EX
geDPC_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
orCat ENUMERATED M
orIdent OCTECT64 M
T Btime6 CO M
Test Boolean CO M
Cancel
SBO
SBOw
state
t Utctime ST AC_ST
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O
sboClass ENUMERATED CF AC_CO_O
d Vstring255 DC O
cdcNs Vstring255 EX
geDPC_2
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
state
t Utctime ST AC_ST
d Vstring255 DC O
3.3.3 Controllable enumerated status (ENC)
ENC class (Controllable integer status)

geModINC (type Mod)

Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal Enum ST dcgh M
t Utctime ST M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.4 Common data class specifications for status settings

3.4.1 Single point setting (SPG)
SPG class
geSPG
Name
DataAttribute
setting
d Vstring255 DC O
geSPG_2
Name
DataAttribute
setting
d Vstring255 DC O
3.4.2 Integer status setting (ING)
ING class
geING_0
Name
DataAttribute
setting
minVal INT32 CF O
maxVal INT32 CF O
stepSize INT32 CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geING_0_2

Name
DataAttribute
setting
minVal INT32 CF O
maxVal INT32 CF O
stepSize INT32 CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geING_8
Name
DataAttribute
setting
minVal INT32 CF O
maxVal INT32 CF O
stepSize INT32 CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geING_8_2
Name
DataAttribute
setting
minVal INT32 CF O
maxVal INT32 CF O
stepSize INT32 CF O
d Vstring255 DC O
geING_9
Name
DataAttribute
setting
d Vstring255 DC O
geING_10
Name
DataAttribute
setting
d Vstring255 DC O
dataNs Vstring255 EX
geING_11
Name

DataAttribute
setting
setVal Boolean SP
d Vstring255 DC O
dataNs Vstring255 EX
3.4.3 Enumerated status setting (ENG)
ENG class
geENG
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal Enumerated SP PolQty AC_NSG_M
d Vstring255 DC O
geENG_2
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal Enumerated SG PolQty AC_SG_M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.4.4 Object reference setting
ORG class
geORG
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setSrcRef ObjectReference SP Object reference M
d Vstring255 DC O
3.5 Common data class specifications for analogue settings

3.5.1 Analog setting (ASG)
ASG class
geIntASG
Name
DataAttribute
setting


INT32 GC_1
i
units Unit CF
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
d Vstring255 DC O
geIntASG_1
Name
DataAttribute
setting
INT32 GC_1
i
units Unit CF
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
d Vstring255 DC O
geIntASG_2
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag IntAnalogueValue SG AC_NSG_M
INT32 GC_1
i
units Unit CF
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
d Vstring255 DC O
geIntASG_3

Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag IntAnalogueValue SG AC_SG_M
INT32 GC_1
i
units Unit CF
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
INT32 GC_1
i
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatASG
Name
DataAttribute
setting
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
Units Unit CF
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatASG_1
Name
DataAttribute
setting
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
Units Unit CF
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
d Vstring255 DC O

geFloatASG_1_2
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag FloatAnalogueValue SG AC_NSG_M
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
Units Unit CF
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
d Vstring255 DC O
geFloatASG_2
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag FloatAnalogueValue SG AC_SG_M
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
Units Unit CF
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
FLOAT32 GC_1
f
d Vstring255 DC O
3.5.2 Setting curve (CURVE)
geCURVE_3
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setCharact ENUMERATED SG O
d Vstring255 DC O
geCURVE_4
Name

DataAttribute
setting
setCharact ENUMERATED SG O
d Vstring255 DC O

3.6 Common data class specifications for description information

3.6.1 Device name plate (DPL)
DPL class (Device name plate)

geDPL
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
hwRev Vstring255 DC O
swRev Vstring255 DC O
serNum Vstring255 DC O
model Vstring255 DC O
3.6.2 Logical node name plate (LPL)
LPL class (Logical node name plate)

geLPL
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
d Vstring255 DC M
geLPL_1
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
d Vstring255 DC M
ldNs Vstring255 EX O

4. Enum Types
4.2 New Enum Types
4.2.1 setCharact_2
Value Description Remarks

0 Definite Time
1 Inverse Time
4.2.2 SamplesCycle
Value Description Remarks

0 64 samples/cycle
1 32 samples/cycle
2 16 samples/cycle
3 8 samples/cycle
4 4 samples/cycle

7.3.7.3.7 TICS for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2
Reference documentation: TICS for 650 family of relays v1_7 firm3_60.
• Introduction
• TICS Template
1 Introduction
This document provides a template for the tissues conformance statement (TICS). According to the UCA QAP the TICS is
required to perform a conformance test and is referenced on the final certificate.
In this TICS template only tissues with a “green” status are considered since they become mandatory and thus must be
included in the UCA Device conformance test procedures.
“Green” Tissues listed in this document represent the current status of all Tissues for a date of the document creation.
As for some of the remaining tissues, they are not yet included in the test procedures, either because they are just a
recommendation or optional within the IEC 61850 documents, or because their respective proposals are not defined in
such detail to be implemented or tested, or because they are simply not applicable, just editorial, with no change for
implementation and testing.
The supported (“Sup”) column indicates:
• Y: yes, the tissue is implemented in the device.
• N: no, the tissue is not implemented in the device.
• N.A.: not applicable, the tissue is not applicable for the device.
2 TICS Template
Tissue No. Supported? Comments about implementation

(Y / N / N.A.)
IEC 61850 General
141 N
146 Y
173 Y
IEC 61850 Part 6
1 N.A.
3 Y
4 Y
5 Y
6 N.A.
7 N.A.
8 Y
9 N.A.
10 Y
11 N.A.
12 N.A.
13 N.A.
14 N.A.
15 N.A.
16 N.A.
17 N.A.
18 N.A.
24 N.A.

130 N.A.
157 N.A.
169 N.A.
170 N.A.
176 N.A.
186 Y Technically it would be possible to include Control Block’s attributes as
Data Set members, however Data Sets in this device are fixed and it is
not possible to modify them.
197 N.A.
201 N.A.
211 N.A.
245 N.A.
IEC 61850 Part 7-2
29 N.A.
30 N.A.
31 N.A.
32 N.A.
33 N.A.
34 N.A.
35 Y
36 N.A.
37 N.A.
38 N.A.
39 N.A.
40 N.A.
41 Y
42 N.A.
43 N.A.
44 N.A.
45 N.A.
47 N.A.
48 N.A.
50 N.A.
51 N.A.
52 N.A.
53 N
137 N.A.
142 N
IEC 61850 Part 7-3
28 N.A. No CDC APC present in Data Model.
54 N.A.
55 N.A.
56 N.A.
57 N.A.
58 N.A.
59 N.A.
60 N.A.
61 N.A.
62 N.A.
63 N.A.
64 N.A.
65 N.A.


(Y / N / N.A.)
IEC 61850 Part 7-3(cont.)
68 Y In ACT CDC’s attribute origin is present in (ST) FC.
138 N.A.
161 N.A.
164 N.A.
171 Y
182 N.A.
205 N.A.
213 N.A.
217 N.A.
219 N.A.
IEC 61850 Part 7-4
69 N.A.
70 N.A.
71 N.A.
72 N.A.
73 N.A. No SIMG, SIML logical nodes in Data Model.
74 N.A.
75 N.A. No GAPC logical node in Data Model.
76 N.A.
77 N.A.
78 N.A.
79 Y
80 N.A. No TCTR, TVTR logical nodes in Data Model.
82 N.A.
83 N
84 N.A.
85 N.A.
86 N.A.
87 N.A.
88 N.A.
89 N.A.
90 N.A. No CPOW logical node in Data Model.
91 N.A. No SIMG logical node in Data Model.
92 N.A. No SIML logical node in Data Model.
94 N.A.
95 N.A.
96 N.A. No GSAL logical node in Data Model.
97 N.A.
98 N.A.
99 N.A.
100 N.A.
101 N.A. No RDRE, RADR, RBDR logical nodes in Data Model.
102 N.A.
104 N
105 N.A.
106 N.A.
107 N.A.
108 N.A.
133 Y


(Y / N / N.A.)
IEC 61850 Part 7-4(cont.)
134 N.A.
145 N.A.
147 N.A. Mod, Beh always have value 1.
148 N.A.
216 N.A.
IEC 61850 Part 8-1
109 N.A. This Tissue is informational only.
110 N.A.
111 N.A.
112 N.A.
113 N.A.
114 N.A.
115 N.A.
116 Y
117 N.A.
118 N
119 N.A. MMS GetCapabilities is not supported.
120 Y
121 N.A.
122 N.A.
123 N.A.
128 N
143 N.A.
144 N.A. No CDC APC present in Data Model.
196 Y
260 Y
IEC 61850 Part 9-2
124 N.A.
125 N.A.
126 N.A.
127 N.A.
139 N.A.

Reference documentation: TICS for 650 family of relays v1_0 firm7_20.

• Introduction
• TICS Template
1 Introduction
This document provides a template for the tissues conformance statement (TICS). According to the UCA QAP the TICS is
required to perform a conformance test and is referenced on the final certificate.
In this TICS template only tissues with a "green" status are considered since they become mandatory and thus must be
included in the UCA Device conformance test procedures.
"Green" Tissues listed in this document represent the current status of all Tissues for a date of the document creation. As
for some of the remaining tissues, they are not yet included in the test procedures, either because they are just a
recommendation or optional within the IEC 61850 documents, or because their respective proposals are not defined in
such detail to be implemented or tested, or because they are simply not applicable, just editorial, with no change for
implementation and testing.
The supported ("Sup") column indicates:
• Y: yes, the tissue is implemented in the device.
• N: no, the tissue is not implemented in the device.
• N.A.: not applicable, the tissue is not applicable for the device.
2 TICS Template

(Y / N / N.A.)
IEC 61850 Part 6
658 NA
663 Y
668 NA
687 NA
719 Y
721 NA
768 Y
770 Y
779 Y
788 NA
789 Y
804 NA
806 NA
807 NA
822 NA
823 NA
824 NA
825 NA
845 NA
853 NA


(Y / N / N.A.)
IEC 61850 Part 6
855 NA
856 NA
857 NA
886 NA
901 NA
936 NA
1168 NA
1175 NA
IEC 61850 Part 7-1
828 Y
1151 NA
1196 NA
IEC 61850 Part 7-2
778 Y
780 Y
783 NA
786 Y
820 NA
858 NA
861 NA
876 NA
1038 NA
1050 NA
1062 NA
1071 Y
1091 NA
1127 NA
1163 NA
1202 Y
IEC 61850 Part 7-3
697 NA
698 NA
722 NA
919 NA
925 NA
926 Y
IEC 61850 Part 7-4
671 NA
674 NA
675 NA
676 NA
677 NA
679 NA
680 NA
681 NA
682 NA
683 NA
685 NA
686 NA


(Y / N / N.A.)
IEC 61850 Part 7-4
694 NA
696 NA
712 NA
713 NA
724 NA
725 NA
734 NA
735 NA
736 NA
742 NA
743 NA
744 NA
772 NA
773 NA
774 NA
775 NA
776 NA
800 NA
802 NA
808 NA
831 NA
838 NA
844 NA
849 NA
877 NA
909 NA
920 NA
932 NA
939 NA
991 NA
1007 Y
1044 NA
1077 NA
IEC 61850 Part 8-1
784 NA
817 NA
834 Y
951 NA
1040 NA
1178 Y
Note: Tissues 675, 735, 772, 775, 776, 878 are not relevant for conformance testing
Compare the TISSUE database for more details: www.tissues.iec61850.com

Reference documentation: TICS For F650 relay V3_05 firm7_52

Mandatory Intop Tissues
During the October 2006 meeting IEC TC57 working group 10 decided that:
• green Tissues with the category "IntOp" are mandatory for IEC 61850 edition 1
• Tissues with the category "Ed.2" Tissues should not be implemented.
The table below gives an overview of the implemented IntOp Tissues.
Part Tissue Description Implemented

Nr Y/na
8-1 116 GetNameList with empty response? Y
165 Improper Error Response for GetDataSetValues na
183 GetNameList error handling na
246 Control negative response (SBOns) with LastApplError na
545 Skip file directories with no files na
7-4 252 AlmThm should have CDC SPS Y
7-3 28 Definition of APC na
54 Point def xVal, not cVal na
55 Ineut = Ires ? na
63 mag in CDC CMV na
65 Deadband calculation of a Vector and trigger option na
219 operTm in ACT na
270 WYE and DEL rms values na
1199 BCR na

7-2 30 control parameter T na

31 Typo na
32 Typo in syntax na
35 Typo Syntax Control time Y
36 Syntax parameter DSet-Ref missing na
37 Syntax GOOSE "T" type na
39 Add DstAddr to GoCB na
40 GOOSE Message "AppID" to "GoID" na
41 GsCB "AppID" to "GsID" Y
42 SV timestamp: "EntryTime" to "TimeStamp" na
43 Control "T" semantic na
44 AddCause - Object not sel na
45 Missing AddCauses na
46 Synchro check cancel na
47 "." in LD Name? na
49 BRCB TimeOfEntry (part of #453) -
50 LNName start with number? na
51 ARRAY [0..num] missing na
52 Ambiguity GOOSE SqNum na
53 Add DstAddr to GsCB, SV na
151 Name constraint for control blocks etc. na
166 DataRef attribute in Log na
185 Logging - Integrity periode na
189 SV Format na
190 BRCB: EntryId and TimeOfEntry (part of #453) -
191 BRCB: Integrity and buffering reports (part of #453) -
278 EntryId not valid for a server (part of #453) -
297 Sequence number na
298 Type of SqNum na
305 Reporting with BufTm = 0 na
322 Write Configuration attribute of BRCBs na
329 Reporting and BufOvl na
333 Enabling of an incomplete GoCB na
335 Clearing of BufOvfl na
348 URCB class and report na
349 BRCB TimeOfEntry has two definitions na
453 Combination of all reporting and logging tissues na
1281 Trigger option GI is by default na
Part 6 1 Syntax na
5 tExtensionAttributeNameEnum is restricted Y
8 SIUnit enumeration for W Y
10 Base type for bitstring usage Y
17 DAI/SDI elements syntax Y
169 Ordering of enum differs from 7-3 na
245 Attribute RptId in SCL na
529 Replace sev - Unknown by unknown na
NOTE: Tissue 49, 190, 191, 275 and 278 are part of tissue #453, all other technical tissues in the table are mandatory if
applicable.
NOTE: Editorial tissues are marked as "na".

7.3.7.3.10 PIXIT for 650 family of relays whose order code has Rear Ethernet Communication Board 2
Reference documentation: PIXIT for 650 family of relays v1_5 firm3_60.
• PIXIT for Association Model
• PIXIT for Server model
• PIXIT for Dataset model
• PIXIT for Reporting model
• PIXIT for Generic substation events model
• PIXIT for Control model
• PIXIT for Time and time synchronisation model
• PIXIT for File transfer model
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850 interface in 650
family of relays
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test according to IEC 61850-10.
Contents of this document: Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC
61850-10.
1 Pixit For Association Model
Description Value / Clarification

Maximum number of clients that can set-up an 5
association simultaneously
Lost connection detection time range (default range of 20 seconds
TCP_KEEPALIVE is 1 – 20 seconds)
Is authentication supported N
What association parameters are necessary for Only local selectors are checked:
successful association Transport selector Y (00 01)
Session selector Y (00 01)
Presentation selector Y (00 00 00 01)
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
What is the maximum and minimum MMS PDU size Max MMS PDU size : 256000
There is no established minimum MMS PDU size, however
recommended MMS PDU size is at least 32000.
What is the typical startup time after a power supply 210 SECONDS
interrupt

2 PIXIT for Server model

Which analogue value (MX) quality bits are supported Validity:
(can be set by server) Y Good,
N Invalid,
N Reserved,
N Questionable
N Overflow
N OutofRange
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
N Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
Y Process
N Substituted
N Test
N OperatorBlocked
Which status value (ST) quality bits are supported (can be Validity:
set by server) Y Good,
N Invalid,
N Reserved,
N Questionable
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
N Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
Y Process
N Substituted
N Test
N OperatorBlocked
What is the maximum number of data values in one MMS PDU SIZE / 4
GetDataValues request
What is the maximum number of data values in one MMS PDU SIZE / 4
SetDataValues request
Additional Items:
Behaviour of stepSize attribute checks When a client attempts to write value of setVal (CDC ING)
or setMag (CDC ASG) which is not a multiple of stepSize
attribute of assciated CF then the device truncates the
value to the nearest stepSize not greater than the value
intended to be written.
3 PIXIT for Dataset model

What is the maximum number of data elements in one Data sets cannot be created via MMS services.
data set Data sets can be created via ICD/CID file and maximum
number of elements in one data set is 64. The exception
to that is the predefined data set “eveGGIO1$ST” which
contains 192 elements.
How many persistent data sets can be created by one or Data sets cannot be created via MMS services.
more clients Data sets can be created via ICD/CID file and maximum
number of all persistent data sets in F650 relay is 20.
How many non-persistent data sets can be created by 0
one or more clients

4 PIXIT for Reporting model

The supported trigger conditions are integrity Y
data change Y
quality change N
data update N
general interrogation Y
The supported optional fields are sequence-number Y
report-time-stamp Y
reason-for-inclusion Y
data-set-name Y
data-reference Y
buffer-overflow Y
entryID Y
conf-rev Y
segmentation Y
Can the server send segmented reports Y
Mechanism on second internal data change notification Send report immediately
of the same analogue data value within buffer period
(Compare IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.2.9)
Multi client URCB approach (compare IEC 61850-7-2 Option b) of IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.1 is implemented
$14.2.1) which means that each client has it's own set of URCB's.
What is the format of EntryID Signed 32 bit integer.
What is the buffer size for each BRCB or how many Buffer size = 50000 bytes.
reports can be buffered
Pre-configured RCB attributes that cannot be changed DatSet attributes are always fixed
online when RptEna = FALSE
Additional Items:
BufTm=0 behaviour When BufTm=0 multiple data can be placed in one
report if changes of these data have been detected at
the same time, it means during the same scan period.
The scan period for analogues is 500 miliseconds.
Integrity period Configurable >= 500 miliseconds
EntryID EntryID is incremented only if the EntryID bit is set in
OptFlds.
A valid EntryID that can be written by a client should be
equal or smaller than the EntryID in BRCB. This is
because the client should only request retransmission
of reports that had already been sent.
GI reports Can be triggered independently from the GI bit in
TrgOps
Behaviour at buffer overflow When buffer overflow occurs all reports generated after
buffer overflow has the BufOvfl flag set.
To stop sending reports with the BufOvfl flag, the client
should disable BRCB and clear the BufOvfl flag by
setting PurgeBuf=TRUE.
Sending of already buffered reports after enabling BRCB All reports that have been already buffered, after
setting the RptEna=TRUE are sent in chronological
order, e.g. the oldest reports are sent first.

Multi client access to BRCB It is possible to access and configure the same BRCB
from different clients, however, it is recommended that
each BRCB be accessed and configured by only one
client.
Note the following restriction: The first client to enable a
BRCB establishes the “minimum MMS PDU size”
required for this BRCB. This BRCB can then be enabled
by any client which has the MMS PDU size at least as
big as the established “minimum MMS PDU size” for that
BRCB.
This restriction is required since the initial use may have
left buffered reports in the BRCB. The “minimum MMS
PDU size” was used for segmentation of the reports. If a
client enable the BRCB with a smaller “minimum MMS
PDU size”, the reports stored in a buffer cannot be sent
to this client due to their larger size.
5 PIXIT for Generic substation events model
GOOSE
Note about internal variable “Remote Device” and GOOSE For each incoming GOOSE in the device there is an
validity checks associated internal variable called “Remote Device”. This
variable can have value ONLINE or OFFLINE.
Value ONLINE means that the incoming GOOSE messages
from the configured sender have been positively
validated by MAC destination, gocbRef, datSet and goID.
Value OFFLINE means that there are no GOOSE messages
from configured sender or that incoming GOOSE
messages from this sender have been invalidated by MAC
destination or gocbRef or datSet or goID.
The variable “Remote Device” can have value ONLINE (it
has been validated by MAC destination, gocbRef, datSet
and goID) but if the GOOSE message has been invalidated
by confRev or ndsCom or numDatSetEntries or allData or
if the order of data set elements is not correct then the
incoming data from GOOSE message is ignored.

What elements of a subscribed GOOSE header are N source MAC address

checked to decide the message is valid and the allData Y destination MAC address (Should be multicast, if it is not
values are accepted? If yes, describe the conditions. multicast the status of the internal variable “Remote
Device” goes to OFFLINE)
N VLAN id
N VLAN priority
Y Ethertype = 0x88B8
N APPID
Y gocbRef (should match setting, if not the status of the
internal variable “Remote Device” goes to OFFLINE.)
N timeAllowedtoLive
Y datSet (should match setting, if not the status of the
internal variable “Remote Device” goes to OFFLINE)
Y goID (should match setting, if not the status of then
internal variable “Remote Device” goes to OFFLINE)
Nt
N stNum
N sqNum
N test
Y confRev (should match setting, if not the status of the
internal variable “Remote Device” is not affected but the
incoming data from GOOSE message is ignored)
Y ndsCom (should have value FALSE, if it has value TRUE
the status of the internal variable “Remote Device” is not
affected but the incoming data from GOOSE message is
ignored)
Y numDatSetEntries (should match expected number of
data set entries, if not the status of the internal variable
“Remote Device” is not affected but the incoming data
from GOOSE message is ignored)
Y allData (should match expected data set, if not the
status of the internal variable “Remote Device” is not
affected but the incoming data from GOOSE message is
ignored)
What is the behaviour when one subscribed GOOSE A single “missing” or syntactically incorrect GOOSE
message isn’t received or syntactically incorrect (missing message is ignored.
GOOSE)
What is the behaviour when one subscribed GOOSE A single late GOOSE message does change the status of
message exceeds the previous time Allowed to Live (TAL) the internal variable “Remote Device” to OFFLINE.
What is the behaviour when a subscribed GOOSE Sequence number is ignored the message is accepted.
message is out-of-order
What is the behaviour when a subscribed GOOSE N Sequence number is ignored the message is accepted.
message is duplicated
Additional Items:
Maximum number of GOOSE messages that can be sent 4
Maximum number of GOOSE messages that can be 8
received
Interpretation of quality at subscriber side Quality is not required to be in the data set. If configured
in data set and received its value is by default ignored.
However it is possibe to map quality to Bistring13 object
at subscriber side and then use any of its 13 bits.
Restrictions on Data Set elements for transmission GOOSE Data Set elements for transmission GOOSE have to be
Data Attributes (leaf objects). The exception to this rule is
FixedGOOSE (only use between GE devices).

GSSE
What elements of a subscribed GSSE header are checked N source MAC address
to decide the message is valid and the allData values are Y destination MAC address
accepted? If yes, describe the conditions. For example: Y timeAllowedtoLive
Destination MAC address = as multicast Y SendingIED
SendingIED = valid reference, not NULL Nt
timeAllowedtoLive > 0 N stNum
numDatSetEntries = matches with number of datSet N sqNum
members & allData members Y numDatSetEntries
What is the behaviour when one subscribed GSSE A single “missing” GSSE message is ignored.
message isn’t received or syntactically incorrect (missing
GSSE)
What is the behaviour when one subscribed GSSE It signals this GSSE as “offline”.
message exceeds the previous time Allowed to Live (TAL)
What is the behaviour when a subscribed GSSE message Sequence number is ignored.
is out-of-order
What is the behaviour when a subscribed GSSE message Sequence number is ignored.
is duplicated
6 PIXIT for Control model

What control modes are supported: Y status-only
Y direct-with-normal-security
Y sbo-with-normal-security
Y direct-with-enhanced-security
Y sbo-with-enhanced-security
Note: control models:

-sbo-with-normal-security
-direct-with-enhanced-security
-sbo-with-enhanced-security
are available only for Pos attribute in logical nodes XCBR
and CSWI
Is Time activated operate (operTm) supported N
What is the behaviour of the DUT when the test attribute DUT ignores the test value and executes the command as
is set in the SelectWithValue and/or Operate request usual
What are the conditions for the time (T) attribute in the DUT ignores the test value and executes the command as
SelectWithValue and/or Operate request usual.
Is “operate-many” supported N
Is pulse configuration supported N
What check conditions are supported N synchrocheck
N interlock-check

Description(cont.) Value / Clarification(cont.)

What service error types are supported Y instance-not-available
Y instance-in-use
Y access-violation
Y access-not-allowed-in-current-state
Y parameter-value-inappropriate
Y parameter-value-inconsistent
Y class-not-supported
Y instance-locked-by-other-client
Y control-must-be-selected
Y type-conflict
Y failed-due-to-communications-constraint
Y failed-due-to-server-constraint
What additional cause diagnosis are supported N Unknown
Y Not-supported
N Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
N Select-failed
Y Invalid-position
Y Position-reached
N Parameter-change-in-execution
N Step-limit
N Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-process
N Blocked-by-interlocking
N Blocked-by-synchrocheck
Y Command-already-in-execution
N Blocked-by-health
N 1-of-n-control
N Abortion-by-cancel
Y Time-limit-over
N Abortion-by-trip
Y Object-not-selected
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Not applicable.
SelectWithValue request?
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Operate Not applicable.
request?
Which origin categories are supported? What happens if orCat values are checked only for XCBR1$CO$Pos. The
the orCat is not supported? permision to do the operation depends on the position of
LOCAL/REMOTE switch on the front panel of relay and also
on the orCat value received. The following table shows the
behaviour. “Yes” means operation is permitted “No” means
operation is not permitted.
OrCat
2,3,5,6
When invalid orCat is received or LOCAL/REMOTE switch is
in LOCAL position then DUT responds with negative value
OBJECT-ACCESS-DENIED. Additionally in case of Direct
Control with Enhanced Scurity or SBO with Enhanced
Scurity when invalid orCat is received the DUT sends
InformationReport with AddCause = not-supported.
Does the IED accept an select/operate with the same Select: Y
ctlVal as the current status value? Operate : N
Does the IED accept a select/operate on the same control Select: N
object from 2 different clients at the same time? Operate : N for SBO, SBO Enhanced
Operate: Y for Direct-Control and Direct-Control Enhanced.
However in case of Direct-Control with Enhanced Security
as long as the control object has not returned to state
Ready the Operate request from the second client is
rejected.

Description(cont.) Value / Clarification(cont.)

Additional Items:
The following control models are available only for Pos sbo-with-normal-security
controllable attribute of XCBR LN. For the rest of direct-with-enhanced-security
controllable objects only direct-with-normal-security sbo-with-enhanced-security
model is permitted.
Behaviour of DUT in case of control models direct-with- After reception of “Operate” service the DUT checks
enhanced-security or sbo-with-enhanced-security whether the operation has been succesfully done. The
timeout DUT internally checks for operation realisation is
fixed at 30 seconds. If this timeout elapses and the
operation has not been finished the DUT sends negative
Command Termination service to the client. If the
operation finishes within the 30 seconds timeout the DUT
sends positive Command Termination service to the client.
In case of direct-with-enhanced-security when the DUT is
waiting for operation result new “Operate” requests from
any client are rejected until the pending operation finilized
sucessfully or the 30 seconds timeout elapses.
7 PIXIT for Time and time synchronisation model

What quality bits are supported N LeapSecondsKnown
Y ClockFailure
Y ClockNotSynchronized
What is the behaviour when the time synchronization Internal clock is used.
signal/messages are lost
When is the quality bit "Clock failure" set? It is set when SNTP packet with LI field (Leap Indicator)
with both bits set to ON is received.
When is the quality bit "Clock not synchronised” set? It is set when the communication is lost with the time
server. The timeout for setting this bit is 1 minute for
unicast mode, 5 minutes for anycast mode and up to 18
minutes for broadcast mode.
After startup the device has not set this quality bit even if
the time server is not present or not working. The bit is set
when the corresponding timeout elapses.
8 PIXIT for File transfer model

What is structure of files and directories? The main directory for files is “/LD/XXXLD/” where XXXLD
is the Logical Device name.
COMTRADE files are located in “/LD/XXXLD/COMTRADE/”
directory. All other files are in “/LD/XXXLD/” directory.
The device retrieves the content and/or definition of files
when the client’s request contains the filename with full
path or only the filename withouth path. Relative paths
like "/XXXLD/file1" or "COMTRADE/file1" are not allowed
and are returned by the server with error code “file-non-
existing".

Reference documentation: PIXIT for 650 family of relays v1_6 firm7_20.

• PIXIT for Association Model
• PIXIT for Server model
• PIXIT for Dataset model
• PIXIT for Reporting model
• PIXIT for Generic substation events model
• PIXIT for Control model
• PIXIT for Time and time synchronisation model
• PIXIT for File transfer model
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850 interface in 650
family of relays.
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test according to IEC 61850-10.
Contents of this document: Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC
61850-10.

Maximum number of clients that can set-up an association 5
simultaneously
TCP_KEEPALIVE value. The recommended range is 1..20s 5 seconds but if no application message is
detected within the As3 value, the device
closes the connection.
Lost connection detection time 120 seconds (Configurable)
Authentication is not supported yet
What association parameters are necessary for successful Transport selector Y
association Session selector Y
Presentation selector Y
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
If association parameters are necessary for association, describe Transport selector 0001
the correct values e.g. Session selector 0001
Presentation selector 00000001
AP Title NA
AE Qualifier NA
What is the maximum and minimum MMS PDU size Max MMS PDU size 120000
Min MMS PDU size32000.
What is the maximum start up time after a power supply interrupt 90 seconds


Which analogue value (MX) quality bits are supported (can be set by Validity:
server) Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N Overflow
Y OutofRange
Y BadReference
N Oscillatory
Y Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
N Process
N Substituted
N Test
N OperatorBlocked
Which status value (ST) quality bits are supported (can be set by Validity:
server) Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N BadReference
Y Oscillatory
Y Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
Y Process
Y Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
What is the maximum number of data object references in one Deprecated
What is the maximum number of data object references in one Deprecated
Which Mode values are supported 1 On Y
[On-]Blocked N
Test N
Test/Blocked N
Off N
1. IEC 61850-6:2009 clause 9.5.6 states that if only a subrange of the enumeration value set is supported,
this shall be indicated within an ICD file by an enumeration type, where the unsupported values are missing


What is the maximum number of data elements in one data set 576
(compare ICD setting)
How many persistent data sets can be created by one or more NOT SUPPORTED
clients
(this number includes predefined datasets)
How many non-persistent data sets can be created by one or more NOT SUPPORTED
clients
4 PIXIT for Substitution model

Are substituted values stored in volatile memory NOT SUPPORTED
5 PIXIT for Setting group control model

What is the number of supported setting groups for each logical 3 groups for “PRO” logical device 3
device
What is the effect of when and how the non-volatile storage is The server saves to non-volatile storage 25
updated seconds after confirmation.
(compare IEC 61850-8-1 $16.2.4)
Can multiple clients edit the same setting group No
What happens if the association is lost while editing a setting group Lost Permission and EditSG = 0
Is EditSG value 0 allowed Yes
When ResvTms is not present how long is an edit setting group While EditSG > 0
locked

The supported trigger conditions are integrity Y
(compare PICS) data change Y
quality change Y
data update N
The supported optional fields are sequence-number Y
report-time-stamp Y
data-set-name Y
data-reference Y
buffer-overflow Y
entryID Y
conf-rev Y
segmentation Y
Can the server send segmented reports Y

Mechanism on second internal data change notification of the Send report immediately
same analogue data value within buffer period (Compare IEC
61850-7-2 $14.2.2.9)
Multi client URCB approach Each URCB is visible to all clients
(compare IEC 61850-7-2:2003 $14.2.1)
What is the format of EntryID Deprecated
What is the buffer size for each BRCB or how many reports can be Buffer size = 50000 Bytes
buffered
Pre-configured RCB attributes that are dynamic, compare SCL Deprecated
report settings
May the reported data set contain:
- structured data objects Y
- data attributes Y (timestamp attributes are not supported)
What is the scan cycle for binary events Event Driven
Is this fixed, configurable Fixed
Does the device support to pre-assign a RCB to a specific client in N
the SCL
After restart of the server is the value of ConfRev restored from the Restored from original configuration
original configuration or retained prior to restart
<additional items>
7 PIXIT for Logging model

What is the default value of LogEna NOT SUPPORTED
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.2.1, the default value should be
FALSE)
What is the format of EntryID Deprecated
Are there are multiple Log Control Blocks that specify the NOT SUPPORTED
Journaling of the same MMS NamedVariable and TrgOps and the
Event Condition
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.3.2)
Pre-configured LCB attributes that cannot be changed online NOT SUPPORTED

8 PIXIT for GOOSE publish model

Can the test (Ed1) / simulation (Ed2) flag in the published GOOSE be N
set
What is the behaviour when the GOOSE publish configuration is DUT keeps GoEna=F.
incorrect Configuration tool does not allow wrong
configuration to be uploaded into device. E.g.:
empty dataset.
Published FCD supported common data classes are SPS, INS, ENS, ACT, ACD, MV, CMV, SAV, WYE,
DEL, SEQ, INC, ENC, SPC, DPC, INC, ENC. (Only
the elements with FC=ST or MX are published).
What is the slow retransmission time Configured by SCL or GoCB MaxTime
Is it fixed or configurable
What is the fastest retransmission time Fixed. MinTime = 5 ms
Can the GOOSE publish be turned on / off by using Y
SetGoCBValues(GoEna)
What is the initial GOOSE sqNum after restart sqNum = 1
May the GOOSE data set contain:
- structured data objects (FCD) Y
- timestamp data attributes Y (timestamp attributes are not supported)
How is the retransmission curve after a change. sqNum = 0 New change
sqNum = 1 -> 5ms later with TAL = 1000
sqNum = 4 -> 1000ms later with TAL = Update
time* multipled by 4
sqNum = 5 -> Update time* later with TAL =
Update time* multipled by 4
sqNum = 6-> Update time* later with TAL =
sqNum = 7 ……..
………...
………….
*Update time is configured in the ICT

9 PIXIT for GOOSE subscribe model

What elements of a subscribed GOOSE header are checked to Y destination MAC address
decide the message is valid and the allData values are accepted? Y APPID
If yes, describe the conditions. N gocbRef
Notes: Y timeAllowedtoLive
· the VLAN tag may be removed by a ethernet switch and N datSet
shall not be checked Y goID
· the simulation flag shall always be checked (Ed2) N t
· the ndsCom shall always be checked (Ed2) N stNum
N sqNum
Y simulation / test
N confRev
Y ndsCom
Y numDatSetEntries
When is a subscribed GOOSE marked as lost message does not arrive after TAL
(TAL = time allowed to live value from the last received GOOSE
message)
What is the behaviour when one or more subscribed GOOSE Message is ignored, but when the next correct
messages isn’t received or syntactically incorrect (missing GOOSE) message is received, it proceeds as normal.
What is the behaviour when a subscribed GOOSE message is out- Message proceeds
of-order
What is the behaviour when a subscribed GOOSE message is Message is ignored
duplicated
Does the device subscribe to GOOSE messages with/without the Y, with the VLAN tag
VLAN tag Y, without the VLAN tag
May the GOOSE data set contain:
- timestamp data attributes N
Subscribed FCD supported common data classes are DUT can receive all kinds of data but only
digitals can be mapped.
Are subscribed GOOSE with test=T (Ed1) / simulation=T (Ed2) N
accepted in test/simulation mode
What is the behaviour when a subscribed GOOSE message with The message is ignored. The mechanism
TAL = 0 is received by the subscriber. applies where the new GOOSE message is not
received within a TAL.
What is the behaviour when a subscribed GOOSE message hasn’t The message is ignored. The mechanism
the expected data structure. applies where the new GOOSE message is not

What control models are supported Deprecated
(compare PICS)
Is the control model fixed, configurable and/or dynamic Configurable & Dynamic
Is TimeActivatedOperate supported (compare PICS or SCL) Deprecated
Is “operate-many” supported (compare sboClass) Deprecated
Will the DUT activate the control output when the test attribute is set N
in the SelectWithValue and/or Operate request (when N test
procedure Ctl2 is applicable)

What are the conditions for the time (T) attribute in the SelectWithValue Deprecated
and/or Operate request
Is pulse configuration supported (compare pulseConfig) Deprecated
What is the behaviour of the DUT when the check conditions are set N synchrocheck
N interlock-check
DUT ignores the check value and always
perform the check
Is this behaviour fixed, configurable, online changeable

Which additional cause diagnosis are supported Y Unknown
Y Not-supported
Y Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
N Select-failed
Y Invalid-position
Y Position-reached
N Step-limit
Y Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-health
N 1-of-n-control
Y Time-limit-over
N Abortion-by-trip
Edition 1 specif values:
N Parameter-change-in-
execution
Edition 2 specific values:
Y Object-already-selected
N No-access-authority
N Ended-with-overshoot
N Abortion-due-to-deviation
N Abortion-by-communication-loss
N Blocked-by-command
N None
Y Inconsistent-parameters
Y Locked-by-other-client
N Parameter-change-in-
execution
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with SelectWithValue request Device in local mode
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Select request
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Operate request DOns: Sending T=1
SBOns: Sending T=1
DOes: Sending T=1
SBOes: Sending T=1

Which origin categories are supported / accepted N bay-control

Y station-control
Y remote-control
N automatic-bay
Y automatic-station
Y automatic-remote
N maintenance
N process
What happens if the orCat value is not supported or invalid DOns: control is rejected
(Oper- ObjectAccessDenied).
SBOns: control is rejected (Oper-
ObjectAccessDenied).
DOes: control is rejected
(Oper- ServiceError,
SBOes: control is rejected (SBOw-
ServiceError, ObjectAccessDenied).
Does the IED accept a SelectWithValue / Operate with the same control DOns: N
value as the current status value SBOns: N
DOes: N
Is this behaviour configurable SBOes: N
Configurable N
Does the IED accept a select/operate on the same control object from 2 DOns: N
different clients at the same time SBOns: N
DOes: N
SBOes: N
Does the IED accept a Select/SelectWithValue from the same client SBOns: N
when the control object is already selected (Tissue #334) SBOes: N
Is for SBOes the internal validation performed during the SelectWithValue and Operate
SelectWithValue and/or Operate step
Can a control operation be blocked by Mod=Off or [On-]Blocked Deprecated
(Compare PIXIT-Sr5)
Does the IED support local / remote operation Y (Only for XCBR)
Does the IED send an InformationReport with LastApplError as part of SBOns: N
the Operate response- for control with normal security DOns: N
How to force a “parameter-change-in-execution” SBOns:Not Applicable
SBOes:Not Applicable
11 PIXIT for Time synchronisation model

What time quality bits are supported (may be set by the IED) Y LeapSecondsKnown
N ClockFailure
Y ClockNotSynchronized.
Describe the behaviour when the time server(s) ceases to On one time server: An event is generated
respond On all time servers: An event is generated
60 seconds
What is the time server lost detection time

How long does it take to take over the new time from time server 2 seconds
When is the time quality bit “ClockFailure” set Never

When is the time quality bit “Clock not Synchronized” set 60 seconds after the time server(s) ceases to
respond.
Is the timestamp of a binary event adjusted to the configured Deprecated
scan cycle
Does the device support time zone and daylight saving Y
Which attributes of the SNTP response packet are validated Y Leap indicator not equal to 3
Y Mode is equal to SERVER
N OriginateTimestamp is equal to value
sent by the SNTP client as Transmit
Timestamp
Y RX/TX timestamp fields are checked for
reasonableness
Y SNTP version 3 and/or 4
N other (describe)
Do the COMTRADE files have local time or UTC time and is this Local
configurable N
<additional items>

What is structure of files and directories
Where are the COMTRADE files stored /COMTRADE
Are comtrade files zipped and what files are included in each zip N
file
Directory names are separated from the file name by “/”
The maximum file name size including path (recommended 64 255 chars
chars)
Are directory/file name case sensitive Case sensitive
Maximum file size for SetFile
Is the requested file path included in the MMS fileDirectory Y
respond file name
Is the wild char supported MMS fileDirectory request No
Is it allowed that 2 clients get a file at the same time Y same file
Y different files
Which files can be deleted
13 PIXIT for Service tracking model

Which ACSI services are tracked by LTRK.GenTrk Not Applicable

Reference documentation: PIXIT For F650 relay V1_10 firm7_52.
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850 interface in:
F650 Bay Controller with firmware version 7.52
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test according to IEC 61850-10. The PIXIT
entries contain information which is not available in the PICS, MICS, TICS documents or SCL file.
Each table specifies the PIXIT for applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC 61850-10. The "Ed" column indicates if
the entry is applicable for IEC 61850 Edition 1 and/or Edition 2.
ID Ed Description Value / Clarification

As1 1 Maximum number of clients that can set-up an association 5
simultaneously
As2 1, 2 TCP_KEEPALIVE value. The recommended range is 1..20s 5 seconds but if no application message is
detected within the As3 value, the device
closes the connection.
As3 1, 2 Lost connection detection time 120 seconds (Configurable)
As4 - Authentication is not supported yet
As5 1, 2 What association parameters are necessary for successful Transport selector Y
association Session selector Y
Presentation selector Y
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
As6 1, 2 If association parameters are necessary for association, describe Transport selector 0001
the correct values e.g. Session selector 0001
Presentation selector 00000001
AP Title NA
AE Qualifier NA
As7 1, 2 What is the maximum and minimum MMS PDU size Max MMS PDU size 120000
Min MMS PDU size 7000.
As8 1, 2 What is the maximum start up time after a power supply interrupt 90 seconds


Sr1 1, 2 Which analogue value (MX) quality bits are supported (can be set by Validity:
server) Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N Overflow
Y OutofRange
Y BadReference
N Oscillatory
Y Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
N Process
N Substituted
N Test
N OperatorBlocked
Sr2 1, 2 Which status value (ST) quality bits are supported (can be set by Validity:
server) Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N BadReference
Y Oscillatory
Y Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
Y Process
Y Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
Sr3 - What is the maximum number of data object references in one Deprecated
Sr4 - What is the maximum number of data object references in one Deprecated
Sr5 1 Which Mode values are supported 1 On Y
[On-]Blocked N
Test N
Test/Blocked N
Off N
1. IEC 61850-6:2009 clause 9.5.6 states that if only a subrange of the enumeration value set is supported, this shall be
indicated within an ICD file by an enumeration type, where the unsupported values are missing


Ds1 1 What is the maximum number of data elements in one data set 576
(compare ICD setting)
Ds2 1 How many persistent data sets can be created by one or more NOT SUPPORTED
clients
(this number includes predefined datasets)
Ds3 1 How many non-persistent data sets can be created by one or more NOT SUPPORTED
clients
4 PIXIT for Substitution model

Sb1 1 Are substituted values stored in volatile memory NOT SUPPORTED
5 PIXIT for Setting group control model

Sg1 What is the number of supported setting groups for each logical 6 groups for “PRO” logical device 3
device
Sg2 What is the effect of when and how the non-volatile storage is The server saves to non-volatile storage 25
updated seconds after confirmation.
(compare IEC 61850-8-1 $16.2.4)
Sg3 Can multiple clients edit the same setting group No
Sg4 What happens if the association is lost while editing a setting group Lost Permission and EditSG = 0
Sg5 Is EditSG value 0 allowed Yes
Sg6 When ResvTms is not present how long is an edit setting group While EditSG > 0
locked

Rp1 1 The supported trigger conditions are integrity Y
(compare PICS) data change Y
quality change Y
data update N
Rp2 1 The supported optional fields are sequence-number Y
report-time-stamp Y
data-set-name Y
data-reference Y
buffer-overflow Y
entryID Y
conf-rev Y
segmentation Y
Rp3 1, 2 Can the server send segmented reports Y

Rp4 1, 2 Mechanism on second internal data change notification of the Send report immediately
same analogue data value within buffer period (Compare IEC
61850-7-2 $14.2.2.9)
Rp5 1 Multi client URCB approach Each URCB is visible to all clients
(compare IEC 61850-7-2:2003 $14.2.1)
Rp6 - What is the format of EntryID Deprecated
Rp7 1, 2 What is the buffer size for each BRCB or how many reports can be Buffer size = 50000 Bytes
buffered
Rp8 - Pre-configured RCB attributes that are dynamic, compare SCL Deprecated
report settings
Rp9 1 May the reported data set contain:
- structured data objects Y
- data attributes Y (timestamp attributes are not supported)
Rp10 1, 2 What is the scan cycle for binary events Event Driven
Is this fixed, configurable Fixed
Rp11 1 Does the device support to pre-assign a RCB to a specific client in N
the SCL
Rp12 2 After restart of the server is the value of ConfRev restored from the Restored from original configuration
original configuration or retained prior to restart
<additional items>
7 PIXIT for Logging model

Lg1 1, 2 What is the default value of LogEna NOT SUPPORTED
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.2.1, the default value should be
FALSE)
Lg2 - What is the format of EntryID Deprecated
Lg3 1, 2 Are there are multiple Log Control Blocks that specify the NOT SUPPORTED
Journaling of the same MMS NamedVariable and TrgOps and the
Event Condition
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.3.2)
Lg4 1 Pre-configured LCB attributes that cannot be changed online NOT SUPPORTED
8 PIXIT for GOOSE publish model

Gp1 1, 2 Can the test (Ed1) / simulation (Ed2) flag in the published GOOSE be N
set
Gp2 1 What is the behaviour when the GOOSE publish configuration is DUT keeps GoEna=F.
incorrect Configuration tool does not allow wrong
configuration to be uploaded into device. E.g.:
empty dataset.
Gp3 1, 2 Published FCD supported common data classes are SPS, INS, ENS, ACT, ACD, MV, CMV, SAV, WYE,
DEL, SEQ, INC, ENC, SPC, DPC, INC, ENC. (Only
the elements with FC=ST or MX are published).
Gp4 1, 2 What is the slow retransmission time Configured by SCL or GoCB MaxTime
Gp5 1, 2 What is the fastest retransmission time Fixed. MinTime = 5 ms
Gp6 - Can the GOOSE publish be turned on / off by using Y
SetGoCBValues(GoEna)

Gp7 1, 2 What is the initial GOOSE sqNum after restart sqNum = 1

Gp8 1 May the GOOSE data set contain:
- timestamp data attributes Y (timestamp attributes are not supported)
Gp9 How is the retransmission curve after a change. sqNum = 0 New change
sqNum = 4 -> 1000ms later with TAL = Update
time* multipled by 4
sqNum = 5 -> Update time* later with TAL =
sqNum = 6-> Update time* later with TAL =
sqNum = 7 ……..
………...
………….
*Update time is configured in the ICT
9 PIXIT for GOOSE subscribe model

Gs1 1, 2 What elements of a subscribed GOOSE header are checked to Y destination MAC address
decide the message is valid and the allData values are accepted? Y APPID
If yes, describe the conditions. N gocbRef
Notes: Y timeAllowedtoLive
· the VLAN tag may be removed by a ethernet switch and N datSet
shall not be checked Y goID
· the simulation flag shall always be checked (Ed2) N t
· the ndsCom shall always be checked (Ed2) N stNum
N sqNum
Y simulation / test
N confRev
Y ndsCom
Y numDatSetEntries
Gs2 1, 2 When is a subscribed GOOSE marked as lost message does not arrive after TAL
(TAL = time allowed to live value from the last received GOOSE
message)
Gs3 1, 2 What is the behaviour when one or more subscribed GOOSE Message is ignored, but when the next correct
messages isn’t received or syntactically incorrect (missing GOOSE) message is received, it proceeds as normal.
Gs4 1, 2 What is the behaviour when a subscribed GOOSE message is out- Message proceeds
of-order
Gs5 1, 2 What is the behaviour when a subscribed GOOSE message is Message is ignored
duplicated
Gs6 1 Does the device subscribe to GOOSE messages with/without the Y, with the VLAN tag
VLAN tag Y, without the VLAN tag
Gs7 1 May the GOOSE data set contain:
- timestamp data attributes N
Gs8 1, 2 Subscribed FCD supported common data classes are DUT can receive all kinds of data but only
digitals can be mapped.

Gs9 1, 2 Are subscribed GOOSE with test=T (Ed1) / simulation=T (Ed2) N

accepted in test/simulation mode
Gs10 2 What is the behaviour when a subscribed GOOSE message with The message is ignored. The mechanism
TAL = 0 is received by the subscriber. applies where the new GOOSE message is not
Gs11 2 What is the behaviour when a subscribed GOOSE message hasn’t The message is ignored. The mechanism
the expected data structure. applies where the new GOOSE message is not

Ct1 - What control models are supported Deprecated
(compare PICS)
Ct2 1, 2 Is the control model fixed, configurable and/or dynamic Configurable & Dynamic
Ct3 - Is TimeActivatedOperate supported (compare PICS or SCL) Deprecated
Ct4 - Is “operate-many” supported (compare sboClass) Deprecated
Ct5 1 Will the DUT activate the control output when the test attribute is set N
in the SelectWithValue and/or Operate request (when N test
procedure Ctl2 is applicable)
Ct6 - What are the conditions for the time (T) attribute in the SelectWithValue Deprecated
and/or Operate request
Ct7 - Is pulse configuration supported (compare pulseConfig) Deprecated
Ct8 1, 2 What is the behaviour of the DUT when the check conditions are set N synchrocheck
N interlock-check
DUT ignores the check value and always
perform the check
Is this behaviour fixed, configurable, online changeable

Ct9 1, 2 Which additional cause diagnosis are supported Y Unknown

Y Not-supported
Y Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
N Select-failed
Y Invalid-position
Y Position-reached
N Step-limit
N Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-health
N 1-of-n-control
Y Time-limit-over
N Abortion-by-trip
Y Object-already-selected
N No-access-authority
N Ended-with-overshoot
N Abortion-due-to-deviation
N Abortion-by-communication-loss
N Blocked-by-command
N None
Y Inconsistent-parameters
Y Locked-by-other-client
Ct10 1, 2 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with SelectWithValue request Device in local mode
Ct11 1, 2 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Select request
Ct12 1, 2 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Operate request DOns: Sending T=1
SBOns: Sending T=1
DOes: Sending T=1
SBOes: Sending T=1
Ct13 1, 2 Which origin categories are supported / accepted N bay-control
Y station-control
Y remote-control
N automatic-bay
Y automatic-station
Y automatic-remote
N maintenance
N process
Ct14 1, 2 What happens if the orCat value is not supported or invalid DOns: control is rejected (Oper-
SBOns: control is rejected (Oper-
DOes: control is rejected (Oper-
SBOes: control is rejected (SBOw-

Ct15 1, 2 Does the IED accept a SelectWithValue / Operate with the same control DOns: N
value as the current status value SBOns: N
DOes: N
Is this behaviour configurable SBOes: N
Configurable N
Ct16 1, 2 Does the IED accept a select/operate on the same control object from 2 DOns: N
different clients at the same time SBOns: N
DOes: N
SBOes: N
Ct17 1 Does the IED accept a Select/SelectWithValue from the same client SBOns: N
when the control object is already selected (Tissue #334) SBOes: N
Ct18 1, 2 Is for SBOes the internal validation performed during the SelectWithValue and Operate
SelectWithValue and/or Operate step
Ct19 - Can a control operation be blocked by Mod=Off or [On-]Blocked Deprecated
(Compare PIXIT-Sr5)
Ct20 1, 2 Does the IED support local / remote operation Y (Only for XCBR)
Ct21 1, 2 Does the IED send an InformationReport with LastApplError as part of SBOns: N
the Operate response- for control with normal security DOns: N
Ct22 2 How to force a “parameter-change-in-execution” SBOns:Not Applicable
SBOes:Not Applicable
Ct23 1, 2 How many SBOns/SBOes control objects be selected at the same time? SBOns: n = "1"
DOns: n = "1"
Ct24 1, 2 Does the DUT support any operate timeout >0 Y
Ct25 1, 2 When CDC=DPC is supported, is it possible to have DPC (Controllable N
Double Point) go to the intermediate state? (00)
11 PIXIT for Time synchronisation model

Tm1 1, 2 What time quality bits are supported (may be set by the IED) Y LeapSecondsKnown
N ClockFailure
Y ClockNotSynchronized.
Tm2 1, 2 Describe the behaviour when the time server(s) ceases to On one time server: An event is generated
respond On all time servers: An event is generated
180 seconds
What is the time server lost detection time

Tm3 1, 2 How long does it take to take over the new time from time server 2 seconds
Tm4 1, 2 When is the time quality bit “ClockFailure” set Never
Tm5 1, 2 When is the time quality bit “Clock not Synchronized” set 60 seconds after the time server(s) ceases to
respond.
Tm6 - Is the timestamp of a binary event adjusted to the configured Deprecated
scan cycle
Tm7 1 Does the device support time zone and daylight saving Y
Tm8 1, 2 Which attributes of the SNTP response packet are validated Y Leap indicator not equal to 3
Y Mode is equal to SERVER
N OriginateTimestamp is equal to value
sent by the SNTP client as Transmit
Timestamp
Y RX/TX timestamp fields are checked for
reasonableness
Y SNTP version 3 and/or 4
N other (describe)

Tm9 1, 2 Do the COMTRADE files have local time or UTC time and is this Local
configurable N
<additional items>

Ft1 1 What is structure of files and directories
Where are the COMTRADE files stored /COMTRADE
Are comtrade files zipped and what files are included in each zip N
file
Ft2 1, 2 Directory names are separated from the file name by “/”
Ft3 1 The maximum file name size including path (recommended 64 255 chars
chars)
Ft4 1, 2 Are directory/file name case sensitive Case sensitive
Ft5 1, 2 Maximum file size for SetFile Not applicable
Ft6 1 Is the requested file path included in the MMS fileDirectory Y
respond file name
Ft7 1 Is the wild char supported MMS fileDirectory request No
Ft8 1, 2 Is it allowed that 2 clients get a file at the same time Y same file
Y different files
Ft9 1, 2 Which files can be deleted Not applicable
13 PIXIT for Service tracking model

Tr1 2 Which ACSI services are tracked by LTRK.GenTrk Not Applicable

CHAPTER 7: IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7.4 IEC 61850 FUNCTIONALITY
7.4 IEC 61850 FUNCTIONALITY

7.4.1 Client Connections
The 650 Family relay supports up to five IEC61850 concurrent client connections, i.e a maximum of 5 different IEC 61850
clients can connect to it
7.4.2 GOOSES
650 relays support transmission and reception of configurable IEC 61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE). If GOOSES communications want to be enable, Remote comms setting must be set to GOOSE in Enervista 650
Setup at Setpoint > Input/Output > Remote Comms
Configurable GOOSE is recommended for implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between 650 relays and
devices from other manufacturers.
7.4.2.1 TRANSMISSION GOOSES

A maximum of four different transmission GOOSE applications are supported. Data Sets for transmissions GOOSES can
have a maximum of 128 elements and can be leaf elements (Data Attributes), or complex structures (Data Objects).
7.4.2.2 RECEPTION GOOSES

650 relays can be subscribed up to 24 different remote devices. A maximum of 32 Remote Inputs (digital signals), 32
Remote Goose Digital inputs and 16 Remote Goose Analog Inputs can be configured to be subscribed to.
The elements of Data Sets for reception GOOSEs can be of any types supported in IEC 61850 standard and can be both
leaf elements (Data Attributes) and compelx structures (Data Objects). However F650 relay can map to its internal
variables incoming data of type Boolean, Float, Integer and any of the bits from Bitstring data type.
7.4.3 IEC 61850 Server

The IEC 61850 Server (i.e., 650 relay) reports data to the IEC 61850 Client, such as Local HMI, RTU and Gateway with the
information of logical device, data sets, data control block, logical nodes and their data attributes.
7.4.3.1 LOGICAL DEVICES AND REPORTS

Supported buffered and un-buffered report, the report triggers are shown in the following Supported Triggers list.
Supported Triggers List:
• Data-Change
• Quality-Change
• Integrity
• General Interrogation
Supported buffered and un-buffered report option fields are shown in the following Field list.
Field List:
• Sequence number
• Report time stamp
• Reason-for-inclusion
• Dataset-name
• Data-reference
• Buffer-overflow (Buffered reports only)

7.5 IEC 61850 STATUS CHAPTER 7: IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
• Entry id (Buffered reports only)

• Conf- revision
Report control block configuration settings are modified from IEC61850 configurator writing directly in a CID file. There is
no Modbus register assigned to those. The datasets for reports are fully configurable with CDCs from any Logical Node.
The Description field in the LN is fixed text and it cannot be updated from the Modbus settings
By default,
• if Unbuffered report is selected, 5 Unbuffered Report Control Blocks are created. This figure can be modified from 1 to
5.
• If Buffered report is selected, 1 Unbuffered Report Control Block is created. This figure can be modified from 1 to 5.
7.5 IEC 61850 Status

7.5.1 GOOSES Status
Different status information related with GOOSE transmission/reception process that can be checked through Enervista
650 Setup:
In Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Inputs > Remote GOOSE Digital Inputs:
Rem GOOSE Dig Inp X - Provides status of Remote Goose Digital input X that relay is subscribed to. The green LED lights up
if Remote GOOSE Digital Input was set to 1 last time it was received and it turns off if the last Remote GOOSE Digital Input
was set to 0.
There is a maximum of 32 Remote GOOSE Digital Inputs that the relay can be subscribed to.
In Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Inputs > Remote Inputs:
Remote Input X - Provides status of Remote input X that relay is subscribed to. The green LED lights up if Remote Input was
set to 1 last time it was received and it turns off if the last Remote Input was set to 0
There is a maximum of 32 Remote Inputs that relay can be subscribed to. These remote inputs are digital signals.
In Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Inputs > Remote GOOSE Analog Inputs:
Rem GOOSE Ana Inp X- This is the last analog value received in the Remote GOOSE Analog Input configured.
The relay can be subscribed to up to maximum of 8 different float remote GOOSE analog values and 8 different integer
remote GOOSE analog values.
In Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Inputs > Remote Devices:

Remote Device X - Provides information about status of device that is transmitting GOOSES, that the relay is subscribed to.
The green LED lights up if remote device is transmitting GOOSES and it turns off if GOOSE communication is lost with this
remote device.
A maximum of 24 different Remote devices can be configured in CID
ALL REM DEV ONLINE - Provides status of Remote Devices that are transmitting GOOSES that the relay is subscribed to. If
GOOSE communication with all configured Remote Devices is active, the green LED lights up. If GOOSE communication is
lost with any of configured remote devices, it turns off.
In Actual > Inputs/Outputs > Remote Outputs > Remote GOOSE Digital Outputs:

CHAPTER 7: IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7.5 IEC 61850 STATUS
Rem GOOSE Dig Out X - Provides status of Remote Goose Digital outputs that are configured to be transmitted by the
relay. The green LED lights up if Remote GOOSE Digital Output is set to 1 and it turns off if Remote GOOSE Digital Output is
set to 0
7.5.2 IEC 61850 CID Status

Internal Status of CID and its validation can be checked in Enervista in the following path:
Actual Values > Status > System Info
ICD Edition:
This field shows which IEC 61850 Edition if CID that relays is working with. For F650. See 7.1 IEC 61850 Overview on page 7–
1.
ICD FILE STATUS:

This field provides status of CID that is running in the relay.
UNKNOWN: When the relay has not the IEC61850 protocol in

the relay model the ICD status is unknow to the unit.
ICD ERROR: There is an error in the ICD file and the relay ICD
is not operative. To solve this issue it is necessary to send a
correct ICD to the relay using the IEC61850 configurator
tool. When the ICD error is raised the IEC 61850 is not
operative (the IEC 61850 client, reports and gooses do not
work). It is advisable to include the ICD ERROR in the main
error signal configured for specific applications.
MODIFIED: The settings have been changed in the icd but they
are still not written in the icd file in the relay
IN PROGRESS: The icd setting are being written to the file in
the relay.
OK WITHOUT DAIS: The relay has not got the "Use DOI &DAI"
setting enabled (true) and it is working properly with the ICD
file.
ICD FILE STATUS OK: The relay has got the "Use DOI &DAI" setting enabled
(true) and it is working properly with the ICD file. When that
setting is set to true the icd setting prevails over the relay
settings
DEAFULT: There is no CID file in notvalidated neither in
validated and default CID has been loaded. After a reboot,
default CID file is considered as a normal CID file.
ERROR HEADER CID: there is a discrepancy in the
information about product model or firmware version
between the firmware of the relay and the CID file. If this
message is displayed, relay shall not be able to
communicate by using IEC 61850 until this discrepancy is
solved. CID version and firmware version must match in
order to get complete functional relay.
ERROR SG CID is displayed if the relay has the Setting Group
function disabled but the managed CID file has the Settings
Groups available or the relay has the Setting Group function
enabled but the managed CID file has the Settings Groups
not available.
ICD STATUS NOTVAL:

This field provides information about the NotValidated folder, which is the folder where CIDs that are sent to the relay are
stored prior to be validated and marked "Valid".

7.5 IEC 61850 STATUS CHAPTER 7: IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
UNKNOWN: No 61850 protocol

ERROR: The CID file in notvalidated is not valid
NOTVALIDATED EMPTY: There is no CID file in notvalidated
IN PROGRESS: The icd setting are being written to the file in
the relay.
PASSED TO VALIDATED: New valid CID file in notvalidated y
and passed to validated
ICD STATUS NOTVAL ERROR HEADER CID: There is a discrepancy in the
information about product model or firmware version
between the firmware of the relay and the CID file. If this
message is displayed, relay shall not be able to
communicate by using IEC 61850 until this discrepancy is
solved. CID version and firmware version must match in
order to get complete functional relay.
1. WATCH OUT! If the ICD status is "MODIFIED" or "IN PROGRESS" it is not advisable to switch off the
NOTICE unit because the latest settings would not be stored in the unit.
2. In the case that ERROR SG CID is displayed in the ICD Status, ensure that the managed CID has
Setting Group enabled if the Setting Groups function is enabled, or ensure that the managed CID has
Setting Group disabled if the Setting Groups function is disabled.
For firmware versions 7.20 and 7.21:
– default_F650SG_v7XX.cid: CID file with setting group option enabled
– default_F650_v7XX.cid: CID file with setting group option disabled
For firmware versions below 7.20 or above 7.21:
– default_F650_v7XX.cid: CID file with setting group option disabled/enabled
3. Take into in account that if ERROR HEADER CID value is displayed in the ICD STATUS or ICD STATUS
NOT VAL section in Actual Values > Status > System info, the relay cannot communicate using
IEC 61850 until this discrepancy is resolved. CID version and firmware version must match for a fully
functional relay.

CHAPTER 7: IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7.6 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR
7.6 IEC 61850 Configurator

7.6.1 Overview
The 650 family relays support the IEC 61850 protocol which is identified by order code option "6" or "7" (Communication
protocol option). This configuration tool can be used with 650 family relays supporting IEC 61850 communication protocol
and with firmware version 3.60 or above.
The "IEC 61850 Configurator" tool is located in the top-level menu in EnerVista 650 Setup and it can be used to browse and
edit 650 relay's CID/IEC files:
• ICD/CID Settings
• Reports
• GOOSE Reception
• GOOSE Transmission
Figure 7-5: IEC61850 configurator menu location

Important Notes:
For firmware versions below 3.60, basic IEC 61850 configuration is located in Setpoint > 61850 Configuration (Domain
name parameters, Ethernet parameters, MMXU parameters). With this tool some 61850 parameters can be configured in
the *650.icd file, and then the .icd file can be uploaded to the relay.
7.6.2 Online/Offline operation modes

Two different working modes can be distinguished in the IEC 61850 Configurator: Offline mode and Online mode.
Offline Operation Mode: When user is not communicating with 650 Family relay, IEC 61850 Configurator tool can be used
to work offline mode. In this case, if IEC 61850 Configurator menu is clicked at the menu toolbar in Enervista, the following
windows prompts to allow selection of the IED version to be configured.
Figure 7-6: IED version verification

• Click Yes to browse and edit CID/ICD files for firmware versions above 7.XX
• Click No to browse and edit IEC files for firmware versions below 7.XX

7.6 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR CHAPTER 7: IEC 61850 PROTOCOL
Online Operation Mode: When communicating with an F650 using the Enervista 650 Setup software, the IEC61850
Configurator tool allows access to the CID/IEC of the connected device, or to send a previously configured file.
Figure 7-7: IEC 61850 Configurator main screen
7.6.3 IEC 61850 configurator details

The IEC61850 Configurator allows editing in all sections of the IEC61850 CID file. Other operations cannot be performed in
the EnerVista 650 Setup software if the IEC 61850 Configurator is open. Close the IEC61850 session to perform other
operations.
In the following sections, detailed information about CID configuration for firmware version 8.00 is described. These same
steps apply to CID configuration for all 650 family firmware versions 7.00 and above.

7.6.3.1 IEC 61850 configurator interface.

Four different areas can be identified in IEC 61850 configurator interface, as shown in the figure that follows:
• Menu toolbar
• Quick menu toolbar
• IEC 61850 IED Explorer window
• Configuration area
Figure 7-8: IEC 61850 Configurator interface
7.6.3.1.1 Menu toolbar

Two menus available in this area:
File Menu:
Open *.cid file
Save *cid file
Received *cid file from device
Send *cid file to the relay
See 7.6.3.1.2 Quick Menu Toolbar for detailed information
Tools Menu: (CID conversion tools)
A CID file converter menu option is available in the IEC 61850 Configurator menu: Tools > ConvertCIDFiles. The CID file
converter enables CID file conversion, allowing for conversion of CID files in parallel with relay firmware updates. The main
parts of the CID file that are maintained are the configurable fields at the Communication and IED levels, the public and
private Settings, Datasets, Report Control Blocks, GOOSE Transmission Control Blocks and GOOSE Reception.

To convert a CID file, follow these steps:

1. In the IEC61850 Configurator, select Tool > ConvertCIDFiles.
Figure 7-9: ConvertCIDFiles option

2. Select a CID file to convert in the CID file (*.cid) field.
Figure 7-10: Main window in IEC61850 CID files conversion tool

3. If no CID file is selected, an error message is displayed.

4. The CID file Converter fills in the firmware version of the selected CID file under Source Version. Select the new
firmware version for the CID file under Destination Version.
Figure 7-11: Selection of CID files versions
5. If no Destination Version is selected, an error message is displayed.
Note: For successful conversion, the default CID file templates installed with the Enervista 650 Setup must be in the
installed folder location with their original names, as shown.

Figure 7-12: Requirements for CID conversion

6. Click Convert to start the conversion process. When the conversion is finished, a successful conversion message is
displayed, followed by a message confirming the name and location of the converted file.
Figure 7-13: Successful CID conversion
Figure 7-14: CID file created and saved to disk

7.6.3.1.2 Quick Menu Toolbar
Open *CID file

The Open *CID file menu allows the user to work in offline mode to configure IEC 61850 protocol in 650 devices. In that
occasion, the tool shall work with *.cid file extension which contain the icd file from the device.
Find the "default_F650_vXXX.cid" corresponding to the firmware version related to Enervista installation in the Enervista
650 Setup software default files.
To download the active CID file from the relay:
1. Open the Enervista Setup software, and click IEC 61850 Configurator on the menu bar.
2. Select File > Receive CID file from device, or click the download button.
3. Connect to the relay as prompted if you are not already connected.
Once the download completes, a message displays indicating a successful download. The CID file can then be
saved locally.
4. Select File > Open *.cid file, or click the Open button. Select the CID file to view and edit in the IEC 61850
Configurator.
5. Check the title bar of the IEC61850 Configurator to see the name of the CID file, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 7-1: Information about the IEC 61850 Edition
For all scenarios, after opening the file all ICD data is displayed in the tree on the left and the user can start configuring the
IEC 61850 protocol in 650 devices.
To determine whether the relay is working with CID Edition 1 or Edition 2, check Enervista > Actual Values > System Info
for firmware versions above 7.60.
Save CID file

After modifying the files using this tool the user can save them in the computer under the *.cid format, using the Save *cid
file option.

Receive CID file from device

Select the option Receive CID file from device to retrieve the IEC 61850 files from the 650 device for visualization or further
modifications.
• If the user is already communicating with the 650 device using the Modbus/TCP option in the Communication menu
the retrieve files options are performed over the IP Address selected in the Communication menu.
• If the user is not communicating with a relay when the Receive CID file from device option is selected, the program
pops up a menu asking for the IP Address of the unit.
Enter the IP address and click OK to initiate connection.

• "If connection fails, an error message is shown (see below).
• "If file transfer is performed successfully, a success message is shown.
Figure 7-2: Error message pop up window

Figure 7-3: File transfer successfully performed
After retrieving the CID file it can be saved on the local PC by clicking the Open button and selecting the received file. All
ICD data is displayed in the tree on the left, and the IEC 61850 protocol is ready to configure.
Send CID file to device

The user can send the IEC 61850 files to the 650 relays using the Send IEC 61850/CID file to device menu, this menu can
be user either in offline or online mode.
If the user is already communicating with the 650 device using the Modbus/TCP option in the Communication menu the
send files options are performed over the IP Address selected on the Communication menu.
If the user is working in offline mode using the Open IEC 61850/CID file from disk option, when the "end IEC 61850 file to
device option is selected, the program shall pop up a window to introduce the IP Address.
• "If file transfer fails, error message shall be displayed.

• "If file is successfully sent, the program shall pop up a message asking to reboot the relay, as shown.

Figure 7-4: Send file successfully performed
These pop-up menus also appear the Send IEC 61850 file to device option is selected after retrieving the files using the
Receive IEC 61850 file from device.
Exit
When Exit is selected, the program prompts to save the configuration to disk or send it to the relay.
Figure 7-5: Exit IEC 61850 Configurator

7.6.3.1.3 IEC 61850 IED Explorer Window

After opening a CID file, the IED Explorer "tree" will be displayed in this area. Six different items are available in this menu:
• Access Point Addressing
• Server Configuration
• Settings
• DataSets
• Reports
• GOOSE
To Modify the Parameters
1. Select a parameter in the ICD Explorer window to open the Attributes window in the right part of the screen.
2. In the Configuration area, double click in the parameter column of the table and enter the new value for that setting.
To confirm changes, double-click out of parameter field.
Access Point Addressing

Following settings can be configured in this section.
• IP, IP-SUBNET, IP-GATEWAY: The parameters are the configured ETH_A IP details configured in the device through
Enervista: Setpoints > Product Setup > Communications > Network
• OSI-AP-Title, OSI-AE-Qualifier, OSI-PSEL, OSI-SSEL, OSI-TSEL: The parameters must be configured according to the IEC
61850 standard
• GOOSE-port: Three different options are available in this dropbox depending which port wants to be selected for
GOOSE transmission (ETHA-ETHB-Both) the user to change the GOOSE port number for GOOSE communication.
• MMS-Port: The range of the setting is 1 to 65535, in steps of 1. The setting allows the user to change the TCP port
number for MMS connections.
• MMS- Connection-Timeout: The setting is useful for detecting "fail" IEC 61850 connections. The timer must be
application specific for IEC 61850. If there is no data traffic on an established connection for more than this setting
time, the connection is disconnected from the server

Server Configuration
• IED NAME: Up to 64 alphanumeric characters. The IED Name represents the MMS domain name (IEC 61850 logical
device) where all IEC/MMS logical nodes are located. Valid characters for these values are upper and lowercase letters,
numbers, and the underscore (_) character, and the first character in the string must be a letter. This conforms to the
IEC 61850 standard. Default value is "GEDevice"
• UseDoiDai:
– If this setting is set to false: the relay works only with the settings located in the relay's memory and the changes
performed on the ICD in settings related with the protection and control functions are only stored on the ICD file
but not updated in the relay.
– If this setting is set to true, you are selecting the ICD file settings to prevail over the relay settings. This means that
after changing settings in the ICD and powering the relay off and on the unit works with the settings included in
the ICD.
All setting changes performed through the HMI or EnerVista 650 Setup are automatically updated over the ICD file,
likewise if there is any change in the ICD file these changes are updated in the relay settings. The relay starts working
with the new ICD file after sending the file to the unit and powering the relay off and on.
• Power Max and Min Automatic Calculation *:
– If set to True, Max and Min values used for Power reporting are automatically calculated based on the CT Ratio
and VT Ratio setpoints.
– If set to False, Max and Min values used for Power reporting are configurable in the Settings / Max and Min tab.
*This setting is only available for Firmware version 7.70 and above.
• PRO functional IdName: ID name of logical device where all protection logical nodes are available. The logical device
name is used to identify the IEC 61850 logical device that exists within the F650 and this name is composed of two
parts: the IED NAME and the PRO/CON functional IdName. Default name for PRO functional IdName is PRO
• CON functional IdName: ID name of logical device where all control logical nodes are available. Default name for CON
functional IdName is CON
Settings
Four different levels are available under setting section:
• Deadbands
• Commands
• Timeouts
• Oscillation
• Max and Min

DEADBANDS
Figure 7-15: Configuration of deadbands for MMXU

Range: 1 to 100.000 %
The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when to update the MMXU "mag" and
"cVal" values from the associated "instmag" and "instcVal" values. The "mag" and "cVal" values are used for the IEC 61850
buffered and unbuffered reports. The settings correspond to the associated "db" data items in the CF functional constraint
of the MMXU logical node, as per the IEC 61850 standard. According to IEC 61850-7-3, the db value "shall represent the
percentage of difference between the maximum and minimum in units of 0.001%". Thus, it is important to know the
maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity, since this represents the 100.00% value for the deadband and
therefore A value of 1000 represents the 1% of the scale.

The equations to calculate minimum (min) and maximum (max) values in the MMXU nodes of F650 are as follows:
MMXU Node Value To Calculate Min/Max for F650/C650

TotW , TotVar For firmware below 7.70:
(MW, MVAr) max = (Phase CT Primary *160) * (Phase VT Ratio * 10) / 1000
min = -max
For firmware 7.70 or above:
If Power Max and Min Automatic Calculation setting is set to false:

max = configurable value (Value is referred to primary values)
min = configurable value (Value is referred to primary values)
If Power Max and Min Automatic Calculation Setting is set to true:

max value will be the same as for firmware below 7.70
min value will be the same as for firmware below 7.70
Note: In case of max/min values are configurable, if these values are set below accuracy
levels, this could lead relay into unpredictable behavior.
TotVA For firmware below 7.70:

(MVA) max = (Phase CT Primary *160) * (Phase VT Ratio * 10) / 1000
min = 0
For firmware 7.70 or above:
If Power Max and Min Automatic Calculation setting is set to false:

max = configurable value
min = configurable positive value
If Power Max and Min Automatic Calculation Setting is set to true:

max value will be the same as for firmware below 7.70
min = 0
Note: In case of max/min are configurable, if these values are set below accuracy levels, this
could lead relay into unpredictable behavior.
Hz dbAng angle dB = (DB percentage* max = 70

360) min = 0
Hz Rte max = 15
min = -15
LdPPV/LdPhV/LdSeq max= Load VT Ratio /1000 * 10 * 0.001;
(kV) min = 0
SrPPV/SrPhV /SrSeq max= Source VT Ratio /1000 * 10 * 0.001;

(measurement in kV) min = 0
A$phsA, phsB, phsC max=((Phase CT Primary/Phase CT Secondary) /1000)*32*Phase CT Secondary*0.001
(kA) min = 0
SeqA$c1, c2 ,c3
A$neut max=((Ground CT Primary/Ground CT Secondary) /1000)*32*Ground CT Secondary*0.001
(kA)
min = 0
A$net max=((Ground CT Primary/Ground CT Secondary) /1000)*32*Ground CT Secondary*0.001
(kA) min = 0
A$res max=((Stv Gnd CT Primary/Ground CT Secondary) /1000)*32*Stv Gnd CT Secondary*0.001
(kA) min = 0

MMXU Node Value To Calculate Min/Max for F650/C650

dbAng angle dB = (DB percentage* 360)
For firmware versions below 5.00:

There is one common deadband used both for angles and magnitudes in the corresponding
phasor measurement (current or voltage). Take this into account when using reports with data
change, because in some cases the angle value can trigger reports quite often due to the
difficulty in calculating a common deadband for both values (angle and magnitude). In these
cases it is advisable to use the integrity report in firmware versions lower than 5.00.
For firmware versions qbove 5.00:

The 650 family of relays implements separate deadbands for magnitude and angle for
phasors (voltages and currents). Thus, for example, the phase A current attribute in the 650
relay includes two deadbands, one for phase A current magnitude and the other for phase A
current angle. The deadband for magnitude is the db parameter while the deadband for angle
is the dbAng parameter
In addition to the MMXU logical node, MSQI and Remote Input GGIO (default name rinGGIO1)
also have attributes that are analogue values and contain db parameters to establish
deadbands.
For firmware version below 7.00, deadbands are available in ICD/CID tab.
WARNING: If deadbands are configured to allow measurement oscillation reporting below accuracy level, relay could
experience unexpected behaviors

MAX AND MIN

Max and min values for analog inputs and power reporting* are configurable on this tab.
*Max and min values for Power reporting are only available when the Power Max and Min Automatic Calculation setting is
set to false (See Server Configuration on page 7–227)
Figure 7-16: Max and Min

COMMANDS
In the F650 relay IEC 61850 controllable data exist in logical nodes vinGGIO, XCBR and CSWI:
• vinGGIO maps to Virtual Inputs of F650.
• XCBR represents the circuit breaker
• CSWI logical nodes represent switchgear of F650 relay.
Figure 7-17: Commands

vinGGIO
Controllable data in vinGGIO logical node are SPCSO1 - SPCSO64 and DPCSO1 - DPCSO16. Signals SPCSO1 - SPCSO32
map to 32 Virtual Inputs Latched in F650 relay and signals SPCSO33 - SPCSO64 map to Virtual Inputs Self-Reset.
DPCSO1 - DPCSO16 are double control points and operate on pairs of Virtual Inputs Latched. Thus DPCSO1 - DPCSO16
map to 32 Virtual Inputs Latched and an operation of one attribute DPCSO always operate on two Virtual Inputs
Latched, one Virtual Input of the pair is set to "1" and the other Virtual Input of the pair is set to "0". In vinGGIO logical
node only control mode "direct control with normal security" can be used.
XCBR, CSWI, recPhXCSWI
Controllable data in these logical nodes are Pos (position) objects. These are operations used to change state of
breaker, switch or recloser.
F650 relays supports all four IEC 61850 control modes (ctlModel), which are:
– Direct control with normal security (direct-with-normal-security)
– SBO control with normal security (sbo-with-normal-security)

– Direct control with enhanced security (direct-with-enhanced-security)

– SBO control with enhanced security (sbo-with-enhanced-security)
TIMEOUTS
Figure 7-18: Timeouts

There is a configurable timeout for SBO control modes and for operation in logical nodes listed above. The value range for
SBO timeout is 500 ms - 60 seconds.
The sboClass attribute can only have value "operate-once", "operate-many" pattern is not supported in IEC 61850 SBO
controls in 650 relay.

OSCILLATION
There are two settings used for the detection of the digital inputs of I/O boards and rinGGIO LN oscillation, OscTmms and
NumChgs.
·OscTmms: time between two changes in the same direction (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0) to consider that a signal is
oscillating. There are four settings for each GGIO (OscTmmsA, OscTmmsB, OscTmmsC and OscTmmsD), one for each group
of inputs, and one in rinGGIO logical node.
·NumChgs: number of changes that have to be produced in an oscillatory signal to be consider as invalid and not to
continue sending changes of the signal, sending the value of the signal when it was consider as oscillatory.

DataSet
Two different sections will be differentiated under this section:
• Summary
• DataSetXX
SUMMARY
In this screen, user can find a list with information about where a configured DataSetXX has been used (Report and/or
GOOSE).
If a DataSetXX is shared by more than one Report/GOOSE, all elements will be listed in DataSetXX Parameter field,
separated by commas.
Figure 7-19: DataSetXX summary view

DataSetXX:
In this section, configure up to 20 different DataSets as follows:
DataSetXX name: It must be assigned initially. The first character of this attribute must be a letter (upper or lower
case). The rest must be a number, a letter (upper or lower case or a "_". The number of characters allowed in 32
If this name is not configured, the following message will prompt when trying to drag any new element:
Figure 7-20: DataSet name not configured.

DataSetXX MemberX: After DataSet name is defined, members can be adding by dragging and dropping elements
from the complete data model of the IED displayed below to the Data Set.
Figure 7-21: Adding attributes to a DataSet
There is a counter in the right-up corner of configuration area where users can visualize how many basic attributes have
been added to a DataSetXX. This counter will increase automatically when basic attributes are dragged and dropped.

For example id CON.MMXU1.MX.A.net.cVal is dragged and dropped into DataSet, counter will be increased in two as there
are two basic attributes in it (CON.MMXU1.MX.A.net.cVal.mag and CON.MMXU1.MX.A.net.cVal .ang)
Figure 7-22: Basic attributes counter
To change the Order of the configured DataSet:

1. Select DataSet Member to be moved.
2. Click on Shift and up/down key.
To delete a Dataset Member:
1. Click on DataMember.
2. Press SUPR key.
To remove a DataSetXX:
1. Select DataSetXX in the IEC 61850 IED Explorer window.
2. Click right-button and select Delete DataSet as shown:
Figure 7-23: Delete DataSet

Reports
The 650 family relay supports both IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting. The device has configurable reports,
which include user-defined Data Sets and Report Control Blocks.Reporting is based on Data Sets, which are collections of
Data that can be included in Reports. The Report Control Block is a group of parameters which permit IEC 61850
customization of the reports being sent by the IEC 61850 server. For example, the IntgPd parameter of the Report Control
Block contains the value in milliseconds of the interval between Integrity Reports sent by IEC 61850 servers.
A 650 family relay can have up to 20 different reports and up to 20 different Data Sets linked (only one DataSet can be
linked to one Report). In the reports, each Dataset can be configured with a maximum of 576 Dataset Members.
All settings/datasets assigned to different reports can configured as described in this section. Up to 20 different reports
can be configured.
ReportX Name:
The first character in the value of this attribute must be a letter (upper or lower case). The rest of the characters must
be a number, a letter (upper or lower case) or a "_". The maximum number of characters allowed in IEC61850
Configurator is 30 and IEC61850 MMS Library adds 2 more characters indicating the number of the instance of the
RCB depending on the number of IEC61850 clients configured
ReportX RptID:
The attribute RptID is the client-specified report identifier of the RCB that has caused the generation of the report.
ReportX DatSet:
This dropbox lists only DataSets configured in DataSet section with less than 576 DataSet Members. Select the
Dataset that is going to be assigned to Report X,
ReportX ConfRev:
It represents the configuration revision number of the control block
ReportX OptFlds:
Different options for report triggers are listed in this dropbox list. One or more options the report triggers are shown in
the Supported Triggers list:
– Data-Change
– Quality-Change
– Integrity
– General Interrogation
ReportX BufTm:
This setting is only considered if ReportX Buffer setting is set to true. In case of an event that causes a report the server
will wait for BufTm ms for other events. All data that is to be reported because of events in this time span is sent in a
single report. If connection with client is lost, events will be logged during BufTm and they will be sent when client
connects again.
ReportX IntgPd
Only working if general interrogation is configured in trigger options. The integrity period specifies an interval in ms for
the periodic sending of intergrity reports.

ReportX Buffered:
The standard distinguishes between two types of reporting: buffered reporting and unbuffered reporting. With
buffered reporting reports are buffered by the server in case a connection to the client is interrupted. This way reports
can be sent after the client has connected again. Buffered reporting is configured through buffered report control
blocks (BRCB). Unbuffered reporting is configured through unbuffered report control blocks (URCB).
If it set to true, report will be configured as buffered report control block (BRCB). If set to false, report will be configured
as unbuffered report control block (URCB)
ReportX Max Clients:
Number of clients that can be connected to a report control block. Up to 5 different clients can be configured
GOOSE
TxGOOSE
In this section, configure four different transmission GOOSE: TXGOOSEX.
Figure 7-24: Transmitted GOOSE settings

TxGOOSEX Name:
The first character in the value of this attribute must be a letter (upper or lower case). The rest of the characters must
be a number, a letter (upper or lower case) or a "_". The maximum number of characters allowed is 32.
TxGOOSEX Desc:
The maximum number of characters allowed is 32.
TxGOOSEX GoID:
The maximum number of characters allowed is 129
TxGOOSEX DataSet:
Select DataSet to be tramistted in this TxGOOSE. Only DataSets configured with 128 elements or less will be displayed
in this dropbox.
TxGOOSEX CONFREV:
It can be used to indicate GOOSE configuration revision
TxGOOSEX Enabled:
To enable/disable transmission GOOSE
TxGOOSEX DST MAC:
The standard MAC address limit. 6 pairs of letters (from A to F, upper case or lower case) or numbers separated by
colons.
Make sure to configure the MAC with the least significant bit in the most significant byte, set to 1. Example: 01: 0C: CD:
00: 00: 04
TxGOOSEX VLAN PRIORITY:
A number from 0 to 7 can be configured. IEC 61850 recommends a default priority value of 4 for GOOSE. Ethernet
traffic that does not contain a priority tag has a default priority of 1. More details are specified in IEC 61850 part 8-1.

TxGOOSEX VLAN ID:

The maximum number of characters allowed is 3. IEC61850 Configurator allows characters limited to 0 to 9, A to F and
it saves in the CID file the hexadecimal value (max FFF).
TxGOOSEX ETYPE APPID:
All characters must be numerical. The maximum number of characters allowed is 4. IEC61850 Configurator allows
characters limited to 0 to 9, A to F and it saves in the CID file the hexadecimal value (max FFFF).
IEC 61850 recommends that the Ethertype Application ID number be configured according to the GOOSE source. In
the F650, the transmitted GOOSE Application ID number must match the configured receive Application ID number in
the receiver. A common number may be used for all GOOSE transmitters in a system. More details are specified in IEC
61850 part 8-1.
TxGOOSEX MAX TIME:
Time allowed to live. The maximum time packet remains alive after transmission. It must be configured in ms
Mapping TxGOOSES
For transmission GOOSE you can create Data Sets with drag-and-drop selecting the desired data attributes in the data
model tree and dragging them to the DataSet panel. Data Sets can be directly formed by attributes of all Logical Nodes.
For example they can contains status of protection functions as:
• PTOC1.ST.Op.phsA- "Time Overcurrent Function 1 Operate Phase A"
• PTUF2.ST.Str.general- "Underfrequency Function 2 Trip General"
• XCBR1.ST.Pos.stVal- "Circuit Breaker Position"
• etc.
There is also a dedicated logical node in F650 which can be used for mapping of internal signals to be transmitted via
GOOSE. This logical node is rouGGIO1. It contains 32 digital indications with associated quality flags and timestamps.
rouGGIO1 permits flexible mapping of any of relay's digital signals to outgoing GOOSE messages. This can be useful when
transmission via GOOSE of internal signals that are not mapped to any IEC 61850 logical node in the F650 is required. An
example of such signals are "Virtual Outputs" which are internal variables of F650 derived from PLC logic equations.
Mapping of signals to rouGGIO1 indications is performed in EnerVista 650 Setup software in menu Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Remote Outputs. rouGGIO1 indications are called Rem GOOSE Dig Out 1, Rem GOOSE Dig Out 2, etc. in
this menu, and are listed after the DNA and UserSt bits.
Figure 7-25: Example of rouGGIO mapping in Dataset

Figure 7-26: Example of rouGGIO mapping in Setpoint > Relay configuration

RxGOOSE
650 relays can subscribe to up to 24 different remote devices. A maximum of 32 Remote Inputs (digital signals), 32 Remote
Goose Digital Inputs, and 16 Remote Goose Analog Inputs can be configured as subscriptions.
Mapping RxGOOSES
In order to configure reception of configurable GOOSE in a 650 relay, it is necessary to have the ICD/CID file of the sending
IED. This means that the first transmission GOOSE must be configured in the sender, and then the ICD/CID file must be
imported using the IEC 61850 Configurator tool in the EnerVista 650 Setup software.
To import a CID file from a remote IED:

1. In the IED list panel, select LGOS X, right-click and select Add IED to add a new IED for GOOSE reception. Up to 24
different CIDs can be imported.
Figure 7-27: Import CID file

2. A pop-up window allows selection of the CID file to import, with transmission GOOSES previously configured.
Figure 7-28: CID file selection

3. After selecting the CID file, all configured transmission GOOSES are imported and all GOOSE FCDAs are displayed as
shown:
Figure 7-29: Imported CID file

4. If any imported transmission GOOSE needs to be deleted, updated, moved up/down or the header needs to be edited,
right-click on the imported GOOSE in the IED panel list
Figure 7-30: Transmission GOOSE menu

If a new CID is imported and it contains a GOOSE ID that it is already present in the IED panel list, the following message
displays and no transmission GOOSES from the imported CID are added to IED panel list.
Figure 7-31: Warning message: Same GOOSE ID detected
Up to 32 Remote Inputs and 32 Goose Digital Inputs can be configured in a reception goose (RXGOOSE). The configuration
section shows a list with 64 different rows. The first 32 values are shown on the Remote Goose Digital Inputs screen and
the remaining 32 values are on the Remote Inputs screen.

To configure RxGOOSE Boolean Inputs follow these steps:

1. Boolean signals can be dragged and dropped from an imported remote IED transmission GOOSE into the
Configuration section.
Figure 7-32: RXGOOSE Boolean Input

2. When a boolean signal is dragged and dropped into any IndX element, four columns show the following information:
– IED: IED name configured in imported CID
– GOOSE ID: Goose ID configured in imported CID
– SETTING: FCDA of boolean signal from imported CID that has been dragged and dropped into the configuration
area.
– DEFAULT STATE: Value that signal shows when status has not been updated from the remote device.
Removing Boolean inputs:
• To remove a configured boolean signal, right-click on it and select Remove Input.
Figure 7-33: RXGOOSE Boolean input - Remove Input

To configure quality bits, follow these steps

1. Quality bits of Boolean signals can be dragged and dropped from an imported remote IED transmission GOOSE into
the Configuration section. When a quality bit is dragged and dropped, a pop-up window opens to allow the selection
of one of the thirteen quality bits available.
Figure 7-34: RXGOOSE Boolean input - Quality bit selection

2. Once a quality bit is selected, click OK, and the selected quality bit is shown in the Setting column of the Configuration
area.
Figure 7-35: RXGOOSE Boolean input - Selected quality bits shown

To configure RxGOOSE Analog Inputs, follow these steps:

Up to 8 float analog inputs (AnInX.mag.f) and 8 integer analog inputs (AnInX.mag.i) can configured in RXGOOSE Analog
Inputs, as shown:
Figure 7-36: RXGOOSE Analog Inputs

1. Add both float and Integer analog inputs by dragging and dropping values from the transmission GOOSES imported in
the IED Panel list into AnInX.mag.X rows in the Configuration section.
2. When an analog signal is dragged and dropped into any element, three columns show the following information:
– IED: IED name configured in imported CID
– GOOSE ID: Goose ID configured in imported CID
– SETTING: FCDA of Analog signal from imported CID that it has been dragged and dropped into configuration area.
If the analog signal being dragged and dropped has been previously added from the IED panel list, the following
warning message pops up:
Figure 7-37: Warning message - Duplicate item

When all 8 Analog Inputs of one type (such as float) have been mapped, and an additional float analog value is
dragged a dropped into the Configuration area, an error message is shown
:
In order to replace an Analog Input, first remove the existing Analog Input.

Removing Analog inputs:

• To remove a configured analog signal, right-click it and select Remove Input.
Figure 7-38: RXGOOSE Analog input- Removing inputs
7.6.3.2 Configuration of setting groups

The Logical Nodes affected by the implementation of the setting groups are:
• For firmware version below 7.50: LLN0, PIOC, PTOC, PTOF, PTOV, PTUV, PTUF and RDIR.
• For firmware version 7.50 or above: LLN0, PIOC, PTOC, PTOF, PTOV, PTUV, PTUF, RDIR, PTTR, PFRC, PDIS, PDOP, PRTR
The definition of the Logical Node LLN0 is shown in 7.2.7.3.3 or 7.2.7.3.4. The rest of the mentioned Logical Nodes are
affected in the way that the setting data contained in those Logical Nodes have as many values as setting groups are
defined:
• For firmware version below 7.50: 3 setting group for F650 relay
• For firmware version 7.50 or above: 6 setting group for F650 relay
Each setting data contained in those Logical Nodes has a type derived from one of the following common data classes
defined in the standard IEC 61850-7-3: ING, SPG, ASG and CURVE. The setting data attributes of these common data
classes have functional constraints SG (setting group) and SE (setting group editable) when the setting group function is
enabled and SP (setpoint) when it is not.
When the setting group function is enabled the F650 relay has the following instances of the Logical Nodes mentioned
before:
PIOC
• Phase instantaneous overcurrent: SGphHiPIOC1 and SGphLoPIOC1*/ phHiPIOC1 and phLoPIOC1
• Neutral instantaneous overcurrent: SGndPIOC1*/ ndPIOC1
• Ground instantaneous overcurrent: SGgndPIOC1*/ gndPIOC1
• Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent: SGhsePIOC1*/ hsePIOC1
• Isolated ground instantaneous overcurrent: IsoGndPIOC**
• Broken conductor: BknCndPIOC**

PTOC
• Phase time overcurrent: SGphHiPTOC1 and SGphLoPTOC1*/ phHiPTOC1 and phLoPTOC1
• Neutral time overcurrent: SGndPTOC1*/ ndPTOC1
• Ground time overcurrent: SGgndPTOC1*/ gndPTOC1
• Sensitive ground time overcurrent: SGhsePTOC1*/ hsePTOC1
• Sensitive ground time overcurrent: hsePTOC**
• Negative sequence time overcurrent: NgSeqPTOC**
PTOF
• Overfrequency: SGPTOF1*/ PTOF1
PTOV
• Phase overvoltage: SGphsPTOV1*/ phsPTOV1
• Auxiliary overvoltage: SGauxPTOV1*/ auxPTOV1
• Neutral overvoltage: SGneuHiPTOV1 and SGneuLoPTOV1*/ neuHiPTOV1 and neuLoPTOV1
PTUV
• Phase undervoltage: SGphsPTUV1*/ phsPTUV1
• Auxiliary undervoltage: SGauxPTUV1*/ auxPTUV1
PTUF
• Underfrequency: SGPTUF1*/ PTUF1
RDIR
• Phase directional element: SGphsRDIR1*/ phsRDIR1
• Neutral directional element: SGndRDIR1*/ ndRDIR1
• Ground directional element: SGgndRDIR1*/ gndRDIR1
• Sensitive ground directional element: SGhseRDIR1*/ hseRDIR1
PDOP
• Forward overpower: FwdPDOP **
• Directional overpower: DirPDOP**
• Wattmeter ground overpower: WattPDOP**
PFRC
• Frequency rate of change: PFRC**
PDIS
• Load encroachment: LodEncPDIS**
PRTR
• Locked Rotor: LockedPRTR**
*These logical nodes model the corresponding protection function for setting groups in firmware version from 7.20 to
below 7.50
**These functions have been included from firmware version 7.50.
If “Use Setting Group” is set to true for firmware version from 7.20 to below 7.50, the new instances of the Logical Nodes
are accessible with the IEC 61850 Configurator as is shown in the following figure.

Firmware versions from 7.20 to below 7.50
Firmware versions 7.50 and above
Figure 7-39: IEC 61850 Configurator

The setting grouping permission can be enabled or disabled using the relay HMI or using menu path Setpoint > Control
Elements > Setting Group in the EnerVista 650 Setup program as shown in the figure.
For versions below 7.50 it can be enabled or disabled in the IEC61850 Configurator by setting Use Setting Group to true or
false.

Figure 7-40: Control elements - setting group
The next figure is a capture of an MMS browser where SGCB class attributes are shown and configured, setting ActSG with
the value 1 that corresponds with the first setting group in the F650 relay and EditSG with the value 2 that corresponds
with the second setting group.
Figure 7-41: MMS object explorer

Firmware versions from 7.20 to below 7.50

The settings for the groups 1 and 2 of high level of Phase Time Overcurrent protection function are shown in the next
figures.
As it is shown in the figure, the values of the settings of the setting group indicated with the ActSg are the ones with the FC
= SG in Logical Node SGphHiPTOC1, therefore the ones used by the high level of Phase Time Overcurrent protection
function in the relay.

On the other hand, as it is shown in the figure, the values of the settings of the setting group indicated with the EditSg are
the ones with the FC = SE in Logical Node SGphHiPTOC1.

Firmware versions 7.50 and above

The settings for the high level Phase Time Overcurrent protection function (Phase TOC High 1, 2 and 3) on setting groups 1
(ActSG) and 2 (EditSG) are shown in the next figures.

As it is shown in the figure, the values of the settings of the setting group indicated with the ActSg are the ones with the FC
= SG in Logical Nodes phPTOC1, phPTOC2 and phPTOC3. Therefore the ones used by the high level of Phase Time
Overcurrent protection function in the relay.
On the other hand, as it is shown in the figure, the values of the settings of the setting group indicated with the EditSg are
the ones with the FC = SE in Logical Nodes phPTOC1, phPTOC2 and phPTOC3.

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 8: Security
SECURITY
8.1 Adding users
New users can only be added by users that have Administrator Access (or Admin Rights). The Enable Security check box
located in the Security > User Management window must be enabled.
Remember: (In order to add new users and assign user rights )
• must be logged in with Administrator Permission
• and Enable Security checkbox must be enabled
8.1.1 User rights

NOTE: Only Administrators have access to the User Management dialog box.
Following is a list of all of the User Rights Options available to be granted to users, and their functions.
Table 8-1: User rights and functions

RIGHT FUNCTION
If this box is checked when the Administrator exits the User Management dialog box, the program asks to
Delete Entry
confirm the delete before the selected user is permanently deleted from the list.
WARNING: When this box is checked, the user becomes an EnerVista 650 Setup Administrator, receiving all
Admin.
Administrative rights.
Actual Values When this box is checked, the user is able to view Actual Values and all records excluding event recorder.
When this box is checked, the user is able to view and modify Settings (Protection, control, inputs/outputs and
Settings
calibration).
Commands When this box is checked, the user is able to use Commands.
Event Recorder When this box is checked, the user is able to use Event Recorder.
Force IO When this box is checked, the user is able to use Force IO application.
Logic Configuration When this box is checked, the user is able to view and modify Relay Configuration and Logic Configuration.
When this box is checked, the user is able to upgrade firmware, bootware and to upload and download info
Upgrade
files to/from relay.
By default, Administrator and Service users are created with "password" as default password.

8.2 CHANGING PASSWORDS CHAPTER 8: SECURITY
8.2 Changing passwords

Users are prompted to change their password after the first successful log in or through clicking Security from the toolbar,
and choose Change Password.
Figure 8-1: Change security

When the operator enters a new password for the first time, he/she should also enter a personal question that only they
can answer. There is a limit of 50 characters available to enter the personal question. One example, as in the above
diagram, would be "What is my mother's maiden name?". This question is posed to the user if the user forgets their
password and would like to know what their password was.

CHAPTER 8: SECURITY 8.3 ENABLING SECURITY
8.3 Enabling security

EnerVista 650 Setup Security Control is disabled by default. Users don't have to log in through user name and password
after installation and are granted access as Administrator.
Security Control can be enabled through Security from the tool bar when logged on as an Administrator. Click
User Management:
Figure 8-2: Enabling security

Security Control is enabled by checking the ENABLE SECURITY check box. The first time the enable security option is
selected it is necessary to close and reopen the EnerVista 650 Setup software to start working under security
management.

8.4 LOGGING INTO ENERVISTA 650 SETUP CHAPTER 8: SECURITY
8.4 Logging into EnerVista 650 Setup

Users have to log on in order to use EnerVista 650 Setup program after Security Control has been enabled. After the start
up of EnerVista 650 Setup, a dialog prompts for user name and password.
Figure 8-3: Login user

The user name field displays the last log in user name as default, in this example, TestUser. For the first log in session of
any user name, the default password is "password". The user is prompt to change the password to something else after
the first successfully log in.
Log on can also be done by clicking Security from the toolbar and choose Login New User. The user is prompted with the
same log in dialog box for a different user name and password combination.
In case a user has forgotten their log in password, the Forgot Password function can be used to retrieve the password.
Figure 8-4: Forgot your password?

A question, which is pre-set by the user, is asked. The password is retrieved for entering the right answer.

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 9: Bootcode and firmware upgrade
BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPGRADE
9.1 Firmware upgrade versions below 7.00.
This section explains how to upgrade the F650 boot code and firmware for version below 7.00.
BEFORE PERFORMING THE UPGRADE PROCEDURE CHECK THAT BOOT AND FIRMWARE VERSION
NOTICE MATCH.
The boot code and firmware versions can be seen in the relay main screen: The relay firmware version appears after the
text “F650“(5.70 in Figure 9-1: Main screen) with the boot program version (6.00 in Figure 9-1: Main screen) followed by
“GENERAL ELECTRIC”, the relay model and the default front RS232/USB port communication parameters.
Figure 9-1: Main screen

9.1 FIRMWARE UPGRADE VERSIONS BELOW 7.00. CHAPTER 9: BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPGRADE
BOOT CODE RELEASE NOTES

It is mandatory to maintain version compatibility between firmware and boot code in the upgrade procedure, otherwise
the relay does not start after upgrading.
FIRMWARE BOOTWARE AND 650 PC PROGRAM VERSIONS COMPATIBILITY

FIRMWARE CODE BOOT CODE ENERVISTA 650 PC
5.72 6.00 7.20
5.70 6.00 7.20
5.68 6.00 7.20
5.64 5.60 7.20
5.40 5.44-5.40 7.20
5.00 5.44-5.40 7.20
4.00 5.44-5.40-5.00-4.10 7.20
3.71 5.44-5.40-5.00-4.10 7.20
3.70 5.44-5.40-5.00-4.10 7.20
2.20 5.40-5.00, 4.10, 4.00 7.20
NOTICE
A STEP LIST SUMMARY that allows the user to control the upgrading process is included at the end of this section. It is
necessary to read paragraphs 1 to 4 of chapter 9 of manual GEK-106310 before accomplishing the F650 UPGRADE
PROCEDURE.
Be aware that boot program and firmware upgrades erase all data contained in the relay, thus it is advisable to save all
data, oscillography, events, settings and configuration files before proceeding.
RELAYS WITH FIBER OPTIC ETHERNET

The upgrade of the boot program (BOOTCODE) must be performed by crossed Ethernet copper cable connected to the
PC. It is not necessary to change the internal switch from fiber to RJ45, because the upgrade is made at 10Mb/s.
This does not apply to the firmware upgrade, which can be done either via Ethernet Fiber connection, or through the
RJ45 cable connection.
For upgrading firmware versions lower than 3.20 or upgrading bootware, be aware to calibrate the unit offset, after
upgrading it, in Communication > Calibration > Offset Calibration. No analog currents nor analog voltages must be
injected in the unit during this process.

CHAPTER 9: BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPGRADE 9.1 FIRMWARE UPGRADE VERSIONS BELOW 7.00.
9.1.1 Communication parameters

1. Ethernet Connection/Type - Both boot code and firmware upgrade processes require Ethernet communications. It is
strongly recommended to use a direct connection between the PC and the relay using a Cross-Over RJ45 Ethernet
cable, instead a direct connection through a hub or switch. Upgrading through Local Area Network (LAN) must be
avoided.
Serial RS232 Communication - Serial communication is necessary only to perform the bootware upgrade for versions
previous to 7.00.
2. Relay IP Address - An IP address must be assigned to the relay in the Ethernet parameters via HMI at Product Setup >
Communication > Ethernet > Ethernet1 menu, or via Enervista 650 Setup software at Setpoint > Product Setup >
Communication Settings > Network (Ethernet) 1 as shown in the table below:
Table 9-1: Ethernet parameters

Product Setup > Communication Settings > Network (Ethernet) 1
Name Value Units Range
IP Address Oct1 192 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct1 255 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct2 255 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct3 255 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
Gateway IP Oct1 192 [0 : 255]
3. PC IP Address - In case the boot code has been previously updated to the relay (section 9.2), the IP address and other
parameters already assigned in the process are:
IP Address:192.168.37.177
Netmask:255.255.255.0
Gateway:192.168.37.10
Then the PC settings should be the same pattern as follows:
IP Address:192.168.37.xxx
Netmask:255.255.255.0
Gateway:192.168.37.10 (if desired)
Where XXX is a number between 0 and 255 that is not assigned to any other device to avoid collisions.
4. Other Network, Communications and Data Flow checks
• According to the model number of the relay, to enable the 10/100 BASE TX-CABLE option in the relay communication
board, a specific jumper in this board must be changed. See detailed instructions in paragraph 3.4.3 of Instruction
Manual GEK-106310AE.
• IP address, netmask, gateway are correct and match the parameters used in the computer to perform the procedure.
See table 9.1 (on this chapter) of Manual GEK-106310AE COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS.

9.1.2 Bootware version upgrade
Boot code upgrade is performed using EnerVista 650 Setup, and the most recent version of Enervista 650 setup software
should be used. It is required that no active communication is currently established between the program and the relay,
and that no configuration files are open.
During the boot code upgrading process, all the data stored in the relay is lost. Save all calibration, settings, oscillography,
etc. from the relay before starting the upgrade.
9.1.2.1 Bootware upgrade

1. Windows XP, Windows 7 and Windows 8 Operating Systems must be used for installation and the reliable operation of
Enervista 650 Setup program and bootware/firmware relay upgrade.
2. To upgrade the boot code, it is required to connect an RS232 cable to the front of the relay, and an Ethernet cable to
the rear port (ETH_1/ETH_2 or ETH_E/ETH_A/ETH_B).
3. If it is being used a USB-to-Serial RS232 Cable Converter, it must be a RS-232C standard compliant, powered by the
User computer's USB bus and with DB9 male connector. To ensure the correct state of communication between the
computer and the relay along the whole upgrading process, all other USB devices must be unplugged. Due to the
extended variety of USB-to-Serial Cable Converters existing nowadays in the market, with different characteristics,
even different charge imposed to the USB bus of the PC, it is strongly recommended to use the GE USB-to-Serial RS232
Cable Converter, part number GE0100-0001.
4. When using USB-to-Serial RS232 cable it is necessary first to determine the COM Port number the Laptop uses
through the USB device. Depending in the actual F650 upgrade task under operation, the procedure is as follows:
4.1 Firmware upgrade: It is not necessary to use a serial cable
4.2 Bootware and firmware upgrade being the relay fully operative with the actual F/W version: The COM port number
must be determined by using the 650 Setup program. With USB device disconnected from the Laptop and from the
relay, start the 650 Setup program. At the top menu bar choose Communication > Computer > Communication Port
menu and check the allowable serial ports displayed.Return to the main 650 Setup screen and connect the USB
device to PC and select Communication > Computer > Communication Port to display the allowed serial ports. The
new one port number shown is the USB port number to be used for the upgrade process.
4.3 Bootware and firmware upgrade being the relay blocked at startup (no preliminary communication PC-Relay
allowable): Repeat the process described above in 4.2 to determine the COM PORT number and continue with upgrade
process.
5. Once the COM PORT number is determined, set it in Communication > Computer together with and the Baud Rate
and Parity parameters. Click Store.
6. Start the Enervista F650 Setup program and select Communication > Upgrade Relay.
Figure 9-2: Upgrade device

7. Select Device Boot Upgrade. FW version<7.00 and click the […] button. The next new window requires the bootware
file retrieved from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/index.htm and previously stored in the PC.
Figure 9-3: Boot code file selection

8. Choose the bootware file and click Open button:
Figure 9-4: Upgrade selected BOOT file
9. Click Upgrade. A warning messages is shown:
If calibration files were saved click Yes, otherwise click No to cancel the upgrade process and save first the calibration files
according to section 4.1.11.

Figure 9-5: Warning message to save setting and configuration files
10. Parameters already set in step 5 are operative during serial communications. If they have not been previously set a
pop up window prompts for the serial COM port to be used during upgrading.
11. During the upgrade, the system shows the following message indicating the procedure to be followed.
If you click Yes, the next window allows you to choose the Network adapter for your Ethernet connection to the relay.

12. After selecting the Network adapter, a window to choose a temporary IP address is shown. It is advisable to set the
same IP address that is going to be used later in the relay for Ethernet connection.
Figure 9-6: setting address
13. After entering the temporary IP Address, the next new window requires the bootware file retrieved from
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/index.htm and previously stored someplace in the PC.

Figure 9-7: Boot code file selection
14. Choose the bootware file and click Open button.
Figure 9-8: Loading boot code file
15. Then the program shows a message requiring switch OFF and ON the relay while the progress bar is in course, to start
the upgrading process.
Figure 9-9: Relay switch off-on message

16. It is important to switch the Relay OFF and ON again during the time shown by the progress bar; in case this time
expires, the program offers the option to continue with the process or to postpone, verify the correct RS232
connections and try again later. Notice that the serial COM PORT used in the boot upgrade procedure is the one
selected in step 4 above.
Figure 9-10: loading update file error message
If the relay gets stuck during the upgrading process after switching OFF and ON the relay, giving error message shown, it
is due to no serial communication via the front RS232 port. Check the serial cable and serial settings connection. At this
point the relay will not be upgraded.
After switching it OFF and ON it will continue working with the former firmware and bootware versions.
17. After switching the relay OFF and ON, if the serial communication between EnerVista 650 Setup and the relay is
correct the program shows the following message:
Then it requires the confirmation to proceed to upgrade:

18. Click Yes to start the process, beginning with the relay flash memory deletion.
At this point all the information stored in the relay is lost. Until now, no important change has been made to the relay,
the boot memory upgrading process has just been prepared.
This process can take several minutes, during which a progress bar is displayed.
19. If the process is successful, continue to step 20.

If the process is unsuccessful and the relay gets stuck at “Sending file imagen_kernel…” (see figure below)
This error may be due to no communication via the Ethernet port. At this point serial communications work properly,
the relay flash memory has been erased, and the upgrade procedure must be completed to start working with the
unit. If the procedure is not completed, the HMI shows the message "OS Loading..." and the relay does not start up.
In this case refer to step 4 above
If all points from step 4 are correct but the problem persists:
Disable and Enable the Ethernet connection while the files are being sent (during the “Sending file...” message -
previous figure). To do this, in Windows OS go to Startup > Control Panel > Network Connection > Local Network,
right-click and select Disable. Now the Local Network status Icon is shown as Disabled. In the same screen right-click
Local Network, select Enable, and wait until Enabled status is shown.
20. Once the memory has been erased and the files upgraded in the relay, the parameters for the Ethernet
communications must be set. The requested values are the IP address and the gateway.

Figure 9-11: IP address setpoint window
These values should match the LAN structure where the relay will be connected.
The relay IP address should have the first three octets corresponding with the gateway and the last octet must be a
free IP address reserved to the relay to avoid possible collisions with other devices.
The gateway must be the one used in the LAN structure connecting the relay
21. After assigning the Ethernet parameters, the upgrade of the boot code is complete and successful.
22. A window is displayed with the message: Setting Default IP address, followed by:
Figure 9-12: BOOTware upgrade successful process
After boot code upgrade, the equipment firmware must also be upgraded.

9.1.3 Firmware version upgrade
9.1.3.1 Introduction
1. Save relay settings and configuration to a file before proceeding, as they will be lost during upgrade.
2. Save calibration settings to a file for firmware revisions lower than 1.50, before upgrading the F650 to a new firmware
version.
3. For firmware revision higher than 1.50 when only upgrading the firmware (no bootware upgrade), the calibration files
are not modified and do not need to be saved.
4. Special care should be taken when the boot code has been previously upgraded: all data (including calibration
settings) is lost.
5. In case of errors during the firmware upgrade process, repeat the entire process as many times as necessary. This is
possible thanks to an independent boot memory (bootcode).
6. A pure firmware upgrade process should use the EnerVista 650 Setup software and Ethernet connection (Port ETH_1
or ETH2) via a Cross-Over RJ45 Ethernet cable.
Note: Downgrading firmware versions can cause errors in measurements.
9.1.3.2 Firmware upgrade

1. Once communication with the relay through the Ethernet connection has been verified, enter the EnerVista 650 Setup
program and select Communication > Upgrade Relay.
Figure 9-13: Upgrade device
2. Select Device FW Upgrade FW version <7.00 and click [...]. to browse for the new firmware file.

Figure 9-14: Select firmware file
3. Once the new firmware file has been selected, click Upgrade to continue.
Figure 9-15: Upgrade firmware selected file
4. Fill in the device IP address, serial number, and order code as needed. (The order code is not required for firmware
versions below 1.70).

Figure 9-16: Relay serial number
5. If the relay is not an enhanced model or one with control functionality, click Upgrade Firmware to continue the
process (see the following figure).
At this point, proceeding with the upgrade erases all data stored in the equipment, including the calibration settings in
firmware versions below 1.50. It is necessary to save all settings to a file now if you have not already done so.

Click Yes to continue. A message is displayed indicating that a local network reboot is necessary (see following figure).
Proceed as follows:
• In the Windows Control Panel (Start > Control Panel), navigate to Network Connection > Local Network. Right-click
and select Disable. Confirm that the Local Network status is now Disabled. Restart the local network in the same
screen (right-click and select Enable). Wait until the local network status is Enabled before continuing.
• Click Upgrade Firmware to continue the process (as shown).

Figure 9-17: Advisory for local network reboot
6. When upgrading models with Enhanced protection or control functionality (see model selection), the upgrade
program requires a password to continue (as shown).
Figure 9-18: Relay upgrade password

For a model with specialized functionality and a password requirement, contact GE Multilin.
The following parameters must be clearly indicated in the order:

• Unit serial number
• Current model option (before memory upgrade)
• Desired model option (after memory upgrade)
• Unit MAC address (available in the identification label)
7. Once the upgrade parameters have been entered, click OK. When communication has been established, the program
shows a message requesting a reboot of the 650 (turn the relay off and then back on) to continue with the upgrade
process.
8. Once the relay has been rebooted, you are prompted to select the new firmware upgrade file (update.txt).
The upgrade files, including update.txt, can be obtained online (http://www.gegridsolutions.com/index.htm) or from
the Technical Service Dept. at any GE Multilin facility. Save the files in a directory in the root drive or the PC desktop.
Extract any zipped files.
Browse to the "update.txt" file and click Open.

Figure 9-19: Firmware file selection

9. A voltage range selection window appears (see following figure). This voltage range is closely related to the serial
number of the relay. For relays manufactured with firmware version 5.70 or higher (from May 2015 onwards), the
EnerVista 650 Setup program automatically selects the appropriate voltage range for the unit based on the serial
number, showing the selection with a step line square over the proper option. Click OK.
In case an incorrect option is selected, metering errors may arise during normal operation (current and voltage values
incorrectly displayed). In order to correct this behavior, the firmware upgrade process must be repeated and the
correct option must be selected.
Figure 9-20: AC voltage range selection - extended V range (version 2)
10. Click Yes.

11. The Upgrade Firmware button is now enabled (figure below). Click to start the upgrade.

Figure 9-21: Initiate upgrade
During the upgrade process, the program displays the files that are being upgraded.

12. When the file transfer is finished, a message is displayed indicating that it is necessary to wait before resetting the
unit, in order to start working with the new firmware version in the relay (figure below).
13. When the whole process has finished a message is displayed asking to switch the F650 on and off (figure below).
14. Click Ok (Aceptar). At this point, the firmware upgrade is finished and the relay can be powered OFF and ON to check
that the firmware has been upgraded properly.
15. User settings and logic files downloading
When upgrading the firmware the entire settings and relay configuration are reset to factory default values. Then the
User is committed to download the settings, configuration and logic files to the relay in order to get it fully operative.
Calibration settings and configuration must be reloaded to the relay the relay.
To recover and download the different files to the relay go to Enervista 650 Setup and at the top menu bar choose:
• Communication > Calibration > Set Calibration Files: to restore calibration settings, if necessary.
• File > Config File (*.650) Converter: to convert the setting and configuration file *.650 for the relay (if it was in a
previous version format).
• File > Send Info to Relay: to send the new settings and configuration file to the unit.
9.1.4 Summary of main steps
9.1.4.1 Boot code upgrade (*)

1. Install the proper version of the EnerVista 650 Setup software.

2. Connect a RS-232cable to the front port relay and connect an Ethernet cable to the rear Ethernet port (crossover
cable for back-to-back connection and straight-through Ethernet cable for hub or switch) .
3. Save all calibration settings to a file.
4. Save all data from the relay (settings, oscillography, events).
5. In the EnerVista 650 Setup software, select Communication > Upgrade Relay.
6. Follow the upgrade instructions, and select the boot program bin file.
7. Reboot the relay as required by the upgrade program.
8. Continue with the upgrade instructions, setting the IP address and gateway when prompted.
9.1.4.2 Firmware upgrade(*)

2. Connect an Ethernet cable to the rear Ethernet port (a cross-over cable for back-to-back connection and straight-
through cable for hub or switch).
3. Set the appropriate IP address in the relay.
4. Set the appropriate IP address in the PC.
6. Enter the IP address, serial number, ad order code of the relay as prompted.
7. Reboot the relay as required by the upgrade program.
8. Locate the upgrade.txt file for the correct relay model.
9. Click Upgrade Firmware to initiate the upgrade process.
10. Reboot the relay as required by the upgrade program to complete the upgrade process.
11. Set calibration settings (from the PC to the relay) for versions lower than 1.50.
12. All settinga and configuration are now set to the factory default.
13. Send new settings and configuration files to the relay if needed.
(*) The boot code upgrade must be performed using a crossed copper cable (RJ45) connected to the PC. It is not necessary
to modify the internal fiber/cable switch, as the upgrade is carried out at 10 Mb/s, and thus there is no cable/fiber
conflict.This does not apply to the firmware upgrade, which can be performed either with the Ethernet fiber connection, or
with the cable connection.
Note: See chapter 13 F650 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE if there is any problem during the upgrade process.

9.2 FIRMWARE UPGRADE VERSION 7.00 OR ABOVE CHAPTER 9: BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPGRADE
9.2 Firmware upgrade version 7.00 or above
This section explains how to upgrade the F650 firmware code for version V7.00 or higher.
BOOT CODE RELEASE NOTES
It is mandatory to maintain version compatibility between firmware and boot code in the upgrade procedure, otherwise
the relay will not start after upgrading.
BEFORE PERFORMING THE UPGRADE PROCEDURE CHECK THAT BOOT AND FIRMWARE VERSION MATCH.
Firmware Bootware Enervista

7.12 7.12 7.20
7.20 7.12 7.20
9.2.1 Communication parameters

1. Ethernet Connection/Type - Firmware upgrade processes require Ethernet communications. It is strongly recommended
to use a direct connection between the PC and the relay using a Cross-Over RJ45 Ethernet cable, instead a direct
connection through a hub or switch.
2. Relay IP Address - It must be assigned a IP address to the relay in the Ethernet parameters via HMI at Product Setup >
Communication > Ethernet > Ethernet E, A or B menu or via Enervista 650 Setup at Setpoint > Product Setup >
Communication Settings > Network (Ethernet) E, A or B as shown in the Table below.
Table 9-2: Ethernet parameters
PRODUCT SETUP > COMMUNICATION SETTINGS > NETWORK (ETHERNET)

NAME EVALUE UNITS RANGE
Netmask Oct1 255 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct2 255 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct3 255 [0 : 255]
Netmask Oct4 0 [0 : 255]
NAME EVALUE UNITS RANGE
3. Example of IP Address Configuration:
The IP address and other parameters already assigned in the process are:
IP Address:192.168.37.177
Netmask:255.255.255.0
Gateway:192.168.37.10

CHAPTER 9: BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPGRADE 9.2 FIRMWARE UPGRADE VERSION 7.00 OR ABOVE
Note: To assure that the configuration is correctly setup it is possible to perform a ping command from the PC.
Then the PC settings should be the same pattern as follows:
IP Address:192.168.37.xxx
Netmask:255.255.255.0
Gateway:192.168.37.10 (if desired)
Where XXX is a number between 0 and 255 that is not assigned to any other device to avoid collisions.
9.2.2 Firmware version upgrade
9.2.2.1 Introduction
1. The relay settings and configuration will be lost, so it is advisable to save them to a file.
2. In case of error during the firmware upgrading process, the user can repeat the whole process as many times as
necessary.
3. Firmware upgrading process should be done using the EnerVista 650 Setup software and Ethernet connection (Port
ETH_E, A or B) via Cross-Over RJ45 Ethernet cable or Fiber Optic cable (depending on order code option).
Note that ETH_A and ETH_B ports cannot be used if PRP configuration is selected.
9.2.2.2 Firmware upgrade
1. Once the communication with the relay through Ethernet connection has been verified, enter the EnerVista 650 Setup
program, select Communication and the Upgrade Relay option on the top menu bar.
2. Select Device Upgrade FW&Boot>=7.00 and click […] to browse for the file. The appropriate *.SFD file should be
obtained from, http://www.gegridsolutions.com/index.htm or from The Technical Service Dept. at any GE Multilin
facility. The file must be saved in the root drive or in the desktop of the PC. Choose the corresponding firmware file for
upgrading the device.

3. Enter communication parameters for the relay being upgraded and click Upgrade.
Figure 9-24: Relay communication parameters
If the IP address is incorrect one, the following message is shown:
4. If the IP address is correctly set, then the message "*.SFD Sending file" is displayed. A sending file status bar shows the
progress of the upgrade.
5. If the file is not sent successfully, the following message box is displayed.

6. After sending the file successfully, the upgrade process starts:
7. When the flashing upgrade process finishes, a message is displayed requesting a relay reboot.
8. User settings and logic files downloading

When upgrading the firmware the entire settings and relay configuration are reset to factory default values. Then the User
is committed to download the settings, configuration and logic files to the relay in order to get it fully operative.
Calibration settings and configuration must be loaded to the relay once the upgrade process has finished.
To recover and download the different files to the relay use Enervista 650 Setup and at the top menu bar choose:

• Communication > Calibration > Set Calibration Files: to restore in the relay the calibration settings if necessary.
• File > Config File (*.650) Converter: to convert the setting and configuration file *.650 for the relay (if it was in a
previous version format).
• File > Send Info to Relay: to send the new settings and configuration file to the unit.
9.2.2.3 Order code upgrade process

In the case of a relay model with specialized functionality (or a new order code requirement) with password requirement
(see model selection), the program requests a password to continue.
1. To reach the window where the password is requested, the user must be communicating with the relay (ONLINE
MODE). On the File menu the following submenu is available (for firmware versions above 7.00):
Figure 9-25: Order code submenu
2. Click Order Code on the menu and the following window is displayed:

Figure 9-26: Set order code
3. This window only allows changing the last digit, which refers to supported communications protocols options. Click
Send:
Figure 9-27: Password requirement (special models)
4. The users must contact GE Multilin and provide the following parameters in their order:
– Unit serial number
– Current model option (before memory upgrade)
– Desired model option (after memory upgrade)
– Unit MAC address (available in the identification label)
5. Once the password is obtained, enter it when prompted.Tthe following messages appear if the password is correct.:

Figure 9-28: Executed successfully
6. After the successful operation, the SEND button is disabled. It is not allowed to make another change from here, so it
can be seen what changes have been made. The new order code appears on the status bar.
Figure 9-29: New order code
9.2.3 Summary of main firmware upgrade steps

2. Connect an Ethernet cable to the rear Ethernet port (a cross-over cable for back-to-back connection and straight-

through cable for hub or switch).

3. Set the appropriate IP address in the relay.
4. Set the appropriate IP address in the PC.
6. Select the appropriate file (DCL000CAXXX.SDF) for the upgrade.
7. Enter the IP address, serial number, and unit identifier of the relay as prompted.
8. Click Upgrade File to initiate the upgrade process.
9. Reboot the relay as required by the upgrade program to complete the upgrade process.
10. All setting and configuration are now set to the factory default.
11. Send new settings and configuration files to the relay if needed.
See chapter 13 F650 trouble shooting guide, if there is any problem during the upgrading
NOTICE process.


GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 10: Commissioning
COMMISSIONING
10.1 Visual inspection
Verify that the relay has not suffered any damage during transportation, and that all screws are correctly fixed, and all
relay terminal boards are in good condition.
Verify that the information shown on the relay front plate corresponds to the data shown on the display, and to the
requested relay model.
Display information:
Firmware version
F650 X.XX(K.KK) Kernel version
GENERAL ELECTRIC
F650XXXXXXXXX Model
19200N81 MODBUS:254

10.2 OUT OF SERVICE SETTING CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
10.2 Out of service setting
The Relay Out Of Service setting is configured in Setpoint > System Setup > Miscellaneous. The unit also has an Out of
Service status that is configured in Relay configuration > Protection elements. When active, these states stop all
changes to PLC equations and functions, including changes to the input/output boards, so if there is a change in any input
or output the unit will not show this change until it has returned to ready mode. For example if an output is closed and the
unit goes to the Out of Service state, the output is kept closed even if the state that closed it changes and would otherwise
open the output. When the unit goes out of the Out of Service state, the output is then opened.
When the Out of Service status goes to ON, or the setting has been changed to Enabled, the ready LED also changes to
red. Be careful if ready LED is linked to an output, because the output will not change its state. To set outputs to ready
state see factory default Logic & Configuration in the detailed manual. Take notice that, in the default configuration, the
general setting out of service is enabled, so it is necessary to change to disabled to start working with the unit
The following figure shows the flow chart of these states

CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING 10.3 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS, POWER SUPPLY NETWORK
10.3 General considerations, power supply network

All devices running on AC current are affected by frequency. As a non-sine wave is the result of a fundamental wave plus a
series of harmonics from this fundamental wave, we can infer that devices running on AC current are influenced by the
applied waveform.
For a correct testing of relays running on AC current, it is fundamental to use a current and/or voltage senoidal waveform.
The pureness of a senoidal wave (lack of harmonics) cannot be expressed specifically for a specific relay. However, any
relay incorporating sintonized circuits, R-L and R-C circuits, is affected by non-senoidal waveforms, as in the case of F650.
These relays respond to the voltage waveform in a different way to the majority of AC current voltmeters. If the power
supply network used for the testing contains wide harmonics, the voltmeter and relay responses are different.
Relays have been calibrated in factory using a Network of 50 or 60 Hz with a minimum harmonic content. When the relay
is tested, a power supply network with no harmonics in its waveform must be used.
The ammeters and chronometers used for testing the pickup current and relay operation time must be calibrated and
their accuracy must be better than the relay’s. The power supply used in the tests must remain stable, mainly in the levels
near the operation thresholds.
It is important to point out that the accuracy with which the test is performed depends on the network and on the
instruments used. Functional tests performed with unsuitable power supply network and instruments are useful to check
that the relay operates properly and therefore its operating characteristics are verified in an approximate manner.
However, if the relay would be calibrated in these conditions, its operational characteristics would be outside the tolerance
range values.
The following sections detail the list of tests for verifying the complete relay functionality.

10.4 ISOLATION TESTS CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
10.4 Isolation tests

During all tests, the screw located on the rear of the relay must be grounded.
For verifying isolation, independent groups are created, and voltage is applied as follows:
2200 RMS volts will be applied progressively among all terminals in a group, short-circuited between them and the
case, during one second.
2200 RMS volts will be applied progressively between groups, during one second.
WARNING: No communication circuit shall be tested for isolation.
Groups to be created depend on the type of modules included in F650, selectable according to the model.
The following table shows the different groups depending on the module type:
G1: H10, H18

SOURCE 1:
G2: H13, H14, H15
G1: H1, H9
SOURCE 2:
G2: H4, H5, H6
G1: A5..A12
MAGNETIC MODULE.
G2: B1..B12
G1 (Inp. 1): F1..9
I/O F1 (MIXED) G2 (Inp. 2): F10..18
G3 (Out.): F19..36
G1 (Spv 1): F1..4
G2 (Inp. 1): F5..9
G3 (Inp. 2): F10..14
I/O F2 (SUPERVISION)
G4 (Spv 2): F15..18
G5 (Out.): F19..30
G6 (Out.): F31.36
G1 (Inp. 1): G1..9
I/O G1 (MIXED) G2 (Inp. 2): G10..18
G3 (Out.): G19..36
G1 (Inp. 1): G1..9
G2 (Inp. 2): G10..18
I/O G4 (32DI)
G3 (Inp. 3): G19..28
G4 (Inp. 3): G29..36
G1 (Inp. 1): G1..9
I/O G5 (analog)
G2 (Inp. 2): G10..18

CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING 10.5 INDICATORS
10.5 Indicators
Feed the relay and verify that when commanding a LED reset operation, all LED indicators light up and they are turned off
when pressing the ESC key for more than 3 seconds.
10.6 Power supply testing
Feed the relay with the minimum and maximum voltage. For each voltage value, verify that the alarm relay is activated
when there is voltage, and it is deactivated when there is no feed. If the power supply source incorporates AC feed, this test
is also performed for VAC.
If the relay incorporates a redundant power supply, these tests shall be performed on both power supplies.
Voltage values to be applied are the ones indicated below according to the relay model:
SUPPLY V min. V max.

HI/HIR
110-250 Vdc 88 Vdc 300 Vdc
120-230 Vac 96 Vac 250 Vac
LO/LOR
24-48 Vdc 19.2 Vdc 57.6 Vdc
NOTE: Codes HIR and LOR correspond to a redundant power supply
10.7 Communications
Verify that available communication ports allow communication with the relay.
Ports to be checked are as follows:
Front:RS232
Rear:2 x RS485, 2 x Fiber Optic - Serial, 2 x Fiber Optic - Ethernet, 1 x RJ45 - Ethernet .
A computer with EnerVista 650 Setup software and an appropriate connector must be used.

10.8 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
10.8 Verification of measurement

Set the relay as follows
GENERAL SETTINGS
NAME VALUE UNITS RANGE
PHASE CT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
GROUND CT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
STV GROUND CT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
PHASE VT RATIO 1.0 0.1 1.0-6000.0
PHASE VT CONNECTION WYE N/A WYE – DELTA
NOMINAL VOLTAGE 100 V 0.1 1-2250 V
NOMINAL FREQUENCY 50 Hz 1 Hz 50-60 Hz
PHASE ROTATION ABC N/A ABC – ACB
FREQUENCY REFERENCE VI N/A VI-VII-VIII
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE VX N/A VX – VN
NOTE:
ALL ANGLES INDICATED ARE LAGGING ANGLES
ALL VALUES OBTAINED IN THIS TEST MUST BE THE ONES CORRESPONDING TO THE PHASOR ONES
10.8.1 Voltages
Apply the following voltage and frequency values to the relay:
CHANNEL ANGLE FREQUENCY

50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
VI 0º 0 5 50 100 150 200
VII 120º 0 5 50 100 150 200
VIII 240º 0 5 50 100 150 200
VX 0º 0 5 50 100 150 200
Verify that the relay measures the values with an error of ±1 % of the applied value from 10V to 208V.
10.8.2 Phase currents

Apply the following current and frequency values to the relay:
CHANNEL ANGLE FREQUENCY
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
Ia (A) 45º 0 15 10 5 1 0.1
Ib (A) 165º 0 15 10 5 1 0.1
Ic (A) 285º 0 15 10 5 1 0.1
IG (A) 0º 0 15 10 5 1 0.1
ISG (A) 0º 0 5 1 0.1 0.01 0.005
Verify that the relay measures the values with an error lower than ±0.5% of the test value or ± 10 mA, whichever is greater,
for phases and ground.
Verify that the relay measures the values with an error lower than ±1.5% of the test value or ± 1 mA, whichever is greater,
for sensitive ground (SG).

CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING 10.8 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT
Percent of Load-to-Trip
The relevant actual values displays are shown below:
Actual > Metering > Primary Values > Current > % of Load-to-trip
Note Percent of load-to-trip is calculated from the phase with the highest current reading. It is the ratio of this current to
the lowest pickup setting among the phase time and instantaneous overcurrent protection features. If all of these features
are disabled, the value displayed is “0”.
- Inject current of various values into Phase A.
- Verify that percent load-to-trip is calculated as the correct
percentage of the most sensitive operational Phase Overcurrent
element and displayed.
- Repeat for phases B and C.
10.8.3 Active, reactive power, and COSJ metering

Equations to be applied for powers in a wye connection are as follows:
Power per phase Three-phase power

P=V*I*Cosϕ P=Pa+Pb+Pc
Q=V*I*Senϕ Q=Qa+Qb+Qc
Apply the following current and voltage values:
APPLIED VOLTAGE AND CURRENT VALUES PER PHASE

Phase a Phase b Phase c V-I Angles
VI = 50 V, 0º VII = 50 V , 120º VIII = 50V, 240º ϕ=45º
Ia = 10∠45º Ib= 10∠165º Ic = 10∠285º Cosϕ= 0.707
With the indicated voltage and current values, verify that the power measure corresponds to expected values indicated in
the following table:
EXPECTED POWER VALUES

Phase a Phase b Phase c Three-phase
Pa = 353.55 MW Pb = 353.55 MW Pc = 353.55 MW P = 1060.66 MW
Qa = 353.55 MVAr Qb = 353.55 MVAr Qc = 353.55 MVAr Q = 1060.66 MVAr
Maximum admissible error is ± 1% of the test value for P and Q, and 0.02 for cosj.

10.8 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENT CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
10.8.4 Frequency
Frequency measure on channel VII (terminals A7-A8):
Apply 50 Vac at 50 Hz on channel VII. Maximum admissible error:± 10 mHz.
Apply 50 Vac at 60 Hz on channel VII. Maximum admissible error: ± 12 mHz.
Frequency measure on channel Vx (terminals A11-A12):

Apply 50 Vac at 50 Hz on channel Vx. Maximum admissible error:± 10 mHz.
Apply 50 Vac at 60 Hz on channel Vx. Maximum admissible error: ± 12 mHz.
Results:
CHANNEL Voltage (V) Set Frequency (Hz) Measured Frequency (Hz)

VII 50 50 Hz
60 Hz
VX 50 50 Hz
60 Hz

CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING 10.9 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
10.9 Inputs and outputs

During all tests, the screw on the rear of the relay must be grounded.
10.9.1 Digital inputs

During this test, the user determines the activation/deactivation points for every input in the relay for the set voltage value
of 30 Volts.
Verify that the error does not exceed ± 10% (+10% on activation, -10% on deactivation).
Default board settings for the input test can be modified in EnerVista 650 Setup software in:
Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs > Contact I/O > Board X
X, is substituted by the corresponding board:
F for board in first slot
G for board in second slot
H for board in first slot of CIO module
J for board in second slot of CIO module
Test settings for mixed board (type 1:16 inputs and 8 outputs):
I/O Board Type 1 (MIXED)

Voltage Threshold A_X 30 V
Voltage Threshold B_X 40 V
Debounce Time A_X 5 ms
Debounce Time B_X 5 ms
Input Type_X_CC1 (CC1) POSITIVE
... ...
The inputs test is completed by groups of 8 inputs, as this type of board has 2 groups of 8 inputs with the same common.
For the first 8 inputs, the voltage threshold setting is determined by Voltage Threshold A. For the next 8 inputs, the setting
is Voltage Threshold B. Inputs (or contact converters, CC1 – CC16) must also be set to POSITIVE.
Test settings for mixed board (type 2: 8 digital inputs, 4 blocks for supervision and 8 outputs):
I/O Board Type 2 (SUPERVISION)

Voltage Threshold A_X 30 V
Voltage Threshold B_X 40 V
Debounce Time A_X 5 ms
Debounce Time B_X 5 ms
... ...
The inputs test is completed by groups of 4 inputs, as this type of board has 2 groups of 4 inputs with the same common.
For the first 4 inputs, the voltage threshold setting is determined by Voltage Threshold A. For the next 4 inputs, the setting
is Voltage Threshold B. Inputs (or contact converters, CC1 – CC8) must also be set to POSITIVE.
If the relay incorporates more input modules, these tests must also be applied to them.

10.9 INPUTS AND OUTPUTS CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
10.9.2 Contact outputs

The correct activation of every output to be verified.
For every output, activation command of a single contact must be given, and then verify that only that contact is
activated. Go to EnerVista 650 Setup Software (Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs > Force Outputs).
For switched contacts, the change of state of both contacts shall be verified.
10.9.3 Circuit continuity supervision inputs

Supervision inputs are tested as normal inputs, revising the voltage level that is 19 Volts.
Coil 1:
Apply 19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F1-F2) and 52/b (terminals F3-F4)”Coil 1” circuit supervision inputs and verify that
they are activated.
Apply -19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F1-F2) and 52/b (terminals F3-F4)”Coil 1” circuit supervision inputs and verify
that they are activated.
Remove voltage from both inputs and verify that it takes them 500 ms to change state (deactivate).
Coil 2:
Apply 19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F15-F16) and 52/b (terminals F17-F18)”Coil 2” circuit supervision inputs and
verify that they are activated.
Apply -19 Vdc to both 52/a (terminals F15-F16) and 52/b (terminals F17-F18)”Coil 2” circuit supervision inputs and
verify that they are activated.
Remove voltage from both inputs and verify that it takes them 500 ms to change state (deactivate).
10.9.4 Latching circuits

Send a closing command to the latched contact (F31-F33).
Make circulate a current of 500 mA through the contact in series with the sensing terminal.
Send an opening command and verify that the contact does not open.
Interrupt current and check that the contact is released.
500
I
Repeat the test for the other latched contact (F34-F36).

CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING 10.10 CONNECTIONS FOR TESTING PROTECTION ELEMENTS
10.10 Connections for testing protection elements

Connect current sources to the relay according to the wiring diagram. Current and voltage input terminals are as follows:
Phase Connections
Current
IA B1-B2
IB B3-B4
IC B5-B6
IG B9-B10
ISG B11-B12
Voltage
VI A5-A6
VII A7-A8
VIII A9-A10
VX A11-A12

10.11 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50PH, 50PL, 50N, 50G, 50SG) CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
10.11 Instantaneous overcurrent (50PH, 50PL, 50N, 50G, 50SG)

Set the relay to trip for the protection element being tested. Configure any of the outputs to be enabled only by the
protection element being tested.
Apply 0.9 times the Pickup current and check that the relay does not trip.
Gradually increase the current value and verify that the relay operates between 1 and 1.1 times the set pickup current.
The relay must trip by instantaneous in a time frame of 10 to 55 ms. All the relay trip contacts must operate, as well as the
contact set as 50.
Remove current and apply it again suddenly to a value of 4 times the pickup current. The relay should trip instantaneously
in a time frame of 10 to 45 ms.
Test one point for each phase and group of the protection element.
50 ELEMENTS TEST PARAMETERS

Element Settings (50PH, 50PL, 50G and 50SG)
Setting Value Units
Function Enabled
Input RMS NA
Pickup Level 3 A
Delay time 0 Seconds
Test Execution
Configure one output for 50 Trip
Apply times I pickup Element Trip Tripping times (ms)
0.9 x Pickup NO NA
1.1 x Pickup YES 10-55
4 x Pickup YES 10-45
Elements Phase Group
50PH and 50PL IA 0
IB 0
IC 0
50G IG 0
50SG (*) ISG 0
Note (*): Only available for Enhanced models

CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING 10.12 TIME OVERCURRENT (51PH, 51PL, 51N, 51G, 46)
10.12 Time overcurrent (51PH, 51PL, 51N, 51G, 46)

Set the relay to trip for the protection element being tested. Configure any of the outputs to be activated only by the
Apply 0.9 times the Pickup current and check that the relay does not trip.
Apply 1.5 times the Pickup current. The relay should trip according to the time corresponding to its set curve.
Apply 5 times the Pickup current. The relay should trip according to the time corresponding to its set curve.
Protection Element Settings (51PH, 51PL, 51N, 51G and 46)

Setting Value Unit
Function Enabled
Input Phasor (DFT)
Pickup Level 1 A
Curve Modify for each test
TD Multiplier Modify for each test
Voltage Restraint Disabled
Element Phase Curve type Dial Times Ipickup Tripping times (sec)
EXPECTED Admissible
51PH IA IEEE Ext Inv 0.5 0.9 NA
1.5 11.34 [11.00 – 11.90]
5 0.648 [0.600 – 0.710]
IB IEC Curve A 0.05 0.9 NA
1.5 0.860 [0.750 – 0.950]
5 0.214 [0.200 – 0.300]
51PL IC IEEE Ext Inv 0.5 0.9 NA
1.5 11.34 [11.00 – 11.60]
5 0.648 [0.600 – 0.710]
IB IEC Curve A 0.05 0.9 NA
1.5 0.860 [0.750 – 0.950]
5 0.214 [0.200 – 0.300]
51N IC IEEE Ext Inv 0.5 0.9 NA
1.5 11.34 [11.00 – 11.60]
5 0.648 [0.600 – 0.710]
51G IG Definite Time 2 0.9 NA
5 2.000 [1.900 – 2.100]
46 I2 IEC Curve A 0.05 0.9 NA
1.5 0.860 [0.750 – 0.950]
5 0.214 [0.200 – 0.300]

10.13 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS (67P, 67N, 67G, 67SG) CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
10.13 Directional elements (67P, 67N, 67G, 67SG)

In order to test directional units in the relay, instantaneous trips are commanded.
Two points are tested, per phase, test element.
In order to test the directional units, configure (in the Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Protection Elements screen of the
EnerVista 650 Setup program), some overcurrent element to be supervised by a directional unit. This way, if the directional
element is enabled and detects the fault in the block direction, then the overcurrent unit does not operate. If the directional
element is not enabled or if it is enabled and it detects a fault in a trip direction, then the overcurrent unit operates if the set
current level is exceeded.
10.13.1 67P element

Activate only protection elements 50PH and 67P and set the relay as follows:
67P Settings 50PH Settings

Function ENABLED Function ENABLED
MTA 45 Deg Input PHASOR (DFT)
Direction FORWARD Pickup Level 0.50 A
Block Logic PERMISSION Trip Delay 0.30
Pol V Threshold 30 V Reset Delay 0.00
Configure one of the outputs to be activated only by unit 50PH.

Apply the following tests:
Elements Phase under test Polarization Phase Element trip

Channel Magnitude Channel Magnitude
Mod Arg Mod Arg
50PH/67P IA 2A 0º VIII 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
IB 2A 0º VI 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
IC 2A 0º VII 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
10.13.2 67N element

Activate only protection elements 50N and 67N and set the relay as follows:
67N Settings 50N Settings
MTA -45 Deg Input PHASOR (DFT)
Polarization VO Trip Delay 0.30
Block Logic PERMISSION Reset Delay 0.00
Pol V Threshold 10 V
Configure one of the outputs to be activated only by unit 50G.

CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING 10.13 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS (67P, 67N, 67G, 67SG)

Mod Arg Mod Arg
50N/67N IA 2A 0º VI 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
IB 0A 0º VII 0V 0º
IC 0A 0º VIII 0V 0º
10.13.3 67G element

Activate only protection elements 50G and 67G and set the relay as follows:
67G Settings 50G Settings

Configure one of the outputs to be activated only by unit 50G.


Mod Arg Mod Arg
50G/67G IG 2A 0º VI 60V 0º NO
60V 180º YES
VII 0º
VIII 0º
10.13.4 67SG element

Activate only protection elements 50SG and 67SG and set the relay as follows:
67SG Settings 50SG Settings


10.13 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS (67P, 67N, 67G, 67SG) CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
Configure one of the outputs to be activated only by unit 50SG.


Mod Arg Mod Arg
50SG/67SG ISG 2A 0º VI 60 V 0º NO
60 V 180º YES
VII 0V 0º
VIII 0V 0º

CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING 10.14 UNDERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (27P, 27X)
10.14 Undervoltage elements (27P, 27X)

10.14.1 27P element
Set the relay as follows:
PHASE UV (27P)
Function ENABLED
Mode PHASE-GROUND
Pickup Level 50 V
Curve DEFINITE TIME
Delay 2.00 sec
Minimum Voltage 30 V
Logic ANY PHASE
Supervised by 52 DISABLED
Apply voltage as indicated on the table over the undervoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Decrease voltage level gradually and verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
Element Phase Curve Pickup Delay Applied Tripping times (s)

Level Voltage EXPECTED Admissible
27P VI DEFINITE 50 V 2 55 V NO TRIP NA
TIME 45 V 2.000 sec [2.000 – 2.100]
10.14.2 27X element

GENERAL SETTINGS
Auxiliary Voltage VX
AUXILIARY UV (27X)
Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 50 V
Curve DEFINITE TIME
Delay 2.00 sec
Apply voltage as indicated on the table over the undervoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Decrease voltage level gradually and verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
Element Input Curve Pickup Delay Applied Tripping time (s)

Level Voltage EXPECTED Admissible
27X VX DEFINITE 50 V 2 55 V NO TRIP NA
TIME 45 V 2.000 sec [2.000 – 2.100]

10.15 OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47) CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
10.15 Overvoltage elements (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47)

10.15.1 59P element
PHSE OV (59P)
Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 120 V
Trip Delay 2.00
Reset Delay 0.00
Logic ANY PHASE
Apply voltage as indicated on the table under the overvoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip.
Verify that the relay trips for the set voltage (with an admissible error of 5%).
Element Phase Pickup Level Trip Delay Applied Voltage (V) Tripping time (s)
(volts) (seconds) EXPECTED Admissible
59P VII 120 2 114 NO TRIP NA
132 2 [1.9–2.1 ]
132 2 [1.9 – 2.1]
10.15.2 59X element

GENERAL SETTINGS
Auxiliary Voltage VX
AUXILIARY OV (59P)
Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 120 V
Trip Delay 2.00
Reset Delay 0.00
Logic ANY PHASE
Element Input Pickup Level Trip Delay Applied Voltage (V) Tripping time (s)
59X VX 120 2 114 NO TRIP NA
132 2 [1.9–2.1]
132 2 [1.9 – 2.1]

CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING 10.15 OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47)
10.15.3 59NH and 59NL elements

GENERAL SETTINGS
Auxiliary Voltage VN
NEUTRAL OV HIGH/LOW (59NH/59NL)

Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 120 V
Trip Delay 2.00
Reset Delay 0.00
Elements Input Pickup Level Trip Delay Applied Voltage (V) Tripping time (s)
59NH/59NL VX 120 2 114 NO TRIP NA
132 2 [1.9–2.1 ]
132 2 [1.9 – 2.1]
This element can also be tested by applying only phase voltages. For this purpose, it is necessary to set Auxiliary Voltage =
VX. In this condition, Vn voltage is calculated as a sum of the phase voltages.
10.15.4 47 element - Neg Seq OV

NEG SEQ OV (47)

Function ENABLED
Pickup Level 50 V
Trip Delay 2.00
Reset Delay 0.00
CHANNEL Applied Voltage (V) Angle Tripping time (s)

EXPECTED Admissible
VI 65 0º NO TRIP NA
VII 65 120º
VIII 65 240º
VI 55 0º 2 [1.9–2.1]
VII 55 240º
VIII 55 120º
VI 45 0º NO TRIP NA
VII 45 240º
VIII 45 120º

10.15 OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS (59P, 59X, 59NH, 59NL, 47) CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
NOTE: All angles mentioned on the tables are delay angles, where a balanced ABC system would be composed by:
CHANNEL Applied Voltage (V) Angle
VI 65 0º
VII 65 120º
VIII 65 240º

CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING 10.16 FREQUENCY ELEMENTS (81O/81U)
10.16 Frequency elements (81O/81U)

GENERAL SETTINGS
Nominal Frequency 50 Hz
ELEMENT SETTINGS
FREQUENCY (81) 81U 81O
Function ENABLED ENABLED
Pickup Level 47.50 Hz 52.50 Hz
Trip Delay 2.00 sec 2.00 sec
Reset Delay 0.00 sec 0.00 sec
Minimum Voltage 30 V 30 V
Apply voltage as indicated on the table, modifying frequency from the maximum threshold (48 Hz) to the minimum (46 Hz)
for 81U, and from the minimum (52 Hz) to the maximum (54 Hz) for 81O, in steps of 10 mHz.
Verify that the relay trips at the set frequency in the corresponding element with an error of 3% ó ±50 mHz.
Apply a voltage that is lower than the “Minimum Voltage” setting, with a frequency under (81U) or over (81O) the setting,
and verify that the relay does not trip.
Elements Phase Pickup Level (Hz) Trip Delay Applied Voltage Frequency Tripping Time (s)
(seconds) (V) Thresholds EXPECTED Admissible
81U VII 47.5 2 80 48 Hz No trip NA
46 Hz 2 [1.9 -2.1]
25 46 Hz No trip NA
81 O VII 52.5 2 80 52 Hz No trip NA
54 Hz 2 [1.9 –2.1]
25 54 Hz No trip NA

10.17 RECLOSER (79) CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
10.17 Recloser (79)

Set protection element 79 as follows:
RECLOSER
Function ENABLED
Max Number Shots 4
Dead Time 1 2.10 sec
Reclaim Time 3.00 sec
Cond. Permission ENABLED
Hold Time 7.00 sec
Reset Time 5.00 sec
Set the relay to trip by 50PH, and configure the signals necessary to test the 79 element:
Configure one output as AR RECLOSE
Configure the AR INITIATE signal with the 50PH trip
Configure the AR LEVEL BLOCK signal with a digital input
Configure the AR CONDS INPUT with the digital signal desired
50PH Settings
Function ENABLED
Input RMS
Pickup Level 3A
Trip Delay 0.00 s
Reset Delay 0.00 s
10.17.1 Reclosing cycle

Connect a latching relay simulating the breaker managed by the F650 unit.
Once the relay is set, close the breaker and wait for 5 seconds.
After this time, the recloser is ready to initiate the reclosing cycle.
Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the relay recloses in 2.1 seconds.
Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the recloser passes to Lockout.
Verify the correct operation of programmed outputs
Tripping times must be within the following values:
Reclosing Cycle
Nº shot Expected time Admissible time
1 2.1 sec [1.8 – 2.3]
2 4.1 sec [3.8 – 4.3]
3 6.1 sec [5.8 – 6.3]
4 8.1 sec [7.8 – 8.3]

CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING 10.17 RECLOSER (79)
10.17.2 Recloser status

BLOCK
Activate the block input and verify that the recloser is in BLOCK status.
Close the breaker and wait for 5 seconds.
Command a trip and verify that the breaker opens but there is no reclose.
INHIBITION BY RECLOSING CONDITIONS

Command a trip, verify that the breaker opens and wait for the first shot.
Activate the inhibition input and command a new trip.
Verify that the breaker opens, wait for 8 seconds and verify that the relay does not reclose.
10.17.3 External reclose initiation

Activate the reclose initiation input and open the breaker, verify that the relay executes the first shot

10.18 THERMAL IMAGE ELEMENT (49) CHAPTER 10: COMMISSIONING
10.18 Thermal image element (49)

Disable all protection elements except for Thermal Model (49).
Set the pickup level to 2 A.
Set the time constant t1 to 3 minutes and t2 to one time t1.
Apply currents of 2, 5, and 10 times the tap and ensure that the operation times are within the range described on the
following table:
Rated Current (A) Applied Current (A) Times de set tap Operation time (s)
4.0 2 48.5 - 53.6
5 10.0 5 7.06 - 7.80
20.0 10 1.77 - 1.95
After each measuring, the thermal element must be reset to zero in order to start the next test at a zero thermal status
condition.
Repeat the test selecting a time constant t1 of 60 minutes. Verify that the operation time is within the range described on
the following table:
Rated Current (A) Applied Current (A) Times de set tap Operation time (s)
4.0 2 960 - 1072
5 10.0 5 141 - 156
20.0 10 35.4 - 39
After each measuring, the thermal element must be reset to zero in order to start the next test at a zero thermal status
condition.

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 11: Application examples
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
11.1 Example 1: Communication & protection settings

11.1.1 Description
The requirements for this setting exercise are:
Communicate the relay via serial cable or Ethernet 10/100 Base T cable using EnerVista 650 Setup program.
Set some Phase Time Overcurrent protection function to operate at 5A, Inverse curve IEC, Dial 0.1
Set some Output contact on board F to be operated and sealed by the operation of the phase TOC.
Set some LED to show the operation of the phase TOC
Set some Operation to reset the output contact after dropout of the phase TOC since the front F1 pushbutton.
Set some Oscillography channel to record the pickup of phase TOC and output contact closing action.
To test the operation of this Phase Time Overcurrent protection
11.1.2 Communicate with the relay

This procedure describes the connection between any Laptop and some F650 relay using the EnerVista 650 SETUP
program
For any one of these connections check first the communication parameters as follows:
Serial Communication (RS232 or USB front port of the relay)

With the ESC key check on the main front screen the serial communication parameters (Baud rate, parity, data bits, stop
bit and ID number).
Connect the serial cable PC-F650
Open the EnerVista 650 SETUP program in the PC and under Communication  Computer menu check that the serial
communication parameters displayed are the same read in the front of the relay. Check also that:
Control Type is set to No Control Type
Startup Mode is set to Communicate with relay

11.1 EXAMPLE 1: COMMUNICATION & PROTECTION SETTINGS CHAPTER 11: APPLICATION EXAMPLES
Click ON key.
Ethernet LAN (10/100 Base T rear port of the relay)
In the Laptop choose My PC-Control Panel-Network-Protocols-Protocol TCP/IP-Advance and set in IP Address screen
the following:
IP Address 192.168.37.126
Netmask 255.255.255.0
In the front of F650 go to the Main Settings screen.

choose Change Settings .
Choose Comm Settings and press down the rotating knob or down key.
Choose Network 0 . It is displayed IP Address OCT 1 and set it according to the following table:
Sequence
Action Setting Action
---- IP Address OCT 1 Set to 192
Move rotating knob clockwise IP Address OCT 2 Set to 168
Move rotating knob clockwise Netmask OCT 2 Set to 255
Move rotating knob clockwise Netway IP OCT 1 Leave default setting without any change
Move rotating knob clockwise Press INTRO Press enter to validate settings
Go to General Settings . General Settings 0 is now displayed.

Set ModBus Port Number to 502 .
Set ModBus Address COM1 to 254 .
Move clockwise the rotating knob or press the down key to find Press Enter to End and press it down to validate the
setting.
Connect a crossover 10/100 MB Ethernet cable from PC to the relay.
Open the EnerVista 650 SETUP program in the PC and under Communication  Computer menu and set:
IP Address 192.168.37.125
Port 502
Unit Identifier 254
Control Type to ModBus/TCP
Startup Mode to Communicate with relay
Click ON key.
The program starts connection with the relay showing the progress screen.

CHAPTER 11: APPLICATION EXAMPLES 11.1 EXAMPLE 1: COMMUNICATION & PROTECTION SETTINGS
11.1.3 Set the protection function

Once the relay has been connected set protection functions and outputs according to the following steps:
Open EnerVista 650 SETUP program and under:
SETPOINT  SYSTEM SETUP   GENERAL SETTINGS
Name Value
Phase CT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Ground CT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Stv Ground CT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Phase VT Ratio 1.0 (default)
Phase VT Connection Wye
Nominal Voltage 100.0 (default)
Nominal Frequency 50
Phase Rotation ABC
Frequency Reference VI (default)
Auxiliary Voltage VX (default)
Under
SETPOINT  PROTECTION ELEMENTS   PHASE CURRENT   PHASE TOC HIGH  PHASE TOC HIGH 1
Name Value
Function Enabled
Input Phasor DFT
Pickup Level 5.0 A
Curve IEC Curve A
TD Multiplier 0.1
Reset Instantaneous
Voltage Restraint Disabled
Under
SETPOINT  CONTROL ELEMENTS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  BOARD F
Name Value
Output Logic_00_00 Positive
Output Type_00_00 Latch
Under
SETPOINT  RELAY CONFIGURATION  OUTPUTS
Select Name Source OR
Contact Output Operate 00 (Board F) C Output Oper_00_00 Press for Logic
Phase TOC A Op
Phase TOC B Op
Phase TOC C Op
Contact Output Reset 00 (Board F) C Output Reset_00_00 Operation bit 000

11.1 EXAMPLE 1: COMMUNICATION & PROTECTION SETTINGS CHAPTER 11: APPLICATION EXAMPLES
Under
SETPOINT  RELAY CONFIGURATION  LEDS
Select Name Source
Led 5 C Output Op 00 C Output_00_00
Under
SETPOINT  RELAY CONFIGURATION  OPERATIONS
Select Operation 0
Command Text Reset C Output 00
Interlock Type None
Interlocks ---
Final State Type None
Final States ---
Frontal Key F1
Contact Input None
Virtual Output None
Time Out 500 (default)
MMI ---
Com1 ---
Com 2 ---
ETH-Master 1 ---
ETH Master 2 ---
ETH Master 3 ---
ETH Master 4 ---
Under
SETPOINT  RELAY CONFIGURATION  OSCILLOGRAPHY
Select Name Source
Digital Channel 1 C Output Op_00_00 C Output Oper_00_00
Digital Channel 2 C Output_00_00 C Output_00_00
11.1.4 Test
Apply 7.5 A in phase A (terminals B1-B2) until contact 00 on Board F operates (terminals F19-F21 should be and remain
closed), and LED 5 should be lit. Check that operating time is in the order of 1.7 seconds.
Remove current from terminals B1-B2
Press pushbutton F1 and check that contact 00 on Board F has been open.
Check that LED 5 in the front of the relay has been turned off.
Repeat the process for phase B (terminals B3-B4) and for phase C (terminals B5-B6)
Under Actual  Waveform Capture menu retrieve the last oscillography recording stored, open it using GE_OSC program
and check that the two digital signals as well as the current signal were kept.

CHAPTER 11: APPLICATION EXAMPLES 11.2 EXAMPLE 2: TOC PROTECTION & RECLOSING SETTINGS
11.2 Example 2: TOC protection & reclosing settings
11.2.1 Description
The purpose of this exercise is to introduce the F650 User about the way to set a protection scheme including:
Trip operation of a phase time overcurrent protection.
Two reclosing shots with successful fault clearing.
Synchronism check action to verify two ends voltage conditions previous to perform each reclosing action.
11.2.2 Communicate with the relay

This procedure is described in Example Nº 1. Therefore check the actual PC communication status to assure a fast and
reliable communication with F650 relay.
11.2.3 Set the protection function

This procedure is fully described in paragraph 13.3 (see Example Nº 1). Therefore it is not necessary to explain it here again
except about the small modifications required for the actual exercise, as well the additional settings not used until now (i.e.
recloser and synchrocheck).
Therefore, by having the F650 set like in the previous exercise (paragraph 13), the new settings and changes to be done in
the relay to work in a protection-reclosing scheme are:
Under
SETPOINT  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKER   BREAKER SETTINGS
Name Value
Number of Switchgear 1
Under
SETPOINT  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT I/O  BOARD F
Name Value
Voltage Threshold B_00 80V
Debounce Time B_00 10 ms
Input Type_00_00 (CC1) Positive
Delay Input Time_00_00 (CC1) 0 ms
Output Type_00_00 Normal
Pulse Output Time_00_00 500 ms
Under
SETPOINT  RELAY CONFIGURATION  PROTECTION ELEMENTS
Select Source OR
AR Initiate Press for Logic
Phase TOC A Op
Phase TOC B Op
Phase TOC C Op
AR Conds Input Synch Close Perm

11.2 EXAMPLE 2: TOC PROTECTION & RECLOSING SETTINGS CHAPTER 11: APPLICATION EXAMPLES
11.2.4 Set the recloser

Under
SETPOINT  CONTROL ELEMENTS  AUTORECLOSE
Name Value
Function Enabled
Max. Number of shots 2
Dead Time 1 2.0s
Dead Time 2 4.0s
Dead Time 3 ---
Dead Time 4 ---
Reclaim Time 0.05s
Condition Permission Enabled
Hold Time 0.1s
Reset Time 1.9s
11.2.5 Set the synchrocheck

Under
SETPOINT  CONTROL ELEMENTS   OTHER FUNCTIONS   SYNCHROCHECK
The synchrocheck function and its permission to close is a condition in the present exercise to allow the recloser to give
the different programmed shots. Should not this condition be required these settings are non relevant, but if does like in
the present case the synchrocheck function must be set as follows
Name Value
Function Enabled
Dead Bus Level 10V
Live Bus Level 50V
Dead Line Level 10V
Live Line Level 50V
Max. Volt Difference 10
Max. Angle Difference 10º
Max. Freq. Difference 20mHz
Breaker Closing Time 0.07s
DL-DB Function Disabled
LL-DB Function Disabled
DL-LB Function Disabled
Additional comments on scheme

The programmed operation of a TOC protection with reclosing and synchrocheck features for the F650 relay is shown in
F650 Tripping and reclosing scheme Figure 11-1: F650 tripping and reclosing scheme Some conclusions follows:
The recloser cycle ends at lockout status since a permanent fault remains after two unsuccessful reclosing trials.

CHAPTER 11: APPLICATION EXAMPLES 11.2 EXAMPLE 2: TOC PROTECTION & RECLOSING SETTINGS
The holding time for reclosing conditions can be very low since the processor internal time to check them is
instantaneously if they are present at this moment. Depending in the application reclosing conditions might come later
especially when commands are sent from dispatching center. If does then this timing must be set properly.
The F650 trip contact over-travel is the time the contact remains closed for some definite time to assure the tripping action
of the breaker, specially in CB’s with large tripping times (bulk or other CB’s). This time delay has been set in group
SETPOINT  CONTROL ELEMENTS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  BOARD F
To test the reclosing scheme one current and two voltages signals equipment with phase and frequency shifting capability
must be used. The current source must be switched OFF and ON in the time ranges described in the scheme
Figure 11-1: F650 tripping and reclosing scheme

11.3 EXAMPLE 3: SET AN OPERATION CHAPTER 11: APPLICATION EXAMPLES
11.3 Example 3: Set an operation

11.3.1 Description
This simple operation describes how to program and set an operation command on the F650 relay. In the present case
the operation is:
To configure some F650 output contact to be operated since the front of the relay.
To set some LED to show the operation of the output contact (while being closed).
To close a F650 output contact using a front key pushbutton.
To reset the output contact and LED using another front key pushbutton.
11.3.2 Procedure
Set the following values:
Under
SETPOINT  CONTROL ELEMENTS Þ INPUTS/OUTPUTS  BOARD F
Name Value
Output Type_00_00 Latch
Pulse Output Time 10000ms *
* This setting is non-relevant since it applies only when “pulse” type is chosen
Under
SETPOINT  RELAY CONFIGURATION  OUTPUTS
Select Name Source

C_Output Oper_00_00 Operation_bit000
Contact Output Operate 00 (Board F)
C_Output Reset_00_00 Operation_bit001
Contact Output Reset 00 (Board F)
Under
SETPOINT  RELAY CONFIGURATION  LEDS
Select Name Source

Close Contact_00_00 C_Output_00_00
Led 14

CHAPTER 11: APPLICATION EXAMPLES 11.3 EXAMPLE 3: SET AN OPERATION
Under
SETPOINT  RELAY CONFIGURATION  OPERATIONS
Select Operation 0
Command Text Close C_Output_00_00
Interlock Type None
Interlocks ---
Final States ---
Frontal Key F2
Contact Input None
Virtual Output None
MMI ---
Com1 ---
Com 2 ---
ETH-Master 1 ---
ETH Master 2 ---
ETH Master 3 ---
ETH Mastef 4 ---
In the same window (next rows)
Select Operation 1
Command Text Reset C_Output_00_00
Interlock Type None
Interlocks ---
Final States ---
Frontal Key F1
Contact Input None
Virtual Output None
MMI ---
Com1 ---
Com 2 ---
ETH-Master 1 ---
ETH Master 2 ---
ETH Master 3 ---
ETH Mastef 4 ---

11.3 EXAMPLE 3: SET AN OPERATION CHAPTER 11: APPLICATION EXAMPLES
11.3.3 Test
In the main front screen press F2 key.
A message showing “Press Enter to Confirm Key ®F2¬” is displayed.
Press Enter.
Check that contact_00_00 (board F) has been closed.
Check that the front LED 14th is lit.
In the main front screen press F1 key.
A message showing “Press Enter to Confirm Key ®F1¬” is displayed.
Press Enter.
Check that contact_00_00 (board F) has been opened.
Check that the front LED 14th has been switched off

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 12: Frequently asked questions
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
12.1 Communications
Q1. Does the F650 support DNP and ModBus over the Ethernet port?
A1. F650 units support both protocols over both the asynchronous serial ports and the Ethernet LAN synchronous port using
TCP/IP and UDP/IP layers over the Ethernet.
Q2. Does this equipment support dual IP access?

A2. Yes, it supports two independent IP addresses in aliasing mode. Those address go in the communications settings
Network0 and Network1.
Q3. Is the protocol IEC 870-103 supported by the F650?

A3. Yes, IEC 870-103 is supported by the F650 in firmware version 5.00 and higher.
Q4. Can the F650 be used as a DNP master station?

A4. Not at this moment. It works as a slave IED station for all protocols.
Q5. How many communication ports are included in the F650?

A5. The equipment has 2 different boards, one for asynchronous serial ports and another for a high-speed synchronous
Ethernet port. The first board has 2 comm ports, COM1 and COM2. COM2 is multiplexed with the front serial RS232 port,
whereas the COM1 port is completely independent from COM2.
The synchronous LAN port is ETH_1/ETH2 or ETH_E/ETH_A/ETH_B (Depending on model.
Q6. Are there one or two Ethernet ports?

A6. The equipment has only 1 Ethernet port. For redundant fiber optic versions, redundancy is done at the physical level (fiber
optic) but there is just one port.

12.1 COMMUNICATIONS CHAPTER 12: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Q7. How many different communication Ethernet sessions can be opened through the LAN port?
A7. ModBus TCP/IP:4 sockets
DNP TCP/IP:3 sessions (from version 1.72 on)
Q8. May I use the cooper 10/100 BaseTX connection included in the basic model with all protocols?
A8. Yes, it may be used with all protocols. In noisy substation environments and/or long distances, it is recommended to use
fiber optic options due to much better EMC performance and immunity. For fiber optic models, it is necessary to adjust an
internal jumper to use the copper port.
Q9. Remote I/O CAN bus. Does it support DeviceNet protocol?
A9. No it does not support DeviceNet.
Q10. Which functions are available in the relay web server?

A10. Currently, it includes several functions for viewing measures and retrieving information.
Q11. Q11 May I use URPC to program the relay?

A11. Only oscillography records may be viewed with URPC once downloaded to a file using the ENERVISTA 650 Setup software.
Q12. May I connect URs and F650s to the same Ethernet?

A12. Yes, either in cable as in fiber, or even mix them.
Q13. How do I connect with fiber 10-BASE-FL UR relays with 100-BASE-FX F650 relays?
A13. Take into account that an UR is never connected directly to a F650 (neither two UR nor two F650 with each other) but they
are always connected through a hub or switch. The hub or switch where the URs are connected must be 10-BASE-FL and
the hub or switch for the F650 must be 100-BASE-FX.
Q14. How do I connect with cable 10_BASE-T UR relays with 10/100-BASE-TX F650 relays?
A14. The answer to this question is as described before but also in this case there is an advantage added, because the hub 10-
BASE-TX port is able to understand a 10-BASE-T port. This means that a hub 10-BASE-T port may be connected to an UR
or a F650, and a hub 10/100-BASE-TX port may be connected either to an UR or F650.
Q15. What happens with fiber optic connectors compatibility, because the hub that I have has a different connector to the
one of the F650, although both are 100-BASE-FX?
A15. Just buy fiber cables with the appropriate male connectors. For the UR and F650 side we need the same connectors, ST
type, for the hub side, the correspondent ones. And in what concerns to the fiber type, it is used the same for 10 as for 100,
it is the 50/125 or 62.5/125 multimode, this last one allows longer distances.
Q16. What is the difference between a hub and a switch?

A16. In a repeater type hub (shared hub), one unit talks and the rest listen. If all the units are talking at the same time there may
be collisions in the messages, what may produce certain communication delays.
The switch (switched hub) has very powerful processors and a lot of memory and it is much more expensive than the hub.
It directs messages to the proper destination avoiding collisions and allowing a much more efficient communication.
Q17. Why do we have 10/100 compatibility for cable but not for fiber?

CHAPTER 12: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 12.2 PROTECTION
A17. The cable has some advantages that the fiber does not have, and it is that the signal attenuation in short and medium
distances, is worthless and this is truth for low and high frequency signals. By the contrary, the light in one fiber optic is
highly attenuated, being much worse in case of high frequencies than in the low ones. The 10-BASE-FL fiber transmission
is performed in a wavelength of 850nm, what allows a less expensive electronic than the 1300 nm used in 100-BASE-FX
fiber transmission. Using, in both cases, the same glass multimode fiber type, the attenuation to 1300 nm is lower than the
850 nm ones, this way the greater attenuation of the 100 Mbits is compensated. There is another fiber standard, the 100-
BASE-SX, which uses 850 nm to 100 Mbits, being compatible with the 10-BASE-FL one, although it sacrifices the maximum
distance to 300 m. Nowadays, this standard has not had success among Ethernet equipment manufacturers and
suppliers.
12.2 Protection
Q1. Does the F650 support IRIG-B signals? Which type and accuracy? How many units may be connected to the same
source?
A1. Yes, the F650 includes an IRIG-B input for all models, including the basic ones.
It uses DC level format B. Formats used are B0000, B0002 and B0003.
Actual accuracy is 1 millisecond. Internal sampling rate allows true 1 ms accuracy time tagging.
The input burden is very low. The maximum number of units that may be connected to a generator depends on its output
driving capability. Up to 60 units have been successfully connected with equipments commonly used in the market.
Q2. Does the equipment work with dry inputs in both AC and DC?
A2. The equipment works only with DC inputs.
Inputs should be driven with externally generated DC current. No special 48 Vdc or other outputs are included in the
equipment to drive these inputs; therefore, contacts connected to the equipment should be connected to a DC source.
Q3. Is it oscillography programmable?
A3. Yes, the sampling rate is programmable (4, 8, 16, 32 or 64 samples per input). The depth depends on the sampling rate.
Q4. Do I have to select a different model for 1 or 5 A?

A4. No. The same model is able to work with either /1 A or /5 A rated secondary currents. There are high accuracy sensing
transformers that allow the use of any current input through the same terminals to reduce the spares and simplify wiring.
Q5. In my installation, several digital inputs become active when I energize the transformer. How can I reduce sensitivity?
A5. By selecting debounce time and/or voltage threshold, the relay may adapt its sensitivity to different applications. Select
the maximum voltage threshold and debounce time (recommended 15 ms) to minimize AC coupling effects.

12.3 CONTROL & HMI CHAPTER 12: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
12.3 Control & HMI

Q1. What is the difference between Get/Send info from/to relay and Upload/Download info files to/from relay?
A1. Get/Send are used for settings and configuration storage that although both are in a unique file, are sent separately in two
times. Upload/Download are used for project or PLC files group storage. These files are the setting_configuration file
source. To operate, the F650 does not need the source files; the Upload/Download tool is destined to serve as historic file.
Q2. Can I program interlocks?

A2. Yes, via ENERVISTA 650 Setup interlocks may be programmed from very simple to advanced schemes.
Q3. Can we rotate the display 90 degrees to show feeders vertically?

A3. No. The product has been designed to view it in horizontal mode (landscape) due to the following reasons:
It is easier to read the LCD display because it has been designed for horizontal positions.
Compatibility between text display (4x20 characters) and LCD display (16x40 characters or 128x240 pixels).
Refresh speed is better in horizontal than vertical format.
Q4. Do I need a laptop or handheld to program the unit?

A4. No, all main operations can easily be performed with just the incorporated HMI. Handheld or laptops may be required to
download large quantities of information (such as oscillograms, etc.) but they are not mandatory for a conventional user
that just needs to change settings, view measurements, states, etc.
Q5. Is there password security for protection and control?

A5. Yes, there are two passwords. An independent password for protection changes and control operations is available since
version 1.44
Q6. Is it possible to have a remote HMI installed in the front of the panel with the rest of the relay in the rear side?
A6. Not in the present version.
Q7. Is it possible to program a default screen for the HMI?

A7. In graphic display versions the user may program a custom screen with the single-line diagram, measurements, etc. In
text display models, there is a choice of logo, measurements, or scrolling both screens.
Q8. May I force inputs and outputs to ease commissioning and testing?
A8. Yes.
Q9. How can I disable the rotary knob buzzer?

A9. Press ESC key more than 3 seconds and then press the knob during a short pulse.

CHAPTER 12: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 12.3 CONTROL & HMI
Q10. How can I disable/enable beep sound HMI keypad in models with Enhanced HMI?
A10. To disable: Press ESC push-button more than 3 seconds and then press ENTER push-button while keeping ESC push button
pressed.
To enable: Press ESC push-button more than 3 seconds. After this time, press the ENTER push-button and then Up/down
key while keeping ESC push-button pressed.
Q11. Why do appear strange texts on the display when switching on the relay?
A11. You have pressed any button and the HMI has entered test mode.
The display messages are updated after a few minutes, once the relay has completed the starting sequence.

12.4 RELAY CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 12: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
12.4 Relay configuration

Q1. Does the "Service" contact on the Power Supply board cover all possible failures or do I have to create an output on
the I/O board that includes all the internal errors I can access in the logic?
A1. The power supply ready contact only monitor hardware failures in the power supply, to monitor the internal error of the
unit it is necessary to configure a virtual output to and the assign it to the device desired (contact output, LED, etc.).
Q2. I set an output contact as "Latched". If I do not set a "reset" condition, will it reset from the "ESC" key?
A2. No, you have to configure the contact output reset signal (in Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Outputs).
The ESC key only reset the LED indicators.

GE
Grid Solutions
Chapter 13: F650 troubleshooting guide
F650 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
13.1 Symptoms and recommended actions
F650 units have been designed and verified using the most advanced and reliable equipment. Mounting and testing
automation ensure a high consistency of the final product. Before sending a unit back to the factory, we strongly
suggest you follow the recommendations below. These actions may solve the problem, and if not they will help define
the problem for quicker repair.
To send a unit back to the factory for repair, use the appropriate RETURN MATERIAL AUTHORIZATION process, and follow
the shipping instructions provided by our Service Department, especially in the case of international shipments. This will
lead to a faster and more efficient solution to your problem.
Category Symptom Possible cause Recommended action
Protection The relay does not trip -Function not permitted -Set the function permission to
ENABLED
- Function blocked -Check Protection units block screen
-Program the output to the desired

- Output not assigned function using ENERVISTA 650 Setup
logic configuration
- The unit is not set to ready - Verify that the general setting is set
to disable and the out of service state
is not active

13.1 SYMPTOMS AND RECOMMENDED ACTIONS CHAPTER 13: F650 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
General When feeding the -Insufficient power supply -Verify the voltage level using a
unit, no indicator is lit multimeter in the power supply
up terminals, and check that it is within
the model range
- Wrong versions -Check relay and ENERVISTA 650

Setup versions are the same
-Fuse failure -Remove power supply, dismount the

power supply module and replace the
fuse
- Loose fuse -Same as above with same fuse
-Incorrect wiring -Make sure that terminals labeled +

and – are connected to the 9-pin
connector corresponding to the
power source
Communication The relay does not -Incorrect cable -Make sure you are using a straight
communicate via the cable
front RS232 port
-Damaged cable -Replace the cable
-Relay or PC not grounded -Ensure ground connection
-Incorrect baud rate, port, address, -Test other ports, other baud rates,
etc. etc. Make sure that the
communication parameters in the
computer match the ones in the relay.
General After Updating the Check that the bootware version -If there is an incompatibility between
firmware the relay match with the firmware version boot and firmware version, update to
does not start up and the corresponding boot and after that
always shows the update the firmware version
message “Os
Loading…”. -If the boot and firmware versions are
correct, perform the firmware update
procedure again.

CHAPTER 13: F650 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 13.1 SYMPTOMS AND RECOMMENDED ACTIONS

Communications Cannot see properly 1.- Disabled Java options in Advanced
1.1- Go to Advanced in Internet
the web server in F650 Internet Explorer properties or high
options
with Windows XP. level of security for Internet explorer and select the
three selections in Microsoft VM (Java
Some windows are in 2.- Nor Java Virtual Machine installed. Virtual Machine) and deselect any
grey with a red cross other virtual machine not Microsoft,
mark. for
example SUN.
In case Microsoft VM is not installed in
the computer, the user must install it
using the Microsoft VM installation
program msjavx86.exe
For internet explorer 6.0 or higher it is
not included by default.
1.2.- Try to set a lower level of security

in
internet explorer options.
1.3.-Delete temporary internet files in

"General" screen in internet explorer
options.
Communication Enervista 650 Setup
does not retrieve osc,
fault reports and Data
Logger files
Bad communication in TFTP using
Windows 2000
Disable and Enable the Ethernet
connection on Control Panel inside
Windows 2000. Try again
2.1- Install either Microsoft or Sun

Java Virtual Machine
Communication Enervista 650 Setup Bad communication in TFTP using Disable and Enable the Ethernet
does not retrieve osc, Windows 2000 connection on Control Panel inside
fault reports and Data Windows 2000. Try again to retrieve
Logger files files from relay
Firmware and bootware upgrade
Bootware The relay gets stuck - The relay does not communicate via To perform the bootware upgrading
during the upgrading the front RS232 port process it is necessary to connect the
process after unit thought the front RS232 port.
switching off and on check:
the relay, giving the • Serial cable correct(straightthrouhg)
following error and undamaged.
message: “ERROR • Settings selection in Enervista 650
Setting relay in Setup: Communication > Computer
configuration mode. Settings”:
Retry? o Com port selected must be the
one that is being used to perform
this procedure
o Parity set to NONE
o Baud rate set to 19200
o Control type: No control type
o Modbus slave number: any
Note: if the bootware upgrade
procedure got stuck at this point the
relay will not be upgraded. After
reboot the relay will continue
working with the former firmware
and bootware versions.


Bootware The relay gets stuck at -The Ethernet connection does not Serial communications work properly
“Sending file work properly. and the flash memory has been
imagen_kernel...” erased but Ethernet communication
does not work properly, check:
• RJ45 cable used (crossover cable for
back-to-back connection and straight
through Ethernet cable for hub or
switch)
• IP address and netmask, gateway
are correct and correspond to the
ones used in the computer performing
the procedure. See chapter 5.2.1
Communication settings
• Ethernet board parameters
selection, check that:
o 802.1p QOS is Enabled
o Flow control is Auto
o Speed & Duplex is Auto (or
10 Mb Full)
• If the above points are correct but
the problem persists:
o Force the Speed & Duplex to
10 Mb Full
o Disable and enable the
Ethernet connection while the
files are being sent (during the
“sending file...” message
Note: if the bootware upgrade
procedure is stuck at this point, the
relay flash memory has been erased
and the upgrade procedure must be
completed to start working with the
unit. If the procedure is not
completed, the HMI shows the
message “Os Loading...” and the
relay does not start up.
Firmware The procedure can not -The Ethernet connection does not • Check the same as in the point
start due to ethernet work properly. above for bootware.
problems Note: if the firmware upgrade
procedure is stuck at this point the
relay will not be upgraded. After
switching it off and on it will continue
working with the former firmware and
bootware versions.
Firmware Program messages - File path is too long • Check the path length, copy the files
“file” do not exist in - File has no file attributes in a shorter path and restart the
local drive upgrade procedure.
• Check the unzip process to see if the
file properties are properly set to “File”.
• Note: if the firmware upgrade
procedure is stuck after having been
started, the former firmware has
been erased and the upgrade
procedure must be completed to
start working with the unit. If the
procedure is not completed, the HMI
shows the message “Os Loading...”
and the relay does not start up.

CHAPTER 13: F650 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 13.1 SYMPTOMS AND RECOMMENDED ACTIONS
Firmware It is not possible to to - IEC 61850 upgrade from standard • To upgrade from a standard model
upgrade models models is password protected. to a 6 model, ask the factory for an
without IEC 61850 to upgrade package, depending on the
models with IEC 61850 hardware the existing unit has. If it is
automatically hardware 00 a hardware and
firmware change is required
(password protected), if it is hardware
01 or above only a firmware change is
required (password protected).
Firmware During the upgrading - Communication problems during the • EnerVista 650 Setup program does
procces for models upgrade procecure. not ask for a password if the relay
with IEC 61850 -The procedure has been not model is IEC61850 and the procedure
sometimes it ask for performed in a continuous way. is completed.
password and • If during the process there is any
sometimes not. problem and it has to be restarted, this
second time the program will ask to
confirm the IEC password.
• If the EnerVista 650 Setup program
is closed and started again during the
bootware and firmware upgrade
process, the program will ask to
confirm the IEC password.
Firmware Password for - Model change • The password is tied to the model,
IEC61850 incorrect - Incorrect mac or serial number MAC Address and serial number, so a
change in any of these requires a
password change.
• If the model has been modified to
add or replace any boards or
communication protocol, the IEC
61850 passwords needs to be
updated (contact the factory).
EnerVista 650 Setup InstallShield Setup A previous installation of any product Delete (or rename) the 0701 folder
Initialization Error using InstallShield for installation may located in "C:\Program Files\Common
6001 have corrupted some of the Files\InstallShield\Professional\RunTi
InstallShield files used in the EnerVista me\" and retry installation
650 Setup installation


GE
Grid Solutions
Appendix A: Logic Operands
LOGIC OPERANDS
A.1 Operands - F650 - model FX - GX
OPERANDS - F650 - MODEL FX - GX

Internal System Status
autocheck internal states (critical)
DSP Communication Error: (0) Rignt communications
DSP COMM ERROR between DSP and main processor; (1) Communication
Error between DSP and main processor
Magnetic Module Error: (0) Right Communication
MAGNETIC MODULE between DSP and magnetic module processor; (1)
DSP Internal States (Critical to metering and
ERROR Communication Error between DSP and magnetic
protection)
module processor
Calibration Error: (0) Right calibration values stored; (1)
CALIBRATION ERROR The calibration values stored are out of the calibration
limits.
Flash Internal States (Critical to Relay configuration E2prom status :(0) Not configured or problems during
and stored data) E2PROM STATUS
writing process ; (1) Configured and OK
Board F status: (0) Inactive - There is no communication
BOARD F STATUS with the board (1) Active - There is communication with
the board.
Board G status: (0) Inactive - There is no communication

BOARD G STATUS
with the board (1) Active - There is communication with
IO Board States (Critical to operation and the board.
protection)
Board H status: (0) Inactive - There is no communication
BOARD H STATUS with the board (1) Active - There is communication with
the board.
Board J status: (0) Inactive - There is no communication
BOARD J STATUS with the board (1) Active - There is communication with
the board.
IEC61850 INTERNAL STATES (NON CRITICAL)
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER A-1

A.1 OPERANDS - F650 - MODEL FX - GX APPENDIX A: LOGIC OPERANDS

UNKNOWN: when the relay has not the IEC61850
protocol in the relay model the ICD status is unknow to
the unit
ICD ERROR: There is an error in the ICD file and the
relay ICD is not operative. To solve this issue it is
necessary to send a correct ICD to the relay using the
IEC61850 configurator tool. When the ICD error is raised
the IEC 61850 will not be operative (the IEC 61850
client, reports and gooses will not work). It is advisable to
include the ICD ERROR in the main error signal
configured for specific applications.
IEC61850 Internal States ICD STATUS
MODIFIED: The settings have been changed in the icd
but they are still not written in the icd file in the relay
IN PROGRESS: The icd setting are being written to the
file in the relay
OK WITHOUT DAIS: The relay has not got the "Use DOI
&DAI" setting enabled (true) and it is working properly
with the ICD file.
OK: The relay has got the "Use DOI &DAI" setting
enabled (true) and it is working properly with the ICD file.
When that setting is set to true the icd setting prevails
over the relay settings.
OTHER INTERNAL STATES (NON CRITICAL)
USER MAP STATUS User map status: (0) Not configured ; (1) Configured
FACTORY CALIBRATION Calibration status (0) Relay calibrated; (1) Not calibrated
FLEXCURVE A STATUS User curve A: (0) Not configured (1) Configured
FLEXCURVE B STATUS User curve B: (0) Not configured (1) Configured
FLEXCURVE C STATUS User curve C: (0) Not configured (1) Configured
Other internal states
FLEXCURVE D STATUS User curve D: (0) Not configured (1) Configured
Green Zone Memory internal status
Yellow Zone Memory internal status
Orange Zone Memory internal status
Red Zone Memory internal status
UpTime System Time
TIMER STATUS Real time clock autocheck (not available)
Autocheck Internal States (Not available)

GRAPHIC STATUS Graphic display status (not available)
ALARM TEXT ARRAY Text display status (not available)
A-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

APPENDIX A: LOGIC OPERANDS A.1 OPERANDS - F650 - MODEL FX - GX

Note: It is advisable to use the critical alarms to raise an event or to light a warning LED for maintenance purposes. See
the example below, the Board X Status depends on the relay model.
Figure A–1: Protection Alarm Signal

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 000 Configurable logic output 000
Configurable Logic Outputs (512 elements)
... ...
Operation bit 001: (0) the configured time expires or
OPERATION BIT 1 when success conditions are met;(1) operation 1 is
executed and interlocks are fulfilled.

Operation Bits (24 elements) executed and interlocks are fulfilled.
... ...
executed and interlocks are fulfilled.


CONTROL EVENT 1 Control Event 1 Activation Bit
Control Event Bits (128 elements)
... ...
LATCHED VIRT IP 1 Latched virtual input 1
Latched Virtual Inputs (32 elements)
... ...
SELF-RST VIRT IP 1 Self reset virtual input 1
Self Reset Virtual Inputs (32 elements)
... ...
CONT IP_X_CC1 Input 1 (CC1) in Board X
Contact Inputs Type 1Board
... ...
... ...
CONT IP_X_CC9 Contact Input 09 (Va_COIL1) for slot X. Input voltage (Va)
(Va_COIL1) detected, Circuit 1. Complete circuit supervised
CONT IP_X_CC10 Contact Input 10 (Vb_COIL1) for slot X. Input voltage (Vb)
(Vb_COIL1) detected, Circuit 1. Complete circuit supervised
Contact Inputs Type 2 Board CONT IP_X_CC11 Contact Input 11 (Va_COIL2) for slot X. Input voltage (Va)
(Va_COIL2) detected, Circuit 1. Complete circuit supervised
CONT IP_X_CC12 Contact Input 12 (Vb_COIL2) for slot X. Input voltage (Vb)
(Vb_COIL2) detected, Circuit 2. Complete circuit supervised
Contact Input 13 (07_SEAL) for slot X. Current detected.
CONT IP_X_CC13
Contact output associated with current flow > 100 mA
(O7_SEAL)
latched
Contact Input 14 (08_SEAL) for slot X. Current detected.
CONT IP_X_CC14
Contact output associated with current flow > 100 mA
(O8_SEAL)
latched
CONT IP_X_CC15 Contact Input 15 (SUP_COIL1) for slot X. Output for
(SUP_COIL1) circuit 1 supervision element
CONT IP_X_CC16 Contact Input 16 (SUP_COIL2) for slot X. Output for
(SUP_COIL2) circuit 2 supervision element
Contact Inputs Type 4 Board
... ...


Contact Inputs Type 5 Board (Digital Values)
... ...
ANALOG_INP_X_01 Analog Input 01 in Board X
Contact Inputs Type 5 Board (Analog Values) ANALOG_INP_X_03 Analog Input 03 in Board X
... ...
CONT OP OPER_X_01 Logic signal for Output 1 activation. Board X
Contact Outputs Type 1 & 2 Board Activation CONT OP OPER_X_02 Logic signal for Output 2 activation. Board X
signals ... ...
CONT OP OPER_X_08 Logic signal for Output 8 activation. Board X
CONT RESET_X_01 board X, 01 latched output reset
Contact Outputs Type 1 & 2 Board Reset signals CONT RESET_X_02 board X, 02 latched output reset
... ...
CONT RESET_X_08 board X, 08 latched output reset
CONT OP_X_01 Contact output 1 Board X operation
Contact Outputs Type 1 & 2 Board Status
... ...
Board X status: (0) Inactive - There is no communication
Board Status BOARD X STATUS with the board (1) Active - There is communication with
the board
SWITCH 1 A INPUT Contact input type A to switchgear Function 1
SWITCH 1 B INPUT Contact input type B to switchgear Function 1
Switchgear status (16 elements) SWITCH 2 B INPUT Contact input type B to switchgear Function 2
... ...
SWITCH 16 B INPUT Contact input type B to switchgear Function 16
SWITCH 1 A STATUS Contact logic output type A from switchgear Function 1
SWITCH 1 B STATUS Contact logic output type B from switchgear Function 1
SWITCH 2 A STATUS Contact logic output type A from switchgear Function 2
SWITCH 2 B STATUS Contact logic output type B from switchgear Function 2
Switchgear outputs (16 elements) ... ...
Contact logic output type A from switchgear Function
SWITCH 16 A STATUS
16
Contact logic output type B from switchgear Function
SWITCH 16 B STATUS
16


SWITCH 1 OPEN switchgear 1 open
SWITCH 1 CLOSED switchgear 1 closed
SWITCH 1 00_ERROR Error 00 switchgear 1 (contact A = 0, contact B = 0)
SWITCH 2 OPEN Switchgear 2 open
SWITCH 2 CLOSED Switchgear 2 closed
Switchgear states (16 elements) SWITCH 2 00_ERROR Error 00 switchgear 2 (contact A = 0, contact B = 0)
... ...
SWITCH 16 OPEN Switchgear 16 open
SWITCH 16 CLOSED Switchgear 16 closed
SWITCH 1 OPEN INIT Switchgear 1 opening initiation
SWITCH 1 CLOSE INIT Switchgear 1 closing initiation
Switchgear Open-Close Initializing States SWITCH 2 CLOSE INIT Switchgear 2 closing initiation
... ...
SWITCH 16 CLOSE INIT Switchgear 16 closing initiation
SWGR 1 FAIL TO OPEN Failure to open Switchgear 1
... ...
Switchgear Fail States
SWGR 1 FAIL TO CLOSE Failure to close Switchgear 1
... ...


Ready LED: (0-Red) Relay out of service, protection OUT
READY LED
OF ORDER (1-Green) Relay in service; protection READY
Programmable LED 1 status: Red colour. Latched by
LED 1 hardware. Reset by hardware (ESC) and programmable
(LED RESET INPUT)
(LED RESET INPUT)
(LED RESET INPUT)
(LED RESET INPUT)
(LED RESET INPUT)
Programmable LED 6 status: Orange colour. Not
LED 6 latched. Latching possibility via PLC. Reset by hardware
(ESC) and programmable (LED RESET INPUT)


LEDS HMI (16 Elements)


Programmable LED 11 status: Green colour. Not





LEDs reset input (programmable) LED RESET INPUT Programmable input for remote LED reset
I Key I key operation (Programmable signal via PLC)
O Key O key operation (Programmable signal via PLC)
Programmable Keypad Status (HMI) */F3 Key */F3 key operation (Programmable signal via PLC)


F1 Key F1 key operation (Programmable signal via PLC)
F2 Key F2 key operation (Programmable signal via PLC)
Local/remote status for operations 1 = Local, 0 =
LOCAL/REMOTE Remote. Selectable through the front pushbutton
OPERATION MODE (Hardware) and also through communications
(software).
LOCAL/REMOTE Operation status LEDs Operations OFF status (1) Command execution block
(operations blocked both in local and remote
OPERATIONS BLOCKED mode). Selectable through the front pushbutton
(Hardware) and also through communications
(software).
CHANGE LOCAL-REMOTE Changing local-remote status by communications

LOCAL/REMOTE/OFF Selection
CHANGE OP BLOCKED Operations Block-Unblock signal
"Switching on backlignt" signal (the display is switched

HMI BACKLIGHT ON
on by communications
HMI Backlight
"Switching off backlignt" signal (the display is switched
HMI BACKLIGHT OFF
off by communications
Internal System Status (cont.)
OSC DIG CHANNEL 1 Oscillography Digital channel 1 : (1) Active ; (0) Not Active
Oscillography Digital channel 10: (1) Active ; (0) Not
OSC DIG CHANNEL 10
Active
Oscillography States
Oscillography Digital channel 11 : (1) Active ; (0) Not
OSC DIG CHANNEL 11
Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 12
Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 13
Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 14
Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 15
Active
OSC DIG CHANNEL 16
Active
OSCILLO TRIGGER Oscillo trigger activation (1) Active ; (0) Not active
FAULT REPORT TRIGG Fault report trigger (1) Active ; (0) Not active
Fault Report (Fault locator) Fault report removal from HMI and ModBus (volatile
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS
memory)
FREEZE ENERGY CNT Energy counter freeze
Energy Counters UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT Energy counter unfreeze
RESET ENERGY CNT Energy counter reset


DEMAND TRIGGER INP Demand trigger (for Block interval algorithm)
Demand Inputs
DEMAND RESET INP Demand reset
GROUP 1 ACT ON Group 1 activation, and deactivation of groups 2 & 3
Setting Groups SETT GROUPS BLOCK Group change input blocked
GROUP 1 BLOCKED Settings Group 1 blocked


Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Group 1
PH IOC1 HIGH A BLK
phase A
PH IOC1 HIGH B BLK
phase B
PH IOC1 HIGH C BLK
phase C
Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pickup high
PH IOC1 HIGH A PKP
level Group 1 phase A
Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation
PH IOC1 HIGH A OP
(trip) high level Group 1 phase A
PH IOC1 HIGH B PKP
level Group 1 phase B
PH IOC1 HIGH B OP
(trip) high level Group 1 phase B
PH IOC1 HIGH C PKP
level Group 1 phase C
PH IOC1 HIGH C OP
(trip) high level Group 1 phase C
PH IOC1 HIGH PKP
level Group 1 any phase
PH IOC1 HIGH OP
(trip) high level Group 1 any phase
PH IOC2 HIGH A BLK
phase A
Phase IOC High
PH IOC2 HIGH B BLK
phase B
PH IOC2 HIGH C BLK
phase C
PH IOC2 HIGH A PKP
PH IOC2 HIGH A OP
PH IOC2 HIGH B PKP
PH IOC2 HIGH B OP
PH IOC2 HIGH C PKP
PH IOC2 HIGH C OP
PH IOC2 HIGH PKP
PH IOC2 HIGH OP
PH IOC3 HIGH A BLK
phase A
PH IOC3 HIGH B BLK
phase B


Internal System Status (cont.)
PH IOC3 HIGH C BLK
phase C
PH IOC3 HIGH A PKP
PH IOC3 HIGH A OP
PH IOC3 HIGH B PKP
Phase IOC High PH IOC3 HIGH B OP
PH IOC3 HIGH C PKP
PH IOC3 HIGH C OP
PH IOC3 HIGH PKP
PH IOC3 HIGH OP


Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Low
PH IOC1 LOW A BLK
PH IOC1 LOW B BLK
PH IOC1 LOW C BLK
Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pickup low
PH IOC1 LOW A PKP
PH IOC1 LOW A OP
(trip) low level Group 1 phase A
PH IOC1 LOW B PKP
PH IOC1 LOW B OP
(trip) low level Group 1 phase B
PH IOC1 LOW C PKP
PH IOC1 LOW C OP
(trip) low level Group 1 phase C
PH IOC1 LOW PKP
PH IOC1 LOW OP
(trip) low level Group 1 any phase
Phase IOC Low PH IOC2 LOW A BLK
PH IOC2 LOW B BLK
PH IOC2 LOW C BLK
PH IOC2 LOW A PKP
PH IOC2 LOW A OP
PH IOC2 LOW B PKP
PH IOC2 LOW B OP
PH IOC2 LOW C PKP
PH IOC2 LOW C OP
PH IOC2 LOW PKP
PH IOC2 LOW OP
PH IOC3 LOW A BLK


PH IOC3 LOW B BLK
PH IOC3 LOW C BLK
PH IOC3 LOW A PKP
PH IOC3 LOW A OP
PH IOC3 LOW B PKP
Phase IOC Low
PH IOC3 LOW B OP
PH IOC3 LOW C PKP
PH IOC3 LOW C OP
PH IOC3 LOW PKP
PH IOC3 LOW OP
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element block Group
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK
1
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element pickup
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
Group 1
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element operation
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
(trip) Group 1
NEUTRAL IOC2 BLOCK
2
Neutral IOC NEUTRAL IOC2 PKP
Group 2
NEUTRAL IOC2 OP
(trip) Group 2
NEUTRAL IOC3 BLOCK
3
NEUTRAL IOC3 PKP
Group 3
NEUTRAL IOC3 OP
(trip) Group 3


Ground instantaneous overcurrent element block Group
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK
1
Ground instantaneous overcurrent element pickup
GROUND IOC1 PKP
Group 1
Ground instantaneous overcurrent element operation
GROUND IOC1 OP
(trip) Group 1
GROUND IOC2 BLOCK
2
Ground IOC GROUND IOC2 PKP
Group 2
GROUND IOC2 OP
(trip) Group 2
GROUND IOC3 BLOCK
3
GROUND IOC3 PKP
Group 3
GROUND IOC3 OP
(trip) Group 3
Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent element
SENS GND IOC1 BLK
block Group 1
SENS GND IOC1 PKP
pickup Group 1
SENS GND IOC1 OP
operation (trip) Group 1
SENS GND IOC2 BLK
block Group 2
Sensitive Ground IOC SENS GND IOC2 PKP
pickup Group 2
SENS GND IOC2 OP
SENS GND IOC3 BLK
block Group 3
SENS GND IOC3 PKP
pickup Group 3
SENS GND IOC3 OP
Isolated ground instantaneous overcurrent element
ISOLATED GND1 BLK
block Group 1
ISOLATED GND1 PKP
pickup Group 1
ISOLATED GND1 OP
ISOLATED GND2 BLK
block Group 2
Isolated Ground ISOLATED GND2 PKP
pickup Group 2
ISOLATED GND2 OP
ISOLATED GND3 BLK
block Group 3
ISOLATED GND3 PKP
pickup Group 3
ISOLATED GND3 OP


PH TOC1 HIGH A BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 1 phase A
PH TOC1 HIGH B BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 1 phase B
Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 1 phase
PH TOC1 HIGH C BLK
C
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1 phase
PH TOC1 HIGH A PKP
A
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) Group
PH TOC1 HIGH A OP
1 phase A
PH TOC1 HIGH B PKP
B
PH TOC1 HIGH B OP
1 phase B
PH TOC1 HIGH C PKP
C
PH TOC1 HIGH C OP
1 phase C
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1 any
PH TOC1 HIGH PKP
phase
PH TOC1 HIGH OP
1 any phase
Phase TOC High
PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK
C
PH TOC2 HIGH A PKP
A
PH TOC2 HIGH A OP
2 phase A
PH TOC2 HIGH B PKP
B
PH TOC2 HIGH B OP
2 phase B
PH TOC2 HIGH C PKP
C
PH TOC2 HIGH C OP
2 phase C
PH TOC2 HIGH PKP
phase
PH TOC2 HIGH OP
2 any phase
PH TOC3 HIGH C BLK
C


PH TOC3 HIGH A PKP
A
PH TOC3 HIGH A OP
3 phase A
PH TOC3 HIGH B PKP
B
PH TOC3 HIGH B OP
3 phase B
Phase TOC High
PH TOC3 HIGH C PKP
C
PH TOC3 HIGH C OP
3 phase C
PH TOC3 HIGH PKP
phase
PH TOC3 HIGH OP
3 any phase
Phase timed overcurrent element block Low level Group
PH TOC1 LOW A BLK
1 phase A
PH TOC1 LOW B BLK
1 phase B
PH TOC1 LOW C BLK
1 phase C
Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
PH TOC1 LOW A PKP
Group 1 phase A
Phase timed overcurrent element operation (trip) low
PH TOC1 LOW A OP
PH TOC1 LOW B PKP
Group 1 phase B
PH TOC1 LOW B OP
PH TOC1 LOW C PKP
Group 1 phase C
Phase TOC Low PH TOC1 LOW C OP
PH TOC1 LOW PKP
Group 1 any phase
PH TOC1 LOW OP
PH TOC2 LOW A BLK
2 phase A
PH TOC2 LOW B BLK
2 phase B
PH TOC2 LOW C BLK
2 phase C
PH TOC2 LOW A PKP
Group 2 phase A
PH TOC2 LOW A OP
PH TOC2 LOW B PKP
Group 2 phase B


PH TOC2 LOW B OP
PH TOC2 LOW C PKP
Group 2 phase C
PH TOC2 LOW C OP
PH TOC2 LOW PKP
Group 2 any phase
PH TOC2 LOW OP
PH TOC3 LOW A BLK
3 phase A
PH TOC3 LOW B BLK
3 phase B
PH TOC3 LOW C BLK
3 phase C
Phase TOC Low Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level
PH TOC3 LOW A PKP
Group 3 phase A
PH TOC3 LOW A OP
PH TOC3 LOW B PKP
Group 3 phase B
PH TOC3 LOW B OP
PH TOC3 LOW C PKP
Group 3 phase C
PH TOC3 LOW C OP
PH TOC3 LOW PKP
Group 3 any phase
PH TOC3 LOW OP
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK Neutral timed overcurrent element block Group 1
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP Neutral timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1
Neutral timed overcurrent element operation (trip)
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
Group 1
Neutral TOC
NEUTRAL TOC2 OP
Group 2
NEUTRAL TOC3 OP
Group 3


GROUND TOC1 BLOCK Ground timed overcurrent element block Group 1
GROUND TOC1 PKP Ground timed overcurrent element pickup Group 1
Ground timed overcurrent element operation (trip)
GROUND TOC1 OP
Group 1
Ground TOC GROUND TOC2 PKP Ground timed overcurrent element pickup Group 2
GROUND TOC2 OP
Group 2
GROUND TOC3 PKP Ground timed overcurrent element pickup Group 3
GROUND TOC3 OP
Group 3
Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element block
SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK
Group 1
Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element pickup
SENS GND TOC1 PKP
Group 1
Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element operation
SENS GND TOC1 OP
(trip) Group 1
SENS GND TOC2 BLOCK
Group 2
Sensitive Ground TOC SENS GND TOC2 PKP
Group 2
SENS GND TOC2 OP
(trip) Group 2
SENS GND TOC3 BLOCK
Group 3
SENS GND TOC3 PKP
Group 3
SENS GND TOC3 OP
(trip) Group 3
Negative sequence timed overcurrent element block
NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK
Group 1
Negative sequence timed overcurrent element pickup
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP
Group 1
Negative sequence timed overcurrent element
NEG SEQ TOC1 OP
operation Group 1
NEG SEQ TOC2 BLOCK
Group 2
Negative Sequence TOC NEG SEQ TOC2 PKP
Group 2
NEG SEQ TOC2 OP
operation Group 2
NEG SEQ TOC3 BLOCK
Group 3
NEG SEQ TOC3 PKP
Group 3
NEG SEQ TOC3 OP
operation Group 3


THERMAL1 BLOCK Thermal image block Group 1
THERMAL1 A RST Thermal image phase A Group 1 element reset
THERMAL1 B RST Thermal image phase B Group 1 element reset
THERMAL1 C RST Thermal image phase C Group 1 element reset
THERMAL1 ALARM Thermal image element alarm any phase Group 1
THERMAL1 OP Thermal image element operation any phase Group 1
THERMAL1 A ALRM Thermal image element alarm phase A Group 1
THERMAL1 A OP Thermal image element operation phase A Group 1
THERMAL1 B ALRM Thermal image element alarm phase B Group 1
THERMAL1 B OP Thermal image element operation phase B Group 1
THERMAL1 C ALRM Thermal image element alarm phase C Group 1
THERMAL1 C OP Thermal image element operation phase C Group 1
Thermal Image


PHASE DIR1 BLK INP Phase directional block Group 1
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK A Phase directional element block Group 1 Phase A
PHASE DIR1 A OP Phase directional element operation Group 1 Phase A
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK B Phase directional element block Group 1 Phase B
PHASE DIR1 B OP Phase directional element operation Group 1 Phase B
PHASE DIR1 BLOCK C Phase directional element block Group 1 Phase C
PHASE DIR1 C OP Phase directional element operation Group 1 Phase C
Phase Directional PHASE DIR2 BLOCK B Phase directional element block Group 2 Phase B
PHASE DIR3 BLOCK B Phase directional element block Group 3 Phase B
NEUTRAL DIR1 BLK INP Neutral directional element block input signal Group 1
NEUTRAL DIR1 BLOCK Neutral directional element blocked Group 1
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP Neutral directional element operation Group 1
Neutral Directional NEUTRAL DIR2 BLOCK Neutral directional element blocked Group 2
NEUTRAL DIR3 BLOCK Neutral directional element blocked Group 3
GROUND DIR1 BLK INP Ground directional element block input signal Group 1
GROUND DIR1 BLOCK Ground directional element blocked Group 1
GROUND DIR1 OP Ground directional element operation Group 1
Ground Directional GROUND DIR2 BLOCK Ground directional element blocked Group 2
GROUND DIR3 BLOCK Ground directional element blocked Group 3


Sensitive ground directional element block input Group
SENS GND DIR1 BLK IP
1
SENS GND DIR1 BLOCK Sensitive Ground directional element block Group 1
SENS GND DIR1 OP Sensitive Ground directional element operation Group 1
2
Sensitive Ground Directional
3
Fuse failure VT FUSE FAILURE Fuse failure operation
PHASE UV1 BLOCK Phase undervoltage element block Group 1
PHASE UV1 A PKP Undervoltage element pickup AG Group 1
PHASE UV1 A OP Undervoltage element operation AG Group 1
PHASE UV1 B PKP Undervoltage element pickup BG Group 1
PHASE UV1 B OP Undervoltage element operation BG Group 1
PHASE UV1 C PKP Undervoltage element pickup CG Group 1
Phase UV
PHASE UV1 C OP Undervoltage element operation CG Group 1
PHASE UV1 AB PKP Undervoltage element pickup AB Group 1
PHASE UV1 AB OP Undervoltage element operation AB Group 1
PHASE UV1 BC PKP Undervoltage element pickup BC Group 1
PHASE UV1 BC OP Undervoltage element operation BC Group 1
PHASE UV1 CA PKP Undervoltage element pickup CA Group 1


PHASE UV1 CA OP Undervoltage element operation CA Group 1
PHASE UV1 PKP Pickup of any of the above mentioned elements
PHASE UV1 OP Operation of any of the above mentioned elements
Phase UV PHASE UV2 PKP Pickup of any of the above mentioned elements
PHASE UV3 PKP Pickup of any of the above mentioned elements


PHASE OV1 BLOCK Phase overvoltage element block Group 1
PHASE OV1 AB PKP Overvoltage element pickup AB Group 1
PHASE OV1 AB OP Overvoltage element operation AB Group 1
PHASE OV1 BC PKP Overvoltage element pickup BC Group 1
PHASE OV1 BC OP Overvoltage element operation BC Group 1
PHASE OV1 CA PKP Overvoltage element pickup CA Group 1
PHASE OV1 CA OP Overvoltage element operation CA Group 1
PHASE OV1 PKP Pickup of any of the above mentioned elements
PHASE OV1 OP Operation of any of the above mentioned elements
Phase OV PHASE OV2 BC OP Overvoltage element operation BC Group 2
PHASE OV3 BC OP Overvoltage element operation BC Group 3
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH BLK Neutral overvoltage element block high level Group 1
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH PKP Neutral overvoltage element pickup high level Group 1
Neutral overvoltage element operation high level Group
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH OP
1
Neutral OV High
NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH OP
2
NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH OP
3


NEUTRAL OV1 LOW BLK Neutral overvoltage element block low level Group 1
NEUTRAL OV1 LOW PKP Neutral overvoltage element pickup low level Group 1
Neutral overvoltage element operation low level Group
NEUTRAL OV1 LOW OP
1
Neutral OV Low NEUTRAL OV2 LOW PKP Neutral overvoltage element pickup low level Group 2
NEUTRAL OV2 LOW OP
2
NEUTRAL OV3 LOW PKP Neutral overvoltage element pickup low level Group 3
NEUTRAL OV3 LOW OP
3
AUXILIARY UV1 BLOCK Auxiliary undervoltage element block Group 1
AUXILIARY UV1 PKP Auxiliary undervoltage element pickup Group 1
AUXILIARY UV1 OP Auxiliary undervoltage element operation Group 1
Auxiliary UV AUXILIARY UV2 PKP Auxiliary undervoltage element pickup Group 2
AUXILIARY UV3 PKP Auxiliary undervoltage element pickup Group 3
AUXILIARY OV1 BLOCK Auxiliary overvoltage element block Group 1
AUXILIARY OV1 PKP Auxiliary Overvoltage element pickup Group 1
AUXILIARY OV1 OP Auxiliary overvoltage element operation Group 1
Auxiliary OV AUXILIARY OV2 PKP Auxiliary Overvoltage element pickup Group 2
AUXILIARY OV3 PKP Auxiliary Overvoltage element pickup Group 3
NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK Negative sequence overvoltage element block Group 1
NEG SEQ OV1 PKP Negative sequence overvoltage element pickup Group 1
Negative sequence overvoltage element operation
NEG SEQ OV1 OP
Group 1
Negative Sequence OV
NEG SEQ OV2 OP
Group 2
NEG SEQ OV3 OP
Group 3


OVERFREQ1 BLOCK Overfrequency element block Group 1
OVERFREQ1 PKP Overfrequency element pickup Group 1
OVERFREQ1 OP Overfrequency element operation Group 1
Overfrequency OVERFREQ2 PKP Overfrequency element pickup Group 2
OVERFREQ3 PKP Overfrequency element pickup Group 3
UNDERFREQ1 BLOCK Underfrequency element block Group 1
UNDERFREQ1 PKP Underfrequency element pickup Group 1
UNDERFREQ1 OP Underfrequency element operation Group 1
Underfrequency UNDERFREQ2 PKP Underfrequency element pickup Group 2
UNDERFREQ3 PKP Underfrequency element pickup Group 3
FREQ RATE1 BLOCK Frequency rate of change element block Group 1
FREQ RATE1 PKP Frequency rate of change element pickup Group 1
FREQ RATE1 OP Frequency rate of change element operation Group 1
Frequency rate of change FREQ RATE2 PKP Frequency rate of change element pickup Group 2
FREQ RATE3 PKP Frequency rate of change element pickup Group 3
BROKEN CONDUCT1 BLK Broken conductor block Group 1
BROKEN CONDUCT1 PKP Broken conductor element Pickup Group 1
BROKEN CONDUCT1 OP Broken conductor element operation Group 1
Broken Conductor BROKEN CONDUCT2 PKP Broken conductor element Pickup Group 2
BROKEN CONDUCT3 PKP Broken conductor element Pickup Group 3


FWD PWR1 BLOCK Forward power element block Group 1
FWD PWR1 STG1 PKP Forward Power element pickup level 1 Group 1
FWD PWR1 STG1 OP Forward Power element operation level 1 Group 1
Forward Power (32FP) FWD PWR2 STG1 OP Forward Power element operation level 1 Group 2
KI2t PHASE A ALARM K·I2t phase A Alarm
KI2t PHASE B ALARM K·I2t phase B Alarm
KI2t PHASE C ALARM K·I2t phase C Alarm
Breaker Maintenance BKR OPENINGS ALARM Maximum Breaker openings alarm
BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALRM Maximum Breaker openings in one hour alarm
RESET KI2t COUNTERS KI2t Breaker ageing counter reset
RESET BKR COUNTERS Breaker openings and closings counters reset
BREAKER OPEN Breaker Opened
Breaker Status BREAKER CLOSED Breaker closed
BREAKER UNDEFINED Breaker undefined (52a and 52b have the same status)
BKR FAIL INITIATE Breaker failure initiation
BKR FAIL NO CURRENT Breaker failure without current
BKR FAIL SUPERVISION Breaker failure 1st level (supervision – retrip)
Breaker Failure BKR FAIL HISET Breaker failure 2nd level (high level)
BKR FAIL LOWSET Breaker failure 3rd level (low level)
INTERNAL ARC Internal arc
BKR FAIL 2nd STEP Breaker failure second step
Synchrocheck BLK INP Synchronism element block
Synchronsim condition (Dv, Dj and Df are within the set
Synchrocheck OP
range)
Closing permission for the synchronism element:
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
(SYNCHK OP) OR (SYNCHK CON OP)
Active if when it is set, any of the three following
Synchrocheck COND OP
conditions is met:
Synchrocheck
DL-DB OPERATION Dead line – dead bus condition
DL-LB OPERATION Dead line – live bus condition
LL-DB OPERATION Live line – dead bus condition
SLIP CONDITION Slip conditions are met
BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ Bus Frequency higher than line frequency
BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ Bus Frequency lower than line frequency


AR LEVEL BLOCK Recloser element block by level
AR PULSE BLOCK Recloser element block by pulse
AR PULSE UNBLOCK Recloser element unblock by pulse
AR INITIATE Reclose initiate
Reclose permission condition in input to Function 1 =
AR CONDS INPUT
there are conditions
AR CLOSE BREAKER Closing permission for the recloser
AR OUT OF SERVICE Recloser out of service
AR READY Recloser READY
AR LOCKOUT Recloser in LOCKOUT
AR BLOCK Recloser BLOCKed
AR RCL IN PROGRESS Recloser – Cycle in progress
Autorecloser Recloser – LOCKOUT by anomaly (reclosing command
AR LCK BY ANOMALY
during cycle in progress)
AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN Recloser – LOCKOUT by failure to open
AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE Recloser – LOCKOUT by failure to close
Recloser – LOCKOUT by external operation (e.g.: manual
AR LCK BY USER
opening with cycle in progress)
AR LCK BY CONDS Recloser – LOCKOUT by lack of reclosing conditions
AR LCK BY TRIPS Recloser – LOCKOUT by number of trips
AR LCK BY SHOTS Recloser – LOCKOUT by number of shots
AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT Recloser – Block after first shot
AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT Recloser – Block after second shot
AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT Recloser – Block after third shot
AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT Recloser – Block after fourth shot
AR BLOCK BY LEVEL Recloser – Block by level
Autorecloser
AR BLOCK BY PULSE Recloser – Block by command (pulse)
Default Channel (not used) Default Channel Channel not used


DIR PWR1 BLOCK Directional power element block Group 1
DIR PWR1 STG1 PKP Directional Power element pickup level 1 Group 1
DIR PWR1 STG1 OP Directional Power element operation level 1 Group 1
DIR PWR1 STG PKP Directional power element pickup Group 1
DIR PWR1 STG OP Directional Power element operation Group 1
Directional Power DIR PWR2 STG2 PKP Directional Power element pickup level 2 Group 2
LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK Locked rotor element block Group 1
LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP Locked rotor element pickup Group 1
LOCKED ROTOR1 OP Locked rotor element operation Group 1
Locked Rotor LOCKED ROTOR2 PKP Locked rotor element pickup Group 2
LOCKED ROTOR3 PKP Locked rotor element pickup Group 3
PulseCntr Value 1 Pulse counter element value Group 1
... ...
Pulse Counters
PulseCntr Freeze 1 Pulse counter element freeze value Group 1
... ...
Analog Level 01 Analog comparator element level Group 1
Analog comparators
... ...


LOAD ENCR1 BLK Load Encroachment element block Group 1
LOAD ENCR1 PKP Load Encroachment element pickup Group 1
LOAD ENCR1 OP Load Encroachment element operation Group 1
Load Encroachment LOAD ENCR2 PKP Load Encroachment element pickup Group 2
LOAD ENCR3 PKP Load Encroachment element pickup Group 3
32N1 HIGH BLOCK wattmetric Ground Fault Element Block High Level
Group 1
32N1 HIGH PKP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Global Pickup
(current, voltage and power) High Level Group 1
32N1 HIGH OC PKP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Overcurrent Pickup
High Level Group 1
32N1 HIGH OP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Operation High Level
Group 1
Group 2
wattmetric Ground Fault High (Logic Operands)
High Level Group 2
Group 2
Group 3
High Level Group 3
Group 3
32N1 HIGH POWER wattmetric Ground Fault Element High Level Group 1
Power Value (watts)
wattmetric Ground Fault High (Power 32N2 HIGH POWER wattmetric Ground Fault Element High Level Group 2
Measurements) Power Value (watts)
32N3 HIGH POWER wattmetric Ground Fault Element High Level Group 3
Power Value (watts)


32N1 LOW BLOCK wattmetric Ground Fault Element Block Low Level
Group 1
32N1 LOW PKP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Global Pickup
(current, voltage and power) Low Level Group 1
32N1 LOW OC PKP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Overcurrent Pickup
Low Level Group 1
32N1 LOW OP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Operation Low Level
Group 1
Group 2
wattmetric Ground Fault Low (Logic Operands)
Low Level Group 2
Group 2
Group 3
Low Level Group 3
Group 3
32N1 LOW POWER wattmetric Ground Fault Element Low Level Group 1
Power Value (watts)
wattmetric Ground Fault Low (Power 32N2 LOW POWER wattmetric Ground Fault Element Low Level Group 2
Measurements) Power Value (watts)
32N3 LOW POWER wattmetric Ground Fault Element Low Level Group 3
Power Value (watts)
1 output on. Remote Output DNA 1 Operation (GSSE/
DNA 1
GOOSE)
DNA 2
GOOSE)
... ...
DNA 32
GOOSE)
1 output on. Remote Output UserSt 1 Operation (GSSE/
User St 1
GOOSE)
User St 2
Remote Outputs GOOSE)
... ...
User St 64
GOOSE)
1 output on. Remote Output GOOSE 1 Operation
Rem GOOSE Dig Out 1
(GOOSE)
Rem GOOSE Dig Out 2
(GOOSE)
... ...
Rem GOOSE Dig Out 32
(GOOSE)


Remote Input 1 Flag is set, logic =1
Remote Inputs
... ...
Remote Device 1 Flag is set, logic =1
Remote Devices
... ...
Rem GOOSE Dig Input 1 Flag is set, logic = 1
Rem GOOSE Dig Input 2 Flag is set, logic =1
GOOSE DIG INPUTS
... ...
Rem GOOSE Dig Input 32 Flag is set, logic =1
Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 1 Analog Input 1 (Float type)
... ...
GOOSE Analog Inputs (FLOAT AND INTEGER)
Rem Ana Inp INT 1 Analog Input 1 (Integer type)
... ...


GE
Grid Solutions
Appendix B: MODBUS protocol
MODBUS PROTOCOL
B.1 Introduction
This section describes the MODBUS memory map and how to read and write data from and to the F650 relay using
MODBUS protocol. The MODBUS protocol is an industrial communications protocol based on a master/slave architecture
(RTU-Serial) or a client/server architecture (TCP/IP). Refer to http://www.modbus.org/ for more information about this
protocol.
A generic memory map has been created, compatible between versions, with all possible items that an F650 may have,
independent of type or configuration to prevent an existing integration from being affected by version changes. This
memory map describes each item including the data type, length, memory position, object version, etc. Moreover, the
memory map groups the different objects into subgroups, such as status and settings groups.
Each object has a unique memory position for the whole family. Only after reading the objects of a particular relay model,
it is possible to elaborate its own MODBUS memory map. This map is only valid for that particular relay and memory
version. From one version to another the memory positions of existing objects remain fixed, and new objects are assigned
new addresses, which again remain the same for following versions.
View the Memory Map using EnerVista 650 Setup software, menu:
View > MODBUS Memory map
B.2 MODBUS F650

B.2.1 Implemented MODBUS functionality
The implemented protocol is standard MODBUS, so any SCADA or PLC can easily communicate with F650 units.
The F650 unit always works as a slave/server, and thus never initiates communication; it is always the master/client
(Enervista 650 Software or PLC, i.e.) that initiates communication.
Only two MODBUS codes are implemented in all firmware versions:
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER B-1

B.2 MODBUS F650 APPENDIX B: MODBUS PROTOCOL
• Read function 3 (03h) and 4 (04h)

• Write function 16 (10h)
Starting from firmware version 7.50 and above, two custom MODBUS functions have also been implemented:
• Read function 66 (42h)
• Write function 67 (43h)
The two new custom function codes allow the master/server to read/write settings of protection functions affected by the
setting groups. If these MODBUS function codes are used, the master/server has access to read/write protection element
settings that belong to any setting group. In contrast, if read function 3 or Write function 4 is used, only protection
elements settings in the active setting group can be accessed/modified.
B.2.2 Physical layer

MODBUS protocol is independent of hardware. The physical layer may be in different hardware configurations: USB,
RS232, RS485, fiber optic or Ethernet.
F650 units incorporate a front USB or RS232 port, and can mount two rear RS485 or fiber optic ports, and a 1mixture of 10/
100Base TX and 10/100Base FX ports, depending on the specific order code of each F650 unit. The data flow in any of
these configurations is “half-duplex”.
B.2.2.1 Serial layer

The port baud rate and the parity are independent and programmable for each communication port. Any port may be
programmed to baud rates of: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 115200. Parity may be even, odd, or none.
The master must know the slave address with which it is going to communicate. No unit operates after a master request if
the message address is not its own, unless the address is 0, which is the broadcast address. In this case the relay operates,
but won’t send a reply.
B.2.2.2 B.2.2.2 TCP/IP layer

The rear ethernet or fiber optic ports are used for this connection layer.
The settings for this type of connection are gathered from the Ethernet and MODBUS protocol setpoint menus, where the
IP addresses and TCP port are configured, among other settings.
B.2.3 Data link layer

Communication is performed in strings, with data groups sent asynchronously. The master/client transmits a string to the
slave/server and the slave/server responds with another string (except for the case of broadcast communication). For the
MODBUS serial connection, a timeout or a pause in communication marks the end of a string. The length of this timeout is
equal to 3 characters, thus it varies depending on the baud rate.
The following table shows the generic string format, valid for transmission and reception. However, each function has its
own particularities, as described later in this manual.
MODBUS FORMAT
CLIENT ADDRESS 1 byte Each device in a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent two
[A] units from responding at the same time to the same request. All relay ports use this
address, which can be programmed to any value between 1 and 254.
When the master transmits a string with the slave address 0, this indicates that it is a
Broadcast. Every slave in the communication bus performs the requested action, but
none of them responds to the master. Broadcast is only accepted for writing since no
unit responds.
B-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

APPENDIX B: MODBUS PROTOCOL B.2 MODBUS F650
FUNCTION CODE 1 byte This is one of the function codes supported by the equipment. The generic function
[B] codes are 3 and 4 for reading and 16 for writing. Special read function 66 and write
function 67 are available only for firmware version 7.50 or above.
When the slave responds with an exception to any of these strings, it places to 1 the
most important bit of the corresponding function. For example, an exception to
function 3 is indicated with an 83 as function code, and an exception to function 16
or 0x10 in hexadecimal, is indicated with a 0x90.
SETTING GROUP SELECTED 1byte This part of string format only applies to read function 66 and write function 67 (fw
[B1] 7.50 or above).This byte indicates the setting group being read or written. Values
should are as follow:
0 [Decimal] Setting Group 1
…
DATA N bytes This section includes a variable number of bytes, depending on the function code. It
[C] may include: addresses, data length, settings, commands or exception codes sent by
the client.
CRC 2 bytes Two-byte control code. ModBus/RTU includes a 16-bit CRC in each string for error
[D] detection. If the slave detects a string with errors, based on an incorrect CRC, it
neither performs an action, nor responds to the master. The CRC order is LSB-MSB.
TIME OUT Required time to A string is finished when nothing is received during a period of 3.5 bytes, with the
transmit 3.5 Bytes actual time varying depending on baud rate:
15 ms at 2400 bps
2 ms at 19200 bps
300 μs at 115200 bps
etc.
B.2.4 Generic reading

MASTER/CLIENT SLAVE/SERVER
Request
Reading function 3 or 4:
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]--------------+ +[D]--+
01 04 01 09 00 01 XX XX
Data addr. Regs.
Reading function 66:
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[B1]++[C]--------------+ +[D]--+
01 42 00 01 09 00 01 XX XX
SG Data addr. Regs.
OK Response
Reading function 3 or 4:

B.2 MODBUS F650 APPENDIX B: MODBUS PROTOCOL
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]------------------------+ +[D]--+

01 04 02 00 08 XX XX
Bytes...Data .....
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]------------------------+ +[D]--+
01 42 02 00 08 XX XX
Bytes...Data ..........
Error Response
R
e
ading function 3 or 4:
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]------------------------+ +[D]--+

01 84 03 XX XX
Error code...........
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]------------------------+ +[D]--+
01 C2 03 XX XX
B.2.5 Generic writing

MASTER/CLIENT SLAVE/SERVER
Request
Writting function 16:
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]--------------------------------+ +[D]--+
01 10 00 87 00 02 04 00 0A 01 02 XX XX
Data addr. Regs. Bytes .......Data.......
Writing function 67:
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[B1]++[C]--------------+ +[D]--+
01 43 00 09 C1 00 01 02 00 03 XX XX
SG Data addr. Regs. Bytes Data
OK Response

APPENDIX B: MODBUS PROTOCOL B.2 MODBUS F650
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]------------------------------+ +[D]--+

01 10 00 87 00 02 XX XX
Data Addr…....Regs .....
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]---------------------------------+ +[D]--+
01 43 09 C1 00 01 XX XX
Data Addr…....Regs .....
Error Response
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]------------------------+ +[D]--+

01 90 07 XX XX
Error code...........
+[A]+ +[B]+ +[C]------------------------+ -+ +[D]--+
01 C3 03 XX XX
B.2.6 Function codes
CODE MODBUS NAME F650 DEFINITION COMMENT

HEX DEC
03 3 Read Holding Reading of any These functions allow the master to read one or more consecutive relay
Registers value addresses. Registers are always 16-bits long, with the most important byte first.
04 4 Read Input Reading of any The maximum number of registers that can be read in a single package is 125,
Registers value equivalent to 250 bytes.
42 66 Setting Group Reading of values This function allows the master to read any setting/actual value that belongs to
Read affected by any setting groups, active or not, in one or more consecutive relay addresses.
setting groups Registers are always 16-bits long, with the most important byte first. The
maximum number of registers that can be read in a single package is 125,
equivalent to 250 bytes.
10 16 Preset Multiple Writing This function allows the master to write one or more registers, representing one or
Registers more settings. Registers are 2-byte long values, transmitted with the most
important byte first. The maximum number of registers that can be written in a
single package is 125, equivalent to 250 bytes.
43 67 Setting Group Writtig of values This function allows the master to write any setting that belongs to any setting
Write affected by group, active or not, in one or more consecutive relay addresses. Registers are
sseting always 16-bits long, with the most important byte first. The maximum number of
registers that can be written in a single package is 125, equivalent to 250 bytes.

B.3 DATA TYPE APPENDIX B: MODBUS PROTOCOL
B.2.7 Exception and error responses

The following table shows error codes defined in ModBus protocol:
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Slave does not support the function code received.
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS Master is using an incorrect address.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE Slave has detected an invalid value.
04 ILLEGAL RESPONSE LENGTH Response to the master’s request exceeds the maximum size for that function code.
05 ACKNOWLEDGE Generic acknowledgement.
06 SLAVE DEVICE BUSY Slave is busy and cannot perform the requested operation.
07 NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE Negative acknowledgement.
B.3 Data type
TYPE LENGTH DESCRIPTIÓN

F1 1 Boolean data type.
As it is a bit, for evaluating it we need a memory address and a bit. For example: Value 0x1A41-0001101001000001b
Bit 15 0
Bit 14 0
Bit 13 0
Bit 12 1
Bit 11 1
Bit 10 0
Bit 09 1
Bit 08 0
Bit 07 0
Bit 06 1
Bit 05 0
Bit 04 0
Bit 03 0
Bit 02 0
Bit 01 0
Bit 00 1
F2 2 Integer with 4 bytes sign.
Must be scaled, by multiplying the sent value by 1000, or dividing the received value by 1000. For example, if a value
of 34509 is received, the converted value is 34.509. To write the value 334, the value 334000 is sent.
This prevents the loss of accuracy involved in using float values.
Example: 12312d=0x00003018.
Real Value = 12312/1000=12.312
F3 2 4-byte Floating
Example: 1240.556 = 0x449B11CB
F4 1 Integer with 2 bytes sign.
Example: 123 = 0x007B
F5 2 Integer without 4 bytes sign.
Example: 12312 = 0x00003018
F6 4 8 bytes Float
Example: 123.324 = 0x405ED4BC6A7EF9DB
F7 1 Characters without sign. As it needs to be sent in a register, i.e. in two bytes, the character goes below.
Example: ‘β’ = 0x00E1
F8 1 Characters with sign As it needs to be sent in a register, i.e. in two bytes, the character goes below.
Example: ‘A’ = 0x0041
F9 16 String. Chain of characters with a fixed length (32 bytes). The end of the string is marked with “\0”.
Example: “ABC” = 0x41x42x43x00....

APPENDIX B: MODBUS PROTOCOL B.4 MODBUS DATA
F10 1 This is a 16-bit integer without sign. Each value that can be taken by this integer has a correspondence in the
database Auxiliary Table. In this table we can find the corresponding chain, which must be shown for each value. In
memory, only an integer value is received.
Example: 0, 1Correspond to CLOSE, OPEN
F11 3 Milliseconds passed since January/1/2000 at 00:00:00.000.
F12 1 Unsigned int 16 bit (enumerated), example: In MODBUS address Ox0EBE is the FAULT TYPE
0=GROUND
1=PHASE
2=3 PH
3=AG
4=ABG
5=AB
6=BG
7=BCG
8=BC
9=CG
10=CAG
11=CA
12=NAF
B.4 MODBUS data

B.4.1 Data management
The data managed in ModBus differs in size and functionality. Depending on the functionality and importance of certain
data, the use of ModBus is optimized in time for real time processes, as in the case of events.
Although some configuration settings, such as GRAPHIC, PLC equations, TEXTS, and ALARM and LED configuration can be
read and written using ModBus protocol, formats are not shown because they are subject to change. Use the EnerVista
650 Setup program to manage and format configuration settings.
B.4.2 Writing settings

The process for changing protection functionality usually involves the modification of a group of settings that belong to a
particular protection function. This guarantees protection functionality and offers versatility for possible legacy programs.
Writing settings must be performed in two consecutive steps: Writing and Confirmation.
In order to perform this process, the MODBUS master must write the selected settings and then confirm the operation by
writing a register in the last position of this group. For safety reasons, there is a set time window within which the confirm
settings modification must be completed. The time window between the last settings being written to confirmation cannot
exceed 15 seconds.
B.4.3 Snapshot events

In the F650, the NEW EVENTS concept has been extended, providing additional functionality. These are the events created
after the last request.
Firmware version 1.60 adds a new way of reading snapshot events in binary format. Before this version, the relay sent
information only in ASCII format. The snapshot event retrieval is similar to the ASCII.
SNAPSHOT EVENT READING IN ASCII FORMAT

1. Write a message to the ‘0xfe00’ address, including the file name to open:
“EVE .TXT”: to read all events.
“NEW_EVE.TXT": to read events created from the last request of this same file.
“EVE0234 .TXT “: to read events starting, for example, from event number 234.

B.4 MODBUS DATA APPENDIX B: MODBUS PROTOCOL
2. Subsequent messages read the 0xff00 address, in blocks of 250 bytes (4 bytes that indicate the point value to the
file, 2 bytes that indicate the number of data bytes sent, and 244 data bytes). If the number of data bytes sent is lower
than 244, this indicates that it is the last message.
If during this process there is an error response, the request can be repeated in address 0xff02 reading 246 bytes (2
bytes that indicate the number of bytes sent, and 244 data bytes).
In the second step, many BUSY responses may be produced, because an ASCII file is being created internally.
SNAPSHOT EVENT READING IN BINARY FORMAT:

1. Write a message to the ‘0xfe00’ address, including the file name to open:
“EVE .BIN”: to read all events.
“NEW_EVE.BIN": to read events created from the last request of this same file.
“EVE0234 .BIN “: to read events starting, for example, from event number 234.
2. Subsequent messages read the 0xff00 address, in blocks of 250 bytes (4 bytes that indicate the point value to the
file, 2 bytes that indicate the number of data bytes sent, and 244 data bytes). If the number of data bytes sent is lower
than 244, this indicates that it is the last message.
If during this process there is an error response, the request can be repeated in address 0xff02 reading 246 bytes (2
bytes that indicate the number of bytes sent, and 244 data bytes).
Each Snapshot event includes:
1st byte: event format code.
N bytes: Event information structured depending on the code
There is only one format type with code 0. Its structure is as follows:
• UINT16: event handle.
• 8 bytes: event date and time.
• 29 bytes: event cause. (string end in null).
• UINT32: Phasor Ia (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Phasor Ib (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Phasor Ic (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Line Frequency (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Phasor Ig (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Phasor Isg (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Zero seq I0 (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Positive seq I1 (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Negative seq I2 (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Phasor Van (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Phasor Vbn (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Phasor Vcn (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Positive Seq V1 (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Negative Seq V2 (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: Zero Seq V0 (scaled to 1000).
• UINT32: 3 Phase Power Factor (scaled to 1000).
Example:
1st step:
[0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x00 0x00 0x06 0x0C 0x4E 0x45 0x57 0x5F 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x2E 0x54 0x58 0x54 0x00 0x16 0xB0] -------
-> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x00 0x00 0x06 0x65 0xEC]

2nd step:
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0x00 0x00 0x7D 0xA1 0xF0] --------> RELAY
The relay responds with “SLAVE DEVICE BUSY”:
PC <--------- 0xFE 0x83 0x06 0xF1 0x02]
The request is repeated:
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0x00 0x00 0x7D 0xA1 0xF0] --------> RELAY
Now the relay sends the events format:
[A] Position within file (Unsigned 32 bits)
[B] Block size (Unsigned 16 bits)
PC --------- [0xFE 0x03 0xFA 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0xF4 0x46 0x4F 0x52 0x4D 0x41
.............[A].............. .....[B]...... F O R M A
0x54 0x2C 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30
T , E V E N T _ F 6 5 0 _ V 0
0x30 0x2C 0x45 0x76 0x65 0x6E 0x74 0x20 0x4E 0x75 0x6D 0x2C 0x44 0x61 0x74
0 , E v e n t N u m , D a t
0x65 0x2F 0x54 0x69 0x6D 0x65 0x3C 0x48 0x65 0x78 0x3E 0x2C 0x43 0x61 0x75
e / T i m e . . . etc . . .
0x73 0x65 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x61 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x62
0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x63 0x2C 0x4C 0x69 0x6E 0x65 0x20 0x46 0x72 0x65 0x71 0x75 0x65
0x6E 0x63 0x79 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49 0x67 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x49
0x73 0x67 0x2C 0x5A 0x65 0x72 0x6F 0x20 0x73 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x49 0x30 0x2C 0x50 0x6F 0x73 0x69 0x74 0x69 0x76
0x65 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x49 0x31 0x2C 0x4E 0x65 0x67 0x61 0x74 0x69 0x76 0x65 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20
0x49 0x32 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x56 0x61 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x56
0x62 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x56 0x63 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x6F 0x73 0x69 0x74 0x69 0x76 0x65
0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56 0x31 0x2C 0x4E 0x65 0x67 0x61 0x74 0x69 0x76 0x65 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56
0x32 0x2C 0x5A 0x65 0x72 0x6F 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56 0x30 0x2C 0x33 0x20 0x50 0x68 0x4C 0xF3]
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0x00 0x00 0x7D 0xA1 0xF0] ---------> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x03 0xFA 0x00 0x00 0x00 0xF4 0x00 0xF4 0x61 0x73 0x65 0x20 0x50 0x6F
0x77 0x65 0x72 0x20 0x46 0x61 0x63 0x74 0x6F 0x72 0x0D 0x0A
CR LF (here the format ends)
0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x35 0x36 0x35
E V E N T _ F 6 5 0 _ V 0 0 , 5 6 5
0 x37 0x2C 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x36 0x66 0x63 0x39 0x38 0x66
7 , 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 6 f 3 9 8 f
0x34 0x33 0x39 0x2C 0x4C 0x6F 0x63 0x61 0x6C 0x20 0x6D 0x6F 0x64 0x65 0x2C
4 3 9 , l o c a l m o d e ,
0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30
....

0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30
0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32
0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30
0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x31 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x0D 0x0A
CR LF (a line ends)
0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x35 0x36 0x35 0x38 0x2C 0x30 0x30
0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x36 0x66 0x63 0x39 0x38 0x66 0x34 0x33 0x39 0x2C 0x28 0x31 0x29 0x56 0x69 0x72 0x74
0x75 0x61 0x6C 0x20 0x4F 0x75 0x74 0x38 0x39 0x36 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31
0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x34 0x24]
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0x00 0x00 0x7D 0xA1 0xF0] ---------> RELAY
PC <---------[0xFE 0x03 0xFA 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xE8 0x00 0x47 0x30 0x0047 => last string
0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30
0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32
0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x31 0x2E 0x30
0x30 0x30 0x0D 0x0A
CR LF (a line ends)
0x00 0x00 0x30 0x0D 0x0A 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x33 0x30
0x39 0x38 0x2C 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x36 0x65 0x62 0x61 0x33 0x33 0x62 0x62 0x38 0x2C 0x43 0x6F
0x6E 0x74 0x61 0x63 0x74 0x20 0x4F 0x75 0x74 0x70 0x75 0x74 0x5F 0x30 0x30 0x5F 0x30 0x30 0x20 0x4F 0x4E 0x2C
0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30
0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E
0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x32 0x2C
0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30
0x30 0x2C 0x31 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x0D 0x0A 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0xDB 0xB4]
B.4.4 Operations
To execute an operation, write the bit corresponding to that operation. For this purpose, there are two memory records
with bits representing operations. These records are 0xAFFE and 0xAFFF.
Each operation is assigned one bit in the register:
Operation 1: bit 0 ‘0xaffe’
Operation 2: bit 1‘0xaffe’
...
Operation 16: bit 15‘0xaffe’
Operation 17: bit 0‘0xafff’
...
Operation 24: bit 7‘0xafff’
The register format is Big Endian; this means that the first byte arriving is the one with more weight. Operations commands
are affected depending on the physical communication channel they use: serial port, ethernet ports, mmi, etc.
Refer to section 4.2.3.2 Command push button on page 4–51.
The operations channels are:
0 - MMI
1 - OPER REMOTE
2 - COM 1- COMMUNICATION
3 - COM 2- COMMUNICATION

4 - RED 1- COMMUNICATION
Example, operation 1 is going to perform:

[0xFE 0x10 0xAF 0xFE 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x00 0x01 0x68 0xB0] ---------> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x10 0xAF 0xFE 0x00 0x01 0x55 0x22] (ACK (acknowledge) the operation)
B.4.5 Force outputs of IO boards
To ease and test IO boards' outputs physical wiring, each IO boards' contact outputs can be forced to actuate with this
MODBUS command. Proceed as with a file access (open, write, and close).
For example, to write to a mixed board (16 inputs and 8 outputs):
1 - OPEN OUTPUT FILE: write to 0xFE20, 3 registers with the name OUTPUT
2 - WRITE TO FILE: write to 0xFF20, 5 REGISTERS, the first one is the board slot (F=0, G=1, H=2, J=3 and so on) and the
restraint ones are the bytes of bits (bits are grouped byte to byte).
3 - CLOSE OUTPUT FILE: write msg to 0xFE 28 of 3 registers with the name OUTPUT
Example, activate the two lower relays to board ‘0’:

1 Open:
[0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x20 0x00 0x03 0x06 0x4F 0x55 0x54 0x50 0x55 0x54 0xA8 0x42] ---------> RELAY
O U T P U T
PC <---------[0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x20 0x00 0x03 0xA4 0x25]
2 Write:
[0xFE 0x10 0xFF 0x20 0x00 0x05 0x0A 0x00 0x00 0x03 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x0000 0x03
0xAE 0x8D] ---------> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x10 0xFF 0x20 0x00 0x05 0x25 0xDB]
3 Close:
[0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x28 0x00 0x03 0x06 0x4F 0x55 0x54 0x50 0x55 0x54 0x29 0xA8] ---------> RELAY
PC <--------- [0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x28 0x00 0x03 0x25 0xE7]
B.4.6 Control events

This section explains control events, not to be confused with the snapshot events. A control event is the value change from
0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 of one bit, and is associated with a time label showing when the change occurred.

In the F650, any status or combination of status may generate an event. The F650 has 192 control events available. The
first 128 control events are user-configurable through a table from the EnerVista 650 Setup menu: Setpoint > Relay
configuration. The remaining 64 control events are associated with the 16 possible switchgear, each one generating 4
status bits:
- Open (52B ON, 52A OFF)
- Close (52A ON, 52B OFF)
- Error 00 (52A&52B OFF)
- Error 11 (52A&52B ON)
Internally the events buffer is a circular FIFO of 255 events. The addresses for managing this FIFO are:
- 0x03FF: Number of the next event
- 0xFCFF: Access to the oldest event
- 0xFD00 to 0xFDFF: Access to any stored event (circular queue)
The address 0x03FF stores the number of the next event. For example, if the number 7677 is stored, the last event stored is
number 7676. This value is initially 0, and it is increases from 0 to 2^12 + 1 carry bit as events are generated.
The carry bit indicates whether the F650 has been started, since when the relay starts, whether due to lack of power
supply or a configuration change, the carry bit is set to 0. When events are generated, the event number is increased up to
a maximum value of 0x1FFF; in the next event the number is 0x1000, thus the carry bit is always 1, until the F650 is
restarted. This is shown in the following figure:
B.4.6.1 Event structure

Each event has 14 bytes, with the following format:
- Short (2 bytes): event number (0 - 2^12 + carry bit)
- Short (2 bytes): event bit number (from 0 to 191).
- Short (2 bytes): the 0 bit indicates the event value (0 or 1) and the 15 bit indicates whether this is a
valid event (all events are initially set to 0)
- Double unsigned (8 bytes): milliseconds from 1 January 2000
The 0xFCFF address is useful when reading all the available events in the F650, as is done following a master start up.
WARNING! Unlike a standard ModBus address, these addresses consist of 14 bytes each one, instead of the 2 used in
ModBus. This way, each event, which has a structure of 14 bytes, is contained in one address, as shown on the table
below:
0xFD00 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte
............
0xFDFF 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte 1byte

For example, the events buffer could contain the following information:
Event 7424 7425 .......... 7675 7676 7421 7422 7423

Number
Address 0xFD00 0xFD01 0xFDFB 0xFDFC 0xFDFD 0xFDFE 0xFDFF
105 registers: 15 events * 7 registers.
NOTE: In this example the 0x03FF address has event number 7677 because 7676 was the last event number used.
B.4.6.2 Event collection process
ALL EVENTS
Whe n reading all events, there are two possible approaches:
First option: start from the oldest event, in address 0xFCFF, and read the events 15 by 15. The initial request frame sent to
the relay is as follows:
Within this frame the buffer pointer is set to the oldest event, or number 7421 in the example. 15 events are returned,
ending with number 7435.
In order to read the following 15 events, numbered from 7436 to 7450, calculate the initial address and send another
request frame:
Hex(7436)= 0x1D0C
0x1D0C AND 0x00FF= 0xOC
0xFD00+0x0C= 0xFD0C: initial address
[0xFE 0x03 0xFD 0x0C 0x00 0x69 0x60 0x44] ---------> RELAY
Either continue until the relay responds with a 0 event, or stop at the last recorded event by reading the number of the
next upcoming event from address 0x03FF and comparing against the last event read.
Second option: read the circular event queue directly, from address 0xFD00 to 0xFDFF, and then rearrange the retrieved
events by event number.
Once all events have been read, subsequent queries should only request new events.

NEW EVENTS
The 0x03FF address contains the number of the next event to be written. Based on this, the number of events recorded
since the last query can be determined.For example, if the relay indicates that the next event to be generated is number
7677 and events up to number 7674 have already been read, there are two new events. A frame must be sent to read the
two new events, 7675 and 7676, and the corresponding 28 bytes.
Event 7424 7425 .......... 7675 7676 7421 7422 7423

Number
Address 0xFD00 0xFD01 0xFDFB 0xFDFC 0xFDFD 0xFDFE 0xFDFF
NOTE: In this example the 0x03FF address has event number 7677 because 7676 was the last event number used.
Hex(7675)=0x1DFB
0x1DFB AND 0xFF=0xFB
0xFD00+0xFB=0xFDFB: reading address (*)
[0xFE 0x03 0xFD 0xFB 0x00 0x0E 0x90 0x5C] ---------> RELAY
B.4.6.3 Control events from the command line

Starting EnerVista 650 Setup from the command line allows the transfer of control events to a file. For this purpose, we
need to indicate the event number from which event controls are to be retrieved, and the file where they are to be stored.
Communication can be established via serial communication by specifying the port and access baud rate, or via Ethernet
through the IP address and communication port. The relay number from which events are to be retrieved must also be
indicated.
For executing this Operation, 6 parameters must be written, for both cases, serial communication or Ethernet.
SERIAL COMUNICATION
EnerVista 650 Setup –e event number " File name" –com port: baud_rate relay_number
E.g.: EnerVista 650 Setup –e 6 “C:\GE Power Management\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\Events\eventos.txt” –com 1:19200 254
ETHERNET COMMUNICATION
EnerVista 650 Setup –e event number " File name" –ip “IP address”: port relay_number
E.g.: EnerVista 650 Setup –e 6 “C:\GE Power Management\EnerVista 650 Setup\files\Events \eventos.txt” –ip
192.168.37.240:502 254
The created file format looks as follows:
#Event Number, Event Id,Event Text,Event Data Time,Event Value(0,1)#
6,1,Local,09-Sep-2003 17:42:40.782,1
7,1,Local,09-Sep-2003 17:42:43.236,0
8,2,Remote,09-Sep-2003 17:42:43.236,1
B.4.6.4 Event status request (alarms)

To retrieve events that have been configured as alarms, see the following addresses:
0xF000: 24 registers, the first 12 indicate the status active/inactive and the last 12 indicate the status of
acknowledged/not acknowledged.

0xF018: 12 event alarm status (active - not active, acknowledged – not acknowledged) registers.
0xF024: date and hour of the event bits starts (groups of 16 dates and hour must be asked for).
To obtain an instantaneous snapshot of all events and alarms states, do the following:
1. Read the head of events FIFO (0x03FF).
2. Read the addresses above.
3. Finally, read the head again to confirm that it has not changed. If it had changed, restart the procedure.
NOTE: The message must request the address and the quantity of bytes indicated in each zone. If another quantity is
needed, it will not respond with the requested data.
B.4.6.5 Acknowledging alarms

For acknowledging the alarms we must simply write message to the 0xf324 address with 12 data registers. Each bit
means an event, if we want to acknowledge an alarm, its corresponding bit must be set to ‘1’ (in order within the 192 bits).
NOTE: it must be borne in mind the independence of the acknowledgement condition, for its reading and its change,
depending on the communication channel
There are 6 channels:
LOCAL: by MMI or COM-2 (front and rear accessible).
REMOTE: by COM-1
NET 1: nowadays by any net communication
NET 2: (it does not exist in version 1.4x and lower)
B.4.7 Write virtual inputs

For forcing Virtual Inputs, a message with 4 indivisible records must be written at address 0xF430, so that each bit
corresponds to a Virtual Input. Values are not correct if the first 4 records are not written in the same message. The first 32
are LATCHED (internally stored in flash memory), and the last 32 are SELF-RST (activated to 1 and deactivated in the next
pass by the PLC).
For reading the status of Virtual Inputs, it is necessary to start with address 0x0083(bit 0x004) up to 0x0087 (bit 0x0200).
B.4.8 User map

F650 units incorporate a powerful feature called ModBus User Map, that allows to read 256 non-consecutive data records
(settings and statuses). It is often required for a master computer to interrogate repeatedly several connected slave relays.
If those values are dispersed along the memory map, reading them may require several petitions, and this may cause a
communications overload. The User Map can be programmed to get several memory addresses together in a block of
consecutive addresses of the User Map, so that they can be accessible with a single reading operation.
The User Map has two sections:
A record index area (addresses 0x3384 to 0x3483), containing 256 statuses and/or setting record addresses.
A record area (addresses 0xF330 to 0xF42F), containing the values for addresses indicated in the index area.
Data records that are separated in the rest of the memory map can be remapped to an address of an adjacent record in
the User Map area. For programming the map this way, addresses for the required records must be written in the index
area. This avoids the need for several reading operations, thus improving data transmission yield.
For instance, if Contact Outputs from Board F (address 0x008B) and Board G (address 0x00B0) values are required, these
addresses must be mapped as follows:

In address 0x3384, write 0x008B.

In address 0x3385 XXX write 0x00B0.
The reading of records 0xF330 and 0xF331, applying the corresponding bit masks, provides the required information
about the two boards Contact Outputs.
NOTE: Only single data can be set in the map, i.e. data that are in the memory map and can be read. This feature is not
valid for events, waveform records, etc. that are not located in a map address.
B.4.9 Retrieve oscillography

For firmware versions below 7.xx, in case of not using the quickest download method by TFTP, ModBus can be used for
downloading oscillography, in the same way that events (snap-shots). First of all, open file with writing message in 0xfe40,
where desired file to open is indicated, it can be:
OSC01.DAT (COMTRADE data file in binary)
OSC02.CFG (COMTRADE configuration file)
OSC01.HDR (COMTRADE header file)
OSC02.DAT
OSC02.HDR
...
For reading the oscillography in several strings, several reading requests must be sent to 0xff40 address. For reading the
previous message a reading petition must be sent to 0xff42 address. The maximum number of bytes to be read in each
part is 244.
Note: For firmware versions 7.xx and above, this feature is not available.
B.4.10 Time synchronization

Time synchronization consists of setting the relay date and time.
This is similar to other settings group entries, with some unique characteristics:
- The data type is specific to time.
- Once the data is changed, varies with time, it is a changing setting that can be read.
- It shares the time change with IRIG-B (this has more priority) and with a possible modification from MMI or another
protocols.
- When the relay is disconnected from its auxiliary power supply for extended periods (days) the time remains in a
chip, fed by a capacitor (it does not need maintenance).
- And last, there are synchronism between the real time chip and the microprocessor time.
Time synchronization is made by a reading message over 0xfff0 address, either with the address of a single relay, if a
writing confirmation is desired, or in broadcast, to synchronize several relays simultaneously.
Date/time format is stored in 4 MODBUS registers (8 bytes, Big Endian format), which indicates elapsed milliseconds from
the 1st of January 2000 at 00:00:00.000.
Reading example:
[0xFE 0x03 0xFF 0xF0 0x00 0x04 0x60 0x21] ---------> RELAY
PC <---------- [0xFE 0x03 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x17 0x05 0xFA 0xD5 0xBA 0x2D 0x1D]
Synchronism example:
[0xFE 0x10 0xFF 0xF0 0x00 0x04 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x17 0x9B 0x53 0x3F 0x60 0xA4 0x2B] ---------> RELAY

PC <---------- [0xFE 0x10 0xFF 0xF0 0x00 0x04 0xE5 0xE2]
B.4.11 Queueing messages

In ModBus protocol, as in other protocols, exists an internal procedure in message reception and transmission.
When a relay gets a string, determined by a silence of 3 or 4 characters, it is queued in a FIFO queue, for a later processing
in its own protocol. When the protocol is free of execution, it searches in the queue for strings to respond of the FIFO. If
there is such string, it processes it and then it is responded.
Several criteria have been adopted for real time operation:
- Each reading or writing is answered as soon as possible.
- This implies that when settings are changed and answered, a writing request recognition is indicated and then, the
modification of internal settings is performed, and finally, after confirmation is sent, settings are stored in a non-
volatile memory device.
NOTE: As the relay is internally a modular system, it is possible that the response of some processes is slower than what is
expected by the external program, considering the message as missed and sending again another request. If so, there will
be 2 queued messages and therefore, 2 message responses. For this reason, response message ‘ACK’ must be verified
with its request, and special attention must be paid to setting confirmation writings, especially with reference to time-out.
EnerVista 650 Setup software is recommended to do the configuration modifications, as this software takes into account
all these details.
B.4.12 Traces and troubleshooting

The tracer is a debugging tool to view the strings in any writing or reading process in ModBus. This tracer is activated in the
menu from EnerVista 650 Setup: View, Traces.
With this option enabled, request and response strings are shown. If, for instance, the request and response strings view is
desired, between F650 and the relay, do the following:
1 - Activate traces, from View > Traces, and a new window opens at the bottom of the main window.
2 - Open the general settings menu: Setpoint > System Setup > General Settings
The screen displays the group settings, and on the left side bottom the relay read request is shown:
<0001><06/18/03 12:14:15>[0xFE 0x03 0x21 0x8A 0x00 0x16 0xFB 0xDD]
On the right the settings response is shown:
0001><06/18/03 12:14:15>[0xFE 0x03 0x2C 0x3F 0x80 0x00 0x00 0x3F 0x80 0x00 0x00 0x3F 0x80 0x00 0x00 0x3F
0x80 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x42 0xC8 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00 0xFE
0x00 0xFE 0x00 0x06 0x00 0x06 0x00 0x00 0x01 0xF6 0xAC 0xB5]
This way, any request or mechanism to obtain information from the relay can be viewed string by string.
There is another tool for tracing the relay memory: in the EnerVista 650 Setup menu: Communication > Troubleshooting,
any read of any address can be requested, and the PC forms the request string together with the check-sum register.
B.4.13 MODBUS CRC generation function

This section describes the C programming language implementation to calculate the CRC of the message string check in
ModBus, in a Big-Endian format.

The implemented function in the F650 called here fn_035c_cr16 returns an unsigned 16 bit type (2 bytes) with the CRC of
the message defined in the function parameters as:
p = pointer to the MODBUS message string to calculate the CRC
us = length in bytes of the MODBUS message (header + data) minus 2 bytes (the CRC of the message itself)
USHORT fn_035c_cr16(UCHAR *p, UNSIGNED us)
{
const UCHAR hi[] = {
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,
0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,
0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,
0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,
0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,
0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,
0X81,0X40,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,
0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40,0X1,0Xc0,0X80,0X41,0X1,0Xc0,
0X80,0X41,0X0,0Xc1,0X81,0X40};
const UCHAR lo[] = {

0X0,0Xc0,0Xc1,0X1,0Xc3,0X3,0X2,0Xc2,0Xc6,0X6,
0X7,0Xc7,0X5,0Xc5,0Xc4,0X4,0Xcc,0Xc,0Xd,0Xcd,
0Xf,0Xcf,0Xce,0Xe,0Xa,0Xca,0Xcb,0Xb,0Xc9,0X9,
0X8,0Xc8,0Xd8,0X18,0X19,0Xd9,0X1b,0Xdb,0Xda,0X1a,
0X1e,0Xde,0Xdf,0X1f,0Xdd,0X1d,0X1c,0Xdc,0X14,0Xd4,
0Xd5,0X15,0Xd7,0X17,0X16,0Xd6,0Xd2,0X12,0X13,0Xd3,

0X11,0Xd1,0Xd0,0X10,0Xf0,0X30,0X31,0Xf1,0X33,0Xf3,
0Xf2,0X32,0X36,0Xf6,0Xf7,0X37,0Xf5,0X35,0X34,0Xf4,
0X3c,0Xfc,0Xfd,0X3d,0Xff,0X3f,0X3e,0Xfe,0Xfa,0X3a,
0X3b,0Xfb,0X39,0Xf9,0Xf8,0X38,0X28,0Xe8,0Xe9,0X29,
0Xeb,0X2b,0X2a,0Xea,0Xee,0X2e,0X2f,0Xef,0X2d,0Xed,
0Xec,0X2c,0Xe4,0X24,0X25,0Xe5,0X27,0Xe7,0Xe6,0X26,
0X22,0Xe2,0Xe3,0X23,0Xe1,0X21,0X20,0Xe0,0Xa0,0X60,
0X61,0Xa1,0X63,0Xa3,0Xa2,0X62,0X66,0Xa6,0Xa7,0X67,
0Xa5,0X65,0X64,0Xa4,0X6c,0Xac,0Xad,0X6d,0Xaf,0X6f,
0X6e,0Xae,0Xaa,0X6a,0X6b,0Xab,0X69,0Xa9,0Xa8,0X68,
0X78,0Xb8,0Xb9,0X79,0Xbb,0X7b,0X7a,0Xba,0Xbe,0X7e,
0X7f,0Xbf,0X7d,0Xbd,0Xbc,0X7c,0Xb4,0X74,0X75,0Xb5,
0X77,0Xb7,0Xb6,0X76,0X72,0Xb2,0Xb3,0X73,0Xb1,0X71,
0X70,0Xb0,0X50,0X90,0X91,0X51,0X93,0X53,0X52,0X92,
0X96,0X56,0X57,0X97,0X55,0X95,0X94,0X54,0X9c,0X5c,
0X5d,0X9d,0X5f,0X9f,0X9e,0X5e,0X5a,0X9a,0X9b,0X5b,
0X99,0X59,0X58,0X98,0X88,0X48,0X49,0X89,0X4b,0X8b,
0X8a,0X4a,0X4e,0X8e,0X8f,0X4f,0X8d,0X4d,0X4c,0X8c,
0X44,0X84,0X85,0X45,0X87,0X47,0X46,0X86,0X82,0X42,
0X43,0X83,0X41,0X81,0X80,0X40 };
UCHAR chi;
UCHAR clo;
USHORT ui;
chi = 0xff;
clo = 0xff;
while(us--)
{ ui = chi ^ *p++;
chi = clo ^ hi[ui];
clo = lo[ui];
}
ui = chi;
ui = ui << 8;
ui = ui | clo; // Big-Endian format
return(ui);
}
If it is Little-Endian format the returned bytes must be interchanged: each unsigned 16 bit type's bytes need to be
swapped.

B.5 MEMORY MAP APPENDIX B: MODBUS PROTOCOL
B.5 Memory map
The Memory map can be obtained from EnerVista 650 Setup software, menu:
View > ModBus Memory map
ADDRESS BIT NAME FORMAT STEP MODE LENGTH MISCELLANEOUS
Estado CPU - CPU Status
0x0003 0x0100 TIMER STATUS F001 R 1
0x0003 0x0200 E2PROM STATUS F001 R 1
Salidas Virtuales (512 elementos) - Virtual Outputs
0x0005 0x0400 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 000 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Salidas virtuales analógicas- Virtual Output Analog
0x07D0 INT32_000 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07D2 INT32_001 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07D4 INT32_002 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07D6 INT32_003 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07D8 INT32_004 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07DA INT32_005 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07DC INT32_006 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07DE INT32_007 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07E0 INT32_008 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07E2 INT32_009 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07E4 INT32_010 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07E6 INT32_011 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07E8 INT32_012 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07EA INT32_013 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07EC INT32_014 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07EE INT32_015 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07F0 INT32_016 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07F2 INT32_017 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07F4 INT32_018 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07F6 INT32_019 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07F8 INT32_020 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07FA INT32_021 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07FC INT32_022 F005 1.000 R 2
0x07FE INT32_023 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0800 INT32_024 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0802 INT32_025 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0804 INT32_026 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0806 INT32_027 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0808 INT32_028 F005 1.000 R 2
0x080A INT32_029 F005 1.000 R 2
0x080C INT32_030 F005 1.000 R 2
0x080E INT32_031 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0810 INT32_032 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0812 INT32_033 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0814 INT32_034 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0816 INT32_035 F005 1.000 R 2

APPENDIX B: MODBUS PROTOCOL B.5 MEMORY MAP

0x0818 INT32_036 F005 1.000 R 2
0x081A INT32_037 F005 1.000 R 2
0x081C INT32_038 F005 1.000 R 2
0x081E INT32_039 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0820 INT32_040 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0822 INT32_041 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0824 INT32_042 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0826 INT32_043 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0828 INT32_044 F005 1.000 R 2
0x082A INT32_045 F005 1.000 R 2
0x082C INT32_046 F005 1.000 R 2
0x082E INT32_047 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0830 INT32_048 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0832 INT32_049 F005 1.000 R 2
0x0834 FLT32_000 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0836 FLT32_001 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0838 FLT32_002 F003 1.000 R 2
0x083A FLT32_003 F003 1.000 R 2
0x083C FLT32_004 F003 1.000 R 2
0x083E FLT32_005 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0840 FLT32_006 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0842 FLT32_007 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0844 FLT32_008 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0846 FLT32_009 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0848 FLT32_010 F003 1.000 R 2
0x084A FLT32_011 F003 1.000 R 2
0x084C FLT32_012 F003 1.000 R 2
0x084E FLT32_013 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0850 FLT32_014 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0852 FLT32_015 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0854 FLT32_016 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0856 FLT32_017 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0858 FLT32_018 F003 1.000 R 2
0x085A FLT32_019 F003 1.000 R 2
0x085C FLT32_020 F003 1.000 R 2
0x085E FLT32_021 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0860 FLT32_022 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0862 FLT32_023 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0864 FLT32_024 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0866 FLT32_025 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0868 FLT32_026 F003 1.000 R 2
0x086A FLT32_027 F003 1.000 R 2
0x086C FLT32_028 F003 1.000 R 2
0x086E FLT32_029 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0870 FLT32_030 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0872 FLT32_031 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0874 FLT32_032 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0876 FLT32_033 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0878 FLT32_034 F003 1.000 R 2
0x087A FLT32_035 F003 1.000 R 2
0x087C FLT32_036 F003 1.000 R 2
0x087E FLT32_037 F003 1.000 R 2


0x0880 FLT32_038 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0882 FLT32_039 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0884 FLT32_040 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0886 FLT32_041 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0888 FLT32_042 F003 1.000 R 2
0x088A FLT32_043 F003 1.000 R 2
0x088C FLT32_044 F003 1.000 R 2
0x088E FLT32_045 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0890 FLT32_046 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0892 FLT32_047 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0894 FLT32_048 F003 1.000 R 2
0x0896 FLT32_049 F003 1.000 R 2
Maniobras (24 elementos) - Operations
0x0025 0x0400 OPERATION BIT 1 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ..
Eventos de control (128 elementos) - Control Events
0x003D 0x0400 CONTROL EVENT 1 F001 R 1
0x003D 0x0800 CONTROL EVENT 2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x0045 0x0200 CONTROL EVENT 128 F001 R 1
Salidas Virtuales Latcheadas (16 elementos) - Latched virtual outputs
0x0045 0x0400 V.O. Latched 1 F001 R 1
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
0x0045 0x1000 V.O. Latched 3 F001 R 1
0x0046 0x0200 V.O. Latched 16 F001 R 1
Reset Salidas Virtuales Latcheadas - Reset Latched virtual outputs
0x0046 0x0400 Reset V.O. Latched F001 R 1
Entradas Virtuales con sellado (32 elementos) - Virtual Input Latched
0x0083 0x0400 LATCHED VIRT IP 1 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Entradas Virtuales Autoresetables (32 elementos) - Virtual Input Self Reset
0x0085 0x0400 SELF-RST VIRT IP 1 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Estado Pantalla - Display Status (does not apply to C650 models)
0x0087 0x0400 GRAPHIC STATUS F001 R 1
0x0087 0x0800 ALARM TEXT ARRAY F001 R 1
Estado Entradas Tarjeta F (32 elementos) - Board F: Contact Input Status
0x0087 0x1000 CONT IP_F_CC1 F001 R 1
0x0087 0x2000 CONT IP_F_CC2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... .... ... ... ...
0x0089 0x0800 CONT IP_F_CC32 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Activación salidas Tarjeta F (16 elementos) - Board F: Contact Output Operate -logical status-
0x0089 0x1000 CONT OP OPER_F_01 F001 R 1
0x0089 0x2000 CONT OP OPER_F_02 F001 R 1


... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x008A 0x0800 CONT OP OPER_F_16 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Reposición de Salidas Tarjeta F (16 elementos) - Board F: Contact Output Resets
0x008A 0x1000 CONT OP RESET_F_1 F001 R 1
0x008A 0x2000 CONT OP RESET_F_2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...

0x008B 0x0800 CONT OP RESET_F_16 F001 R 1
Estado Salidas Tarjeta F (16 elementos) - Board F: Contact Outputs -physical status-
0x008B 0x1000 CONT OP_F_01 F001 R 1
0x008B 0x2000 CONT OP_F_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x008C 0x0800 CONT OP_F_16 F001 R 1
Estado Tarjeta F - Board F Status
0x008C 0x1000 BOARD F STATUS F001 R 1
Estado Entradas Tarjeta G (32 elementos) - Board G: Contact Input Status
0x00AC 0x2000 CONT IP_G_CC1 F001 R 1
0x00AC 0x4000 CONT IP_G_CC2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x00AE 0x1000 CONT IP_G_CC32 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Activación salidas Tarjeta G (16 elementos) - Board G: Contact Output Operate -logical status-
0x00AE 0x2000 CONT OP OPER_G_01 F001 R 1
0x00AE 0x4000 CONT OP OPER_G_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x00AF 0x1000 CONT OP OPER_G_16 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Reposición de Salidas Tarjeta G (16 elementos) - Board G: Contact Output Resets
0x00AF 0x2000 CONT OP RESET_G_01 F001 R 1
0x00AF 0x4000 CONT OP RESET_G_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x00B0 0x1000 CONT OP RESET_G_16 F001 R 1
Estado Salidas Tarjeta G (16 elementos) - Board G: Contact Outputs -physical status-
0x00B0 0x2000 CONT OP_G_01 F001 R 1
0x00B0 0x4000 CONT OP_G_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x00B1 0x1000 CONT OP_G_16 F001 R 1
Estado Tarjeta G - Board G Status
0x00B1 0x2000 BOARD G STATUS F001 R 1
LEDS HMI (16 elementos) - HMI Leds
0x00D1 0x4000 READY LED F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x8000 LED 1 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0001 LED 2 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0002 LED 3 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0004 LED 4 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0008 LED 5 F001 R 1


0x00D1 0x0010 LED 6 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0020 LED 7 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0040 LED 8 F001 R 1
0x00D1 0x0080 LED 9 F001 R 1
LEDS HMI (16 elementos) - HMI Leds (cont.)
0x00D2 0x0100 LED 10 F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0200 LED 11 F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0400 LED 12 F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0800 LED 13 F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x1000 LED 14 F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x2000 LED 15 F001 R 1
Teclas HMI - HMI Keys
0x00D2 0x4000 I Key F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x8000 O Key F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0001 * Key F001 R 1
Señales estado LOCAL/REMOTO para maniobras - LOCAL/REMOTE Operation status signals
0x00D2 0x0002 F1 Key F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0004 F2 Key F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0008 LOCAL OPERATION MODE F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0010 OPERATIONS BLOCKED F001 R 1
Estados Internos - Internal States
0x00D2 0x0020 DSP COMM ERROR F001 R 1
0x00D2 0x0040 MAGNETIC MODULE ERROR F001 R 1
Entrada Reset Leds (configurable) -Led reset Input
0x00D2 0x0080 LED RESET INPUT F001 R 1
Entradas Cambio Estado Local-Remoto-OFF (configurable) - Local-Remote-Off Input selection
0x00D3 0x0100 CHANGE LOCAL-REMOTE F001 R 1
0x00D3 0x0200 CHANGE OP BLOCKED F001 R 1
Entradas Cambio Estado iluminación pantalla (configurable) - Backlight status selection
0x00D3 0x1000 HMI BACKLIGHT ON F001 R 1
0x00D3 0x2000 HMI BACKLIGHT OFF F001 R 1
Estado PLC Fuera de Servicio - Out of Service PLC Status
0x00D4 0x4000 OUT OF SERVICE F001 R 1
0x00D4 0x8000 PLC ERROR F001 R 1
0x00D4 0x0001 General Trip F001 R 1
0x00D4 0x0002 NET CONF ERROR F001 R 1
0x00D4 0x0004 ST HMI BACKLIGHT F001 R 1
0x00D4 0x0008 ORDERCODE ERROR F001 R 1
0x00D4 0x0010 LINK STATUS PORT E F001 R 1
0x00D4 0x0020 LINK STATUS PORT A F001 R 1
0x00D4 0x0040 LINK STATUS PORT B F001 R 1
Estados Sobrecorriente instantanea de fases nivel alto - Phase IOC High States
0x00F2 0x0080 PH IOC1 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0100 PH IOC1 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0200 PH IOC1 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0400 PH IOC1 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0800 PH IOC1 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x1000 PH IOC1 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x2000 PH IOC1 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x4000 PH IOC1 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1


0x00F3 0x8000 PH IOC1 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0001 PH IOC1 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x00F3 0x0002 PH IOC1 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x00F8 0x0004 PH IOC2 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x00F8 0x0008 PH IOC2 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x00F8 0x0010 PH IOC2 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x00F8 0x0020 PH IOC2 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1
0x00F8 0x0040 PH IOC2 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x00F8 0x0080 PH IOC2 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0100 PH IOC2 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0200 PH IOC2 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0400 PH IOC2 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x0800 PH IOC2 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x00F9 0x1000 PH IOC2 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x2000 PH IOC3 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x4000 PH IOC3 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x8000 PH IOC3 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0001 PH IOC3 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0002 PH IOC3 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0004 PH IOC3 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0008 PH IOC3 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0010 PH IOC3 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0020 PH IOC3 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0040 PH IOC3 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x00FE 0x0080 PH IOC3 HIGH OP F001 R 1
Sobrecorriente instantanea de fases nivel bajo - Phase IOC Low States
0x0104 0x0100 PH IOC1 LOW A BLK F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0200 PH IOC1 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0400 PH IOC1 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0800 PH IOC1 LOW A PKP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x1000 PH IOC1 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x2000 PH IOC1 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x4000 PH IOC1 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x8000 PH IOC1 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0001 PH IOC1 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0002 PH IOC1 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0104 0x0004 PH IOC1 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x0109 0x0008 PH IOC2 LOW A BLK F001 R 1
0x0109 0x0010 PH IOC2 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x0109 0x0020 PH IOC2 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x0109 0x0040 PH IOC2 LOW A PKP F001 R 1
0x0109 0x0080 PH IOC2 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x010A 0x0100 PH IOC2 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
Sobrecorriente instantanea de fases nivel bajo - Phase IOC Low States(cont.)
0x010A 0x0200 PH IOC2 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x010A 0x0400 PH IOC2 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x010A 0x0800 PH IOC2 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x010A 0x1000 PH IOC2 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x010A 0x2000 PH IOC2 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x4000 PH IOC3 LOW A BLK F001 R 1


0x010F 0x8000 PH IOC3 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0001 PH IOC3 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0002 PH IOC3 LOW A PKP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0004 PH IOC3 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0008 PH IOC3 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0010 PH IOC3 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0020 PH IOC3 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0040 PH IOC3 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x010F 0x0080 PH IOC3 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0110 0x0100 PH IOC3 LOW OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobreintensidad instantánea de Neutro - Neutral IOC States
0x0115 0x0200 NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0115 0x0400 NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0115 0x0800 NEUTRAL IOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x011A 0x1000 NEUTRAL IOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x011A 0x2000 NEUTRAL IOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x011A 0x4000 NEUTRAL IOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x011F 0x8000 NEUTRAL IOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x011F 0x0001 NEUTRAL IOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x011F 0x0002 NEUTRAL IOC3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobreintensidad instantánea de Tierra - Ground IOC States
0x0124 0x0004 GROUND IOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0124 0x0008 GROUND IOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0124 0x0010 GROUND IOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x0129 0x0020 GROUND IOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0129 0x0040 GROUND IOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0129 0x0080 GROUND IOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x012F 0x0100 GROUND IOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x012F 0x0200 GROUND IOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x012F 0x0400 GROUND IOC3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobreintensidad instantánea de Tierra Sensible - Sensitive Ground IOC States
0x0134 0x0800 SENS GND IOC1 BLK F001 R 1
0x0134 0x1000 SENS GND IOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0134 0x2000 SENS GND IOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x0139 0x4000 SENS GND IOC2 BLK F001 R 1
0x0139 0x8000 SENS GND IOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0139 0x0001 SENS GND IOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x013E 0x0002 SENS GND IOC3 BLK F001 R 1
0x013E 0x0004 SENS GND IOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x013E 0x0008 SENS GND IOC3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto - Phase TOC High States
0x0143 0x0010 PH TOC1 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x0143 0x0020 PH TOC1 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x0143 0x0040 PH TOC1 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x0143 0x0080 PH TOC1 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x0100 PH TOC1 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x0200 PH TOC1 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x0400 PH TOC1 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x0800 PH TOC1 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x1000 PH TOC1 HIGH C OP F001 R 1


0x0144 0x2000 PH TOC1 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x0144 0x4000 PH TOC1 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x0149 0x8000 PH TOC2 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0001 PH TOC2 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0002 PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0004 PH TOC2 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0008 PH TOC2 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0010 PH TOC2 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0020 PH TOC2 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0040 PH TOC2 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x0149 0x0080 PH TOC2 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x014A 0x0100 PH TOC2 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
Estados Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto - Phase TOC High States(cont.)
0x014A 0x0200 PH TOC2 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0400 PH TOC3 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0800 PH TOC3 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1
0x014F 0x1000 PH TOC3 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1
0x014F 0x2000 PH TOC3 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x4000 PH TOC3 HIGH A OP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x8000 PH TOC3 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0001 PH TOC3 HIGH B OP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0002 PH TOC3 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0004 PH TOC3 HIGH C OP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0008 PH TOC3 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x014F 0x0010 PH TOC3 HIGH OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Neutro - Neutral TOC States
0x0154 0x0020 NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0154 0x0040 NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0154 0x0080 NEUTRAL TOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x015A 0x0100 NEUTRAL TOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x015A 0x0200 NEUTRAL TOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x015A 0x0400 NEUTRAL TOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x015F 0x0800 NEUTRAL TOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x015F 0x1000 NEUTRAL TOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x015F 0x2000 NEUTRAL TOC3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Tierra - Ground TOC States
0x0164 0x4000 GROUND TOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0164 0x8000 GROUND TOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0164 0x0001 GROUND TOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x0169 0x0002 GROUND TOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0169 0x0004 GROUND TOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0169 0x0008 GROUND TOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x016E 0x0010 GROUND TOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x016E 0x0020 GROUND TOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x016E 0x0040 GROUND TOC3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobreintensidad Temporizada Tierra Sensible - Sentive Ground TOC States
0x0173 0x0080 SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0174 0x0100 SENS GND TOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0174 0x0200 SENS GND TOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x0179 0x0400 SENS GND TOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1


0x0179 0x0800 SENS GND TOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0179 0x1000 SENS GND TOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x017E 0x2000 SENS GND TOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x017E 0x4000 SENS GND TOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x017E 0x8000 SENS GND TOC3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Subtensión de fases - Phase UV States
0x0183 0x0001 PHASE UV1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0002 PHASE UV1 A PKP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0004 PHASE UV1 A OP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0008 PHASE UV1 B PKP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0010 PHASE UV1 B OP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0020 PHASE UV1 C PKP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0040 PHASE UV1 C OP F001 R 1
0x0183 0x0080 PHASE UV1 AB PKP F001 R 1
Estados Subtensión de fases - Phase UV States(cont.)
0x0184 0x0100 PHASE UV1 AB OP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x0200 PHASE UV1 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x0400 PHASE UV1 BC OP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x0800 PHASE UV1 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x1000 PHASE UV1 CA OP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x2000 PHASE UV1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0184 0x4000 PHASE UV1 OP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x8000 PHASE UV2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0001 PHASE UV2 A PKP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0002 PHASE UV2 A OP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0004 PHASE UV2 B PKP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0008 PHASE UV2 B OP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0010 PHASE UV2 C PKP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0020 PHASE UV2 C OP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0040 PHASE UV2 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x0189 0x0080 PHASE UV2 AB OP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x0100 PHASE UV2 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x0200 PHASE UV2 BC OP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x0400 PHASE UV2 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x0800 PHASE UV2 CA OP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x1000 PHASE UV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x018A 0x2000 PHASE UV2 OP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x4000 PHASE UV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x018F 0x8000 PHASE UV3 A PKP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0001 PHASE UV3 A OP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0002 PHASE UV3 B PKP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0004 PHASE UV3 B OP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0008 PHASE UV3 C PKP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0010 PHASE UV3 C OP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0020 PHASE UV3 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0040 PHASE UV3 AB OP F001 R 1
0x018F 0x0080 PHASE UV3 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x0190 0x0100 PHASE UV3 BC OP F001 R 1
0x0190 0x0200 PHASE UV3 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x0190 0x0400 PHASE UV3 CA OP F001 R 1


0x0190 0x0800 PHASE UV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0190 0x1000 PHASE UV3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobretensión de Secuencia Negativa - Negative Sequence OV States
0x0195 0x2000 NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0195 0x4000 NEG SEQ OV1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0195 0x8000 NEG SEQ OV1 OP F001 R 1
0x019A 0x0001 NEG SEQ OV2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x019A 0x0002 NEG SEQ OV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x019A 0x0004 NEG SEQ OV2 OP F001 R 1
0x019F 0x0008 NEG SEQ OV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x019F 0x0010 NEG SEQ OV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x019F 0x0020 NEG SEQ OV3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Imagen Térmica - Thermal Image States
0x01A4 0x0040 THERMAL1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01A4 0x0080 THERMAL1 A RST F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0100 THERMAL1 B RST F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0200 THERMAL1 C RST F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0400 THERMAL1 ALARM F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0800 THERMAL1 OP F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x1000 THERMAL1 A ALRM F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x2000 THERMAL1 A OP F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x4000 THERMAL1 B ALRM F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x8000 THERMAL1 B OP F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0001 THERMAL1 C ALRM F001 R 1
0x01A5 0x0002 THERMAL1 C OP F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0004 THERMAL2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0008 THERMAL2 A RST F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0010 THERMAL2 B RST F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0020 THERMAL2 C RST F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0040 THERMAL2 ALARM F001 R 1
0x01AA 0x0080 THERMAL2 OP F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0100 THERMAL2 A ALRM F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0200 THERMAL2 A OP F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0400 THERMAL2 B ALRM F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x0800 THERMAL2 B OP F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x1000 THERMAL2 C ALRM F001 R 1
0x01AB 0x2000 THERMAL2 C OP F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x4000 THERMAL3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x8000 THERMAL3 A RST F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0001 THERMAL3 B RST F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0002 THERMAL3 C RST F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0004 THERMAL3 ALARM F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0008 THERMAL3 OP F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0010 THERMAL3 A ALRM F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0020 THERMAL3 A OP F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0040 THERMAL3 B ALRM F001 R 1
0x01B0 0x0080 THERMAL3 B OP F001 R 1
0x01B1 0x0100 THERMAL3 C ALRM F001 R 1
0x01B1 0x0200 THERMAL3 C OP F001 R 1
Estados Unidad Direccional de Fases - Phase Directional States


0x01B6 0x0400 PHASE DIR1 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x0800 PHASE DIR1 BLOCK A F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x1000 PHASE DIR1 A OP F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x2000 PHASE DIR1 BLOCK B F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x4000 PHASE DIR1 B OP F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x8000 PHASE DIR1 BLOCK C F001 R 1
0x01B6 0x0001 PHASE DIR1 C OP F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0002 PHASE DIR2 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0004 PHASE DIR2 BLOCK A F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0008 PHASE DIR2 A OP F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0010 PHASE DIR2 BLOCK B F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0020 PHASE DIR2 B OP F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0040 PHASE DIR2 BLOCK C F001 R 1
0x01BB 0x0080 PHASE DIR2 C OP F001 R 1
Estados Unidad Direccional de Fases - Phase Directional States(cont.)
0x01C1 0x0100 PHASE DIR3 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x0200 PHASE DIR3 BLOCK A F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x0400 PHASE DIR3 A OP F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x0800 PHASE DIR3 BLOCK B F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x1000 PHASE DIR3 B OP F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x2000 PHASE DIR3 BLOCK C F001 R 1
0x01C1 0x4000 PHASE DIR3 C OP F001 R 1
Estados Unidad Direccional de Neutro - Neutral Directional States
0x01C6 0x8000 NEUTRAL DIR1 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01C6 0x0001 NEUTRAL DIR1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01C6 0x0002 NEUTRAL DIR1 OP F001 R 1
0x01CB 0x0004 NEUTRAL DIR2 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01CB 0x0008 NEUTRAL DIR2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01CB 0x0010 NEUTRAL DIR2 OP F001 R 1
0x01D0 0x0020 NEUTRAL DIR3 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01D0 0x0040 NEUTRAL DIR3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01D0 0x0080 NEUTRAL DIR3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Unidad Direccional de Tierra - Ground Directional States
0x01D6 0x0100 GROUND DIR1 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01D6 0x0200 GROUND DIR1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01D6 0x0400 GROUND DIR1 OP F001 R 1
0x01DB 0x0800 GROUND DIR2 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01DB 0x1000 GROUND DIR2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01DB 0x2000 GROUND DIR2 OP F001 R 1
0x01E0 0x4000 GROUND DIR3 BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01E0 0x8000 GROUND DIR3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01E0 0x0001 GROUND DIR3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Fallo de Interruptor - Breaker Failure States
0x01E5 0x0002 BKR FAIL INITIATE F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0004 BKR FAIL NO CURRENT F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0008 BKR FAIL SUPERVISION F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0010 BKR FAIL HISET F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0020 BKR FAIL LOWSET F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0040 INTERNAL ARC F001 R 1
0x01E5 0x0080 BKR FAIL 2nd STEP F001 R 1


Estados Fallo de Fusible - Fuse failure States
0x01EB 0x0100 VT FUSE FAILURE F001 R 1
Estados Unidad de Sincronismo - Synchrocheck States
0x01F0 0x0200 Synchrocheck BLK INP F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0400 Synchrocheck OP F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0800 SYNCHK CLOSE PERM F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x1000 Synchrocheck COND OP F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x2000 DL-DB OPERATION F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x4000 DL-LB OPERATION F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x8000 LL-DB OPERATION F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0001 SLIP CONDITION F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0002 BUS FREQ > LINE FREQ F001 R 1
0x01F0 0x0004 BUS FREQ < LINE FREQ F001 R 1
Estados Reenganchador (bit) - Autorecloser States
0x01F5 0x0008 AR LEVEL BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F5 0x0010 AR PULSE BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F5 0x0020 AR PULSE UNBLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F5 0x0080 AR INITIATE F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0100 AR CONDS INPUT F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0200 AR CLOSE BREAKER F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0400 AR OUT OF SERVICE F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0800 AR READY F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x1000 AR LOCKOUT F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x2000 AR BLOCK F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x4000 AR RCL IN PROGRESS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x8000 AR LCK BY ANOMALY F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0001 AR LCK BY FAIL OPEN F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0002 AR LCK BY FAIL CLOSE F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0004 AR LCK BY USER F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0008 AR LCK BY CONDS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0010 AR LCK BY TRIPS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0020 AR LCK BY SHOTS F001 R 1
0x01F6 0x0040 AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT F001 R 1
0x01F7 0x0400 AR BLOCK BY LEVEL F001 R 1
0x01F7 0x0800 AR BLOCK BY PULSE F001 R 1
Estados Sobretensión de Neutro Nivel Alto - Neutral OV High States
0x01FC 0x1000 NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH BLK F001 R 1
0x01FC 0x2000 NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x01FC 0x4000 NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x0201 0x8000 NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH BLK F001 R 1
0x0201 0x0001 NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x0201 0x0002 NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x0206 0x0004 NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH BLK F001 R 1
0x0206 0x0008 NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x0206 0x0010 NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobretensión de Neutro Nivel Bajo - Neutral OV Low States
0x020B 0x0020 NEUTRAL OV1 LOW BLK F001 R 1


0x020B 0x0040 NEUTRAL OV1 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x020B 0x0080 NEUTRAL OV1 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x0211 0x0100 NEUTRAL OV2 LOW BLK F001 R 1
0x0211 0x0200 NEUTRAL OV2 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0211 0x0400 NEUTRAL OV2 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x0216 0x0800 NEUTRAL OV3 LOW BLK F001 R 1
0x0216 0x1000 NEUTRAL OV3 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0216 0x2000 NEUTRAL OV3 LOW OP F001 R 1
Estados Subtensión Auxiliar - Auxiliary UV States
0x021B 0x4000 AUXILIARY UV1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x021B 0x8000 AUXILIARY UV1 PKP F001 R 1
0x021B 0x0001 AUXILIARY UV1 OP F001 R 1
0x0220 0x0002 AUXILIARY UV2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0220 0x0004 AUXILIARY UV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0220 0x0008 AUXILIARY UV2 OP F001 R 1
0x0225 0x0010 AUXILIARY UV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0225 0x0020 AUXILIARY UV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0225 0x0040 AUXILIARY UV3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobretensión de Fases - Phase OV States
0x022A 0x0080 PHASE OV1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x022B 0x0100 PHASE OV1 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x0200 PHASE OV1 AB OP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x0400 PHASE OV1 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x0800 PHASE OV1 BC OP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x1000 PHASE OV1 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x2000 PHASE OV1 CA OP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x4000 PHASE OV1 PKP F001 R 1
0x022B 0x8000 PHASE OV1 OP F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0001 PHASE OV2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0002 PHASE OV2 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0004 PHASE OV2 AB OP F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0008 PHASE OV2 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0010 PHASE OV2 BC OP F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0020 PHASE OV2 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0040 PHASE OV2 CA OP F001 R 1
0x0230 0x0080 PHASE OV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0231 0x0100 PHASE OV2 OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0200 PHASE OV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0400 PHASE OV3 AB PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0800 PHASE OV3 AB OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x1000 PHASE OV3 BC PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x2000 PHASE OV3 BC OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x4000 PHASE OV3 CA PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x8000 PHASE OV3 CA OP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0001 PHASE OV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0236 0x0002 PHASE OV3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobretensión Auxiliar - Auxiliary OV States
0x023B 0x0004 AUXILIARY OV1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x023B 0x0008 AUXILIARY OV1 PKP F001 R 1
0x023B 0x0010 AUXILIARY OV1 OP F001 R 1


0x0240 0x0020 AUXILIARY OV2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0240 0x0040 AUXILIARY OV2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0240 0x0080 AUXILIARY OV2 OP F001 R 1
0x0246 0x0100 AUXILIARY OV3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0246 0x0200 AUXILIARY OV3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0246 0x0400 AUXILIARY OV3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Secuencia Negativa - Negative Sequence TOC States
0x024B 0x0800 NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x024B 0x1000 NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP F001 R 1
0x024B 0x2000 NEG SEQ TOC1 OP F001 R 1
0x0250 0x4000 NEG SEQ TOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0250 0x8000 NEG SEQ TOC2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0250 0x0001 NEG SEQ TOC2 OP F001 R 1
0x0255 0x0002 NEG SEQ TOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0255 0x0004 NEG SEQ TOC3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0255 0x0008 NEG SEQ TOC3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Sobrefrecuencia - Overfrequency States
0x025A 0x0010 OVERFREQ1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x025A 0x0020 OVERFREQ1 PKP F001 R 1
0x025A 0x0040 OVERFREQ1 OP F001 R 1
0x025F 0x0080 OVERFREQ2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0260 0x0100 OVERFREQ2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0260 0x0200 OVERFREQ2 OP F001 R 1
0x0265 0x0400 OVERFREQ3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0265 0x0800 OVERFREQ3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0265 0x1000 OVERFREQ3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Subfrecuencia - Underfrequency States
0x026A 0x2000 UNDERFREQ1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x026A 0x4000 UNDERFREQ1 PKP F001 R 1
0x026A 0x8000 UNDERFREQ1 OP F001 R 1
0x026F 0x0001 UNDERFREQ2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x026F 0x0002 UNDERFREQ2 PKP F001 R 1
0x026F 0x0004 UNDERFREQ2 OP F001 R 1
0x0274 0x0008 UNDERFREQ3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0274 0x0010 UNDERFREQ3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0274 0x0020 UNDERFREQ3 OP F001 R 1
0x04D9 0x0001 OVERFREQ5 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x04D9 0x0002 OVERFREQ5 PKP F001 R 1
0x04D9 0x0004 OVERFREQ5 OP F001 R 1
0x04DA 0x0001 UNDERFREQ5 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x04DA 0x0002 UNDERFREQ5 PKP F001 R 1
0x04DA 0x0004 UNDERFREQ5 OP F001 R 1
0x04DB 0x0001 OVERFREQ6 PKP F001 R 1
0x04DB 0x0002 OVERFREQ6 OP F001 R 1
0x04DB 0x0004 UNDERFREQ6 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x04DC 0x0001 UNDERFREQ6 PKP F001 R 1
0x04DC 0x0002 UNDERFREQ6 OP F001 R 1
0x04DC 0x0004 OVERFREQ5 PKP F001 R 1
Estados de 60CTs- 60CTs Failure States
0x04DD 0x0002 CT Failure PKP F001 R 1


0x04DD 0x0004 CT Failure OP F001 R 1
0x04DD 0x0008 CT Failure BLOCK F001 R 1
Estados de Inhibición por 2nd armónico- 2nd Harmonic Inhibit States
0x04DE 0x0002 2nd HRMC PKP F001 R 1
0x04DE 0x0004 2nd HRMC OP F001 R 1
0x04DE 0x0008 2nd HRMC BLOCK F001 R 1
Estados Calibración - Calibration States
0x0279 0x0040 FACTORY CALIBRATION F001 R 1
0x0279 0x0080 CALIBRATION ERROR F001 R 1
Estados Oscilografía - Oscillography States
0x027A 0x0100 OSC DIG CHANNEL 1 F001 R 1
0x027B 0x0100 OSCILLO TRIGGER F001 R 1
Estados Localizador de Faltas - Fault Report States
0x0280 0x0200 FAULT REPORT TRIGG F001 R 1
0x0280 0x0400 CLEAR FAULT REPORTS F001 R 1
Agrupamiento de Funciones - Group States
0x028F 0x0400 GROUP 1 ACT ON F001 R 1
0x028F 0x2000 SETT GROUPS BLOCK F001 R 1
0x028F 0x4000 GROUP 1 BLOCKED F001 R 1
Canal por defecto - Default Channel (not used)
0x0294 0x0002 Default Channel F001 R 1
Estados Unidad de Conductor Roto - Broken Conductor
0x0294 0x0004 BROKEN CONDUCT1 BLK F001 R 1
0x0294 0x0008 BROKEN CONDUCT1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0294 0x0010 BROKEN CONDUCT1 OP F001 R 1
0x0299 0x0020 BROKEN CONDUCT2 BLK F001 R 1
0x0299 0x0040 BROKEN CONDUCT2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0299 0x0080 BROKEN CONDUCT2 OP F001 R 1
0x029F 0x0100 BROKEN CONDUCT3 BLK F001 R 1
0x029F 0x0200 BROKEN CONDUCT3 PKP F001 R 1
0x029F 0x0400 BROKEN CONDUCT3 OP F001 R 1


Estados Energía - Energy States
0x02A4 0x0800 FREEZE ENERGY CNT F001 R 1
0x02A4 0x1000 UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT F001 R 1
0x02A4 0x2000 RESET ENERGY CNT F001 R 1
Estados Unidad de Tierra Aislada - Isolated Ground States
0x02B8 0x4000 ISOLATED GND1 BLK F001 R 1
0x02B8 0x8000 ISOLATED GND1 PKP F001 R 1
0x02B8 0x0001 ISOLATED GND1 OP F001 R 1
0x02C7 0x0002 ISOLATED GND2 BLK F001 R 1
0x02C7 0x0004 ISOLATED GND2 PKP F001 R 1
0x02C7 0x0008 ISOLATED GND2 OP F001 R 1
0x02D6 0x0010 ISOLATED GND3 BLK F001 R 1
0x02D6 0x0020 ISOLATED GND3 PKP F001 R 1
0x02D6 0x0040 ISOLATED GND3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Unidad Direccional de Tierra Sensible - Sensitive Ground Directional States
0x02E5 0x0080 SENS GND DIR1 BLK IP F001 R 1
0x02E6 0x0100 SENS GND DIR1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x02E6 0x0200 SENS GND DIR1 OP F001 R 1
0x02EB 0x0400 SENS GND DIR2 BLK IP F001 R 1
0x02EB 0x0800 SENS GND DIR2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x02EB 0x1000 SENS GND DIR2 OP F001 R 1
0x02F0 0x2000 SENS GND DIR3 BLK IP F001 R 1
0x02F0 0x4000 SENS GND DIR3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x02F0 0x8000 SENS GND DIR3 OP F001 R 1
Estados Unidad de Potencia Máxima Directa - Forward Power(32FP) States
0x02F5 0x0001 FWD PWR1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x02F5 0x0002 FWD PWR1 STG1 PKP F001 R 1
0x02F5 0x0004 FWD PWR1 STG1 OP F001 R 1
0x02F5 0x0008 FWD PWR1 STG2 PKP F001 R 1
0x02F5 0x0010 FWD PWR1 STG2 OP F001 R 1
0x02FA 0x0020 FWD PWR2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x02FA 0x0040 FWD PWR2 STG1 PKP F001 R 1
0x02FA 0x0080 FWD PWR2 STG1 OP F001 R 1
0x02FB 0x0100 FWD PWR2 STG2 PKP F001 R 1
0x02FB 0x0200 FWD PWR2 STG2 OP F001 R 1
0x0300 0x0400 FWD PWR3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0300 0x0800 FWD PWR3 STG1 PKP F001 R 1
0x0300 0x1000 FWD PWR3 STG1 OP F001 R 1
0x0300 0x2000 FWD PWR3 STG2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0300 0x4000 FWD PWR3 STG2 OP F001 R 1
Entradas Demanda - Demand Inputs
0x0305 0x8000 DEMAND TRIGGER INP F001 R 1
0x0305 0x0001 DEMAND RESET INP F001 R 1
Estado Entradas Tarjeta H (32 elementos) - Board H: Contact Input States
0x0319 0x0002 CONT IP_H_CC1 F001 R 1
0x0319 0x0004 CONT IP_H_CC2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x031B 0x0001 CONT IP_H_CC32 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Activación salidas Tarjeta H (16 elementos) - Board H: Contact Output Operate -logical States-
0x031B 0x0002 CONT OP OPER_H_01 F001 R 1


0x031B 0x0004 CONT OP OPER_H_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x031C 0x0001 CONT OP OPER_H_16 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Reposición de Salidas Tarjeta H (16 elementos) - Board H: Contact Output Resets
0x031C 0x0002 CONT OP RESET_H_01 F001 R 1
0x031C 0x0004 CONT OP RESET_H_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x031D 0x0001 CONT OP RESET_H_16 F001 R 1
Estado Salidas Tarjeta H (16 elementos) - Board H: Contact Outputs -physical States-
0x031D 0x0002 CONT OP_H_01 F001 R 1
0x031D 0x0004 CONT OP_H_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x031E 0x0001 CONT OP_H_16 F001 R 1
Estado Tarjeta H - Board H Status
0x031E 0x0002 BOARD H STATUS F001 R 1
Estado Entradas Tarjeta J (32 elementos) - Board J: Contact Input States
0x033E 0x0004 CONT IP_J_CC1 F001 R 1
0x033E 0x0008 CONT IP_J_CC2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x0340 0x0002 CONT IP_J_CC32 F001 R 1
Estado Señales Activación salidas Tarjeta J (16 elementos) - Board J: Contact Output Operate -logical States-
0x0340 0x0004 CONT OP OPER_J_01 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Estado Señales Reposición de Salidas Tarjeta J (16 elementos) - Board J: Contact Output Resets
0x0341 0x0004 CONT OP RESET_J_01 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Estado Salidas Tarjeta J (16 elementos) - Board J: Contact Outputs -physical states-
0x0342 0x0004 CONT OP_J_01 F001 R 1
0x0342 0x0008 CONT OP_J_02 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x0343 0x0002 CONT OP_J_16 F001 R 1
Estado Tarjeta J - Board J Status
0x0343 0x0004 BOARD J STATUS F001 R 1
Estados Sobrecorriente Temporizada de Fases Nivel Bajo - Phase TOC Low States
0x0363 0x0008 PH TOC1 LOW A BLK F001 R 1
0x0363 0x0010 PH TOC1 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x0363 0x0020 PH TOC1 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x0363 0x0040 PH TOC1 LOW A PKP F001 R 1
0x0363 0x0080 PH TOC1 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x0100 PH TOC1 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x0200 PH TOC1 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x0400 PH TOC1 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x0800 PH TOC1 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x1000 PH TOC1 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0364 0x2000 PH TOC1 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x4000 PH TOC2 LOW A BLK F001 R 1


0x0369 0x8000 PH TOC2 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0001 PH TOC2 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0002 PH TOC2 LOW A PKP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0004 PH TOC2 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0008 PH TOC2 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
Estados Sobrecorriente Temporizada de Fases Nivel Bajo - Phase TOC Low States(cont.)
0x0369 0x0010 PH TOC2 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0020 PH TOC2 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0040 PH TOC2 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x0369 0x0080 PH TOC2 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x036A 0x0100 PH TOC2 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0200 PH TOC3 LOW A BLK F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0400 PH TOC3 LOW B BLK F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0800 PH TOC3 LOW C BLK F001 R 1
0x036F 0x1000 PH TOC3 LOW A PKP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x2000 PH TOC3 LOW A OP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x4000 PH TOC3 LOW B PKP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x8000 PH TOC3 LOW B OP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0001 PH TOC3 LOW C PKP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0002 PH TOC3 LOW C OP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0004 PH TOC3 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x036F 0x0008 PH TOC3 LOW OP F001 R 1
Estados Contactos Configuración Aparamenta (16 elementos) - Switchgear Contact Configuration States
0x0374 0x0010 SWITCH 1 A INPUT F001 R 1
0x0374 0x0020 SWITCH 1 B INPUT F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Estados Contactos Aparamenta (16 elementos) - Switchgear Contact States
0x0376 0x0010 SWITCH 1 A STATUS F001 R 1
0x0376 0x0020 SWITCH 1 B STATUS F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
Estados Aparamenta (16 elementos) - Switchgear States
0x0378 0x0010 SWITCH 1 OPEN F001 R 1
0x0378 0x0020 SWITCH 1 CLOSED F001 R 1
0x0378 0x0040 SWITCH 1 00_ERROR F001 R 1
0x0379 0x0100 SWITCH 2 OPEN F001 R 1
0x0379 0x0200 SWITCH 2 CLOSED F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x037C 0x0001 SWITCH 16 OPEN F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0002 SWITCH 16 CLOSED F001 R 1


0x037C 0x0004 SWITCH 16 00_ERROR F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0008 SWITCH 16 11_ERROR F001 R 1
Estados Inicio Apertura y Cierre Aparamenta - Switchgear Open-Close Initializing States
0x037C 0x0010 SWITCH 1 OPEN INIT F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0020 SWITCH 1 CLOSE INIT F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0040 SWITCH 2 OPEN INIT F001 R 1
0x037C 0x0080 SWITCH 2 CLOSE INIT F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x037E 0x0004 SWITCH 16 OPEN INIT F001 R 1
0x037E 0x0008 SWITCH 16 CLOSE INIT F001 R 1
Estados Fallo Apertura y Cierre Aparamenta - Switchgear Fail States
0x037E 0x0010 SWGR 1 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1
0x037E 0x0020 SWGR 2 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x037F 0x0008 SWGR 16 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1
0x037F 0x0010 SWGR 1 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1
0x037F 0x0020 SWGR 2 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x0380 0x0008 SWGR 16 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1
0x0380 0x0010 SWGR 1 BLOCK OPENING F001 R 1
0x0381 0x0010 SWGR 1 BLOCK CLOSING F001 R 1


Estados Interruptor - Breaker States
0x0390 0x0010 KI2t PHASE A ALARM F001 R 1
0x0390 0x0020 KI2t PHASE B ALARM F001 R 1
0x0390 0x0040 KI2t PHASE C ALARM F001 R 1
0x0390 0x0080 BKR OPENINGS ALARM F001 R 1
0x0391 0x0100 BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALRM F001 R 1
0x0391 0x0200 BREAKER OPEN F001 R 1
0x0391 0x0400 BREAKER CLOSED F001 R 1
0x0391 0x0800 BREAKER UNDEFINED F001 R 1
0x0391 0x1000 RESET KI2t COUNTERS F001 R 1
0x0391 0x2000 RESET BKR COUNTERS F001 R 1
Estado Mapa Usuario - User Map State
0x039B 0x4000 USER MAP STATUS F001 R 1
Estado Curvas Usuario - Flex Curves States
0x039B 0x8000 FLEXCURVE A STATUS F001 R 1
0x03A0 0x0001 FLEXCURVE B STATUS F001 R 1
0x03A5 0x0002 FLEXCURVE C STATUS F001 R 1
0x03AA 0x0004 FLEXCURVE D STATUS F001 R 1
Estados Internos Sistema - Internal System States
0x03B1 0x0008 Green Zone ** F001 R 1
0x03B1 0x0010 Yellow Zone ** F001 R 1
0x03B1 0x0020 Orange Zone ** F001 R 1
0x03B1 0x0040 Red Zone ** F001 R 1
**For version previous to 7.00
Estados Unidad direccional de potencia - Directional Power States
0x03B2 0x8000 DIR PWR1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x03B2 0x0001 DIR PWR1 STG1 PKP F001 R 1
0x03B2 0x0002 DIR PWR1 STG1 OP F001 R 1
0x03B2 0x0010 DIR PWR1 STG PKP F001 R 1
0x03B2 0x0020 DIR PWR1 STG OP F001 R 1
0x03B7 0x0040 DIR PWR2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x03B8 0x0800 DIR PWR2 STG PKP F001 R 1
0x03B8 0x1000 DIR PWR2 STG OP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x2000 DIR PWR3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x4000 DIR PWR3 STG1 PKP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x8000 DIR PWR3 STG1 OP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x0001 DIR PWR3 STG2 PKP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x0002 DIR PWR3 STG2 OP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x0004 DIR PWR3 STG PKP F001 R 1
0x03BD 0x0008 DIR PWR3 STG OP F001 R 1
Estados Unidad de Rotor Bloqueado - Locked Rotor (48)
0x03C2 0x0010 LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK F001 R 1


0x03C2 0x0020 LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP F001 R 1
0x03C2 0x0040 LOCKED ROTOR1 OP F001 R 1
Estados Salidas Remotas DNA - DNA Remote Output Status
0x03E5 0x0008 DNA 1 F001 R 1
0x03E5 0x0010 DNA 2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x03E7 0x0004 DNA 32 F001 R 1
Estados Salidas Remotas Usuario - UserSt Remote Output Status
0x03E7 0x0008 UserSt 1 F001 R 1
0x03E5 0x0010 UserSt 2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x03EB 0x0004 UserSt 64 F001 R 1
Estados Entradas Remotas - Remote Inputs Status
0x03EB 0x0008 Remote Input 1 F001 R 1
0x03EB 0x0010 Remote Input 2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x03ED 0x0004 Remote Input 32 F001 R 1
Estados Dispositivos Remotos - Remote Devices Status
0x03ED 0x0008 Remote Device 1 F001 R 1
0x03ED 0x0010 Remote Device 2 F001 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x03EF 0x0400 Remote Device 24 F001 R 1
Estados Sicronizacion Remota - SNTP/IRIG B Status(Do not apply to C650 models)
0x03F2 0x0008 SNTP FAILURE F001 R 1
0x03F2 0x0010 IRIGB FAILURE F001 R 1
0x03F3 0x0001 CNT PULSES FREEZE F001 R 1
0x03F3 0x0002 CNT PULSES UNFREEZE F001 R 1
0x03F3 0x0004 CNT PULSES RESET F001 R 1
Comparadores analógicos-Analog Comparators
0x03F8 0x0020 Analog Level 01 F001 R 1


0x03FA 0x0100 Analog Level 20 F001 R 1
Estados Derivada de Frecuencia - Frequency Rate of Change States
0x03FC 0x0002 FREQ RATE1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x03FC 0x0004 FREQ RATE1 PKP F001 R 1
0x03FC 0x0008 FREQ RATE1 OP F001 R 1
0x0401 0x0010 FREQ RATE2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0401 0x0020 FREQ RATE2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0401 0x0040 FREQ RATE2 OP F001 R 1
0x0406 0x0080 FREQ RATE3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0407 0x0100 FREQ RATE3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0407 0x0200 FREQ RATE3 OP F001 R 1
Estados función inversión de carga-Load Encroachment Status
0x040C 0x0400 LOAD ENCR1 BLOC F001 R 1
0x040C 0x0800 LOAD ENCR1 PKP F001 R 1
0x040C 0x1000 LOAD ENCR1 OP F001 R 1
0x0411 0x2000 LOAD ENCR2 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0411 0x4000 LOAD ENCR2 PKP F001 R 1
0x0411 0x8000 LOAD ENCR2 OP F001 R 1
0x0416 0x0001 LOAD ENCR3 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0416 0x0002 LOAD ENCR3 PKP F001 R 1
0x0416 0x0004 LOAD ENCR3 OP F001 R 1
0x041B 0x0008 NUM OF STARTS BLOCK F001 R 1
0x041B 0x0010 NUMBER OF STARTS OP F001 R 1
Entradas digitales GOOSE-Rem GOOSE digital Inputs
0x0421 0x2000 Rem GOOSE Dig Inp 1 F001 R 1


Salidas digitales GOOSE-Remote GOOSE digital Outputs
0x0423 0x2000 Rem GOOSE Dig Out 1 F001 R 1


Estados Función 32N (Nivel Alto y Nivel Bajo) - wattmetric Ground Fault Status (High and Low Level)
0x0450 0x0080 32N1 HIGH BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0451 0x0100 32N1 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x0451 0x0200 32N1 HIGH OC PKP F001 R 1
0x0451 0x0400 32N1 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x0452 0x0800 32N2 HIGH BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0452 0x1000 32N2 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x0452 0x2000 32N2 HIGH OC PKP F001 R 1
0x0452 0x4000 32N2 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x0453 0x8000 32N3 HIGH BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0453 0x0001 32N3 HIGH PKP F001 R 1
0x0453 0x0002 32N3 HIGH OC PKP F001 R 1
0x0453 0x0004 32N3 HIGH OP F001 R 1
0x0454 0x0008 32N1 LOW BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0454 0x0010 32N1 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0454 0x0020 32N1 LOW OC PKP F001 R 1
0x0454 0x0040 32N1 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x0455 0x0080 32N2 LOW BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0456 0x0100 32N2 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0456 0x0200 32N2 LOW OC PKP F001 R 1
0x0456 0x0400 32N2 LOW OP F001 R 1
0x0457 0x0800 32N3 LOW BLOCK F001 R 1
0x0457 0x1000 32N3 LOW PKP F001 R 1
0x0457 0x2000 32N3 LOW OC PKP F001 R 1
0x0457 0x4000 32N3 LOW OP F001 R 1
Digital Counters actual values
0x04A4 0x0002 DIGCNT 1 BLOCK F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x0200 DIGCNT 1 HI F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x0400 DIGCNT 2 HI F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x0800 DIGCNT 3 HI F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x1000 DIGCNT 4 HI F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x2000 DIGCNT 5 HI F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x4000 DIGCNT 6 HI F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x8000 DIGCNT 7 HI F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x0001 DIGCNT 8 HI F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x0002 DIGCNT 1 EQ F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x0004 DIGCNT 2 EQ F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x0008 DIGCNT 3 EQ F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x0010 DIGCNT 4 EQ F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x0020 DIGCNT 5 EQ F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x0040 DIGCNT 6 EQ F001 R 1
0x04A5 0x0080 DIGCNT 7 EQ F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x0100 DIGCNT 8 EQ F001 R 1


0x04A6 0x0200 DIGCNT 1 LO F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x0400 DIGCNT 2 LO F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x0800 DIGCNT 3 LO F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x1000 DIGCNT 4 LO F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x2000 DIGCNT 5 LO F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x4000 DIGCNT 6 LO F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x8000 DIGCNT 7 LO F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x0001 DIGCNT 8 LO F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x0002 DIGCNT 1 UP F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x0004 DIGCNT 2 UP F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x0008 DIGCNT 3 UP F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x0010 DIGCNT 4 UP F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x0020 DIGCNT 5 UP F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x0040 DIGCNT 6 UP F001 R 1
0x04A6 0x0080 DIGCNT 7 UP F001 R 1
0x04A7 0x0100 DIGCNT 8 UP F001 R 1
0x04A7 0x0200 DIGCNT 1 DOWN F001 R 1
0x04A7 0x0002 DIGCNT 1 SETPRESET F001 R 1
0x04A8 0x0200 DIGCNT 1 RESET F001 R 1
0x04A8 0x0002 DIGCNT 1 FREEZERESET F001 R 1
0x04A9 0x0200 DIGCNT 1 FREEZECOUNT F001 R 1


Cold Load Pick up actual values
0x04D8 0x0002 Cold Load PKP F001 R 1
0x04D8 0x0004 Cold Load OP F001 R 1
0x04D8 0x0008 Cold Load BLOCK F001 R 1
Entradas Analógicas (Tarjetas F y G)- Analog Inputs (F and G boards)(Do not apply to C650 models)
0x0B06 ANALOG_INP_F_01 F002 1000 R 2
0x0B08 ANALOG_INP_F_02 F002 1000 R 2
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x0B14 ANALOG_INP_F_08 F002 1000 R 2
0x0B86 ANALOG_INP_G_01 F002 1000 R 2
0x0B88 ANALOG_INP_G_02 F002 1000 R 2
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x0B94 ANALOG_INP_G_08 F002 1000 R 2
Medidas en Valores Secundarios - Analog measures in Secondary Values
0x0C00 Phasor Ia F002 1000 R 2
0x0C02 RMS Ia F002 1000 R 2
0x0C04 Ia Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C06 Ia Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C08 Phasor Ib F002 1000 R 2
0x0C0A RMS Ib F002 1000 R 2
0x0C0C Ib Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C0E Ib Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C10 Phasor Ic F002 1000 R 2
0x0C12 RMS Ic F002 1000 R 2
0x0C14 Ic Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C16 Ic Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C18 Phasor In F002 1000 R 2
0x0C1A In Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C1C In Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C1E Phasor Ig F002 1000 R 2
0x0C20 RMS Ig F002 1000 R 2
0x0C22 Ig Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C24 Ig Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C26 Phasor Isg F002 1000 R 2
0x0C28 RMS Isg F002 1000 R 2
0x0C2A Isg Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C2C Isg Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C2E Zero seq I0 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C30 I0 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C32 I0 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C34 Positive Seq I1 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C36 I1 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C38 I1 Imag F002 1000 R 2


0x0C3A Negative Seq I2 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C3C I2 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C3E I2 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C40 Phasor Vab F002 1000 R 2
0x0C42 Vab Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C44 Vab Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C46 Phasor Vbc F002 1000 R 2
0x0C48 Vbc Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C4A Vbc Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C4C Phasor Vca F002 1000 R 2
0x0C4E Vca Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C50 Vca Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C52 Phasor Van F002 1000 R 2
0x0C54 Va Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C56 Va Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C58 Phasor Vbn F002 1000 R 2
0x0C5A Vb Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C5C Vb Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C5E Phasor Vcn F002 1000 R 2
0x0C60 Vc Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C62 Vc Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C64 Phasor Vn F002 1000 R 2
0x0C66 Vn Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C68 Vn Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C6A Positive Seq V1 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C6C V1 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C6E V1 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C70 Negative Seq V2 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C72 V2 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C74 V2 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C76 Zero Seq V0 F002 1000 R 2
0x0C78 V0 Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C7A V0 Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C7C Phasor Vx F002 1000 R 2
0x0C7E Vx Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C80 Vx Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C82 Nominal Voltage F002 1000 R 2
0x0C84 VL Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C86 VL Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C88 VBB Real F002 1000 R 2
0x0C8A VBB Imag F002 1000 R 2
0x0C8C Line Voltage F002 1000 R 2
0x0C8E Bus Voltage F002 1000 R 2
0x0C90 Line Frequency F002 1000 R 2
0x0C92 Bus Frequency F002 1000 R 2
0x0C94 Phase A Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0C96 Phase B Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0C98 Phase C Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0C9A Phase A Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0C9C Phase B Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2


0x0C9E Phase C Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CA0 Phase A Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CA2 Phase B Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CA4 Phase C Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CA6 3 Phase Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CA8 3 Phase Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CAA 3 Phase Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0CAC Phase A Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0CAE Phase B Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0CB0 Phase C Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0CB2 3 Phase Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
Ratios corriente y tensión - Current and Voltage Ratios
0x0CB4 CT Ratio F002 1000 R 2
0x0CB6 CT Ratio Ig F002 1000 R 2
0x0CB8 CT Ratio Isg F002 1000 R 2
0x0CBA PT Ratio F002 1000 R 2
Angulos - Angles
0x0CBC Ia Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CBE Ib Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CC0 Ic Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CC2 In Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CC4 Ig Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CC6 Isg Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CC8 Va Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CCA Vb Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CCC Vc Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CCE Vn Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD0 Vx Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD2 Vab Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD4 Vbc Angle F002 1000 R 2
0x0CD6 Vca Angle F002 1000 R 2
Frequency rate of change value
0x0CD8 df/dt F002 1000 R 2
0
Versión del HMI - HMI Version
0x0CE2 HMI Version F004 1000 R 1
0x0CE3 DISPLAY TYPE F004 1000 R 1
0x0CE4 PreFault Ia Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0CE6 PreFault Ia Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0CE8 PreFault Ib Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0CEA PreFault Ib Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0CEC PreFault Ic Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0CEE PreFault Ic Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0CF0 PreFault Vab Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0CF2 PreFault Vab Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0CF4 PreFault Vbc Mod F002 1000 R 2
000


0x0CF6 PreFault Vbc Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0CF8 PreFault Vca Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0CFA PreFault Vca Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0CFC PreFault Ig Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0CFE PreFault Ig Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0D00 PreFault Isg Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0D02 PreFault Isg Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0D04 PostFault Ia Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0D06 PostFault Ia Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0D08 PostFault Ib Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0D0A PostFault Ib Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0D0C PostFault Ic Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0D0E PostFault Ic Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0D10 PostFault Vab Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0D12 PostFault Vab Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0D14 PostFault Vbc Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0D16 PostFault Vbc Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0D18 PostFault Vca Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0D1A PostFault Vca Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0D1C PostFault Ig Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0D1E PostFault Ig Ang F003 1000 R 2
0x0D20 PostFault Isg Mod F002 1000 R 2
000
0x0D22 PostFault Isg Ang F003 1000 R 2
Valores Imagen Térmica - Thermal Image Values
0x0DD9 THERMAL1 IMAGE A F003 1 R 2
0x0DDB THERMAL1 IMAGE B F003 1 R 2
0x0DDD THERMAL1 IMAGE C F003 1 R 2
0x0DE4 THERMAL2 IMAGE A F003 1 R 2
0x0DE6 THERMAL2 IMAGE B F003 1 R 2
0x0DE8 THERMAL2 IMAGE C F003 1 R 2
0x0DEF THERMAL3 IMAGE A F003 1 R 2
0x0DF1 THERMAL3 IMAGE B F003 1 R 2
0x0DF3 THERMAL3 IMAGE C F003 1 R 2
Diferencia de tensión para la función de sincronismo-Voltage Difference for synchrocheck unit
0x0E31 VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE F002 1000 R 2
0
Diferencia de Frecuencia para la función de sincronismo-Frequency Difference for synchrocheck unit
0x0E33 FREQ. DIFFERENCE F002 1000 R 2
0
Estados Reenganchador (Enumerado) - Autorecloser Status


0x0E36 AR STATUS F012 R 1 0=OUT OF SERVICE
1=READY
2=LOCKOUT
3=BLOCK
4=RECLOSE IN PROGRESS
0x0E37 AR LOCKOUT MODE F012 R 1 0=NONE
1=ANOMALY
2=FAIL TO OPEN
3=FAIL TO CLOSE
4=MANUAL
5=NO CONDITIONS
6=MAX NUMBER OF TRIPS
7=LAST SHOT
0x0E38 AR BLOCK MODE F012 R 1 0=NONE
1=LEVEL
2=PULSE
3=LEVEL+PULSE
Estados Oscilografía - Oscillography States
0x0EB6 NUMBER OF TRIGGERS F004 1 R 1
0x0EB7 CYCLES PER RECORD F004 1 R 1
0x0EB8 AVAILABLE RECORDS F004 1 R 1
Estados Localizador de Faltas - Fault Report States
0x0EBB FAULT DATE F011 R 3
0x0EBE FAULT TYPE F012 R 1 0=GROUND
1=PHASE
2=3 PH
3=AG
4=ABG
5=AB
6=BG
7=BCG
8=BC
9=CG
10=CAG
11=CA
12=NAF
0x0EBF FAULT LOCATION F003 1 R 2
0x0EC1 FAULT REPORT NUMBER F005 1 R 2
0x0EC3 R Primary F003 1000 R 2
0x0EC5 R Secondary F003 1000 R 2
0x0EC7 X Primary F003 1000 R 2
0x0EC9 X Secondary F003 1000 R 2
0x0ECB FAULT RESISTANCE F003 R 2
Medidas en Valores Primarios - Analog measures in Primary Values
0x0EE2 Phasor Ia Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EE4 Phasor Ib Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EE6 Phasor Ic Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EE8 Phasor Ig Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EEA Phasor Isg Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EEC Phasor In Primary F002 1000 R 2


0x0EEE RMS Ia Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EF0 RMS Ib Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EF2 RMS Ic Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EF4 RMS Ig Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EF6 RMS Isg Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EF8 I0 Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EFA I1 Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EFC I2 Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0EFE V0 Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F00 V1 Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F02 V2 Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F04 Vab Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F06 Vbc Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F08 Vca Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F0A Va Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F0C Vb Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F0E Vc Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F10 Vn Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F12 Vx Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F14 VBB Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F16 VL Primary F002 1000 R 2
0x0F18 Phase A Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F1A Phase A Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
Medidas en Valores Primarios - Analog measures in Primary Values(cont.)
0x0F1C Phase A Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F1E Phase B Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F20 Phase B Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F22 Phase B Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F24 Phase C Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F26 Phase C Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F28 Phase C Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F2A 3 Phase Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F2C 3 Phase Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F2E 3 Phase Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2
0x0F30 Phase A Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F32 Phase B Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F34 Phase C Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F36 3 Phase Power Factor F002 1000 R 2
0x0F38 Line Frequency F002 1000 R 2
0x0F3A Bus Frequency F002 1000 R 2
0x0F3C Positive MWatthour F002 1000 R 2
0x0F3E Negative MWatthour F002 1000 R 2
0x0F40 Positive MVarhour F002 1000 R 2
0x0F42 Negative MVarhour F002 1000 R 2
0x0F44 Pos MWatthour Cnt F002 1000 R 2
0x0F46 Neg MWatthour Cnt F002 1000 R 2
0x0F48 Pos MVarhour Cnt F002 1000 R 2
0x0F4A Neg MVarhour Cnt F002 1000 R 2
0x0F4C % of Load-To-Trip F002 1000 R 2
Medidas Demanda - Demand measures


0x0FAB DEMAND IA F002 1000 R 2
0x0FAD DEMAND IA MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FAF DEMAND IA DATE F011 R 3
0x0FB2 DEMAND IB F002 1000 R 2
0x0FB4 DEMAND IB MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FB6 DEMAND IB DATE F011 R 3
0x0FB9 DEMAND IC F002 1000 R 2
0x0FBB DEMAND IC MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FBD DEMAND IC DATE F011 R 3
0x0FC0 DEMAND IG F002 1000 R 2
0x0FC2 DEMAND IG MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FC4 DEMAND IG DATE F011 R 3
0x0FC7 DEMAND ISG F002 1000 R 2
0x0FC9 DEMAND ISG MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FCB DEMAND ISG DATE F011 R 3
0x0FCE DEMAND I2 F002 1000 R 2
0x0FD0 DEMAND I2 MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FD2 DEMAND I2 DATE F011 R 3
0x0FD5 DEMAND W F002 1000 R 2
0x0FD7 DEMAND W MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FD9 DEMAND W DATE F011 R 3
0x0FDC DEMAND VAR PWR F002 1000 R 2
0x0FDE DEMAND VAR MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FE0 DEMAND VAR DATE F011 R 3
0x0FE3 DEMAND VA PWR F002 1000 R 2
0x0FE5 DEMAND VA MAX F002 1000 R 2
0x0FE7 DEMAND VA DATE F011 R 3
Entradas Analógicas (Tarjetas J y H)- Analog Inputs (J and H boards)
0x0FFE ANALOG_INP_H_01 F002 1000 R 2
0x1000 ANALOG_INP_H_02 F002 1000 R 2
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x100C ANALOG_INP_H_08 F002 1000 R 2
0x107E ANALOG_INP_J_01 F002 1000 R 2
0x1080 ANALOG_INP_J_02 F002 1000 R 2
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x108C ANALOG_INP_J_08 F002 1000 R 2
Contadores de Interruptor - Breaker Counters
0x111D BREAKER OPENINGS F005 1 R 2
0x111F BREAKER CLOSINGS F005 1 R 2
0x1121 KI2t PHASE A F003 1 R 2
0x1123 KI2t PHASE B F003 1 R 2
0x1125 KI2t PHASE C F003 1 R 2
0x1127 BKR OPENING TIME F003 1 R 2
0x1129 BKR CLOSING TIME F003 1 R 2
0x112B BKR OPEN TIMING F003 1 R 2
0x112D BKR CLOSE TIMING F003 1 R 2
Registrador de Datos - Data Logger
0x1153 OLDEST SAMPLE TIME F011 R 3
0x1156 NEWEST SAMPLE TIME F011 R 3
0x1159 DATA LOGGER CHANNELS F004 1 R 1


0x115A DATA LOGGER DAYS F003 1 R 2
Estados Internos Sistema - Internal System States
0x1160 Kswapd Time ** F005 1 R 2
0x1162 mtd2 Time ** F005 1 R 2
0x1164 mtd3 Time ** F005 1 R 2
0x1166 CPU Rtai ** F005 1 R 2
0x1168 CPU Linux ** F005 1 R 2
0x116A Total RAM F005 1024 R 2
0x116C Used DRAM F005 1024 R 2
0x116E Free RAM ** F005 1024 R 2
0x1170 Shared RAM ** F005 1024 R 2
0x1172 Buffer RAM ** F005 1024 R 2
0x1174 Cached RAM ** F005 1024 R 2
0x1176 Green Counter ** F005 1 R 2
0x1178 Yellow Counter ** F005 1 R 2
0x117A Orange Counter ** F005 1 R 2
0x117C Red Counter ** F005 1 R 2
0x117E UpTime F005 1 R 2
0x1180 DSP Counter F005 1000 R 2
0x1182 CPU Usage F004 1000 R 1
0x120E ICD STATUS F012 R 1 0=UNKNOWN
1=ICD ERROR
2=MODIFIED
3=IN PROGRESS
4=OK WITHOUT DAIS
5=OK
6=NotValidated Empty
7=Passed to Validated
8=Default
9=ERROR HEADER CID
10=ERROR SG CID
0x120F ICD STATUS NOTVAL F012 R 1 0=UNKNOWN
1=ICD ERROR
2=MODIFIED
3=IN PROGRESS
4=OK WITHOUT DAIS
5=OK
6=NotValidated Empty
7=Passed to Validated
8=Default
9=ERROR HEADER CID
10=ERROR SG CID
** For version previous to 7.00


Valor del Contador de Pulsos-Pulse Counter Value
0x121B PulseCntr Value 1 F002 1000 R 2
000
0x121D PulseCntr Value 2 F002 1000 R 2
000
0x121F PulseCntr Value 3 F002 1000 R 2
000
0x1221 PulseCntr Value 4 F002 1000 R 2
000
000
000
000
000
Valor del Contador de Pulsos Congelado-Freeze Pulse Counter Value
0x122B PulseCntr Freeze 1 F002 1000 R 2
000
0x122D PulseCntr Freeze 2 F002 1000 R 2
000
0x122F PulseCntr Freeze 3 F002 1000 R 2
000
0x1231 PulseCntr Freeze 4 F002 1000 R 2
000
000
000
000
000
0x1263 GLOBAL STARTS CNT F005 1000 R 2
0x1265 BLOCK LOCKOUT TIME F005 1000 R 2
Entradas analógicas remotas tipo float- Float Remote Analog Input
0x126D Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 1 F003 1000 R 2
0x126F Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 2 F003 1000 R 2
0x1271 Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 3 F003 1000 R 2
0x127B Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 8 F003 1000 R 2
Entradas analogicas remotas tipo entero- Integer Remote Analog Input
0x127D Rem Ana Inp INT 1 F005 1000 R 2
0x127F Rem Ana Inp INT 2 F005 1000 R 2
0x1281 Rem Ana Inp INT 3 F005 1000 R 2
0x128B Rem Ana Inp INT 8 F005 1000 R 2


Medidas Potencia Función 32N (Nivel Alto y Bajo) - wattmetric Ground Fault Power Measurements (High and Low Level)
0x1349 32N1 HIGH POWER F002 1000 R 2
0x1350 32N2 HIGH POWER F002 1000 R 2
0x1357 32N3 HIGH POWER F002 1000 R 2
0x135E 32N1 LOW POWER F002 1000 R 2
0x1365 32N2 LOW POWER F002 1000 R 2
0x136C 32N3 LOW POWER F002 1000 R 2
Digital Counters Status
0x147D DIGCNT 1 VALUE F005 1000 R 2
0x147F DIGCNT 2 VALUE F005 1000 R 2
0x1481 DIGCNT 3 VALUE F005 1000 R 2
0x148B DIGCNT 8 VALUE F005 1000 R 2
0x148D DIGCNT 1 FROZENVALUE F005 1000 R 2
0x148F DIGCNT 2 FROZENVALUE F005 1000 R 2
0x1491 DIGCNT 3 FROZENVALUE F005 1000 R 2
0x149B DIGCNT 8 FROZENVALUE F005 1000 R 2
0x149D DIGCNT 1 FROZENDATE F011 R 3
0x14A0 DIGCNT 2 FROZENDATE F011 R 3
0x14AC DIGCNT 6 FROZENDATE F011 R 3
0x14AF DIGCNT 7 FROZENDATE F011 R 3
0x14B2 DIGCNT 8 FROZENDATE F011 R 3
PTP 1588 Status
0x14E5 RTC Sync Source F012 1000 R 1 0=INTERNAL
1=PTP-PORT
2=SNTP
3=IRIG-B
4=SNTP2
0x14E6 GrandMaster-ID LOW F009 1000 R 4
0x14EA GrandMaster-ID HIGH F009 1000 R 4
0x14EE PTP ACCURACY F005 1000 R 2
0x14F0 PTP PORT A STATE F012 1000 R 1 0=DISABLED
1=NO SIGNAL
2=CALIBRATING
3=SYNCHD_NO_PDELAY
4=SYNCHRONIZED
0x14F1 PTP PORT B STATE F012 1000 R 1 0=DISABLED
1=NO SIGNAL
2=CALIBRATING


3=SYNCHD_NO_PDELAY
4=SYNCHRONIZED
Application Versions (Part II)
0x14F3 Boot Version F004 1000 R 1
0x14F4 Boot Date F009 R 10
0x14FE Kinetis Boot Version F004 1000 R 1
0x14FF Kinetis Boot Date F009 R 10
0x1509 Kinetis Loader Ver F004 1000 R 1
0x150A Kinetis Loader Date F009 R 10
0x1514 Kinetis App Version F004 1000 R 1
0x1515 Kinetis App Date F009 R 10
0x151F DSP Version F004 1000 R 1
0x1520 DSP Date F009 R 16
Internal System States (Part II)
0x1530 DSP Status F005 1000 R 2
Application Versions (Part III)
0x1535 Firmware Date F009 R 10
0x153F FPGA Version F009 1000 R 4
Internal System States (Part III)
0x1543 FLASH Usage F004 1000 R 1
0x1544 KINETIS Status F012 R 1 0=ERROR
1=BOOT_MODE
2=APP_MODE
0x1545 CPU MAX Usage F004 1000 R 1
Application Versions (Part IV)
0x1546 RM PRP HSR Version F009 1000 R 4
0x154A RM RSTP Version F009 1000 R 4
0x154E RM LLA Version F009 1000 R 4
0x1552 RM Bypass Version F009 1000 R 4
Internal System States (Part IV)
0x1556 Temp Current Value F004 1000 R 1
0x1557 Temp Max Value F004 1000 R 1
0x1558 Temp Min Value F004 1000 R 1
0x1559 Scan Cycle Average F004 1000 R 1
0x155A Scan Cycle Rate F004 1000 R 1
0x155C PLC Checksum F005 1000 R 2
0x155E Settings Checksum F005 1000 R 2
Application Versions (Part V)
0x1560 CPU Revision F004 1000 R 1
Redundancy status
0x157C PRP_HSR A tx F005 1000 R 2
0x157E PRP_HSR B tx F005 1000 R 2
0x1580 PRP_HSR A err F005 1000 R 2
0x1582 PRP_HSR B err F005 1000 R 2
0x1584 RSTP PortA State F012 R 1 0=DISCARDING
1=LEARNING
2=FORWARDING
0x1585 RSTP PortB State F012 R 1 0=DISCARDING
1=LEARNING


2=FORWARDING
Mapa de Usuario - User Map
0xF330 Address 00 F004 1 R 1
0xF331 Address 01 F004 1 R 1
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0xF42F Address 255 F004 1 R 1
Textos Maniobras - Commands text
0x1C00 OPERATION 1 F009 1 R/W 16
0x1C10 OPERATION 2 F009 1 R/W 16
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x1DF0 OPERATION24 F009 1 R/W 16
0x1E00 Confirmation address W 1
PLC Timer Masks
0x1E01 TIMER MASK 01 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 86400000] ms
0x1E0B TIMER MASK 06 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 86400000] ms
0x1E0D TIMER MASK 07 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 86400000] ms
0x1E0F TIMER MASK 08 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 86400000] ms
0x1E1B TIMER MASK 14 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 86400000] ms
0x1E1D TIMER MASK 15 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 86400000] ms
0x1E1F TIMER MASK 16 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 86400000] ms
0x1E3F Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Tarjeta F - Board F Settings
Ajustes de Tensión Tarjeta F - Board F Voltage Settings
0x1E41 Voltage Threshold A_F F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x1E42 Voltage Threshold B_F F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x1EE6 Voltage Threshold C_F F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x1EE7 Voltage Threshold D_F F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
Ajustes Tiempo Antirrebotes Tarjeta F - Board F Debounce Time Settings
0x1E43 Debounce Time A_F F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x1E44 Debounce Time B_F F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x1EE8 Debounce Time C_F F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x1EE9 Debounce Time D_F F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
Ajuste Tipo de Entrada Tarjeta F (32 elementos) - Board F Input Type Setting (32 items)
0x1E45 Input Type_F_CC1 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE-EDGE
1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE


1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE
Ajuste Tiempo Retardo Entradas Tarjeta F (32 elementos) - Board F Delay Input Time Setting (32 items)
0x1E65 Delay Input Time_F_CC1 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
0x1E67 Delay Input Time_F_CC2 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x1EA3 Delay Input Time_F_CC32 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
Ajuste Lógica de Salidas Tarjeta F (16 elementos) - Board F Output Logic Settings (16 items)
0x1EA5 Output Logic_F_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE
1=NEGATIVE
0x1EA6 Output Logic_F_02 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE
1=NEGATIVE
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x1EB4 Output Logic_F_16 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE
1=NEGATIVE
Ajuste Tipo de Salidas Tarjeta F (16 elementos) - Board F Output Type Settings (16 items)
0x1EB5 Output Type_F_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NORMAL
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
0x1EB6 Output Type_F_02 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NORMAL
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x1EC4 Output Type_F_16 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NORMAL
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
Tiempo Pulso de Salida Tarjeta F - Board F Pulse Output Time Settings (16 items)
0x1EC5 Pulse Output Time_F_01 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
0x1EC7 Pulse Output Time_F_02 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x1EE3 Pulse Output Time_F_16 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
0x1EE5 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajuste Rango de Entrada Analogica F (8 elementos) - Board F Analog Input Range Settings (8 items)
0x1EEA Range_F_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=-1 to 0 mA
2=0 to 1 mA
3=-1 to 1 mA
4=0 to 5 mA
5=0 to 10 mA
6=0 to 20 mA
7=4 to 20 mA
0x1EEB Range_F_02 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=-1 to 0 mA
2=0 to 1 mA
3=-1 to 1 mA


4=0 to 5 mA
5=0 to 10 mA
6=0 to 20 mA
7=4 to 20 mA
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x1EF1 Range_F_08 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=-1 to 0 mA
2=0 to 1 mA
3=-1 to 1 mA
4=0 to 5 mA
5=0 to 10 mA
6=0 to 20 mA
7=4 to 20 mA
Ajuste Rango de Medida de Entrada Analógica F (8 elementos) - Board F Analog Input Measurement Range (8 items)
0x1EF2 Min Value_F_01 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1EFA Min Value_F_05 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1EFC Min Value_F_06 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1EFE Min Value_F_07 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1F00 Min Value_F_08 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1F02 Max Value_F_01 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1F04 Max Value_F_02 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1F06 Max Value_F_03 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1F08 Max Value_F_04 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1F0A Max Value_F_05 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1F0C Max Value_F_06 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1F0E Max Value_F_07 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1F10 Max Value_F_08 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x1F12 Channelx1a_F_01 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x1F1A Channelx1a_F_05 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x1F1C Channelx1a_F_06 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x1F1E Channelx1a_F_07 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x1F22 Channelx1b_F_01 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x1F2A Channelx10a_F_01 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x1F2C Channelx10a_F_02 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x1F2E Channelx10a_F_03 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]


0x1F3A Channelx10b_F_01 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x1F3B Channelx10b_F_02 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x1F3C Channelx10b_F_03 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x1F3D Channelx10b_F_04 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x1F3E Channelx10b_F_05 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x1F3F Channelx10b_F_06 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x1F42 Calibration Type_F F012 1000 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=OFFSET
2=CALIBRATION
3=GET CALIBRATION
0x1FE4 Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Tarjeta G - Board G Settings
Ajustes de Tensión Tarjeta G - Board G Voltage Settings
0x1FE6 Voltage Threshold A_G F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x1FE7 Voltage Threshold B_G F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x208B Voltage Threshold C_G F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x208C Voltage Threshold D_G F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
Tiempo Antirrebotes Tarjeta G - Board G Debounce Time Settings
0x1FE8 Debounce Time A_G F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x1FE9 Debounce Time B_G F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x208D Debounce Time C_G F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x208E Debounce Time D_G F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
Ajuste Tipo de Entrada Tarjeta G (32 elementos) - Board G Input Type Settings (32 items)
0x1FEA Input Type_G_CC1 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE-EDGE
1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE
0x1FEB Input Type_G_CC2 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE-EDGE
1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x2009 Input Type_G_CC32 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE-EDGE
1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE
Ajustes Tiempo Retardo Entradas Tarjeta G (32 elementos) - Board G Delay Input Time Settings (32 items)
0x200A Delay Input Time_G_CC1 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
0x200C Delay Input Time_G_CC2 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x2048 Delay Input Time_G_CC32 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
Ajustes Lógica de Salidas Tarjeta G (16 elementos) - Board G Output Logic Settings (16 items)
0x204A Output Logic_G_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE
1=NEGATIVE


0x204B Output Logic_G_02 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE
1=NEGATIVE
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x2059 Output Logic_G_16 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE
1=NEGATIVE
Ajustes Tipo de Salidas Tarjeta G (16 elementos) - Board G Output Type Settings (16 items)
0x205A Output Type_G_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NORMAL
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
0x205B Output Type_G_02 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NORMAL
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x2069 Output Type_G_16 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NORMAL
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
Ajustes Tiempo Pulso de Salida Tarjeta G - Board G Pulse Output Time Settings (16 items)
0x206A Pulse Output Time_G_01 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
0x206C Pulse Output Time_G_02 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x2088 Pulse Output Time_G_16 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
0x208A Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajuste Rango de Entrada Analogica G (8 elementos) - Board G Analog Input Range Settings (8 items)
0x208F Range_G_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=-1 to 0 mA
2= 0 to 1mA
3=-1 to 1mA
4= 0 to 5 mA
5= 0 to 10mA
6= 0 to 20mA
7= 4 to 20mA
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x2096 Range_G_08 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=-1 to 0 mA
2= 0 to 1mA
3=-1 to 1mA
4= 0 to 5 mA
5= 0 to 10mA
6= 0 to 20mA
7= 4 to 20mA
Ajustes Rango de Medida de Entrada Analógica G (8 elementos) - Board G Analog Input Measurement Range Settings (8 items)
0x2097 Min Value_G_01 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x2099 Min Value_G_02 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x20A5 Min Value_G_08 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x20A7 Max Value_G_01 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x20A9 Max Value_G_02 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x20B5 Max Value_G_08 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]


0x20B7 Channelx1a_G_01 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x20B9 Channelx1a_G_02 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x20BB Channelx1a_G_03 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x20BD Channelx1a_G_04 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x20BF Channelx1a_G_05 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x20C1 Channelx1a_G_06 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x20C7 Channelx1b_G_01 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x20CA Channelx1b_G_04 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x20CB Channelx1b_G_05 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x20CC Channelx1b_G_06 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x20CD Channelx1b_G_07 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x20CE Channelx1b_G_08 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x20CF Channelx10a_G_01 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x20D1 Channelx10a_G_02 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x20DB Channelx10a_G_07 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x20DD Channelx10a_G_08 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x20DF Channelx10b_G_01 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x20E0 Channelx10b_G_02 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x20E7 Calibration Type_G F012 1000 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=OFFSET
2=CALIBRATION
3=GET CALIBRATION
0x2189 Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Tarjeta H (MODULO CIO) - Board H Settings (CIO MODULE)
Ajustes Tipo Tarjeta H - Board H Board Type Settings
0x2F5B I/O Board Type_H F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=16INP + 8OUT
2=8INP + 8OUT + SUPV
4=32INP
5=16INP + 8ANA
Ajustes de Tensión Tarjeta H - Board H Voltage Settings
0x2F5C Voltage Threshold A_H F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x2F5D Voltage Threshold B_H F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x3001 Voltage Threshold C_H F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x3002 Voltage Threshold D_H F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V


Tiempo Antirrebotes Tarjeta H - Board H Debounce Time Settings
0x2F5E Debounce Time A_H F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x2F5F Debounce Time B_H F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x3003 Debounce Time C_H F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x3004 Debounce Time D_H F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
Ajuste Tipo de Entrada Tarjeta H (32 elementos) - Board H Input Type Settings (32 items)
0x2F60 Input Type_H_CC1 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE-EDGE
1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE
0x2F61 Input Type_H_CC2 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE-EDGE
1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x2F7F Input Type_H_CC32 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE-EDGE
1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE
Ajuste Tiempo Retardo Entradas Tarjeta H (32 elementos) - Board H Delay Input Time Settings (32 items)
0x2F80 Delay Input Time_H_CC1 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
0x2F82 Delay Input Time_H_CC2 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x2FBE Delay Input Time_H_CC32 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
Ajuste Lógica de Salidas Tarjeta H (16 elementos) - Board H Output Logic Settings (16 items)
0x2FC0 Output Logic_H_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE
1=NEGATIVE
0x2FC1 Output Logic_H_02 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE
1=NEGATIVE
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x2FCF Output Logic_H_16 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE
1=NEGATIVE
Ajuste Tipo de Salidas Tarjeta H (16 elementos) - Board H Output Type Settings (16 items)
0x2FD0 Output Type_H_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NORMAL
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
0x2FD1 Output Type_H_02 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NORMAL
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x2FDF Output Type_H_16 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NORMAL
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
Ajuste Tiempo Pulso de Salida Tarjeta H - Board H Pulse Output Time Settings (16 items)
0x2FE0 Pulse Output Time_H_01 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
0x2FE2 Pulse Output Time_H_02 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x2FFE Pulse Output Time_H_16 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
0x3000 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED


Ajuste Rango de Entrada Analogica H (8 elementos) - Board H Analog Input Range Settings (8 items)
0x3005 Range_H_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=-1 to 0 mA
2= 0 to 1mA
3=-1 to 1mA
4= 0 to 5 mA
5= 0 to 10mA
6= 0 to 20mA
7= 4 to 20mA
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x300C Range_H_08 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=-1 to 0 mA
2= 0 to 1mA
3=-1 to 1mA
4= 0 to 5 mA
5= 0 to 10mA
6= 0 to 20mA
7= 4 to 20mA
Ajuste Rango de Medida de Entrada Analógica H (8 elementos) - Board H: Analog Input Measurement Range (8 items)
0x300D Min Value_H_01 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x300F Min Value_H_02 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x301B Min Value_H_08 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x301D Max Value_H_01 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x301F Max Value_H_02 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x302B Max Value_H_08 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x302D Channelx1a_H_01 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x302F Channelx1a_H_02 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x3031 Channelx1a_H_03 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x3033 Channelx1a_H_04 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x3035 Channelx1a_H_05 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x3037 Channelx1a_H_06 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x3039 Channelx1a_H_07 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x303B Channelx1a_H_08 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x303D Channelx1b_H_01 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x303E Channelx1b_H_02 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x303F Channelx1b_H_03 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3040 Channelx1b_H_04 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3041 Channelx1b_H_05 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3042 Channelx1b_H_06 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3043 Channelx1b_H_07 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3044 Channelx1b_H_08 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3045 Channelx10a_H_01 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x3047 Channelx10a_H_02 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x3049 Channelx10a_H_03 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x304B Channelx10a_H_04 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x304D Channelx10a_H_05 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x304F Channelx10a_H_06 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]


0x3051 Channelx10a_H_07 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x3053 Channelx10a_H_08 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x3055 Channelx10b_H_01 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3056 Channelx10b_H_02 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3057 Channelx10b_H_03 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3058 Channelx10b_H_04 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3059 Channelx10b_H_05 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x305A Channelx10b_H_06 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x305B Channelx10b_H_07 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x305C Channelx10b_H_08 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x305D Calibration Type_H F012 1000 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=OFFSET
2=CALIBRATION
3=GET CALIBRATION
0x30FF Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Tarjeta J (MODULO CIO) - Board J Settings (CIO MODULE)
Ajustes Tipo Tarjeta J - Board J Board Type Settings
0x3100 I/O Board Type_J F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=16INP + 8OUT
2=8INP + 8OUT + SUPV
4=32INP
5=16INP + 8ANA
Ajustes de Tensión Tarjeta J - Board J Voltage Settings
0x3101 Voltage Threshold A_J F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x3102 Voltage Threshold B_J F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x31A6 Voltage Threshold C_J F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
0x31A7 Voltage Threshold D_J F004 1 R/W 1 [10 , 230] V
Ajustes Tiempo Antirrebotes Tarjeta J - Board J Debounce Time Settings
0x3103 Debounce Time A_J F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x3104 Debounce Time B_J F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x31A8 Debounce Time C_J F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
0x31A9 Debounce Time D_J F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 50] ms
Ajuste Tipo de Entrada Tarjeta J (32 elementos) - Board J Input Type Settings (32 items)
0x3105 Input Type_J_CC1 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE-EDGE
1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE
1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
1=NEGATIVE-EDGE
2=POSITIVE
3=NEGATIVE
Ajustes Tiempo Retardo Entradas Tarjeta J (32 elementos) - Board J Delay Input Time Settings (32 items)
0x3125 Delay Input Time_J_CC1 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...


Ajustes Lógica de Salidas Tarjeta J (16 elementos) - Board J Output Logic Settings (16 items)
0x3165 Output Logic_J_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=POSITIVE
1=NEGATIVE
1=NEGATIVE
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
1=NEGATIVE
Ajustes Tipo de Salidas Tarjeta J (16 elementos) - Board J Output Type Settings (16 items)
0x3175 Output Type_J_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NORMAL
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
1=PULSE
2=LATCH
Ajustes Tiempo Pulso de Salida Tarjeta J - Board J Pulse Output Time Settings (16 items)
0x3185 Pulse Output Time_J_01 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
0x3187 Pulse Output Time_J_02 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x31A3 Pulse Output Time_J_16 F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ms
0x31A5 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajuste Rango de Entrada Analogica J (8 elementos) - Board J Analog Input Range Settings (8 items)
0x31AA Range_J_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=-1 to 0 mA
2= 0 to 1mA
3=-1 to 1mA
4= 0 to 5 mA
5= 0 to 10mA
6= 0 to 20mA
7= 4 to 20mA
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x31B1 Range_J_08 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=-1 to 0 mA
2= 0 to 1mA
3=-1 to 1mA
4= 0 to 5 mA
5= 0 to 10mA
6= 0 to 20mA
7= 4 to 20mA
Ajustes Rango de Medida de Entrada Analógica J (8 elementos) - Board J Analog Input Measurement Range Settings (8 items)
0x31B2 Min Value_J_01 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x31B4 Min Value_J_02 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x31C0 Min Value_J_08 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]


0x31C2 Max Value_J_01 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x31C4 Max Value_J_02 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x31D0 Max Value_J_08 F003 1 R/W 2 [-9999.99 , 9999.99]
0x31D2 Channelx1a_J_01 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x31DA Channelx1a_J_05 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x31DC Channelx1a_J_06 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x31DE Channelx1a_J_07 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x31E0 Channelx1a_J_08 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x31E2 Channelx1b_J_01 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x31EA Channelx10a_J_01 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x31EC Channelx10a_J_02 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x31EE Channelx10a_J_03 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x31F0 Channelx10a_J_04 F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,950 , 1,050]
0x31FA Channelx10b_J_01 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x31FB Channelx10b_J_02 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x31FC Channelx10b_J_03 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x31FD Channelx10b_J_04 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x31FE Channelx10b_J_05 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x31FF Channelx10b_J_06 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3200 Channelx10b_J_07 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3201 Channelx10b_J_08 F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000]
0x3202 Calibration Type_J F012 1000 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=OFFSET
2=CALIBRATION
3=GET CALIBRATION
0x32A4 Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Generales - General Settings
0x218A Phase CT Ratio F003 1 R/W 2 [1.0 , 6000.0]
0x218C Ground CT Ratio F003 1 R/W 2 [1.0 , 6000.0]
0x218E Stv Ground CT Ratio F003 1 R/W 2 [1.0 , 6000.0]
0x2190 Phase VT Ratio F003 1 R/W 2 [1.0 , 6000.0]
0x2192 Phase VT Connection F012 1 R/W 1 0=WYE
1=DELTA
0x2193 Nominal Voltage F003 1 R/W 2 [1.0 , 250.0] V


0x2195 Nominal Frequency F012 1 R/W 1 0=50 Hz
1=60 Hz
0x2196 Phase Rotation F012 1 R/W 1 0=ABC
1=ACB
0x2197 Frequency Reference F012 1 R/W 1 0=VI
1=VII
2=VIII
0x2198 Auxiliary Voltage F012 1 R/W 1 0=VX
1=VN
1=ENABLED
0x219B Primary Meter Units F012 1 R/W 1 0=KA_KV
1=A_V
0x219C Device Name F009 1 R/W 8
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Instantánea de Fases Nivel Alto Grupo 1 - Phase IOC High 1 Settings
0x2204 Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2205 Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
0x2206 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x2208 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x220A Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x220C Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x221F Confirmation address W 1
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x2224 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2226 Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
0x223B Confirmation address W 1
0x223C Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x223D Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
0x223E Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x2240 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Instantánea de Fases Nivel Bajo Grupo 1 - Phase IOC Low 1 Settings


1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x225A Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x225C Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x225E Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x2278 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x227A Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x2294 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
0x22AB Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Instantánea de Neutro Grupo 1 - Neutral IOC 1 Settings
0x22AC Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x22AD Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x22AF Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x22B1 Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x22B3 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x22C6 Confirmation address W 1
0x22C7 Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x22C8 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x22CA Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x22CC Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x22CE Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED


0x22E2 Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x22E3 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x22E5 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x22E7 Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x22E9 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x22FC Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Instantánea de Tierra Grupo 1 - Ground IOC 1 Settings
0x22FD Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x22FE Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
0x22FF Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x2301 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x231A Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
0x231B Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x231D Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x231F Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x2339 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x233B Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x233D Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Instantánea de Tierra Sensible Grupo 1 - Sensitive Ground IOC 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x2355 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s


1=ENABLED
0x236C Confirmation address W 1
0x236D Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x236E Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
0x236F Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 16.000] A
0x2371 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x238D Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x238F Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto Grupo 1 - Phase TOC High 1 Settings
0x23A5 Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x23A6 Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
0x23A7 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x23A9 Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=IEEE Ext Inv
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
7=IEC Short-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B


20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x23AA TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x23AC Reset F012 1 R/W 1 0=INSTANTANEOUS
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto Grupo 1 - Phase TOC High 1 Settings(cont.)
1=LINEAR
0x23AD Voltage Restraint F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x23AE Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x23C3 Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
0x23C6 Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=IEEE Ext Inv
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x23C7 TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x23C9 Reset F012 1 R/W 1 0=INSTANTANEOUS
1=LINEAR
0x23CA Voltage Restraint F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x23CB Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x23DE Confirmation address W 1
0x23DF Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED


0x23E0 Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
0x23E3 Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=IEEE Ext Inv
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x23E4 TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x23E6 Reset F012 1 R/W 1 0=INSTANTANEOUS
1=LINEAR
0x23E7 Voltage Restraint F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x23FB Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Neutro Grupo 1 - Neutral TOC 1 Settings
0x23FC Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x23FD Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x23FF Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=IEEE Ext Inv
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv


13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x2400 TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2402 Reset F012 1 R/W 1 0=INSTANTANEOUS
1=LINEAR
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x241A Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=IEEE Ext Inv
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x241B TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x241D Reset F012 1 R/W 1 0=INSTANTANEOUS
1=LINEAR
0x241E Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED


0x2435 Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=IEEE Ext Inv
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
1=LINEAR
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Tierra Grupo 1 - Ground TOC 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x244F Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Tierra Grupo 1 - Ground TOC 1 Settings(cont.)


14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
1=LINEAR
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x246D Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=IEEE Ext Inv
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x246E TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=LINEAR
1=ENABLED


1=ENABLED
1=RMS
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x248A TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x248C Reset F012 1 R/W 1 0=INSTANTANEOUS
1=LINEAR
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Tierra Sensible Grupo 1 - Sensitive Ground TOC 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv


Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Tierra Sensible Grupo 1 - Sensitive Ground TOC 1 Settings(cont.)
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x24A6 TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x24A8 Reset F012 1 R/W 1 0=INSTANTANEOUS
1=LINEAR
1=ENABLED
0x24BC Confirmation address W 1
0x24BD Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x24BE Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
0x24BF Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 16.000] A
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
1=LINEAR
0x24C5 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED


0x24D8 Confirmation address W 1
0x24D9 Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x24DA Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
0x24DB Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 16.000] A
0x24DD Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=IEEE Ext Inv
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x24DE TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=LINEAR
1=ENABLED
0x24F4 Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Subtensión de Fases Grupo 1 - Phase UV 1 Settings
0x24F5 Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x24F6 Mode F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASE-PHASE
1=PHASE-GROUND
0x24F7 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x24F9 Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=DEFINITE TIME
1=INVERSE TIME
0x24FA Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x24FC Minimum Voltage F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
0x24FE Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=ANY PHASE
1=TWO PHASES
2=ALL PHASES
0x24FF Supervised by 52 F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED


1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2515 Mode F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASE-PHASE
1=PHASE-GROUND
0x2516 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x2518 Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=DEFINITE TIME
1=INVERSE TIME
0x2519 Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x251B Minimum Voltage F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
0x251D Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=ANY PHASE
1=TWO PHASES
2=ALL PHASES
0x251E Supervised by 52 F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x251F Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2534 Mode F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASE-PHASE
1=PHASE-GROUND
1=INVERSE TIME
0x2538 Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x253A Minimum Voltage F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
0x253C Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=ANY PHASE
1=TWO PHASES
2=ALL PHASES
0x253D Supervised by 52 F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Sobretensión de Fases Secuencia Negativa Grupo 1 - Negative Sequence OV 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x2555 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED


1=ENABLED
0x256E Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x2570 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x258B Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x258D Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Imagen Térmica Grupo 1 - Thermal Model 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x25A4 Heat Time Constant F003 1 R/W 2 [3.0 , 600.0] min
0x25A6 Cool Time Constant F003 1 R/W 2 [1.00 , 6.00]
0x25AA Alarm Level F003 1 R/W 2 [1.0 , 110.0] %
0x25AC Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x25BF Confirmation address W 1
1=ENABLED
0x25C1 Heat Time Constant F003 1 R/W 2 [3.0 , 600.0] min
0x25C3 Cool Time Constant F003 1 R/W 2 [1.00 , 6.00]
0x25C7 Alarm Level F003 1 R/W 2 [1.0 , 110.0] %
1=ENABLED
0x25DC Confirmation address W 1
0x25DD Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x25DE Heat Time Constant F003 1 R/W 2 [3.0 , 600.0] min
0x25E0 Cool Time Constant F003 1 R/W 2 [1.00 , 6.00]
0x25E4 Alarm Level F003 1 R/W 2 [1.0 , 110.0] %
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Unidad Direccional de Fases Grupo 1 - Phase Directional 1 Settings
0x25FA Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x25FB MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg


0x25FD Direction F012 1 R/W 1 0=REVERSE
1=FORWARD
0x25FE Block Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=PERMISSION
1=BLOCK
0x25FF Pol V Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
1=ENABLED
0x2602 Voltage Memory Time F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,00 , 3,00] s
1=ENABLED
0x2616 MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg
0x2618 Direction F012 1 R/W 1 0=REVERSE
1=FORWARD
0x2619 Block Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=PERMISSION
1=BLOCK
0x261A Pol V Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
1=ENABLED
0x261D Voltage Memory Time F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,00 , 3,00] s
1=ENABLED
0x2631 MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg
1=FORWARD
1=BLOCK
0x2635 Pol V Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
1=ENABLED
0x2638 Voltage Memory Time F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,00 , 3,00] s
0x264A Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Unidad Direccional de Neutro Grupo 1 - Neutral Directional 1 Settings
0x264B Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x264C MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg
0x264E Direction F012 1 R/W 1 0=REVERSE
1=FORWARD
0x264F Polarization F012 1 R/W 1 0=VO
1=IP
2=VO + IP
3=VO*IP
1=BLOCK
1=ENABLED


1=ENABLED
0x2668 MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg
0x266A Direction F012 1 R/W 1 0=REVERSE
1=FORWARD
0x266B Polarization F012 1 R/W 1 0=VO
1=IP
2=VO + IP
3=VO*IP
0x266C Block Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=PERMISSION
1=BLOCK
0x266D Pol V Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2684 MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg
1=FORWARD
0x2687 Polarization F012 1 R/W 1 0=VO
1=IP
2=VO + IP
3=VO*IP
1=BLOCK
0x268B Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x269E Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Unidad Direccional de Tierra Grupo 1 - Ground Directional 1 Settings
0x269F Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x26A0 MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg
0x26A2 Direction F012 1 R/W 1 0=REVERSE
1=FORWARD
0x26A3 Polarization F012 1 R/W 1 0=VO
1=IP
2=VO + IP
3=VO*IP
0x26A4 Block Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=PERMISSION
1=BLOCK
0x26A5 Pol V Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
1=ENABLED
0x26BA Confirmation address W 1


0x26BB Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x26BC MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg
0x26BE Direction F012 1 R/W 1 0=REVERSE
1=FORWARD
0x26BF Polarization F012 1 R/W 1 0=VO
1=IP
2=VO + IP
3=VO*IP
0x26C0 Block Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=PERMISSION
1=BLOCK
0x26C1 Pol V Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x26D8 MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg
0x26DA Direction F012 1 R/W 1 0=REVERSE
1=FORWARD
0x26DB Polarization F012 1 R/W 1 0=VO
1=IP
2=VO + IP
3=VO*IP
0x26DC Block Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=PERMISSION
1=BLOCK
0x26DD Pol V Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
0x26DF Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Fallo Interruptor - Breaker Failure Settings
1=ENABLED
0x26F4 Supervision Pickup F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x26F6 Hiset Pickup F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x26F8 Lowset Pickup F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x26FA Internal Arc Pickup F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x26FC Internal Arc Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x26FE Supervision Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2700 HiSet Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2702 LowSet Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2704 2nd Step Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2706 No Current Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Fallo Fusible - Fuse Failure Settings
1=ENABLED


1=ENABLED
Ajustes Sincronismo - Synchrocheck Settings
1=ENABLED
0x2732 Dead Bus Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 300.00] V
0x2734 Live Bus Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 300.00] V
0x2736 Dead Line Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 300.00] V
0x2738 Live Line Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 300.00] V
0x273A Max Volt Difference F003 1 R/W 2 [2.00 , 300.00] V
0x273C Max Angle Difference F003 1 R/W 2 [2.0 , 80.0] Deg
0x273E Max Freq Difference F003 1 R/W 2 [10 , 5000] mHz
0x2740 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0.01 , 600.00] s
0x2742 DL-DB Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2743 LL-DB Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2744 DL-LB Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Reenganchador - Recloser Settings
1=ENABLED
0x2764 Max Number Shots F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 4]
0x2765 Dead Time 1 F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2767 Dead Time 2 F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2769 Dead Time 3 F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x276B Dead Time 4 F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x276D Reclaim Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x276F Cond. Permission F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2770 Hold Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2772 Reset Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Sobretensión de Neutro Nivel Alto Grupo 1 - Neutral OV High 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x278D Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x278F Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED


1=ENABLED
0x27A8 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x27AA Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x27AC Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x27C3 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x27C5 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x27C7 Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
0x27DC Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Sobretensión de Neutro Nivel Bajo Grupo 1 - Neutral OV Low 1 Settings
0x27DD Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x27DE Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x27E2 Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x27F9 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x27FB Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x27FD Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x27FF Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2816 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x281A Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x282D Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Subtensión Auxiliar Grupo 1 - Auxiliary UV 1 Settings
0x282E Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x282F Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
1=INVERSE TIME
0x2832 Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s


1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x284B Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=DEFINITE TIME
1=INVERSE TIME
0x284C Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
1=INVERSE TIME
0x2866 Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Sobretensión de Fases Grupo 1 - Phase OV 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x287D Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x287F Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2883 Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=ANY PHASE
1=TWO PHASES
2=ALL PHASES
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x289B Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x289D Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x289F Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=ANY PHASE
1=TWO PHASES
2=ALL PHASES
1=ENABLED
0x28B3 Confirmation address W 1
0x28B4 Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED


0x28B5 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x28B7 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x28BB Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=ANY PHASE
1=TWO PHASES
2=ALL PHASES
0x28BC Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x28CF Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Sobretensión Auxiliar Grupo 1 - Auxiliary OV 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x28D1 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x28D3 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x28D5 Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x28D7 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x28EA Confirmation address W 1
0x28EB Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x28EC Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [3 , 300] V
0x28EE Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x28F0 Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x28F2 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2909 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Secuencia Negativa Grupo 1 - Negative Sequence TOC 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv


10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
1=LINEAR
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x293D Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.05 , 160.00] A
0x293F Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=IEEE Ext Inv
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Secuencia Negativa Grupo 2 - Negative Sequence TOC 2 Settings(cont.)
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
1=LINEAR
1=ENABLED


1=ENABLED
0x295A Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=IEEE Ext Inv
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x295B TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x295D Reset F012 1 R/W 1 0=INSTANTANEOUS
1=LINEAR
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Sobrefrecuencia Grupo 1 - Overfrequency 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x2973 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [20.00 , 65.00] Hz
0x2975 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2979 Minimum Voltage F003 1 R/W 2 [10 , 300] V
0x297B Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x298F Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2990 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [20.00 , 65.00] Hz
0x2992 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2996 Minimum Voltage F003 1 R/W 2 [10 , 300] V


1=ENABLED
0x29AB Confirmation address W 1
0x29AC Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x29AD Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [20.00 , 65.00] Hz
0x29AF Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x29B3 Minimum Voltage F003 1 R/W 2 [10 , 300] V
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Subfrecuencia Grupo 1 - Underfrequency 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x29CA Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [20.00 , 65.00] Hz
0x29CC Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x29CE Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x29D0 Minimum Voltage F003 1 R/W 2 [10 , 300] V
0x29D2 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x29E7 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [20.00 , 65.00] Hz
0x29EB Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x29ED Minimum Voltage F003 1 R/W 2 [10 , 300] V
0x29EF Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2A04 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [20.00 , 65.00] Hz
0x2A06 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2A08 Reset Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2A0A Minimum Voltage F003 1 R/W 2 [10 , 300] V
0x2A0C Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2A1F Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Oscilografía - Oscillography Settings
0x2A7C Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2A7D Trigger Position F004 1 R/W 1 [5 , 95] %
0x2A7E Samples/Cycle F012 1 R/W 1 0=64
1=32
2=16


3=8
4=4
0x2A7F Max. Number Osc. F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 20]
0x2A80 Automatic Overwrite F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Localizador de Faltas - Fault Report Settings
1=ENABLED
0x2A94 Pos Seq Module F003 1 R/W 2 [0.01 , 250.00] Ohm
0x2A96 Pos Seq Angle F003 1 R/W 2 [25 , 90] Deg
0x2A98 Zero Seq Module F003 1 R/W 2 [0.01 , 750.00] Ohm
0x2A9A Zero Seq Angle F003 1 R/W 2 [25 , 90] Deg
0x2A9C Line Length F003 1 R/W 2 [0.0 , 2000.0]
0x2A9E Show Fault On HMI F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2A9F Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2AA0 CT Direction F012 1000 R/W 1 0=REVERSE
1=FORWARD
0x2AB1 Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes de Agrupamiento de Funciones - Setting Groups Settings
0x2AB2 Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2AB3 Active Group F012 1 R/W 1 0=GROUP 1
1=GROUP 2
2=GROUP 3
0x2AB4 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2AC7 Confirmation address W 1
Textos Canales Digitales - Osc digital channels text
0x2AC8 Channel 1 Txt F009 1 R/W 16
0x2AD8 Channel 2 Txt F009 1 R/W 16
Textos Canales Digitales - Osc digital channels text(cont.)
0x2AE8 Channel 3 Txt F009 1 R/W 16
0x2AF8 Channel 4 Txt F009 1 R/W 16
0x2B08 Channel 5 Txt F009 1 R/W 16
0x2BA8 Channel 15 Txt F009 1 R/W 16
0x2BB8 Channel 16 Txt F009 1 R/W 16


Ajustes Conductor Roto Grupo 1 - Broken conductor 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x2C09 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [20.0 , 100.0] %
0x2C0B Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2C0D Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2C0E Operation Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 1.000] A
1=ENABLED
0x2C22 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [20.0 , 100.0] %
0x2C24 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
0x2C27 Operation Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 1.000] A
0x2C3A Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2C3B Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [20.0 , 100.0] %
0x2C3D Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2C3F Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2C40 Operation Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 1.000] A
Ajustes Ethernet 1 (or “A”)- ETHERNET 1 (or “A”) Settings
0x2C53 IP Address Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2C57 Netmask Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2C5A Netmask Oct4 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2C5B Gateway IP Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2C5C Gateway IP Oct2 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2C5D Gateway IP Oct3 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2C5E Gateway IP Oct4 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
Ajustes Ethernet 2 (or “B”) - ETHERNET 2 (or “B”) Settings
0x2C8A IP Address Oct4 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2C8B Netmask Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2C8C Netmask Oct2 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2C8D Netmask Oct3 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]


0x2C8E Netmask Oct4 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2C8F Gateway IP Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2C90 Gateway IP Oct2 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CBA Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes DNP 3.0 Esclavo 1 - DNP 3.0 Slave 1 Settings
0x2CBB Physical Port F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=COM1
2=COM2
3=NETWORK
0x2CBC Address F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65534]
0x2CBE IP Addr Client1 Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CBF IP Addr Client1 Oct2 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CC0 IP Addr Client1 Oct3 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CCA IP Addr Client4 Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CCB IP Addr Client4 Oct2 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CCC IP Addr Client4 Oct3 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CCD IP Addr Client4 Oct4 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CCE IP Addr Client5 Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CCF IP Addr Client5 Oct2 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CD0 IP Addr Client5 Oct3 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CD1 IP Addr Client5 Oct4 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CD2 TCP/UDP Port F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2CD4 Unsol Resp Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2CD5 Unsol Resp TimeOut F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60] s
0x2CD7 Unsol Resp Max Ret F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2CD8 Unsol Resp Dest Adr F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65519]
0x2CDA Current Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
Ajustes DNP 3.0 Esclavo 1 - DNP 3.0 Slave 1 Settings(cont.)
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2CDB Voltage Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001


1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2CDC Power Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2CDD Energy Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2CDE Other Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2CDF Current Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2CE1 Voltage Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2CE3 Power Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2CE5 Energy Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2CE7 Other Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2CE9 Msg Fragment Size F005 1 R/W 2 [30 , 2048]
0x2CEB Binary Input Block 1 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48


4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
8=CTL EVENTS 113-128
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
0x2CEC Binary Input Block 2 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
0x2CED Binary Input Block 3 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16


16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
0x2CEE Binary Input Block 4 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
0x2CEF Binary Input Block 5 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
0x2CF0 Binary Input Block 6 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112


9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32


1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
Ajustes DNP3.0 Esclavo 1 - DNP 3.0 Slave 2 Settings
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
0x2CF5 Default Analog Map F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2CF6 Analog Input Point 0 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2CFA Analog Input Point 4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2CFB Analog Input Point 5 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2CFC Analog Input Point 6 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2CFD Analog Input Point 7 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2CFE Analog Input Point 8 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]


0x2CFF Analog Input Point 9 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2D00 Analog Input Point 10 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2D0A Analog Input Point 20 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2D0B Analog Input Point 21 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2D0C Analog Input Point 22 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2D0D Analog Input Point 23 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2D0E Analog Input Point 24 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2D0F Analog Input Point 25 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2D1C Confirmation address W 1
0x2D1D Physical Port F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=COM1
2=COM2
3=NETWORK
Ajustes DNP3.0 Esclavo 2 - DNP 3.0 Slave 2 Settings

0x2D1E Address F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65534]
0x2D20 IP Addr Client1 Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D2A IP Addr Client3 Oct3 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D2B IP Addr Client3 Oct4 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D2C IP Addr Client4 Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D2D IP Addr Client4 Oct2 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D2E IP Addr Client4 Oct3 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D2F IP Addr Client4 Oct4 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]


0x2D34 TCP/UDP Port F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2D36 Unsol Resp Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2D37 Unsol Resp TimeOut F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60] s
0x2D39 Unsol Resp Max Ret F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D3A Unsol Resp Dest Adr F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65519]
0x2D3C Current Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2D3D Voltage Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2D3E Power Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2D3F Energy Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
Ajustes DNP3.0 Esclavo 2 - DNP 3.0 Slave 2 Settings(cont.)
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2D40 Other Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001


1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2D41 Current Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2D43 Voltage Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2D45 Power Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2D47 Energy Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2D49 Other Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2D4B Msg Fragment Size F005 1 R/W 2 [30 , 2048]
0x2D4D Binary Input Block 1 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
Ajustes DNP3.0 Esclavo 2 - DNP 3.0 Slave 2 (cont.)
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
0x2D4E Binary Input Block 2 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
0x2D4F Binary Input Block 3 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48


4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
0x2D50 Binary Input Block 4 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16


16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112


9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32


0x2D57 Default Analog Map F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2D7E Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes DNP 3.0 Esclavo 3 - DNP 3.0 Slave 3
0x2D7F Physical Port F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=COM1
2=COM2
3=NETWORK
0x2D80 Address F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65534]


0x2D8A IP Addr Client3 Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D8B IP Addr Client3 Oct2 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D8C IP Addr Client3 Oct3 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D8D IP Addr Client3 Oct4 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D8E IP Addr Client4 Oct1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D8F IP Addr Client4 Oct2 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D96 TCP/UDP Port F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2D98 Unsol Resp Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2D99 Unsol Resp TimeOut F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 60] s
0x2D9B Unsol Resp Max Ret F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x2D9C Unsol Resp Dest Adr F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65519]
0x2D9E Current Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2D9F Voltage Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
Ajustes DNP 3.0 Esclavo 3 - DNP 3.0 Slave 3(cont.)
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2DA0 Power Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10


7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2DA1 Energy Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2DA2 Other Scale Factor F012 1 R/W 1 0=0.00001
1=0.0001
2=0.001
3=0.01
4=0.1
5=1
6=10
7=100
8=1000
9=10000
0x2DA3 Current Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2DA5 Voltage Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2DA7 Power Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2DA9 Energy Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2DAB Other Deadband F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2DAD Msg Fragment Size F005 1 R/W 2 [30 , 2048]
0x2DAF Binary Input Block 1 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
Ajustes DNP 3.0 Esclavo 3 - DNP 3.0 Slave 3 (cont.)

7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32


17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
0x2DB0 Binary Input Block 2 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NOT USED
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112


9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32


1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16


11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
1=CTL EVENTS 1-16
2=CTL EVENTS 17-32
3=CTL EVENTS 33-48
4=CTL EVENTS 49-64
5=CTL EVENTS 65-80
6=CTL EVENTS 81-96
7=CTL EVENTS 97-112
9=SWITCHGEAR 1-8
10=SWITCHGEAR 9-16
11=BOARD F 1-16
12=BOARD F 17-32
13=BOARD G 1-16
14=BOARD G 17-32
15=BOARD H 1-16
16=BOARD H 17-32
17=BOARD J 1-16
18=BOARD J 17-32
0x2DB9 Default Analog Map F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2DBA Analog Input Point 0 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DBB Analog Input Point 1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DBC Analog Input Point 2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DBD Analog Input Point 3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DBE Analog Input Point 4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DBF Analog Input Point 5 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DC0 Analog Input Point 6 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DCA Analog Input Point 16 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DCB Analog Input Point 17 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DCC Analog Input Point 18 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]


0x2DCD Analog Input Point 19 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DCE Analog Input Point 20 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DCF Analog Input Point 21 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DD0 Analog Input Point 22 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x2DE0 Confirmation address W 1
Miscelaneous Settings
0x2DE2 Relay Out Of Service F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2DE3 Local/Remote Blocked F012 1000 R/W 1 0=OFF
1=ON
0x2DE4 Active Language F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 1]
0x2DF5 Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Unidad Sobreintensidad Instantánea de Tierra Aislada Grupo 1 - Isolated Ground IOC 1 Settings
0x2DF6 Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2DF7 Vh Level F003 1 R/W 2 [2 , 70] V
0x2DF9 Il LEVEL F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A
0x2DFB Vl LEVEL F003 1 R/W 2 [2 , 70] V
0x2DFD Ih LEVEL F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A
0x2DFF Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2E01 Time to inst F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2E18 Vh Level F003 1 R/W 2 [2 , 70] V
0x2E1A Il LEVEL F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A
0x2E1C Vl LEVEL F003 1 R/W 2 [2 , 70] V
0x2E1E Ih LEVEL F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A
0x2E20 Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2E39 Vh Level F003 1 R/W 2 [2 , 70] V
0x2E3B Il LEVEL F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A


0x2E3D Vl LEVEL F003 1 R/W 2 [2 , 70] V
0x2E3F Ih LEVEL F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A
0x2E41 Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Unidad Direccional de Tierra Sensible Grupo 1 - Sensitive Ground Directional 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x2E5A MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg
0x2E5C Direction F012 1 R/W 1 0=REVERSE
1=FORWARD
Ajustes Unidad Direccional de Tierra Sensible Grupo 1 - Sensitive Ground Directional 1 Settings(cont.)
0x2E5D Block Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=PERMISSION
1=BLOCK
0x2E5E Pol V Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2E75 MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg
0x2E77 Direction F012 1 R/W 1 0=REVERSE
1=FORWARD
0x2E78 Block Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=PERMISSION
1=BLOCK
0x2E79 Pol V Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
0x2E7B Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2E8E Confirmation address W 1
0x2E8F Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2E90 MTA F003 1 R/W 2 [-90 , 90] Deg
0x2E92 Direction F012 1 R/W 1 0=REVERSE
1=FORWARD
0x2E93 Block Logic F012 1 R/W 1 0=PERMISSION
1=BLOCK
0x2E94 Pol V Threshold F003 1 R/W 2 [0 , 300] V
1=ENABLED
0x2EA9 Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Unidad de Potencia Máxima Directa Grupo 1 - Forward Power 1 Settings
0x2EAA Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2EAB Blk Time After Close F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2EAD Stage 1 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 10000.00] MW
0x2EAF Stage 1 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s


0x2EB1 Stage 2 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 10000.00] MW
0x2EB3 Stage 2 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2EB5 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2EC8 Confirmation address W 1
0x2EC9 Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2ECA Blk Time After Close F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2ECC Stage 1 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 10000.00] MW
0x2ECE Stage 1 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2ED0 Stage 2 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 10000.00] MW
0x2ED2 Stage 2 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2ED4 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2EE7 Confirmation address W 1
0x2EE8 Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2EE9 Blk Time After Close F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2EEB Stage 1 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 10000.00] MW
0x2EED Stage 1 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2EEF Stage 2 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 10000.00] MW
0x2EF1 Stage 2 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x2EF3 Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Demanda - Demand Settings
0x2F07 Demand Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2F08 CRNT Demand Method F012 1 R/W 1 0=THERMAL EXPONENTIAL
1=BLOCK INTERVAL
2=ROLLING DEMAND
0x2F09 POWER Demand Method F012 1 R/W 1 0=THERMAL EXPONENTIAL
1=BLOCK INTERVAL
2=ROLLING DEMAND
0x2F0A Demand Interval F012 1 R/W 1 0=5 Minutes
1=10 Minutes
2=15 Minutes
3=20 Minutes
4=30 Minutes
5=60 Minutes
0x2F0B Trigger Enabled F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2F0C Snapshot Events F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x2F1F Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Protocolo IEC 870-5-104 Settings
1=ENABLED


0x2F21 TCP Port F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2F23 Common Addr of ASDU F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x2F25 Cyclic Meter Period F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 3600]
0x2F27 Synchronization Event F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 3600]
0x2F5A Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto Grupo 1 - Phase TOC Low 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x32AA TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x32AC Reset F012 1 R/W 1 0=INSTANTANEOUS
1=LINEAR
0x32AD Voltage Restraint F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x32C3 Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv


3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto Grupo 2 - Phase TOC Low 2 Settings(cont.)
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t
16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
1=LINEAR
0x32CA Voltage Restraint F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x32DE Confirmation address W 1
0x32DF Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x32E0 Input F012 1 R/W 1 0=PHASOR(DFT)
1=RMS
0x32E3 Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=IEEE Ext Inv
1=IEEE Very Inv
2=IEEE Mod Inv
3=IEC Curve A
4=IEC Curve B
5=IEC Curve C
6=IEC Long-Time Inv
8=IAC Ext Inv
9=IAC Very Inv
10=IAC Mod Inv
11=ANSI Ext Inv
12=ANSI Very Inv
13=ANSI Norm Inv
14=ANSI Mod Inv
15=I2t


16=Definite Time
17=Rectifier Curve
18=User Curve A
19=User Curve B
20=User Curve C
21=User Curve D
0x32E4 TD Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=LINEAR
0x32E7 Voltage Restraint F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto Grupo 3 - Phase TOC Low 3 Settings(cont.)
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x32FB Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Aparamenta (16 elementos) - Switchgear Settings (16 items)
0x32FC CONTACTS TYPE_01 F012 1 R/W 1 0=52a + 52b
1=52a
2=52b
3=NONE
0x32FD CONTACTS TYPE_02 F012 1 R/W 1 0=52a + 52b
1=52a
2=52b
3=NONE
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x330B CONTACTS TYPE_16 F012 1 R/W 1 0=52a + 52b
1=52a
2=52b
3=NONE
0x330C FAIL TO OPEN 01 t F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 30000] ms
0x330D FAIL TO OPEN 02 t F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 30000] ms
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x331B FAIL TO OPEN 16 t F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 30000] ms
0x331C FAIL TO CLOSE 01 t F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 30000] ms
0x331D FAIL TO CLOSE 02 t F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 30000] ms
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x332B FAIL TO CLOSE 16 t F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 30000] ms
0x332C Snapshot Events SWGR 1 F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x332D Snapshot Events SWGR 2 F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x333B Snapshot Events SWGR 16 F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Interruptor - Breaker Settings
0x334D Number of Switchgear F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 16]
0x334E Maximum KI2t F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 9999.99] (KA)2 s
0x3350 KI2t Integ. Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0.03 , 0.25] s
0x3352 Maximum Openings F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 9999]


0x3353 Max.Openings 1 hour F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 60]
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Contadores Interruptor - Breaker Maintenance Settings
0x3368 KI2t BKR Ph A Cnt F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 9999.99] (KA)2 s
0x336A KI2t BKR Ph B Cnt F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 9999.99] (KA)2 s
0x336C KI2t BKR Ph C Cnt F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 9999.99] (KA)2 s
0x336E BKR Openings Cnt F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 9999]
0x336F BKR Closings Cnt F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 9999]
Ajustes Mapa Usuario Modbus - Modbus User Map Settings
0x3384 Address 00 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 65535]
0x3385 Address 01 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 65535]
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x3483 Address 255 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 65535]
Ajustes Curva Usuario A - Flex Curves A Settings
0x3495 Time 0.00xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x349B Time 0.15xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x349D Time 0.20xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x349F Time 0.25xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34A1 Time 0.30xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34AB Time 0.50xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34AD Time 0.52xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34AF Time 0.54xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34B1 Time 0.56xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34BB Time 0.66xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34BD Time 0.68xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34BF Time 0.70xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34C1 Time 0.72xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34CB Time 0.82xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34CD Time 0.84xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34CF Time 0.86xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34D1 Time 0.88xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s


0x34DB Time 0.94xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34DD Time 0.95xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34DF Time 0.96xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34E1 Time 0.97xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34E5 Time 1.03xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34EB Time 1.20xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34ED Time 1.30xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34EF Time 1.40xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
Ajustes Curva Usuario A - Flex Curves A Settings(cont.)
0x34F1 Time 1.50xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34FB Time 2.00xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34FD Time 2.10xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x34FF Time 2.20xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x3501 Time 2.30xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x350B Time 2.80xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x350D Time 2.90xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x350F Time 3.00xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s


Ajustes Curva Usuario A - Flex Curves A Settings(cont.)
Ajustes Curva Usuario B - Flex Curves B Settings
0x359B Time 0.05xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s


Ajustes Curva Usuario B - Flex Curves B Settings(cont.)
0x35EB Time 1.05xPKP [OP] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s


Ajustes Curva Usuario B - Flex Curves B Settings(cont.)


Ajustes Curva Usuario C - Flex Curves C
Ajustes Curva Usuario C - Flex Curves C(cont.)


0x36EB Time 0.98xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s


Ajustes Curva Usuario D - Flex Curves D


0x37EB Time 0.96xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x37ED Time 0.97xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x37EF Time 0.98xPKP [RST] F003 1 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
Ajustes Curva Usuario D - Flex Curves D(cont.)


Ajustes Curva Usuario D - Flex Curves D(cont.)


Ajustes Protocolo Modbus - MODBUS Settings
0x38A5 Modbus Address COM1 F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 255]
0x38A6 Modbus Address COM2 F004 1 R/W 1 [1 , 255]
0x38A7 Modbus Port Number F005 1 R/W 2 [0 , 65535]
0x38BC Confirmation address W 1
Ajustes Puertos Serie - SERIAL PORTS Settings
0x38BD COM1 Baud Rate F012 1 R/W 1 0=300
1=600
2=1200
3=2400
4=4800
5=9600
6=19200
7=38400
8=57600
9=115200
0x38BE COM2 Baud Rate F012 1 R/W 1 0=300
1=600
2=1200
3=2400
4=4800
5=9600
6=19200
7=38400
8=57600
9=115200
0x38BF COM1 Parity F012 1000 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=ODD
2=EVEN
0x38C0 COM2 Parity F012 1000 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=ODD
2=EVEN
Ajustes Registrador de Datos - Data Logger Settings
1=ENABLED


0x38D5 Data Logger Rate F012 1 R/W 1 0=1 s
1=5 Minutes
2=10 Minutes
3=15 Minutes
4=20 Minutes
5=30 Minutes
6=60 Minutes
0x38D6 Data Logger Chnl 1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x38DA Data Logger Chnl 5 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x38DB Data Logger Chnl 6 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x38DC Data Logger Chnl 7 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x38DD Data Logger Chnl 8 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x38DE Data Logger Chnl 9 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x38DF Data Logger Chnl 10 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
0x38E0 Data Logger Chnl 11 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 32767]
Ajustes unidad direccional de potencia Grupo 1 - Directional Power 1 Settings
0x38FA Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x38FB Blk Time After Close F003 1 R/W 2 [0,00 , 900,00] s
0x38FD Dir Power Angle 1 F003 1 R/W 2 [0,00 , 359,99] Deg
0x38FF Stage 1 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [-10000,00 , 10000,00] MW
0x3901 Stage 1 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0,00 , 900,00] s
0x3903 Dir Power Angle 2 F003 1 R/W 2 [0,00 , 359,99] Deg
0x3905 Stage 2 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [-10000,00 , 10000,00] MW
0x3907 Stage 2 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0,00 , 900,00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x391E Blk Time After Close F003 1 R/W 2 [0,00 , 900,00] s
0x3922 Stage 1 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [-10000,00 , 10000,00] MW
0x3924 Stage 1 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0,00 , 900,00] s
0x3928 Stage 2 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [-10000,00 , 10000,00] MW
0x392A Stage 2 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0,00 , 900,00] s
1=ENABLED


1=ENABLED
0x3941 Blk Time After Close F003 1 R/W 2 [0,00 , 900,00] s
0x3945 Stage 1 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [-10000,00 , 10000,00] MW
0x3947 Stage 1 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0,00 , 900,00] s
0x394B Stage 2 Tap F003 1 R/W 2 [-10000,00 , 10000,00] MW
0x394D Stage 2 Time F003 1 R/W 2 [0,00 , 900,00] s
1=ENABLED
Ajustes unidad Rotor Bloqueado Grupo 1 - Locked Rotor 1 Settings
Locked Rotor 1
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x3965 Full Load Current F003 1 R/W 2 [0.10 , 10.00] KA
0x3967 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [1.01 , 109.00]
0x3969 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
Locked Rotor 2
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x397A Full Load Current F003 1 R/W 2 [0.10 , 10.00] KA
0x397C Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [1.01 , 109.00]
0x397E Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=ENABLED
Locked Rotor 3
1=ENABLED
1=RMS
0x398F Full Load Current F003 1 R/W 2 [0.10 , 10.00] KA
0x3991 Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [1.01 , 109.00]
0x3993 Trip Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s


1=ENABLED
Ajustes Comunicaciones Remotas - Remote Communications Settings
0x3A76 Remote Comms F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=GSSE
2=GOOSE
0x3A77 F650 ID F009 1 R/W 33
0x3A98 Hold Time F005 1 R/W 2 [1000 , 60000] ms
0x3A9A Events Remote Out F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Entradas Remotas (32 elementos) - Remote Inputs Settings (32 items) [Only Configurable for GSSE]
0x3A9B Remote Device 1 F009 1 R/W 33
0x3ABC Bit Pair 1 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=DNA-1
2=DNA-2
--------
32=DNA-32
33=UserSt-1
34=UserSt-2
--------
96=UserSt-64
0x3ABD Default Value 1 F012 1 R/W 1 0=OFF
1=ON
2=Latest OFF
3=Latest ON
Ajustes Entradas Remotas (32 elementos) - Remote Inputs Settings (32 items) [Only Configurable for GSSE](cont.)
0x3ABE Remote Device 2 F009 1 R/W 33
0x3ADF Bit Pair 2 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=DNA-1
2=DNA-2
--------
32=DNA-32
33=UserSt-1
34=UserSt-2
--------
96=UserSt-64
0x3AE0 Default Value 2 F012 1 R/W 1 0=OFF
1=ON
2=Latest OFF
3=Latest ON
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
0x3ED8 Remote Device 32 F009 1 R/W 33
0x3EF9 Bit Pair 32 F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=DNA-1
2=DNA-2
--------
32=DNA-32
33=UserSt-1


34=UserSt-2
--------
96=UserSt-64
0x3EFA Default Value 32 F012 1 R/W 1 0=OFF
1=ON
2=Latest OFF
3=Latest ON
0x3EFB Events Remote Inp F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x3EFC Destination MAC Data1 F004 1000 R/W 1
0x3EFD Destination MAC Data2 F004 1000 R/W 1
0x3EFE Destination MAC Data3 F004 1000 R/W 1
0x3EFF GSSE RemDevice01 MAC Data1 F004 1000 R/W 1
0x3F00 GSSE RemDevice01 MAC Data2 F004 1000 R/W 1
0x3F0A GSSE RemDevice04 MAC Data3 F004 1000 R/W 1
0x3F0B GSSE RemDevice05 MAC Data1 F004 1000 R/W 1
0x3F0C GSSE RemDevice05 MAC Data2 F004 1000 R/W 1
0x3F0D GSSE RemDevice05 MAC Data3 F004 1000 R/W 1
0x3F0E GSSE RemDevice06 MAC Data1 F004 1000 R/W 1
0x3F0F GSSE RemDevice06 MAC Data2 F004 1000 R/W 1


0x3F47 GSSE PORT F012 1000 R/W 1 0=PORT A
1=PORT B
2=BOTH
0x3F5B Confirmation address
Ajustes Sincronizacion SNTP - SNTP synchronization Settings (Do not apply to C650 models)
SNTP
0x3F5C Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=UNICAST
2=BROADCAST
3=ANYCAST
0x3F5D UDP Port F005 1 R/W 2 [1 , 65535]
0x3F5F Server IP Oct 1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x3F60 Server IP Oct 2 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]


0x3F66 Confirmation address
0x3F67 Server2 UDP Port F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x3F69 Server2 IP Oct 1 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x3F6A Server2 IP Oct 2 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x3F6B Server2 IP Oct 3 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x3F6C Server2 IP Oct 4 F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
Contador de Pulsos-Pulse Counters
0x3F88 PulseCntr Enabled 1 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x3F89 PulseCntr Name 1 F009 1,000 R/W 16
0x3F99 PulseCntr Factor 1 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65000.000]
0x3F9B PulseCntr Overflow 1 F005 1,000 R/W 2 [0 , 1000000]
0x3F9D PulseCntr Board Origin 1 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=F
1=G
2=H
3=J
0x3F9E PulseCntr Input Origin 1 F004 1,000 R/W 1 [1 , 32]
0x3F9F PulseCntr Enabled 2 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x3FA0 PulseCntr Name 2 F009 1,000 R/W 16
0x3FB0 PulseCntr Factor 2 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65000.000]
0x3FB2 PulseCntr Overflow 2 F005 1,000 R/W 2 [0 , 1000000]
0x3FB4 PulseCntr Board Origin 2 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=F
1=G
2=H
3=J
0x3FB5 PulseCntr Input Origin 2 F004 1,000 R/W 1 [1 , 32]
0x3FB6 PulseCntr Enabled 3 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x3FB7 PulseCntr Name 3 F009 1,000 R/W 16
0x3FC7 PulseCntr Factor 3 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65000.000]
0x3FC9 PulseCntr Overflow 3 F005 1,000 R/W 2 [0 , 1000000]
0x3FCB PulseCntr Board Origin 3 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=F
1=G
2=H
3=J
0x3FCC PulseCntr Input Origin 3 F004 1,000 R/W 1 [1 , 32]
0x3FCD PulseCntr Enabled 4 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x3FCE PulseCntr Name 4 F009 1,000 R/W 16
0x3FDE PulseCntr Factor 4 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65000.000]


0x3FE0 PulseCntr Overflow 4 F005 1,000 R/W 2 [0 , 1000000]
0x3FE2 PulseCntr Board Origin 4 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=F
1=G
2=H
3=J
0x3FE3 PulseCntr Input Origin 4 F004 1,000 R/W 1 [1 , 32]
0x3FE4 PulseCntr Enabled 5 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Contador de Pulsos-Pulse Counters(cont.)
0x3FE5 PulseCntr Name 5 F009 1,000 R/W 16
0x3FF5 PulseCntr Factor 5 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65000.000]
0x3FF7 PulseCntr Overflow 5 F005 1,000 R/W 2 [0 , 1000000]
0x3FF9 PulseCntr Board Origin 5 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=F
1=G
2=H
3=J
0x3FFA PulseCntr Input Origin 5 F004 1,000 R/W 1 [1 , 32]
0x3FFB PulseCntr Enabled 6 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x3FFC PulseCntr Name 6 F009 1,000 R/W 16
0x400C PulseCntr Factor 6 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65000.000]
0x400E PulseCntr Overflow 6 F005 1,000 R/W 2 [0 , 1000000]
0x4010 PulseCntr Board Origin 6 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=F
1=G
2=H
3=J
0x4011 PulseCntr Input Origin 6 F004 1,000 R/W 1 [1 , 32]
0x4012 PulseCntr Enabled 7 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x4013 PulseCntr Name 7 F009 1,000 R/W 16
0x4023 PulseCntr Factor 7 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65000.000]
0x4025 PulseCntr Overflow 7 F005 1,000 R/W 2 [0 , 1000000]
0x4027 PulseCntr Board Origin 7 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=F
1=G
2=H
3=J
0x4028 PulseCntr Input Origin 7 F004 1,000 R/W 1 [1 , 32]
0x4029 PulseCntr Enabled 8 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x402A PulseCntr Name 8 F009 1,000 R/W 16
0x403A PulseCntr Factor 8 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65000.000]
0x403C PulseCntr Overflow 8 F005 1,000 R/W 2 [0 , 1000000]


0x403E PulseCntr Board Origin 8 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=F
1=G
2=H
3=J
0x403F PulseCntr Input Origin 8 F004 1,000 R/W 1 [1 , 32]
Comparadores Analógicos-Analog comparators
0x4053 Analog Function F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x4054 Analog Snapshot Events F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x4055 Analog Input 01 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x4056 Analog Maximum 01 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x4058 Analog Minimum 01 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x405A Analog Delay 01 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x405C Analog Hysteresis 01 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x405E Analog Direction 01 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x405F Analog Input 02 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x4064 Analog Delay 02 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x4066 Analog Hysteresis 02 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x4068 Analog Direction 02 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x406A Analog Maximum 03 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x406C Analog Minimum 03 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x406E Analog Delay 03 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=IN
0x407A Analog Hysteresis 04 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x407C Analog Direction 04 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x407D Analog Input 05 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x407E Analog Maximum 05 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]


1=IN
Comparadores Analógicos-Analog comparators(cont.)
0x408A Analog Minimum 06 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x408C Analog Delay 06 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x408E Analog Hysteresis 06 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
1=IN
0x409A Analog Direction 07 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x409B Analog Input 08 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x409C Analog Maximum 08 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x409E Analog Minimum 08 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40A0 Analog Delay 08 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x40A2 Analog Hysteresis 08 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x40A4 Analog Direction 08 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x40A5 Analog Input 09 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x40A6 Analog Maximum 09 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40A8 Analog Minimum 09 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40AA Analog Delay 09 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x40AC Analog Hysteresis 09 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x40AE Analog Direction 09 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x40AF Analog Input 10 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x40B0 Analog Maximum 10 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40B2 Analog Minimum 10 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40B4 Analog Delay 10 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x40B6 Analog Hysteresis 10 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x40B8 Analog Direction 10 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x40B9 Analog Input 11 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x40BA Analog Maximum 11 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]


0x40BC Analog Minimum 11 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40BE Analog Delay 11 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x40C0 Analog Hysteresis 11 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x40C2 Analog Direction 11 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x40C3 Analog Input 12 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x40C4 Analog Maximum 12 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40C6 Analog Minimum 12 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40C8 Analog Delay 12 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x40CA Analog Hysteresis 12 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x40CC Analog Direction 12 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x40CD Analog Input 13 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x40CE Analog Maximum 13 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40D0 Analog Minimum 13 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40D2 Analog Delay 13 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x40D4 Analog Hysteresis 13 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x40D6 Analog Direction 13 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x40D7 Analog Input 14 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x40D8 Analog Maximum 14 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40DA Analog Minimum 14 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40DC Analog Delay 14 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x40DE Analog Hysteresis 14 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x40E0 Analog Direction 14 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x40E1 Analog Input 15 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x40E2 Analog Maximum 15 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40E4 Analog Minimum 15 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40E6 Analog Delay 15 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x40E8 Analog Hysteresis 15 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x40EA Analog Direction 15 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x40EB Analog Input 16 F004 1,000 R/W 1
0x40EC Analog Maximum 16 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40EE Analog Minimum 16 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40F0 Analog Delay 16 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x40F2 Analog Hysteresis 16 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x40F4 Analog Direction 16 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x40F5 Analog Input 17 F004 1,000 R/W 1


0x40F6 Analog Maximum 17 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40F8 Analog Minimum 17 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x40FA Analog Delay 17 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
0x40FC Analog Hysteresis 17 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x40FE Analog Direction 17 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
0x40FF Analog Input 18 F004 1,000 R/W 1
1=IN
0x410A Analog Maximum 19 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x410C Analog Minimum 19 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [-100000.000 , 100000.000]
0x410E Analog Delay 19 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 900.00] s
1=IN
0x411A Analog Hysteresis 20 F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.0 , 50.0]
0x411C Analog Direction 20 F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=OUT
1=IN
Ajustes Derivada de Frecuencia 1-Frequency Rate of Change 1 Settings
0x4130 Function F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x4131 Freq. Rate Trend F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=INCREASING
1=DECREASING
2=BI-DIRECTIONAL
0x4132 Freq. Rate Pickup F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.10 , 10.00] Hz/s
0x4134 Freq. Rate OV Supv F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 110.00] %
0x4136 Freq. Rate Min F003 1,000 R/W 2 [20.00 , 80.00] Hz
0x4138 Freq. Rate Max F003 1,000 R/W 2 [20.00 , 80.00] Hz
0x413A Freq. Rate Delay F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 60.00] s
0x413C Snapshot Events F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED


1=ENABLED
1=DECREASING
2=BI-DIRECTIONAL
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
1=DECREASING
2=BI-DIRECTIONAL
1=ENABLED
Inversión de carga 1-Load Encroachment 1
1=ENABLED
0x4191 Min. Voltage F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 300.00] V
0x4193 Reach F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.02 , 250.00] Ohm
0x4195 Angle F003 1,000 R/W 2 [5 , 50] Deg
0x4197 Pickup Delay F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x4199 Reset Delay F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x419B Snapshot Events F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x41AE Confirmation address W 1
0x41AF Function F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED


1=ENABLED
0x41B0 Min. Voltage F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 300.00] V
0x41B2 Reach F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.02 , 250.00] Ohm
0x41B4 Angle F003 1,000 R/W 2 [5 , 50] Deg
0x41B6 Pickup Delay F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x41B8 Reset Delay F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x41BA Snapshot Events F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x41CD Confirmation address W 1
0x41CE Function F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x41CF Min. Voltage F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.00 , 300.00] V
0x41D1 Reach F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.02 , 250.00] Ohm
0x41D3 Angle F003 1,000 R/W 2 [5 , 50] Deg
0x41D5 Pickup Delay F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x41D7 Reset Delay F003 1,000 R/W 2 [0.000 , 65.535] s
0x41D9 Snapshot Events F012 1,000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x41EC Confirmation address W 1
Max. Number of Starts
0x41ED Function F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x41EE Full Load Amps F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,5 , 10,0] A
0x41F0 Breaker Supervision F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x41F1 Min. Stop Time F003 1000 R/W 2 [0,0 , 900,0] s
0x41F3 Number of starts F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 10]
0x41F4 Time to restart F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 100] min
0x41F5 Reset counter F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x41F6 Snapshot Events F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajustes Protocolo PROCOME - PROCOME Protocol Communication Settings
0x420A COMM Port F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=COM 1
0x420B Slave Number F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 254]
32N1 High - wattmetric Ground Fault High Level Group 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x44A1 Voltage Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [2.00 , 70.00] V
0x44A3 Current Selection F012 1 R/W 1 0=IN
1=IG
0x44A4 OC Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A


0x44A6 OC Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
0x44A8 Power Pickup F003 1 R/W 2 [0.01 , 4.50] W
0x44AA MTA F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 360] Deg
0x44AB Power Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
0x44AD Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=DEFINITE TIME
1=INVERSE TIME
2=USER CURVE A
3=USER CURVE B
4=USER CURVE C
5=USER CURVE D
0x44AE Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.02 , 2.00] s
1=ENABLED
0x44BA Confirmation address W 1
0x44BB Function F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x44BC Voltage Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [2.00 , 70.00] V
0x44BE Current Selection F012 1 R/W 1 0=IN
1=IG
0x44BF OC Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A
0x44C1 OC Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
0x44C3 Power Pickup F003 1 R/W 2 [0.01 , 4.50] W
0x44C5 MTA F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 360] Deg
0x44C6 Power Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
0x44C8 Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=DEFINITE TIME
1=INVERSE TIME
32N2 High - wattmetric Ground Fault High Level Group 2 Settings(cont.)
2=USER CURVE A
3=USER CURVE B
4=USER CURVE C
5=USER CURVE D
0x44C9 Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.02 , 2.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x44D7 Voltage Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [2.00 , 70.00] V
0x44D9 Current Selection F012 1 R/W 1 0=IN
1=IG
0x44DA OC Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A
0x44DC OC Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
0x44DE Power Pickup F003 1 R/W 2 [0.01 , 4.50] W
0x44E0 MTA F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 360] Deg
0x44E1 Power Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
0x44E3 Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=DEFINITE TIME
1=INVERSE TIME
2=USER CURVE A


3=USER CURVE B
4=USER CURVE C
5=USER CURVE D
0x44E4 Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.02 , 2.00] s
1=ENABLED
32N1 Low - wattmetric Ground Fault Low Level Group 1 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x44F2 Voltage Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [2.00 , 70.00] V
0x44F4 Current Selection F012 1 R/W 1 0=IN
1=IG
0x44F5 OC Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A
0x44F7 OC Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
0x44F9 Power Pickup F003 1 R/W 2 [0.01 , 4.50] W
0x44FB MTA F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 360] Deg
0x44FC Power Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
0x44FE Curve F012 1 R/W 1 0=DEFINITE TIME
1=INVERSE TIME
2=USER CURVE A
3=USER CURVE B
4=USER CURVE C
5=USER CURVE D
0x44FF Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.02 , 2.00] s
1=ENABLED
1=ENABLED
0x450D Voltage Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [2.00 , 70.00] V
0x450F Current Selection F012 1 R/W 1 0=IN
1=IG
0x4510 OC Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A
0x4512 OC Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
0x4514 Power Pickup F003 1 R/W 2 [0.01 , 4.50] W
0x4516 MTA F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 360] Deg
0x4517 Power Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
1=INVERSE TIME
2=USER CURVE A
3=USER CURVE B
4=USER CURVE C
5=USER CURVE D
0x451A Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.02 , 2.00] s
1=ENABLED


1=ENABLED
0x4528 Voltage Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [2.00 , 70.00] V
0x452A Current Selection F012 1 R/W 1 0=IN
1=IG
0x452B OC Pickup Level F003 1 R/W 2 [0.005 , 0.400] A
0x452D OC Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
0x452F Power Pickup F003 1 R/W 2 [0.01 , 4.50] W
0x4531 MTA F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 360] Deg
0x4532 Power Pickup Delay F003 1 R/W 2 [0.00 , 600.00] s
1=INVERSE TIME
2=USER CURVE A
3=USER CURVE B
4=USER CURVE C
5=USER CURVE D
0x4535 Multiplier F003 1 R/W 2 [0.02 , 2.00] s
1=ENABLED
Ajustes IEC 870-5-103 - IEC 870-5-103 Settings
0x4542 COMM Port F012 1 R/W 1 0=NONE
1=COM 1
0x4543 Slave Number F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 254]
0x4544 Synchronization Timeout F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 1440] min
Ajustes de Fecha y Hora - Time Settings
0x454F LOC TIME OFFS. UTC F003 1 R/W 2 [-24.0 , 24.0]
0x4551 DAYLIG. SAVINGS TIME F012 1 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x4552 DST START MONTH F012 1 R/W 1 0=JAN
1=FEB
2=MAR
3=APR
4=MAY
5=JUN
6=JUL
7=AUG
8=SEP
9=OCT
10=NOV
11=DEC
0x4553 DST START WEEKDAY F012 1 R/W 1 0=Monday
1=Tuesday
2=Wednesday
3=Thursday
4=Friday
5=Saturday
6=Sunday
0x4554 DST START DAY INST F012 1 R/W 1 0=First


1=Second
2=Third
3=Fourth
4=Last
0x4555 DST START HOUR F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 23]
0x4556 DST STOP MONTH F012 1 R/W 1 0=JAN
1=FEB
2=MAR
3=APR
4=MAY
5=JUN
6=JUL
7=AUG
8=SEP
9=OCT
10=NOV
11=DEC
0x4557 DST STOP WEEKDAY F012 1 R/W 1 0=Monday
1=Tuesday
2=Wednesday
3=Thursday
4=Friday
5=Saturday
6=Sunday
0x4558 DST STOP DAY INST F012 1 R/W 1 0=First
1=Second
2=Third
3=Fourth
4=Last
Ajustes de Fecha y Hora - Time Settings (cont.)
0x4559 DST STOP HOUR F004 1 R/W 1 [0 , 23]
0x455A IRIG-B LOCAL TIME F012 1 R/W 1 0=OFF
1=ON
0x455B IRIGB Function F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x455C PTP IRIGB Priority F012 1000 R/W 1 0=PTP-1588
1=IRIG-B
Digital Counters
0x48B8 DigCnt 1 Function F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x48B9 DigCnt 1 Name F009 1000 R/W 16
0x48C9 DigCnt 1 Preset F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x48CB DigCnt 1 Compare F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x48CD DigCnt 2 Function F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x48CE DigCnt 2 Name F009 1000 R/W 16
0x48DE DigCnt 2 Preset F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x48E0 DigCnt 2 Compare F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x48E2 DigCnt 3 Function F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED


1=ENABLED
0x48E3 DigCnt 3 Name F009 1000 R/W 16
0x48F3 DigCnt 3 Preset F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x48F5 DigCnt 3 Compare F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x48F7 DigCnt 4 Function F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x48F8 DigCnt 4 Name F009 1000 R/W 16
0x4908 DigCnt 4 Preset F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x490A DigCnt 4 Compare F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x490C DigCnt 5 Function F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x490D DigCnt 5 Name F009 1000 R/W 16
0x491D DigCnt 5 Preset F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x491F DigCnt 5 Compare F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x4921 DigCnt 6 Function F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x4922 DigCnt 6 Name F009 1000 R/W 16
0x4934 DigCnt 6 Compare F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x4936 DigCnt 7 Function F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x4937 DigCnt 7 Name F009 1000 R/W 16
0x4949 DigCnt 7 Compare F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x494B DigCnt 8 Function F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x494C DigCnt 8 Name F009 1000 R/W 16
0x495C DigCnt 8 Preset F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
0x495E DigCnt 8 Compare F005 1000 R/W 2 [-2147483648 , 2147483647]
1=ENABLED
0x496A Confirmation address W 1
PTP 1588
0x4975 PTP FUNCTION F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x4976 PORTA DELAY ADDER F005 1000 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ns
0x4978 PORTA DELAY ASYM F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000] ns
0x497A PORTB DELAY ADDER F005 1000 R/W 2 [0 , 60000] ns
0x497C PORTB DELAY ASYM F004 1000 R/W 1 [-1000 , 1000] ns
0x497D STRICT POWER PROFILE F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x497E PTP DOMAIN NUMBER F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x497F PTP VLAN PRIORITY F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 7]
0x4980 PTP VLAN ID F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 4095]
0x4981 PTP EPOCH F012 1000 R/W 1 0=UTC_SINCE_2000
1=UTC_SINCE_1900
2=UTC_SINCE_1970
Routing


0x4989 Default RT GWY Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x498A Default RT GWY Oct2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x498B Default RT GWY Oct3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x498C Default RT GWY Oct4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x498D Static RT1 IP Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x498E Static RT1 IP Oct2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x498F Static RT1 IP Oct3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x4990 Static RT1 IP Oct4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x4991 Static RT1 Mask Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x4995 Static RT1 GWY Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x4999 Static RT2 IP Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x499A Static RT2 IP Oct2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x499B Static RT2 IP Oct3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x499C Static RT2 IP Oct4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x499D Static RT2 Mask Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x499E Static RT2 Mask Oct2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x499F Static RT2 Mask Oct3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49A0 Static RT2 Mask Oct4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49A1 Static RT2 GWY Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49A5 Static RT3 IP Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49A9 Static RT3 Mask Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49AA Static RT3 Mask Oct2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49AB Static RT3 Mask Oct3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49AC Static RT3 Mask Oct4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49AD Static RT3 GWY Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49AE Static RT3 GWY Oct2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49AF Static RT3 GWY Oct3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49B0 Static RT3 GWY Oct4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49B1 Static RT4 IP Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49B5 Static RT4 Mask Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49B9 Static RT4 GWY Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]


0x49BA Static RT4 GWY Oct2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49BB Static RT4 GWY Oct3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49BC Static RT4 GWY Oct4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49BD Static RT5 IP Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49BE Static RT5 IP Oct2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49BF Static RT5 IP Oct3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49C0 Static RT5 IP Oct4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49C1 Static RT5 Mask Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49C5 Static RT5 GWY Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49C9 Static RT6 IP Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49CA Static RT6 IP Oct2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49CB Static RT6 IP Oct3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49CC Static RT6 IP Oct4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49CD Static RT6 Mask Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49CE Static RT6 Mask Oct2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49CF Static RT6 Mask Oct3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49D0 Static RT6 Mask Oct4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49D1 Static RT6 GWY Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49EC Confirmation address W 1
Network(Ethernet) E Settings
0x49ED IP Address Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49EE IP Address Oct2 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49EF IP Address Oct3 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49F0 IP Address Oct4 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
0x49F1 Netmask Oct1 F004 1000 R/W 1 [0 , 255]
Redundancy settings
0x4A06 REDUNDANCY MODE F012 1000 R/W 1 0=INDEPENDENT
1=LLA
2=PRP
3=HSR
4=RSTP
5=DAISY_CHAIN
0x4A07 LLA Priority F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x4A08 LLA Timeout F005 1000 R/W 2 [0 , 600000] ms


0x4A0A RSTP BRIDGE PRIORITY F005 1000 R/W 2 [0 , 61440]
0x4A0C RSTP PORTA PRIORITY F005 1000 R/W 2 [0 , 240]
0x4A0E RSTP PORTA PATHCOST F005 1000 R/W 2 [0 , 2000000]
0x4A10 RSTP PORTB PRIORITY F005 1000 R/W 2 [0 , 240]
0x4A12 RSTP PORTB PATHCOST F005 1000 R/W 2 [0 , 2000000]
0x4A1E Confirmation address W 1
Cold Load Pickup
0x4A1F Cold Load Function F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x4A20 Cold Outage Time F004 1000 R/W 1 [1 , 1000] min
0x4A21 Cold Blocking Time F004 1000 R/W 1 [1 , 1000] s
0x4A22 Cold Load Events F012 1000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajustes de unidad de Sobrefrequencia Grupo 4- Overfrequency 4 Settings
0x39DD Function F012 1.000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x39DE Pickup Level F003 1.000 R/W 2 [20
0x39E0 Trip Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x39E2 Reset Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x39E4 Minimum Voltage F003 1.000 R/W 2 [10
0x39E6 Snapshot Events F012 1.000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x39E7 Frequency Source F012 1.000 R/W 1 0=LINE FRQ
1=BUS FRQ
Ajustes de unidad Subfrencuencia Grupo4- Underfrequency 4 Settings
0x39FA Function F012 1.000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x39FB Pickup Level F003 1.000 R/W 2 [20
0x39FD Trip Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x39FF Reset Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x3A01 Minimum Voltage F003 1.000 R/W 2 [10
0x3A03 Snapshot Events F012 1.000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x3A04 Frequency Source F012 1.000 R/W 1 0=LINE FRQ
1=BUS FRQ
Ajustes unidad Sobrefrequencia 5- Overfrequency 5 Settings
0x4A29 Function F012 1.000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
0x4A2A Pickup Level F003 1.000 R/W 2 [20
0x4A2C Trip Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A2E Reset Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A30 Minimum Voltage F003 1.000 R/W 2 [10
1=ENABLED
1=BUS FRQ


Ajustes de unidad de Subfrecuencia 5- Underfrequency 5 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x4A39 Pickup Level F003 1.000 R/W 2 [20
0x4A3B Trip Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A3D Reset Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A3F Minimum Voltage F003 1.000 R/W 2 [10
1=ENABLED
1=BUS FRQ
Ajustes de unidad de sobrefrequencia 6- Overfrequency 6 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x4A4A Trip Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A4C Reset Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A4E Minimum Voltage F003 1.000 R/W 2 [10
1=ENABLED
1=BUS FRQ
Ajustes de unidad de subfrequencia 6- Underfrequency 6 Settings
1=ENABLED
0x4A59 Trip Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A5B Reset Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A5D Minimum Voltage F003 1.000 R/W 2 [10
0x4A5F Snapshot Events F012 1.000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
1=BUS FRQ
Ajustes de unidad de 60CTs- 60CTS Failure Settings
1=ENABLED
0x4A66 3IO Current PKP F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A68 3VO Voltage Inhibit F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A6A GND Current Inhibit F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A6C SGND Current Inhibit F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A6E Time Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A70 Events F012 1.000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Ajustes de unidad de bloqueo por 2nd armónico-2nd HRMC Inhibit Settings
1=ENABLED


0x4A7A Pickup F003 1.000 R/W 2 [1
0x4A7C Delay F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A7E Minimum Current F003 1.000 R/W 2 [0
0x4A80 Phases For Operation F012 1.000 R/W 1 0=ANY ONE
1=ANY TWO
2=ALL THREE
3=AVERAGE
0x4A81 Events F012 1.000 R/W 1 0=DISABLED
1=ENABLED
Datos Ecuaciones PLC - PLC Data
0x6000 PLC equations F009 R 15360
Datos Display Gráfico - LCD Data
0x9C00 LCD configuration R 768
Bits de Maniobra (24 bits) - Commands
0xAFFE 0x0001 Operation 1 F001 W 1
0xAFFF 0x0001 Operation 17 F001 W 1
Identificación del Equipo - Relay Identification
0xB000 Relay model F009 R 8
0xB008 Firmware version F009 R 2
0xB018 Year(0=2000,1=2001,...) and part F001 R 1
of firmware compilation
0xB019 Day and month of firmware F001 R 1
compilation
0xB020 Address of PLC equations F005 R 2
0xB022 Address of LCD configuration F005 R 2
0xB027 MAC Address F009 R 6
0xB02D Serial Number F009 R 4
0xB031 Manufacturing Date F009 R 8


Eventos de Control y Panel de Alarmas - Control Events & Alarm Panel
0xF000 Status and acknowledge of the F001 R 24 Status = 24 first bytes
192 control events
1st byte: 1st eight control events (First
event=bit less significant)
2nd byte: 2nd eight control events (Ninth
...
Ack = 24 second bytes
25th byte: 1st eight control events (First
26th byte: 2nd eight control events
(Ninth event=bit less significant)
...
0xF018 Indicate which control events are F001 R 12 1st byte: 1st eight control events (First
configurated as alarm event=bit less significant)
2nd byte: 2nd eight control events (Ninth
...
0xF024 Date/Time of the 1-16 alarms F011 R 64
0xF0A4 Date/Time of the 33-48 alarms F011 R 64
0xF0E4 Date/Time of the 49-64 alarms F011 R 64
0xF1A4 Date/Time of the 97-112 alarms F011 R 64
0xF1E4 Date/Time of the 113-128 F011 R 64
alarms
0xF224 Date/Time of the 129-144 F011 R 64
alarms
0xF264 Date/Time of the 145-160 F011 R 64
alarms
0xF2A4 Date/Time of the 161-176 F011 R 64
alarms
0xF2E4 Date/Time of the 177-192 F011 R 64
alarms
0xF324 Alarm acknowledge F001 W 12 1st byte: 1st eight alarms (First alarm=bit
less significant)
2nd byte: 2nd eight alarms (Ninth
alarm=bit less significant)
...
Entradas Virtuales - Virtual Inputs
0xF430 64 Virtual Inputs (32 Latched + F001 R/W 4 2nd byte: 1st eight virtual inputs (First
32 Self Reset) virtual input=bit less significant)
1st byte: 2nd eight virtual inputs (Ninth
virtual input=bit less significant)
...
Nombre Fichero de Eventos - Events File Name
0xFE00 Name of the events file to read F009 W EVE.TXT: all snapshot-events are sent in
ASCII format
NEW_EVE.TXT: the new snapshot-events
are sent in ASCII format
EVE.BIN: all snapshot-events are sent in
BINARY format


NEW_EVE.BIN: the new snapshot-events
are sent in BINARY format
Forzado de Salidas por Comunicaciones - Forcing Outputs
0xFE20 Opening force output file F004 W 3 Write "OUTPUT"
0xFE28 Closing force output file F004 W 3 Write "OUTPUT"
0xFF20 Forcing outputs F004 W 5 First word = Board number;
Ficheros Oscilografía y Reporte de Faltas - Oscillography and Fault Report Files
0xFE40 Name of the oscillography/fault F009 W OSCXXX.DAT, OSCXXX.CFG, OSCXXX.HDR
report file to read
FLTXXX.TXT (where XXX=001 to 999)
Sucesos - Snapshot events
0xFF00 Character position of current F005 R 2
block within events file
0xFF02 Size of currently-available data F004 R 1
block of events file
0xFF03 Block of data requested events F004 R 1
file (122 items)
Ficheros Oscilografía y Reporte de Faltas - Oscillography and Fault Report Files
0xFF40 Character position of current F005 R 2
block within osc file
0xFF42 Size of currently-available data F004 R 1
block of osc file
0xFF43 Block of data requested osc file F004 R 1
(122 items)
Sincronización Horaria - Synchronization
0xFFF0 Synchronization (miliseconds F011 R/W 4
from 01/01/2000)
DESCRIPCIÓN FORMATO DE DATOS - FORMATS DESCRIPTION
F001 UNSIGNED INT 16 BIT (BITMASK)
F002 SIGNED INT 32 BIT
F003 FLOAT 32 BIT
F006 DOUBLE 64 BIT
F007 UNSIGNED INT 8 BIT
F009 STRING
(MILISECONDS FROM 01/01/
2000)
(ENUMERATED)


GE
Grid Solutions
Appendix C:
DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL FOR F650
C.1 DNP 3.0 protocol settings

F650 units enable the programming of certain parameters related to DNP3 protocol. These parameters are called DNP3
protocol settings and can be modified from the front panel or from the Level 2 software. The F650 relay supports
communication with multiple masters (3) and maintains three separate groups of DNP3 settings. Each group of DNP3
settings is related to a single logical DNP3 slave device. The F650 relay is able to communicate simultaneously with up to
three different DNP3 master stations. Each master communicates with a different logical DNP3 slave, these logical slaves
appearing as separate physical DNP3 slaves. This is achieved by keeping separate set of settings, event queues and set of
states for each logical device.
Notice that it is necessary to set different DNP Address and TCP/UDP Port for each logical DNP3 slave device.
Time synchronization through DNP protocol is available from all three DNP masters that can communicate with F650.
However the date & time are taken from only one master at the same moment. It is recommended to use only one master
to do time sync through DNP.
Setting No Setting Name Default Value Range

1 Physical Port NONE NONE, COM1, COM2, NETWORK
2 Address 255 0 to 65534, step 1
3 IP Addr Client1 Oct1 0 0 to 255 step 1
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER C-1

C.1 DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL SETTINGS APPENDIX C:

23 TCP/UDP Port 20000 1 to 65535, step 1
24 Unsol Resp Function DISABLED DISABLED, ENABLED
25 Unsol Resp TimeOut 5s 0 to 60 sec, step 1
26 Unsol Resp Max Ret 10 1 to 255, step 1
27 Unsol Resp Dest Adr 200 0 to 65519, step 1
28 Current Scale Factor 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000
29 Voltage Scale Factor 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000
30 Power Scale Factor 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000
31 Energy Scale Factor 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000
32 Other Scale Factor 1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000
33 Current Deadband 30000 0 to 65535, step 1
34 Voltage Deadband 30000 0 to 65535, step 1
35 Power Deadband 30000 0 to 65535, step 1
36 Energy Deadband 30000 0 to 65535, step 1
37 Other Deadband 30000 0 to 65535, step 1
38 Msg Fragment Size 240 30 to 2048, step 1
39 Binary Input Block1 CTL EVENTS 1-16 See the explanation below
Setting No Setting Name Default Value Range
47 Binary Input Block9 SWITCHGEAR 1-8 See the explanation below
48 Binary Input Block10 SWITCHGEAR 9-16 See the explanation below
49 Default analog Map Disabled See the explanation below
50 Analog Input Point 0 End Of List See the explanation below
c-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

APPENDIX C: C.1 DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL SETTINGS

1. Physical Port: The F650 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The F650 can be used as a
DNP slave device connected up to three DNP masters (usually RTUs or SCADA master stations). The Physical Port
setting is used to select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol for a specific logical DNP slave
device of F650. When this setting is set to NETWORK, the DNP protocol can be used over either TCP/IP or UDP/IP.
2. Address: This setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies de F650 on a DNP communications link. Each
logical DNP slave should be assigned a unique address.
3-22. IP Addr Client x Oct x: this setting is one of four octets of an IP address. The F650 relay can respond to a maximum
of 5 specific DNP masters (not in the same time). To set the IP address of DNP master it is necessary to set four
octets (e.g. to set the IP address of the first DNP master to 192.168.48.125, you should set IP Addr Client1 Oct1 =
192, IP Addr Client1 Oct2 = 168, IP Addr Client1 Oct3 = 48, IP Addr Client1 Oct4 = 125).
23. TCP/UDP Port: TCP/UDP port number for the case of DNP3 communication being performed through the Ethernet.
24. Unsol Resp Function: ENABLED, if unsolicited responses are allowed, and DISABLED otherwise.
25. Unsol Resp TimeOut: sets the time the F650 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited response.
26. Unsol Resp Max Ret: This setting determines the number of times the F650 retransmits an unsolicited response
without receiving a confirmation from the master. Once this limit has been exceeded, the unsolicited response is
sent at a larger interval. This interval is called the unsolicited offline interval and is fixed at 10 minutes.
27. Unsol Resp Dest Adr: This setting is DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to
which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the F650 from either the current DNP TCP connection or the
most recent UDP message.
28-32. Scale Factor: These settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These settings group the F650
Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor
for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, if the Voltage Scale Factor is set to a value of 1000, all DNP
Analog Input points that are voltages are returned with the values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value 72000 V on the
F650 is returned as 72). These settings are useful when Analog Input values must be adjusted to fit within certain
ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value is 10 times
larger).
33-37. Deadband: These settings are the values used by the F650 to determine when to trigger unsolicited responses
containing Analog Input data. These settings group the F650 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power,
energy, and other. Each setting represents the default deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For
example, in order to trigger unsolicited responses from the F650 when any current values change by 15 A, the
Current Deadband setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands.
DNP object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP Analog
Input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the F650, the default deadbands are in effect.
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER c-3

C.1 DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL SETTINGS APPENDIX C:
38. Msg Fragment Size: This setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer
confirmations to be necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication
channels
39-48. Binary Input Block x: These settings allow customization and change of the size of DNP Binary Inputs point list. The
default Binary Inputs point list contains 160 points representing binary states that are configured using Setpoint >
Relay Configuration in the EnerVista 650 Setup program. These 160 binary states are grouped in 10 blocks of 16
points each. There are 128 bits (8 blocks of 16) called Control Events and 32 bits (2 blocks of 16) corresponding to
the states of 16 switchgears available in F650 relay. If not all of the 160 points are required in the DNP master, a
custom Binary Inputs point list can be created by selecting up to 10 blocks of 16 points. Each block represents 16
Binary Input points. Block 1 represents Binary Input points 0-15, block 2 represents Binary Input points 16- 31,
block 3 represents Binary Input points 32-47, etc. The minimum number of Binary Input points that can be selected
is 16 (1 block). If all of the Binary Input Block x settings are set to “NOT USED”, the default list of 160 points is in
effect. The F650 forms the Binary Inputs points list from the Binary Input Block x settings up to the first occurrence
of a setting value “NOT USED”. Permitted values for these settings are: NOT USED, CTL EVENTS 1-16, CTL EVENTS
17-32, CTL EVENTS 33-48, CTL EVENTS 49-64, CTL EVENTS 65-80, CTL EVENTS 81-96, CTL EVENTS 97-112, CTL
EVENTS 113-128, SWITCHGEAR 1-8, SWITCHGEAR 9-16,BOARD F 1-16,BOARD F 17-32, BOARD G 1-16, BOARD G 17-
32,BOARD H 1-16, BOARD H 17-32, BOARD J 1-16,BOARD J 17-32.
49-81. Default analog Map: This setting allows selection between predefined Analog Input Points or choosing preferred
Analog Input Points (from 50 to 81).

APPENDIX C: C.2 DNP 3.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
C.2 DNP 3.0 device profile document

The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Sheet 1 of 3)

(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin
Device Name: F650 Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:
For Requests: Level 2  Master
For Responses: Level 2  Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Inputs Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Binary Counters (Object 20)
Frozen Counters (21)
Binary Counters Change (Object 22)
Frozen Counter Change (23)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Maximum Data Link String Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: Configurable up to 2048
Received: 292 Received: 2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
 None  None
 Fixed at 2  Configurable
 Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
 Never
 Always
 Sometimes
 Configurable

C.2 DNP 3.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT APPENDIX C:
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

 Never
 Always
 When reporting Event Data
 When sending multi-fragment responses
 Sometimes
 Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm:  None  Fixed at 3 s  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Fragment:  None  Fixed at  Variable  Configurable
Application Confirm:  None  Fixed at 4 s  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Response  No0ne  Fixed at  Variable  Configurable
Others:
Transmission Delay: No intentional delay
Need Time Delay: 10 min.
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: 10 s
Binary Input change scanning period: 1 ms
Packed binary change process period: 1s
Analog Input change scanning period: 500 ms
Unsolicited response notification delay: 500 ms
Unsolicited response retry delay: Configurable 0 to 60 s
Unsolicited offline interval: 10 min.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
SELECT/OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Count > 1  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Clear Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable

APPENDIX C: C.2 DNP 3.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no specific Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
variation requested: specific variation requested:
 Never  Never
 Only time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Time
 Only non-time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Relative Time
 Configurable  Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
 Never  Never
 Configurable  When Device Restarts
 Only certain objects  When Status Flag Change
 Sometimes (attach explanation)
 ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function codes No other options permitted
supported
Explanation of ‘Sometimes’: It will be disabled for RS-
485 applications, since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. For ethernet communication it will be
available and it can be disabled or enabled with the
proper function code.
Default CounterObject/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:
 No Counters Reported  No Counters Reported
 Configurable (attach explanation)  Configurable (attach explanation)
 Default Object: 20.  16 Bits
Default Variation: 1  32 Bits
 Point-by-point list attached  Other Value: ______
 Point-by-point list attached
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
 Yes
 No

C.3 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE APPENDIX C:
C.3 Implementation table
The following table shows objects, variations, function codes and qualifiers supported by F650 units, both in requests and
responses for DNP3 protocol. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07 or 08, are
responded to with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 are responded to with qualifiers 17
or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Text in bold and italic indicates functionality higher than DNP3 implementation level 2.
IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 out of 3)
OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE

Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Codes
Description Qualifier Codes (hex) Function Codes
No. No. (dec) (hex)
06 (no range, or all)
Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read) 00,01 (start-stop)
1 0
request default variation) 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 1 Binary Input 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty)
See Note 2
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
1 2 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
(default – see Note 1) 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty)
See Note 2
17,28 (index)
Binary Input Change - All Variations 06 (no range, or all)
2 0 1 (read)
See Note 1 07,08 (limited qty)
06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
2 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 17, 28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
2 2 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 17, 28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp.)
00,01 (start-stop)
10 0 Binary Output - All Variations 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
Binary Output Status 06 (no range, or all)
10 2 1 read 129 (response) 17,28 (index)
See Note 1 07,08 (limited qty)
See Note 2
17,28 (index)
3 (select)
00,01 (start-stop)
4 (operate)
12 1 Control Relay Output Block 07,08 (limited qty) 129 (response) echo of request
5 (direct op)
17, 28 (index)
6 (dir.op, noack)
1 (select)
7 (freeze)
20 0 Binary Counter - All Variations 8 (freeze noack) 06 (no range, or all)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz.cl. noack)
Note 1: A default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28,
respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, are responded to with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for
change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded).
Note 3: Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – The F650 is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.

APPENDIX C: C.3 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE

Object Variation Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes (hex) Function Codes Qualifier Codes
No. No. (dec) (hex)
21 0 Frozen Counter - All Variations 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Counter Change Event - All 06 (no range, or all)
22 0 1 (read)
Variations 07,08 (limited qty)
23 0 Frozen Counter Change Event 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
1 (read) 00,01 (start-stop)
30 0 Analog Input - All Variations
22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
000,01 (start-stop) 00, 01 (start-
32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) stop)
30 1 129 (response)
See Note 1 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
17,28 (index) See Note 2
1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) stop)
30 2 129 (response)
16-Bit Analog Input 22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
30 3 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 129 (response)
22 (assign class) 07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 129 (response)
30 5 Analog Short Float 129 (response)
32 0 Analog Change Event - All Variations 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
32-Bit Analog Change Event without
32 1 Time 1 (read) 17, 28 (index)
07,08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol.resp)
See Note 1
16-Bit Analog Change Event without 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
32 2 1 (read) 17, 28 (index)
Time 07,08 (limited qty) 130 (unsol.resp)
32-Bit Analog Change Event with 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
32 3 1 (read) 17,28 (index)
16-Bit Analog Change Event with 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response)
32 4 1 (read) 17,28 (index)
32 5 Analogs (Short-float) without time 1 (read) 17,28 (index)
32 7 Analogs (Short-float) with time 1 (read) 17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop)
34 0 Analog Input Reporting Deadband 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop) 00,01 (start-
16-Bit Analog Input Reporting
06 (no range, or all) stop)
34 1 Deadband 1 (read) 129 (response)
07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
See Note 1

C.3 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE APPENDIX C:

Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Codes
Description Qualifier Codes (hex) Function Codes
No. No. (dec) (hex)
32-Bit Analog Input Reporting 00,01 (start-stop)
34 2 Deadband 2 (write) 07,08 (limited qty)
See Note 1 17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop) 00,01 (start-
06 (no range, or all) stop)
50 0 Time and Date - All Variations 1 (read) 129 (response)
07,08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index)
00,01 (start-stop)
00,01 (start-
Time and Date 1 (read) stop)
50 1 07 (limited qty=1) 129 (response)
See Note 1 2 (write) 17,28 (index)
08 (limited qty)
See Note 2
17,28 (index)
1 (read)
07 (limited qty)
52 2 Time Delay Fine 2 (write) 129 (response)
quantity=1
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data 06 (no range, or all)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
60 1 Class 0 Data 06 (no range, or all)
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol) 06 (no range, or all)
60 2 Class 1 Data
21 (disable unsol) 07,08 (limited qty)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
60 3 Class 2 Data
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
60 4 Class 3 Data
22 (assign class)
00 (start-stop)
80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write)
(index must =7)
No Object (function code only)
13 (cold restart)
See Note 3
No Object (function code only) 14 (warm restart)
No Object (function code only) 23 (delay meas.)

APPENDIX C: C.4 BINARY INPUT POINTS
C.4 Binary input points

The F650 relay has a configurable Map of DNP Binary Input points. This map can be formed by up to 10 blocks of 16 binary
states that are configured using Setpoint > Relay Configuration in the EnerVista 650 Setup program. The minimum
number of DNP Binary Input points is 16 and the maximum number is 160. Within these 160 DNP points, 128 bits (8 blocks
of 16) are mapped to Control Events (Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Control Events) and 32 bits (2 block of 16) are
mapped to contacts A, B of 16 Switchgears (Setpoint > Relay Configuration > Switchgear). Each Switchgear in F650 is
mapped into two DNP Binary Input points. Lets say the setting Binary Input Block1 has been set the value Switchgear 1-8,
it means that DNP Binary Input point 0 = Switchgear 1Contact A, DNP Binary Input point 1 = Switchgear 1 Contact B, DNP
Binary Input point 2 = Switchgear 2 Contact A, etc.
To each Control Event or Switchgear Contact, assign any of the binary states of the F650 relay. These states are contact
inputs and outputs, virtual outputs, protection element states, PLC states, etc. DNP Points that correspond to Control
Events or Switchgear Contacts that are not configured have a zero value in the response.
Using the PLC-Editor, through the EnerVista 650 Setup program select Setpoint > Logic Configuration to implement
complex logic, more than simple OR and NOT previous functions. To accomplich this, under Setpoint > Relay
Configuration > Control Events, assign a Virtual Output to a selected point, and then implement wished logic with the
PLC-Editor.
BINARY INPUT POINTS

Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation Reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default Class for all points: 1
DEFAULT BINARY INPUT POINTS MAP
POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX
0-127 Control Events 1-128
128 Switchgear 1 Contact A
129 Switchgear 1 Contact B

C.4 BINARY INPUT POINTS APPENDIX C:


APPENDIX C: C.5 DNP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES
C.5 DNP configuration examples

C.5.1 Configuring DNP user map
For example, consider configuring DNP Binary Inputs Map with 8 Contact Inputs, 8 Protection states, 8 Contact Outputs
and 2 Switchgears. This configuration can be done in two steps. In first step, select Setpoint > Relay Configuration from
the EnerVista 650 Setup program and then configure the Control Events bits and Switchgear bits. This is shown in figures
9.1 and 9.2. In the second step, select Setpoint > System Setup > Communication settings > DNP in order to change the
DNP Binary Input Block settings. Set the values of the first three Binary Input blocks, Binary Input Block1 = CTL EVENTS 1-
16, Binary Input Block2 = CTL EVENTS 17-32, Binary Input Block3 = SWITCHGEAR 1-8. This is shown in Figure C-1:
Configuration of Control Events bits 13-1
Figure C-1: Configuration of Control Events bits

C.5 DNP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES APPENDIX C:
Figure C-2: CONFIGURATION OF SWITCHGEAR
Figure 0–1: CONFIGURATION OF DNP BINARY INPUT BLOCKS
In the example presented in this chapter the F650 relay has 48 Binary Input points, as shown in the table below.

C.5.2 Example of custom binary input points map
INDEX
0 CONT_IP_F_CC1(CC1)
8 PH IOC1 HIGH A PKP
9 PH IOC1 HIGH B PKP
10 PH IOC1 HIGH C PKP
11 PH IOC1 LOW A PKP
12 PH IOC1 LOW B PKP
13 PH IOC1 LOW C PKP
14 GROUND IOC1 PKP
15 NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
16 CONT OP_F_01
17 CONT OP_F_02
18 CONT OP_F_03
19 CONT OP_F_04
20 CONT OP_F_05
21 CONT OP_F_06
22 CONT OP_F_07
23 CONT OP_F_08
INDEX
24 Not Configured
25 Not Configured
26 Not Configured
27 Not Configured
28 Not Configured
29 Not Configured
30 Not Configured
31 Not Configured
32 CONT_IP_F_CC13 (CC13)
36 Not Configured
37 Not Configured
38 Not Configured
39 Not Configured
40 Not Configured

C.5 DNP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES APPENDIX C:
41 Not Configured
42 Not Configured
43 Not Configured
44 Not Configured
45 Not Configured
46 Not Configured
47 Not Configured
C.5.3 Multiple DNP 3.0 masters communication with F650

Typical architecture of multi-master communication using DNP 3.0.
Figure C-3: Multiple DNP3.0 masters communicating with F650

Figure C-4: SETTINGS FOR DNP3.0 MULTI-master communicatiONS with F650

C.6 BINARY OUTPUT AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT APPENDIX C:
C.6 Binary output and control relay output

Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On.
The F650 relay provides 24 DNP Binary/Control Output points. These outputs are mapped to the first 24 commands
configured in the F650. Executing a command is equal to activate the PLC equation that was attached to this command.
Thus all of the 24 DNP Binary/Control Output points are pulsed points. It means that only Pulse On flag is accepted in DNP
control operations on those points. All commands have configurable names. Changing the command’s name can be done
using the EnerVista 650 Setup program.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS

Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation Reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no ack)
BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUT POINTS BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUT POINTS

POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION POINT NAME/DESCRIPTION
INDEX INDEX
0 OPERATION1 59 VI Self Reset 7-8
13 OPERATION14
14 OPERATION15
15 OPERATION16
16 OPERATION17
17 OPERATION18
18 OPERATION19
19 OPERATION20
20 OPERATION21
21 OPERATION22
22 OPERATION23
23 OPERATION24
24-55 VI latched 1-32
56 VI Self Reset 1-2

APPENDIX C: C.7 BINARY COUNTERS
C.7 Binary counters

The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is
performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point. Digital
Counter values are represented as 32-bit integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care
should be taken when interpreting negative counter values.
BINARY COUNTERS

Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze no ack), 9 (freeze and clear),
10 (freeze and clear, no ack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time)
FROZEN COUNTERS

Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time)
BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS POINT INDEX NAME/DESCRIPTION:
0 Pulse Counter 1 16 Pos MWatthour

1 Pulse Counter 2 17 Neg MWatthour
2 Pulse Counter 3 18 Pos MVatthour
3 Pulse Counter 4 19 Neg MVatthour
4 Pulse Counter 5
5 Pulse Counter 6
6 Pulse Counter 7
7 Pulse Counter 8
8 Digital Counter 1
9 Digital Counter 2
10 Digital Counter 3

C.8 ANALOG INPUTS APPENDIX C:
C.8 Analog inputs

It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analog Inputs are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers.
Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the maximum positive representation is 32767. This is a
DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical
Bulletin 9809-001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband. The scale factors apply also to deadbands. For example if Current
Scale Factor is set to 0.001, and it is desired that a specific Analog Input point (that is of type current) trigger an event when
its value changes by 1 kA, then the deadband for this point should be set to 1000. Relay settings are available to set
default deadband values according to data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP
Object 34.
ANALOG INPUT POINTS

Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation Reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change event without Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500ms.
Units for Analog Input points are as follows:
Current: kA/A Apparent Power: MVA/KVA

Voltage: kV/V Energy: MWh, MVArh/ kWh, kVArh
Real Power: MW/KV Frequency: Hz
Reactive Power: MVAr/kVAr Angle: degrees
ANALOG INPUT POINTS
POINT DESCRIPTION UNIT

0 Phasor Ia Primary kA / A
1 Phasor Ib Primary kA / A
2 Phasor Ic Primary kA / A
3 Phasor Ig Primary kA / A
4 Phasor Isg Primary kA / A
5 Phasor In Primary kA / A
6 RMS Ia Primary kA / A
7 RMS Ib Primary kA / A
8 RMS Ic Primary kA / A
9 RMS Ig Primary kA / A
10 RMS Isg Primary kA / A
11 I0 Primary kA / A

APPENDIX C: C.8 ANALOG INPUTS

14 V0 Primary kV / V
17 Vab Primary kV / V
18 Vbc Primary kV / V
19 Vca Primary kV / V
20 Vn Primary kV / V
21 Va Primary kV / V
22 Vb Primary kV / V
23 Vc Primary kV / V
24 VL Primary kV / V
25 VBB Primary kV / V
26 Phase A Reactive Pwr MVAr / kVAr
27 Phase A Apparent Pwr MVA / kVA
28 Phase A Real Pwr MW / kW
29 Phase B Reactive Pwr MVAr / kVAr
30 Phase B Apparent Pwr MVA / kVA
31 Phase B Real Pwr MW / kW
32 Phase C Reactive Pwr MVAr / kVAr
33 Phase C Apparent Pwr MVA / kVA
34 Phase C Real Pwr MW / kW
35 3 Phase Reactive Pwr MVAr / kVAr
36 3 Phase Apparent Pwr MVA / kVA
37 3 Phase Real Pwr MW / kW
38 Phase A Power Factor
39 Phase B Power Factor
40 Phase C Power Factor
41 3 Phase Power Factor
42 Line Frequency Primary Hz
43 Bus Frequency Primary Hz
44 Vx Primary kV / V
45 Pos MVarhour Freeze MVArh / kVArh
46 Neg MVarhour Freeze MVArh / kVArh
47 Pos MWatthour Freeze MWh / kWh
48 Pos MWatthour Freeze MWh / kWh
49 Positive MVarhour MVArh / kVArh
50 Negative MVarhour MVArh / kVArh
51 Positive MWatthour MWh / kWh
52 Negative MWatthour MWh / kWh
53 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude kA / A
54 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Angle degrees
55 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude kA / A
56 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Angle degrees
57 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude kA / A
58 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Angle degrees
59 Fault 1 Prefault Phase AB Voltage Magnitude kV / V
60 Fault 1 Prefault Phase AB Voltage Angle degrees
61 Fault 1 Prefault Phase BC Voltage Magnitude kV / V


62 Fault 1 Prefault Phase BC Voltage Angle degrees
63 Fault 1 Prefault Phase CA Voltage Magnitude kV / V
64 Fault 1 Prefault Phase CA Voltage Angle degrees
65 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Current Magnitude kA / A
66 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Current Angle degrees
67 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Current Magnitude kA / A
68 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Current Angle degrees
69 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Current Magnitude kA / A
70 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Current Angle degrees
71 Fault 1 Postfault Phase AB Voltage Magnitude kV / V
72 Fault 1 Postfault Phase AB Voltage Angle degrees
73 Fault 1 Postfault Phase BC Voltage Magnitude kV / V
74 Fault 1 Postfault Phase BC Voltage Angle degrees
75 Fault 1 Postfault Phase CA Voltage Magnitude kV / V
76 Fault 1 Postfault Phase CA Voltage Angle degrees
77 Fault 1 Type Enum
78 Fault 1 Location km
79 Fault 1 Prefault Ground Current Magnitude kA / A
80 Fault 1 Prefault Ground Current Angle degrees
81 Fault 1 Prefault Sensitive Ground Current Magnitude kA / A
82 Fault 1 Prefault Sensitive Ground Current Angle degrees
83 Fault 1 Postfault Ground Current Magnitude kA / A
84 Fault 1 Postfault Ground Current Angle degrees
85 Fault 1 Postfault Sensitive Ground Current Magnitude kA / A
86 Fault 1 Postfault Sensitive Ground Current Angle degrees
87 % of Load to Trip %
88 Board F - Analog 1
96 Board G - Analog 1
104 Board H - Analog 1

APPENDIX C: C.8 ANALOG INPUTS

112 Board J - Analog 1
The "Fault Type" is represented by enumeration value. The table below shows values with DNP3 setting "Other Scale Factor
= 1".
ENUM VALUE FAULT TYPE
0 GROUND
1 PHASE
2 TRIPH
3 AG
4 ABG
5 AB
6 BG
7 BCG
8 BC
9 CG
10 CAG
11 CA
12 NAF
If the DNP3 setting "Other Scale Factor" has a value different from "1" then "Enum Value" is scaled by the adjusted factor.
For example if "Other Scale Factor = 0.001", then the value corresponding to "TRIPH" fault type is 2000.
NAF indicates that the type of fault has not been calculated.


GE
Grid Solutions
Appendix D: IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
D.1 Introduction
The F650 implements functionality of an IEC 60870-5-104 server. The devices responds to client requests or can send
spontaneous transmissions. F650 implementation of 60870-5-104 provides analog metering and states.
The IEC 60870-5-104 communications protocol is supported on Ethernet ports A and B only.
D.2 Technical description
ASDU is the information unit used for data transmission. An ASDU may have data inside or not. The ASDU is encapsulated
in another package of the link layer. ASDU address takes up 2 bytes.
Communication frames can be control or data frames. Control strings do not have ASDU inside.
A frame is consisting of 3 parts. (2 of them are not always present):
Link data + [ASDU header+ [ASDU data]]
The data between brackets can be omitted.
In IEC104 communication is made by TCP/IP protocols. Actually, it is a TCP communication. The default port is the 2404.
The F650 is listening as a server and supports up to two different IEC60870-5-104 masters simultaneously.
D.3 Basic application functions

Cyclic data transmission
Cyclic data transmission is used to send measured values to the IEC 60870-5-104 master.
Spontaneous Transmission:
Information objects may be transmitted without a specific request from the IEC 60870-5-104 master.
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER d-1

D.4 IEC 104 SETTINGS APPENDIX D: IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
The data that can be sent spontaneously are:
• Measured values when a deadband overflow takes place.

• Single points in the time the event is produced.
• Double points in the time the event is produced.
• Integrated Totals
Clock synchronization
F650 supports clock synchronization from IEC 60870-5-104 master.
If IRIG-B, PTP-1588 or SNTP is being used for time synchronization, the IEC 60870-5-104 clock synchronization command
does not set the F650 real time clock.
Command transmission
F650 is allowed to accept single commands and double commands.
D.4 IEC 104 settings
The Communication settings for IEC 60870-5-104 protocol are the following:
Product Setup > Communication Settings > IEC 870-5-104
Name Value Units Range
Function DISABLED
TCP Port 2404 [0:65535]
Common Addr of ASDU 255 [0:65535]
Cyclic Meter Period 0 Seconds [0:3600]
Synchronization Event 0 Minutes [0:1400]
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 OCTET1 0 [0 : 255]
Function 2 DISABLED
TCP Port 2 2404 [0:65535]
Common Addr of ASDU 2 255 [0:65535]
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 OCTET1 0 0 : 255]
D-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

APPENDIX D: IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL D.4 IEC 104 SETTINGS
IEC104 SCALE CURRENT 1

IEC104 SCALE VOLTAGE 1
IEC104 SCALE POWER 1
IEC104 SCALE ENERGY 1
IEC104 SCALE OTHER 1
IEC104 DEADBAND CURRENT 30000 [0:65535]
IEC104 DEADBAND VOLTAGE 30000 [0:65535]
IEC104 DEADBAND POWER 30000 [0:65535]
IEC104 DEADBAND ENERGY 30000 [0:65535]
IEC104 DEADBAND OTHER 30000 [0:65535]
IEC104 IOA BINARIES 1000 [0:65535]
IEC104 IOA DOUBLE POINTS 1500 [0:65535]
IEC104 IOA ANALOGS 2000 [0:65535]
IEC104 IOA COUNTERS 4000 [0:65535]
IEC104 IOA COMMANDS 3000 [0:65535]
IEC104 IOA ANALOG 5000 [0:65535]
PARAMETERS
Function: Enable or disable the protocol operation for the first IEC 60870-5-104
connection.
TCP Port: Listening TCP port in the relay. Default value is 2404.
Common Addr of ASDU: Address in the ASDU header. Default value is 255.
Cyclic Meter Period: Number of seconds for cyclical data sending, 0 means no spontaneous
meterings.
Synchronization event: Period of time (in minutes) for which timestamps are considered valid after
receiving a clock synchronization command.
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 OCTET1 to 4: These four octets define the IP address of the first client that is accepted in
the first connection. The F650 relay can respond to a maximum of 2 IEC
60870-5-104 masters (not at the same time) in this connection.
EC104 NET1 CLI2 OCTET1 to 4: These four octets define the IP address of the second client that is accepted
in the first connection. The F650 relay can respond to a maximum of 2 IEC
Function 2: Enable or disable the protocol operation for the second connection.
TCP Port 2: Listening TCP port in the relay. Default value is 2404.
Common Addr of ASDU2: Address in the ASDU header. Default value is 255.
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 OCTET1 to 4: These four octets define the IP address of the first client that is accepted in
the second connection. The F650 relay can respond to a maximum of 2 IEC
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 OCTET1 to 4: These four octets define the IP address of the second client that is accepted
in the second connection. The F650 relay can respond to a maximum of 2
IEC 60870-5-104 masters (not at the same time) in this connection.
IEC104 SCALE CURRENT, VOLTAGE,
POWER, ENERGY, OTHER: These settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These
settings group the F650 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage,
power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all
Analog Input points of that type. For example, if the IEC104 SCALE VOLTAGE
is set to a value of 1000, all IEC104 Analog Input points that are voltages are
returned with the values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value 72000 V on the

F650 is returned as 72). These settings are useful when Analog Input values
must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in IEC 60870-5-104 masters.
Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value
is 10 times larger).
IEC104 DEADBAND CURRENT,

VOLTAGE, POWER, ENERGY, OTHER: These settings are the values used by the F650 to determine when to trigger
spontaneous responses containing Analog Input data.
These settings group the F650 Analog Input data into types: current,
voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default
deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, in
order to trigger spontaneous responses from the F650 when any current
values change by 15 A, the IEC104 DEADBAND CURRENT setting should be
set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands.
Parameter of measured value ASDU can be used to change deadband
values, from the default, for each individual IEC104 Analog Input point.
Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the F650, the default
deadbands are in effect.
IEC104 IOA BINARIES: Starting Information Object Address for Single Points.
IEC104 IOA DOUBLE POINTS: Starting Information Object Address for Double Points.
IEC104 IOA ANALOGS: Starting Information Object Address for Analog Inputs.
IEC104 IOA COUNTERS: Starting Information Object Address for Counters.
IEC104 IOA COMMANDS: Starting Information Object Address for Single or Double Commands.
IEC104 IOA ANALOG PARAMETERS: Starting Information Object Address for Parameter of measured value. Each
Measured value has a Parameter of measured value associated with its
threshold.
The F650 relay has a custom Binary Inputs points list, called User Map; it is common for any protocol. In the case of IEC 104
Protocol, those points are GROUP1 and GROUP2.
The IEC 104 User Map can be configured using the EnerVista 650 Setup software in Setpoint > Relay Configuration >
Control Events.
The User Map contains 128 Binary Inputs. To each point of the User Map, assign any of the binary states of the F650 relay.
It is also possible to combine those states using OR and NOT functions. These states are: contact inputs and outputs, virtual
outputs, protection element states, PLC states, etc. The User Map always has a size of 128 Binary Inputs. Points in the User
Map that are not configured have a zero value in the answer.
It is possible to implement more complex logic than simple OR and NOT using the PLC Editor tool in EnerVista 650 Setup in
the menu Setpoint > Logic Configuration. These complex signals (Virtual Outputs) can be assigned to the binary points in
the Control Events configuration for the IEC 104 user map.
Groups of Data
The data is organized into groups in order to provide values when the controlling station requests them by a general or
group interrogation.
Group 1, 2 & 4 are set by the 256 Single Points (M_SP_NA_1).
Group 3 is set by the 16 Double Points (M_DP_NA_1).
Group 5 and 6 are set by the120 Analog Inputs, short floating-point (M_ME_NC_1).

Group 7 is set by the 120 Parameter of measured value, short floating-point (P_ME_NC_1).
These 256 Single Points, 16 Double points and 120 Measured Values are also sent as a response to a General Interrogation.
The 20 Integrated Totals (M_IT_NA_1) has its own Counter Group and it is sent as a response to a General Request Counter.
Group 1 Status
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_SP_NA_1
1000-1063 CONTROL EVENTS 1-64
Group 2 Status
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_SP_NA_1
1064-1127 CONTROL EVENTS 65-128
Group 3 Status
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_DP_NA_1
1500-1515 SWITCHGEAR EVENTS
Group 4 Status
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_SP_NA_1
1128-1255 BOARD F 1-32, G 1-32, H 1-32, J 1-32
Group 5 Single point

POINT DESCRIPTION
M_ME_NC_1
2000 Phasor Ia Primary
2001 Phasor Ib Primary
2002 Phasor Ic Primary
2003 Phasor Ig Primary
2004 Phasor Isg Primary
2005 Phasor In Primary
2006 RMS Ia Primary
2007 RMS Ib Primary
2008 RMS Ic Primary
2009 RMS Ig Primary
2010 RMS Isg Primary
2011 I0 Primary
2012 I1 Primary
2013 I2 Primary


2014 V0 Primary
2015 V1 Primary
2016 V2 Primary
2017 Vab Primary
2018 Vbc Primary
2019 Vca Primary
2020 Vn Primary
2021 Va Primary
2022 Vb Primary
2023 Vc Primary
2024 VL Primary
2025 VBB Primary
2026 Phase A Reactive Pwr
2027 Phase A Apparent Pwr
2028 Phase A Real Pwr
2029 Phase B Reactive Pwr
2030 Phase B Apparent Pwr
2031 Phase B Real Pwr
2032 Phase C Reactive Pwr
2033 Phase C Apparent Pwr
2034 Phase C Real Pwr
2035 3 Phase Reactive Pwr
2036 3 Phase Apparent Pwr
2037 3 Phase Real Pwr
2038 Phase A Power Factor
2039 Phase B Power Factor
2040 Phase C Power Factor
2041 3 Phase Power Factor
2042 Line Frequency Primary
2043 Bus Frequency Primary
2044 Vx Primary
2045 Pos Mvarhour Freeze
2046 Neg Mvarhour Freeze
2047 Pos MWatthour Freeze
2048 Neg MWatthour Freeze
2049 Positive MVarhour
2050 Negative MVarhour
2051 Positive MWatthour
2052 Negative MWatthour
2053 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude
2054 Fault 1 Prefault Phase A Current Angle


2055 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude
2056 Fault 1 Prefault Phase B Current Angle
2057 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude
2058 Fault 1 Prefault Phase C Current Angle
2059 Fault 1 Prefault Phase AB Voltage Magnitude
Group 6 Metering
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_ME_NC_1
2060 Fault 1 Prefault Phase AB Voltage Angle
2061 Fault 1 Prefault Phase BC Voltage Magnitude
2062 Fault 1 Prefault Phase BC Voltage Angle
2063 Fault 1 Prefault Phase CA Voltage Magnitude
2064 Fault 1 Prefault Phase CA Voltage Angle
2065 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Current Magnitude
2066 Fault 1 Postfault Phase A Current Angle
2067 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Current Magnitude
2068 Fault 1 Postfault Phase B Current Angle
2069 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Current Magnitude
2070 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Current Angle
2071 Fault 1 Postfault Phase AB Voltage Magnitude
2072 Fault 1 Postfault Phase AB Voltage Angle
2073 Fault 1 Postfault Phase BC Voltage Magnitude
2074 Fault 1 Postfault Phase BC Voltage Angle
2075 Fault 1 Postfault Phase CA Voltage Magnitude
2076 Fault 1 Postfault Phase CA Voltage Angle
2077 Fault 1 Type
2078 Fault 1 Location
2079 Fault 1 Prefault Ground Current Magnitude
2080 Fault 1 Prefault Ground Current Angle
2081 Fault 1 Prefault Sensitive Ground Current Magnitude
2082 Fault 1 Prefault Sensitive Ground Current Angle
2083 Fault 1 Postfault Ground Current Magnitude
2084 Fault 1 Postfault Ground Current Angle
2085 Fault 1 Postfault Sensitive Ground Current Magnitude
2086 Fault 1 Postfault Sensitive Ground Current Angle
2087 % of Load to Trip
2088 Board F – Analog 1

Group 6 Metering
2096 Board G – Analog 1
2104 Board H – Analog 1
2112 Board J – Analog 1
Group 7 Deadband
POINT DESCRIPTION
P_ME_NC_1
5000-5119 Analog Input Deadbands 2000-2119
Integrated Totals
POINT DESCRIPTION
M_IT_NA_1
4000-4007 Pulse Counter 1-8
4008-4015 Digital Counters 1-8
4016-4019 Energy Counters

APPENDIX D: IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL D.5 IEC 60870-5-104 POINT LIST
D.5 IEC 60870-5-104 point list

OPERATIONS IN IEC 60870-5-104 FOR F650
The two standard procedures for command transmission are accepted, Direct command or Select and Execute command.
The following table determines how a command can be executed in F650
Commands
POINT DESCRIPTION COMMAND MODE
3000 Operation 1 (ON) + Operation 2(OFF) Select and Execute Double Command
--- --- ---
3005 Operation 11 (ON) + Operation 12(OFF) Select and Execute Double Command
3006 Operation 13 (ON) + Operation 14(OFF) Direct Double Command
--- --- ---
3011 Operation 23 (ON) + Operation 24(OFF) Direct Double Command
3012 Virtual Self Reset 1 (ON) + Virtual Self Reset 2(OFF) Direct Double Command
--- --- ---
3027 Virtual Self Reset 31 (ON) + Virtual Self Reset 32(OFF) Direct Double Command
3028-3059 Virtual Latched 1-32 Direct Single Command
There are 24 available operation in F650 device; they must be configured using EnerVista 650 Setup in Setting
> Relay Configuration > Operations.
ASDU address must start with 3000; the addresses for operation are from 3000 to 3011. The operations go from 0 to 23.
D.6 IEC 60870-5-104 Interoperability

This companion standard presents sets of parameters and alternatives from which subsets must be selected to implement
particular telecontrol systems. Certain parameter values, such as the choice of "structured" or "unstructured" fields of the
INFORMATION OBJECT ADDRESS of ASDUs represent mutually exclusive alternatives. This means that only one value of the
defined parameters is admitted per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in
command and in monitor direction allow the specification of the complete set or subsets, as appropriate for given
applications. This clause summarizes the parameters of the previous clauses to facilitate a suitable selection for a specific
application. If a system is composed of equipment stemming from different manufacturers, it is necessary that all partners
agree on the selected parameters.
The interoperability list is defined as in IEC 60870-5-101 and extended with parameters used in this standard. The text
descriptions of parameters which are not applicable to this companion standard are strike-through (corresponding check
box is marked black).
NOTEIn addition, the full specification of a system may require individual selection of certain parameters for certain parts
of the system, such as the individual selection of scaling factors for individually addressable measured values.
The selected parameters should be marked in the white boxes as follows
Function or ASDU is not used
X Function or ASDU is used as standardized (default)
R Function or ASDU is used in reverse mode
B Function or ASDU is used in standard and reverse mode

D.6 IEC 60870-5-104 INTEROPERABILITY APPENDIX D: IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
The possible selection (blank, X, R, or B) is specified for each specific clause or parameter.
A black check box indicates that the option cannot be selected in this companion standard.
System or device
(system-specific parameter, indicate definition of a system or a device by marking one of the
following with “X”)
System definition
X Controlling station definition (Master)
R Controlled station definition (Slave)
Network configuration
(network-specific parameter, all configurations that are used are to be marked "X")
Physical layer
(network-specific parameter, all interfaces and data rates that are used are to be marked "X")
Transmission speed (control direction)

Unbalanced interchange Unbalanced interchange Balanced interchange
Circuit V.24/V.28 Circuit V.24/V.28 Circuit X.24/X.27

StandardRecommended if >1 200 bit/s
Transmission speed (monitor direction)
Unbalanced interchange Unbalanced interchange Balanced interchange

APPENDIX D: IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL D.6 IEC 60870-5-104 INTEROPERABILITY
Circuit V.24/V.28 Circuit V.24/V.28 Circuit X.24/X.27
StandardRecommended if >1 200 bit/s
Link layer
(network-specific parameter, all options that are used are to be marked “X”. Specify the maximum frame length. If a non-
standard assignment of class 2 messages is implemented for unbalanced transmission, indicate the Type ID and COT of all
messages assigned to class 2.)
Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1 and the fixed time out interval are used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Link transmission Address field of the link
Frame length
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ASDU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority)
with the indicated causes of transmission:
Type identification Cause of transmission

9, 11, 13, 21 <1>

Note: (In response to a class 2 poll, a controlled station may respond with class 1 data when there is no class
2 data available).
Application layer
Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (Least significant octet first), as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Common address of ASDU

(system-specific parameter, all configurations that are used are to be marked "X")
Information object address

Cause of transmission
Length of APDU
(system-specific parameter, specify the maximum length of the APDU per system)

The maximum length of APDU for both directions is 253. It is a fixed system parameter.
Selection of standard ASDUs
Process information in monitor direction

(station-specific parameter, mark each Type ID “X” if it is only used in the standard direction, "R" if only used in
the reverse direction, and “B” if used in both directions).

In this companion standard only the use of the set <30> – <40> for ASDUs with time tag is permitted.
Process information in control direction

(station-specific parameter, mark each Type ID “X” if it is only used in the standard direction, "R" if only used in
the reverse direction, and “B” if used in both directions).

Either the ASDUs of the set <45> – <51> or of the set <58> – <64> are used.
System information in monitor direction

(station-specific parameter, mark with an “X” if it is only used in the standard direction, “R” if only used in the
reverse direction, and “B” if used in both directions).
System information in control direction

(station-specific parameter, mark each Type ID "X" if it is only used in the standard direction, "R" if only used in
the reverse direction, and "B" if used in both directions).

Parameter in control direction

File transfer
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments

(station-specific parameters)
Shaded boxes: option not required.

Black boxes: option not permitted in this companion standard
Blank: functions or ASDU not used.
Mark Type Identification/Cause of transmission combinations:
"X" if only used in the standard direction;

"R" if only used in the reverse direction;
"B" if used in both directions.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 37 44 45 46 47
to to
36 41
<1> M_SP_NA_1 X X
<2> M_SP_TA_1
<3> M_DP_NA_1 X X
<4> M_DP_TA_1
<5> M_ST_NA_1

<6> M_ST_TA_1
<7> M_BO_NA_1
<8> M_BO_TA_1
<9> M_ME_NA_1
<10> M_ME_TA_1
<11> M_ME_NB_1
<12> M_ME_TB_1
<13> M_ME_NC_1 X X X
<14> M_ME_TC_1
<15> M_IT_NA_1 X
<16> M_IT_TA_1
<17> M_EP_TA_1
<18> M_EP_TB_1
<19> M_EP_TC_1
<20> M_PS_NA_1
<21> M_ME_ND_1
<30> M_SP_TB_1 X
<31> M_DP_TB_1
<32> M_ST_TB_1
<33> M_BO_TB_1
<34> M_ME_TD_1
<35> M_ME_TE_1
<36> M_ME_TF_1 X
<37> M_IT_TB_1 X
<38> M_EP_TD_1
<39> M_EP_TE_1
<40> M_EP_TF_1
<45> C_SC_NA_1 X X X X X
<46> C_DC_NA_1 X X X X X
<47> C_RC_NA_1
<48> C_SE_NA_1
<49> C_SE_NB_1
<50> C_SE_NC_1
<51> C_BO_NA_1
<58> C_SC_TA_1 X X X X X
<59> C_DC_TA_1 X X X X X
<60> C_RC_TA_1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 20 37 44 45 46 47
to to
36 41
<61> C_SE_TA_1
<62> C_SE_TB_1
<63> C_SE_TC_1
<64> C_BO_TA_1
<70> M_EI_NA_1* X
<100> C_IC_NA_1 X X X X X

<101> C_CI_NA_1 X X X
<102> C_RD_NA_1 X
<103> C_CS_NA_1 X X
<104> C_TS_NA_1
<105> C_RP_NA_1 X X
<106> C_CD_NA_1
<107> C_TS_TA_1
<110> P_ME_NA_1
<111> P_ME_NB_1
<112> P_ME_NC_1 X X X
<113> P_AC_NA_1
<120> F_FR_NA_1
<121> F_SR_NA_1
<122> F_SC_NA_1
<123> F_LS_NA_1
<124> F_AF_NA_1
<125> F_SG_NA_1
<126> F_DR_TA_1*
<127> F_SC_NB_1*
* Blank or X only
Basic application functions
Station initialization
(station-specific parameter, mark "X" if function is used)
X Remote initialization
Cyclic data transmission

(station-specific parameter, mark “X” if function is only used in the standard direction, "R" if only used in the
reverse direction, and "B" if used in both directions)
X Cyclic data transmission
Read procedure
(station-specific parameter, mark "X" if function is only used in the standard direction, "R" if only used in the
reverse direction, and "B" if used in both directions)
X Read procedure
Spontaneous transmission
(station-specific parameter, mark “X” if function is only used in the standard direction, "R" if only used in the
reverse direction, and “B” if used in both directions)
X Spontaneous transmission

Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous

(station-specific parameter, mark each information type "X" where both a Type ID without time and corresponding
Type ID with time are issued in response to a single spontaneous change of a monitored object)
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an
information object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are
defined in a project-specific list.
Station interrogation
reverse direction, and "B" if used in both directions).
Clock synchronization
X Spontaneous transmission
Day of week used
RES1, GEN (time tag substituted/ not substituted) used
SU-bit (summertime) used
optional, see 7.6

Command transmission
(object-specific parameter, mark "X" if function is only used in the standard direction, "R" if only used in the
X Direct command transmission
Direct set point command transmission
X Select and execute command
Select and execute set point command
X C_SE ACTTERM used
X No additional definition
X Short-pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
X Long-pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
X Persistent output
X Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and set point commands
10s Maximum allowable delay of commands and set point commands
Transmission of integrated totals

(station- or object-specific parameter, mark "X" if function is only used in the standard direction, "R" if only used
in the reverse direction, and "B" if used in both directions).
X Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
X Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
X Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands
X Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported
X Counter read
X Counter freeze without reset
X Counter freeze with reset
X Counter freeze with reset
X General request counter
X Request counter group 1
Request counter group 4

Parameter loading
(object-specific parameter, mark "X" if function is only used in the standard direction, "R" if only used in the reverse
direction, and “B” if used in both directions).
X Threshold value
Smoothing factor
Low limit for transmission of measured values
Low limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation
(object-specific parameter, mark "X" if function is only used in the standard direction, "R" if only used in the
Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure
Test procedure
File transfer
(station-specific parameter, mark “X” if function is used).
File transfer in monitor direction
Transparent file
Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
Transmission of sequences of events
Transmission of sequences of recorded analogue values
File transfer in control direction
Transparent file
Background scan
Background scan

Acquisition of transmission delay

Acquisition of transmission delay
Definition of time outs
Parameter Default value Remarks Selected value

t0 30 s Time-out of connection establishment N/A
t1 15 s Time-out of send or test APDUs 15 s
t2 10 s Time-out for acknowledges in case of no data 10 s
messages t2 < t1
t3 20 s Time-out for sending test frames in case of a 20 s
long idle state
Maximum range for timeouts t0 to t2: 1 s to 255 s, accuracy 1 s.

Recommended range for timeout t3: 1 s to 48 h, resolution 1 s.
Long timeouts for t3 may be needed in special cases where satellite links or dialup connections are used (for
instance to establish connection and collect values only once per day or week).
Maximum number of outstanding I format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w)
Parameter Default value Remarks Selected value

k 12 APDUs Maximum difference receive sequence number 12 APDUs
to send state variable
w 8 APDUs Latest acknowledge after receiving w I format 8 APDUs
APDUs
Maximum range of values k: 1 to 32767 (215–1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU

Maximum range of values w: 1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU (Recommendation: w should not exceed two-
thirds of k).
Portnumber
Parameter Value Remarks

Portnumber 2404 In all cases
Redundant connections
Number N of redundancy group connections used

RFC 2200 suite

RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the
Internet as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards
used in the Internet. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for a given
projects has to be chosen by the user of this standard.
X Ethernet 802.3
Serial X.21 interface
Other selection from RFC 2200:
List of valid documents from RFC 2200

1..............................................................
2..............................................................
3..............................................................
4..............................................................
5..............................................................
6..............................................................
7. etc.


GE
Grid Solutions
Appendix E:
PROCOME PROTOCOL
E.1 PROCOME protocol
Procome is an communication protocol focused on control operations. Commands to read data as status, measurements,
events and counters have been implemented together with commands to perform operations and synchronization.
This procome implementation has a subset of the basic aplication functions, asdus and services of the whole procome
profile. The protection functionality for procome has not been implemented.
Aplication functions and ASDUS:

The implemented profile is the following:
a) Secondary station initialization
- ASDU 5 Identification
b) Control Functions - Control requests
- Primary to Secondary:
ASDU 100 Control data request
- Secondary to Primary:
ASDU 100 Measurements and digital changes transmission
ASDU 101 Counters transmission
c) Control Functions - Digital signals status refresh
- Primary to Secondary.
ASDU 103 Digital status data request
- Secondary to Primary.
ASDU 103 Digital status data transmission
d) Control Functions - Overflow
e) Control Functions - Commands
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER e-1

E.1 PROCOME PROTOCOL APPENDIX E:
ASDU 121 Commands
- Secondary to Primary.
ASDU 121 Commands
f) Clock Synchronization
ASDU 6 Clock Synchronization
-Secondary to Primary:
ASDU 6 Clock Synchronization
Procome Settings:
Product Setup > Communication Settings > PROCOME

COMM Port NONE [NONE - COM1]
Slave Number 0
[0 : 254]
When value NONE is selected in the COMM Port setting the protocol is not enabled. The COM1 selection enables PROCOME
for the COM1 (remote) serial port.
Slave Number:is the PROCOME slave number.
Baud rate and parity for COM1 must be set in Setpoint > Communications > Serial Ports.
Procome Configuration:
The procome data configuration is performed through the Setpoint > Procome Configuration tool when communicating
via Ethernet with the device. The procome configuration file can be retrieved and sent to the relay easily. The relay must
be switched off and on to start working with the new procome configuration set by the user. The relay by default has no
procome configuration. For more information about procome configuration see 5.13 IEC 60870-5-103 configuration.
E-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

GE
Grid Solutions
Appendix F: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
F.1 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

F.1.1 Interoperability document
The F650 implements functionality of an IEC 60870-5-103 server.
This section describes the protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implementation in the unit.
1. PHYSICAL LAYER
Electrical interface
X EIA RS-485
32 Number of loads for one protection equipment
Optical interface
X Glass fibre
X Plastic fibre
F-SMA type connector
X BFOC/2,5 type connector
Transmission speed
X 9600 bits/s
X 19200 bits/s
2. LINK LAYER
There are no choices for the link layer.
3. APPLICATION LAYER
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER f-1

F.1 IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL APPENDIX F: IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
Transmission mode for application data

Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion standard.
Common address of ASDU
X One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
More than one COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU
Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction

System functions in monitor direction
INF Semantics
X <0> End of general interrogation
X <0> Time synchronization
X <2> Reset FCB
X <3> Reset CU
X <4> Start/restart
X <5> Power on
Status indications in monitor direction

INF Semantics F650 Identifier F650 Data Text
X <16> Auto-recloser active 4591 AR READY
X <17> Teleprotection active 3895 LOCAL
<18> Protection active
X <19> LED reset 6839 RESET LEDS
<20> Monitor direction blocked
<21> Test mode
<22> Local parameter setting
X <23> Characteristic 1 4875 GROUP 1 ACT ON
<26> Characteristic 4
<27> Auxiliary input 1
Supervision indications in monitor direction

<32> Measurand supervision I
<33> Measurand supervision V
F-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

APPENDIX F: IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL F.1 IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL
<35> Phase sequence supervision
<36> Trip circuit supervision 4539 BREAKER FAIL

X
SUPERVISION
<37> I>> back-up operation
X <38> VT fuse failure 4545 VT FUSE FAILURE
<39> Teleprotection disturbed
<46> Group warning
<47> Group alarm
Earth fault indications in monitor direction

<48> Earth fault L1
<49> Earth fault L2
<50> Earth fault L3
<51> Earth fault forward, i.e. line
<52> Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar
Fault indications in monitor direction

<64> Start / pick-up L1 3997|4013|4029|4045|4061|4077|41 PH IOC/TOC 1/2/3

X
64|4182|4200|5651|5669|5687 H/L A PKP

X
66|4184|4202|5653|5671|5689 H/L B PKP

X
68|4186|4204|5655|5673|5691 H/L C PKP
<67> Start / pick-up N 4112|4120|4128|4239|4248|4257 GROUND IOC/TOC

X
1/2/3 PKP
<68> General trip 4004|4020|4036|4052|4068|4084|41 PH IOC/TOC 1/2/3

X
71|4189|4207|5658|5676|5694 H/L OP
<69> Trip L1 3998|4014|4030|4046|4062|4078|41 PH IOC/TOC 1/2/3

X
65|4183|4201|5652|5670|5688 H/L A OP
<70> Trip L2 4000|4016|4032|4048|4064|4080|41 PH IOC/TOC 1/2/3

X
67|4185|4203|5654|5672|5690 H/L B OP
<71> Trip L3 4002|4018|4034|4050|4066|4082|41 PH IOC/TOC 1/2/3

X
69|4187|4205|5656|5674|5692 H/L C OP
<72> Trip I>> (back-up operation)
<73> Fault location X in ohms
<74> Fault forward / line
<75> Fault forward / lbusbar
<76> Teleprotection signal

transmitted

<77> Teleprotection signal

received
<78> Zone 1
<79> Zone 2
<80> Zone 3
<81> Zone 4
<82> Zone 5
<83> Zone 6
<84> General start / pick-up 4003|4019|4035|4051|4067|4083|41 PH H/L / GND IOC/

X 70|4188|4206|5657|5675|5693|4112 TOC 1/2/3 PKP
|4120|4128|4239|4248|4257
X <85> Breaker failure 4537 BKR FAIL INITIATE
<86> Trip measuring system L1
<89> Trip measuring system E
X <90> Trip I> 4004|4020|4036|4052|4068|4084 PH IOC 1/2/3 H/L OP
<91> Trip I>> 4171|4189|4207|5658|5676|5694 PH TOC 1/2/3 H/L

X
OP
X <92> Trip IN> 4113|4121|4129 GND IOC 1/2/3 OP
X <93> Trip IN>> 4240|4249|4258 GND TOC 1/2/3 OP
Auto-reclosure indications in monitor direction

X <128> CB 'on' by AR 4586 AR CLOSE BREAKER
<129> CB 'on' by long-time AR
X <130> AR blocked 4593 AR BLOCK
Measurands in monitor direction

X <144> Measurand I 5064 Ib Primary
X <145> Measurands I, V 5064-5080 Ib,Vab Primary
<146> Measurands I, V, P, Q 5064-5080-5099- Ib,Vab,P,Q Primary

X
5100
<147> Measurands In, Vn 5066-5086 Ig Primary, Vn

X
Primary
<148> Measurands IL123, VL123, P, Q, f 5063-5064-5065- Ia,Ib,Ic,Va,Vb,Vc,P,Q

X 5083-5084-5085- Primary ,Line
5099-5100-3969 Frequency

Generic functions in monitor direction

INF Semantics
<240> Read headings of all defined groups
<241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243> Read directory of a single entry
<244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245> End of general interrogation of generic data
<249> Write entry with confirmation
<250> Write entry with execution
<251> Write entry aborted
Selection of standard information numbers in control direction

System functions in control direction
INF Semantics
X <0> Initiation of general interrogation
X <0> Time synchronization
General commands in control direction

INF Semantics
<16> Auto-recloser on / off
<17> Teleprotection on / off
<18> Protection on / off
<19> LED reset
<23> Activate characteristic 1
Generic functions in control direction

INF Semantics
<240> Read headings of all defined groups
<241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243> Read directory of a single entry
<244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245> End of general interrogation of generic data

<248> Write entry
<249> Write entry with confirmation
<250> Write entry with execution
<251> Write entry aborted
Basic application functions

Test mode
Blocking of monitor direction
Disturbance data
Generic services
Private data
Miscellaneous
Measurand Max. MVAL = times rated value
1,2 or 2,4
Current L1 X
Current L2 X
Current L3 X
Voltage L1-E X
Voltage L2-E X
Voltage L3-E X
Active power P X
Reactive power Q X
Frequency f X
Voltage L1-L2 X
F.1.2 Application level

1. Application Functions
The unbalanced transmission mode of the protocol is used to avoid the possibility that more than one protection
equipment attempts to transmit on the channel at the same time, over the RS485 backside port.
Data is transferred to the primary or control station (master) using the "data acquisition by polling" principle. Cyclically, the
master requests class 2 data to the secondary station (slave). When slave has class 1 data (high priority) pending, the ACD
control bit is set to 1 demanding the master to request for that data. Periodically, the master can send a General
Interrogation in order to update the complete database.

The measurands are sent to the primary station as a response to a class 2 request. There is a setting (0-60 min) in order to
configure the desired interval, where 0 means transmission as fast as possible.
The following functions are supported:

• Initialization
• General Interrogation
• Synchronization
• Commands transmission
2. Type identification
The implemented Type Identification values are listed below:
TYPE IDENTIFICATION UI8[1..8] <1..255>
<1..31> := definitions of this companion standard(compatible range)
<32..255>:= for special use (private range)
Information in monitor direction:

<1>:= time-tagged message
<3>:= measurands I
<5>:= identification
<6>:= time synchronization
<8>:= general interrogation termination
<9>:= measurands II
Information in control direction:

<6>:= time synchronization
<7>:= general interrogation
<20>:= general command
3. Function Type
FUNCTION TYPE UI8 [1..8] <0..255>
<0..127>:= private range

<128..129>:= compatible range


The F650 device is identified at the protocol level as "overcurrent protection", so the Function Type <160> is used for all the
digital and analogue points proposed by the standard and mapped in this profile. For the other data supported by the
device, the number can be set from the private range.
4. Information Number
INFORMATION NUMBER := UI8 [1..8] <0..255>
Monitor direction := <0..255>

<0..15>:=system functions
<16..31>:= status
<32..47>:=supervision
<48..63>:=earth fault
<64..127>:=short circuit
<128..143>:=auto-reclosure
<144..159>:=measurands
<160..239>:=not used
<240..255>:=generic functions
Control direction:=<0..255>
<0..15>:=system functions
<16..31>:=general commands
<240..255>:=generic functions

GE
Grid Solutions
Appendix G: Redundancy protocol
REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL
G.1 PRP and HSR Ethernet protocols
Industrial real-time Ethernets typically demand much higher availability and uninterrupted operation than office Ethernet
solutions can provide. Even a short loss of connectivity can result in loss of functionality, as for example in some
automation, vehicular, power generation, and power distribution systems.
To recover from a network failure, different standard redundancy schemes are applied such as Parallel Redundancy
Protocol (PRP), High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) and others.
The basic concept of both protocols, PRP and HSR, is to send practically identical frames over different paths and discard
one of the copies in reception, at best. If an error occurs or one of the paths is down, the frame travelling through that path
does not reach the destination, but its copy does.
If the node to be attached to a redundant network has not the capability to do it (e.g. has only one p ort), it can be
connected through a Redundancy Box (RedBox). This type of node allows single attached nodes connect transparently to
a redundant network. An example can be seen in Figures 1.
PRP operates on two independent networks. Each frame is replicated on the sending node and transmitted over both
networks. The receiving node processes the frame arriving first and discards the subsequent copy. The PRP layer is
responsible for this replicate/discard function and hides the two networks from the upper layers. This scheme works
without explicit reconfiguration and switchover and therefore does not show a period of unavailability.
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER g-1

G.1 PRP AND HSR ETHERNET PROTOCOLS APPENDIX G: REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL
Figure G-1: Example of PRP with two LANs (LAN A and LAN B)
The two LANs, named LAN_A and LAN_B, are identical in protocol at the MAC level, but they can differ in performance and
topology. Transmission delays can also be different. The LANs have no direct connection among them and they are
assumed to be fail independent.
In some applications, only availability-critical nodes need a double attachment, while others do not. In order to meet the
specific requirements, PRP defines different kinds of end nodes.
• The Dual Attached Node (DAN) is connected to both LANs.
• Uncritical nodes can be attached to only one LAN and are therefore called Single Attached Nodes (SAN). SANs that
need to communicate with each other are on the same LAN.
• The Redundancy Box (RedBox) is used when a single interface node has to be attached to both networks. Such a node
can communicate with all other nodes. Since a node behind a RedBox appears for other nodes like a DAN, it is called
Virtual DANs (VDAN). The RedBox itself is a DAN and acts as a proxy on behalf of its VDANs. The RedBox has its own IP
address for management purposes
Similarly to PRP, HSR is based in the duplication of every frame sent, but in a ring topology. Each copy of the frame is
injected in a different direction of the ring. If any of the links between nodes is down, all nodes are still reachable. This
topology forces every node in the net to be HSR aware because they have to forward every message until it reaches its
destination. With that purpose, the redundancy information is located at the beginning of the frame allowing a faster
forwarding, see next figure.
G-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

APPENDIX G: REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL G.1 PRP AND HSR ETHERNET PROTOCOLS
Figure G-2: Example of HSR with HSR ring
Definitions:
• PRP – Parallel Redundancy Protocol - redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation networks
based on IEC 62439-3 Clause 4 and applicable to networks based on Ethernet technology (ISO/IEC 8802-3).
• OSI - Open Systems Interconnection - model defined by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for
standardizing the functions of a communication system in terms of abstraction layers. Similar communication
functions are grouped into logical layers. A layer serves the layer above it and is served by the layer below it. There
are 7 layers: physical, data link, network, transport, session, presentation, application.
• DANP – Doubly Attached Node running PRP – a node that has two ports which operate in parallel and are attached to
the upper layers of the OSI communications stack through a Link Redundancy Entity module.
• DANH – Doubly Attached Node with HSR protocol.
• LRE - Link Redundancy Entity – module operating at the link layer of the OSI stack and responsible for handling
duplicates and managing redundancy.
• SAN – Singly Attached Node – regular nodes with non-redundant network adapters
• RedBox – device attaching singly attached nodes (SANs) to a redundant network.
• RCT – Redundancy Check Trailer – PRP trailer added to frames and consisting of the following fields:
~16-bit sequence number (SeqNr);
~4-bit LAN identifier (LanId);
~12 bit frame size (LSDUsize)
~16-bit suffix (PRPsuffix).
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER G-3

G.1 PRP AND HSR ETHERNET PROTOCOLS APPENDIX G: REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL
G.1.1 PRP
PRP defines a redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation networks. It is applicable to networks
based on Ethernet technology (ISO/IEC 8802-3).
PRP is designed to provide seamless recovery in case of a single failure in the network, by using a combination of LAN
duplication and frame duplication technique. Identical frames are sent on two completely independent networks that
connect source and destination, see next figure.
Figure G-3: Example of PRP Redundant Network
Under normal circumstances both frames reach their destination and one of them is sent up the OSI stack to the
destination application, while the second one is discarded. If an error occurs in one of the networks and traffic is prevented
from flowing on that path, connectivity is still be provided through the other network to ensure continuous
communication. However, care must be taken when designing the two LANs, so that no single point of failure (such as a
common power supply) is encountered, as such scenarios can bring down both LANs simultaneously.
PRP uses specialized nodes called doubly attached nodes (DANPs) for handling the duplicated frames. DANPs devices have
an additional module at the link layer level, called the Link Redundancy Entity (LRE). LRE is responsible for duplicating
frames and adding the specific PRP trailer when sending the frames out on the LAN, as well as making decisions on
received frames as to which one is sent up the OSI stack to the application layer and which one is discarded. In essence
LRE is responsible for making PRP transparent to the higher layers of the stack. There is a second type of specialized device
used in PRP networks, called RedBox, with the role of connecting Single Attached Nodes (SANs) to a redundant network.
F650 relays implement only the DANP functionality. The RedBox functionality is not implemented.
The original standard IEC 62439-3 (2010) was amended to align PRP with the High availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)
protocol. To achieve this, the original PRP was modified at the cost of losing compatibility with the PRP 2010 version. The
revised standard IEC 62439-3 (2012) is commonly referred to as PRP-1, while the original standard is PRP-0. The F650
relays support only PRP-1.

APPENDIX G: REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL G.2 RSTP (IEEE 802.1D-2004) AND DAISY CHAIN
PRP can be enabled in configuration through a setting available on the network configuration menu (Product Setup?
Communication Settings? Network (Ethernet), REDUNDANCY, which already has the capability of enabling Failover
redundancy. When REDUNDANCY is set to PRP, the ports dedicated for PRP operate in redundant mode.
The rights associated with configuring PRP follow the security requirements for network configuration.
PRP management through SNMP MIB is not supported, as F650 doesn’t currently support SNMP for configuration. Settings
and actual values are only available through the front panel and through EnerVista.
The PRP solution to implement must ensure that performance requirements stated in IEC 61850-5 Clause 13 are still met. It
is specified under Clause 13 (Message performance requirements) that messages of type 1A must meet the performance
class P2/3, which is 3ms (See 3.7.1.1).
G.1.2 HSR
HSR defines a redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation networks, based on PRP principles,
provides the property of zero recovery time, typically used in ring topology but applicable to any topology.
In the F650 relay, HSR is implemented in devices with communication option number K (for Fiber; 100 Base Fx) and M (for
cooper; Base 100 Tx). A frame is sent over both ports. A destination should receive, in the fault-free state, two identical
frames within a certain time skew, forward the first frame to the application and discard the second frame when (and if) it
comes. A sequence number is used to recognize such duplicates.
In contrast to PRP (IEC 62439-3- Clause 4), with which it shares the operating principle, HSR nodes are arranged into a ring,
which allows the network to operate without dedicated switches, since every node is able to forward frames from port to
port. HSR originally meant "High-availability Seamless Ring", but HSR is not limited to a simple ring topology.
Redundant connections to other HSR rings and to PRP networks are possible.
G.2 RSTP (IEEE 802.1D-2004) and daisy chain

G.2.1 RSTP description
The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RTSP), like STP, was designed to avoid loops in an Ethernet network. Rapid Spanning
Tree Protocol (RSTP) (IEEE 802.1w) is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (802.1d standard) and provides for
faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change.
G.2.2 RSTP concepts

The IEEE 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) was developed to allow the construction of robust networks that incorporate
redundancy while pruning the active topology of the network to prevent loops. While STP is effective, it requires that frame
transfer must halt after a link outage until all bridges in the network are sure to be aware of the new topology.
Using STP (IEEE 802.1d) recommended values, this period lasts 30 seconds. The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
is a further evolution of the 802.1d Spanning Tree Protocol. It replaces the settling period with an active handshake
between switches (bridges) that guarantees topology information to be rapidly propagated through the network. RSTP
converges in less than one second. RSTP also offers a number of other significant innovations. These include:

G.2 RSTP (IEEE 802.1D-2004) AND DAISY CHAIN APPENDIX G: REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL
• Topology changes in STP must be passed to the root bridge before they can be propagated to the network. Topology
changes in RSTP can be originated from and acted upon by any designated switch (bridge), leading to more rapid
propagation of address information
• STP recognizes one state - blocking for ports that should not forward any data or information. RSTP explicitly
recognizes two states or blocking roles - alternate and backup port including them in computations of when to learn
and forward and when to block
• STP relays configuration messages received on the root port going out of its designated ports. If an STP switch (bridge)
fails to receive a message from its neighbor it cannot be sure where along the path to the root a failure occurred. RSTP
switches (bridges) generate their own configuration messages, even if they fail to receive one from the root bridge.
This leads to quicker failure detection
• RSTP offers edge port recognition, allowing ports at the edge of the network to forward frames immediately after
activation while at the same time protecting them against loops
• An improvement in RSTP allows configuration messages to age more quickly preventing them from “going around in
circles” in the event of a loop RSTP has three states. They are discarding, learning and forwarding.
The discarding state is entered when the port is first taken into service. The port does not learn addresses in this state and
does not participate in frame transfer. The port looks for STP traffic in order to determine its role in the network. When it is
determined that the port plays an active part in the network, the state changes to learning. The learning state is entered
when the port is preparing to play an active member of the network. The port learns addresses in this state but does not
participate in frame transfer. In a network of RSTP switches (bridges) the time spent in this state is usually quite short. RSTP
switches (bridges) operating in STP compatibility mode spend between 6 to 40 seconds in this state. After 'learning' the
bridge places the port in the forwarding state. While in this state the port both learn addresses and participates in frame
transfer while in this state. The result of these enhanced states is that the IEEE 802.1d version of spanning tree (STP) can
take a fairly long time to resolve all the possible paths and to select the most efficient path through the network. The IEEE
802.1w Rapid reconfiguration of Spanning Tree significantly reduces the amount of time it takes to establish the network
path. The result is reduced network downtime and improved network robustness. In addition to faster network
reconfiguration, RSTP also implements greater ranges for port path costs to accommodate the higher connection speeds
that are being implemented.
Proper implementations of RSTP (by switch vendors) is designed to be compatible with IEEE 802.1d STP. GE recommends
that you employ RSTP or STP in your network.
G.2.3 Use in meshed networks

One great strength of RSTP is its support for all kinds of meshed topologies. The resulting flexibility regarding the
installation is a clear advantage over the stringent restrictions that are imposed by ring protocols such as MRP and ring
installations. However, this flexibility harbors one great disadvantage, namely the reconfiguration time, which for an
interconnected network depends – among other things – on the complexity of the network topology and the location in
the network at which the failure occurred. Since RSTP is a decentralized protocol, it may also provoke highly unpredictable
race conditions in the establishment of new communications paths, particularly when choosing a new root bridge. This
gives rise to network reconfiguration times that can be estimated only very roughly, and this does restrict the use of RSTP,
particularly in meshed networks. In the case of meshed networks with very little complexity (such as ring networks with
two or three additional loops or subrings), a detailed analysis can make it possible to determine upper limits, but these
always need to be worked out individually. Unlike with the protocols MRP, HSR and PRP, it is not possible to make a general
statement.
G.2.4 Daisy chain

A daisy chain is an interconnection of devices where each device is connected in series to the next.

APPENDIX G: REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL G.3 LINK LOSS ALERT (LLA)
With an Ethernet daisy-chain redundancy selected, the F650 has two Ethernet ports and it is working as an Ethernet
unmanaged switch. The two Ethernet ports are used for connecting each device to the ports of its two neighboring
devices.
Each device in the daisy chain forwards the message until it reaches the destination.
Ports A and B use the same MAC (physical device) address and operate by chaining one device with the next one.
Note that it is important not to create a loop in this topology. Both ends of the chain can be connected to different
networks. The device operates only with one IP address through these 2 ports.
G.3 Link loss alert (LLA)

G.3.1 LLA
(Link Loss Alert) operation: The operation of ports A and B are as follows:
Ports A and B use port A’s MAC and IP address settings while port B is in standby mode in that it does not actively
communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its link.
G.3.2 LLA priority

If this setting is set to enabled, the port A has the priority. If PORTA’s LLA detects a problem with the link, communications is
switched to Port B. Port B is, in effect, acting as a redundant or backup link to the network for port A.

G.3 LINK LOSS ALERT (LLA) APPENDIX G: REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL
G.3.3 LLA timeout

This setting is active only when the LLA PRIORITY is set to ENABLED. When the link on primary port is detected again after it
fails, there is LLA TIMEOUT (ms) monitoring time for the health of the network. During this time, the secondary port remains
active. If primary network is healthy for more than LLA TOIMEOUT value, the switch over to primary port is automatic.
If the setting LLA PRIORITY is enabled:

• The primary port is port A while secondary (redundant) port is port B.
• The primary port is always used if available.
• If the link on primary port is lost switch over to secondary port occurs immediately.
• When the link on primary port is detected again, there is a monitoring timeout (LLA TIMEOUT) for the health of the
network. After that period the communication switch over to primary port automatically.
If the setting LLA PRIORITY is disabled:

• There is no priority, therefore there is no primary port. The communication switch over from one Port to the other
occurs when the link fails.
• In this case the LLA TIMEOUT setting does not act.

GE
Grid Solutions
Appendix H:
FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER H-1

APPENDIX H:
LEDS AND OUTPUTS BOOLEANS
PICKUPS
104
PH TOC1 HIGH PKP 40
105 319
VO_053_51P_PKP
PH TOC2 HIGH PKP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
106 inOR2
PH TOC3 HIGH PKP
316 inOR3
PH TOC1 LOW PKP inOR4

317
PH TOC2 LOW PKP inOR5
318 inOR6
PH TOC3 LOW PKP
101
39
PH IOC1 HIGH PKP 11
VO_051_50PH_PKP
102 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PH IOC2 HIGH PKP
inOR2
103
PH IOC3 HIGH PKP inOR3
98 38
PH IOC1 LOW PKP 10
VO_050_50PL_PKP
99 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PH IOC2 LOW PKP
100 inOR2
PH IOC3 LOW PKP inOR3

182 210
THERMAL1 ALARM 185
VO_001_THERMAL_ALARM
OVERCURREN T 183 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PICKUPS THERMAL2 ALARM
inOR2
184
THERMAL3 ALARM inOR3
211 214
VO_050_50PL_PKP 306
VO_007_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_PKP
VO_051_50PH_PKP
inOR2
213
VO_053_51P_PKP inOR3
201 204
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP 197
VO_005_51N_PKP
NEUTRAL TOC2 PKP
401 inOR2
NEUTRAL TOC3 PKP inOR3

198
203
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP 196
VO_004_50N_PKP
NEUTRAL IOC2 PKP
inOR2
200
NEUTRAL IOC3 PKP inOR3
216 215
VO_005_51N_PKP OR 218
217 VO_008_NEU TRAL_OVERCURRENT_PKP
VO_004_50N_PKP
95 37
GROUND TOC1 PKP 1
VO_049_51G_PKP
96 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
GROUND TOC2 PKP
inOR2
97
GROUND TOC3 PKP inOR3
92
GROUND IOC1 PKP 36
0
VO_048_50G_PKP
93 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
GROUND IOC2 PKP
inOR2
94
GROUND IOC3 PKP inOR3
220 219
VO 049 51G PKP OR 221
H-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

APPENDIX H:
VO_049_51G_PKP OR 221
222 VO_009_GR OUND_OVERCURRENT_PKP
VO_048_50G_PKP
191 195
SENS GND TOC1 PKP 187
VO_003_51SG_PKP
SENS GND TOC2 PKP
inOR2
193
SENS GND TOC3 PKP inOR3
188
194
SENS GND IOC 1 PKP 186
VO_002_50SG_PKP
SENS GND IOC 2 PKP
inOR2
190
SENS GND IOC 3 PKP inOR3
173
ISOLATED GND1 PKP 172
171
VO_043_50IG_PKP
OVERCURRENT 174 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PICKUPS ISOLATED GND2 PKP
175 inOR2
ISOLATED GND3 PKP inOR3

223
227
VO_002_50SG_PKP 226
VO_010_SENSITIVE_GROUND_PKP
VO_003_51SG_PKP
inOR2
225
VO_043_50IG_PKP inOR3
206
209
NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP 205
VO_006_I2_TOC_PKP
NEG SEQ TOC2 PKP
inOR2
208
NEG SEQ TOC3 PKP inOR3
229
VO_007_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_PKP
230 308
VO_008_NEU TRAL_OVERCURRENT_PKPinOR1 OR6 outOR1
231 inOR2
VO_009_GR OUND_OVERCURR ENT_PKP
228
232 inOR3
VO_011_ALL_OVERCURRENT_PKP
VO_010_SENSITIVE_GROUND_PKP inOR4
233
VO_006_I2_TOC_PKP inOR5
309 inOR6
VO_001_THERMAL_ALARM
86
34
PH ASE UV1 PKP 2
VO_045_27P_PKP
87 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PH ASE UV2 PKP
inOR2
88
PHASE UV3 PKP inOR3
89
35
PH ASE OV1 PKP 3
VO_046_59P_PKP
90 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
PH ASE OV2 PKP
inOR2
91
PH ASE OV3 PKP inOR3
235
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH PKP 254
234
VO_012_59NH_PKP
NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH PKP
237 inOR2
NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH PKP
inOR3
238
NEUTRAL OV1 LOW PKP 255
250
VO_013_59NL_PKP
NEUTRAL OV2 LOW PKP
inOR2
240
NEUTRAL OV3 LOW PKP inOR3
241
256
AUXILIARY UV1 PKP 252
VO_014_27X_PKP
VOLTAGE AUXILIARY UV2 PKP
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER h-3

APPENDIX H:
VOLTAGE AUXILIARY UV2 PKP

243 inOR2
PICKUPS
AUXILIARY UV3 PKP inOR3
244
257
AUXILIARY OV1 PKP 251
VO_015_59X_PKP
AUXILIARY OV2 PKP
inOR2
246
AUXILIARY OV3 PKP inOR3
247
258
NEG SEQ OV1 PKP 253
VO_016_V2_OV_PKP
NEG SEQ OV2 PKP
inOR2
249
NEG SEQ OV3 PKP inOR3
265
VO_045_27P_PKP
262 259
267
VO_014_27X_PKP VO_017_ALL_VOLTAGE_PKP
InOR1 OR7 OutOR1
266
VO_046_59P_PKP InOR2
260 InOR3
VO_012_59NH_PKP
261 InOR4
VO_013_59NL_PKP InOR5
263
InOR6
VO_015_59X_PKP
264 InOR7
VO_016_V2_OV_PKP
107
OVERFREQ1 PKP 41
108 515
VO_054_81O_PKP
OVERFREQ2 PKP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
109
inOR2
OVERFREQ3 PKP
513 inOR3
OVERFREQ4 PKP inOR4

517
inOR5
OVERFREQ5 PKP
518
inOR6
OVERFREQ6 PKP
110
42
UNDERFREQ1 PKP 516
VO_055_81U_PKP
UNDERFREQ2 PKP
inOR2
112
FREQUENCY UNDERFREQ3 PKP inOR3
PICKUPS 514
inOR4
UNDERFREQ4 PKP
519
inOR5
UNDERFREQ5 PKP
520 inOR6
UNDERFREQ6 PKP
406 409
405
FREQ RATE1 PKP VO_052_81DF-DT PKP
FREQ RATE2 PKP
408 inOR2
FREQ RATE3 PKP
inOR3
411 45
410
VO_052_81DF-DT PKP VO_056_ALL_FREQUENCY_PKP
43 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
VO_054_81O_PKP
44 inOR2
VO_055_81U_PKP
inOR3
270
BROKEN CONDUCT1 PKP 273
269
VO_018_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_PKP
BROKEN
BROKEN CONDUCT2 PKP
CONDUCTOR inOR2
272
BROKEN CONDUCT3 PKP inOR3
343

APPENDIX H:
343
FWD PW R1 STG1 PKP 349
344 342
VO_023_FORWARD_POWER_PKP
FWD PW R1 STG2 PKP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
345
inOR2
FWD PW R2 STG1 PKP
FORW ARD inOR3
346
POWER
FWD PW R2 STG2 PKP inOR4
347
FWD PW R3 STG1 PKP inOR5
348 inOR6
FWD PW R3 STG2 PKP
386
366
DIR PW R1 STG PKP 369
VO_025_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_PKP
DIRECTIONAL 367 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
POWER DIR PW R2 STG PKP
368 inOR2
DIR PW R3 STG PKP
inOR3
AUXILIARY SIGNALS (NOT INCLUDED IN GENER AL POWER PKP)

454 452
450
32N1 HIGH OC PKP VO_094_32N_HIGH_OC_PKP
WATTIMETRIC 32N2 HIGH OC PKP
456 inOR2
GROUND
FAULT 32N3 HIGH OC PKP
inOR3
OVERCURREN T 457 453
451
PKP 32N1 LOW OC PKP VO_095_32N_LOW_OC_PKP
32N2 LOW OC PKP
459 inOR2
32N3 LOW OC PKP
inOR3
440 447
439
32N1 HIGH PKP VO_092_32N_HIGH_PKP
32N2 HIGH PKP
442 inOR2
WATTIMETRIC 32N3 HIGH PKP
GROUND 443 inOR3 448
FAULT PKP 446
32N1 LOW PKP VO_093_32N_LOW_PKP
32N2 LOW PKP
445 inOR2
32N3 LOW PKP
inOR3
370 373
464
VO_023_FORWARD_POWER_PKP VO_026_POWER_PKP
VO_025_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_PKP
POWER 462 inOR2
VO_092_32N_HIGH_PKP
463 inOR3
VO_093_32N_LOW_PKP
inOR4
389 392
388
LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP VO_029_LOCKED_ROTOR_PKP
LOCKED
ROTOR LOCKED ROTOR2 PKP
391 inOR2
LOCKED ROTOR3 PKP
inOR3
414 417
413
LOAD LOAD ENCR1 PKP VO_031_LOAD_ENCROACHMENT_PKP
ENCROACHMENT LOAD ENCR2 PKP
PICKUP 416 inOR2
LOAD ENCR3 PKP
inOR3
274 85
419
VO_011_ALL_OVERCURRENT_PKP VO_085_GENERAL_PKP
275 InOR1 OR7 OutO R1
VO_017_ALL_VOLTAGE_PKP
276 InOR2
VO_056_ALL_FREQUENC Y_PKP
277 InOR3
GENERAL VO_018_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_PKP
PICKUP 374 InOR4
VO_026_POWER_PKP
400 InOR5
VO_029_LOCKED_ROTOR_PKP
418 InOR6
VO_031_LOAD_ENCROACHMENT_PKP
InOR7

APPENDIX H:
TRIPS
113
PH TOC1 HIGH OP 46
114 312
VO_057_51P_TRIP
PH TOC2 HIGH OP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
115
inOR2
PH TOC3 HIGH OP
313 inOR3
PH TOC1 LOW OP inOR4

314
PH TOC2 LOW OP inOR5
315 inOR6
PH TOC3 LOW OP
116
PH IOC1 HIGH OP 47
12
VO_058_50PH_TRIP
PH IOC2 HIGH OP
inOR2
118
PH IOC3 HIGH OP inOR3
119
48
PH IOC1 LOW OP 29
VO_059_50PL_TRIP
PH IOC2 LOW OP
inOR2
121
PH IOC3 LOW OP inOR3
125
50
THERMAL1 OP 13
VO_062_THERMAL_TRIP
THERMAL2 OP
inOR2
127
OVERCURRENT
THERMAL3 OP inOR3
TRIPS
280
279
VO_057_51P_TRIP 307
VO_019_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
VO_058_50PH_TRIP
inOR2
282
VO_059_50PL_TRIP inOR3
131
52
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP 8
VO_065_51N_TRIP
NEUTRAL TOC2 OP
inOR2
132
NEUTRAL TOC3 OP inOR3
128
51
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP 7
VO_064_50N_TRIP
NEUTRAL IOC2 OP
inOR2
130
NEUTRAL IOC3 OP inOR3
54 9
VO_064_50N_TRIP OR 53
55 VO_066_NEUTRAL_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
VO_065_51N_TRIP
137
GROUND TOC1 OP 56
14
VO_067_51G_TRIP
GROUND TOC2 OP

APPENDIX H:
139 inOR2
GROUND TOC3 OP inOR3
134
57
GROUND IOC1 OP 15
VO_068_50G_TRIP
GROUND IOC2 OP
inOR2
136
GROUND IOC3 OP inOR3
59 16
VO_067_51G_TRIP OR 58
60 VO_069_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_TR IP
VO_068_50G_TRIP
143
SENS GND TOC1 OP 61
18
VO_070_51SG_TRIP
SENS GND TOC2 OP
inOR2
145
SENS GND TOC3 OP inOR3
140
62
SENS GND IOC 1 OP 17
VO_071_50SG_TRIP
SENS GND IOC2 OP
inOR2
142
SENS GND IOC 3 OP inOR3
177
180
ISOLATED GND1 OP 176
VO_044_50IG_TRIP
OVERCURRENT ISOLATED GND2 OP
inOR2
TRIPS 179
ISOLATED GND3 OP inOR3
64
63
VO_070_51SG_TRIP 170
VO_072_SENSITIVE_GROUND_TRIP
65 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
VO_071_50SG_TRIP
inOR2
181
VO_044_50IG_TRIP inOR3
122
49
NEG SEQ TOC1 OP 4
VO_061_I2_TOC_TRIP
NEG SEQ TOC2 OP
inOR2
124
NEG SEQ TOC3 OP inOR3
284
VO_019_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
285 310
VO_066_NEUTRAL_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
inOR1 OR6 outOR1
286
inOR2
VO_069_GROUND_OVERCURR ENT_TRIP
287 inOR3
VO_072_SENSITIVE_GROUND_TRIP
inOR4
288
283
VO_061_I2_TOC_TRIP inOR5
VO_020_ALL_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
311
inOR6
VO_062_THERMAL_TRIP

APPENDIX H:
146
66
PHASE UV1 OP 5
VO_073_27P_TRIP
PHASE UV2 OP
148 inOR2
PHASE UV3 OP inOR3

149
67
PHASE OV1 OP 6
VO_074_59P_TRIP
PHASE OV2 OP
inOR2
151
PHASE OV3 OP inOR3
152
68
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH OP 19
VO_075_59NH_TRIP
NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH OP
inOR2
154
NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH OP inOR3
155
69
NEUTRAL OV1 LOW OP 20
VO_076_59NL_TRIP
NEUTRAL OV2 LOW OP
inOR2
157
NEUTRAL OV3 LOW OP inOR3
158
70
AUXILIARY OV1 OP 21
VO_077_59X_TRIP
AUXILIARY OV2 OP
160 inOR2
VOLTAGE
TRIPS AUXILIARY OV3 OP inOR3
161
71
AU XILIARY UV1 OP 22
VO_078_27X_TRIP
AU XILIARY UV2 OP
inOR2
163
AUXILIARY UV3 OP inOR3
290
293
NEG SEQ OV1 OP 289
VO_021_V2_OV_TRIP
NEG SEQ OV2 OP
inOR2
292
NEG SEQ OV3 OP inOR3
73
VO_073_27P_TRIP
78 295
VO_078_27X_TRIP InOR1 OR7 OutOR1
74
InOR2
VO_074_59P_TRIP
75 InOR3
VO_075_59NH_TRIP InOR4
76
InOR5 72
VO_076_59NL_TRIP
VO_079_ALL_VOLTAGE_TRIP
77 InOR6
VO_077_59X_TRIP
InOR7
294
VO_021_V2_OV_TRIP

APPENDIX H:
164
OVERFREQ1 OP
165 508 79
OVERFREQ2 OP inOR1 OR6 outOR1 VO_080_81O_TRIP
166 inOR2
OVERFREQ3 OP
505 inOR3
OVERFREQ4 OP
inOR4
506
OVERFREQ5 OP inOR5
507
inOR6
OVERFREQ6 OP
167
UNDERFREQ1 OP
512 80
168
inOR1 OR6 outOR1 VO_081_81U_TRIP
UNDERFREQ2 OP
169 inOR2
UNDERFREQ3 OP
FREQUENCY inOR3
TRIPS 509
UNDERFREQ4 OP inOR4
510
UNDERFREQ5 OP inOR5
511 inOR6
UNDERFREQ6 OP
UNDERFREQ6 OP
425 428
423
FREQ RATE1 OP VO_060_81DF-DT OP
FREQ RATE2 OP
427 inOR2
FREQ RATE3 OP
inOR3
82 81
424
VO_080_81O_TRIP VO_082_ALL_FREQUENCY_TRIP
83 inOR1 OR3 outOR1
VO_081_81U_TRIP
429 inOR2
VO_060_81DF-DT OP
inOR3
298
BROKEN CONDUCT1 OP 301
297
VO_022_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_TRIP
BROKEN
CONDUCTOR BROKEN CONDUCT2 OP
inOR2
300
BROKEN CONDUCT3 OP inOR3
353
FWD PW R1 STG1 OP 359
354 352
VO_024_FORWARD_POWER_TRIP
FWD PW R1 STG2 OP inOR1 OR6 outOR1
355 inOR2
FWD PW R2 STG1 OP
FORW ARD inOR3
356
POWER
FWD PW R2 STG2 OP inOR4
357
inOR5
FWD PW R3 STG1 OP
358 inOR6
FWD PW R3 STG2 OP
376
380
DIR PW R1 STG OP 379
VO_027_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_TRIP
DIRECTIONAL
DIR PW R2 STG OP
POWER inOR2
378
DIR PW R3 STG OP inOR3
467 470
466
32N1 HIGH OP VO_096_32N_HIGH_TRIP
32N2 HIGH OP
469 inOR2
32N3 HIGH OP
WATTIMETRIC inOR3
GROUND
476 472
FAULT 471
32N1 LOW OP VO_097_32N_LOW_TRIP
32N2 LOW OP
478 inOR2
32N3 LOW OP
inOR3

APPENDIX H:
382 384
475
VO_024_FORWARD_POWER_TRIP VO_028_POWER _TRIP
VO_027_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_TRIP
POWER 473 inOR2
VO_096_32N_HIGH_TRIP
474 inOR3
VO_097_32N_LOW_TRIP
inOR4
395 398
394
LOCKED ROTOR1 OP VO_030_LOCKED_ROTOR_TRIP
LOCKED
ROTOR LOCKED ROTOR2 OP
397 inOR2
LOCKED ROTOR3 OP
inOR3
431 435
434
LOAD VO_032_LOAD_ENCROACHMENT_TRIP
LOAD 432 ENCR1 OP inOR1 OR3 outOR1
ENCROACHMENT LOAD ENCR2 OP
TRIP 433 inOR2
LOAD ENCR3 OP
inOR3
302 84
436
VO_020_ALL_OVERCURRENT_TRIP VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
304 InOR1 OR7 OutO R1
VO_079_ALL_VOLTAGE_TRIP
305 InOR2
VO_082_ALL_FREQUENC Y_TRIP
303 InOR3
GENERAL
VO_022_BROKEN_CONDUCTOR_TRIP
TRIP
TRIP 385
385 InOR4
InOR4
VO_028_POWER_TRIP
399 InOR5
VO_030_LOCKED_ROTOR_TRIP
437 InOR6
VO_032_LOAD_ENCROACHMENT_TRIP
InOR7
FLASH ALARMS (CRITICAL TO

STORED DATA) 489
481 NOT
E2PROM STATUS
METERING ALARMS (CRITICAL

TO MEASUREMENT AND
PROTECTION)
483 490
DSP COMM ERROR OR
484
523
CALIBRATION ALARM InOR1 OR5 OutOR1
(CRITICAL TO MEASUREMENT) 492
InOR2
486 VO_098_ALARM
Calibration Error InOR3
InOR4
BOARD STATUS ALARM
491 InOR5
(CRITICAL TO OPERATION)
NOT
488
BOARD F STATUS
ORDER CODE ERROR ALARM

(CRITICAL TO OPERATION)
522
ORDERCODE ERROR
498
VO_000_PROTECTION_ALAR M
DELAY
494 497
VO_098_ALARM T_Input Timer(Pkp-Dpt) T_Output
495
T_Pi ckup
503
10000
VO_099_PROT_ALARM
496 T_Dropout
0
499 DELAY FOR OUT OF SERVICE STATE

VO_000_PROTECTION_ALARM 500
501 T_Input Timer(Pkp-Dpt) T_Output
100
T_Pi ckup
502
T_Dropout
0

GE
Grid Solutions
Appendix I:
FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
I.1 Factory default settings
Product Setup > Communication Settings > Serial Ports

User
Value
Baud rate for COM1 COM1 Baud Rate 19200 N/A [300 : 115200]
Baud rate for COM2 COM2 Baud Rate 19200 N/A [300 : 115200]
Parity for COM1 COM1 Parity NONE N/A [NONE:ODD:EVEN]
Parity for COM2 COM2 Parity NONE N/A [NONE:ODD:EVEN]
Product Setup > Communication Settings > Network (Ethernet)

Network (Ethernet)1 > Network (Ethernet)2
User
Value
1st octet of IP address IP Address Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
2nd octet of IP address IP Address Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
3rd octet of IP address IP Address Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
4th octet of IP address IP Address Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
1st octet of Netmask Netmask Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
2nd octet of Netmask Netmask Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
3rd octet of Netmask Netmask Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
4th octet of Netmask Netmask Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
1st octet of Gateway Gateway IP Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
2nd octet of Gateway Gateway IP Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
3rd octet of Gateway Gateway IP Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
4th octet of Gateway Gateway IP Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
**For firmware versions 7.00 or higher; the Network settings are the ethernet communication parameters are as follow
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER i-1

I.1 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS APPENDIX I:
Product Setup > Communication Settings > Network (Ethernet)

Network (Ethernet)1 > Network (Ethernet)
User
Value
1st octet of IP address IP Address Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
2nd octet of IP address IP Address Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
3rd octet of IP address IP Address Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
4th octet of IP address IP Address Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
1st octet of Netmask Netmask Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
2nd octet of Netmask Netmask Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
3rd octet of Netmask Netmask Oct3 0 N/A [0 : 255]
4th octet of Netmask Netmask Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
**For firmware versions 7.00 or higher; on the Network settings are also located the settings for Redundancy.
User
Value
Function permission REDUNDANCY INDEPENDENT N/A [INDEPENDENT; LLA;
MODE PRP; HSR; RSTP;
DAISY_CHAIN]
Stablish priority for Port A LLA Priority DISABLED N/A [ENABLED; DISABLED]
Switch over time from port B to port A LLA Timeout 5000 N/A [0 : 600000]
Switch (bridge) priority value RSTP BRIDGE 32768 N/A [0 : 61440]
PRIORITY
determine which ports are used for RSTP PORT A 128 N/A [0 : 240]
forwarding PRIORITY
assigned port cost value used for the switch RSTP PORT A 200000 N/A [0 : 2000000]
PATHCOST
Determine which ports are used for RSTP PORT B 128 N/A [0 : 240]
forwarding PRIORITY
Assigned port cost value used for the switch RSTP PORT B 200000 N/A [0 : 2000000]
PATHCOST
Product Setup > Communication Settings > Modbus Protocol

User
Value
Modbus Address
Slave address for COM1 254 N/A [1 : 255]
COM1
Modbus Address
Slave address for COM2 254 N/A [1 : 255]
COM2
Modbus port number for Modbus TCP/IP Modbus Port Number 502 N/A [0 : 65535]
Product Setup > Communication Settings > DNP3 Slave

User
Value
Communications port assigned to the DNP
Physical Port NONE N/A [COM1:COM2:NETWORK]
protocol
DNP slave address Address 255 N/A [0 : 65534]
1st Octect of IP address of DNP master 1 IP Addr Client1 Oct1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
2nd Octect of IP address of DNP master 1 IP Addr Client1 Oct2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
I-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

APPENDIX I: I.1 FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
4th Octect of IP address of DNP master 1 IP Addr Client1 Oct4 0 N/A [0 : 255]
TCP/UDP port number for DNP over
TCP/UDP Port 20000 N/A [0 : 65535]
Ethernet
Unsolicited responses permission Unsol Resp Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Time out to confirm an unsolicited response Unsol Resp TimeOut 5 1s [0 : 60]
Number of retransmissions of an unsol resp
Unsol Resp Max Ret 10 N/A [0 : 255]
w/o confirmation
Address to which all unsolicited responses
Unsol Resp Dest Adr 200 N/A [0 : 65519]
are sent
[0.00001-0.0001-0.001-
Scale for currents Current Scale Factor 1 N/A
0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
[0.00001-0.0001-0.001-
Scale for voltages Voltage Scale Factor 1 N/A
0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
Product Setup > Communication Settings > DNP3 Slave (CONT.)
User
Value
[0.00001-0.0001-0.001-
Scale for power Power Scale Factor 1 N/A
0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
[0.00001-0.0001-0.001-
Scale for energy Energy Scale Factor 1 N/A
0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
[0.00001-0.0001-0.001-
Other Scale factor Other Scale Factor 1 N/A
0.01-0.1-1-10-100-1000]
Default deadband for Current Analog Input
Current Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
points to trigger unsolicited responses
Default deadband for Voltage Analog Input
Voltage Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
Default deadband for Power Analog Input
Power Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
Default deadband for Energy Analog Input
Energy Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
Default deadband for Other Analog Input
Other Deadband 30000 N/A [0 : 65535]
1
Size (in bytes) for message fragmentation Msg Fragment Size 240 [30 : 2048]
byte

Product Setup > Communication Settings > DNP3 Slave (CONT.)

User
Value
Size customization and change of DNP
Binary Input Block 1 CTL EVENTS 1-16 N/A [See DNP note2]
Binary Inputs point list
Size customization and change of DNP CTL EVENTS 113-
Binary Input Block 8 N/A [See DNP note2]
Binary Inputs point list 128
Binary Input Block 9 SWITCHGEAR 1-8 N/A [See DNP note2]
Binary Input Block 10 SWITCHGEAR 9-16 N/A [See DNP note2]
Default Analog Map permission Default Analog Map ENABLED N/A [ENABLED; DISABLE]
DNP Analog Input Points point list Analog Input Point 0 End of list N/A

DNP Notes
Note 1: Scale Factor Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value is 10 times
[NOT USED, CTL EVENTS 1-16, CTL EVENTS 17-32, CTL EVENTS 33-48,CTL EVENTS 49-64,
Note 2: Binary Input Block Selection: CTL EVENTS 65-80, CTL EVENTS 81-96, CTL EVENTS 97-112, CTL EVENTS 113-128,
Product Setup > Communication Settings > IEC 870-5-104

User
Value
Enable or disable the protocol operation Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Listening TCP port in the relay TCP Port 2404 N/A [0 : 65535]
Common Addr of
Address in the ASDU header 255 N/A [0 : 65535]
ASDU
Number of seconds for instantaneous
Cyclic Meter Period 0 1s [0 : 3600]
metering
Synchronization Event Synchronization Event 0 N/ [0 : 3600]
0
A
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
1st Octect of IP address of 104 master 1
OCTET1
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
2nd Octect of IP address of 104 master 1
OCTET2
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET3
IEC104 NET1 CLI1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
4th Octect of IP address of 104 master 1
OCTET4
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET1
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET2
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET3
IEC104 NET1 CLI2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET4
Enable or disable the protocol operation Function 2 DISABLED N/A
Listening TCP port in the relay TCP Port 2 2404 N/A [0 : 65535]
Address in the ASDU header Common Addr of 255 N/A [0 : 65535]
ASDU 2
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET1
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET2

Product Setup > Communication Settings > IEC 870-5-104 (CONT.)

User
Value
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET3
IEC104 NET2 CLI1 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET4
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET1
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET2
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET3
IEC104 NET2 CLI2 0 N/A [0 : 255]
OCTET4
IEC104 SCALE CURRENT IEC104 SCALE 1 [0,00001; 0,0001; 0,001;
CURRENT 0,01; 0,1; 1; 10; 100; 1000;
10000]
IEC104 SCALE VOLTAGE IEC104 SCALE 1
VOLTAGE
IEC104 SCALE POWER IEC104 SCALE 1
POWER
IEC104 SCALE ENERGY IEC104 SCALE 1
ENERGY
IEC104 SCALE OTHER IEC104 SCALE 1
OTHER
IEC104 DEADBAND CURRENT IEC104 DEADBAND 30000 [0 : 65535]
CURRENT
IEC104 DEADBAND VOLTAGE IEC104 DEADBAND 30000 [0 : 65535]
VOLTAGE
IEC104 DEADBAND POWER IEC104 DEADBAND 30000 [0 : 65535]
POWER
IEC104 DEADBAND ENERGY IEC104 DEADBAND 30000 [0 : 65535]
ENERGY
IEC104 DEADBAND OTHER IEC104 DEADBAND 30000 [0 : 65535]
OTHER
IEC104 IOA BINARIES IEC104 IOA 1000 [0 : 65535]
BINARIES
IEC104 IOA DOUBLE POINTS IEC104 IOA DOUBLE 1500 [0 : 65535]
POINTS
IEC104 IOA ANALOGS IEC104 IOA 2000 [0 : 65535]
ANALOGS
IEC104 IOA COUNTERS IEC104 IOA 4000 [0 : 65535]
COUNTERS
IEC104 IOA COMMANDS IEC104 IOA 3000 [0 : 65535]
COMMANDS
IEC104 IOA ANALOG PARAMETERS IEC104 IOA ANALOG 5000 [0 : 65535]
PARAMETERS
IEC 870-5-104 Notes

Note 1: Cyclic Meter Period 0 value means no spontaneous metering

Product Setup > Communication Settings > sntp

User
Value
Port used UDP port 123 1 [1 : 65535]
IP Address OCT 1 Server IP Oct 1 0 1 [1 : 255]
Product Setup > Communication Settings > procome

User
Value
Serial Remote Com Port selection COMM Port NONE [NONE – COM1]
Slave number for procome Slave Number 0 [0 : 254]
Product Setup > Communication Settings > ptp 1588

User
Value
Function permission PTP FUNCTION DISABLE [DISABLE; ENABLE]
PORTA DELAY 0 ns [0 : 60000]
Port A, B Path Delay Adder ADDER
Port A Path Delay Asymmetry PORTA DELAY ASYM 0 ns [-1000 : 1000]
PORTB DELAY 0 ns [0 : 60000]
Port B Path Delay Adder ADDER
Port B Path Delay Asymmetry PORTB DELAY ASYM 0 ns [-1000 : 1000]
STRICT POWER DISABLED DISABLED/ENABLED
Strict Power Profile PROFILE
PTP DOMAIN 0 [0 : 255]
PTP domain number NUMBER
PTP VLAN Priority PTP VLAN PRIORITY 4 [0 : 7]
PTP VLAN Identification PTP VLAN ID 0 [0 : 4095]
PTP EPOCH UTC SINCE 2000 UTC SINCE 2000; UTC
Reference time defining the origin of a time SINCE 1970; UTC SINCE
scale is termed the epoch. 1900
Product Setup > Communication Settings > Routing

User
Value
1st octet of Gateway Default RT GWY Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
2nd octet of Gateway Default RT GWY Oct2 0 1 [0 : 255]
3nd octet of Gateway Default RT GWY Oct3 0 1 [0 : 255]
4th octet of Gateway Default RT GWY Oct4 0 1 [0 : 255]
sets the destination IPv4 route Static RT1 IP Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
sets the IP mask associated with the route Static RT1 Mask Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]

sets the gateway to reach the destination IP
Static RT1 GWY Oct1 0 1 [0 : 255]
route
route
route
route
route
route
route
route
route
route
route
route

route
route
route
route
route
route
route
route
route
route
route
route
SETPOINT > Product Setup > Modbus User Map
User
Value
Address 00 for Modbus user map Address 00 0 N/A [0000 : FFFF]
... ... ...

SETPOINT > PRODUCT SETUP > FAULT REPORT

User
Value
0.01
Positive sequence impedance module Pos Seq Module 3.00 [0.01 : 250.00]
Ohm
1
Positive sequence impedance angle Pos Seq Angle 75 [25 : 90]
Deg
0.01
Zero sequence impedance module Zero Seq Module 9.00 [0.01 : 750.00]
Ohm
1
Zero sequence impedance angle Zero Seq Angle 75 [25 : 90]
Deg
Line length Line Length 100.0 0.1 [0.0 : 2000.0]
Display fault on HMI Show Fault On HMI DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
CT Direction CT Direction REVERSE NA REVERSE; FORWARD
Setpoint > Product Setup > Oscillography

User
Value
Function Permission Function ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Prefault Trigger Position 30 1% [5 : 95]
Samples per cycle Samples/Cycle 64 N/A [4 – 8 – 16 –32 – 64]
1
Maximum number of oscillos Max. Number Osc. 4 oscill [1 : 20]
o
Automatic oscillography overwrite Automatic Overwrite DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Setpoint > Product Setup > Data Logger

User
Value
[1 s, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min,
Data logger Rate Data Logger Rate 1s N/A
20 min, 30 min, 60 min.]
Data Logger analog channels X Data Logger Chnl X None N/A [1 to 16]
Setpoint > Product Setup > Demand

User
Value
Function permission Demand Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
[BLOCK INTERVAL -
THERMAL
Demand method for current values CRNT Demand Method N/A ROLLING DEMAND -
EXPONENTIAL
[BLOCK INTERVAL -
POWER Demand THERMAL
Demand method for Power values N/A ROLLING DEMAND -
Method EXPONENTIAL
Demand interval Demand Interval 5 Minutes N/A [5 – 10 – 15 – 20– 30–60]
Trigger Enabled Trigger Enabled DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]

Setpoint > Product Setup > time settings

User
Value
Local time zone offset Universal Coodinated
Time LOC. TIME OFFS. UTC 0 1 [-24,0 : 24,0]
DAYLIG. SAVINGS
To follow DST rules TIME DISABLED NA [DISBLED; ENABLED]
MO
NT
Set the start month of the DST DST START MONTH MAR H January to December
DA
Set the start weekday of the DST DST START WEEKDAY SUNDAY Y Monday to Sunday
First; Second; Third; Fourth;
Set the start day instance DST START DAY INST LAST NA Last
Set the starting hour of the DST DST START HOUR 2 1 [0 : 23]
Mo
Set the Stop month of the DST DST STOP MONTH OCT nth January to December
Da
Set the stop weekday of the DST DST STOP WEEKDAY SUNDAY y Monday to Sunday
First; Second; Third; Fourth;
Set the stop day instance DST STOP DAY INST LAST NA Last
Set the stop hour of the DST DST STOP HOUR 2 1 [0 : 23]
IRIG-B local time IRIG-B LOCAL TIME OFF NA [ON; OFF]
Function permission IRIGB Function DISABLED NA ENABLLED; DISABLED
Stablish the sync priority PTP IRIGB Priority PTP-1588 NA PTP-1588; IRIG_B
Setpoint > System Setup > General Settings

User
Value
Phase CT ratio Phase CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Ground CT ratio Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Sensitive ground CT ratio Stv Ground CT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT ratio Phase VT Ratio 1.0 0.1 [1.0 : 6000.0]
Phase VT connection Phase VT Connection WYE N/A [WYE – DELTA]
Rated voltage Nominal Voltage 100.0 0.1 [1.0 : 250.0]
Rated Frequency Nominal Frequency 50 Hz Hz [50-60]
Phase rotation Phase Rotation ABC N/A [ABC – ACB]
Frequency reference Frequency Reference VI N/A [VI-VII-VIII]
Auxiliary Voltage Auxiliary Voltage VX N/A [VX – VN]
Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Primary meter units Primary meter units kA_kV NA A_V; kA_kV
Device name Device name NA NA NA
Setpoint > System Setup > Flex Curves

Flex Curves A > Flex Curves B > Flex Curves C > Flex Curves D
User
Value
0.00
Values for reset points 0.00 pkp Time 0.00xPKP [RST] 0.000 [0.000 : 65.535]
1s

0.00
1s
0.00
… … … [0.000 : 65.535]
1s
0.00
1s
0.00
1s
0.00
Values for operation points 1.03 pkp Time 1.03xPKP [OP] 0.000 [0.000 : 65.535]
1s
0.00
1s
0.00
… … … [0.000 : 65.535]
1s
0.00
1s
0.00
1s
Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker Settings
User
Value
Number of Switchgear selected as breaker Number of Switchgear 1 1 [1 : 16]
0.01(
Maximum value of KI2t Maximum KI2t 9999.99 KA)2 [0.00 : 9999.99]
s
KI2t integration time KI2t Integ. Time 0.03 0.01s [0.03 : 0.25]
Maximum number of openings Maximum Openings 9999 1 [0 : 9999]
Maximum Openings in one hour Max.Openings 1 hour 40 1 [1 : 60]
Setpoint > System Setup > Breaker > Breaker Maintenance

User
Value
0.01
KI2t Counter Phase A KI2t BKR Ph A Cnt 0.00 (KA)2 [0.00 : 9999.99]
s
0.01
KI2t Counter Phase B KI2t BKR Ph B Cnt 0.00 (KA)2 [0.00 : 9999.99]
s
0.01
KI2t Counter Phase C KI2t BKR Ph C Cnt 0.00 (KA)2 [0.00 : 9999.99]
s
Openings counter BKR Openings Cnt 0 1 [0 : 9999]
Closings counter BKR Closings Cnt 0 1 [0 : 9999]
Setpoint > System Setup > Switchgear

User
Value
Snapshot Event generation for switchgear Snapshot Events
DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
#1 SWGR 1
#2 SWGR 2
#3 SWGR 3
#4 SWGR 4


#5 SWGR 5
#6 SWGR 6
#7 SWGR 7
#8 SWGR 8
#9 SWGR 9
#10 SWGR 10
#11 SWGR 11
#12 SWGR 12
#13 SWGR 13
#14 SWGR 14
#15 SWGR 15
#16 SWGR 16
Setpoint > system setup > miscellanious >
User
Value
Relay out of service status Relay Out Of Service ENABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Local/Remote
Set to local or remote OFF N/A ON; OFF
Blocked
Active language on the relay Active Language 0 N/A [0 : 1]
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Phase Current >

> Phase TOC High > Phase TOC High 1 > Phase TOC High 2 > Phase TOC High 3
> Phase TOC Low > Phase TOC Low 1 > Phase TOC Low 2 > Phase TOC Low 3
User
Value
0.01
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.00 [0.05 : 160.00]
A
0.01
Time Dial TD Multiplier 1.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
Voltage Restraint Voltage Restraint DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Phase Current >

> Phase IOC High > Phase IOC High 1 > Phase IOC High 2 > Phase IOC High 3
> Phase IOC Low > Phase IOC Low 1 > Phase IOC Low 2 > Phase IOC Low 3
User
Value


0.01
A
0.01
Trip time Trip Delay 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Phase Current > Phase Directional >
Phase Directional 1> Phase Directional 2 > Phase Directional 3
User
Value
1
Maximum Torque Angle MTA 45 [-90 : +90]
Deg
Block logic Block Logic PERMISSION N/A [BLOCK – PERMISSION]
0,01
Voltage Memory Voltage Memory 0,00 s [0,00 : 3,00]
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Phase Current > Thermal Model >
Thermal Model 1 > Thermal Model 2 > Thermal Model 3
User
Value
0.1
Heating constant Heat Time Constant 6.0 [3.0 : 600.0]
min
0.01
time
s
Cooling constant Cool Time Constant 2.00 [1.00 : 6.00]
Heat
Time
Ct.
0.01
A
0.10
Alarm level Alarm Level 80.0 [1.0 : 110.0]
%
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Neutral Current > Neutral TOC
Neutral TOC 1> Neutral TOC 2 > Neutral TOC 3
User
Value
0.01
A
0.01
s

Setpoint > Protection Elements > Neutral Current > Neutral IOC
Neutral IOC 1 > Neutral IOC 2 > Neutral IOC 3
User
Value
0.01
A
0.01
s
0.01
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Neutral Current > Neutral Directional >
Neutral Directional 1 > Neutral Directional 2 > Neutral Directional 3
User
Value
1
Maximum Torque Angle MTA -45 [-90 : +90]
Deg
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Ground Current > Ground TOC
Ground TOC 1 > Ground TOC 2 > Ground TOC 3
User
Value
0.01
A
0.01
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Ground Current > Ground IOC
Ground IOC 1 > Ground IOC 2 > Ground IOC 3
User
Value
0.01
A
0.01
s
0.01
s

Setpoint > Protection Elements > Ground Current > Ground Directional >
Ground Directional 1 > Ground Directional 2 > Ground Directional 3
User
Value
1
Deg
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Sensitive Ground Current > Sensitive Ground TOC
Sensitive Ground TOC 1 > Sensitive Ground TOC 2 > Sensitive Ground TOC 3
User
Value
0.00
1A
0.01
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Sensitive Ground Current > Sensitive Ground IOC
Sensitive Ground IOC 1 > Sensitive Ground IOC 2 > Sensitive Ground IOC 3
User
Value
0.00
1A
0.01
s
0.01
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Sensitive Ground Current > Isolated Ground IOC
Isolated Ground IOC 1 > Isolated Ground IOC 2 > Isolated Ground IOC 3
User
Value
High Voltage level Vh Level 20 1V [2 : 70]
0.00
Low Current level Il LEVEL 0.005 [0.005 : 0.400]
1A
Low Voltage level Vl LEVEL 2 1V [2 : 70]
0.00
High Current level Ih LEVEL 0.025 [0.005 : 0.400]
1A

0.01
Operation time Delay 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
Deviation time to instantaneous Time to inst 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Sensitive Ground Current > Sensitive Ground Directional >
Sensitive Ground Directional 1 > Sensitive Ground Directional 2 > Sensitive Ground Directional 3
User
Value
1
Deg
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Negative Sequence Current > Negative Sequence TOC >
Negative Sequence TOC 1 > Negative Sequence TOC 2 > Negative Sequence TOC 3
User
Value
0.01
A
0.01
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Voltage Elements > Phase UV >
Phase UV 1 > Phase UV 2 > Phase UV 3
User
Value
[PHASE-PHASE, PHASE-
Input mode Mode PHASE-PHASE N/A
GROUND]
[DEFINITE TIME – INVERSE
Curve shape Curve DEFINITE TIME N/A
TIME]
0.01
Time Dial Delay 10.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
Minimum Voltage Threshold Minimum Voltage 5 1 V [0 : 300]
[ANY PHASE – TWO PHASES
Operation logic Logic ANY PHASE N/A
– ALL PHASES]
Supervision by breaker status Supervised by 52 DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Voltage Elements > Phase OV >
Phase OV 1 > Phase OV 2 > Phase OV 3
User
Value


Pickup Level Pickup Level 10 1 V [3 : 300]
0.01
s
0.01
s
[ANY PHASE – TWO PHASES
Operation logic Logic ANY PHASE N/A
– ALL PHASES]
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Voltage Elements >

>Neutral OV High > Neutral OV High 1 > Neutral OV High 2 > Neutral OV High 3
>Neutral OV Low > Neutral OV Low 1 > Neutral OV Low 2 > Neutral OV Low 3
User
Value
0.01
s
0.01
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > voltage elements > Negative Sequence OV >
Negative Sequence OV 1 > Negative Sequence OV 2 > Negative Sequence OV 3
User
Value
0.01
s
0.01
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements >voltage elements > Auxiliary oV

Auxiliary oV 1 > Auxiliary oV 2 > Auxiliary oV 3
User
Value
0.01
Trip Time Trip Delay 10.00 [0.00 : 900.00]]
s
0.01
Reset Time Reset Delay 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements >voltage elements > Auxiliary UV

Auxiliary UV 1 > Auxiliary UV 2 > Auxiliary UV 3
User
Value

[DEFINITE TIME – INVERSE

Curve shape Curve DEFINITE TIME N/A
TIME]
0.01
Time Dial Delay 10.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Power > Forward Power

Forward Power 1 > Forward Power 2 > Forward Power 3
User
Value
0.01
Block from offline Blk Time After Close 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
Pickup level for stage 1 Stage 1 Tap 10.00 [0.00 : 10000.00]
MW
0.01
Trip time for stage 1 Stage 1 Time 60.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
Pickup level for stage 2 Stage 2 Tap 20.00 [0.00 : 10000.00]
MW
0.01
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Power > Directional Power>

Directional Power 1 > Directional Power 2 > Directional Power 3
User
Value
0.01
Block from offline Blk Time After Close 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
Directional Angle for stage 1 Dir Power Angle 1 0.00 [0.00 : 359.99]
Deg
0.01
Pickup level for stage 1 Stage 1 Tap 10.00 [-10000.00 : 10000.00]
MW
0.01
s
1
Directional Angle for stage 2 Dir Power Angle 2 0.00 [0.00 : 359.99]
Deg
0.01
Pickup level for stage 2 Stage 2 Tap 20.00 [-10000.00 : 10000.00]
MW
0.01
s
Setpoint > Protection Elements > Power

WATT GND FLT HIGH 1 > WATT GND FLT HIGH 2 > WATT GND FLT HIGH 3
WATT GND FLT LOW 1 > WATT GND FLT LOW 2 > WATT GND FLT LOW 3
USER
VALUE
Function permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED-ENABLED]
Supervision minimum voltage Voltage Pickup Level 2 0.01 [2.00 : 70.00]
V
Source of operating current. Current selection IN N/A [IN-IG]
Pickup Level for Overcurrent OC Pickup Level 0,005 0.00 [0.005 : 0.400]
1A

Pickup Delay for Overcurrent OC Pickup Delay 0,2 0.01 [0.00 : 600.00]
s
Pickup Level for operating Power Power Pickup 0,01 0.01 [0.01 : 4.50]
W
Max torque angle MTA 0 1 [0 : 360]
Deg
Pickup Delay for Operating Power Power Pickup Delay 0,2 0.01 [0.00 : 600.00]
s
Curve shape Curve DEFINITE TIME N/A [DEFINITE TIME - INVERSE
TIME - USER CURVE A -
USER CURVE B - USER
CURVE C - USER CURVE D]
Multiplier Multiplier 1 0.01 [0.02 : 2.00]
s
Snapshot event generation Snapshot Event DISABLED N/A [DISABLED-ENABLED]
Setpoint > Control Elements > Setting Group

User
Value
[GROUP 1 – GROUP 2 –
Active Group Active Group GROUP 1 N/A
GROUP 3]
Setpoint > Control Elements > Underfrequency

Underfrequency 1 > Underfrequency 2 > Underfrequency 3
User
Value
0.01
Hz
0.01
s
0.01
s
Setpoint > Control Elements > Overfrequency

Overfrequency 1 > Overfrequency 2 > Overfrequency 3
User
Value
0.01
Hz
0.01
s
0.01
s

Setpoint > Control Elements > Synchrocheck

User
Value
0.01
Dead bus voltage level Dead Bus Level 10.00 [0.00 : 300.00]
V
0.01
Live bus voltage level Live Bus Level 50.00 [0.00 : 300.00]
V
0.01
Dead line voltage level Dead Line Level 10.00 [0.00 : 300.00]
V
0.01
Live line voltage level Live Line Level 50.00 [0.00 : 300.00]
V
0.01
Voltage Difference Max Volt Difference 10.00 [2.00 : 300.00]
V
0.1
Angle Difference Max Angle Difference 10.0 [2.0 : 80.0]
Deg
10
Frequency Slip Max Freq Difference 20 [10 : 5000]
mHz
0.01
Breaker Closing time Time 0.50 [0.01 : 600.00]
s
Dead Line – Dead Bus Function permission DL-DB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Live Line – Dead Bus Function permission LL-DB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Dead Line – Live Bus Function permission DL-LB Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Setpoint > Control Elements > Autoreclose

User
Value
Maximum Number of shots Max Number Shots 1 N/A [1 : 4]
0.01
Dead time 1 Dead Time 1 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
s
0.01
s
0.01
s
0.01
Reclaim time or reset lockout delay Reclaim Time 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
Reclose conditions permission Cond. Permission DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
0.01
Hold time Hold Time 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
Reset time Reset Time 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
Setpoint > Control Elements > breaker failure

User
Value
0.01
Supervision (retrip) pickup level Supervision Pickup 1.00 [0.05 : 160.00]
A
0.01
Hiset pickup level Hiset Pickup 5.00 [0.05 : 160.00]
A

0.01
Lowset pickup level Lowset Pickup 2.00 [0.05 : 160.00]
A
0.01
Internal arc pickup level Internal Arc Pickup 0.10 [0.05 : 160.00]
A
0.01
Internal arc time delay Internal Arc Delay 10.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
Retrip time delay Supervision Delay 10.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
Hiset time delay HiSet Delay 10.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
Lowset time delay LowSet Delay 10.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
Second stage time delay 2nd Step Delay 10.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.01
WITHOUT current element time delay No Current Delay 10.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
Setpoint > Control Elements > VT Fuse Failure)

User
Value
Setpoint > Control Elements > BROKEN CONDUCTOR

Broken Conductor 1 > Broken Conductor 2 > Broken Conductor 3
User
Value
0.10
Tap Level in percentage of I2/I1 Tap 20 [20.0 : 100.0]
%
0.01
Trip Time Trip Delay 60 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
0.00
Current Inhibition Level setting Operation Threshold 0.005 [0.000 : 1.000]
1A
Setpoint > Control Elements > Locked Rotor

Locked Rotor 1 > Locked Rotor 2 > Locked Rotor 3
User
Value
Full load current Full Load Current 0.50 KA [0.10 : 10.00]
Pickup level Pickup Level 1.01 N/A [1.01 : 109.00]
Trip time Trip Delay 0.00 s [0.00 : 900.00]
Reset time Reset Delay 0.00 s [0.00 : 900.00]
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > PULSE COUNTERS

USER
VALUE
Pulse counter enabling setting CntPulses Enabled X DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Name of the pulse counter CntPulses Name X Pulse Counter 1 N/A N/A

0.00
Multiplier factor for the pulse counter CntPulses Factor X 1.000 [0.000 : 65000.000]
1
Overflow value for the pulse counter CntPulses Overflow X 65535 1 [0 : 1000000]
CntPulses Board
Board selection for the pulse counter F N/A [F,G,H,I]
Origin X
CntPulses Input Origin
Input index inside the selected board 1 1 [1 : 32]
X
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > ANALOG COMPARATORS

USER
VALUE
Generic Analog Function Permission Analog Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Analog Snapshot
Generic Snapshot Events Generation DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Events
Analog Input Value Selection Analog Input X None N/A [All available analog values]
0.00
Analog Maximum Threshold Value Analog Maximum X 1.000 [-100000.000 : 100000.000]
1
0.00
Analog Minimum Threshold Value Analog Minimum X 1.000 [-100000.000 : 100000.000]
1
0.01
Analog Delay for Activation Signal Analog Delay X 0.00 [0.00 : 900.00]
s
Analog Hysteresis for the Deadband Analog Hysteresis X 1.0 0.1 [0.0 : 50.0]
Analog Direction for Activation Inside or
Analog Direction X OUT N/A [IN-OUT]
Outside the Deadband
Note: X is the analog comparator index, up to 20
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE

FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 1 > FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 2 > FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 3
USER
VALUE
[INCREASING -
Direction of the frequency change Freq. Rate Trend INCREASING N/A DECREASING - BI-
DIRECTIONAL]
0.01
Operation Value in Hz/s Freq. Rate Pickup 0.50 [0.10 : 10.00]
Hz/s
Minimum required voltage in % nominal 0.01
Freq. Rate OV Supv 40.00 [0.00 : 110.00]
voltage %
0.01
Minimum Frequency Threshold Freq. Rate Min 45.00 [20.00 : 80.00]
Hz
0.01
Maximum Frequency Threshold Freq. Rate Max 65.00 [20.00 : 80.00]
Hz
0.01
Frequency rate Trip Delay Freq. Rate Delay 0.00 [0.00 : 60.00]
s
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > LOAD ENCROACHMENT

LOAD ENCROACHMENT 1 > LOAD ENCROACHMENT 2 > LOAD ENCROACHMENT 3
USER
VALUE
Minimum positive-sequence voltage 0.01
Min. Voltage 25.00 [0.00 : 300.00]
required V
0.01
Impedance reach of the element Reach 1.00 [0.02 : 250.00]
Ohm

1
Angle (Size of the blocking region) Angle 5 [5 : 50]
Deg
0.00
Trip Time Pickup Delay 0.000 [0.000 : 65.535]
1s
0.00
Reset Time Reset Delay 0.000 [0.000 : 65.535]
1s
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > MAX. NUMBERS OF STARTS

USER
VALUE
Function Permission Function DISABLED N/A [DISABLED- ENABLED]
Motor Full Load Current Full Load Amps 5.0 0.1 A [0.5: 10.0]
Stop condition supervised by breaker Breaker Supervision DISABLED N/A [DISABLED- ENABLED]
Min. Stop Time 0.0 0.1s [0.0: 900.0]
Number of Starts per tour Number of Starts 5 1 [0: 100]
Reset counter setting Reset Counter DISABLED N/A [DISABLED- ENABLED]
Snapshot Event Generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N/A [DISABLED- ENABLED]
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > DIGITAL COUNTERS

USER
VALUE
Function permission DigCnt 1 Function DISABLED NA
Digital Counter 1 name DigCnt 1 Name NA
[-2147483648 :
Digital counter 1 Preset DigCnt 1 Preset 0 1 2147483647]
[-2147483648 :
Digital counter 1 Compare DigCnt 1 Compare 0 1 2147483647]
[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :


[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :
[-2147483648 :
Snapshot Event Generation Snapshot Events ENABLED NA [ENABLED; DISABLED]
SETPOINT > CONTROL ELEMENTS > COLD LOAD PICK UP

USER
VALUE
Function permsision Cold Load Function DISABLED NA [ENABLED; DISABLED]
mi
Cold Load Pickup Outage Time Cold Outage Time 20 n [1 : 1000]
Cold Load Pickup Blocking Time Cold Blocking Time 5 s [1 : 1000]
Snapshot Event Generation Cold Load Events ENABLED NA [ENABLED; DISABLED]
Setpoint > Inputs/Outputs > Contact I/O >

Board F > Board G >board h>board j
User
Value
I/O board type (available only for CIO I/O Board Type_X NONE N/A [NONE,
modules) 16 INP + 8OUT,
8 INP + 8OUT + SUPV
32 INP
16 INP + 8 ANA]
Input activation voltage threshold Group A Voltage Threshold A_X 80 1V [10 : 230]
Input activation voltage threshold Group B Voltage Threshold B_X 80 1V [10 : 230]
Input activation voltage threshold Group C Voltage Threshold C_X 80 1V [10 : 230]
Input activation voltage threshold Group D Voltage Threshold D_X 80 1V [10 : 230]
Debounce time for Group A Debounce Time A_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Debounce time for Group B Debounce Time B_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Debounce time for Group C Debounce Time C_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Debounce time for Group D Debounce Time D_X 15 1 ms [1 : 50]
Input type Input Type_X_CCY POSITIVE N/A [POSITIVE-EDGE,
(CCY) NEGATIVE-EDGE,
POSITIVE,
NEGATIVE]
Input signal time delay Delay Input 0 1 ms [0 : 60000]
Time_X_CCY (CCY)
Output logic type Output Logic_X_0Z POSITIVE N/A [POSITIVE,
NEGATIVE]

Output type Output Type_X_0Z NORMAL N/A [NORMAL,

PULSE,
LATCH]
Output pulse length Pulse Output 10000 1 ms [0 : 60000]
Time_X_0Z
Analog Inputs Range Range_X_0Z NONE N/A [NONE,
-1 to 0mA,
0 to 1 mA,
-1 to 1 mA,
0 to 5 mA,
0 to 10 mA]
Minimum Value Min_Value_X_0Z 0.00 0.01 [ -9999.99 : 9999.99]
Maximum Value Max_Value_X_0Z 0.00 0.01 [ -9999.99 : 9999.99]
Note 2: Description of X, Y and Z in input/output boards

F, G, H or J, the I/O board name, depending on the Relay model.
X F and G are internal Relay boards, and H and J are additional boards available in CIO
modules (remote Bus CAN I/O module)
I/O BOARD TYPE
ENERVISTA 650
ASSOCIATED DIGIT SETUP BOARD BOARD TYPE
SETTINGS
For the I/O board selection in the relay
0 NONE None
model:
1 16 INP+ 8 OUT Mixed
2 8 INP +8 OUT +SUPV Supervision
4 32 INP 32 digital inputs
5 16 INP + 8 ANA 16 digital inputs + 8 analog inputs
Is the name used for inputs in I/O boards
Mixed, 16 digital inputs: CC1….CC16
CCY
Supervision: 8 digital inputs: CC1,..., CC8
32 INP: 32 digital inputs; CC1,...,CC32
Is the name used for the different outputs in I/O boards, 8 outputs available for any of the
0Z
two types of board (01,…., 08)
Setpoint > inputs/outputs > remote comms

User
Value
Remote comms selection Remote Comms NONE N/A [NONE – GSSE – GOOSE]
SETTING DESCRIPTION FOR GSSE
Remote comms selection Remote Comms GSSE N/A [NONE – GSSE – GOOSE]
Device Identification 650 ID F650 N/A
Hold time signal send by the transmiting
Hold Time 10000 1 ms [1000 : 60000]
device
Snapshot Events
Snapshot Events Generation DISABLED N/A [DISABLED – ENABLED]
Remote Out
Remote Device Description Remote Device X Remote Device X N/A
[DNA-1 to DNA-32 –
Bit Pair Selection Bit Pair X None N/A
UserSt-1 to UserSt-64]
[OFF – ON – LATEST OFF –
Default Value Selection Default Value X OFF N/A
LATEST ON]
SETTING DESCRIPTION FOR GoOSE
Remote comms selection Remote Comms GOOSE N/A [NONE – GSSE – GOOSE]

APPENDIX I: I.2 FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
LATEST ON]
Note: X is the Remote Device index, up to 32
LIST OF TIME OVERCURRENT CURVES AVAILABLE IN F650

IEEE extremely/very/moderately inverse
IEC Curve A/B/C/Long-Time Inverse/ Short-Time Inverse
IAC extremely/very/normally/moderately inverse
I2t
Definite time
Rectifier curve
User Curve - FlexCurve™ A/B/C/D
I.2 Factory default configuration

NOTE:
SOURCE COLUMN:
This columns allow selecting the simple or complex (OR signal or Virtual output) operand that actives the selected elements
on relay configuration
If more than one operands are selected, the relay performs an OR gate with them to activate the selected element.
SIGNAL LOGIC COLUMN:
Refers to each individual signal selected on its left. NOT legend means that the refered signal is inverted
SOURCE LOGIC COLUMN:
Refers to the whole SOURCE signal selected on its left. NOT legend means that SOURCE signal is inverted
If more than one operand were selected, the OR gate output is inverted
SETPOINT > RELAY CONFIGURATION > OUTPUTS

OUTPUT SOURCE SOURCE LOGIC LOGIC
CONT OP OPER_F_01 VO_000_PROTECTION_ALARM -
VO_046_59P_PKP -
CONT OP OPER_F_02
VO_045_27P_PKP -
CONT OP OPER_F_03 VO_048_50G_PKP -
CONT OP OPER_F_04 VO_049_51G_PKP -
VO_051_50PH_PKP -
CONT OP OPER_F_05
VO_050_50PL_PKP -
CONT OP OPER_F_06 VO_053_51P_PKP -
OPERATION BIT 1 -
CONT OP OPER_F_07
AR CLOSE BREAKER -
OPERATION BIT 2 -
CONT OP OPER_F_08
VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP -
SETPOINT > RELAY CONFIGURATION > LEDS

LED SOURCE SOURCE LOGIC LOGIC LED NAME
LED01 VO_000_PROTECTION ALARM - PROT ALARM
LED02 VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP - TRIP
LED03 VO_019_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_TRIP - 50/51P TRIP
LED04 VO_069_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_TRIP - 50/51G TRIP

I.2 FACTORY DEFAULT CONFIGURATION APPENDIX I:
SETPOINT > RELAY CONFIGURATION > LEDS

LED SOURCE SOURCE LOGIC LOGIC LED NAME
VO_074_59P_TRIP
LED05 - - 27/59 TRIP
VO_073_27P_TRIP
LED06 VO_085_GENERAL_PKP - PICKUP
LED07 VO_007_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_PKP - 50/51P PICKUP
LED08 VO_009_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_PKP - 50/51G PICKUP
LED09 VO_045_27P_PKP - 27 PICKUP
LED10 VO_046_59P_PKP - 59 PICKUP
LED11 AR READY - 79 READY
LED12 AR RCL IN PROGRESS - 79 IN-PROG
LED13 AR BLOCK - 79 BLOCK
LED14 AR CONDS INPUT NOT 79 INHIBIT
LED15 AR LOCKOUT - 79 LOCKOUT
SETPOINT > RELAY CONFIGURATION > PROTECTION ELEMENTS
PROTECTION ELeMENT SOURCE SIGNAL LOGIC SOURCE LOGIC
LED RESET INPUT OPERATION BIT 3
CHANGE LOCAL-REMOTE Not Configured
CHANGE OP BLOCKED Not Configured
HMI BACKLIGHT ON Not Configured
HMI BACKLIGHT OFF Not Configured
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC2 (50P BLOCK)(CC2)
PH IOC1 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR1 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH IOC1 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR1 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH IOC1 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR1 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH IOC2 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR2 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH IOC2 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH IOC2 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1


GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 1
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH IOC1 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR1 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH IOC1 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR1 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH IOC1 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR1 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH IOC2 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR2 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH IOC2 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH IOC2 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH IOC3 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 2
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP NOT
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL IOC2 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR2 OP NOT


GROUP 3 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL IOC3 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR3 OP NOT
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
CONT IP_F_CC5 (50G BLOCK)(CC5)
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK
GROUND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 3
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
GROUND IOC2 BLOCK
GROUND DIR2 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 3
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
GROUND IOC3 BLOCK
GROUND DIR3 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 3
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
SENS GND IOC1 BLK SENS GND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 4
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 4
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 4
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR1 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR1 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR1 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH TOC2 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR2 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH TOC2 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5


GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 HIGH A BLK
PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 HIGH B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 HIGH C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 5
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR1 OP NOT
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL TOC2 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR2 OP NOT
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL TOC3 BLOCK
NEUTRAL DIR3 OP NOT
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK
GROUND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 7
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
GROUND TOC2 BLOCK
GROUND DIR2 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 7
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
GROUND TOC3 BLOCK
GROUND DIR3 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 7
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK SENS GND DIR1 OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 8
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 8
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 8
PHASE UV1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
THERMAL1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED


GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PHASE DIR1 BLK INP CONT IP_F_CC4 (67P BLOCK)(CC4)
LATCHED VIRT IP 9
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 9
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 9
NEUTRAL DIR1 BLK INP GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUND DIR1 BLK INP
LATCHED VIRT IP 10
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
GROUND DIR2 BLK INP
LATCHED VIRT IP 10
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
GROUND DIR3 BLK INP
LATCHED VIRT IP 10
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH BLK
LATCHED VIRT IP 12
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 12
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
LATCHED VIRT IP 12
NEUTRAL OV1 LOW BLK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
AUXILIARY UV1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PHASE OV1 BLOCK
LATCHED VIRT IP 11
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PHASE OV2 BLOCK
LATCHED VIRT IP 11
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PHASE OV3 BLOCK
LATCHED VIRT IP 11
AUXILIARY OV1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
OVERFREQ1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
UNDERFREQ1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED


SETT GROUPS BLOCK Not Configured
BROKEN CONDUCT1 BLK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
ISOLATED GND1 BLK
SENS GND DIR1 OP NOT
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
ISOLATED GND2 BLK
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
ISOLATED GND3 BLK
SENS GND DIR1 BLK IP GROUP 1 BLOCKED
FWD PWR1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR1 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR1 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 1 BLOCKED
PH TOC1 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR1 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH TOC2 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR2 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH TOC2 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 2 BLOCKED
PH TOC2 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 LOW A BLK
PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 LOW B BLK
PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6


GROUP 3 BLOCKED
PH TOC3 LOW C BLK
PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 6
DIR PWR1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
FREQ RATE1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
LOAD ENCR1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
32N1 HIGH BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
32N1 LOW BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED
THERMAL1 A RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL1 B RST OPERATION BIT 4
THERMAL1 C RST OPERATION BIT 4
Synchrocheck BLK INP Not Configured
CONT IP_F_CC8 (79 BLOCK)(CC8)
AR LEVEL BLOCK
LATCHED VIRT IP 14
AR PULSE BLOCK Not Configured
AR PULSE UNBLOCK Not Configured
VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
AR INITIATE CONT IP_F_CC7 (79 INITIATE)(CC7)
LATCHED VIRT IP 13
SYNCHK CLOSE PERM NOT
AR CONDS INPUT NOT
LATCHED VIRT IP 15
BKR FAIL INITIATE Not Configured
GROUP 1 ACT ON Not Configured
FAULT REPORT TRIGG VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS Not Configured
DEMAND TRIGGER INP Not Configured


DEMAND RESET INP OPERATION BIT 7
FREEZE ENERGY CNT Not Configured
UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT Not Configured
RESET ENERGY CNT OPERATION BIT 6
RESET KI2t COUNTERS OPERATION BIT 5
RESET BKR COUNTERS OPERATION BIT 5
SETPOINT > RELAY CONFIGURATION > OSCILLOGRAPHY

DIGITAL CHANNEL NAME SOURCE SIGNAL LOGIC SOURCE LOGIC
DIG_CHANNEL#1 TRIP VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
DIG_CHANNEL#2 50/51P TRIP VO_019_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
DIG_CHANNEL#3 50/51G TRIP VO_069_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_TRIP
DIG_CHANNEL#4 27 TRIP VO_073_27P_TRIP
DIG_CHANNEL#5 59 TRIP VO_074_59P_TRIP
DIG_CHANNEL#6 PICKUP VO_085_GENERAL_PKP
DIG_CHANNEL#7 50/51P PICKUP VO_007_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_PKP
DIG_CHANNEL#8 50/51G PICKUP VO_009_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_PKP
DIG_CHANNEL#9 27 PICKUP VO_045_27P_PKP
DIG_CHANNEL#10 59 PICKUP VO_046_59P_PKP
DIG_CHANNEL#11 79 READY AR READY
DIG_CHANNEL#12 79 IN-PROG AR RCL IN PROGRESS
DIG_CHANNEL#13 79 BLOCK AR BLOCK
DIG_CHANNEL#14 79 INHIBIT AR CONDS INPUT NOT
DIG_CHANNEL#15 79 LOCKOUT AR LOCKOUT
DIG_CHANNEL#16 Not Configured
OPERATION BIT 8
OSCILLO TRIGGER OSCILLO TRIGGER
VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP
SETPOINT > RELAY CONFIGURATION > OPERATIONS

OPERATION OPERATION TEXT SETTINGS VALUE/SOURCE
INTERLOCK(LOGIC) SYNCHK CLOSE PERM
FINAL STATES AND LOGIC BREAKER CLOSED
FRONT KEY I Key
Operation1 CLOSE BREAKER INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 1000
CHANNELS ALL
INTERLOCK(LOGIC) Not configured
FINAL STATES AND(LOGIC) BREAKER OPEN
FRONT KEY O Key
Operation2 OPEN BREAKER INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 1000
CHANNELS ALL


FINAL STATES AND(LOGIC) Not configured
FRONT KEY Not configured
Operation3 LEDS RESET INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
Operation4 THERMAL RESET INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
Operation5 BRK COUNTERS RESET INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
Operation6 ENERGY RESET INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
Operation7 DEMAND RESET INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
Operation8 TRIGGER OSCILLO INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT 500
CHANNELS ALL
Operation9 Not configured INPUT Not configured
TIMEOUT Not configured
CHANNELS Not configured


..... ...... INPUT Not configured
Operation24 Not configured INPUT Not configured
SETPOINT > RELAY CONFIGURATION > EVENTS

event NAME SOURCE SIGNAL LOGIC SOURCE LOGIC
EV1 Not Configured
EV2 Not Configured
... ...
EV128 Not Configured
SETPOINT > RELAY CONFIGURATION > SWITCHGEAR

SWITCHGEAR SETTING VALUE/SOURCE SIGNAL LOGIC SOURCE LOGIC
CONTACTS 52b
OPENING TIME 1000
CLOSING TIME 1000
CONTACT A SOURCE N/A
CONTACT B SOURCE CONT IP_F_CC1 (52b)(CC1)
OPEN TEXT 52 OPEN
ALARM NO
SWITCHGEAR 1 CLOSED TEXT 52 CLOSE
ALARM NO
ERROR 00 TEXT 52 ERROR
ALARM N/A
ERROR 11 TEXT 52 UNDEFINED
ALARM N/A
OPENING INIT OPERATION BIT 2
CLOSING INIT OPERATION BIT 1

SETPOINT > RELAY CONFIGURATION > SWITCHGEAR

SWITCHGEAR SETTING VALUE/SOURCE SIGNAL LOGIC SOURCE LOGIC
CONTACTS Not Configured
OPENING TIME Not Configured
CLOSING TIME Not Configured
CONTACT A SOURCE Not Configured
CONTACT B SOURCE Not Configured
OPEN TEXT Not Configured
ALARM Not Configured
SWITCHGEAR 2 CLOSED TEXT Not Configured
ERROR 00 TEXT Not Configured
OPENING INIT Not Configured
CLOSING INIT Not Configured
... ... ... ... ...
CONTACTS Not Configured
OPENING TIME Not Configured
CLOSING TIME Not Configured
CONTACT A SOURCE Not Configured
CONTACT B SOURCE Not Configured
OPEN TEXT Not Configured
SWITCHGEAR 16 CLOSED TEXT Not Configured
OPENING INIT Not Configured
CLOSING INIT Not Configured

GE
Grid Solutions
Appendix J: Miscellaneous
MISCELLANEOUS
J.1 Warranty
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE warrants most of its GE manufactured products for 10 years. For warranty
details including any limitations and disclaimers, see our Terms and Conditions at:
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.
J.2 Revision History
MANUAL P/N RELEASE DATE

GEK-106310-AF June 2017
GEK-106310-AG November 2017
GEK-106310-AH April 2018
GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER J-1

J.2 REVISION HISTORY APPENDIX J: MISCELLANEOUS
J.2.1 Major Updates

Table J-1: Major Updates for F650 AH
SECTION (AH) CHANGES
general Minor corrections throughout
Cover Updated to revision AH, Firmware 8.1, Software 8.1
2 Updated order code notes
Added section: 4.1.4.1 File Management menu for firmware
below v7.70.
4 Added section: 4.1.4.2 File Management menu for firmware
v7.70 and above.
Updated 4.1.6 File Management menu.
Updated mentions of datalogger and oscillography record
5 retrieval for fw 7.70.
Updated PLC Main menu descriptions.
Chapter 7 updated, and new content added.
Existing section 7.2 moved to 7.3.
7
Updated 7.6.3.1.2 Quick Menu Toolbar.
Updated 7.6.3.1.3 IEC 61850 IED Explorer Window.
9 Updated cables used for firmware upgrade
App H Updated Appendix H
J-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

Gek 106310ah

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gek 106310ah

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gek 106310ah

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE

F650 Digital Bay Controller

F650 Feeder Protection System, EnerVista, and EnerVista 650 family

Part number: GEK-106310-AH (March 2018)

F650 Digital Bay Controller

1 GETTING STARTED 1.1 Important procedures ..................................................................................... 1-1

GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-1

2 PRODUCT 2.1 F650 Overview................................................................................................... 2-1

3 HARDWARE 3.1 Module description........................................................................................... 3-1

4 INTERFACES, 4.1 EnerVista 650 Setup software ........................................................................ 4-1

1-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

4.1.6 File menu..................................................................................................................................4-15

GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-3

4.2.7.4 New events screen ........................................................................................................................4-72

5 SETPOINTS 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 5-1

1-4 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

5.4.1.2 Firmware 7.50 or above.............................................................................................................. 5-44

GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-5

5.5.2.5 Algorithm .........................................................................................................................................5-109

1-6 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

5.10 Logic configuration (PLC editor) ................................................................5-176

6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1 Front panel ........................................................................................................ 6-1

GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-7

6.2.11 System info............................................................................................................................. 6-21

7 IEC 61850 7.1 IEC 61850 Overview.......................................................................................... 7-1

1-8 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

7.3 IEC 61850 profile for F650 ............................................................................... 7-7

GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-9

8 SECURITY 8.1 Adding users...................................................................................................... 8-1

10 COMMISSIONING 10.1 Visual inspection.............................................................................................10-1

1-10 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

10.15.1 59P element.........................................................................................................................10-18

11 APPLICATION 11.1 Example 1: Communication & protection settings................................... 11-1

12 FREQUENTLY ASKED 12.1 Communications ............................................................................................ 12-1

13 F650 13.1 Symptoms and recommended actions....................................................... 13-1

A LOGIC OPERANDS A.1 Operands - F650 - model FX - GX ..................................................................A-1

B MODBUS PROTOCOL B.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... B-1

GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-11

B.4.1 Data management .............................................................................................................. B-7

C DNP 3.0 PROTOCOL C.1 DNP 3.0 protocol settings ..............................................................................C-1

D IEC 60870-5-104 D.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... D-1

E PROCOME E.1 PROCOME protocol .......................................................................................... E-1

F IEC 60870-5-103 F.1 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol................................................................................ F-1

1-12 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

G REDUNDANCY G.1 PRP and HSR Ethernet protocols ...................................................................G-1

I FACTORY DEFAULT I.1 Factory default settings ................................................................................. I-1

J MISCELLANEOUS J.1 Warranty............................................................................................................ J-1

GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-13

1-14 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

F650 Digital Bay Controller

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1.1 Important procedures

1.1.1 Cautions and warnings

GEK-106310-AH F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER 1-1

1.1.1.1 General cautions and warnings

Figure 1-1: Front view of F650 unit

1-2 F650 DIGITAL BAY CONTROLLER GEK-106310-AH

1.1.1.2 Communication board withdrawal/insertion

MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION SHALL ONLY BE PERFORMED BY DULY QUALIFIED